327B & 330B Articulated Trucks
Service Manual Print No. 84187913 First Edition English 09/09 From serial no. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
SERVICE MANUAL ARTICULATED TRUCKS
327B-330B
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright • •2009. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
INTRODUCTION
II
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in speci cations at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
First Printing
9-2009
Applicable Machines 327B, 330B
Print Namber
Remarks
84187913
ASN ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
INTRODUCTION
III
Figure 1
276R0M01T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
IV
INTRODUCTION
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
INTRODUCTION
V
SECTIONS
TITLE
SECTION
INTRODUCTION
PAGES from I to VIII
CONDITIONS OF USE AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1
from 1 to 32
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
2A
from 1 to 42
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
2B
from 1 to 42
FAILURE CODES
3
from 1 to 62
ENGINE
4
from 1 to 152
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
5
from 1 to 118
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
6.1
from 1 to 34
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
6.1
from 1 to 32
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES
6.2
from 1 to 68
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
6.2
from 1 to 70
REAR AXLE
6.3
from 1 to 50
DRIVELINE
7
from 1 to 18
SUSPENSIONS
8
from 1 to 36
WHEELS AND TIRES
9
from 1 to 12
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
10
from 1 to 128
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11
from 1 to 172
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
12
from 1 to 64
GREASING SYSTEM
13
from 1 to 18
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
14
from 1 to 28
CAB
15
from 1 to 24
CHASSIS
16
from 1 to 24
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
VI
INTRODUCTION
327B-330B
PARTS Figure 2
276CRM001
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Engine Suspension cylinder Front axle Transmission Articulation joint Intermediate axle Dumper cylinder Rear axle Body Cab
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
INTRODUCTION
Main vehicle assemblies production numbers You are advised to make a note of the model and serial number (PN) and/or production code (PIN) of the main vehicle assemblies written on the respective plates applied to the assembly.
VII
The plate location is shown in Section 2---TECHNICAL DATA. This will ensure faster identification of the parts required for partial or total replacement.
Engine Automatic transmission Front hubs Intermediate axle Rear axle Chassis Cab Suspension cylinder Tipper cylinder Steering cylinders Hydraulic system pump Brake cooling system pumps (wet brakes version) Radiator fan system pump Radiator fan system motor Tipper valve Steering valve
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
VIII
INTRODUCTION
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 1 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
GENERAL
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 1
GENERAL
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 1
CONDITIONS OF USE 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
CONDITIONS OF USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety information and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
INFORMATION ON THIS HANDBOOK . . . . . . . . . . 6
General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PREVENTING FIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ROLLOVER ACCIDENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Purpose of this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
What to do if the vehicle rolls over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
To whom this manual is addressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Structure of the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Safekeeping of this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Updates to this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Units of measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Starting and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SCHEDULED USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
VEHICLE OPERATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Working the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
WASTE DISPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SCRAPPING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 WARRANTY AND LIABILITY OF THE MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Replacing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Warranty conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Power supply disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Preventing injuries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
After sales service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Preventing intoxication and contamination . . . . . . . 31
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Preventing burns and electrocution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
CONDITIONS OF USE
SECTION 1
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
CONDITIONS OF USE 3
CONDITIONS OF USE
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
CONDITIONS OF USE
SECTION 1
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
CONDITIONS OF USE 5
INTRODUCTION This technical handbook contains a series of repair procedures relating to the articulated dump trucks ADT 327B-330B. This handbook is an integral part of the vehicle. It is provided with the vehicle and must be kept with the vehicle for future reference until scrapping. Read this handbook carefully before using the vehicle. Safe running and long life of your vehicle will depend on the observance of the rules suggested in this issue. Copyright The copyrights of this handbook belong to the vehicle manufacturer. The text, drawings and illustrations contained in this handbook cannot be circulated or given to third parties, totally or partially, without the written consent of the vehicle manufacturer.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
CONDITIONS OF USE
SECTION 1
327B-330B
INFORMATION ON THIS HANDBOOK Definitions Handbook is this SERVICE MANUAL. Vehicle is the machinery described in this manual. Manufacturer is the company manufacturing the vehicle. Dealership is the company or organisation officially representing the Manufacturer. Supplier is any company supplying components and/ or consumable material used by the vehicle. User is the person directly or indirectly involved in repairing the vehicle.
Symbols You will find the following symbols highlighting parts of the handbook. Their meaning is: Procedures, technical information and precautions which, if not respected and/or incorrectly carried out, could cause injury to users (safety symbol, also see section SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS). Procedures, technical information and precautions which, if not respected and/or incorrectly carried out, could damage the vehicle.
Contents This manual contains the repair instructions for all the vehicle parts. Some devices described in this handbook may not be fitted in your vehicle, according to the outfit and the market for which the vehicle was made. This handbook is organised in several sections, which are organised in chapters and, where required, paragraphs to ensure rapid and easy retrieval of information. Refer to the general list of contents at the beginning of this Handbook for further information on how the various topics are set out.
Procedures, technical information and precautions which, if not respected and/or incorrectly carried out, could pollute the environment.
.
Very important procedures, technical information and precautions.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
CONDITIONS OF USE 7
Purpose of this handbook Purpose of this handbook is to allow users to get to know the vehicle and repair it as specified, in a safe and long---lasting fashion, taking the required actions and arranging human and material resources as needed. To whom this manual is addressed This manual is addressed to those persons who need to and/or have been delegated to carry out repairs on the vehicle and/or whose job it is to give instructions on how to carry out such repairs. These persons are: D operative units/site/department managers; D users directly concerned in vehicle maintenance. Safekeeping of this handbook This handbook must be kept inside the vehicle, in a dry place, and must be readily available for consultation. You are advised to file a copy. Keep the handbook for the entire life of the vehicle, until it is scrapped. Users are required to purchase a new copy if the handbook is either lost or damaged. Copies must be exclusively ordered from the manufacturer. Updates to this handbook The information, descriptions and illustrations in this handbook reflect the state of the art at the time of marketing of the vehicle. The manufacturer reserves the right to implement changes to vehicles, for technical or marketing reasons, at any time. The manufacturer will not be obliged either to implement such changes in the vehicles marketed before or to consider this handbook obsolete. Any additional information which the manufacturer may deem suitable to provide at a later time will be kept with the handbook as an integral part of the publication. Units of measure International System (SI) units of measure as used in this handbook. Imperial System values are expressed in brackets.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
CONDITIONS OF USE
SECTION 1
327B-330B
SCHEDULED USE
VEHICLE OPERATORS
The vehicle described in this handbook was designed and made for the following use: D to haul excavation material in general; D to haul material resulting from interventions on industrial or civilian artefacts in general; D to haul material required to make infrastructures and/or industrial or civilian artefacts in general. The vehicle must be used for such purposes. The vehicle must be in proven and checked conditions of efficiency for said use, fully respecting the envisaged criteria and restrictions of use. Specific care must be paid to the following aspects: D do not exceed the payloads specified by the manufacturer; D do not exceed the gradients specified by the manufacturer; D do not drive the vehicle on loose terrain which can compromise stability; D do not use the vehicle to remove objects or products; D use the vehicle paying special attention to the safety instructions and specifications; D carry out the ordinary maintenance requirements specified by the manufacturer; D carry out the extraordinary maintenance requirements which are required, specifically those related to safety of use.
The vehicle can be driven exclusively by qualified personnel with the necessary skills and suitable technical knowledge. Vehicle drivers must: D have the skills required to drive the vehicle in all environmental and weather conditions; D be psychologically and physically fit; D be very responsible and respect the safety instructions. Vehicle maintenance personnel must: D have the operative skills required for construction site vehicle maintenance; D be sensitised to respect and adopt safety instructions and precautions. Vehicle operators must be in condition to work in total safety, also by means of suitable training periods or courses, to acquire full knowledge of instructions for vehicle use. The direct reporting manager must ensure respect of general safety instructions, specifically those contained in this handbook. The manager will also ascertain suitability of operating personnel, in terms of technical skills and psychological---physical conditions.
.
The manufacturer declines liability for injury to persons and for damage to the vehicle and/or to the transported goods in the event of other use or use in other conditions than those specified.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
WASTE DISPOSAL
SECTION 1
Collect and properly dispose of replaced material (brake pads, filters, etc.) and waste material, resulting from maintenance operations and repairs (material soaked in fuel, oil, powder, etc.) according to the laws in force, separately from normal waste. Collect and dispose of used lubricants and fluids, according to the laws in force. Collect and dispose of used batteries according to the laws in force. Drain and recharge the air conditioning system using the specific devices, according to the laws in force. Furthermore, you are advised to separate ferrous materials, light alloys and waste plastic materials for separate recycling.
CONDITIONS OF USE 9
SCRAPPING THE VEHICLE The vehicle must be scrapped according to the laws in force, at the end of the vehicle’s working life. Recycle and demolish the vehicle according to the laws in force. The vehicle must be demolished by expert personnel using suitable working tools to ensure the required safety conditions. Demolish the vehicle by separating and collecting the various materials by type to allow recycling and disposal. Please note that it is forbidden to abandon an obsolete vehicle at a quarry, building site, dump or in the environment. Specific attention must be devoted to certain components and substances which can pollute the environment and/or cause injuries, i.e.: D presence of fuels, coolant fluids, hydraulic oil and lubricating oils on board; D presence of batteries and respective electrolyte; D presence of pressurized gas (tires, suspension components, air conditioner); D presence of solid polluting materials (tires, brake pads, plastic parts, filters) or hazardous materials (glass, windows). Dispose of these materials according to the laws in force.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
CONDITIONS OF USE
SECTION 1
WARRANTY AND LIABILITY OF THE MANUFACTURER Warranty conditions The user must carefully observe the precautions illustrated in this handbook to ensure validity of the contractual warranty. Specifically, the user will: D respect restrictions of use specified by the manufacturer; D not implement changes or variants to the vehicle without the manufacturer’s written approval; D always carry out the maintenance interventions; D always use genuine spare parts; D ascertain that the personnel called to use the vehicle have the necessary requirements in terms of skills and training. The contractual warranty will not be applicable if the aforesaid conditions are not respected, even in part. Liability The manufacturer declines all direct or indirect liabilities deriving from: D disrespect of the instructions contained in this handbook; D use of the vehicle by untrained or unauthorized personnel; D use non complying with the regulations in force in the country where the vehicle was marketed; D unauthorized changes and/or repairs; D use of other than genuine spare parts.
327B-330B
SERVICE After sales service Dealerships are available for all types of interventions. Equipment and expert personnel are available for overhauling and repairing operations. Dealerships can provide information and advice to ensure the best use of the vehicle. Spare parts Use genuine spare parts for replacements which can be ordered from dealers. Please remember that the following information will be required to order spare parts: D vehicle type; D chassis number; D reference and catalogue numbers shown in the Spare Parts Catalogue. If the part belongs to a main assembly (engine, transmission, axles, motors, etc.), you will also need to specify the assembly model and serial number.
The engine and fuel system on your machine is designed and built to government emissions standards. Tampering by dealers, customers, operators and users is strictly prohibited by law. Failure to comply could result in government fines, rework charges, invalid warranty, legal action and possible confiscation of the machine until rework to original condition is completed. Engine service and/or repairs must be done by a certified technician only!
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 11
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 13
INTRODUCTION The instructions and warnings given in this handbook illustrate the fundamental safety principles for operating articulated dump trucks. Figure 1
156NS01
These instructions are not comprehensive. They do not illustrate all the potential hazards which may arise. Operators must be aware of all the procedures described in this handbook. The procedures advise against adopting work methods which could cause injuries and/or affect integrity of the vehicle. The procedures are not comprehensive. The Manufacturer cannot account for all the possible methods of use and operation, nor evaluate all the possible consequences. Consequently, operators must be responsible and careful at all times, to prevent hazardous situations for themselves and others. Use of the vehicle is subjected to respecting the specifications contained in this manual and safety regulations set forth by the law in the country where the vehicle is used. Knowledge of local legislation is mandatory for all vehicle users. Read this manual carefully. Contact an expert or call the Manufacturer if in doubt. Safety information and symbols Figure 1 shows a safety symbol which is used to attract the operator’s attention to safety relevant matters. Pay the utmost care when you see this symbol on the vehicle or in this handbook. Always follow the recommended safety instructions. Always read the safety related adhesive labels. Replace the labels if they are damaged. Safety plates and labels on the vehicle are illustrated in Section 2 --- TECHNICAL DATA.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
General instructions Arrange a first aid kit in the vehicle. Check and replenish regularly (Figure 2).
327B-330B
Figure 3
Figure 2
156NS03
156NS02
Arrange a plate providing emergency telephone numbers. Keep it up---to---date. Vehicle personnel should be aware of basic first aid procedures to be applied in the event of an accident or casualty. Keep children away from the vehicle, the equipment and the materials used. Keep unauthorised persons away from the vehicle, the equipment and the materials used. The vehicle can only be driven by qualified personnel, who is authorised to do so by the legislation in force. Drivers must be in suitable psychological and physical (tiredness, effect of alcohol, drugs, etc.). Furthermore, drivers must be familiar with the position and operation of all controls, instruments, gauges and warning lights in the vehicle. The driver must also be able to evaluate, in principle, failures which may occur and adopt the required precautions. Do not allow unqualified or unsuitable personnel to use the vehicle. Maintenance and repair operations must be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the arrangement and operation of assemblies and workshop tools. Do not allow unqualified personnel to carry out maintenance or repair operations on the vehicle. Do not wear rings, wristwatches or loose and hanging clothes when carrying out maintenance and repair operations on the vehicle. Do not use radio or personal stereo headphones during operations to avoid distractions. Personnel will use the vehicle safety features (seat belts) and personal protection devices during vehicle use and maintenance (Figure 3).
Standard safety equipment includes: D helmet D goggles or face mask D protective earphones D thick gloves D suitable clothes D safety boots.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
PREVENTING FIRES Keep a suitably sized fire extinguisher in the vehicle. Check it regularly (Figure 4). Figure 4
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 15
Stop the engine before refuelling. Do not refuel in closed places. Check for leakage or residues of fuel, lubricants and fluids which could cause minor fires before starting the engine. Short circuits can cause fires (Figure 7). Figure 7
174NS09
The portable fire extinguisher can only be used by skilled personnel. Vehicle personnel must be familiar with the basic techniques for dealing with fire. Fuel and most lubricants and fluids are flammable (Figure 5). Figure 5
156NS07
Regularly check conditions of battery terminals, wires and electrical devices. Do not store flammable substances in places which are not suitable for the purpose. Do not pierce or burn pressurised container or cylinders. Do not pile up materials soaked in flammable substances. Be careful where you leave rags and/or replaced materials which may contain flammable residues.
156NS05
Do not smoke while refuelling or topping up fluids. Do not refuel or top up near naked flames. Do not handle fuel (Figure 6). Figure 6
156NS06
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
Put out all smouldering materials and naked flames before starting any maintenance operation. Do not smoke during maintenance operations (Figure 8). Figure 8
327B-330B
Stay away from the vehicle if a small fire occurs in the brake or tyre areas. The tyres could explode. Never stand in front of the sidewall. Keep a safety distance of at least 15 metres (16,5 yd) from the thread (Figure 10). Figure 10
156NS08
Do not use petrol, solvents or other flammable or toxic fluids to clean mechanical parts. Use non---flammable, non---toxic, type---approved products on the market. Do not weld near tanks, pipes, reservoirs, electric wires or flammable materials in general. Protect flammable parts with suitable guards when welding. Stay away from the vehicle and call a fire---fighting expert team in the event of a large---scale fire (Figure 9). Figure 9
156NS10
Stay away from the vehicle for a few hours after putting out the fire to allow the tyres to cool down. Approach the vehicle protected by a crawler loader bucket, for example.
156NS09
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
ROLLOVER ACCIDENTS Prevention Always check height and width during the various loading/unloading operations. Make sure they fall within the specified limits (Figure 11).
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 17
What to do if the vehicle rolls over Make that users are aware of how to get out in an emergency and know where the hammer for smashing the windows is located. The vehicle can be exited as follows (Figure 13): Figure 13
Figure 11
156NS19
Keep the wheels perpendicular to the slope when driving up or down a gradient. Do not make a U ---turn on a gradient to prevent rolling over. Respect the transverse gradient permitted for the loaded and empty vehicle. Respect the maximum possible gradient for the loaded and empty vehicle (Figure 12).
269NS073
D through the door (after opening it) D through the front right window (after smashing it). Use the specific tool (Figure 14) positioned under the right window to smash it in an emergency. Figure 14
Figure 12
174NS08
156NS20
Make sure you always have a hammer in the cab to smash the windows if an accident occurs.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
327B-330B
Structure of the cab Figure 15
276NS002T
The vehicle is equipped with a driver’s cab (Figure 15) that satisfies the ROPS (RollOver Protective Structure) and FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure) specifications. These features have been designed to minimize the consequences of vehicle overturning or the fall of heavy objects onto the cab. The cab---chassis attachment points and the accessories inside also satisfy the ROPS---FOPS characteristics. The cab is thus a specific safety component of the vehicle, as demonstrated by the certifications obtained by the Manufacturer. Any alteration of the characteristics of the cab caused by damage, fire, corrosion or modification can reduce the degree of protection it ensures. In this case, the structural part of the cab and any accessories must be replaced in order to restore the original safety conditions. After any accident, fire, overturning or crushing it is ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY to that the following operations are performed by a qualified technician: D replace the structural parts of the cab; D inspect the couplings, seat, seat belt and all the components that concern driver’s safety; D replace all the components possibly damaged or no longer satisfying the original characteristics.
.
For more information on the operations to be performed in case of damage to the cab, contact an authorized dealer. Do not make modifications of any type (welding, drilling, straightening or emergency repairs) to the structure of the cab and accessory parts. Any intervention may change the structural characteristics of the cab and cause death or serious injury to the driver in case of accident, fire, overturning or crushing of the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Cab Use the steps and handles to get on and off (Figure 16). Figure 16
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 19
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied, before setting off, check position of the seat, the steering wheel and the rearview mirrors to ensure maximum driving comfort and control accessibility (Figure 17). Figure 17
156NS12
Make these adjustments each time the driver is changed. Drivers should be able to fully press the pedals and operate the controls correctly without lifting their backs from the backrest. Do not adjust the seat, the steering wheel or the rearview mirrors while driving or in any other way than specified. Always wear seat belts (Figure 18). Figure 18 276NS006T
Keep the steps and handles clean to avoid slipping. Do not use flexible parts or controls as handles. They could break or get damaged. Face the vehicle while you are getting on and off. Have three points of contact (steps and handles) at any time. Do not jump on or off the vehicle. Do not get on or off while the vehicle is moving. Keep the floor clear from fragments, tools or other objects which could interfere with the pedals. Keep the pedals clean (mud or grease). Eliminate anything which can reduce visibility or distract the driver. Keep windows and rearview mirrors clean.
156NS13
The webbing must not be twisted. The belt should wrap around your hips, not your abdomen, to prevent the risk of slipping forwards. Replace the seat belt being worn in an accident of a certain severity even if it does not appear damaged. Do not make changes which can decrease functionality of the seat belt.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
Starting and stopping Before starting off, check the vehicle exterior for problems, such as flat tyres, fluid leakage, broken parts. Make sure no---one is near the vehicle when starting the engine. Sound the horn before starting the engine (Figure 19).
327B-330B
Do not smoke or use naked flames near the batteries (Figure 20). Figure 20
Figure 19
156NS15
In the event of contact with electrolyte, wash the affected part for at least 15 minutes and call a doctor. Do not run the engine in closed places without a suitable ventilation system for disposing of harmful exhaust in the air (Figure 21). Figure 21
156NS14
Start the engine while you are sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not start the engine by short ---circuiting the starter motor wires. Two people are required to start the engine with a battery charger or auxiliary battery: one person will sit in the driver’s seat and the other person will stand near the battery charger or auxiliary battery. Do not carry out this operation if the flat battery is frozen. It could explode. Respect cable connection procedure and polarity to prevent the risk of the batteries exploding or projecting electrolyte. Always wear gloves and protective glasses when approaching the batteries.
156NS16
Never leave the vehicle with the engine running. Do not park with the parking brake applied and the gear engaged, also if you are sitting in the driver’s seat. Before leaving the vehicle parked in a suitable area where it is not a hindrance, make sure that the parking brake is applied and that the keys have been removed from the control panel. Always apply the parking brake in the following cases: D when the vehicle is parked for a long or short time; D when loading/unloading the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
Driving the vehicle Make all the necessary adjustments (seat, steering wheel, rearview mirrors) before setting off. Check that the engine warning lights are OK. Sound the horn before starting off (Figure 22). Figure 22
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 21
Never travel with the transmission in neutral. Do not use the parking brake for slowing down or stopping the vehicle. Working the vehicle Do not use the vehicle for purposes other than those described by the Manufacturer. Always check height and width during the various loading/unloading operations. Make sure they fall within the specified limits (Figure 24). Figure 24
156NS17A
Check that no---one is standing near the vehicle before starting off. Be very careful when steering: the front part of the vehicle can move also when the vehicle is stationary. This can be very dangerous for persons standing near the vehicle (Figure 23). Figure 23
156NS19
Beware of overhead obstacles, such as bridges, cables and wires. Make sure that the load does not knock into them. Keep the wheels perpendicular to the slope when driving up or down a gradient. Do not make a U ---turn on a gradient to prevent rolling over. Respect the transverse gradient permitted for the loaded and unladen vehicle. Respect the maximum possible gradient for the loaded and unladen vehicle (Figure 25). Figure 25
156NS18
Check the ground surrounding the vehicle before reversing to make sure there are no people or obstacles. Do not transport people in the cab or in other parts of the vehicle, with exception of the emergency seat. Respect signs, especially speed limits. Never exceed the speed limit. Never drive at speeds which are forbidden and dangerous for yourself or others. Switch the lights on at night and when visibility is poor (dust, fog, rain). Slow down.
156NS20
Look out for people when reversing and changing direction.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
Ideally, a person should be asked to signal when reversing. This person will be able to observe the approach from a more favourable position with respect to the driver. Do not move the vehicle to loading position while the bucket of loader or excavator is moving overhead. Stay inside the cab while loading the vehicle. Make sure that the maximum capacity of the vehicle is not exceeded during loading operations (Figure 26).
327B-330B
No---one should ever stand in the loading and unloading area of the vehicle (Figure 27). Figure 27
Figure 26
156NS22
156NS21
Make sure that the load is well arranged and will not fall out of the body during transportation. Check the area before unloading. Look out for hazardous points: loose terrain, ditches, humps and fencing. Beware of icy ground: it may become weak and slippery when the temperature rises. Avoid loading and unloading on steep slopes: the vehicle could roll over. Be very careful of unbalancing the vehicle by the movement of material out of the body during unloading operations. Check that the body is in the correct position before starting off after unloading.
When unloading by means of the external control, the operator must never leave the control, which is located in a safe position, and must wear all the required personal protection devices. Never start off during loading or unloading operations. Do not get on or off the vehicle during loading and unloading operations. When crossing another vehicle, the unladen vehicle should give way to the loaded vehicle and the vehicle driving downhill should give way to the vehicle running uphill. If other vehicles and/or other machines are used in the working area, appoint a person in charge of signalling and use signals which can be understood by all drivers (Figure 28). Figure 28
156NS23
In this case, all personnel will follow the instructions provided.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
Towing the vehicle Use the specific hitches provided for this purpose to tow the vehicle. Do not use cables, belts or chains to have the vehicle towed or to tow another vehicle: they could break. Do not use cables, belts or chains to have the vehicle towed or to tow another vehicle if the braking system of the vehicle being towed does not work. Always use a stiff, suitably dimensioned bar (Figure 29). Figure 29
156NS24
A user must always be aboard the vehicle being towed. Do not stand near vehicles being towed. The parking brake will not work if the output propeller shaft is removed from the rear gearbox and/or the transfer cases and/or the drive axles. In this case, arrange suitable wedges under the wheels in both directions of travel to prevent uncontrolled vehicle movements.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 23
Replacing a wheel The wheel replacement operation requires the utmost care. The operation must be carried out by at least two people, using a hoist or a crane to handle the wheel. Stop the empty vehicle on a flat area, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key from the panel. Make sure that the ground is adequately firm for the load to be supported. If in doubt, use plates and platforms to prevent sinking. ALWAYS lock the safety joint before lifting the vehicle. Only use the lifting points on the machine. Make sure that the lifting device is suitable to carry out the operations and respect safety requirements. Keep away from tires and/or brakes that show signs of overheating. Wait for the temperature of the components to cool. Deflate the tire completely, if it is not already flat. Do not use wheels or fasteners other that those originally provided. Excessive tightening may damage the wheel studs/ nuts. Do not use tubes or extensions other than those provided to tighten the wheel nuts. Check that the wheel nuts are tight after two or three hours of vehicle operation. Check wheel nut tightness regularly.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
327B-330B
MAINTENANCE General Personnel in charge of repairs must be aware of all the procedures described in this handbook. The procedures advise against adopting work methods which could cause injuries and/or affect integrity of the vehicle. The procedures are not comprehensive. The Manufacturer cannot account for and evaluate all the possible methods of operation or the possible consequences. Keep the place of work clean and dry. Do not smoke during the operations. Wear all the required personal protection devices before starting maintenance operations. Carry out the scheduled maintenance operations. Carry out all the operations which are required for correct and safe use of the vehicle. Before starting maintenance operations take the following precautions: D stop the vehicle on a flat surface; D engage the parking brake; D shut off the engine; D remove the ignition switch key; D place a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the steering wheels. Do not allow unqualified personnel to carry out maintenance or repair operations on the vehicle. Carry out maintenance and repair operations with the utmost care. Only use the specific tools or wrenches expressly specified for replacement, checking and maintenance operations. Never tamper with valves, regulators or other devices, unless specified in the handbook, to prevent damage to vehicle components and consequent hazards for persons.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
Power supply disconnection Battery disconnect switch Every time the user must operate directly or indirectly on parts of the electrical system, it is necessary to be absolutely certain to cut off the power supply using the battery disconnection switch. Proceed as follows: D go to the left side of the engine hood (Figure 30, see arrow)
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 25
D to connect the power supply to the equipment press the button (Figure 32, ref. 1): the upper part of the switch lights up (green ideogram); D to disconnect the power supply to the equipment press the button (Figure 32, ref. 2): the lower part of the switch lights up (red ideogram). Figure 32
Figure 30
269NS0F6
To disconnect the power supply the user must: D switch off the engine; D wait about 10 seconds.
.
After the engine is shut off the system control units must carry out a series of procedures that require the electric power supply to be kept on for a few seconds. Consequently, it is not possible to disconnect the power supply using the switch for about 10 seconds after the engine has been turned off.
.
The system automatically disconnects the electric power supply under the following conditions: D engine off; D no actuation on the controls of the cab for at least fifteen minutes.
276NS003T
D climb into the cab (Figure 31, see arrow); Figure 31
269NS0F2
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
Disconnection of the emergency electric power supply The vehicle is equipped with a push button, located on the instrument dashboard, for the disconnection of the emergency electric power supply. To disconnect the electric power supply for the equipment, press the button (Figure 33, see arrow).
327B-330B
D press the button (Figure 35, ref. 2): the bottom part of the switch illuminates (red ideogram); Figure 35
Figure 33
269NS0F6
D turn the button clockwise (see arrow); Figure 36 276ENS001
A warning screen will appear on the display. Figure 34
276ENS002
D press the button (Figure 36, ref. 1): the top part of the switch illuminates (see ideogram). 292ANS001L
If the vehicle is running at the time the button is pressed, the operation shuts off the engine and engages the emergency steering pump. This maneuver DOES NOT ENTAIL any functional inconvenience for the engine control system. To restore the electric power supply, proceed as follows: D if the engine was running when the power supply was shut off, move the ignition switch to position 0 (STOP);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 27
Emergency switch The emergency switch disconnects electrical power to all utilities, none excluded. This can cause considerable functional problems to the engine control system. For this reason, the switch must only be tripped when absolutely necessary.
.
After 5 (five) consecutive switch---offs of the engine using the emergency switch, the engine restarts but remains in idle and does not respond to the accelerator. IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO RESTORE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE ENGINE DEVICE CONTROL USING THE DIAGNOSIS EQUIPMENT. IN THIS CASE IT MUST BE REPLACED.
Proceed as follows: Figure 37
269NS102
D lift the protective cover and operate the switch below (Figure 37, see arrow).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
Safety locks Always lock the joint in secured position unless otherwise specified. Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Always lock the tipped body when operating in the rear chassis area. Proceed as follows: Figure 39
Figure 38
276NS004T 269NS111
D align the vehicle (front and rear chassis); D remove the pin (Figure 38, ref. 1); D swing the tie---rod forward to make the holes in the tie---rod and chassis coincide (Figure 38, ref. 2); D insert the pin through the holes and fasten it with the retaining pin (Figure 38, ref. 3).
D remove the pin (Figure 39, ref. 1); D tip the body completely; D twist the tie---rod to make the holes in the tie---rod and chassis coincide (Figure 39, ref. 2); D insert the pin through the holes and fasten it with the split pin (Figure 39, ref. 3).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
Preventing injuries
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 29
Figure 41
Figure 40
276NS006T
Use the steps and grips for getting on and off the left --hand side of operators platform (Figure 40, see arrow).
276NS005T
Use the steps and hand grips for getting on and off the right ---hand side platform (Figure 41, see arrow). Keep the steps and grips clean to avoid slipping. Do not use flexible parts or controls as grips. They could break or get damaged. Face the vehicle while you are getting on and off. Keep three points of contact (steps and grips) at all times. Do not jump on or off the vehicle. Do not get on or off while the vehicle is moving.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
All checking, bleeding, topping---up, maintenance and replacement operations must be carried out with the vehicle stationary, on level ground, in a well lit and ventilated area. Apply the parking brake, arrange wedges under the wheels and remove the keys from the ignition switch, unless otherwise specified in the handbook (Figure 42).
327B-330B
Figure 44
Figure 42
156NS31
156NS29
Make sure that no---one is sitting in the driver’s seat. Use portable lamps when the lighting is not adequate and to illuminate working areas which cannot easily be accessed otherwise. Use a ladder or platform with steps compliant with safety regulations to carry out repairs and maintenance operations in areas which cannot be reached from the ground. Keep hands and clothes away from moving parts when carrying out operations with the engine running. Never put your head or other parts of your body (feet, hands) near turning belts or fans, when the engine is running (Figure 43).
Warn people who are near the vehicle before starting the engine (e.g. for a test). Wait for at least four hours after stopping the vehicle before conducting maintenance operations to avoid contacts with hot parts. Be very careful of the cooling fan which could start up suddenly. Do not work over or under the vehicle propped up on jacks or other lifting devices which are not suitable to ensure safety (Figure 45). Figure 45
Figure 43 156NS32
156NS30
Do not put your head or other parts of your body (feet, hands) near shafts or turning parts when the engine is running (Figure 44).
Unload the vehicle before jacking it up. Only use the lifting points shown. Make sure that the lifting device is suitable to carry out the operations and respect safety requirements. After jacking up the vehicle, prop it up before carrying out operations underneath. Fully deflate the tyre before carrying out any type of operation on tyres or rims. Never stand in front of the sidewall while you are inflating a tyre. Never weld rims with tyres fitted to prevent explosions and fire. Only use the expressly specified tools for inflating the tyres with nitrogen.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 1
Preventing intoxication and contamination Do not run the engine in closed places without a suitable ventilation system for disposing of harmful exhaust in the air (Figure 46).
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 31
Be very careful: drained oil and fluids, as well as filters and surrounding parts, could be very hot (Figure 48). Figure 48
Figure 46
156NS35 156NS33
Avoid prolonged, repeated contacts of fuel, lubricant and fluids with skin to prevent skin problems and other syndromes (Figure 47). Figure 47
156NS34
Do not swallow fuel, lubricant or fluids. In the event of accidental contact with eyes, wash the concerned part thoroughly with water.
Ensure adequate ventilation to prevent the accumulation of toxic vapours while cleaning and replacing filters. Do not weld in closed areas or areas which are not suitably ventilated. Do not weld on or near painted surfaces to prevent developing toxic vapours. Remove the paint with suitable products, wash the surfaces and leave to dry. Do not breathe dust and toxic residues while grinding and sand---blasting. Protect your eyes with masks and goggles. Use a suitable vacuum cleaner to remove dusty residues from the vehicle or place of work. Do not play with compressed air. Keep compressed air guns away from people. Wear protective goggles with side guards and a mask when using compressed air to clean filters, to prevent injury caused by particles of dust. You are advised to carry out the cleaning operations in a ventilated area. Be very careful before removing caps or covers from reservoirs, radiators or cylinders: turn the part slowly to discharge any residual pressure. Stand at a side during bleeding operations and always wear protective goggles. Loosen the bleeder slowly by a few turns to let out condense and fluid. Discharge pressure from the circuits before carrying out operations. Never use your hands to feel for leakage of pressurised fluid. Pressurised fluid leakage can penetrate under the skin and in the eyes, causes very severe injuries. Never use naked flames to feel for leakage of air conditioning system. It could generate phosgene, a very dangerous gas.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 1
Preventing burns and electrocution Be very careful of all parts of the vehicle which could present high operating temperatures: engine, radiators, heat exchangers, exhaust pipe, gearbox, axles, brake discs, hubs (Figure 49). Figure 49
327B-330B
In the event of contact with electrolyte, wash the affected part for at least 15 minutes and call a doctor. Do not charge a frozen battery. It could explode. Respect cable connection procedure and polarity to prevent the risk of the batteries exploding or projecting electrolyte. Do not smoke or use naked flames near the batteries (Figure 51). Figure 51
156NS15
156NS36
Do not loosen the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Let the coolant cool down before removing the cap. In any case, remove the cap very carefully. Loosen the cap slowly to release the pressure and remove it. Do not place sources of heat near pressurised fluid tubes to prevent sudden failures. Protect tubes and electrical wires with suitable guards for welding. Batteries contain sulphuric acid: always wear gloves and protective glasses when approaching the batteries (Figure 50).
Ensure adequate ventilation to prevent the accumulation of explosive gas while recharging the battery. Do not charge batteries near the workshop air compressor intake. Arrange the air compressor away from the area where paint, fuel and batteries are stored to prevent taking in vapours. Do not open the camera box or the monitor. Live parts inside. All operations must be carried out by skilled, suitably equipped personnel.
Figure 50
156NS37
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 2A ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B
TECHNICAL DATA
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
VEHICLE COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DIMENSIONS (Empty Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DIMENSIONS WITH BODY RAISED . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Front drive axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Intermediate and rear drive axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CENTER OF GRAVITY (Horizontal Position) . . . . 7
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PERFORMANCE ALIGNMENT CHART . . . . . . . . 10
Pneumatic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using the alignment chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Performance alignment chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MAIN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . 12 Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Drive cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PIN plate of the manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
LIST OF BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
POSITION OF IDENTIFICATION DATA ON MAIN GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
TIRE PRESSURE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATION IN ENGINE COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATION IN WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Drive axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE DENSITY TABLE . . . . 21
Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Intermediate and rear axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Dumper cylinder (two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TIGHTENING TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 PLATES APPLIED TO THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . 23
Steering cylinder (two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
EUROPEAN VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Suspension cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
INSIDE ENGINE HOOD PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Hydraulic system pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSIDE CAB PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Brake cooling system pump (wet brake version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
USA VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dumping valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSIDE ENGINE HOOD PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Steering valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSIDE CAB PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
MAIN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . 16
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . 41
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
MEASURES (International System) . . . . . . . . . . . 42
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
VEHICLE COMPOSITION GROUPS
DESCRIPTION
ENGINE IVECO F3A (Cursor 10)
GEARSHIFT ZF 6 WG 260
FRONT AXLE KESSLER D81
INTERMEDIATE AXLE KESSLER D81
REAR AXLE KESSLER D81
TRANSMISSION LAYOUT
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
3
4
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
DIMENSIONS (empty vehicle) [mm (ft)] mm
ft
A
Wheelbase
4362
14.31
B
Front track
2360
7.74
C
Rear track
2360
7.74
D
Front overhang
2824
9.29
E
Rear overhang
1295
4.26
F
Overall length
10181
33.40
G
Maximum width (excluding mirrors)
2961
9.74
H
Maximum height (*)
3700
12.14
I
Ground clearance (*)
473
1.55
J
Distance between tandem axles
1700
5.59
L
Body height (*)
2518
8.26
Internal steering circle
4300
14.11
External steering circle
8400
27.56
Dimensional tolerance: 3%
(*) empty vehicle
276DT001T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
5
DIMENSIONS WITH BODY RAISED M
Maximum height of body (*)
N
Maximum dumping angle --- Degrees
R
Ground clearance (*)
---
Loading capacity to the brim (SAE 1:1)
---
Full loading capacity (SAE 2:1)
Dimensional tolerance: 3%
mm
6425
ft
21.08
°
68
mm
965
ft
3.17
m3
10.6
yd3
13.86
m3
14.5
yd3
18.96
(*) empty vehicle
276DT002T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
WEIGHTS Empty vehicle
kg
US ton
lb
Total
22240
24.515
49031
Front axle
12155
13.398
26797
RW1
First tandem axle
5042.5
5.558
11117
RW2
Second tandem axle
5042.5
5.558
11117
kg
US ton
lb
Total
45440
50.089
100178
Front axle
15320
16.887
33775
RW1
First tandem axle
15060
16.601
33202
RW2
Second tandem axle
15060
16.601
33202
Capacity
23200
25.573
51147
FW
Loaded vehicle GVW FW
Q
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Dimensional tolerance: 3%
276DT003T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
7
CENTER OF GRAVITY (horizontal position) Empty vehicle
mm
ft
S
Front distance
2363
7.75
T
Rear distance
2849
9.35
mm
ft
Loaded vehicle S
Front distance
3455
11.34
T
Rear distance
1757
5.76
Dimensional tolerance: 3%
276DT004T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
PERFORMANCE Tire type
23.5 R 25
Total axle ratio
1:21.00
Gear
Transmission ratio
Total ratio
Speed (*) km/h (mph)
Gradient (**) (lock-- up) (%)
1st forward
1 : 5.350
112.35
5.4 (3.4)
37.3
2nd forward
1 : 3.446
72.366
8.4 (5.3)
22.6
3rd forward
1 : 2.206
46.326
13.2 (8.3)
13.7
4th forward
1 : 1.421
29.481
20.5 (12.9)
8.2
5th forward
1 : 0.969
20.349
30 (18.9)
5.1
6th forward
1 : 0.624
13.104
46.6 (29.3)
2.6
1st reverse
1 : 5.350
112.35
5.4 (3.4)
37.3
2nd reverse
1 : 2.206
46.326
13.2 (8.3)
13.7
3rd reverse
1 : 0.969
20.349
30 (18.9)
5.1
(*) speed that can be reached with engine running at 2100 (rpm) and tire rolling circle of 4.85 m (190.94 in). (**) full load. Maximum---torque speed in 1st gear: Maximum speed (calculated):
2.6 km/h (1.62 mp/h) 46.6 km/h (28.96 mp/h)
Maximum slope with full load in 1st gear (calculated, lock ---up phase): Maximum slope with full load in 1st gear (calculated, converter phase):
37.3% 60.0%
Empty transversal gradeability (D) Full load transversal gradeability (D) (D) minimum adherence ratio 0.6
XX% XX%
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
9
10
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
PERFORMANCE ALIGNMENT CHART The performance alignment chart can be used to check whether the load/slope conditions are compatible with the vehicle performance and if so, what this performance is.
.
The alignment chart was drawn according to the engine torque curve. It is therefore valid when the accelerator pedal is fully pressed.
The following data must be known to use the alignment diagram: 1. total ground vehicle weight (GVW) 2. slope of ground 3. rolling resistance 1. The total ground vehicle weight (GVW) is obtained by summing tare and planned load.
.
Refer to tables on previous pages for maximum admitted values.
2. The slope must be expressed as a percentage. Values expressed in degrees must be converted. 3. Rolling resistance can be evaluated according to ground conditions as shown in the following table. Conditions of terrain
Resistance for 1000 kg of GVW
%
kg
lb
Asphalt --- Cement
15
33
1.5
Compact dirt
20
44
2.0
Soft dirt
30
66
3.0
Mud on solid bottom
40
88
4.0
Compacted snow
25
55
2.5
Soft snow
45
49
4.5
Sand --- Gravel
100
220
10.0
Sum the slope percentage and the rolling resistance to obtain final grade. Using the alignment chart Starting from the GVW (point A), draw a vertical line to meet the total resistance line grade (point B). Draw a horizontal line starting from point B to cross one of the use curves: this shows one of the possible conditions of use (point C). Continue the horizontal line to cross the ordinate axis: this shows the total traction force (RIMPULL, point D). Draw a vertical line from point C to meet the abscissa: this shows the speed which can be reached (SPEED, point E).
.
The following figure shows an example valid for the following data: A GVW: 25 ton Slope 5% Terrain: mud on a solid bed B Total resistance 9% Results: C gear used: D tractive force: E speed:
4th lock---up 3.6 kN 21.5 km/h
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
11
Performance alignment chart (Fig. 1)
292ADT007L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
MAIN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The chassis type and number of the articulated truck id the vehicle identification data.
174DT03
The chassis number is punched on the right ---hand side of the vehicle (arrow). Chassis number
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
International manufacturer identification Type of vehicle, (AD = articulated dumper) Capacity: 27 = 27 tons Type of outfitting: T = Tipper N = Check ISO letter Year of manufacture Production plant Chassis progressive number.
PIN plate of the manufacturer The plate is located on the lower left ---hand side of the outer rear part of the cab.
292ACU003L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
13
POSITION OF IDENTIFICATION DATA ON MAIN GROUPS All the main vehicle groups are identified with a serial number to be found on the actual group, in the positions shown below.
Engine
The group identification number is always to be indicated when ordering spare parts. Cab
269NM0D3
The type of engine and the serial number are indicated on a plate on the engine. Automatic transmission
269DT0E4
The cab number is indicated on a plate in the cab on the right. Chassis
292ADT002L
The type of transmission and the serial number are indicated on a plate on the transmission. 174DT06
The chassis number is stamped on the right side of the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
Dumper cylinder (two)
Drive axles Front axle
269DT0E2
292ADT001L
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate on the cylinder casing.
Intermediate and rear axles Disk brake version
Steering cylinder (two)
174DT11 276DT006T
Wet brake version
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate on the cylinder casing. Suspension cylinders
276DT007T
The type of axle and the serial number are indicated on a plate on the axle housing.
276DT008T
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate on the cylinder casing.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
Hydraulic system pump
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
15
Dumping valve
292ADT003L
292ADT005L
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate located on the body of the pump.
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate located on the body of the valve.
Brake cooling system pump (wet brake version)
Steering valve
292ADT004L
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate located on the body of the pump.
292ADT006L
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate located on the body of the valve.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
MAIN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Engine Type: IVECO F3A (Cursor 10) Four---stoke diesel, supercharged with variable geometry exhaust gas turbo compressor. Electronically controlled injector---pump injection system with fuel pre---filter and filter and pump in tank. Forced lubrication with gear pump and double oil filter. Water cooled with centrifuge pump. Radiator fan hydraulic system with pump driven by engine. Compressed air system driven by engine. Discharge: EPA --- CARB --- OFF ROAD TIER 3. Main geometric specifications 6
Number of cylinders Bore Stroke Total displacement
mm
125
in
4,92
mm
140
in
5,51
cm3
10300
cu.in
628,3
Compression ratio Injection order
16.5 1---4---2---6---3---5
Maximum performance Maximum power Power ratio Maximum torque Torque ratio
kW
235
BHP
315
RPM
2100
Nm
1450
Ft lb
1070
RPM
1000
Automatic transmission Type: ZF 6WG260 Automatic transmission with 6 forwards gears and 3 reverse. Single stage hydrodynamic torque converter. Stall ratio: 1:2.08 Lock ---up clutch in all gears. Incorporated transfer case with central lockable splitter between the front axle and the intermediate and rear axles. Transmission ratios Gear
Ratio
1st
5.350
2nd
3.446
3rd
2.206
4th
1.421
5th
0.969
6th
0.624
1st R
5.350
2nd R
2.206
3rd R
0.969
R = Reverse For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
17
Front drive axle Type: KESSLER D81 Rigid axle with side pinion reduction on hubs; differential with limited sliding. Pivoting axle hinged to chassis, transversal stabilizer bar. Axle ratios Central bevel gear pair
3.50
Planetary reduction gear set
6.00
Total reduction
21.00
Intermediate and rear drive axles Type: KESSLER D81 Rigid type axle with side pinion reduction on hubs; limited slip differential. Fixed distribution of 50/50 between the intermediate axle and rear axle. Transmission ratios Central bevel gear pair
3.50
Planetary reduction gear set
6.00
Total reduction
21.00
Suspension Front: Two hydro---pneumatic cylinders (nitrogen---oil) for variable flexibility and damping. Rear: rigid double rocker arm, load splitter on intermediate and rear axles with reaction bar. Brakes Brakes with independent pneumo -- hydraulic circuits: pneumatic control supplied by air compressor and by pressure tanks, hydraulic activation through converter elements. Service brake: single caliper disk brakes on front axle and dual caliper disk brakes on middle axle. Parking brake: plate and spring operated, pneumatically released calliper acting on drive shaft between automatic transmission and intermediate axle. Deceleration brake (if present): Hydraulic turbine brake (retarder) incorporated in automatic transmission; has pneumatic drive with pedal control from driver’s seat. Wheels and tires Steel rims on six wheels. Type and dimensions Type
Rims
Tires
Std
19.50 --- 25”
23.5 R 25
Opt
22.00 --- 25”
650/65 R 25
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
Hydraulic system Independent reservoir. Oil---air heat exchanger. Steering---dumping circuit: suction and delivery filter. Pump mechanically operated by the automatic transmission. Steering Hydraulically controlled, two dual acting hydraulic cylinders acting on articulation joint between chasses. Emergency pump, operated by the automatic transmission. Dumper Two dual acting multistage hydraulic cylinders fitted on ball joints inside the chassis. Assisted return stroke. Brake Independent front and rear wheel braking system. Pneumatic system Two---cylinder compressor driven by the engine. Pressure regulation valve APU with incorporated de---humidifier filter. 30 litre service tank 30 litre tank for front brakes. 30 litre tank for rear brakes. Pneumatic---hydraulic converters to actuate service brakes. Electrical system Multiplex electrical system. Connection between body computer control units through CAN OPEN line. Connection between engine---automatic transmission control unit through CAN J1939 line. Nominal voltage: 24 V. Starter motor: 24 V 5.5 kW. Alternator: 28 V 90 A. Batteries: 2, connected in series: 12 V 170 Ah, 700 A. Chassis High---strength steel structure (ST 52.3) composed of box---like elements and plates welded together. Articulated, composed of two independent structures centrally connected by a double ball---bearing fifth wheel and ball---and---socket joint with double lip seal, which allow rotation and oscillation between the two parts. Drive cab Steel structure conforming to ROPS/FOPS specifications. Flexible support pads. Can be dumped by hydraulic system. Tippable engine hood. Electronically controlled climate control system. Body Structure with flat steel bottom with boxed parts strengthening subframes and flexible support pads. Walls and bottom in high abrasion resistance steel. Dumping via hydraulic cylinders. Body bottom heated by passage of exhaust gas.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
19
LIST OF BULBS Continuous
Power (W)
Type
Quantity
5
BA15s
2
55/70
H4
2
Tipping main beam
70
H1
2
Cab ceiling light
5
2
Cab map reading light
5
2
Front direction indicator
21
BA15s
2
Side direction indicator
21
BA15s
2
Working lights
5
BA15s
4
Marker
5
BA15s
2
Direction
21
BA15s
2
Brake lights
21
BA15s
2
Reversing light
21
BA15s
1
Front Marker Dipped beam/main beam
Rear
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
CAPACITIES PART TO BE FILLED
CAPACITY
SPECIFICATIONS
I (US Gal)
kg (Ib)
30.5 (8)
--- ---
--- ---
--- ---
SAE 15W40 ACEA E5---E7 MIL L 2104E lev. API CI4/ CH4
Protective anti---freeze mixture/water Fuel tank
50 (13.2)
--- ---
ASTM 0336
Diesel
320 (84.6)
--- ---
ASTM D ---975
35.5 (9.4)
--- ---
--- ---
--- ---
SAE 15W40 ACEA E5---E7 MIL L 2104E lev. API CI4/ CH4
Engine oil sump --- URANIA LD7 --- AKCELA NO.1 ENGINE OIL
First filling Replacement
Engine coolant radiator
Automatic transmission --- URANIA LD7 --- AKCELA NO.1 ENGINE OIL
First filling Replacement
Axles
-----
Front axle
35.0 (9.3)
Front hubs
3.0 (0.8) x 2
Intermediate axle TUTELA W140/M---DA AKCELA GEAR 135H EP Intermediate hubs
--- ---
35.0 (9.3)
SAE 85W140 MIL L 2105D API GL 5
3.0 (0.8) x 2
--- ---
Rear axle
33.0 (8.7)
--- ---
Rear hubs
3.0 (0.8) x 2
--- ---
1.55 (0.41) x 2
--- ---
SAE 10W ATF DEXRON Il---D
210.0 (55.5)
--- ---
ISO VG 46 DIN 51524/51525
6.0
--- ---
FMVSS116---DOT 4
2.0 x 2
--- ---
SAE 10W ATF DEXRON Il---D
--- ---
2.0 (4.4)
Q.B.
--- ---
--- ---
--- ---
1.2 (2.65)
--- ---
Q.B.
--- ---
CUNA NC 956---11
Suspension --- TUTELA GI/A --- AKCELA TRANS XHD Hydraulic circuit (disc brakes version) --- IDRAULICAR HVI 46 --- AKCELA HYDRAULIC Excavator Fluid
Hydraulic brake control circuit (vehicles with disk brakes) --- TUTELA DOT SPECIAL --- AKCELA DOT4 Hydraulic hood/cab tilting control circuit -----
TUTELA GI/A AKCELA TRANS XHD
Greasing --- TUTELA MR2 --- AKCELA PREMIUM GREASE AP2
N.L.G.I.2
Greasing device body heating --- MOLYCOTE Cu7439 --- LOCTITE 8152 Climate control system Refrigerant fluid R134a Windshield washer Protective anti---freeze mixture/water
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
21
TIRE PRESSURE TABLE Pressure Tires 23.50 R 25 MICHELIN TRIANGLE GOODYEAR YOKOHAMA TECHKING Tires 650/65 R 25 MICHELIN Tires 750/65 R 25 MICHELIN
.
Front (F)
Rear (R)
Bar
Psi
Bar
Psi
3.00 4.25 3.50 4.00 4.25
44.0 62.0 51.0 58.0 62.0
3.00 4.25 3.50 4.00 5.00
44.0 62.0 51.0 58.0 73.0
Pressure Front (F) Rear (R) Bar Psi Bar Psi 3.50 40.0 3.25 47.0 Pressure Front (F) Bar Psi 2.75 40.0
Rear (R) Bar Psi 2.75 40.0
If the vehicle has tires from suppliers not included in the preceding tables, refer to the tire supplier’s Technical Assistance Service.
ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATION IN ENGINE COOLANT Ambient temperature °C °F ---35/ ---30 ---31/ ---22 ---25/ ---20 ---13/ ---4 ---15/ ---8 5/18 ---5/0 23/32
Antifreeze
Water
50% 40% 30% 20%
50% 60% 70% 80%
ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATION IN WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID Ambient temperature °C ---35 ---20 ---10 0
°F ---31 ---4 14 32 summer
Antifreeze
Water
1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 6 10
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE DENSITY TABLE Ambient temperature °C 40 20 0 ---20
°F 104 68 32 ---4
Electrolyte density (100% of charge) g/dm3 1.265 1.285 1.300 1.365
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUE PART
Tightening torque Nm
Ft lb
140
103.26
20
14.75
Wheel fastening nuts
590
435.16
Steering column fastening bolt
45
33.19
Magnetic oil drain plug
120
88.51
Oil fill and level plug
260
191.77
Transfer case oil drain plug
120
88.51
Oil fill and level plug on transfer case
45
33.19
Oil drain plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Oil level plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Magnetic oil drain plug
120
88.51
Oil fill and level plug
160
118.01
Oil drain plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Oil level plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Magnetic oil drain plug
120
88.51
Oil fill and level plug
160
118.01
Oil drain plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Oil level plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Notes
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Oil drainage cap HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Tank drainage cap (both) STEERING AND WHEELS
FRONT AXLE
FRONT AXLE HUBS
MIDDLE AXLE
MIDDLE AXLE HUBS
REAR AXLE
REAR AXLE HUBS
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
23
PLATES APPLIED TO THE VEHICLE
The adhesives and plates applied on the vehicles may vary according to the market and local requirements of the country. These pages contain a brief description of the adhesives and plates on a 327B---330B models, indicating the position where they are located.
EUROPEAN VERSION 1
7
2
6
4
5
8
8
4
4
3 3
11
3
12
13
9
4
5 6
2
8
8
4
4
10
314ADT001L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
Cab access steps
327B-330B
Rear view of cab
314ADT023L
314ADT002L
Articulation joint
Front view of RH instrument panel
314ADT024L
292ADT008L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
Pos. 1 Outside noise plate (only for 327B version)
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
25
Pos. 3 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT011L
292ADT008L
Pos. 1 Outside noise plate (only for 330B version)
Pos. 4 Vehicle tie -- down plate
292ADT012L
292ADT037L
Pos. 2 Hot surface warning plate
Pos. 5 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT010L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
292ADT013L
26
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
Pos. 6 Keep clear of prop shaft plate
327B-330B
Pos. 9 Hydraulic oil filler plate
292ADT017L
292ADT014L
Pos. 7 Tipping engine hood plate
Pos. 10 Grease point centralized plate
292ADT015L
Pos. 8 Towing eye plate
292ADT018L
Pos. 11 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT016L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
292ADT019L
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
Pos. 12 Hood tilting pump plate
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
27
Pos. 15 Maintenance plate
314ADT005L
Position on hood tilt control push button bracket Pos. 13 Hood tilting pump plate
314ADT007L
Pos. 16 Lubrification plate
314ADT006L
Position on hood tilt pump Pos. 14 Safety warning plate
314ADT008L 292ADT020L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
Pos. 17 Test point plate
327B-330B
Pos. 19 Conformity marking plate
292ADT023L
Pos. 18 Chassis lock warning plate
314ADT022L
Pos. 20 ROPS/FOPS plate
292ADT024L
292ADT055L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
29
INSIDE ENGINE HOOD PLATE Danger of burns warning plate
Moving parts warning plate
292ADT025L
292ADT027L
Located on the side of the radiator and on the belt side protection
Located on the upper part of the expansion tank
Tilting cab plate
Battery throw off plate
293DT003L
Located on the cab tipping pump
292ADT028L
Located near the battery isolator switch button
Warning plate
292ADT026L
Located on the starting motor
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
INSIDE CAB PLATE Gear selector plate
Cargo body dumping control plate
292ADT029L
292ADT032L
Positioned on the rear right window near the dump lever
Located on the ZF selector
Tilting hazard warning plate
Warning plate
292ADT030L
292ADT033L
Located on the rear lower right --- hand window
Located to the left of the ashtray
Emergency exit
Voltage rating plate
292ADT031L
Located on the rear lower right --- hand window
292ADT034L
Located near the electrical socket on the right --- hand side under the module support panel
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
Parking brake plate
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
31
Engine brake plate
292ADT035L
Located near the parking brake control
293DT006L
Located on the instrument panel near the engine brake lever (optional)
Warning plate
Retarding Guideline plate (only for 327B version)
292ADT036L
Position on the left side next to the air conditioning / heating controls Engine brake plate
314ADT010L
Positioned on right rear window in correspondance with the body dump control plate Retarding Guideline plate (only for 330B version)
292DT004L
Located on the instrument panel near the engine brake lever
314ADT011L
Positioned on right rear window in correspondance with the body dump control plate
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
USA VERSION 1
6
5
4
3
7
7
3
3
2 2
10
2
11
12
8
3 4 5
1
7
7
3
3
9
314ADT014L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
Cab access steps
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
33
Rear view of cab
314ADT017L
314ADT015L
Articulation joint
Front view of RH instrument panel
314ADT018L
314ADT016L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
Pos. 1 Hot surface warning plate
327B-330B
Pos. 4 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT046L
292ADT039L
Pos. 2 Crushing hazard warning plate
Pos. 5 Keep clear of prop shaft plate
292ADT040L
Pos. 3 Vehicle tie -- down plate
292ADT044L
Pos. 6 Engine hood tilting plate
292ADT012L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
292ADT051L
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
Pos. 7 Towing eye plate
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
35
Pos. 10 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT016L
Pos. 8 Hydraulic oil filler plate
292ADT045L
Pos. 11 Engine hood tilting plate
292ADT051L
292ADT017L
Pos. 9 Grease point centralized plate
Pos. 12 Engine hood tilting plate
292ADT018L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
314ADT019L
36
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
Pos. 13 Safety warning plate
327B-330B
Pos. 15 Lubrification plate
292ADT042L
Pos. 14 Maintenance plate
314ADT020L
Pos. 16 Test point plate
292ADT023L
314ADT007L
Pos. 17 Chassis lock warning plate
292ADT047L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
Pos. 18 Conformity marking plate
314ADT021L
Pos. 19 ROPS/FOPS plate
292ADT055L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
37
38
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
INSIDE ENGINE HOOD PLATE Moving parts warning plate
Danger of burns warning plate
292ADT043L
292ADT041L
Located on the side of the radiator and on the belt side protection
Located on the upper part of the expansion tank
Tilting cab plate
Battery throw off plate
293ADT052L
Located on the cab tilting pump
292ADT048L
Located near the battery isolator switch button
Warning plate
292ADT050L
Located on the starting motor
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
39
INSIDE CAB PLATE Cargo body dumping control plate
Gear selector plate
292ADT029L
292ADT032L
Positioned on the rear right window near the dump lever
Located on the ZF selector
Tilting hazard warning plate
Warning plate
292ADT038L
292ADT049L
Located on the rear lower right --- hand window
Located to the left of the ashtray
Emergency exit
Voltage rating plate
292ADT031L
Located on the rear lower right --- hand window
292ADT034L
Located near the electrical socket on the right --- hand side under the module support panel
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
Parking brake plate
327B-330B
Engine brake plate
292ADT035L
Located near the parking brake control
293DT006L
Located on the instrument panel near the engine brake lever (optional)
Warning plate
Retarding Guideline plate (only for 327B version)
292ADT036L
Position on the left side next to the air conditioning / heating controls Engine brake plate
314ADT010L
Positioned on right rear window in correspondance with the body dump control plate Retarding Guideline plate (only for 330B version)
292DT004L
Located on the instrument panel near the engine brake lever
314ADT011L
Positioned on right rear window in correspondance with the body dump control plate
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
41
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES Screws and nuts with metric thread Maximum tightening torque for metric threads in lb ft Diameter x Pitch dxp (mm)
SCREW - CLASS 8.8
SCREW - CLASS 10.9
SCREW - CLASS 12.9
UNCOATED
DACROMET GALVANISED
CADMIUM PLATED
PHOSPHATE COATED
UNCOATED
DACROMET GALVANISED
CADMIUM PLATED
PHOSPHATE COATED
UNCOATED
DACROMET GALVANISED
CADMIUM PLATED
PHOSPHATE COATED
3 x 0.5
0.88
0.88
0.81
0.66
1.25
1.18
1.10
0.96
1.55
1.40
1.33
1.11
4 x 0.7
2.06
1.92
1.77
1.47
2.88
2.73
2.51
2.14
3.47
3.24
3.02
2.58
5 x 0.8
4.13
3.83
3.54
2.95
5.83
5.46
4.94
4.20
6.93
6.49
5.90
5.01
6x1
7.37
6.64
5.90
5.16
9.59
9.59
8.85
7.37
11.80
11.06
10.32
8.85
8 x 1.25
16.96
16.22
14.75
12.54
24.34
22.86
20.65
16.96
28.76
27.29
24.34
20.65
8x1
18.44
17.70
15.49
13.27
25.81
24.34
22.12
18.44
31.71
29.50
26.55
22.12
10 x 1.5
34.66
32.45
29.50
24.34
47.94
44.99
41.30
34.66
58.26
54.57
49.41
41.30
10 x 1.25
36.87
34.66
30.97
25.81
51.62
47.94
43.51
36.14
61.95
58.26
52.36
43.51
12 x 1.75
59.00
55.31
50.15
42.04
83.34
78.17
70.80
59.00
100.30
93.66
84.81
70.80
12 x 1.25
66.37
61.95
55.31
45.72
92.92
87.02
78.17
64.16
111.36
103.99
93.66
76.70
14 x 2
94.4
88.50
80.39
67.11
132.75
124.64
112.84
94.40
159.30
148.97
135.70
112.84
14 x 1.5
103.99
96.61
87.76
71.54
146.02
136.44
123.16
100.30
175.52
163.72
147.50
120.95
16 x 2
146.02
136.44
123.90
102.51
205.76
192.49
174.05
143.81
247.06
230.84
208.71
172.57
16 x 1.5
158.56
147.50
132.75
107.67
222.72
207.97
186.59
151.92
267.71
249.27
224.20
182.16
18 x 2.5
200.60
187.32
170.36
141.60
281.72
264.02
238.95
199.12
337.77
316.39
286.89
238.95
18 x 1.5
231.57
215.35
193.22
155.61
325.24
303.11
271.40
219.03
390.87
363.59
325.97
263.29
20 x 2.5
283.20
266.24
241.16
199.12
400.46
374.65
339.25
280.25
480.85
449.87
407.10
336.30
20 x 1.5
323.76
301.64
269.19
216.82
455.03
424.06
379.07
304.59
546.49
508.14
454.30
365.06
22 x 2.5
397.51
361.37
328.92
266.97
559.76
507.40
463.15
376.12
671.12
609.17
555.34
450.61
22 x 1.5
435.12
404.15
360.64
288.36
611.39
568.61
507.40
405.62
733.81
682.19
609.17
487.48
24 x 3
491.91
460.20
415.95
343.67
691.77
646.79
584.84
483.06
829.69
775.85
702.10
579.67
24 x 2
547.22
509.61
456.51
368.75
769.95
716.85
642.36
518.46
924.09
860.66
770.69
622.45
27 x 3
727.91
679.97
612.86
502.97
1023.65
955.80
862.14
707.26
1227.94
1146.81
1033.97
848.12
27 x 2
799.45
743.40
664.48
533.95
1123.95
1045.77
934.41
750.77
1348.89
1255.22
1121.74
901.22
30 x 3.5
986.04
921.14
831.16
684.40
1386.50
1295.05
1168.94
962.47
1663.80
1553.91
1402.72
1154.18
30 x 2
1118.05
1039.87
927.77
741.92
1572.35
1461.72
1304.64
1043.56
1887.26
1754.51
1564.97
1252.27
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
TECHNICAL DATA - 327B
SECTION 2A
327B-330B
MEASURES (INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM) Force in N (Newton) Conversion: 1N 1 kg
= =
0.1019 kg 9.81 N
Power in kW (kilowatt) Other units in use: CV (Horse) HP (Horse---Power) Conversion: 1 kW 1 kW 1 CV 1 CV 1 HP 1 HP
= = = = = =
1.36 CV 1.34 HP 0.736 kW 0.986 HP 0.746 kW 1.014 CV
Torque in Nm Conversion: 1 Nm 1 kgm 1 kgm
= = =
0.1019 kg 9.81 Nm 10 Nm *
Specific consumption in g/kWh (grams per kilowatthour) Other unit in use: g/CVh (grams per Horsehour) Conversion: 1 g/kWh 1 g/CVh
= =
0.736 g/CVh 1.36 g/kWh
Pressure in kPa (kilopascal) Other units in use: kg/cm2 (kilogram per square centimeter) Atm (Metric atmosphere) psi (Pound per square inch) Conversion: 1 kg/cm2 1 kg/cm2 1 kg/cm2 1 kg/cm2 1 kg/cm2 1 bar 1 bar 1 bar 1 psi 1 psi 1 psi 1 kPa 1 kPa 1 kPa
= = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 Atm 98.1 kPa 0.981 bar 1 bar * 14.22 psi 100 kPa 1.02 kg/cm2 14.51 psi 6.9 kPa 0.069 bar 0.0703 kg/cm2 0.145 psi 0.0102 kg/cm2 0.01 bar
Conversion values for British units 1 mm = 0.039 inch 1m = 3.281 ft. 1 km = 0.621 miles = 0.06 I cu. in. 1 cm3 1l = 1.759 pts (0.88 Imp. qts) 1 bar = 14.5038 psi 1g = 0.035 oz. (0.564 dr.) 1 kg = 2.205 Ibs. 1t = 1.102 short ton (0.9842 long ton) (° F − 32) °C = 1.8 ° F = (° C x 1.8) + 32 (*) Nm and bar are converted according to the ratios 10:1 and 1:1
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 2B ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 330B
TECHNICAL DATA
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 2A
TECHNICAL DATA
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
VEHICLE COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Front drive axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DIMENSIONS (Empty Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DIMENSIONS WITH BODY RAISED . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Intermediate and rear drive axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CENTER OF GRAVITY (Horizontal Position) . . . . 7
Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Brake cooling system (only wet brakes version) . . 18
PERFORMANCE ALIGNMENT CHART . . . . . . . . 10
Pneumatic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using the alignment chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Performance alignment chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MAIN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . 12 Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Drive cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PIN plate of the manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
LIST OF BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
POSITION OF IDENTIFICATION DATA ON MAIN GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
TIRE PRESSURE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATION IN ENGINE COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATION IN WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Drive axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE DENSITY TABLE . . . . 21
Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Intermediate and rear axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Dumper cylinder (two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TIGHTENING TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 PLATES APPLIED TO THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . 23
Steering cylinder (two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
EUROPEAN VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Suspension cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
INSIDE ENGINE HOOD PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Hydraulic system pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSIDE CAB PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Brake cooling system pump (wet brake version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
USA VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dumping valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSIDE ENGINE HOOD PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Steering valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSIDE CAB PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
MAIN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . 16
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . 41
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
MEASURES (International System) . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
VEHICLE COMPOSITION GROUPS
DESCRIPTION
ENGINE IVECO F3A (Cursor 10)
GEARSHIFT ZF 6 WG 260
FRONT AXLE KESSLER D81
INTERMEDIATE AXLE KESSLER D81
REAR AXLE KESSLER D81
TRANSMISSION LAYOUT
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
3
4
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
DIMENSIONS (empty vehicle) [mm (ft)] mm
ft
A
Wheelbase
4362
14.31
B
Front track
2360
7.74
C
Rear track
2360
7.74
D
Front overhang
2824
9.29
E
Rear overhang
1295
4.26
F
Overall length
10181
33.40
G
Maximum width (excluding mirrors)
2961
9.74
H
Maximum height (*)
3609
11.84
I
Ground clearance (*)
473
1.55
J
Distance between tandem axles
1700
5.59
L
Body height (*)
2468
8.09
Internal steering circle
4300
14.11
External steering circle
8400
27.56
Dimensional tolerance: 3%
(*) empty vehicle
276DT001T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
5
DIMENSIONS WITH BODY RAISED M
Maximum height of body (*)
N
Maximum dumping angle --- Degrees
R
Ground clearance (*)
---
Loading capacity to the brim (SAE 1:1)
---
Full loading capacity (SAE 2:1)
Dimensional tolerance: 3%
mm
6500
ft
21.38
°
68
mm
965
ft
3.17
m3
13.7
yd3
17.92
m3
17.6
yd3
23.02
(*) empty vehicle
276DT002T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
WEIGHTS Empty vehicle
kg
US ton
lb
Total
22570
24.879
49758
Front axle
12250
13.503
27007
RW1
First tandem axle
5160
5.688
11376
RW2
Second tandem axle
5160
5.688
11376
kg
US ton
lb
Total
50730
55.920
111841
Front axle
15900
17.527
35053
RW1
First tandem axle
17415
19.197
38394
RW2
Second tandem axle
17415
19.197
38394
Capacity
28160
31.041
62082
FW
Loaded vehicle GVW FW
Q
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Dimensional tolerance: 3%
276DT003T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
7
CENTER OF GRAVITY (horizontal position) Empty vehicle
mm
ft
S
Front distance
2383
7.82
T
Rear distance
2829
9.28
mm
ft
Loaded vehicle S
Front distance
3578
11.74
T
Rear distance
1634
5.36
Dimensional tolerance: 3%
276DT004T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
PERFORMANCE Tire type
23.5 R 25
Total axle ratio
1:21.00
Gear
Transmission ratio
Total ratio
Speed (*) km/h (mph)
Gradient (**) (lock-- up) (%)
1st forward
1 : 5.350
112.35
5.4 (3.4)
36.5
2nd forward
1 : 3.446
72.366
8.4 (5.3)
22.1
3rd forward
1 : 2.206
46.326
13.2 (8.3)
13.4
4th forward
1 : 1.421
29.481
20.5 (12.9)
8.1
5th forward
1 : 0.969
20.349
30 (18.9)
5.0
6th forward
1 : 0.624
13.104
46.6 (29.3)
2.5
1st reverse
1 : 5.350
112.35
5.4 (3.4)
36.5
2nd reverse
1 : 2.206
46.326
13.2 (8.3)
13.4
3rd reverse
1 : 0.969
20.349
30 (18.9)
5.0
(*) speed that can be reached with engine running at 2100 (rpm) and tire rolling circle of 4.85 m (190.94 in). (**) full load. Maximum torque in 1st gear: Maximum speed (calculated).
3.0 km/h (1.86 mp/h) 46.6 km/h (28.96 mp/h)
Maximum gradient in 1st gear (calculated, locked up): Maximum gradient in 1st gear (calculated, using converter):
36.5% 54%
Empty transversal gradeability (D) Full load transversal gradeability (D) (D) minimum adherence ratio 0.6
XX% XX%
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
9
10
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
PERFORMANCE ALIGNMENT CHART The performance alignment chart can be used to check whether the load/slope conditions are compatible with the vehicle performance and if so, what this performance is.
.
The alignment chart was drawn according to the engine torque curve. It is therefore valid when the accelerator pedal is fully pressed.
The following data must be known to use the alignment diagram: 1. total ground vehicle weight (GVW) 2. slope of ground 3. rolling resistance 1. The total ground vehicle weight (GVW) is obtained by summing tare and planned load.
.
Refer to tables on previous pages for maximum admitted values.
2. The slope must be expressed as a percentage. Values expressed in degrees must be converted. 3. Rolling resistance can be evaluated according to ground conditions as shown in the following table. Conditions of terrain
Resistance for 1000 kg of GVW
%
kg
lb
Asphalt --- Cement
15
33
1.5
Compact dirt
20
44
2.0
Soft dirt
30
66
3.0
Mud on solid bottom
40
88
4.0
Compacted snow
25
55
2.5
Soft snow
45
49
4.5
Sand --- Gravel
100
220
10.0
Sum the slope percentage and the rolling resistance to obtain final grade. Using the alignment chart Starting from the GVW (point A), draw a vertical line to meet the total resistance line grade (point B). Draw a horizontal line starting from point B to cross one of the use curves: this shows one of the possible conditions of use (point C). Continue the horizontal line to cross the ordinate axis: this shows the total traction force (RIMPULL, point D). Draw a vertical line from point C to meet the abscissa: this shows the speed which can be reached (SPEED, point E).
.
The following figure shows an example valid for the following data: A GVW: 30 ton Slope 5% Terrain: mud on a solid bed B Total resistance 9% Results: C gear used: D tractive force: E speed:
4th lock---up 3.6 kN 21.5 km/h
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
11
Performance alignment chart (Fig. 1)
292ADT008L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
MAIN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The chassis type and number of the articulated truck id the vehicle identification data.
174DT03
The chassis number is punched on the right ---hand side of the vehicle (arrow). Chassis number
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
International manufacturer identification Type of vehicle, (AD = articulated dumper) Capacity: 30 = 30 tons Type of outfitting: T = Tipper N = Check ISO letter Year of manufacture Production plant Chassis progressive number.
PIN plate of the manufacturer The plate is located on the lower left ---hand side of the outer rear part of the cab.
292ACU003L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
13
POSITION OF IDENTIFICATION DATA ON MAIN GROUPS All the main vehicle groups are identified with a serial number to be found on the actual group, in the positions shown below.
Engine
The group identification number is always to be indicated when ordering spare parts. Cab
269NM0D3
The type of engine and the serial number are indicated on a plate on the engine. Automatic transmission
269DT0E4
The cab number is indicated on a plate in the cab on the right. Chassis
292ADT002L
The type of transmission and the serial number are indicated on a plate on the transmission. 174DT06
The chassis number is stamped on the right side of the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
Dumper cylinder (two)
Drive axles Front axle
269DT0E2
292ADT001L
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate on the cylinder casing.
Intermediate and rear axles Disk brake version
Steering cylinder (two)
174DT11 276DT006T
Wet brake version
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate on the cylinder casing. Suspension cylinders
276DT008T 276DT007T
The type of axle and the serial number are indicated on a plate on the axle housing.
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate on the cylinder casing.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
Hydraulic system pump
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
15
Dumping valve
292ADT003L
292ADT005L
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate located on the body of the pump.
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate located on the body of the valve.
Brake cooling system pump (wet brake version)
Steering valve
292ADT006L
292ADT004L
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate located on the body of the pump.
The type and serial number are indicated on a plate located on the body of the valve.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
MAIN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Engine Type: IVECO F3A (Cursor 10) Four---stoke diesel, supercharged with variable geometry exhaust gas turbo compressor. Electronically controlled injector---pump injection system with fuel pre---filter and filter and pump in tank. Forced lubrication with gear pump and double oil filter. Water cooled with centrifuge pump. Radiator fan hydraulic system with pump driven by engine. Compressed air system driven by engine. Discharge: EPA --- CARB --- OFF ROAD TIER 3. Main geometric specifications 6
Number of cylinders Bore Stroke Total displacement
mm
125
in
4,92
mm
140
in
5,51
cm3
10300
cu.in
628,3
Compression ratio Injection order
16.5 1---4---2---6---3---5
Maximum performance kW
260
BHP
348
Power ratio
RPM
1900
Maximum torque
Nm
1650
Ft lb
1217
RPM
1140
Maximum power
Torque ratio
Automatic transmission Type: ZF 6WG260 Automatic transmission with 6 forwards gears and 3 reverse. Single stage hydrodynamic torque converter. Stall ratio: 1 :1.208 Lock ---up clutch in all gears. Incorporated transfer case with central lockable splitter between the front axle and the intermediate and rear axles. Transmission ratios Gear
Ratio
1st
5.350
2nd
3.446
3rd
2.206
4th
1.421
5th
0.969
6th
0.624
1st R
5.350
2nd R
2.206
3rd R
0.969
R = Reverse For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
17
Front drive axle Type: KESSLER D81 Rigid axle with side pinion reduction on hubs; differential with limited sliding. Pivoting axle hinged to chassis, transversal stabilizer bar. Axle ratios Central bevel gear pair
3.50
Planetary reduction gear set
6.00
Total reduction
21.00
Intermediate and rear drive axles Type: KESSLER D81 Rigid type axle with side pinion reduction on hubs; limited slip differential. Fixed distribution of 50/50 between the intermediate axle and rear axle. Transmission ratios Central bevel gear pair
3.50
Planetary reduction gear set
6.00
Total reduction
21.00
Suspension Front: Two hydro---pneumatic cylinders (nitrogen---oil) for variable flexibility and damping. Rear: rigid double rocker arm, load splitter on intermediate and rear axles with reaction bar. Brakes Brakes with independent pneumo -- hydraulic circuits: pneumatic control supplied by air compressor and by pressure accumulators, hydraulic activation through converter elements. Wet brakes version Service brakes: a multiple disk oil bath brake system, with pneumo---hydraulic control for each wheel on front and middle axles. Parking brake: plate and spring applied, pneumatically released calliper acting on drive shaft between automatic transmission and intermediate axle. Deceleration brake (if present): Hydraulic turbine brake (retarder) incorporated in automatic transmission; has pneumatic drive with pedal control from driver’s seat. Disk brakes version Service brake: a four piston dual caliper disk brake system with pneumo---hydraulic control for each wheel on front and middle axles. Parking brake: plate and spring operated, pneumatically released calliper acting on drive shaft between automatic transmission and intermediate axle. Deceleration brake (if present): Hydraulic turbine brake (retarder) incorporated in automatic transmission; has pneumatic drive with pedal control from driver’s seat. Wheels and tires Steel rims on six wheels. Type and dimensions Type
Rims
Tires
Std
19.50 --- 25”
23.5 R 25
Opt
22.00 --- 25”
650/65 R 25
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
Hydraulic system Independent reservoir. Oil---air heat exchanger. Steering---dumping circuit: suction and delivery filter. Pump mechanically operated by the automatic transmission. Steering Hydraulically controlled, two dual acting hydraulic cylinders acting on articulation joint between chasses. Emergency pump, operated by the automatic transmission. Dumper Two dual acting multistage hydraulic cylinders fitted on ball joints inside the chassis. Assisted return stroke. Brake Independent front and rear wheel braking system. Brake cooling system (only wet brakes version) Hydraulically operated pump with proportional temperature control. Pneumatic system Two---cylinder compressor driven by the engine. Pressure regulation valve APU with incorporated de---humidifier filter. 30 litre service tank 30 litre tank (single for disk brakes, double for wet brakes) for front brakes. 30 litre tank (single for disk brakes, double for wet brakes) for rear brakes. Pneumatic---hydraulic converters to actuate service brakes. Electrical system Multiplex electrical system. Connection between body computer control units through CAN OPEN line. Connection between engine---automatic transmission control unit through CAN J1939 line. Nominal voltage: 24 V. Starter motor: 24 V 5.5 kW. Alternator: 28 V 90 A. Batteries: 2, connected in series: 12 V 170 Ah, 700 A. Chassis High---strength steel structure (ST 52.3) composed of box---like elements and plates welded together. Articulated, composed of two independent structures centrally connected by a double ball---bearing fifth wheel and ball---and---socket joint with double lip seal, which allow rotation and oscillation between the two parts. Drive cab Steel structure conforming to ROPS/FOPS specifications. Flexible support pads. Can be dumped by hydraulic system. Tippable engine hood. Electronically controlled climate control system. Body Structure with flat steel bottom with boxed parts strengthening subframes and flexible support pads. Walls and bottom in high abrasion resistance steel (Hardox 400). Dumping via hydraulic cylinders. Body bottom heated by passage of exhaust gas.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
19
LIST OF BULBS Continuous
Power (W)
Type
Quantity
5
BA15s
2
55/70
H4
2
Tipping main beam
70
H1
2
Cab ceiling light
5
2
Cab map reading light
5
2
Front direction indicator
21
BA15s
2
Side direction indicator
21
BA15s
2
Working lights
5
BA15s
4
Marker
5
BA15s
2
Direction
21
BA15s
2
Brake lights
21
BA15s
2
Reversing light
21
BA15s
1
Front Marker Dipped beam/main beam
Rear
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
CAPACITIES PART TO BE FILLED
CAPACITY I (US Gal) kg (Ib)
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil sump --- URANIA LD7 --- AKCELA NO.1 ENGINE OIL
First filling Replacement
Engine coolant radiator Protective anti---freeze mixture/water Fuel tank Diesel Automatic transmission --- URANIA LD7 --- AKCELA NO.1 ENGINE OIL
First filling Replacement
30.5 (8)
--- ---
--- ---
--- ---
SAE 15W40 ACEA E5---E7 MIL L 2104E lev. API CI4/ CH4
50 (13.2)
--- ---
ASTM 0336
320 (84.6)
--- ---
ASTM D ---975
35.5 (9.4)
--- ---
--- ---
--- ---
SAE 15W40 ACEA E5---E7 MIL L 2104E lev. API CI4/ CH4
Axles Front axle Front hubs Intermediate axle --- TUTELA W140/M---DA --- AKCELA GEAR 135H EP Intermediate hubs Rear axle Rear hubs Suspension --- TUTELA GI/A --- AKCELA TRANS XHD Hydraulic circuit (disk brake version) --- IDRAULICAR HVI 46 --- AKCELA HYDRAULIC Excavator Fluid Hydraulic brake control circuit (disk brake version) --- TUTELA DOT SPECIAL --- AKCELA DOT4 Hydraulic circuit (wet brake version) -----
AMBRA MULTI G AKCELA NEXPLORE
Hydraulic brake control circuit (wet brake version) --- TUTELA DOT SPECIAL --- AKCELA DOT4 Hydraulic hood/cab tilting control circuit --- TUTELA GI/A --- AKCELA TRANS XHD Greasing --- TUTELA MR2 --- AKCELA PREMIUM GREASE AP2 Greasing device body heating --- MOLYCOTE Cu7439 --- LOCTITE 8152 Climate control system Refrigerant fluid R134a Windshield washer Protective anti---freeze mixture/water
35.0 (9.3) 3.0 (0.8) x 2 35.0 (9.3) 3.0 (0.8) x 2 33.0 (8.7) 3.0 (0.8) x 2
--- ----- ----- ----- ---
SAE 85W140 MIL L 2105D API GL 5
1.55 (0.41) x 2
--- ---
SAE 10W ATF DEXRON Il---D
210.0 (55.5)
--- ---
ISO VG 46 DIN 51524/51525
6.0
--- ---
FMVSS116---DOT 4
210.0 (55.5)
--- ---
SAE 10W30 ISO 32/46 NH 410B API GL4 level
6.0
--- ---
ISO 7308
2.0 x 2
--- ---
SAE 10W ATF DEXRON Il---D
--- ---
2.0 (4.4)
Q.B.
--- ---
--- ---
--- ---
1.2 (2.65)
--- ---
Q.B.
--- ---
CUNA NC 956---11
N.L.G.I. 2
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
21
TIRE PRESSURE TABLE Pressure Tires 23.50 R 25 MICHELIN TRIANGLE GOODYEAR YOKOHAMA TECHKING Tires 650/65 R 25 MICHELIN Tires 750/65 R 25 MICHELIN
.
Front (F)
Rear (R)
Bar
Psi
Bar
Psi
3.25 4.50 3.75 4.50 5.00
47.0 65.0 54.0 65.0 73.0
3.50 5.00 4.00 5.00 5.25
51.0 73.0 58.0 73.0 76.0
Pressure Front (F) Rear (R) Bar Psi Bar Psi 4.00 58.0 4.00 58.0 Pressure Front (F) Bar Psi 3.00 44.0
Rear (R) Bar Psi 3.25 47.0
If the vehicle has tires from suppliers not included in the preceding tables, refer to the tire supplier’s Technical Assistance Service.
ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATION IN ENGINE COOLANT Ambient temperature °C ---35/ ---30 ---25/ ---20 ---15/ ---8 ---5/0
°F ---31/ ---22 ---13/ ---4 5/18 23/32
Antifreeze
Water
50% 40% 30% 20%
50% 60% 70% 80%
ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATION IN WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID Ambient temperature °C ---35 ---20 ---10 0
°F ---31 ---4 14 32 summer
Antifreeze
Water
1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 6 10
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE DENSITY TABLE Ambient temperature °C 40 20 0 ---20
°F 104 68 32 ---4
Electrolyte density (100% of charge) g/dm3 1.265 1.285 1.300 1.365
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUE PART
Tightening torque Nm
Ft lb
140
103
20
15
Wheel fastening nuts
650
479
Steering column fastening bolt
45
33
Magnetic oil drain plug
120
88.51
Oil fill and level plug
260
191.77
Transfer case oil drain plug
120
88.51
Oil fill and level plug on transfer case
45
33.19
Oil drain plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Oil level plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Magnetic oil drain plug
120
88.51
Oil fill and level plug
160
118.01
Oil drain plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Oil level plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Magnetic oil drain plug
120
88.51
Oil fill and level plug
160
118.01
Oil drain plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Oil level plug on final reductions
120
88.51
Notes
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Oil drainage cap HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Tank drainage cap (both) STEERING AND WHEELS
FRONT AXLE
FRONT AXLE HUBS
MIDDLE AXLE
MIDDLE AXLE HUBS
REAR AXLE
REAR AXLE HUBS
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
23
PLATES APPLIED TO THE VEHICLE
The adhesives and plates applied on the vehicles may vary according to the market and local requirements of the country. These pages contain a brief description of the adhesives and plates on a 327B---330B models, indicating the position where they are located.
EUROPEAN VERSION 1
7
2
6
4
5
8
8
4
4
3 3
11
3
12
13
9
4
5 6
2
8
8
4
4
10
314ADT001L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
Cab access steps
ADT 327B-330B
Rear view of cab
314ADT023L
314ADT002L
Articulation joint
Front view of RH instrument panel
314ADT024L
292ADT008L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
Pos. 1 Outside noise plate (only for 327B version)
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
25
Pos. 3 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT011L
292ADT008L
Pos. 1 Outside noise plate (only for 330B version)
Pos. 4 Vehicle tie -- down plate
292ADT012L
292ADT037L
Pos. 2 Hot surface warning plate
Pos. 5 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT010L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
292ADT013L
26
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
Pos. 6 Keep clear of prop shaft plate
ADT 327B-330B
Pos. 9 Hydraulic oil filler plate
292ADT017L
292ADT014L
Pos. 7 Tipping engine hood plate
Pos. 10 Grease point centralized plate
292ADT015L
Pos. 8 Towing eye plate
292ADT018L
Pos. 11 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT016L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
292ADT019L
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
Pos. 12 Hood tilting pump plate
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
27
Pos. 15 Maintenance plate
314ADT005L
Position on hood tilt control push button bracket Pos. 13 Hood tilting pump plate
314ADT007L
Pos. 16 Lubrification plate
314ADT006L
Position on hood tilt pump Pos. 14 Safety warning plate
314ADT008L 292ADT020L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
Pos. 17 Test point plate
ADT 327B-330B
Pos. 19 Conformity marking plate
292ADT023L
Pos. 18 Chassis lock warning plate
314ADT022L
Pos. 20 ROPS/FOPS plate
292ADT024L
292ADT055L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
29
INSIDE ENGINE HOOD PLATE Danger of burns warning plate
Moving parts warning plate
292ADT025L
292ADT027L
Located on the side of the radiator and on the belt side protection
Located on the upper part of the expansion tank
Tilting cab plate
Battery throw off plate
293DT003L
Located on the cab tipping pump
292ADT028L
Located near the battery isolator switch button
Warning plate
292ADT026L
Located on the starting motor
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
INSIDE CAB PLATE Gear selector plate
Cargo body dumping control plate
292ADT029L
292ADT032L
Positioned on the rear right window near the dump lever
Located on the ZF selector
Tilting hazard warning plate
Warning plate
292ADT030L
292ADT033L
Located on the rear lower right --- hand window
Located to the left of the ashtray
Emergency exit
Voltage rating plate
292ADT031L
Located on the rear lower right --- hand window
292ADT034L
Located near the electrical socket on the right --- hand side under the module support panel
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
Parking brake plate
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
31
Engine brake plate
292ADT035L
Located near the parking brake control
293DT006L
Located on the instrument panel near the engine brake lever (optional)
Warning plate
Retarding Guideline plate (only for 327B version)
292ADT036L
Position on the left side next to the air conditioning / heating controls Engine brake plate
314ADT010L
Positioned on right rear window in correspondance with the body dump control plate Retarding Guideline plate (only for 330B version)
292DT004L
Located on the instrument panel near the engine brake lever
314ADT011L
Positioned on right rear window in correspondance with the body dump control plate
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
USA VERSION 1
6
5
4
3
7
7
3
3
2 2
10
2
11
12
8
3 4 5
1
7
7
3
3
9
314ADT014L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
Cab access steps
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
33
Rear view of cab
314ADT017L
314ADT015L
Articulation joint
Front view of RH instrument panel
314ADT018L
314ADT016L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
Pos. 1 Hot surface warning plate
ADT 327B-330B
Pos. 4 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT046L
292ADT039L
Pos. 2 Crushing hazard warning plate
Pos. 5 Keep clear of prop shaft plate
292ADT040L
Pos. 3 Vehicle tie -- down plate
292ADT044L
Pos. 6 Engine hood tilting plate
292ADT012L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
292ADT051L
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
Pos. 7 Towing eye plate
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
35
Pos. 10 Crushing hazard warning plate
292ADT016L
Pos. 8 Hydraulic oil filler plate
292ADT045L
Pos. 11 Engine hood tilting plate
292ADT051L
292ADT017L
Pos. 9 Grease point centralized plate
Pos. 12 Engine hood tilting plate
292ADT018L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
314ADT019L
36
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
Pos. 13 Safety warning plate
ADT 327B-330B
Pos. 15 Lubrification plate
292ADT042L
Pos. 14 Maintenance plate
314ADT020L
Pos. 16 Test point plate
292ADT023L
314ADT007L
Pos. 17 Chassis lock warning plate
292ADT047L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
Pos. 18 Conformity marking plate
314ADT021L
Pos. 19 ROPS/FOPS plate
292ADT055L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
37
38
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
INSIDE ENGINE HOOD PLATE Moving parts warning plate
Danger of burns warning plate
292ADT043L
292ADT041L
Located on the side of the radiator and on the belt side protection
Located on the upper part of the expansion tank
Tilting cab plate
Battery throw off plate
293ADT052L
Located on the cab tilting pump
292ADT048L
Located near the battery isolator switch button
Warning plate
292ADT050L
Located on the starting motor
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
39
INSIDE CAB PLATE Cargo body dumping control plate
Gear selector plate
292ADT029L
292ADT032L
Positioned on the rear right window near the dump lever
Located on the ZF selector
Tilting hazard warning plate
Warning plate
292ADT038L
292ADT049L
Located on the rear lower right --- hand window
Located to the left of the ashtray
Emergency exit
Voltage rating plate
292ADT031L
Located on the rear lower right --- hand window
292ADT034L
Located near the electrical socket on the right --- hand side under the module support panel
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
Parking brake plate
ADT 327B-330B
Engine brake plate
292ADT035L
Located near the parking brake control
293DT006L
Located on the instrument panel near the engine brake lever (optional)
Warning plate
Retarding Guideline plate (only for 327B version)
292ADT036L
Position on the left side next to the air conditioning / heating controls Engine brake plate
314ADT010L
Positioned on right rear window in correspondance with the body dump control plate Retarding Guideline plate (only for 330B version)
292DT004L
Located on the instrument panel near the engine brake lever
314ADT011L
Positioned on right rear window in correspondance with the body dump control plate
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ADT 327B-330B
SECTION 2B
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
41
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES Screws and nuts with metric thread Maximum tightening torque for metric threads in lb ft Diameter x Pitch dxp (mm)
SCREW - CLASS 8.8
SCREW - CLASS 10.9
SCREW - CLASS 12.9
UNCOATED
DACROMET GALVANISED
CADMIUM PLATED
PHOSPHATE COATED
UNCOATED
DACROMET GALVANISED
CADMIUM PLATED
PHOSPHATE COATED
UNCOATED
DACROMET GALVANISED
CADMIUM PLATED
PHOSPHATE COATED
3 x 0.5
0.88
0.88
0.81
0.66
1.25
1.18
1.10
0.96
1.55
1.40
1.33
1.11
4 x 0.7
2.06
1.92
1.77
1.47
2.88
2.73
2.51
2.14
3.47
3.24
3.02
2.58
5 x 0.8
4.13
3.83
3.54
2.95
5.83
5.46
4.94
4.20
6.93
6.49
5.90
5.01
6x1
7.37
6.64
5.90
5.16
9.59
9.59
8.85
7.37
11.80
11.06
10.32
8.85
8 x 1.25
16.96
16.22
14.75
12.54
24.34
22.86
20.65
16.96
28.76
27.29
24.34
20.65
8x1
18.44
17.70
15.49
13.27
25.81
24.34
22.12
18.44
31.71
29.50
26.55
22.12
10 x 1.5
34.66
32.45
29.50
24.34
47.94
44.99
41.30
34.66
58.26
54.57
49.41
41.30
10 x 1.25
36.87
34.66
30.97
25.81
51.62
47.94
43.51
36.14
61.95
58.26
52.36
43.51
12 x 1.75
59.00
55.31
50.15
42.04
83.34
78.17
70.80
59.00
100.30
93.66
84.81
70.80
12 x 1.25
66.37
61.95
55.31
45.72
92.92
87.02
78.17
64.16
111.36
103.99
93.66
76.70
14 x 2
94.4
88.50
80.39
67.11
132.75
124.64
112.84
94.40
159.30
148.97
135.70
112.84
14 x 1.5
103.99
96.61
87.76
71.54
146.02
136.44
123.16
100.30
175.52
163.72
147.50
120.95
16 x 2
146.02
136.44
123.90
102.51
205.76
192.49
174.05
143.81
247.06
230.84
208.71
172.57
16 x 1.5
158.56
147.50
132.75
107.67
222.72
207.97
186.59
151.92
267.71
249.27
224.20
182.16
18 x 2.5
200.60
187.32
170.36
141.60
281.72
264.02
238.95
199.12
337.77
316.39
286.89
238.95
18 x 1.5
231.57
215.35
193.22
155.61
325.24
303.11
271.40
219.03
390.87
363.59
325.97
263.29
20 x 2.5
283.20
266.24
241.16
199.12
400.46
374.65
339.25
280.25
480.85
449.87
407.10
336.30
20 x 1.5
323.76
301.64
269.19
216.82
455.03
424.06
379.07
304.59
546.49
508.14
454.30
365.06
22 x 2.5
397.51
361.37
328.92
266.97
559.76
507.40
463.15
376.12
671.12
609.17
555.34
450.61
22 x 1.5
435.12
404.15
360.64
288.36
611.39
568.61
507.40
405.62
733.81
682.19
609.17
487.48
24 x 3
491.91
460.20
415.95
343.67
691.77
646.79
584.84
483.06
829.69
775.85
702.10
579.67
24 x 2
547.22
509.61
456.51
368.75
769.95
716.85
642.36
518.46
924.09
860.66
770.69
622.45
27 x 3
727.91
679.97
612.86
502.97
1023.65
955.80
862.14
707.26
1227.94
1146.81
1033.97
848.12
27 x 2
799.45
743.40
664.48
533.95
1123.95
1045.77
934.41
750.77
1348.89
1255.22
1121.74
901.22
30 x 3.5
986.04
921.14
831.16
684.40
1386.50
1295.05
1168.94
962.47
1663.80
1553.91
1402.72
1154.18
30 x 2
1118.05
1039.87
927.77
741.92
1572.35
1461.72
1304.64
1043.56
1887.26
1754.51
1564.97
1252.27
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
TECHNICAL DATA - 330B
SECTION 2B
ADT 327B-330B
MEASURES (INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM) Force in N (Newton) Conversion: 1N 1 kg
= =
0.1019 kg 9.81 N
Power in kW (kilowatt) Other units in use: CV (Horse) HP (Horse---Power) Conversion: 1 kW 1 kW 1 CV 1 CV 1 HP 1 HP
= = = = = =
1.36 CV 1.34 HP 0.736 kW 0.986 HP 0.746 kW 1.014 CV
Torque in Nm Conversion: 1 Nm 1 kgm 1 kgm
= = =
0.1019 kg 9.81 Nm 10 Nm *
Specific consumption in g/kWh (grams per kilowatthour) Other unit in use: g/CVh (grams per Horsehour) Conversion: 1 g/kWh 1 g/CVh
= =
0.736 g/CVh 1.36 g/kWh
Pressure in kPa (kilopascal) Other units in use: kg/cm2 (kilogram per square centimeter) Atm (Metric atmosphere) psi (Pound per square inch) Conversion: 1 kg/cm2 1 kg/cm2 1 kg/cm2 1 kg/cm2 1 kg/cm2 1 bar 1 bar 1 bar 1 psi 1 psi 1 psi 1 kPa 1 kPa 1 kPa
= = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 Atm 98.1 kPa 0.981 bar 1 bar * 14.22 psi 100 kPa 1.02 kg/cm2 14.51 psi 6.9 kPa 0.069 bar 0.0703 kg/cm2 0.145 psi 0.0102 kg/cm2 0.01 bar
Conversion values for British units 1 mm = 0.039 inch 1m = 3.281 ft. 1 km = 0.621 miles = 0.06 I cu. in. 1 cm3 1l = 1.759 pts (0.88 Imp. qts) 1 bar = 14.5038 psi 1g = 0.035 oz. (0.564 dr.) 1 kg = 2.205 Ibs. 1t = 1.102 short ton (0.9842 long ton) (° F − 32) °C = 1.8 ° F = (° C x 1.8) + 32 (*) Nm and bar are converted according to the ratios 10:1 and 1:1
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 3 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
FAILURE CODES
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 3
FAILURE CODES
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 3
FAILURE CODES 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
MULTIPLEX SYSTEM FAULT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ENGINE CONTROL FAULT CODES LIST . . . . . . . 21
MULTIPLEX SYSTEM FAULT CODES LIST -SOFTWARE VERSION 5.1.0.0-- 5.2.0.0 . . . . . . . . . 4
TRANSMISSION FAULT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
ENGINE FAULT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE CODES LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
FAILURE CODES
SECTION 3
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 3
FAILURE CODES 3
MULTIPLEX SYSTEM FAULT CODES FAILURES CHECK ON DISPLAY If a failure is found a fault code is displayed in the code list (Figure 1 and Figure 2). Figure 1
In case of failure concerning a refueling and/or maintenance operation the relevant fault code is displayed in the code list (Figure 3). For maintenance issue the blue icon appears for 15 seconds with 180 seconds repetition time. Only during 15 seconds the list could be read. Figure 3
292ANU057L 292ANU060L
Figure 2
In case of multiple failures, the codes are displayed in the code list (Figure 1 and Figure 2). The warning light (Figure 4) or both warning lights (Figure 4) work according to the gravity of the failure. Figure 4
292ANU053L
314A003001R
The complete list of fault codes is reported in the following pages.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
MUX
f 10
f 8
f 6
f 4
f 1
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- GIGA --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- GIGA --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- TCU --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- ECU --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- GIGA --
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
(READING)
GIGA E2PROM FAULT
(WRITING)
GIGA E2PROM FAULT
TCU FAULT
ECU FAULT
GIGA HW FAULT
Description
Main Component Fault. Stop vehicle immediately. Limp Home Mode.
Main Component Fault. Stop vehicle immediately. Limp Home Mode.
Transmission Control Unit Fault. Depending from error STOP light could be On or OFF. Specific TCU message is displayed. MUX 06 is recorded in memory failure list.
Engine Control Unit Fault. Depending from error STOP light could be On or OFF. Specific EDC message is displayed. MUX 04 is recorded in memory failure list.
Main Component Fault. Stop vehicle immediately.
Remarks
Disconnect and reconnect batteries Re ---program GIGA Replace GIGA & re ---program
2. 3.
1.
2. 3.
1.
Disconnect and reconnect batteries Re ---program GIGA Replace GIGA & re ---program
Disconnect and reconnect batteries Re ---program GIGA Replace GIGA & re ---program
Troubleshoot Transmission
Troubleshoot Engine
2. 3.
1.
Fault codes
SECTION 3
STOP!
STOP!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
STOP!
STOP!
STOP!
Display
The codes in square brackets [ Code MUX xx ] are not displayed.
Warning light
.
MULTIPLEX SYSTEM FAULT CODES LIST --- Software version 5.1.0.0---5.2.0.0 4 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 30
f 25
f 19
f 16
f 15
f 14
Codes list
GENERAL -- ENGINE--
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- SW --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- MIDAC --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- MIDAC --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- CAN J1939 --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- CAN OPEN --
Group
V
V
(OPT)
330
(OPT)
330
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B Remarks
Check fuse for power supply Check configuration bridge in wiring Check CAN OPEN line on MIDAC Replace MIDAC
Replace MIDAC
4.
3.
1. 2.
Troubleshoot CAN J1939 line
Troubleshoot CAN OPEN line
Fault codes
1. 2. 3.
Check engine oil level Check engine oil pressure Troubleshoot engine lubrication system
Conflict between software management Check SW and download new SW and memorized parameters.
Main component HW fault. Limp Home Mode.
Main Component Fault. Stop vehicle immediately. Limp Home Mode.
GIGA does not receive any information through the CAN J1939 line. Limp Home Mode.
ENGINE OIL PRES- Message received from ECU and conSURE LOW verted in Mux.
SION ERROR
SOFTWARE VER -
MIDAC FAULT
NOT FUNCTIONING
MIDAC
FUNCTIONING
LINE NOT
CAN J1939
NOT
CAN OPEN LINE GIGA does not receive any information through the CAN OPEN line. FUNCTIONING Limp Home Mode.
Description
SECTION 3
STOP!
STOP!
STOP!
STOP!
STOP!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 5
Warning light
MUX
MUX
f 44
f 43
f 42
f 41
f 40
f 38
f 37
--FUEL--
GENERAL
PNEUMATICS
PNEUMATICS
PNEUMATICS
SYSTEM--
-- COOLING
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
RANGE
SOR OUT OF
FUEL LEVEL SEN-
PRESSURE HIGH
MAIN TANK AIR
PRESSURE LOW
MAIN TANK AIR
RANGE
SOR OUT OF
PRESSURE SEN-
MAIN AIR TANK
MAXIMUM
PERATURE OVER
GENERAL
PERATURE OUT
RADIATOR COOLANT WATER TEM-
PERATURE HIGH
RADIATOR COOLANT WATER TEM-
V
V
ENGINE OIL TEM-
Description
OF RANGE
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
SYSTEM--
GENERAL
-- COOLING
GENERAL -- ENGINE--
Group
System Pressure over 9 bar.
System pressure below 2 bar.
Water temperature > 93° C for more than 2 seconds.
In case of sensor failure the fan drive output is controlled from EDC water temperature sensor.
Message received from ECU and converted in Mux. Oil temperature > 125°C for more than 2 seconds.
Remarks
Check sensor connection Check impedance at sensor if at 20° C R<10 Ω or R>1600 Ω replace sensor Check wiring connections
1. 2.
Check pressure Check sensor Check air dryer
1. 2. 3.
3.
1. 2.
1. 2. 3.
3.
Check sensor connection Check impedance at sensor if R<10 Ω or R>1000 Ω replace sensor Check wiring connections
Check pressure Check sensor Check air dryer
Check sensor connection Check voltage at sensor if at 20° C T<100 mV or T>4800 mV replace sensor Troubleshoot wiring connections
1. 2.
3.
2.
Check radiator coolant water level Check radiator coolant water temperature Troubleshoot engine coolant system
1.
3.
Check engine oil level Check engine oil temperature Troubleshoot engine lubrication system
1. 2. 3.
Fault codes
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
STOP!
Display
6 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 52
f 50
f 49
f 47
[MUX 45]
Codes list
WET BRAKE COOLING
WET BRAKE COOLING
HYDRAULICS
HYDRAULICS
--FUEL--
GENERAL
Group
V
V
V
340
340
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
PERATURE HIGH
COOLING OIL TEM-
WET BRAKE
RANGE
SENSOR OUT OF
TEMPERATURE
WET BRAKE COOLING OIL
HIGH
TEMPERATURE
HYDRAULIC OIL
RANGE
SENSOR OUT OF
TEMPERATURE
HYDRAULIC OIL
MUM
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNDER MINI-
Description
Wet brake cooling oil temp > 120°C.
With engine running recovery strategy through EDC water temperature sensor.
Hydraulic oil temperature > 98° C. MUX 175 (pre ---warning). The lamp into analogue indicator is fixed.
Body tipping AUTOMATIC ACCELERATOR mode not functioning.
When the percent value of fuel level less than 18% the lamp into analogue indicator is fixed. When the percent value of fuel level less than 10% the lamp into analogue indicator is blinking.
Remarks
1. 2. 3.
3.
1. 2.
1. 2. 3.
3.
1. 2.
Check oil temperature Check sensor Check cooling system
Check sensor connection Check impedance at sensor if at 20° C R<10 Ω or R>2700 Ω replace sensor Check wiring connections
Check oil temperature Check sensor Check cooling system
Check sensor connection Check impedance at sensor if at 20° C R<10 Ω or R>2700 Ω replace sensor Check wiring connections
Fault codes
SECTION 3
STOP!
WARNING!
STOP!
WARNING!
LIMITED AUTONOMY!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 7
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 77
f 76
f 72
f 71
f 57
f 55
--FUEL--
GENERAL
--FUEL--
GENERAL
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
GENERAL -- ENGINE--
GENERAL -- ENGINE--
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
CLOGGED
(ON CHASSIS)
RY FUEL FILTER
WATER IN PRIMA -
GINE) CLOGGED
SECONDAY FUEL FILTER (ON EN -
CLOGGED
BRAKE OIL FILTER
TER CLOGGED
ENGINE OIL FIL-
UNDER MINIMUM
(OPT)
OVER MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE
ENGINE WATER
BRAKE OIL LEVEL
V
V
Description
330
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
When MUX 184 and MUX 185 are present.
Status 2 J1939 alarm signal is active if engine water temperature > 95° . The lamp into analogue indicator is fixed.
Status 1 J1939 pre ---warning signal is active if engine water temperature > 92° . The lamp into analogue indicator is blinking.
Remarks
1. 2. 3.
1. 2. 3.
1. 2. 3.
1. 2. 3.
1. 2. 3.
1. 2. 3.
Drain filter Replace filter Check wiring connection
Replace Filter Check wiring connection Replace switch
Replace Filter Check wiring connection Replace switch
Replace Filter Check switch Check wiring connections
Check brake oil level Check switch Check wiring connections
Check engine water level Check sensor Check wiring connections
Fault codes
SECTION 3
MAINTENANCE!
MAINTENANCE!
MAINTENANCE!
MAINTENANCE!
MUX
MUX
MUX
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
STOP!
STOP!
Display
8 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 82
f 81
f 80
f 79
Codes list
GREASING
-- TIPPING--
HYDRAULICS
--AIR--
GENERAL
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
TANK LOW
GREASE LEVEL IN
FILTER CLOGGED
HYDRAULIC OIL
CLOGGED
AIR FILTER
PRESSURE LOW
ACCUMULATORS
BRAKING
Description
Fault codes
Only if automatic greasing system is fitted. Warning to refill tank. The lamp dedicated is blinking.
Pressure switch N.O.
ADT 335: 130 +/-- 15 measured decreasing pressure. ADT 340: 95 +/-- 5 measured decreasing pressure.
1. 2.
1. 2. 3.
1. 2. 3.
Refill tank Check wiring connections
Replace Filter Check wiring connection Replace switch
Replace Filter Check wiring connection Replace switch
ADT 335--340: Check hydraulic procedure on Pressure switch N.O. fault appears 60 manual seconds after engine start if accumulators have not been charged at specified level . After 60 seconds when engine running if accumulators have not been charged at specified level the fault appears after 5 seconds. See MUX 115.
ADT 327--330: Pressure sensors (0--10 bar, 0--5V) fault appears 90 seconds after engine start if accumulators have not been charged at specified level 7.5 bar. When engine running this fault appears if the pressure > 6.5 bar for 20 seconds. See MUX 182--183. If the pressure > 1.5 bar the fault appears after 5 seconds.
Remarks
SECTION 3
MAINTENANCE!
MAINTENANCE!
STOP!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 9
Warning light
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 92
f 91
f 90
f 88
f 87
f 86
f 85
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook -- TIPPING--
HYDRAULICS
-- TIPPING--
HYDRAULICS
ELECTRICS
WET BRAKE COOLING
-- TIPPING--
HYDRAULICS
-- TIPPING--
HYDRAULICS
FAN DRIVE
--HYDRAULICS--
WET BRAKE COOLING
Group
V
V
V
(OPT)
330
(OPT)
330
V
V
V
340
V
V
V
340
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
LOWERING FAULT
JOYSTICK BODY
LIFTING FAULT
JOYSTICK BODY
FAULT
ALTERNATOR
VALVE FAULT
BRAKE COOLING
VALVE FAULT
BODY LOWERING
VALVE FAULT
BODY LIFTING
FAULT
FAN DRIVE VALVE
FAULT
SOR FRONT AXIS
PRESSURE SEN-
Description
Short circuit found at Key ON. Body return not functioning.
Short circuit found at Key ON. Body raise not functioning.
Alternator not charging.
Cooling oil flow at maximum. Axle seals can have damage. Stop vehicle immediately and repair.
No body Return. MIDAC watchdog switch OFF.
No body raise. MIDAC watchdog switch OFF.
Radiator fan speed always at maximum.
Check wiring connection to IO ---MODE Trouble alternator
Check continuity at solenoid valve coil Check wiring connection to solenoid valve
Check wiring connection to tilting lever in cab
Check wiring connection to tilting lever in cab
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
Check wiring connection to CMX return solenoid Replace solenoid
Check wiring connection to CMX tipping solenoid Replace solenoid
1.
4.
2. 3.
Check wiring connections to solenoid Check continuity at solenoid Check pilotage current: 650 mA below 82° C and 0 mA over 92° C Replace solenoid valve
Check wiring connections Replace pressure switch Check control flow proportional valve on hydraulic motor
Fault codes
1.
Pressure switch N.C. It opens at 2.0 +/-- 1. 0.15 bar measured increasing pressure. 2. Brake cooling circuit pump rate 3. reduced to minimum.
Remarks
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
STOP!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX f 83
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
10 327B-330B
Warning light
NOT ADJUSTED ON DISPLAY
f 97
f 95
f 94
f 93
[MUX 108]
[MUX 107]
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
Codes list
EMERGENCY STEERING
HYDRAULICS
ACTUATION
BRAKE
HYDRAULICS
ELECTRICS
ELECTRICS
Group
340
V
V
V
(OPT)
330
V
V
V
(OPT)
340
(OPT)
335
(OPT)
340
335 (OPT)
327
(OPT)
(OPT)
(OPT)
330
335 (OPT)
327 (OPT)
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
TRANSMISSION
JUST AUTOMATIC
PROCEED TO AD -
BRAKE PEDAL
PRESS SERVICE
DRIVER MUST
PRESSURE
LOW STEERING
SWITCH FAULT
TIPPING BRAKE
BUTTON FAULT
WARM---UP
FAULT
ENGINE BUTTON
GROUND START
Description
AEB procedure can be activated from cluster. Check that proper conditions are verified. See TCU F5.
If pedal brake isn’t pressed and rpm out transmission >0 MUX 119 is diplayed.
Pressure switch N.O. If verified at engine ON: system pressure is below specification (15 ± 0.4 bar measured decreasing pressure) or switch is defective. Emergency steering strategy activated (warning light and buzzer). The dedicated icon appears when the vehicle speed is over than 2 km/h (3.2 mp/h).
Tipping brake not functioning.
Only if warm up option is fitted. Warm ---up function from ground not functioning.
Only if ground start is fitted. Start from ground function not functioning.
Remarks
1. 2. 3. 4.
Check system pressure Check pressure switch Check wiring connections Troubleshoot hydraulics
Check wiring connection to tipping brake button
Check wiring connection to warm up button
Check wiring connection to ground start button
Fault codes
SECTION 3
PRESS BRAKE PEDAL!
STOP!
STOP!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 11
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
STOP!
STOP!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 114
f 113
f 112
f 109
Codes list
EMERGENCY STEERING
HYDRAULICS
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- CAN J1939 --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- CAN J1939 --
ELECTRICS
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
SENSOR FAULT
STEERING
NO COMUNICA TION FROM TCU
NO COMUNICA TION FROM EDC
PRESENT
INPUT NOT
KEY---15A SIGNAL
Description
Pressure switch N.O. System checks sensor with Key ON and Engine OFF. The dedicated icon appears when the vehicle speed is over than 2 km/h (3.2 mp/h).
All data from TCU displayed in ’Engine Setup’ screen are missing.
All data from ECU displayed in ’Engine Setup’ screen are missing.
The body is not function.
Remarks
1. 2.
2.
Check pressure switch Check wiring connection to sensor
Check CAN line in proximity of TCU Replace TCU if main transmission malfunction is noted
1.
2.
Check CAN line in proximity of ECU Replace ECU if main engine malfunction is noted
Check key circuit Check relay Check fuse
1.
1. 2. 3.
Fault codes
FAILURE CODES
STOP!
STOP!
WARNING!
Display
12 SECTION 3 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
f 117
MUX
MUX
f 120
f 119
f 116
MUX
MUX
f 115
MUX
Codes list
GENERAL
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
GREASING
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
Group
(OPT)
330
V
(OPT)
330
340
V
(OPT)
340
335 (OPT)
327
V
(OPT)
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
DIFFERENT
TEMPERATURES
AND BRAKE OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
FOR CHECK
ING BRAKE PEDAL
WITHOUT PRESS -
START VEHICLE
GREASING FAULT
CONDITION
WARM---UP
THE SYSTEM IS IN
ACCUMULATORS
CHARGING BRAKE
Description
Brake pedal not pressed after engine start or rear brake lights switch not functioning.
Greasing system pump switched off to prevent pump damage. No grease delivery to service points. The engine functions with reduced performance if activated. Limp Home Mode, yellow warning light and icon if programmed by parameter options. The lamp dedicated is fixed.
During warm ---up procedure the two icons roll over. When the warm ---up procedure stops only the icon key appears to request key ---ON to the operator.
The warning value is showed only if another MUX is present. At engine start: yellow icon if input pressure switch is OFF, red icon if input pressure switch is OFF for more than 60 seconds, MUX 79 if input pressure switch is OFF for more than 2.5 seconds. When engine running: yellow icon if input pressure switch is OFF, red icon if input pressure switch is OFF for more than 5 seconds, MUX 79 if input pressure switch is OFF for more than 2.5 seconds.
Remarks
2.
1.
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. 2.
1. 2.
Check engine temperature and brake cooling oil temperature Check if there is pressure in the system (intermediate axle)
Press brake pedal Check brake actuation pressure Check rear lights brake switch Check wiring connections
Fill grease tank with grease Check wiring connections
Check air pressure Check pressure switch
Fault codes
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 13
Warning light
MUX
MUX
f 149
f 145
f 143
f 140
f 139
f 122
f 121
GIGA --
GIGA --
WET BRAKE COOLING
--
ELECTRONICS
ELECTRICS AND
--
ELECTRONICS
ELECTRICS AND
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- MIDAC --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- SW --
WET BRAKE COOLING
GENERAL
Group
(OPT)
330
V
V
(OPT)
330
V
(OPT)
330
340
V
V
V
V
340
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
MIDAC
PUMP FAULT
BRAKE COOLING
ERROR
READ/WRITE
TRIP COMPUTER
ERROR
READ/WRITE
PARAMETERS
FIGURATION
MACHINE CON-
PLY FOR
ELECTRICAL SUP -
THERE IS NO
RATION ERROR
TRUCK CONFIGU -
FAULT
SOR ON AXLES
PRESSURE SEN-
Solenoid flow control valve is energized at maximum (650 mA) for more than 30 seconds but the system is still overpressurized (> 2.5 bar).
Error in writing/reading trip computer.
Error in writing/reading parameters.
Lack of power supply to MIDAC for utilities. Limp Home Mode.
3.
2.
1.
2. 3.
1.
2. 3.
1.
3.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2. 3.
Check pressure in the cooling system Check solenoid flow control valve Replace in case of damage or improper functioning
Disconnect and reconnect batteries Re ---program GIGA Replace GIGA and re ---program
Disconnect and reconnect batteries Re ---program GIGA Replace GIGA and re ---program
Check fuse & short cuts in the system Check wiring connection to MIDAC Replace MIDAC
Check proper SW with vehicle model Check wiring harness bridges for auto configuration
Check and repair pressure sensors Check wirings Check MIDAC
1.
3.
PERATURES DIF-
FERENTr
Check temperature sensor at radiator outlet Check proper functioning of fan drive system Check thermostatic valve (partial opening)
Fault codes 1. 2.
Brake cooling circuit pump rate reduced to minimum.
Remarks
AND WATER TEM-
HYDRAULIC OIL
Description
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
STOP!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
STOP!
STOP!
STOP!
WARNING!
Display
14 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
STOP!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 159
f 158
f 157
f 156
f 154
f 151
f 150
Codes list
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- IO--MODE --
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
-- TIPPING--
HYDRAULICS
WET BRAKE COOLING
WET BRAKE COOLING
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- MIDAC --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- MIDAC --
Group
V
V
V
(OPT)
330
(OPT)
330
(OPT)
330
(OPT)
330
V
V
V
340
340
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
FAULT
COMMUNICATION
IO ---MODE
CONNECTED
TER SENSOR NOT
BRAKES OIL FIL-
NOT CONNECTED
FILTER SENSOR
HYDRAULIC OIL
MUM
SOR OVER MAXI-
PRESSURE SEN-
REAR AXLE OIL
RANGE
SOR OUT OF
PRESSURE SEN-
REAR AXLE OIL
URATION FAILED
MIDAC CONFIG-
NOT FOUND
CONFIGURATION
MIDAC NODE
Description
Stop vehicle immediately. Limp Home Mode.
Rear circuit brake cooling pressure > 4.5 bar.
Brake cooling circuit pump rate reduced to minimum.
Conflict in MIDAC auto configuration. Limp Home Mode.
Conflict in MIDAC auto configuration. Limp Home Mode.
Remarks
2.
1.
1. 2.
1. 2.
4.
Check fuse for IO ---MODE power supply Check CAN OPEN line between IO ---MODE and GIGA
Check fliter switch status Check wiring connection to filter sensor
Check filter switch status Check wiring connection to filter sensor
Check pressure in the circuit Check sensor Check control flow proportional valve Check wiring connection to sensor and to proportional valve solenoid
1. 2. 3.
3.
Check sensor connection Check voltage at sensor if at 20° C T<300 mV or T>5400 mV replace sensor Troubleshoot wiring connections
1. 2.
Check configuration bridge in wiring harness to MIDAC
Check configuration bridges in wiring harness
Fault codes
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
STOP!
STOP!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 15
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
STOP!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 167
f 166
f 165
f 164
f 163
f 160
Codes list
GENERAL
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- IO--MODE --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- GIGA --
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- IO--MODE --
WET BRAKE COOLING
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- IO--MODE --
Group
V
V
V
V
(OPT)
330
V
V
V
V
V
340
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
SPEED
ENGINE OVER -
FAULT
RELAY WATCHDOG
STEERING PUMP
WATCHDOG FAULT
GIGA RELAY
FAULT
RELAY WATCHDOG
IO --- MODE
PUMP BROKEN
BRAKE COOLING
ERROR
IO --- MODE BIOS
Description
Status 2 Engine speed > 2400 rpm. EDC lamp switched ON. Intermittent Buzzer. TCU lamp switched ON.
Status 1 Engine speed > 2350 rpm. Warning light switched ON. EDC lamp flashing. Intermittent Buzzer.
The system cuts off power supply to all utilities. Limp Home Mode.
The system cuts off power supply to all utilities. Limp Home Mode.
The system cuts off power supply to all utilities. Limp Home Mode.
No current to solenoid flow control valve for more than 30 seconds with no pressure raise in the cooling system.
Stop vehicle immediately. Limp Home Mode.
Remarks
3.
2.
1.
3.
2.
1.
3.
2.
Check fuse & short cuts in the system Check wiring connection to IO --MODE Replace IO ---MODE
Check fuse & short cuts in the system Check wiring connection to GIGA Replace GIGA
Check fuse & short cuts in the system Check wiring connection to IO ---MODE Replace IO ---MODE
1.
3.
Check oil level in the tank Check proper functioning of proportional control valve spool Check hydraulic motor proper functioning
1. 2.
Replace IO ---MODE
Fault codes
FAILURE CODES
STOP!
STOP!
WARNING!
STOP!
Display
16 SECTION 3 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 180
f 179
f 178
f 177
f 176
f 175
MUX
MUX
f 174
MUX
Codes list
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
HYDRAULICS
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
LIC CONVERTER
(OPT)
MINIMUM
SENSOR UNDER
AIR PRESSURE
REAR CONVERTER
RANGE
SENSOR OUT OF
AIR PRESSURE
REAR CONVERTER
OVER MAXIMUM
SURE SENSOR
VERTER AIR PRES -
FRONT CON-
UNDER MINIMUM
SURE SENSOR
VERTER AIR PRES -
FRONT CON-
OUT OF RANGE
SURE SENSOR
VERTER AIR PRES -
FRONT CON-
TOO HIGH
TEMPERATURE
HYDRAULIC OIL
FAULT
MATIC / HYDRAU -
BRAKES PNEU -
Description
330
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
When the engine running and the air pressure < 0.5 bar.
When the air pressure > 10.5 bar.
When the engine running and the air pressure < 0.5 bar.
Hydraulic oil temp > 95° C (pre ---warning). The lamp into analogue indicator is blinking.
Not used for brake cooling system. Limit switch N.O. Fault appears after 10 seconds from engine start.
Remarks
1. 2.
3.
1. 2.
1. 2.
1. 2.
3.
1. 2.
1. 2.
1. 2. 3.
Check air pressure Check sensor
Check sensor connection Check voltage at sensor if at 20° C T<100 mV or T>4900 mV replace sensor Troubleshoot wiring connections
Check air pressure Check sensor
Check air pressure Check sensor
Check sensor connection Check voltage at sensor if at 20° C T<100 mV or T>4900 mV replace sensor Troubleshoot wiring connections
Check oil temperature Check sensor
Check oil pressure Check wiring Check sensor
Fault codes
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 17
Warning light
f 182
f 183
f 184
f 185
f 187
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
f 181
MUX
MUX
Codes list
330 (OPT)
WET BRAKE
V
V
V
V
V
340
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook OUT OF RANGE
OIL TEMPERATURE
REAR AXLE BRAKE
REAR CONVERTER Limit switch N.C. OIL LEVEL LOW fault appears after 3 seconds.
LOW
VERTER OIL LEVEL
FRONT CON-
LOW
Limit switch N.C. fault appears after 3 seconds.
Check level oil Check limit switch Check wiring Check sensor connection Check impedance at sensor if at 20° C R<10 Ω or R>2700 Ω replace sensor Check wiring connections
1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.
Check level oil Check limit switch Check wiring
Check air pressure Check sensor
Check air pressure Check sensor
Check air pressure Check sensor
Fault codes
1. 2. 3.
1. 2.
AIR PRESSURE
REAR CONVERTER
The warning value is showed only if another MUX is present. With engine running: yellow icon if air pressure < 6.5 bar for more than 1 second, red icon if air pressure < 6.5 bar for more than 20 seconds. After this time MUX 79 if air pressure < 6.5 bar for more than 2.5 seconds.
1. 2.
1. 2.
When the air pressure > 10.5 bar.
Remarks
The warning value is showed only if another MUX is present. With engine running: FRONT CONyellow icon if air pressure < 6.5 bar for VERTER AIR PRES - more than 1 second, SURE LOW red icon if air pressure < 6.5 bar for more than 20 seconds. After this time MUX 79 if air pressure < 6.5 bar for more than 2.5 seconds.
MAXIMUM
SENSOR OVER
AIR PRESSURE
REAR CONVERTER
Description
SECTION 3
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
ACTUATION
BRAKE
--HYDRAULICS--
Group
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
18 327B-330B
Warning light
STOP!
WARNING!
Display
f 190
f 191
MUX
f 189
MUX
MUX
Codes list
V
V
ELECTRICS
ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS -- IO--MODE --
330 (OPT)
WET BRAKE
V
V
340
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
--HYDRAULICS--
Group
Remarks
FAILED
FIGURATION
IO --- MODE CON-
PRESSED
PUSH BUTTON
EMERGENCY
OVER MAXIMUM
OIL TEMPERATURE
Stop vehicle immediately. Limp Home Mode.
Only for emergency. Turn off the key. Disconnected the battery. Release the button.
ADT 340: When the temperature > 120° C.
ADT 330: REAR AXLE BRAKE When the temperature > 100° C.
Description Check oil temperature Check sensor
1. 2.
Re ---program IO ---MODE Replace IO ---MODE
Read the user manual.
1. 2.
Fault codes
327B-330B SECTION 3 FAILURE CODES 19
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
FAILURE CODES
SECTION 3
327B-330B
ENGINE FAULT CODES FAILURES CHECK ON DISPLAY If a failure is found a fault code is displayed in the in the code list (Figure 5 and Figure 6). In case of multiple failures, the codes are displayed in the code list (Figure 5 and Figure 6).
The warning light (Figure 7) or both warning lights (Figure 7) work according to the gravity of the failure. Figure 7
Figure 5
314A003002R
The complete list of fault codes is reported in the following pages. 314A003005L
Figure 6
292ANU057L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
EDC f 10025
EDC f 2001F
EDC f 20011
EDC f 1001A
EDC f 10019
EDC f 10012
Codes list
MAIN RELAY 2
BOOST PRESSURE ACTUATOR
SPEED SENSOR
50 STARTER
15 KEY ON
PEDAL
ACCELERATOR
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook --- VGT)
MAIN RELAY 2 FAILURE (GRID HEATER
TOR OUT OF RANGE
CURRENT BOOST PRESSURE ACTUA -
SOR FAILURE
VEHICLE SPEED SEN-
TERMINAL 50 FAILURE
TERMINAL 15 FAILURE
1 FAILURE
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Description
--- CHECK WIRING OF IDLE SWITCH OR
DEFECT REMAINS MAIN RELAY INSIDE COULD BE DEFECTIVE, REPLACE
RELAY 2
ECU ECU
NENTS CONNECTED TO MAIN RELAY 2, IF NECTED COMPONENTS OR DEFECTIVE MAIN
--- SHORT CIRCUIT OF MAIN RELAY 2 OUTPUT
ECU ECU --- CHECK THE WIRING AND ALL COMPO COULD BE DEFECTIVE, REPLACE
DEFECT REMAINS MAIN RELAY INSIDE
TO GROUND, DEFECT IN ONE OF THE CON-
TIVE MAIN RELAY 2
THE CONNECTED COMPONENTS OR DEFEC -
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND ALL COMPO NENTS CONNECTED TO MAIN RELAY 2, IF
--- SHORT CIRCUIT OF MAIN RELAY 2 OUTPUT
ACTUATOR POSITION
SENSOR, CHECK TEMPERATURE AT THE
RACY OF THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
TOLERANCE, CHECK WIRING AND ACCU -
INTERNAL DEFECTS AND FULFILLS THE
ENSURE THAT THE ACTUATOR HAS NO
CONFIGURATION
PROPER FUNCTIONING AND FOR ITS CAN
CHECK SPEED MEASURING DEVICE FOR
DEFECTS
CHECK WIRING AND LOOK FOR ELECTRICAL
DUE TO A SHORT CIRCUIT IN THE IGNITION EDC IS SWITCHED ON, ALTHOUGH T15 HAS NOT BEEN ACTIVATED. SWITCH THE
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL
TOR PEDAL
--- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE ACCELERA -
Fault codes
TO EXTERNAL SOURCE, DEFECT IN ONE OF
TURE (WRONG TEMPERATURE CORRECTION)
FICANTLY (>80° C) FROM ENGINE TEMPERA -
TEMPERATURE AT ACTUATOR DEVIATES SIGNI-
TEMPERATURE SENSOR IS INACCURATE OR
(LOOK FOR POWER STAGE ERRORS), COOLANT
OUTSIDE OF TOLERANCE, WIRING DEFECT
THE COIL OF THE ACTUATOR IS DEFECTIVE OR
DEFECTIVE OR INCORRECT FUNCTIONING CAN MESSAGE CRUISE CONTROL / VEHICLE SPEED (CCVS)
SPEED MEASURING DEVICE, SEE
CUIT
PUT DUE TO WIRING PROBLEM OR SHORT CIR -
PERMANENT T50 HIGH SIGNAL AT DIGITAL IN-
SWITCH THE
DUE TO A SHORT CIRCUIT IN THE IGNITION EDC IS SWITCHED ON, ALTHOUGH T15 HAS NOT BEEN ACTIVATED.
DEFECT
SWITCH BROKEN OR ACCELERATOR PEDAL
--- IDLE SWITCH DEFECT OR WIRING OF IDLE
TOR PEDAL
--- SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING OR IN ACCELERA -
Remarks
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
STOP!
Display
ENGINE CONTROL FAULT CODES LIST
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 21
Warning light
EDC f 1002E AIR HEATER
AIR HEATER
MAIN RELAY 3
MAIN RELAY 1
ENGINE BRAKE
TAGE
BATTERY VOL-
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
ECU DEFECT. OCCURRENCE POSSIBLE
BE DEFECTIVE, REPLACE
MAIN RELAY 1
AIR HEATER
FAILURE
POWER STAGE
AIR HEATER 1
SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND OF GRID HEATER
DEFECTIVE RELAY
--- BROKEN OR DISCONNECTED WIRING OR
INSIDE RELAY
--- SHORT CIRCUIT OF WIRING TO GROUND OR
SOURCE OR INSIDE RELAY
ECU ECU
REPLACE IT
CHECK GRID HEATER SWITCH AND
CHECK OF WIRING OR REPLACE RELAY
COULD BE DEFECTIVE, REPLACE
DEFECT REMAINS MAIN RELAY INSIDE
NENTS CONNECTED TO MAIN RELAY 3, IF
WIRING AND ALL COMPO -
REMAINS MAIN RELAY INSIDE
CONNECTED COMPONENTS OR DEFECTIVE
CHECK THE
CONNECTED TO MAIN RELAY 1, IF DEFECT
ECU COULD ECU
CHECK THE WIRING AND ALL COMPONENTS
CHECK OF WIRING OR REPLACE RELAY
CHECK ECU AND WIRING.
---REPLACE BATTERY OR ALTERNATOR.
DEVICE OR ALTERNATOR
--- REPLACE ALTERNATOR GOVENROR
Fault codes
EXTERNAL SOURCE, DEFECT IN ONE OF THE
SHORT CIRCUIT OF MAIN RELAY 1 OUTPUT TO
DEFECTIVE RELAY
--- BROKEN OR DISCONNECTED WIRING OR
INSIDE RELAY
--- SHORT CIRCUIT OF WIRING TO GROUND OR
SOURCE OR INSIDE RELAY
--- SHORT CIRCUIT OF WIRING TO EXTERNAL
DURING COLD START.
OR
WIRING PROBLEMS (TOO HIGH RESISTANCE)
--- BATTERY DEFECT, ALTERNATOR DEFECT,
--- ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE GOVERNOR DEFECT
Remarks
MAIN RELAY 3 FAILURE (A/C COMPRESSOR, FUEL FIL TER HEATER, INTER SHORT CIRCUIT OF MAIN RELAY 3 OUTPUT TO COOLER BYPASS EXTERNAL SOURCE, DEFECT IN ONE OF THE VALVE, ADDITIVE CONNECTED COMPONENTS OR DEFECTIVE VALVE, GRID HEATER MAIN RELAY 3 2, FAN 2, OBD/COLD START/ ADJUSTABLE SPEED LIMITER LAMP) --- SHORT CIRCUIT OF WIRING TO EXTERNAL
SHORT TO BATTERY
VALVE FAILURE)
DECOMPRESSINON
MAIN RELAY 1 BRAKE
(ENGINE
VALVE FAILURE
DECOMPRESSINON
ENGINE BRAKE
BATTERY VOLTAGE FAILURE
Description
SECTION 3
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
WARNING!
EDC f 1002B
EDC f 10029
EDC f 10028
EDC f 10027
EDC f 10026
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
22 327B-330B
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
EDC f 10035
EDC f 10034
EDC f 10033
EDC f 10032
EDC f 10031
EDC f 20028
EDC f 20025
Codes list
TEMPERATURE
FUEL
PRESSURE
BOOST
TEMPERATURE
BOOST AIR
TEMPERATURE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
COOLANT
MAIN RELAY 1
MAIN RELAY
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
DEFECTIVE MAIN RELAY, WIRING PROBLEM
AFTERRUN)
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAILURE
BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE
BOOST AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAILURE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE DYNAMIC FAILURE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAILURE
COOLANT
SHORT TO GROUND
ECU COULD ECU
OTS PLAUSIBILITY CHECK
DOES NOT EXCEED ITS SIGNAL RANGE)
GROUND
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
EXTERNAL SOURCE
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
SURE IS OUT OF RANGE.
--- DIFFERENCE OF AMBIENT AND BOOST PRES -
GROUND
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
EXTERNAL SOURCE
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
EXTERNAL SOURCE
--- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR --- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR
SENSOR FOR ACCURACY
--- CHECK AMBIENT AND BOOST PRESSURE
--- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR --- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR
CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR
CURATE SENSOR (ALTHOUGH SENSOR
EXCEED ITS SIGNAL RANGE)
SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
EXTREME AMBIENT CONDITIONS. OR INAC-
RATE SENSOR (ALTHOUGH SENSOR DOES NOT
(DFP_OTSCD.NPL)
--- SEE
--- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR --- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR
BE DEFECTIVE, REPLACE
REMAINS MAIN RELAY INSIDE
CONNECTED TO MAIN RELAY 1, IF DEFECT
CHECK THE WIRING AND ALL COMPONENTS
RELAY
SHUT OFF, CHECK WIRING, REPLACE MAIN
INFORM DRIVER ABOUT CORRECT VEHICLE
Fault codes
EXTREME AMBIENT CONDITIONS. OR INACCU -
OTS PLAUSIBILITY CHECK (DFP_OTSCD.NPL)
--- SEE
GROUND
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
EXTERNAL SOURCE
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
COMPONENTS OR DEFECTIVE MAIN RELAY 1
GROUND, DEFECT IN ONE OF THE CONNECTED
DECOMPRESSINON VALVE FAILURE)
SHORT CIRCUIT OF MAIN RELAY 1 OUTPUT TO
MAIN RELAY 1 BRAKE
(ENGINE
TRICAL SWITCH INSTEAD OF TERMINAL 15,
THE ECU IS SWITCHED OFF BY MAIN ELEC-
Remarks
(INTERRUPTED
MAIN RELAY FAILURE
Description
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 23
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
EDC f 10041
EDC f 2003A
CRANKSHAFT
TEMPERATURE
OIL
OIL PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
COOLANT
OIL TEMPERATURE
OIL PRESSURE
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
CRANKSHAFT SPEED SIGNAL FAILURE
TOO HIGH
OIL TEMPERATURE
LOW
OIL PRESSURE TOO
COOLANT TEMPERA TURE TEST FAILURE
OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAILURE
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE
Description
KSHAFT SENSOR (EVALUATE RAW SIGNALS)
CRANKSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
--- CHECK WIRING, SENSOR INSTALLATION
AND PROPER FUNCTIONING OF CRAN-
KSHAFT SENSOR (EVALUATE RAW SIGNALS)
--- CHECK WIRING, SENSOR INSTALLATION AND PROPER FUNCTIONING OF CRAN-
ACCURACY AND CHECK OIL SYSTEM
CHECK OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR
RACY AND CHECK OIL SYSTEM
CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FOR ACCU -
REPLACEMENT OF SENSOR
WIRING AND ACCURACY OF SENSOR,
ENSURE THAT ENGINE WAS NOT RUNNING IN EXTREME AMBIENT CONDITIONS. CHECK
TIONING
AND COOLANT SYSTEM FOR PROPER FUNC -
SENSOR FOR ACCURACY AND CHECK OIL
--- CHECK OIL AND COOLANT TEMPERATURE
--- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR
--- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR
ACCURACY AND CHECK OIL SYSTEM
--- CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FOR
--- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR
--- CHECK WIRING OR REPLACE SENSOR
Fault codes
BLEM, DEFECTIVE OR INCORRECTLY INSTALLED
--- SIGNAL INTERRUPTED DO TO WIRING PRO -
CRANKSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
BLEM, DEFECTIVE OR INCORRECTLY INSTALLED
--- SIGNAL INTERRUPTED DO TO WIRING PRO -
CULATION) IN THE OIL SYSTEM.
DEFECT (E.G. BLOCKAGE, INSUFFICIENT RECIR -
INACCURATE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR
IN THE OIL SYSTEM.
DEFECT (E.G. TOO LOW OIL LEVEL, LEAKAGE...)
INACCURATE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR OR
EXCEED ITS SIGNAL RANGE)
RATE SENSOR (ALTHOUGH SENSOR DOES NOT
EXTREME AMBIENT CONDITIONS. OR INACCU -
LEVEL ETC.).
COOLANT RECIRCULATION (LOW COOLANT
TURE SENSORS OR INSUFFICIENT OIL OR
--- INACCURATE OIL OR COOLANT TEMPERA -
GROUND
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
EXTERNAL SOURCE
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
SYSTEM.
DEFECT (E.G. BLOCKED PIPING) IN THE OIL
--- INACCURATE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR OR
GROUND
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
EXTERNAL SOURCE
--- SENSOR DEFECTIVE OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
Remarks
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
EDC f 20038
EDC f 20032
EDC f 1003A
EDC f 10038
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
24 327B-330B
Warning light
EDC f 4009E
EDC f 3009E
EDC f 1004D
EDC f 10044
EDC f 10043
EDC f 10042
Codes list
INJECTION SYSTEM
TURBO CHARGER
INJECTION SYSTEM
CAMSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT
CAMSHAFT
CAMSHAFT
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
CAMSHAFT OR CRANKSHAFT SENSOR
BLEM, DEFECTIVE OR INCORRECTLY INSTALLED
CHARGER PROTECTION
ACTIVE POWER REDCUTION DUE TO TURBO
ENGINE PROTECTION ACTIVE POWER REDCUTION DUE TO ENGINE (AGAINST EXCESSIVE MECHANICS PROTECTION TORQUE, ENGINE OVERSPEED AND OVERHEAT)
TATION DUE TO
INFO: TORQUE LIMI-
TURBO CHARGER PROTECTION
TATION DUE TO
INFO: TORQUE LIMI-
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook ERROR.
FOLLOW TROUBLESHOOTING OF THIS ROOT
SHOULD ALSO BE IN THE FAILURE MEMORY.
TRIGGERING THE TORQUE LIMITATION
RED DUE TO ACTUAL DEFECT, THE FAILURE
NO ACTIONS NECESSARY DUE TO THIS FAILURE ALONE. IF POWERREDUCTION OCCUR -
ERROR.
FOLLOW TROUBLESHOOTING OF THIS ROOT
SHOULD ALSO BE IN THE FAILURE MEMORY.
TRIGGERING THE TORQUE LIMITATION
RED DUE TO ACTUAL DEFECT, THE FAILURE
FOR
ECU ERRORS NO ACTIONS NECESSARY DUE TO THIS FAILURE ALONE. IF POWERREDUCTION OCCUR -
DURING FAULT RECOGNITION, CHECK ALSO
QUANTITY SETPOINT AND ACTUAL VALUE
ACQUISITION AND INJECTION SYSTEM FOR
CONDITIONS OF VEHICLE, ENGINE SPEED
FREQUENTLY. IN THIS CASE CHECK DRIVING
FAULT/INFORMATION STATUS REOCCURS
NO REACTIONS NECESSARY ONLY IF THIS
RAW SIGNALS)
AND CRANKSHAFT SENSORS (EVALUATE
AND PROPER FUNCTIONING OF CAMSHAFT
CHECK WIRING, SENSOR INSTALLATIONS
PHASE SENSOR (EVALUATE RAW SIGNALS)
CAMSHAFT PHASE SENSOR
SIGNAL INTERRUPTED DO TO WIRING PRO -
--- CHECK WIRING, SENSOR INSTALLATION
AND PROPER FUNCTIONING OF CAMSHAFT
BLEM, DEFECTIVE OR INCORRECTLY INSTALLED
PHASE SENSOR (EVALUATE RAW SIGNALS)
--- SIGNAL INTERRUPTED DO TO WIRING PRO -
CAMSHAFT PHASE SENSOR
--- CHECK WIRING, SENSOR INSTALLATION AND PROPER FUNCTIONING OF CAMSHAFT
--- SIGNAL INTERRUPTED DO TO WIRING PRO -
SENSOR (EVALUATED RAW SIGNALS)
BLEM, DEFECTIVE OR INCORRECTLY INSTALLED
CRANKSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
CHECK WIRING, SENSOR INSTALLATION AND PROPER FUNCTIONING OF CRANKSHAFT
BLEM, DEFECTIVE OR INCORRECTLY INSTALLED
Fault codes
SIGNAL INTERRUPTED DO TO WIRING PRO -
Remarks
INFO: ENGINE OVER ENGINE OVERSPEED HAS OCCURRED SPEED PROTECTION
OFFSET BETWEEN CAMSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT
CAMSHAFT SPEED SIGNAL FAILURE
ONLY
ENGINE RUNS WITH CAMSHAFT SPEED
Description
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 25
Warning light
EDC f 10056
EDC f 10055
CYLINDER 6 BIP
CYLINDER 5 BIP
CYLINDER 4 BIP
CYLINDER 3 BIP
CYLINDER 2 BIP
CYLINDER 1 BIP
INJECTION SYSTEM
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B Remarks
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook SEARCH FAILURE
CYLINDER 6 BIP
SEARCH FAILURE
CYLINDER 5 BIP
SEARCH FAILURE
CYLINDER 4 BIP
SEARCH FAILURE
CYLINDER 3 BIP
SEARCH FAILURE
CYLINDER 2 BIP
SEARCH FAILURE
CYLINDER 1 BIP
COILS --- ---> NOT DETECTED BY POWER STAGE)
SING VALVE TO JAM, SHORT CIRCUIT OF SOME
VALVE (BAD RESPONSE TIMES, FOULING CAU -
CABLE HARNESS OR DEFECTIVE INJECTION
BAD TRANSITION RESISTANCES IN CONTACTS,
HYDRAULIC INSTABILITIES IN FUEL SYSTEM,
COILS --- ---> NOT DETECTED BY POWER STAGE)
SING VALVE TO JAM, SHORT CIRCUIT OF SOME
VALVE (BAD RESPONSE TIMES, FOULING CAU -
CABLE HARNESS OR DEFECTIVE INJECTION
BAD TRANSITION RESISTANCES IN CONTACTS,
HYDRAULIC INSTABILITIES IN FUEL SYSTEM,
COILS --- ---> NOT DETECTED BY POWER STAGE)
SING VALVE TO JAM, SHORT CIRCUIT OF SOME
VALVE (BAD RESPONSE TIMES, FOULING CAU -
CABLE HARNESS OR DEFECTIVE INJECTION
BAD TRANSITION RESISTANCES IN CONTACTS,
HYDRAULIC INSTABILITIES IN FUEL SYSTEM,
COILS --- ---> NOT DETECTED BY POWER STAGE)
SING VALVE TO JAM, SHORT CIRCUIT OF SOME
VALVE (BAD RESPONSE TIMES, FOULING CAU -
CABLE HARNESS OR DEFECTIVE INJECTION
BAD TRANSITION RESISTANCES IN CONTACTS,
HYDRAULIC INSTABILITIES IN FUEL SYSTEM,
COILS --- ---> NOT DETECTED BY POWER STAGE)
SING VALVE TO JAM, SHORT CIRCUIT OF SOME
VALVE (BAD RESPONSE TIMES, FOULING CAU -
CABLE HARNESS OR DEFECTIVE INJECTION
BAD TRANSITION RESISTANCES IN CONTACTS,
HYDRAULIC INSTABILITIES IN FUEL SYSTEM,
COILS --- ---> NOT DETECTED BY POWER STAGE)
SING VALVE TO JAM, SHORT CIRCUIT OF SOME
VALVE (BAD RESPONSE TIMES, FOULING CAU -
CABLE HARNESS OR DEFECTIVE INJECTION
BAD TRANSITION RESISTANCES IN CONTACTS,
HYDRAULIC INSTABILITIES IN FUEL SYSTEM,
INFO: TORQUE LIMITATION DUE TO FUEL QUANTITY LIMITATION ACTIVE POWER REDCUTION DUE TO LIMITING BECAUSE OF INJEC FUEL QUANTITY TION SYSTEM ERRORS
Description
REPLACE INJECTOR VALVE
IN CONTACTS AND CABLE HARNESS,
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM, CHECK RESISTANCES
REPLACE INJECTOR VALVE
IN CONTACTS AND CABLE HARNESS,
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM, CHECK RESISTANCES
REPLACE INJECTOR VALVE
IN CONTACTS AND CABLE HARNESS,
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM, CHECK RESISTANCES
REPLACE INJECTOR VALVE
IN CONTACTS AND CABLE HARNESS,
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM, CHECK RESISTANCES
REPLACE INJECTOR VALVE
IN CONTACTS AND CABLE HARNESS,
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM, CHECK RESISTANCES
REPLACE INJECTOR VALVE
IN CONTACTS AND CABLE HARNESS,
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM, CHECK RESISTANCES
ERROR.
FOLLOW TROUBLESHOOTING OF THIS ROOT
SHOULD ALSO BE IN THE FAILURE MEMORY.
TRIGGERING THE TORQUE LIMITATION
RED DUE TO ACTUAL DEFECT, THE FAILURE
NO ACTIONS NECESSARY DUE TO THIS FAILURE ALONE. IF POWERREDUCTION OCCUR -
Fault codes
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
EDC f 10054
EDC f 10053
EDC f 10052
EDC f 10051
EDC f 6009E
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
26 327B-330B
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
EDC f 10067
EDC f 10066
EDC f 10065
EDC f 10064
EDC f 10063
EDC f 10062
EDC f 10061
Codes list
INJECTOR CYLINDER 1
INJECTOR CYLINDER 6
INJECTOR CYLINDER 5
INJECTOR CYLINDER 4
INJECTOR CYLINDER 3
INJECTOR CYLINDER 2
INJECTOR CYLINDER 1
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
1 WARNING
INJECTOR CYLINDER
6 FAILURE
INJECTOR CYLINDER
5 FAILURE
INJECTOR CYLINDER
4 FAILURE
INJECTOR CYLINDER
3 FAILURE
INJECTOR CYLINDER
2 FAILURE
INJECTOR CYLINDER
1 FAILURE
INJECTOR CYLINDER
Description
TOR
TOR
TOR
TOR
OR INSIDE INJECTOR
BROKEN WIRE OR DISCONNECTION OF WIRING
ECU PROBLEMS ALSO POSSIBLE
REASONS CAN CAUSE THE DEFECT, INTERNAL
--- DEPENDING ON THE PATTERN, VARIOUS
--- DEFECTIVE COIL OF INJECTOR
AND CLEAN THE INTAKE SYSTEM.
ECU
CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJECTOR.
SIGNALS, REPLACE
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND THE INJECTION
TOR.
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND REPLACE INJEC -
SIGNALS, REPLACE
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND THE INJECTION
ECU
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND REPLACE INJEC TOR.
ECU PROBLEMS ALSO POSSIBLE --- SEE MAX FAILURE. CHECK THE AIR FILTER
REASONS CAN CAUSE THE DEFECT, INTERNAL
--- DEPENDING ON THE PATTERN, VARIOUS
--- DEFECTIVE COIL OF INJECTOR
AND CLEAN THE INTAKE SYSTEM.
SIGNALS, REPLACE
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND THE INJECTION
ECU
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND REPLACE INJEC TOR.
ECU PROBLEMS ALSO POSSIBLE --- SEE MAX FAILURE. CHECK THE AIR FILTER
REASONS CAN CAUSE THE DEFECT, INTERNAL
--- DEPENDING ON THE PATTERN, VARIOUS
--- DEFECTIVE COIL OF INJECTOR
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC TOR
SIGNALS, REPLACE
AND CLEAN THE INTAKE SYSTEM.
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND THE INJECTION
ECU
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND REPLACE INJEC TOR.
ECU PROBLEMS ALSO POSSIBLE --- SEE MAX FAILURE. CHECK THE AIR FILTER
REASONS CAN CAUSE THE DEFECT, INTERNAL
--- DEPENDING ON THE PATTERN, VARIOUS
--- DEFECTIVE COIL OF INJECTOR
AND CLEAN THE INTAKE SYSTEM.
SIGNALS, REPLACE
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND THE INJECTION
ECU
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND REPLACE INJEC -
TOR.
ECU PROBLEMS ALSO POSSIBLE --- SEE MAX FAILURE. CHECK THE AIR FILTER
REASONS CAN CAUSE THE DEFECT, INTERNAL
--- DEPENDING ON THE PATTERN, VARIOUS
--- DEFECTIVE COIL OF INJECTOR
AND CLEAN THE INTAKE SYSTEM.
SIGNALS, REPLACE
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND THE INJECTION
ECU
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND REPLACE INJEC -
TOR.
TOR
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
Fault codes
ECU PROBLEMS ALSO POSSIBLE --- SEE MAX FAILURE. CHECK THE AIR FILTER
REASONS CAN CAUSE THE DEFECT, INTERNAL
--- DEPENDING ON THE PATTERN, VARIOUS
--- DEFECTIVE COIL OF INJECTOR
MAX FAILURE. CHECK THE AIR FILTER
AND CLEAN THE INTAKE SYSTEM.
--- SEE
Remarks
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 27
Warning light
STOP!
WARNING!
EDC f 1006E
EDC f 1006C
EDC f 1006B
EDC f 1006A
EDC f 10069
EDC f 10068
Codes list
INJECTIONS
INJECTOR CYLINDER 6
INJECTOR CYLINDER 5
INJECTOR CYLINDER 4
INJECTOR CYLINDER 3
INJECTOR CYLINDER 2
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
CHED
MINIMUM INJECTIONS NUMBER NOT REA -
6 WARNING
INJECTOR CYLINDER
5 WARNING
INJECTOR CYLINDER
4 WARNING
INJECTOR CYLINDER
3 WARNING
INJECTOR CYLINDER
2 WARNING
INJECTOR CYLINDER
Description
SEE INDIVIDUAL INJECTOR AND INJECTION--BANK ERRORS (INJVLVCYL... AND INJVLVBNK...) WHICH HAVE TRIGGERD THE SHUT---OFF OR ERROR IN THE COMPONENT
SHUT---OFF OR ERROR IN THE COMPONENT
CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJECTOR.
CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJECTOR.
CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJECTOR.
CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJECTOR.
CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJECTOR.
Fault codes
SEE INDIVIDUAL INJECTOR AND INJECTION--BANK ERRORS (INJVLVCYL... AND INJVLVBNK...) WHICH HAVE TRIGGERD THE
OR INSIDE INJECTOR
BROKEN WIRE OR DISCONNECTION OF WIRING
OR INSIDE INJECTOR
BROKEN WIRE OR DISCONNECTION OF WIRING
OR INSIDE INJECTOR
BROKEN WIRE OR DISCONNECTION OF WIRING
OR INSIDE INJECTOR
BROKEN WIRE OR DISCONNECTION OF WIRING
OR INSIDE INJECTOR
BROKEN WIRE OR DISCONNECTION OF WIRING
Remarks
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
28 SECTION 3 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
EDC f 10091
EDC f 2007C
EDC f 1007F
EDC f 1007C
EDC f 10073
EDC f 10071
Codes list
PRESSURE
BOOST
HARDWARE
ECU
INJECTION
ECU HARDWARE
2
INJECTOR BANK
1
INJECTOR BANK
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B --- SHORT CIRCUIT OF LOW---SIDE TO GROUND
PROBLEM DUE TO SOFTWARE BUG
ECU OR ’TESTMODE’ TAKES TOO LONG --- DEFECTIVE SPI ---BUS PARTICIPANT, TIMING
ECU
--- INTERNAL FAILURE OF
--- DEFECTIVE
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE.
--- CLOCK ERROR OR IRRUPTON OF THE
ECU PROBLEM
REASONS CAN CAUSE THE DEFECT, INTERNAL
--- DEPENDING ON THE PATTERN, VARIOUS
IN INJECTOR CABLE.
--- SHORT CIRCUIT OF LOW---SIDE TO GROUND
OR GROUND.
ECU PROBLEM --- SHORT CIRCUIT OF HIGH---SIDE TO BATTERY
REASONS CAN CAUSE THE DEFECT, INTERNAL
--- DEPENDING ON THE PATTERN, VARIOUS
IN INJECTOR CABLE.
OR GROUND.
--- SHORT CIRCUIT OF HIGH---SIDE TO BATTERY
Remarks
DEFECTIVE ECU
ECU
ECU
EDC.
EDC CORRECTLY NIMA CODES AND A PRO -
REPLACE ECU IF PROBLEM REOCCURS
PER DATASET
WITH CORRECT
--- TRY TO FLASH THE
REPLACE
PER DATASET, IF DEFECT PERSISTS:
--- CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY OR REPLACE ECU IF PROBLEM REOCCURS. --- RESET ECU. IF NO RECOVERY, REPLACE ECU. --- CHECK ’TESTMODE’ PARAMETERS OR REPLACE ECU IF PROBLEM REOCCURS --- REPLACE ECU IF PROBLEM REOCCURS (SEND IN ECU FOR INVESTIGATION) --- TRY TO FLASH THE EDC CORRECTLY (INCLUDING EEPROM INITIALIZATION) WITH CORRECT NIMA CODES AND A PRO -
SIGNALS, REPLACE
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND THE INJECTION
TOR.
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
TOR.
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
SIGNALS, REPLACE
--- CHECK THE WIRING AND THE INJECTION
TOR.
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
TOR.
--- CHECK THE WIRING OR REPLACE INJEC -
Fault codes
BOOST PRESSURE REPLACE ECU IF PROBLEM REOCCURS DEFECTIVE ECU ACTUATOR CURRENT LOOK FOR ERRORS OF THE ANALOG/DIGIANALOG/DIGITAL COVERSION IS NOT POSSIBLE FAILURE TAL CONVERTER (DFP_ADCMON)
FIC FAILURE (2)
ECU HARDWARE FOR INJECTION: CY33X CHIP SPECI-
MED
--- NIMA CODES NOT PROGRAMMED CORREC FAILURE IN INJECTLY, WRONG PROGRAMMING/FLASHING OF THE EDC (INITIALIZATION OF EEPROM), INTER TION QUANTITY ADJUSTMENT (NIMA NAL DEFECT OF THE EDC. --- INVALID NIMA CODE HAS BEEN PROGRAMPROGRAMMING)
FIC FAILURE (1)
ECU HARDWARE FOR INJECTION: CY33X CHIP SPECI-
FAILURE
INJECTOR BANK 2
FAILURE
INJECTOR BANK 1
Description
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 29
Warning light
EDC f 1009B
EDC f 1009A
TURBINE
TURBOCHARGER
TURBOCHARGER
TURBOCHARGER
TURBINE
PRESSURE
BOOST
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
PRESSURE
ATMOSPHERIC
AT NORMAL
TURBINE OVERSPEED
TURBOCHARGER CONTROL TURBO SPEED FAILURE
TURBOCHARGER CONTROL BOOST PRESSURE FAILURE
TURBOCHARGER CONTROL FAILURE
TURBINE SPEED SENSOR FAILURE
BOOST PRESSURE ACTUATOR SHORT TO BATTERY
Description
TSSCD_IMPPERREV_C ETC.),
MAX FAILURE. ADDITIONALLY A BLOC-
DETERMINE WHICH FAULT PATH HAS SET FID AND RESOLVE THE PROBLEM CAU -
SEE MAX FAILURE
TER AND CLEAN THE INTAKE SYSTEM.
CORRECT FUNCTIONING, ENSURE CORRET
PCR APPLICATION --- SEE MAX FAILURE. CHECK THE AIR FIL -
THE BOOST PRESSURE ACTUATOR FOR
--- CHECK BOOST PRESSURE SENSING AND
SING THIS ORIGINAL DEFECT.
THE
TURBINE SPEED SIGNALS (PULSES), REPLA CE SENSOR
ED SENSOR
TION, CHECK FOR PLAUSIBLITY OF RAW FROM RAW SIGNAL, DEFECTIVE TURBINE SPE -
QUATE APPLICATION OF SPEED EVALUATION
CLOGGED AIR FILTER LEADING TO LOW INTAKE CHECK, CLEAN OR REPLACE AIR FILTER, CHECK APPLICATION OF SPEED EVALUA PRESSURE AND TURBINE OVERSPEED, INADE -
SEE MAX FAILURE
INTAKE COULD CAUSE UNDERBOOST.
KED AIR FILTER OR EXCESSIVE DEBRIS IN THE
--- SEE
CATION
VGT), INADEQUATE PCR GOVERNOR APPLI-
DEFECTIVE BOOST PRESSURE ACTUATOR (E.G.
--- INACCURATE BOOST PRESSURE SENSING,
SOR SIGNALS OR DEFECTIVE SENSORS ETC.
APPLICATION DEPENDENT: IMPLAUSIBLE SEN-
OF RAW TURBINE SPEED SIGNALS (PULSES),
SPEED SENSOR
REPLACE SENSOR
TURBO CHARGER, CHECK FOR PLAUSIBLITY
--- CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF
SENSOR
--- DEFECTIVE TURBO CHARGER OR TURBINE
TION OR ACTUATOR)
GER REGULATOR FUNCTIONALITY (APPLICA -
FAILURES (DFP_PCRTRBIV_MP), REPLACE
PCR
SPEED SIGNALS (PULSES), LOOK FOR
BINE SPEED SENSOR, TURBINE OVERSPEED DUE TO MALFUNCTIONING PRESSURE CHAR -
CHECK FOR PLAUSIBLITY OF RAW TURBINE
TION (E.G.
--- CHECK APPLICATION OF SPEED EVALUA -
TOR
CHECK OF WIRING, REPLACE PWM ACTUA -
Fault codes
LUATION FROM RAW SIGNAL, DEFECTIVE TUR -
--- INADEQUATE APPLICATION OF SPEED EVA -
SHORT CIRCUIT OF WIRING TO EXTERNAL SOURCE OR INSIDE PWM ACTUATOR
Remarks
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
EDC f 10099
EDC f 10098
EDC f 10093
EDC f 10092
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
30 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
EDC f 100B5
EDC f 100B3
EDC f 100B1
EDC f 30092
EDC f 20092
EDC f 1009E
Codes list
CAN LINE
CAN C BUS
CAN A BUS
PRESSURE
BOOST
PRESSURE
BOOST
TORQUE REDUCTION
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B Remarks
CAN MESSAGE VM2EDC TIMEOUT
CAN C BUS OFF
CAN A BUS OFF
TEMPERATURE
LOAD OR HIGH
BOOST PRESSURE POWER STAGE OPEN
BOOST PRESSURE ACTUATOR SHORT TO GROUND
ECU TEMPE-
VGT ACTUATOR
CAN CONTROLLER
CAN CONTROLLER
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF VEHICLE CONTROL MODULE , UNDERVOLTAGE OF VCM, MISSING VCM, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE VCM IS DISCONNECTED OR BRO KEN. SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING.
WITH ERRONEOUS MESSAGES.
TACTS OR DEFECTIVE
DEFECTIVE NETWORK CONNECTION AND CON-
MENTS), BAD TERMINATION RESISTORS,
WRONG CONFIGURATION OF CAN TIMING (PRESCALER, SYNCHRONIZATION JUMP WIDTH, SAMPLING, PROPAGATION AND PHASE SEG-
WITH ERRONEOUS MESSAGES.
TACTS OR DEFECTIVE
DEFECTIVE NETWORK CONNECTION AND CON-
MENTS), BAD TERMINATION RESISTORS,
WRONG CONFIGURATION OF CAN TIMING (PRESCALER, SYNCHRONIZATION JUMP WIDTH, SAMPLING, PROPAGATION AND PHASE SEG-
WIRING, POWER STAGE OR
RATURE AND HIGH LOAD OR DEFECTIVE
--- HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE, HIGH
DEFECTIVE RELAY
--- BROKEN OR DISCONNECTED WIRING,
SHORT CIRCUIT OF WIRING TO GROUND OR INSIDE PWM
TORQUE REDUCTION ACTIVE POWER REDUCTION DUE TO SMOKE DUE TO SMOKE LIMITATION LIMITATION
Description
FOLLOW TROUBLESHOOTING OF
PWM --- CHECK WIRING, POWER STAGE AND
VGT
CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECTS CONNECTION OF THE VCM TO THE NETWORK, CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE VCM CAN CONTROLLER AND ITS VOLTAGE SUPPLY. CHECK WIRING.
PARTICIPANT.
CATION FOR ERRONEOUS BEHAVIOUR OF A
EXTERNAL SOURCE, GROUND OR
AND CONTACTS.
SHORT CIRCUITS TO CAN HIGH TO LOW.MONITOR CAN COMMUNI-
RESISTORS AND NETWORK CONNECTION
DWARE COMPATIBILITY, CHECK TERMINATION
CHECK TIMING CONFIGURATION WITH HAR -
PARTICIPANT.
CATION FOR ERRONEOUS BEHAVIOUR OF A
EXTERNAL SOURCE, GROUND OR
AND CONTACTS.
SHORT CIRCUITS TO CAN HIGH TO LOW.MONITOR CAN COMMUNI-
RESISTORS AND NETWORK CONNECTION
DWARE COMPATIBILITY, CHECK TERMINATION
CHECK TIMING CONFIGURATION WITH HAR -
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
--- CHECK OF WIRING, REPLACE
TOR
CHECK OF WIRING, REPLACE PWM ACTUA -
THIS ROOT ERROR.
MEMORY.
TION SHOULD ALSO BE IN THE FAILURE
FAILURE TRIGGERING THE TORQUE LIMITA -
OCCURRED DUE TO ACTUAL DEFECT, THE
NO ACTIONS NECESSARY DUE TO THIS FAILURE ALONE. IF POWER REDUCTION
Fault codes
SECTION 3
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 31
Warning light
EDC f 200C2
EDC f 100C8
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
CAN MESSAGE TIMEOUT ETC2 (FROM ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER)
BC OR VCM CAN CONTROLLER AND CHECK WIRING.
CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECTS CONNECTION OF THE BC TO THE NETWORK, CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE BC CAN CONTROLLER AND ITS VOLTAGE SUPPLY. CHECK WIRING.
ITS VOLTAGE SUPPLY.
THE
WORK, CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF
CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECT CONNECTION OF THE BC OR VCM TO THE NET -
CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION, CHECK CAN CONFIGURATION, ENSURE PROPER CONNECTION OF THE EDC TO THE NET WORK, REPLACE EDC
Fault codes
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF GEARBOX CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECTS CONCONTROL UNIT , UNDERVOLTAGE OF ETC, NECTION OF THE ETC TO THE NETWORK, MISSING ETC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE ETC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT ETC CAN CONTROLLER AND ITS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT IN WIRING. SUPPLY. CHECK WIRING.
CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECTS CONNECTION OF THE VCM/BC TO THE NET WORK, CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE VCM/BC CAN CONTROLLER AND ITS VOLTAGE SUPPLY. CHECK WIRING.
CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECTS CONNECTION OF THE TC TO THE NETWORK, CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE TC CAN CONTROLLER AND ITS VOLTAGE SUP PLY. CHECK WIRING.
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF GEARBOX CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECTS CONCONTROL UNIT , UNDERVOLTAGE OF ETC, NECTION OF THE ETC TO THE NETWORK, MISSING ETC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE ETC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT ETC CAN CONTROLLER AND ITS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT IN WIRING. SUPPLY. CHECK WIRING.
CUIT IN WIRING.
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF BODY COMPUTER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF BC, MISSING BC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE BC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT CIR -
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF BODY COMPUTER OR VEHICLE CONTROL MODULE , UNDERVOLTAGE OF BC OR VCM, MISSING BC OR VCM, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE BC OR VCM IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING.
LER DEFECTIVE
DISTURBED CAN, INCORRECT CONFIGURA TION OF THE CAN, EDC IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE NETWORK, EDC CAN CONTROL -
Remarks
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANTIMEOUT ACTIVE TSC1--- TE (TORQUE/ SMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING SPEED CONTROL THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. REQUEST FROM TRANSMISSION CON- SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING. TROLLER TO ENGINE) CAN MESSAGE DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF VEHICLE TIMEOUT ACTIVE CONTROL MODULE OR BODY COMPUTER , TSC1--- VE (TORQUE/ UNDERVOLTAGE OF VCM/BC, MISSING VCM/ SPEED CONTROL BC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE VCM/ REQUEST FROM BC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT VCM/BC TO CIRCUIT IN WIRING. ENGINE)
CAN MESSAGE
CAN MESSAGE TIMEOUT ETC1 (FROM ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER)
CAN MESSAGE TIMEOUT BC2EDC2 (FROM BODY COMPUTER)
CAN MESSAGE TIMEOUT CCVS (FROM BODY COMPUTER OR VCM)
CAN TRANSMIT MESSAGE TIMEOUT
Description
SECTION 3
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
EDC f 100C7
EDC f 100C2
EDC f 200B4
EDC f 100BD
EDC f 100B7
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
32 327B-330B
Warning light
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
EDC f 400C8
EDC f 400C7
EDC f 300C8
EDC f 300C7
EDC f 200C8
EDC f 200C7
Codes list
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
CAN LINE
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B Fault codes
TSC1--- VR (TOR QUE/SPEED CONTROL REQUEST FROM VCM/BC TO RETARDER)
TIMEOUT INACTIVE
CAN MESSAGE
DER)
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING.
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANTSC1--- TR (TORQUE/ SMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF SPEED CONTROL TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING REQUEST FROM THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. TRANSMISSION CONSHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING. TROLLER TO RETAR -
TIMEOUT INACTIVE
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANTIMEOUT INACTIVE TSC1--- TE (TORQUE/ SMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING SPEED CONTROL THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. REQUEST FROM TRANSMISSION CON- SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING. TROLLER TO ENGINE) CAN MESSAGE DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANTIMEOUT INACTIVE TSC1--- VE (TORQUE/ SMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING SPEED CONTROL THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. REQUEST FROM SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING. VCM/BC TO ENGINE) CAN MESSAGE
CAN MESSAGE
DER)
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING.
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING.
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING.
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER , UNDERVOLTAGE OF TC, MISSING TC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE TC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT CIRCUIT IN WIRING.
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF GEARBOX CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECTS CONTIMEOUT ACTIVE NECTION OF THE ETC TO THE NETWORK, TSC1--- VR (TORQUE/ CONTROL UNIT , UNDERVOLTAGE OF ETC, MISSING ETC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE SPEED CONTROL ETC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT ETC CAN CONTROLLER AND ITS VOLTAGE REQUEST FROM SUPPLY. CHECK WIRING. VCM/BC TO RETAR - CIRCUIT IN WIRING.
CAN MESSAGE
DER)
TIMEOUT ACTIVE
Remarks
DEFECTIVE CAN CONTROLLER OF GEARBOX CHECK PRESENCE AND CORRECTS CONTSC1--- TR (TORQUE/ CONTROL UNIT , UNDERVOLTAGE OF ETC, NECTION OF THE ETC TO THE NETWORK, SPEED CONTROL MISSING ETC, CAN CABLE CONNECTING THE CHECK CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE REQUEST FROM ETC IS DISCONNECTED OR BROKEN. SHORT ETC CAN CONTROLLER AND ITS VOLTAGE TRANSMISSION CONCIRCUIT IN WIRING. SUPPLY. CHECK WIRING. TROLLER TO RETAR -
CAN MESSAGE
Description
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 33
Warning light
EDC f 100D6
EDC f 100D5
ECU HARDWARE
HARDWARE
ECU
HARDWARE
ECU
RECOVERY
ECU
HARDWARE
ECU
HARDWARE
ECU
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
---
ECU HARDWARE: TPU MONITORING
ECU HARDWARE: SHUT OFF DURING INITIALIZATION
ECU HARDWARE: MICROCONTROLLER WATCHDOG FAILURE
LOCKED
ECU RECOVERY
ECU HARDWARE: EEPROM FAILURE
TION FAILURE
ECU HARDWARE: SPI COMMUNICA -
Description
TIMEBASE
ELECTRONIC DISTURBANCES, WRONG TPU
PROBLEM
ELECTRONIC DISTURBANCES, INTERNAL ECU
DEFECTIVE MONITORING MODULE OR CPU (E.G. IMPAIRED FUNCTIONING OF THE CPU CLOCK) OF THE EDC. DISTURBED SPI --- BUS.
GURATION PROBLEMS
ELECTRONIC DISTURBANCES, VARIOUS HAR DWARE DEFECTS (ECU INTERNAL) OR CONFI -
WRONG PROGRAMMING/FLASHING OF THE EDC, INTERNAL DEFECT OF THE EDC.
MUNICATION ERROR
ELECTRIC DISTURBANCES, INTERNAL DEFECT OF THE ECU LEADING TO A SPI BUS COM-
Remarks
EDC.
FAULT MEMORY. IN CASE OF A PERMANENT
ECU HAS TO BE REPLACED
IF FAILURE PERSISTS: REPLACE ECU
IF FAILURE REMAINS AFTER ECU INITIALISATION: REPLACE ECU
AND THE
ERROR THE INJECTION REMAINS BLOCKED
IGNORED AND ERROR DELETED IN THE
INJECTION REOCCURS) ERROR CAN BE
IF ERROR EXISTS ONLY TEMPORARY (I.E.
EDC. IF ERROR REMAINS, REPLACE EDC.
ERROR OCCURS REPEATEDLY, REPROGRAM
ANALYZE WHAT ERROR TRIGGERED THE RECOVERY (READ OUT LABEL HWEMON_NUMRECOVERY AND COMPARE THE VALUE WITH THE ACCORDING TABLE). IF
REPLACE
A PROPER DATASET, IF DEFECT PERSISTS:
TRY TO FLASH THE EDC CORRECTLY WITH
SENT
REPLACE ECU IF FAILURE REMAINS PRE -
Fault codes
SECTION 3
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
EDC f 100D4
EDC f 100D3
EDC f 100D2
EDC f 100D1
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
STOP!
WARNING!
STOP!
Display
34 327B-330B
Warning light
EDC f 300D3
EDC f 200D3
EDC f 100D9
EDC f 100D8
EDC f 100D7
Codes list
ECU
ECU RECOVERY
ADC
HARDWARE
ECU
SOFTWARE
ECU
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
VISIBLE
ECU RECOVERY
SUPPRESSED
ECU RECOVERY
FAILURE
---
---
ADC MONITORING
ECU HARDWARE: CONTROLLER WATCHDOG FAILURE
FAILURE
ECU SOFTWARE: VARIANT DATASET
Description
GURATION PROBLEMS
ELECTRONIC DISTURBANCES, VARIOUS HAR DWARE DEFECTS (ECU INTERNAL) OR CONFI -
GURATION PROBLEMS
ELECTRONIC DISTURBANCES, VARIOUS HAR DWARE DEFECTS (ECU INTERNAL) OR CONFI -
BUFFER OVERRUN
DISTURBED SPI --- BUS
SEE GENERAL REMARKS
Remarks
EDC. IF ERROR REMAINS, REPLACE EDC.
ERROR OCCURS REPEATEDLY, REPROGRAM
ANALYZE WHAT ERROR TRIGGERED THE RECOVERY (READ OUT LABEL HWEMON_NUMRECOVERY AND COMPARE THE VALUE WITH THE ACCORDING TABLE). IF
EDC. IF ERROR REMAINS, REPLACE EDC.
ERROR OCCURS REPEATEDLY, REPROGRAM
ANALYZE WHAT ERROR TRIGGERED THE RECOVERY (READ OUT LABEL HWEMON_NUMRECOVERY AND COMPARE THE VALUE WITH THE ACCORDING TABLE). IF
IF PERMANENT SPI ERROR IS PRESENT AND THE ECU DOES NOT LEAVE BOOT BLOCK, REPLACE ECU
DELETED AND ERROR IGNORED.
OCCURRED AND FAULT MEMORY CAN BE
IF ECU FUNCTIONS CORRECTLY AFTER RECOVERY ONLY TEMPORARY SPI ERROR
SEE GENERAL REMARKS
Fault codes
SECTION 3
STOP!
STOP!
WARNING!
WARNING!
STOP!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 35
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning light
EDC f 100E8
EDC f 100E7
HARDWARE
ECU
HARDWARE
ECU
HARDWARE
ECU
HARDWARE
ECU
ENGINE SPEED
OVERRUN
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
ECU
ECU HARDWARE: SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE 3 FAILURE
ECU HARDWARE: SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE 2 FAILURE
ECU HARDWARE: SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1 FAILURE
SENSOR AND THE
EDC
SENSOR AND THE
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook SENSOR AND THE
EDC, REPLACE EDC
FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF THE
EDC
WIRING HARNESS, ELECTRICAL FAILURE CONNECTED SENSORS OR IN THE
CONNECTED SENSORS OR IN THE
SENSOR AND THE EDC, REPLACE EDC CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE, CHECK WIRING
WIRING HARNESS, ELECTRICAL FAILURE IN
EDC INSUFFICIENT BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFECT IN
CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE, CHECK WIRING FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF THE
EXCESSIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFECT IN
EDC, REPLACE EDC
FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF THE
EDC
WIRING HARNESS, ELECTRICAL FAILURE CON-
SENSOR AND THE EDC, REPLACE EDC CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE, CHECK WIRING
FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF THE
NECTED SENSORS OR IN THE
INSUFFICIENT BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFECT IN
CONNECTED SENSORS OR IN THE
WIRING HARNESS, ELECTRICAL FAILURE IN
EXCESSIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFECT IN
EDC, REPLACE EDC CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE, CHECK WIRING
FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF THE
EDC
WIRING HARNESS, ELECTRICAL FAILURE CON-
SENSOR AND THE EDC, REPLACE EDC CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE, CHECK WIRING
NECTED SENSORS OR IN THE
CONNECTED SENSORS OR IN THE
EDC INSUFFICIENT BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFECT IN
CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE, CHECK WIRING
EDC, REPLACE EDC FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF THE
SENSOR AND THE
FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF THE
WIRING HARNESS, ELECTRICAL FAILURE IN
EDC
EXCESSIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFECT IN
THE
WIRING HARNESS, ELECTRICAL FAILURE OF
SENSOR AND THE EDC, REPLACE EDC CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE, CHECK WIRING
CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE, CHECK WIRING FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF THE
WIRING HARNESS, ELECTRICAL FAILURE OF
IF FAILURE PERSISTS AFTER REINITIALIZA TION REPLACE ECU
CHECK INJECTION RELEVANT APPLICATION, ECU
IF FAILURE PERSISTS REPLACE
Fault codes
EXCESSIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFECT IN
PROBLEM
ELECTRONIC DISTURBANCES, INTERNAL ECU
METERS, DEFECTIVE
APPLICATION OF INJECTION RELEVANT PARA -
TORQUE INCREASE VIA TESTER, WRONG
ELECTRONIC DISTURBANCES, REQUESTED
Remarks
ECU HARDWARE: THE EDC SENSOR 12V SUPPLY INSUFFICIENT BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFECT IN VOLTAGE FAILURE
REDUNDANT ENGINE SPEED IN OVERRUN MONITORING
MONITORING FAILURE
OVERRUN
Description
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
EDC f 100E6
EDC f 100E5
EDC f 100E4
EDC f 100E3
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
STOP!
STOP!
Display
36 327B-330B
Warning light
WARNING!
STOP!
STOP!
Display
EDC f 100EB
EDC f 100EA
EDC f 100E9
Codes list
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE
ECU VOLTAGE
ECU VOLTAGE
Group
V
V
V
V
V
V
327 B 335 B 330 B 340 B
FAILURE
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
TOO LOW
ECU INTERNAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE
TOO HIGH
ECU INTERNAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Description
DEFECT
AMBIENT PRESSURE SENSOR INSIDE ECU IS
INSUFFICIENT VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF A CJ940 COMPONENT: LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE, DEFEC TIVE WIRING, INTERNAL DEFECT OF THE EDC
EDC
DEFECTIVE WIRING, INTERNAL DEFECT OF THE
EXCESSIVE VOLTAGE SUPPLY OF A CJ940 COMPONENT: HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE,
Remarks
CHARGER WITHOUT
VGT)
REPLACE ECU (NOT NECESSARY IF NEVER RUNNING IN HIGH ALTITUDE AND IF TURBO -
DEFECT)
CHECK THE BATTERY FOR SUFFICIENT VOLTAGE SUPPLY, CHECK WIRING. IF DEFECT REMAINS REPLACE EDC (INTERNAL
DEFECT)
CHECK THE BATTERY FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE SUPPLY, CHECK WIRING. IF DEFECT REMAINS REPLACE EDC (INTERNAL
Fault codes
327B-330B SECTION 3 FAILURE CODES 37
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
FAILURE CODES
SECTION 3
327B-330B
TRANSMISSION FAULT CODES FAILURES CHECK ON DISPLAY If a failure is found a fault code is displayed in the code list (Figure 8). In case of multiple failures, the codes are displayed in the code list (Figure 8 and Figure 9). In case of failure concerning a refueling and/or maintenance operation the relevant fault code is displayed in the code list (Figure 9).
The warning light (Figure 10) or both warning lights (Figure 10) work according to the gravity of the failure. Figure 10
Figure 8
314A003003R
The complete list of fault codes is reported in the following pages.
292ANU055L
Figure 9
292ANU060L
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 13
f 12
f 11
Codes list
5020
12
12
12
5000
5010
FMI
SPN
TCU IS
SHIFT LEVER IS DEFECTIVE
BATTERY VOLTAGE OR VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
BROKEN
CABLE FROM SHIFT LEVER TO
TCU IS
SHIFT LEVER IS DEFECTIVE
BATTERY VOLTAGE OR VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
BROKEN
CABLE FROM SHIFT LEVER TO
DOWN
OP --- MODE: TRANSMISSION SHUT-
TRAL
TCU SHIFTS TRANSMISSION TO NEU-
DOWN
OP --- MODE: TRANSMISSION SHUT-
TRAL
TCU SHIFTS TRANSMISSION TO NEU-
Reaction of the TCU
DERATING DEVICE ACTIV
LOGICAL ERROR AT
ENGINE DERATING DEVICE AFTER SELECTING NEUTRAL, TCU TCU DETECTED NO REACTION OF ENGINE WHILE CHANGES TO OP --- MODE LIMP HOME
S
S
S
FOR THE DIRECTION
TCU DETECTED A WRONG SIGNAL COMBINATION
LOGICAL ERROR AT DIRECTION SELECT SIGNAL
S
S
S
FOR THE GEAR RANGE
TCU DETECTED A WRONG SIGNAL COMBINATION
LOGICAL ERROR AT GEAR RANGE SIGNAL
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
S
S
S
S
S
TCU TO
F --- N --- R
TCU TO
CHECK ENGINE DERATING DEVICE
LEVER POSITIONS
CHECK SIGNAL COMBINATIONS OF SHIFT
SHIFT LEVER
CHECK THE CABLES FROM
LEVER POSITIONS FOR GEAR RANGE
CHECK SIGNAL COMBINATIONS OF SHIFT
SHIFT LEVER
CHECK THE CABLES FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
Abbreviations list o.c. open circuit s.c. short circuit OP-- Mode operating mode TCU transmission control unit EEC electronic engine controller PTO power take off
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE CODES LIST
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 39
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 18
f 17
f 16
f 15
Codes list
5060
5060
5050
5040
SPN
3
4
12
12
FMI
CABLE FROM SHIFT LEVER 2 TO
TCU IS
SHIFT LEVER IS DEFECTIVE
BATTERY VOLTAGE OR VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
BROKEN
TCU IS BROKEN GEAR DEPENDENT SIGNAL
CONNECTION ---SWITCH TO
ONE OF THE CABLES FROM FEEDBACK AXLE
PROBLEM
DISCONNECTED DUE TO MECHANICAL
AXLE CAN’T BE CONNECTED OR
TCU TO
TCU TO
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
CUSTOMER SPECIFIC
GEAR
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
S
REDUCTION TO
TCU
REDUCTION DEVICE
SECTION 3
VOLTAGE
GEAR GEAR
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF
DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
S
DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
REDUCTION DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
S GEAR DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
S
REDUCTION DEVICE CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
RY VOLTAGE
S
TCU TO GEAR DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO BATTE -
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
SIGNAL FOR NOISE REDUCTION
GEAR DEPENDENT
REDUCTION DEVICE
GROUND
S
TCU
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT
S
REDUCTION TO
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF
DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
S
DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
REDUCTION DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
S GEAR DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
S
REDUCTION DEVICE
GEAR
TCU TO GEAR DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CONNECTION SWITCH
CHECK SIGNALS OF THE FEEDBACK AXLE
FEEDBACK AXLE CONNECTION SWITCH
CHECK THE CABLES FROM
LEVER POSITIONS
CHECK SIGNAL COMBINATIONS OF SHIFT
F --- N --- R
CHECK THE CABLES FROM SHIFT LEVER 2
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
S
S
S
S
S
S
Possible steps to repair
CLE GROUND CUSTOMER SPECIFIC
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
DOWN IF SELECTOR ACTIV
OP --- MODE: TRANSMISSION SHUT-
TRAL IF SELECTOR ACTIV
TCU SHIFTS TRANSMISSION TO NEU-
Reaction of the TCU
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO VEHI-
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
FOR NOISE REDUCTION
S.C. TO GROUND AT
S
S
DON’T FIT
TCU AND OUTPUT SIGNAL AXLE CONNECTION
FEEDBACK AXLE CONNECTION MEASURED BY
LOGICAL ERROR AT AXLE CONNECTION
S
S
S
FOR THE DIRECTION
TCU DETECTED A WRONG SIGNAL COMBINATION
SHIFT LEVER
LOGICAL ERROR AT DIRECTION SELECT SIGNAL 2.
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
40 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 27
f 26
f 25
f 19
Codes list
5120
5110
5110
5060
SPN
3
3
4
5
FMI GEAR DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE
TCU
VOLTAGE OR IS BROKEN
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
DEFECT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL
CABLE HAS NO CONNECTION TO
GROUND
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
DEFECT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
S
S S
S
TCU
VOLTAGE OR IS BROKEN
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
DEFECT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL
CABLE HAS NO CONNECTION TO
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
THE MEASURED VOLTAGE IS TOO HIGH:
TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE OR O.C. AT RETARDER
S
S
S
THE MEASURED VOLTAGE IS TOO LOW:
PERATURE SENSOR INPUT
S.C. TO GROUND AT TRANSMISSION SUMP TEM-
S
S S
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
THE MEASURED VOLTAGE IS TOO HIGH:
TCU USES DEFAULT TEMPERATURE OP --- MODE: NORMAL
TCU USES DEFAULT TEMPERATURE OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION,
TCU USES DEFAULT TEMPERATURE OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION,
S S
S
S S
S
S S
S
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE CHECK THE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
REDUCTION DEVICE
NO REACTION,
TCU GEAR
DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
SMISSION SUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
S
REDUCTION DEVICE TO
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF
CONNECTOR HAS NO CONNECTION TO
TCU S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE OR O.C. AT TRANS
S
DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
REDUCTION DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
CONNECTION TO TCU S GEAR DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
S
REDUCTION DEVICE
GEAR
TCU TO GEAR
DEPENDENT SIGNAL FOR NOISE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
S
S
Possible steps to repair
FOR THIS OUTPUT PIN CUSTOMER SPECIFIC
Reaction of the TCU
AT THE OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C.
REDUCTION
O.C. AT
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 41
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
WARNING!
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 31
f 2B
f 2A
f 29
f 28
Codes list
5140
5313
5130
5130
5120
SPN
3
12
4
3
4
FMI
GROUND
TCU
GROUND
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
S S S
TCU
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook VOLTAGE OR HAS NO CONTACT
CONTROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH
WHILE NOT INCHING: NO CHANGE OP --- MODE: NORMAL
TO NEUTRAL
DURING INCHING MODE: TCU SHIFTS
TCU USES DEFAULT VALUE OP --- MODE: NORMAL
TCU USES DEFAULT VALUE OP --- MODE: NORMAL
TCU USES DEFAULT TEMPERATURE OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION,
Reaction of the TCU
S S
S
S S
S
S S
S
S S
S
S S
S
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE PARKING BRAKE SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE PARKING BRAKE SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CABLE HAS NO CONNECTION TO
BATTERY VOLTAGE
TCU MEASURES A VOLTAGE HIGHER THAN 7.00 V AT SPEED INPUT PIN S CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
SPEED INPUT
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE OR O.C. AT ENGINE
THE MEASURED VOLTAGE FROM
INCHSENSOR--- SIGNAL MISMATCH CCO AND CCO2 SIGNAL DONâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;T MATCH: S CABLE IS DEFECTIVE S SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
S S
S
THE MEASURED VOLTAGE IS TOO LOW:
PARKING BRAKE SENSOR INPUT
VOLTAGE OR IS BROKEN
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CABLE HAS NO CONNECTION TO
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
S.C. TO GROUND
S S S
S
THE MEASURED VOLTAGE IS TOO HIGH:
BRAKE SENSOR INPUT
PARKING
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
DEFECT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE OR O.C. AT
S
S
S
THE MEASURED VOLTAGE IS TOO LOW:
SENSOR INPUT
S.C. TO GROUND AT RETARDER TEMPERATURE
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
42 327B-330B
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 36
f 35
f 34
f 33
f 32
Codes list
5150
5150
5150
5140
5140
SPN
12
4
3
12
4
FMI
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACTED TO VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND IS
SENSOR GAP HAS THE WRONG SIZE
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
BAD CONTACT
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TCU
VOLTAGE OR HAS NO CONTACT
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CABLE HAS NO CONNECTION TO
BATTERY VOLTAGE
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
S S
SENSOR GAP HAS THE WRONG SIZE
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
BAD CONTACT
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
SPEED,
IF A FAILURE IS EXISTING AT OUTPUT
MEASURED SPEED IS ZERO CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TROL
S
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TCU MEASURES A TURBINE SPEED OVER A
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
THRESHOLD AND AT THE NEXT MOMENT THE
LOGICAL ERROR AT TURBINE SPEED INPUT
S
CONTACTED TO VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND IS
S S S
S
S S
TCU TO THE
CHECK THE SENSOR GAP
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
S
SPEED,
TCU TO THE SENSOR
IF A FAILURE IS EXISTING AT OUTPUT
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
TROL
S
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
AT SPEED INPUT PIN
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE SENSOR GAP
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
SPEED,
S S
TCU TO THE
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
SENSOR
S
S S S
S
S S
S
Possible steps to repair
IF A FAILURE IS EXISTING AT OUTPUT
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
Reaction of the TCU
TCU MEASURES A VOLTAGE LESS THAN 0.45V
S.C. TO GROUND AT TURBINE SPEED INPUT
S S S
TCU MEASURES A VOLTAGE HIGHER THAN 7.00 V AT SPEED INPUT PIN S CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
SPEED INPUT
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE OR O.C. AT TURBINE
S S
S
SPEED IS ZERO
SHOLD AND THE NEXT MOMENT THE MEASURED
TCU MEASURES A ENGINE SPEED OVER A THRE -
LOGICAL ERROR AT ENGINE SPEED INPUT
S
S
AT SPEED INPUT PIN
TCU MEASURES A VOLTAGE LESS THAN 0.45V
S.C. TO GROUND AT ENGINE SPEED INPUT
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 43
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
TCU
f 3B
f 3A
f 39
f 38
f 37
5170
5170
5160
5160
5160
SPN
4
3
12
4
3
FMI
TCU
VOLTAGE OR HAS NO CONTACT
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CABLE HAS NO CONNECTION TO
BATTERY VOLTAGE
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACTED TO VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND IS
SENSOR GAP HAS THE WRONG SIZE
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
BAD CONTACT
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TCU
VOLTAGE OR HAS NO CONTACT
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CABLE HAS NO CONNECTION TO
S
S
SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACTED TO VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND IS
AT SPEED INPUT PIN
TCU MEASURES A VOLTAGE LESS THAN 1.00V
S.C. TO GROUND AT OUTPUT SPEED INPUT
S S S
BATTERY VOLTAGE
TCU MEASURES A VOLTAGE HIGHER THAN 12.5 V AT SPEED INPUT PIN S CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
SPEED INPUT
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE OR O.C. AT OUTPUT
S S
S
MEASURED SPEED IS ZERO
THRESHOLD AND AT THE NEXT MOMENT THE
TCU MEASURES A INTERNAL SPEED OVER A
LOGICAL ERROR AT INTERNAL SPEED INPUT
S
S
AT SPEED INPUT PIN
TCU MEASURES A VOLTAGE LESS THAN 0.45V
S.C. TO GROUND AT INTERNAL SPEED INPUT
S S S
TCU MEASURES A VOLTAGE HIGHER THAN 7.00 V AT SPEED INPUT PIN S CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
SPEED INPUT
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE OR O.C. AT INTERNAL
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
SPEED,
IF A FAILURE IS EXISTING AT TURBINE
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
SPECIAL MODE FOR GEAR SELECTION
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
SPEED,
IF A FAILURE IS EXISTING AT TURBINE
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
SPECIAL MODE FOR GEAR SELECTION
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
Reaction of the TCU
S S
S
S S
S
S S S
S
S S
S
S S
S
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE SENSOR GAP
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
44 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 56
f 55
f 54
f 3E
f 3C
Codes list
5280
5270
5260
5180
5170
SPN
9
9
9
2
12
FMI
BAD CONTACT
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook BATTERY VOLTAGE
HAS CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND OR
S INTERFERENCE ON CAN --- BUS S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND
FROM ENGINE CONTROLLER
ENGINE CONF TIMEOUT TIMEOUT OF CAN ---MESSAGE ENGINE CONF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
HAS CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND OR
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
DNS1 TIMEOUT TIMEOUT OF CAN ---MESSAGE DNS1 FROM DISPLAY CONTROLLER INTERFERENCE ON CAN --BUS TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN OP --- MODE: NORMAL S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND
BATTERY VOLTAGE
HAS CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND OR
S INTERFERENCE ON CAN --- BUS S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND
SPLAY COMPUTER
S SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT S SENSOR GAP HAS THE WRONG SIZE DCT1 TIMEOUT TIMEOUT OF CAN ---MESSAGE DCT1 FROM DI-
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
SPEED,
TURBINE SPEED OR INTERNAL SPEED NOT EQUAL TO ZERO.
IF A FAILURE IS EXISTING AT TURBINE
TROL
SHIFTING HAS FINISHED,
TCU MEASURES OUTPUT SPEED ZERO AND
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
SPECIAL MODE FOR GEAR SELECTION
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
SPEED,
S S S
S S S
S S S
S
S
S
S S S
TCU TO THE
CAN --- BUS
TCU TO THE
CAN --- BUS
CAN --- BUS
CHECK CABLE TO ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK CABLE TO DISPLAY CONTROLLER
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK DISPLAY CONTROLLER
CHECK CABLE TO DISPLAY COMPUTER
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK DISPLAY COMPUTER
SENSOR
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE SENSOR GAP OF OUTPUT
SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL OF OUTPUT
CHECK THE SENSOR GAP
CHECK THE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
SENSOR
IF A FAILURE IS EXISTING AT TURBINE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
TROL
Possible steps to repair
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON- S
SPECIAL MODE FOR GEAR SELECTION
Reaction of the TCU
IF TRANSMISSION IS NOT NEUTRAL AND THE
SPEED SIGNALS
S SPEED SENSOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT S SENSOR GAP HAS THE WRONG SIZE OUTPUT SPEED ZERO DOESNâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;T FIT TO OTHER
S
MEASURED SPEED IS ZERO
THRESHOLD AND AT THE NEXT MOMENT THE
TCU MEASURES A OUTPUT SPEED OVER A
LOGICAL ERROR AT OUTPUT SPEED INPUT
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 45
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
f 6A
f 69
f 65
f 59
f 58
f 57
5450
5440
5430
5310
5300
5290
SPN
2
2
2
2
9
9
FMI
TROL
OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
Reaction of the TCU
S S S
INTERFERENCE ON
CAN ---BUS
CLUSTER CONTROLLER IS DEFECTIVE
INTERFERENCE ON
CAN --- BUS
ENGINE CONTROLLER IS DEFECTIVE
INTERFERENCE ON
CAN --- BUS
ENGINE CONTROLLER IS DEFECTIVE
S S
INTERFERENCE ON
CAN --- BUS
ENGINE CONTROLLER IS DEFECTIVE
DEFECTIVE
CAN SIGNAL FOR ACTUAL ENGINE TORQUE IS
ACTUAL ENGINE TORQUE SIGNAL
S S
QUE IS DEFECTIVE
CAN SIGNAL FOR REFERENCE OF ENGINE TOR -
REFERENCE ENGINE TORQUE SIGNAL
S S
VE
CAN SIGNAL FOR ENGINE TORQUE IS DEFECTI-
ENGINGE TORQUE SIGNAL
S S
TIVE
CAN SIGNAL FOR TEST MODE STATUS IS DEFEC-
TEST MODE SIGNAL
VOLTAGE
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND OR BATTERY
TROL
OP --- MODE:SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TROL
OP --- MODE:SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TROL
OP --- MODE:SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
TESTMODE IS ABORTED, IF ACTIVE
S S S
S S S
S S S
S S S
EEC3 TIMEOUT TIMEOUT OF CAN ---MESSAGE EEC3 FROM EEC CONTROLLER S S INTERFERENCE ON CAN --- BUS OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CONS S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN TROL S S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AN HAS
BATTERY VOLTAGE
HAS CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND OR
EEC1 TIMEOUT TIMEOUT OF CAN ---MESSAGE EEC1 FROM EEC CONTROLLER S INTERFERENCE ON CAN --- BUS S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
EEC CONTROLLER CAN --- BUS CHECK CABLE TO EEC CONTROLLER
CAN --- BUS
CAN --- BUS
CAN --- BUS
CHECK CABLE TO ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK CABLE TO ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK CABLE TO ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK CABLE TO CLUSTER CONTROLLER
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK CLUSTER CONTROLLER
CAN --- BUS
EEC CONTROLLER CAN --- BUS CHECK CABLE TO EEC CONTROLLER CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
46 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 74
f 73
f 72
f 71
f 6E
f 6B
Codes list
5490
5480
5480
5480
5470
5460
SPN
3
5
4
3
2
2
FMI
INTERFERENCE ON
CAN --- BUS
ENGINE CONTROLLER IS DEFECTIVE
K1
K1 VALVE IS
K1 VALVE IS TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
RATOR PEDAL IN IDLE POSITION
TCU USES DEFAULT SIGNAL ACCELE -
NO REACTION,
TROL
OP --- MODE:SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CON-
Reaction of the TCU
TCU
TCU
S
S
K2 VALVE IS
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TOO HIGH.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
K2
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
NO CONTACT TO
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT CLUTCH
S
S
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT.
O.C. AT CLUTCH
K1
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
OF THE
CONTACT TO ANOTHER REGULATOR OUTPUT
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
S
S
S
TOO LOW.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
K1
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO GROUND AT CLUTCH
S
S
TOO HIGH.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT CLUTCH
BATTERY VOLTAGE
HAS CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND OR
EEC2 TIMEOUT TIMEOUT OF CAN ---MESSAGE EEC2 FROM EEC CONTROLLER S INTERFERENCE ON CAN --- BUS S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND
S S
DEFECTIVE
CAN SIGNAL FOR NOMINAL FRICTION TORQUE IS
NOM FRICTION TORQUE SIGNAL
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S S
S S S CAN --- BUS
TCU
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
TO THE GEARBOX
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
TCU TO THE
EEC CONTROLLER CAN --- BUS CHECK CABLE TO EEC CONTROLLER CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK
CHECK CABLE TO ENGINE CONTROLLER
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK ENGINE CONTROLLER
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 47
Warning lamp
TCU
f 79
f 78
f 77
f 76
f 75
5500
5500
5500
5490
5490
SPN
5
4
3
5
4
FMI K2
K2 VALVE IS TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
Reaction of the TCU
TCU
TCU
K3 VALVE IS
K3 VALVE IS TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
TCU
S
S
TCU
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
NO CONTACT TO
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT.
O.C. AT CLUTCH
K3
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
OF THE
CONTACT TO ANOTHER REGULATOR OUTPUT
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
S
S
S
TOO LOW.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
K3
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO GROUND AT CLUTCH
S
S
TOO HIGH.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
K3
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
NO CONTACT TO
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT CLUTCH
S
S
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT.
O.C. AT CLUTCH
K2
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
OF THE
CONTACT TO ANOTHER REGULATOR OUTPUT
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
S
S
S
TOO LOW.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
S.C. TO GROUND AT CLUTCH
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
48 327B-330B
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 85
f 84
f 83
f 82
f 81
Codes list
5520
5520
5510
5510
5510
SPN
4
3
5
4
3
FMI K4
K4 VALVE IS
K4 VALVE IS TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
Reaction of the TCU
TCU
KV VALVE
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
S
S
S
KV VALVE
PENDING
TCU
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
OF THE
CONTACT TO ANOTHER REGULATOR OUTPUT
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
IS TOO LOW.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
KV
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO GROUND AT CLUTCH
S
S
IS TOO HIGH.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
KV
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
NO CONTACT TO
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT CLUTCH
S
S TCU
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT.
O.C. AT CLUTCH
K4
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
OF THE
CONTACT TO ANOTHER REGULATOR OUTPUT
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
S
S
S
TOO LOW.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
K4
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO GROUND AT CLUTCH
S
S
TOO HIGH.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT CLUTCH
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 49
Warning lamp
WARNING!
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 91
f 89
f 88
f 87
f 86
Codes list
5560
5530
5530
5530
5520
SPN
4
5
4
3
5
FMI
KR VALVE
KR VALVE PENDING
TCU
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
NO CONTACT TO
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook GROUND
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
DEFECT
BACKUP ALARM DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NISHES (LOOSE CONNECTION)
TCU POWER DOWN EVEN IF FAULT VA -
BACKUP ALARM WILL BE ON UNTIL
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
S
S TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE TCU
ALARM DEVICE
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF BACKUP
ALARM DEVICE TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM BACKUP
BACKUP ALARM DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK INTERNAL WIRE HARNESS OF THE
CHECK THE REGULATOR RESISTANCE 1)
GEARBOX TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
GEARBOX
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
S
S
S
CLE GROUND
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO VEHI-
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
ALARM
S.C. TO GROUND AT RELAY REVERSE WARNING
S
S TCU
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT.
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
O.C. AT CLUTCH
KR
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
OF THE
CONTACT TO ANOTHER REGULATOR OUTPUT
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
S
S
S
IS TOO LOW.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
KR
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONTACT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO GROUND AT CLUTCH
S
S
IS TOO HIGH.
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT, THE VOLTAGE AT
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
KR
REGULATOR HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
NO CONTACT TO
CABLE / CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT CLUTCH
S
S TCU
VE IS OUT OF LIMIT. PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
THE MEASURED RESISTANCE VALUE OF THE VAL -
Reaction of the TCU TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
O.C. AT CLUTCH
KV
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
50 327B-330B
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 9B
f 9A
f 93
f 92
Codes list
5590
5590
5560
5560
SPN
3
4
5
3
FMI
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
DEFECT
BACKUP ALARM DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
TCU
CONNECTOR HAS NO CONNECTION TO
DEFECT
TCU
BACKUP ALARM DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL
CONNECTION TO
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
GROUND
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
INTERNAL DEFECT
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID HAS AN
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
S
S
S
TCU
CONNECTOR HAS NO CONNECTION TO
INTERNAL DEFECT
TCU
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID HAS AN
CONNECTION TO
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
OUTPUT PIN
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C. FOR THIS
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
O.C. AT CONVERTER LOCK UP CLUTCH SOLENOID
S
S
S
CLE GROUND
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO VEHI-
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
CLUTCH SOLENOID
S.C. TO GROUND AT CONVERTER LOCK UP
S
S
S
OUTPUT PIN
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C. FOR THIS
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
O.C. AT RELAY REVERSE WARNING ALARM
S
S
S
RY VOLTAGE
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO BATTE -
WARNING ALARM
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT RELAY REVERSE
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
RETARDER NOT AVAILABLE
CONVERTER CLUTCH ALWAYS OPEN,
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
Reaction of the TCU
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE TCU
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
TCU
TCU TO THE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
TCU
TCU TO THE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
ALARM DEVICE
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF BACKUP
ALARM DEVICE TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM BACKUP
BACKUP ALARM DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
ALARM DEVICE
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF BACKUP
ALARM DEVICE TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM BACKUP
BACKUP ALARM DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 51
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f 9F
f 9E
f 9D
f 9C
Codes list
5600
5600
5600
5590
SPN
5
3
4
5
FMI
VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
INTERNAL DEFECT
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID HAS AN
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
GROUND
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
DEFECT
RETARDER SOLENOID HAS AN INTERNAL
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
TCU
CONNECTOR HAS NO CONNECTION TO
DEFECT
TCU
RETARDER SOLENOID HAS AN INTERNAL
CONNECTION TO
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
DEFECT
RETARDER SOLENOID HAS AN INTERNAL
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
Reaction of the TCU
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF RETARDER
RETARDER SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
RETARDER SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF RETARDER
RETARDER SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
RETARDER SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF RETARDER
RETARDER SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
RETARDER SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
TCU
TCU TO THE
CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
S
S
S
RY VOLTAGE
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO BATTE -
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
NOID
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT RETARDER SOLE -
S
S
S
OUTPUT PIN
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C. FOR THIS
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
O.C. AT RETARDER SOLENOID
S
S
S
CLE GROUND
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO VEHI-
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
S.C. TO GROUND AT RETARDER SOLENOID
S
S
S
RY VOLTAGE
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO BATTE -
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
UP CLUTCH SOLENOID
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT CONVERTER LOCK
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
52 327B-330B
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f A4
f A3
f A2
f A1
Codes list
5620
5610
5610
5610
SPN
4
5
3
4
FMI
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
GROUND
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
DEFECT
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID HAS AN INTERNAL
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
DEFECT
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID HAS AN INTERNAL
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
TCU
CONNECTOR HAS NO CONNECTION TO
DEFECT
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID HAS AN INTERNAL
CONNECTION TO
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
TCU
S S
S
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook GROUND
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
WARNING DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
CLE GROUND
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO VEHI-
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
S.C. TO GROUND AT WARNING SIGNAL OUTPUT
S
S
S
OUTPUT PIN
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C. FOR THIS
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
NOID
O.C. AT DIFFLOCK OR AXLE CONNECTION SOLE -
S
S
S
RY VOLTAGE
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO BATTE -
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
CONNECTION SOLENOID
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT DIFFLOCK OR AXLE
S
S
S
CLE GROUND
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO VEHI-
NECTION SOLENOID
S.C. TO GROUND AT DIFFLOCK OR AXLE CON-
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
Reaction of the TCU
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
DEVICE
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF WARNING
WARNING DEVICE TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
WARNING DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF DIFFLOCK
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF DIFFLOCK
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
SOLENOID
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF DIFFLOCK
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
DIFFLOCK SOLENOID
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 53
Warning lamp
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
5630
5620
5620
SPN
f AD 5650
f A9
f A6
f A5
Codes list
4
5
3
5
FMI
TCU
CONNECTOR HAS NO CONNECTION TO
TCU
WARNING DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONNECTION TO
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
WARNING DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
CONNECTION TO
TCU
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
TCU
CONNECTOR PIN HAS NO CONNECTION TO
DEFECT
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
S GROUND
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
DEFECT
S DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL
S
CLE GROUND
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO VEHI-
S.C. TO GROUND AT
DIFFLOCK AXLE TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
S
S DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL
S
OUTPUT PIN
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C. FOR THIS
O.C. TO GROUND AT
DIFFLOCK AXLE TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
S S
S
RY VOLTAGE
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO BATTE -
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
OUTPUT
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT WARNING SIGNAL
S S
S
OUTPUT PIN
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C. FOR THIS
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
O.C. AT WARNING SIGNAL OUTPUT
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
CUSTOMER SPECIFIC
CUSTOMER SPECIFIC
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
Reaction of the TCU
S
S
S
S S S
S
S
S
S
S
S TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU TO THE
TCU
TCU
TCU TO
DEVICE
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF FUNCTION 6
DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE TO TCU
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
FUNCTION 6 DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE RESISTANCE
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
DEVICE
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF WARNING
WARNING DEVICE TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
WARNING DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
DEVICE
CHECK THE RESISTANCE 1) OF WARNING
WARNING DEVICE TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
WARNING DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
Possible steps to repair
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
54 SECTION 3 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f B2
f B1
f AF
f AE
Codes list
5665
5660
5650
5650
SPN
2
2
5
3
FMI
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
DEFECT
CONNECTION TO
TCU
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
TCU
K1
S S S S S S
K2
S
REPLACE CLUTCH
CHECK SIGNAL AT OUTPUT SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT OUTPUT SPEED
SENSOR
SENSOR
S
S
S
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT INTERNAL SPEED
CHECK MAIN PRESSURE IN THE SYSTEM
CHECK PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
K2
CHECK SIGNAL AT OUTPUT SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT OUTPUT SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT INTERNAL SPEED
CLUTCH IS DEFECTIVE
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
K1 CHECK MAIN PRESSURE IN THE SYSTEM
CHECK PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
AXLE DEVICE
DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE TO TCU CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF DIFFLOCK
WRONG SIZE OF THE SENSOR GAP
WRONG SIGNAL AT OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
WRONG SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED SENSOR
LOW MAIN PRESSURE
LOW PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
SLIPPING CLUTCH.
TCU CALCULATES A DIFFERENTIAL SPEED AT CLOSED CLUTCH K2. IF THIS CALCULATED VALUE IS OUT OF RANGE, TCU INTERPRETS THIS AS
TCU TO CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
AXLE DEVICE
DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE TO TCU CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF DIFFLOCK
REPLACE CLUTCH
K2
S S S S
TCU TO
CHECK THE CONNECTORS FROM
DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
SENSOR
S
S
S
S S S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Possible steps to repair
CLUTCH IS DEFECTIVE
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
CUSTOMER SPECIFIC
CUSTOMER SPECIFIC
Reaction of the TCU
WRONG SIZE OF THE SENSOR GAP
WRONG SIGNAL AT OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
WRONG SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED SENSOR
LOW MAIN PRESSURE
LOW PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
SLIPPAGE AT CLUTCH
S S S S S S
SLIPPING CLUTCH.
TCU CALCULATES A DIFFERENTIAL SPEED AT CLOSED CLUTCH K1. IF THIS CALCULATED VALUE IS OUT OF RANGE, TCU INTERPRETS THIS AS
K1
CONNECTOR HAS NO CONNECTION TO
SLIPPAGE AT CLUTCH
S
DEFECT
S DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL
S
OUTPUT PIN
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C. FOR THIS
O.C. AT
DIFFLOCK AXLE TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
S
S DIFFLOCK AXLE DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL
S
RY VOLTAGE
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO BATTE -
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT
DIFFLOCK AXLE TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 55
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
TCU
f B6
f B5
f B4
f B3
5685
5680
5675
5670
SPN
2
2
2
2
FMI
K3
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
KV
S S S S S S
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
KR
REPLACE CLUTCH
CHECK SIGNAL AT TURBINE SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT TURBINE SPEED
SENSOR
SENSOR
S
S
S
S
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT INTERNAL SPEED
CLUTCH IS DEFECTIVE
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
KR CHECK MAIN PRESSURE IN THE SYSTEM
CHECK PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
WRONG SIZE OF THE SENSOR GAP
WRONG SIGNAL AT TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
WRONG SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED SENSOR
LOW MAIN PRESSURE
LOW PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
AS SLIPPING CLUTCH.
TCU CALCULATES A DIFFERENTIAL SPEED AT CLOSED CLUTCH KR. IF THIS CALCULATED VA LUE IS OUT OF RANGE, TCU INTERPRETS THIS
KR
S S S S
REPLACE CLUTCH
CHECK SIGNAL AT TURBINE SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT TURBINE SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT INTERNAL SPEED
SENSOR
S
S
KV CHECK MAIN PRESSURE IN THE SYSTEM
CHECK PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
REPLACE CLUTCH
SENSOR
CHECK SIGNAL AT TURBINE SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT TURBINE SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT INTERNAL SPEED
CHECK MAIN PRESSURE IN THE SYSTEM
CHECK PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
CLUTCH IS DEFECTIVE
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
S
S S S
S
S
S
S
S S S
WRONG SIZE OF THE SENSOR GAP
WRONG SIGNAL AT TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
WRONG SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED SENSOR
LOW MAIN PRESSURE
LOW PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
SLIPPAGE AT CLUTCH
S S S S S S
SLIPPING CLUTCH.
SLIPPAGE AT CLUTCH
KV TCU CALCULATES A DIFFERENTIAL SPEED AT CLOSED CLUTCH KV. IF THIS CALCULATED VALUE TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL IS OUT OF RANGE, TCU INTERPRETS THIS AS OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
CLUTCH IS DEFECTIVE
WRONG SIZE OF THE SENSOR GAP
WRONG SIGNAL AT TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
WRONG SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED SENSOR
LOW MAIN PRESSURE
K4
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
LOW PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
SLIPPING CLUTCH.
S S S S S S
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
TCU CALCULATED A DIFFERENCE SPEED AT TCU CALCULATES A DIFFERENTIAL SPEED AT CLOSED CLUTCH K4. IF THIS CALCULATED VALUE IS OUT OF RANGE, TCU INTERPRETS THIS AS
K4
CHECK SIGNAL AT OUTPUT SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT OUTPUT SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT INTERNAL SPEED
REPLACE CLUTCH
K4
S
K3
CHECK MAIN PRESSURE IN THE SYSTEM
CHECK PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
SENSOR
S
S
S
S S S
Possible steps to repair
CLUTCH IS DEFECTIVE
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
PENDING
IF FAILURE AT ANOTHER CLUTCH IS
TCU SHIFTS TO NEUTRAL OP --- MODE: LIMP HOME
Reaction of the TCU
WRONG SIZE OF THE SENSOR GAP
WRONG SIGNAL AT OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
WRONG SIGNAL AT INTERNAL SPEED SENSOR
LOW MAIN PRESSURE
LOW PRESSURE AT CLUTCH
SLIPPAGE AT CLUTCH
S S S S S S
SLIPPING CLUTCH.
SLIPPAGE AT CLUTCH
K3 TCU CALCULATES A DIFFERENTIAL SPEED AT CLOSED CLUTCH K3. IF THIS CALCULATED VALUE IS OUT OF RANGE, TCU INTERPRETS THIS AS
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
56 327B-330B
Warning lamp
TCU
MUX TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
5730
5720
5710
5700
SPN
f BB 5740
f 06 f BA
f B9
f B8
f B7
Codes list
2
0
0
0
0
FMI
TCU MEASURED A VOLTAGE AT DIFFERENTIAL
DEFECTIVE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH IS
BATTERY VOLTAGE OR VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE/CONNECTOR IS CONTACTED TO
CABLE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN OR
OIL FILTER IS POLLUTED
S S S S S
S
TCU TO
SENSOR CHECK SIGNAL AT TURBINE SPEED
WRONG SIGNAL AT TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
SENSOR REPLACE CLUTCH
CLUTCH IS DEFECTIVE
S
WRONG SIZE OF THE SENSOR GAP
S
WRONG SIGNAL AT ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK SIGNAL AT ENGINE SPEED
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT TURBINE SPEED
SENSOR
CHECK SENSOR GAP AT ENGINE SPEED
CHECK MAIN PRESSURE IN THE SYSTEM
LOCKUP CLUTCH
CHECK PRESSURE AT CONVERTER
(MEASURE RESITANCE)
CHECK DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
CHECK WIRING FROM
CHECK OIL FILTER
CHECK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CHECK OIL LEVEL
COOL DOWN MACHINE
CHECK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CHECK OIL LEVEL
COOL DOWN MACHINE
SENSOR
S
S
S S
S
S
S S
---
S S S
S S S
Possible steps to repair
LOW MAIN PRESSURE
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
RETARDER APPLIES IF CONFIGURED
TCU DISABLES RETARDER OP --- MODE: NORMAL
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
Reaction of the TCU
CLUTCH
LOW PRESSURE AT CONVERTER LOCKUP
INTERPRETS THIS AS SLIPPING CLUTCH.
TCU CALCULATES A DIFFERENTIAL SPEED AT CLOSED CONVERTER LOCKUP CLUTCH. IF THIS CALCULATED VALUE IS OUT OF RANGE, TCU
SLIPPAGE AT CONVERTER LOCKUP CLUTCH
S
S S
GE
PRESSURE SWITCH OUT OF THE ALLOWED RAN-
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE OIL FILTER
OVERSPEED ENGINE
SHOLD.
TARDER OIL THAT IS OVER THE ALLOWED THRE -
TCU MEASURED A TEMPERATURE IN THE RE -
OVERTEMP RETARDER
SUMP THAT IS OVER THE ALLOWED THRESHOLD.
TCU MEASURED A TEMPERATURE IN THE OIL
OVERTEMP SUMP
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
SECTION 3
WARNING!
MAINTENANCE!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 57
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
WARNING!
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
SPN
5755
5752
5751
CB
5800
f CA 5790
f C2
f C1
f C0
f BC 5745
Codes list
9
9
5
0
0
15
FMI
TCU CALCULATES AN ENGINE TORQUE OR
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL
PROGRAMMABLE: NO REACTION OR
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
Reaction of the TCU
VOLTAGE
S S S
S S S
EEC CONTROLLER CAN --- BUS CHECK CABLE TO EEC CONTROLLER
EEC CONTROLLER CAN --- BUS CHECK CABLE TO EEC CONTROLLER CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK
CHECK WIRE OF
CHECK
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND OR BATTERY
ERC1 TIMEOUT TIMEOUT OF CAN ---MESSAGE ERC1 FROM EEC CONTROLLER S INTERFERENCE ON CAN --- BUS OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CONTROL S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AN HAS
VOLTAGE
CONTACT TO VEHICLE GROUND OR BATTERY
ENGINE_RETARDER CONFIG_TIMEOUT TIMEOUT OF CAN ---MESSAGE ENGINE_RETAR DER CONFIG FROM EEC CONTROLLER S INTERFERENCE ON CAN --- BUS OP --- MODE: SUBSTITUTE CLUTCH CONTROL S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS BROKEN S CAN WIRE/CONNECTOR IS DEFECTIVE AN HAS
TORQUE ABOVE THE DEFINED THRESHOLD
TCU CALCULATES AN TRANSMISSION INPUT
TRANSMISSION INPUT TORQUE OVERLOAD
TORQUE ABOVE THE DEFINED THRESHOLD
TCU CALCULATES AN TRANSMISSION OUTPUT
TRANSMISSION OUTPUT TORQUE OVERLOAD
SHOLD
ENGINE POWER ABOVE THE DEFINED THRE -
ENGINE TORQUE OR ENGINE POWER OVERLOAD
ED ABOVE THE DEFINED THRESHOLD
TCU MESSURES AN TRANSMISSION OUTPUT SPE -
OVERSPEED OUTPUT
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
58 327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f D5
f D4
f D3
f D2
f D1
f C3
Codes list
5830
5820
5820
5810
5810
5760
SPN
2
3
4
4
3
0
FMI
V (12V DEVICE) V (24V DEVICE)
ARE CONTACTED TO VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE OR CONNECTORS ARE DEFECT AND
ARE CONTACTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
S PERMANENT POWER SUPPLY KL30 MISSING S TCU HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
S
ERROR AT VALVE POWER SUPPLY
VPS1 TCU SWITCHED ON VPS1 AND MEASURED VPS1 IS OFF OR TCU SWITCHED OFF VPS1 AND MEASURED VPS1 IS STILL ON S CABLE OR CONNECTORS ARE DEFECT AND
GHER THAN 18
V (12V DEVICE) HIGHER THAN 32.5 V (24V DEVICE)
MEASURED VOLTAGE AT POWER SUPPLY IS HI-
HIGH VOLTAGE AT BATTERY
LOWER THAN 18
WER THAN 10
MEASURED VOLTAGE AT POWER SUPPLY IS LO -
LOW VOLTAGE AT BATTERY
TCU MEASURES LESS THAN 4V AT THE PIN AU1 (5V SENSOR SUPPLY)
SORS
S.C. TO GROUND AT POWER SUPPLY FOR SEN-
TCU MEASURES MORE THAN 6V AT THE PIN AU1 (5V SENSOR SUPPLY)
FOR SENSORS
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT POWER SUPPLY
ALLOWED THRESHOLD
CONVERTER OUTPUT THAT IS OVER THE
OVERTEMP CONVERTER OUTPUT S TCU MEASURED A OIL TEMPERATURE AT THE
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL
OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL
OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL
SEE FAULT CODES NO. 21 TO 2C
SEE FAULT CODES NO. 21 TO 2C
OP ---MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
Reaction of the TCU
S
S S S
S
S S
S
S S
S
S
S
S
S S S
TCU
TCU
REPLACE
TO
TCU
TCU TCU
CHECK CONNECTORS FROM GEARBOX
CHECK CABLES FROM GEARBOX TO
CHECK FUSE
TO
CHECK CONNECTORS FROM BATTERIES
TCU
CHECK CABLES FROM BATTERIES TO
CHECK POWER SUPPLY BATTERY
TO
CHECK CONNECTORS FROM BATTERIES
TCU
CHECK CABLES FROM BATTERIES TO
CHECK POWER SUPPLY BATTERY
AU1 (SHOULD BE APPX. 5V)
CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY AT THE PIN
AU1
SENSORS, WHICH ARE SUPPLIED FROM
CHECK CABLES AND CONNECTORS TO
AU1 (SHOULD BE APPX. 5V)
CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY AT THE PIN
AU1
SENSORS, WHICH ARE SUPPLIED FROM
CHECK CABLES AND CONNECTORS TO
CHECK OIL TEMPERATURE
CHECK OIL LEVER
COOL DOWN MACHINE
Possible steps to repair
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
327B-330B FAILURE CODES 59
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Warning lamp
TCU
f E6
f D9
f D8
f D7
f D6
5880
5545
5545
5545
5840
SPN
2
5
3
4
2
FMI
ARE CONTACTED TO VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE OR CONNECTORS ARE DEFECT AND
TCU
GROUND
VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO BATTERY
DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
BATTERY VOLTAGE
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
TCU
ID REQUEST VIA CAN
CONNECTOR HAS NO CONNECTION TO
DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
CONNECTION TO
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND HAS NO
ILLEGAL
S S
S
OUTPUT PIN
TCU
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A O.C. FOR THIS
O.C. AT
DLM LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
S S
S
TERY VOLTAGE
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO BAT -
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
NAL OUTPUT
DLM LONGITUDI-
CONNECTOR PIN IS CONTACTED TO VEHICLE
DEVICE HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT
S.C. TO BATTERY VOLTAGE AT
S S
VEHICLE GROUND
CABLE IS DEFECTIVE AND IS CONTACTED TO
OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
TRANSMISSION STAY NEUTRAL
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
S S
S
S S
S
S S
TCU TO THE
TCU TO THE CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF VALVE
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
VALVE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF VALVE
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
VALVE
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF VALVE
CHECK THE CONNECTORS
S
(LOOSE CONNECTION)
TCU TO THE
VALVE
POWER DOWN EVEN IF FAULT VANISHES
CHECK THE CABLE FROM
REPLACE
TO
TCU
TCU
CHECK CONNECTORS FROM GEARBOX
CHECK CABLES FROM GEARBOX TO
CHECK FUSE
OUTPUT WILL BE ON UNTIL
S
S
S S S
Possible steps to repair
CLE GROUND
TCU
OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL
Reaction of the TCU
OUTPUT PIN, THAT LOOKS LIKE A S.C. TO VEHI-
TCU DETECTED A WRONG VOLTAGE AT THE
PUT
S PERMANENT POWER SUPPLY KL30 MISSING S TCU HAS AN INTERNAL DEFECT S.C. TO GROUND AT DLM LONGITUDINAL OUT -
S
ARE CONTACTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
ERROR VALVE POWER SUPPLY
VPS2 TCU SWITCHED ON VPS2 AND MEASURED VPS2 IS OFF OR TCU SWITCHED OFF VPS2 AND MEASURED VPS2 IS STILL ON S CABLE OR CONNECTORS ARE DEFECT AND
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
SECTION 3
WARNING!
WARNING!
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
Codes list
FAILURE CODES
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
60 327B-330B
Warning lamp
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Display
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
f F6
f F5
f F3
f F2
f F1
Codes list
5930
5930
5910
5900
5890
SPN
13
7
13
13
2
FMI
TCU HAS LOST THE CORRECT CONFIGURATION VOLATILE MEMORY
INTERFERENCE DURING SAVING DATA ON NON
AEB WAS NOT ABLE TO ADJUST CLUTCH FILLING
VOLATILE MEMORY
INTERFERENCE DURING SAVING DATA ON NON
S TCU IS BRAND NEW
S
ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS
PEDAL CALIBRATION
CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT DATA LOST OR INCH DATA LOST TCU WAS NOT ABLE TO READ CORRECT CLUTCH
S ONE OF THE AEB --- VALUES IS OUT OF LIMIT
PARAMETERS
CLUTCH FAILURE
SOMETHING OF THIS APPLICATION IS WRONG
APPLICATION ERROR
VEHICLE
S TCU IS BRAND NEW OR FROM ANOTHER
S
AND CAN’T CONTROL THE TRANSMISSION.
CONFIGURATION LOST
EEPROM FAULT TCU CAN’T READ NON VOLANTILE MEMOY S TCU IS DEFECTIVE GENERAL
Meaning of the fault code possible reason for fault detection
OP --- MODE: NORMAL NO INCHMODE AVAILABLE
FSETS USED
DEFAULT VALUES = 0 FOR
AEB OF-
OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
TRANSMISSION STAY NEUTRAL
OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
TRANSMISSION STAY NEUTRAL
OP --- MODE: TCU SHUTDOWN
TRANSMISSION STAY NEUTRAL
OP --- MODE: NORMAL
NO REACTION
Reaction of the TCU
REPLACE
TCU
S
S
S
TCU
EXECUTE
AEB
CHECK CLUTCH
REPLACE
WITH CLUSTER CONTROLLER,...)
CONFIGURATION FOR THE VEHICLE (E.G.
S REPROGRAMM THE CORRECT
S
Possible steps to repair
327B-330B SECTION 3 FAILURE CODES 61
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
62
FAILURE CODES
SECTION 3
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 4 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
ENGINE
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINES
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
WALK AROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Oil pressure control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
ELECTRONIC SYSTEM CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Electrical and electronic components . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Component location on engine right ---hand side . . 9 Component location on engine left ---hand side . . . 10 FEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 FUEL SUPPLY DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 By---pass valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Engine oil filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ASSEMBLY CLEARANCE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Injector---pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Pumping element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TIGHTENING ORDER OF GEARBOX TO ENGINE BLOCK FASTENING SCREWS . . . . . . . 53
Solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Engine Support and Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ENGINE AIR INTAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
VARIABLE GEOMETRY TURBINE (VGT) . . . . . . . 17
TROUBLESHOOTING BY SYMPTOMS . . . . . . . . 59
HOLSET HY55V (Variable Geometry Turbine) . . 19
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ACTUATOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 VGT Electromagnetic Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 ENGINE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Engine oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Engine oil filter change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Engine oil vapour filter change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Accessory drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Fuel circuit bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Fuel filter change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
EARLY CLOSING SYSTEM FOR THE INTAKE VALVES (“MILLER” Cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Engine coolant fluid change and circuit check/ cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ENGINE REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . 74
Water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Engine cooling system general diagram . . . . . . . . 30
Checks and tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Main circuit engine cooling circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Thermostat operation --- engine cooling system . . 32
REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT OF THE FLEXIBLE COUPLING JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Lubrication system outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Lubrication system outline --- Detail A . . . . . . . . . . . 36
RADIATOR GROUP REMOVAL-REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Page
Page
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL-- WATER HEAT EXCHANGER REMOVAL-REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Checking piston protrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Checking crankpin assembly clearance . . . . . . . . 120 CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Dismounting the valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
DISMANTLING THE ENGINE ON THE BENCH . 90
Checking head bearing surface on cylinder block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
REPAIR OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cylinder block Checks and measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Checking clearance between valve---stem and associated valve guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
CYLINDER LINERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Valve guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Replacing cylinder liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Replacing injector cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Checking protrusion of injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fitting and checking protrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
CRANKSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Checking cam lift and pin alignment . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Measuring main journals and crank pins . . . . . . . 102
Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Preliminary data for selecting the main and big---end journal half---shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Bushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Definition of diameter class of seat for half---shells in block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Choice of big end and main bearing half---shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fitting the valves and oil seal ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Valve springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Definition of main journal and big end diameter class (journals with nominal diameter) . . . . . . . . . 105
ROCKER SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Replacing the timing control gear and the oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Rocker arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Checking main journal installation clearance . . . . 111 Checking crankshaft end float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Piston---connecting rod assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Measuring the diameter of the pistons . . . . . . . . . 114 Conditions for correct gudgeon pin---piston coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Piston rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 CONNECTING ROD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Checking connecting rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Mounting the connecting rod â&#x20AC;&#x201C; piston assembly 118 Mounting the piston rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Fitting the big end bearing shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Fitting connecting rod --- piston assemblies in the cylinder liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Timing distribution control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Drive cog pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Drive cog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Pin double drive cog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Double drive cog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Bushing replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ASSEMBLING THE ENGINE ON THE BENCH . 132 Fitting the connecting rod---piston assembly into the cylinder liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Fitting the cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Replacing flywheel casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Replacing engine flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Fitting pump---injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Replacing rocker shaft assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Timing of timing system shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Phonic wheel timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 3
Page
Page
Adjusting the unload/intake rockers play and pump injector control rockers preload . . . . . . . . . 144
Actuator check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
COMPLETING ENGINE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . 146
Turbine body cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Check actuator excursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
TURBOCHARGER REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Variable geometry movement check . . . . . . . . . . . 148
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 5
WALK AROUND
.
The views of the engine refer to the basic version. The version used on the vehicle may differ. Figure 1
RIGHT SIDE
276A004001
1. Engine control unit --- 2. Oil sump --- 3. Braking system pump actuation --- 4. Starting motor --5. Air compressor --- 6. Fuel filter --- 7. Cylinder head cover --- 8. Air return line from intercooler --9. Alternator
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 2
LEFT SIDE
276A004002
1. Oil---water heat exchanger --- 2. Engine oil filter --- 3. Water inlet from radiator --- 4. Auxiliary drive belt --5. Not used --- 6. Air delivery pipe to intercooler --- 7. Turbocharger intake --8. Exhaust gas turbo---charger --- 9. Turbocharger exhaust --- 10. Exhaust manifold --11. Engine cooling fan circuit pump power take---off
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 7
Figure 3
TOP VIEW
276A004003
1. Thermostat --- 2. Air delivery pipe to intercooler --- 3. Exhaust gas turbo---charger --4. Exhaust manifold --- 5. Power take---off --- 6. Fuel filter --7. Cylinder head cover --- 8. Air return pipe from intercooler --- 9. Alternator
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
ELECTRONIC SYSTEM CONTROL Electrical and electronic components The engine injection system is equipped with high pressure injection system with pump---injectors operated by overhead camshaft. This engine has a high pressure type injection system with injector --- pump operated by the overhead camshaft. The electronic control unit is mounted on the engine and contains specific software for each different power calibration. No operations, except for configuration data entry (e.g. after replacing the pump---injector) can be carried out on the ECU software.
ENGINE CURSOR ENGINE
Cursor 10
INJECTOR
UIS N 31
ECU
MS 7.0
10 Liters
Many engine components must not be painted and some must be partially protected. For this reason, the best solution is not to paint the engine. Electrical and electronic components (sensors, ECU, wires, etc.) do not need to be painted and in fact may even be damaged. Specifically, in the case of EDC ECUs: --- painting will damage ECU heat exchanging properties. --- painting will damage connectors. --- painting will cover labels (which must remain intact and readable). --- painting will compromise correct operation of the environmental pressure sensor built into the ECU. Disrespect of this specifications will cancel the warranty and may cause severe problems and faults.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 9
Component location on engine right-- hand side Figure 4
276A004004A
1. Timing sensor (engine stroke) --- 2. Fuel temperature sensor --- 3. Engine Control Unit (EDC) --4. Pre---/post ---heater resistor --- 5. Supercharger air temperature and pressure sensor --6. Pumps---injectors
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Component location on engine left-- hand side Figure 5
276A004005A
1. VGT actuator solenoid valve --- 2. Not used --3. Engine coolant temperature sensor --- 4. Engine brake solenoid valve --5. Flywheel sensor (engine rpm) --- 6. Turbine speed sensor
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 11
FEEDING Fuel is supplied via a fuel pump, filter and pre --- filter, 6 pump --- injectors governed by the camshaft via rocker arms and by the electronic control unit. Figure 6
Return circuit Supply circuit
104280
1. Valve for return circuit, starts opening at 3.5 bars --- 2. Valve for return circuit, starts opening at 0.2 bars
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
FUEL SUPPLY DIAGRAM Figure 7
104242
1. Temperature sensor --- 2. Bleed valve --- 3. Secondary fuel filter --- 4. By---pass valve (0.3 P 0.4 bar) --5. Fuel supply pump --- 6. Integrated valve (3.5 bar) --- 7. Pressure relief valve (5 bar) --- 8. Fuel tank --9. Priming pump --- 10. Primary fuel filter --- 11. Check valve (opening 0.1 bar) --- 12. Heater --13. Electronic control unit --- 14. Fuel return union with valve built in (0.2 bar) --- 15. Pump---injectors
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 13
Fuel supply circuit diagram Figure 8
276C004002
1. Fuel tank filler pipe --- 2. Float --- 3. Circuit priming pump --- 4. Fuel pre---filter (on chassis) 5. EDC cooling heat exchanger --- 6. Low pressure fuel pump --- 7. Fuel filter (on engine)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Fuel pump
327B-330B
The injector---pump is composed of: pumping element, nozzle, solenoid valve.
Figure 9
Pumping element The pumping element is operated by a rocker arm governed directly by the cam of the camshaft. The pumping element is able to ensure a high delivery pressure. The return stroke is made by means of a return spring.
73547
A. Fuel inlet – B. Fuel delivery – C. By---pass nut – D. Fuel return from the pump---injectors – E. Pressure relief valve – Opening pressure: 5---8 bars Figure 10
73548
CROSS---SECTION OF THE FUEL PUMP 1. Oil and fuel leakage indicator Injector-- pump Figure 11
Nozzle Garages are authorized to perform fault diagnosis solely on the entire injection system and may not work inside the injector---pump, which must only be replaced. A specific fault ---diagnosis program, included in the control unit, is able to check the operation of each injector (it deactivates one at a time and checks the delivery of the other five). Fault diagnosis makes it possible to distinguish errors of an electrical origin from ones of a mechanical/hydraulic origin. It indicates broken pump---injectors. It is therefore necessary to interpret all the control unit error messages correctly. Any defects in the injectors are to be resolved by replacing them. Solenoid valve The solenoid, which is energized at each active phase of the cycle, via a signal from the control unit, controls a slide valve that shuts off the pumping element delivery pipe. When the solenoid is not energized, the valve is open, the fuel is pumped but it flows back into the return pipe with the normal transfer pressure of approximately 5 bars. When the solenoid is energized, the valve shuts and the fuel, not being able to flow back into the return pipe, is pumped into the nozzle at high pressure, causing the needle to lift. The amount of fuel injected depends on the length of time the slide valve is closed and therefore on the time for which the solenoid is energized. The solenoid valve is joined to the injector body and cannot be removed. On the top there are two screws securing the electrical wiring from the control unit. To ensure signal transmission, tighten the screws with a torque wrench to a torque of 1.36 – 1.92 Nm (0.136 – 0.192 kgm).
104243
1. Fuel/oil seal – 2. Fuel/diesel seal – 3. Fuel/exhaust gas seal
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 15
Figure 12
104245
For each injector replaced, hook up to the diagnostic station and, when asked by the program, enter the code punched on the injector (â&#x2020;&#x2019;) to reprogram the control unit. When checking the clearance of the rocker arms, it is important to check the injector --pump pre---load.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
ENGINE AIR INTAKE SYSTEM Figure 13
7
8
6
4
5
3 1
2
276C004003
1. Air intake --- 2. Air filter --- 3. Filter --- turbo---charger hose --- 4. Exhaust gas turbo---charger 5. Turbo---charger --- intercooler hose --- 6. Intercooler --- 7. Intercooler --- intake manifold hose 8. Intake manifold
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 17
VARIABLE GEOMETRY TURBINE (VGT) Working principle Included in the Variable Geometry Turbine (VGT) unit of the turbo---charger, there is a mobile device which, changing the area of the exhaust gas inflow section into the turbine (inflow section), controls its speed variation. Thanks to this solution, it is possible to keep gas and turbine speed high even when the engine is running at low speed. Actually, if gas is conveyed through small sections, gas flows at higher speed therefore also the turbine disk wheel rotates faster. The motion of the exhaust gas inflow section limiting device (sliding finned sleeve) is driven by lever system starter by a pneumatic actuator. The sliding sleeve is not rotating on its own axle but only shifts on its axle forward and reverse. During forward motion, its fins fit into specially provided slots worked out from the turbineâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s body. The pneumatic actuator is directly controlled by the Electronic Control Unit by means of a control valve, and uses compressed air sucked by the vehicle pneumatic system. In slow speed conditions, the device set up is in maximum closure position. Upon engine speed and load increase, the Electronic Control Unit intervenes and increases passage section to enable incoming gas to flow without increasing turbine speed. Working principle is explained in the page aside. A) A1) A2) A3)
Exhaust gas inflow Maximum inflow section (VGT completely open) Limited inflow section Minimum inflow section (VGT completely closed)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 14
000586t
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 19
HOLSET HY55V (Variable geometry turbine) Figure 15
71759
1. Air delivery to intake manifold --- 2. Compressor --- 3. Air intake--- 4. Actuator --5. Exhaust gas speed regulator --- 6. Exhaust gas intake --- 7. --- Exhaust gas outlet --- 8. Turbine Figure 16
71733
MINIMUM FLOW SECTION
71734
MAXIMUM FLOW SECTION
TURBOCOMPRESSOR CROSS---SECTION 1. Air delivery to intake manifold --- 2. Compressor --- 3. Air intake--- 4. Actuator --- 5. Exhaust gas flow rate regulator ring --- 6. Exhaust gas intake --- 7. --- Exhaust gas outlet --- 8. Turbine --9. Exhaust gas flow ---rate command fork For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 17
60753
Figure 18
60754
1. Slide guide --- 2. Compressor --- 3. Slide rod --- 4. Compressor fan --- 5. Lubrication bushings --6. Exhaust gas flow ---rate adjustment ring --- 7. Exhaust gas fan --- 8. Gas exhaust body --9. Locking rings --- 10. Oil delivery --- 11. Oil outlet --- 12. Actuator drive shaft
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 21
Figure 19
71762
Figure 20
71763
1. Guide rail --- 3. Slider guide --- 11. Oil outlet --- 12. Actuator control shaft --- 13. Actuator --14. Exhaust gas flow ---rate control fork
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
ACTUATOR ADJUSTMENT Figure 21
Stroke [mm] 72421
a. Gradient characterised by effect of external spring (4) b. Gradient characterised by effect of external (4) and internal (6) spring
71834
1. Air intake --- 2. Gasket --- 3. Piston --- 4. External spring --- 5. Internal spring command disk --6. Internal spring --- 7. O---ring --- 8. Spring holder --- 9. Stroke limit --- 10. Dust seal --- 11. Command rod
Operating principle The actuator piston connected to the command rod is piloted by compressed air entering through the air intake (1) on the upper part of the actuator. Modulating the air pressure varies the shift of the turbine command piston and rod. During its excursion the piston progressively compresses the external spring (4) until the base of the piston reaches the internal spring (6) command disk (5). Further increasing the pressure the piston interferes with the lower limit stop (10) through the disk (5). The use of two springs permits variation in the ratio between piston excursion and pressure. Approx. 85% of the rod stroke is contrasted by the external spring, whereas only 15% by the internal spring.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 23
VGT Electromagnetic Valve This is a N.C. proportional electromagnetic valve located on the front side of the engine. The electronic control unit, through a PWM signal, controls this electromagnetic valve and adjusts the supply pressure of the turbine actuator which, changing its position, modifies the inflow section of the exhaust gases onto the blades of the rotor, thus changing the speed of the same. Figure 22
7
71765
1. Service tank --- 2. Shut ---off solenoid valve --- 3. Air filter --- 4. VGT control solenoid valve --5. Not used --- 6. Turbine actuator For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM Figure 23
6
1
2
5 3
4 276C04004
1. Exhaust manifold --- 2. Exhaust gas turbo---charger --- 3. Turbo---charger --- silencer pipe --- 4. Silencer --5. Silencer --- exhaust terminal pipe --- 6. Exhaust terminal
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 25
ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM Figure 24
C A
B
C
276C04005
A. Exhaust gas arriving from the muffler --- B. Muffler --- exhaust terminal piping C. Body heating connection flanges
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
ENGINE BRAKE Working principle: By the end of compression phase (Picture C), a few grades before reaching the T.D.C., a specially provided device slightly opens up the exhaust valves, releasing this way the pressure within the cylinder. (Picture D). In this case the compression phase braking pair will be used, though not having the following return thrust on the piston. Figure 25
001413t
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 27
WORKING PRINCIPLE (ITB) By activating the engine brake, a hydraulic drive mechanism provokes slack elimination of exhaust valves. This way, due to the particular profile of the exhaust cams, the relevant rocking rod will be slightly lifted at the right time of the cycle, from the engine brake elevation ramp. As a consequence, the exhaust valves will slightly open up approaching T.D.C. at the end of compression phase, releasing compressed air from the combustion chamber.
Figure 26
A Engine brake off
B Engine brake on
C Exhaust cam d Valve elevation for engine brake
000592t For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
EARLY CLOSING SYSTEM FOR THE INTAKE VALVES (“MILLER” CYCLE) The ”Miller” system is used to reduce the maximum combustion temperature in the cylinder, which is responsible for producing nitrogen oxides (NOx). The concentration of oxygen in the combustion chamber is reduced by closing the intake valves slightly before the end of the intake stroke of the cylinder, (see detail C). Figure 27
104762
1. Exhaust cams --- 2. Intake cams --- 3. EGR lobe --- S. Exhaust pipes --- A. Intake pipes B = End of standard intake stroke C = End of intake stroke with “Miller cycle” device
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
COOLING Forced---circulation cooling is obtained by means of a centrifugal pump, controlled by the crankshaft through a Poli---V type belt. Water circulation is regulated by a thermostat. The radiator is vertical.
ENGINE 29
Figure 30
Check that the pump body has no cracks or water leaks. Otherwise replace the complete water pump Check thermostat function. In case of doubt, replace the thermostat. Water pump Figure 28
71731
ENGINE WATER PUMP
WATER PUMP SECTION Figure 29
45159
The water pump consists of: rotor, seal bearing and control pulley.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM Figure 31
274A04006
Engine cooling system general diagram 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Passenger compartment heater Not used Thermostat Radiator Engine Automatic transmission oil exchanger Expansion tank
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
tubing from passenger compartment heater to engine tubing from engine to passenger compartment heater tubing from brake coolant exchanger to thermostat tubing from thermostat to radiator tubing from radiator to engine (coolant pump) tubing from engine to automatic transmission oil exchanger tubing from automatic transmission oil exchanger to brake coolant exchanger
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 31
Main circuit engine cooling circuit Figure 32
(b) 1 (a) (d) 2
(c)
3
1. 2. 3.
Radiator Thermostat Automatic transmission oil exchanger
(a) (b) (c) (d)
tubing from engine to automatic transmission oil exchanger tubing from thermostat to radiator tubing from radiator to engine (coolant pump) tubing from automatic transmission oil exchanger to engine
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
276C04007
32
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Thermostat operation -- engine cooling system Thermostat closed Figure 33
274A04008
1. Tubing from radiator to engine (coolant pump) --- 2. Tubing from expansion tank to engine (coolant pump) --- 3. Tubing from passenger compartment heater to engine --- 4. Tubing from engine to passenger compartment heater --- 5. Engine input --- 6. Engine output --- 7. Tubing from engine to automatic transmission oil exchanger --- 8. Tubing from brake coolant exchanger to thermostat --- 9. Breather --10. Tubing from thermostat to radiator A. Engine --- B. Automatic transmission exchanger --- C. Thermostat
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 33
Thermostat open Figure 34
274A04009
1. Tubing from radiator to engine (coolant pump) --- 2. Tubing from expansion tank to engine (coolant pump) --- 3. Tubing from passenger compartment heater to engine --- 4. Tubing from engine to passenger compartment heater --- 5. Engine input --- 6. Engine output --- 7. Tubing from engine to automatic transmission oil exchanger --- 8. Tubing from brake coolant exchanger to thermostat --- 9. Breather --10. Tubing from thermostat to radiator A. Engine --- B. Automatic transmission exchanger --- C. Thermostat
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
LUBRICATION Figure 35
71578
The forced---circulation lubrication is obtained by means of gear pump. The pump is driven via the cog (1) by the crankshaft (2). A heat exchanger and the oil filter are installed on the lubrication system. Figure 36
60651
The heat exchanger houses the by---pass valve with opening pressure at 3 bar and the thermostatic valve that cuts---in when temperature exceeds 82.5° C.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 35
Lubrication system outline Figure 37
Gravity fed 60628 oil Oil under pressure 1. Oil sump --- 2. Crankshaft --- 3. Engine oil---water heat exchanger --- 4. Engine oil filter --5. Turbocompressor --- 6. Camshaft --- 7. Valve timing gears 1780320
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Lubrication system outline -- Detail A Figure 38
Gravity fed oil Oil under pressure
B -- to cylinders 1 -- 2 -- 3 C -- to cylinder 4 D -- to cylinders 5 -- 6
DETAIL A
8. Engine brake solenoid valve with 4th cylinder command piston
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Oil pump
ENGINE 37
Figure 40
Figure 39
60560
The oil pump (1) cannot be overhauled. On finding any damage, replace the oil pump assembly. See under the relevant heading for replacing the gear (2) of the crankshaft.
73540
MAIN DATA TO CHECK THE OVERPRESSURE VALVE SPRING
Overpressure valve Figure 41
73541
OIL PUMP CROSS---SECTION 1. Overpressure valve â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Start of opening pressure 10.1 +0.7 bars.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Oil pressure control valve
327B-330B
Figure 43
Figure 42
73542
CHECK THE OIL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE SPRING The oil pressure control valve is located on the left --hand side of the crankcase. Start of opening pressure 5 bars.
73543
MAIN DATA TO CHECK THE OIL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE SPRING
Heat exchanger Figure 44
104236
HEAT EXCHANGER The heat exchanger is fitted with: 1. Oil pressure/temperature sensor --- 2. By---pass valve --- 3. Heat valve. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
By -- pass valve Figure 45
ENGINE 39
This is a new generation of filters that permit much more thorough filtration as they are able to holder back a greater amount of particles of smaller dimensions than those held back by conventional filters with a paper filtering element. These high---filtration devices, to date used only in industrial processes, make it possible to: D reduce the wear of engine components over time; D maintain the performance/specifications of the oil and thereby lengthen the time intervals between changes.
73545
The valve quickly opens at a pressure of: 3 bars. Thermostatic valve Figure 46
External spiral winding The filtering elements are closely wound by a spiral so that each fold is firmly anchored to the spiral with respect to the others. This produces a uniform use of the element even in the worst conditions such as cold starting with fluids with a high viscosity and peaks of flow. In addition, it ensures uniform distribution of the flow over the entire length of the filtering element, with consequent optimization of the loss of load and of its working life. Mount upstream To optimize flow distribution and the rigidity of the filtering element, this has an exclusive mount composed of a strong mesh made of nylon and an extremely strong synthetic material.
73542
Start of opening: D travel 0.1 mm at a temperature of 82 ¹2 ° C. End of opening: D travel 8 mm at a temperature of 97 ° C. Engine oil filters Figure 47
Filtering element Composed of inert inorganic fibres bound with an exclusive resin to a structure with graded holes, the element is manufactured exclusively to precise procedures and strict quality control. Mount downstream A mount for the filtering element and a strong nylon mesh make it even stronger, which is especially helpful during cold starts and long periods of use. The performance of the filter remains constant and reliable throughout its working life and from one element to another, irrespective of the changes in working conditions. Structural parts The o---rings equipping the filtering element ensure a perfect seal between it and the container, eliminating by---pass risks and keeping filter performance constant. Strong corrosion---proof bottoms and a sturdy internal metal core complete the structure of the filtering element. When mounting the filters, keep to the following rules: D Oil and fit new seals; D Screw down the filters to bring the seals into contact with the supporting bases; D Tighten the filter to a torque of 35---40 Nm.
47447
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Figure 48
F
3
A
TYPE E
0
6
8
PART NUMBER 1
A * A
0
0
1
---
Progressive production number Version number within the B.o.M. Only for exhaust gas level with the same torque and power curves Engine power output or torque level Use (eg I = truck) Fuel feed + injection (TCA, direct injection diesel engine) Number of cylinders Number of strokes and cylindersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; position (eg 0 = 4 strokes, vertical) Engine (invariable) Engine family evolution (also irrespective of the displacement) Indicates the engine family
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 41
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Type
F3A
Cycle Feeding
Diesel 4 strokes Turbocharged with aftercooler
Injection
Direct
N. of cylinders
j
+
+
ρ
6 on---line
Diameter
mm
125
Stroke
mm
140
cm3
10.300
+.. = Total displacement Compression ratio
Max. power
17 327B
330B
235 (315)
260 (353)
rpm
2100
1900
Nm (kgm)
1450 (148)
1650 (170)
rpm
1400
1400
kW (HP) rpm
Max. torque
Engine idling speed, no load Maximum engine speed, no load
rpm
550 ± 25
rpm
2550 ± 20
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Type
327B-330B
F3A
VALVE TIMING
A
opens before T.D.C. A
17째
closes after B.D.C.
B
4째
opens before B.D.C. D
36째
closes after T.D.C.
C
9째
mm
_
mm
_
mm
0.35 to 0.45
mm
0.35 to 0.45
B C
D For timing check X X Running X FEED
Through fuel pump --- Filters With N31 electronically regulated injectors. Injectors---pump driven by overhead camshaft
Injection type Bosch Injection order
bar
1 --- 4 --- 2 --- 6 --- 3 --- 5
Injection pressure
bar
Injector calibration
bar
1800
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
F3A VGT
Type
Holset geometria variabile Variable geometry Holset HY 55 V By centrifugal pump, regulating thermostat, viscostatic fan, radiator and heat exchanger
SUPERCHARGING Turbocharger type COOLING Water pump control Thermostat: starts to open: fully open:
By belt N. 1 ~85 ° C (185 ° F) --Forced by gear pump, pressure control valve, oil filter
LUBRICATION bar
ENGINE 43
Oil pressure, engine hot (100 ° C ± 5 ° C): at idling speed bar (psi) at maximum speed bar (psi) OIL FILLING Total capacity at 1st filling liters kg
1.5 (22) 5 (73)
32 (8.45 US gal) 28,8 (28.49 lb)
Capacity: --- engine sump min level
liters kg
--- engine sump max level liters kg --- quantity in circulation that does not flow back to the engine sump liters kg --- quantity contained in the cartridge filter (which has to be added to the cartridge filter refill) liters kg
17 (4.49 US gal) 15.3 (33.73 lb) 25 (6.60 US gal) 22.5 (49.60 lb)
7 (1.85 US gal) 6,3 (13.89 lb)
2.5 (0.66 US gal) 2.3 (5.07 lb)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
44
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
ASSEMBLY CLEARANCE DATA F3A mm (in)
Type CYLINDER BLOCK AND CRANKMECHANISM COMPONENTS ∅1 Bores for cylinder liners: upper ∅1 lower Cylinder liners: external diameter: L
∅2
∅2
length Cylinder liners --crankcase bores
∅3 X
* Selection class
140.000 ÷ 140.025 (5.5118 ÷ 5.5128)
upper
141.961 ÷ 141.986 (5.5890 ÷ 5.5900)
lower
139.890 ÷ 139.915 (5.5075 ÷ 5.5084) ---
L upper lower
External diameter
142.000 ÷ 142.025 (5.5905 ÷ 5.5915)
∅2
0.014 ÷ 0.064 (0.0006 ÷ 0.0029) 0.085 ÷ 0.135 (0.0033 ÷ 0.0053) ---
Cylinder sleeve inside diameter
∅3A*
inside diameter
∅3B*
Protrusion
X
125.000 ÷ 125.013 (4.9212 ÷ 4.9218) 125.011 ÷ 125.024 (4.9217 ÷ 4.9222) 0.045 ÷ 0.075 (0.0018 ÷ 0.0030)
X
18 (0.70)
Pistons: ∅1 X ∅2
measuring dimension external diameter
∅1A
124.884 ÷ 124.896 (4.9166 ÷ 4.9117)
external diameter
∅1B
124.896 ÷ 124.907 (4.9117 ÷ 4.9176)
pin bore Piston --- cylinder sleeve
* Selection class Piston diameter
∅2
50.010 ÷ 50.018 (1.9689 ÷ 1.9692)
A* B*
0.104 ÷ 0.129 (0.0041 ÷ 0.0050) 0.104 ÷ 0.128 (0.0041 ÷ 0.0050)
∅1
---
X Pistons protrusion
∅3
Gudgeon pin Gudgeon pin --- pin housing
X
∅3
0.23 ÷ 0.53 (0.0090 ÷ 0.020)
49.994 ÷ 50.000 (1.1983 ÷ 1.1985) 0.010 ÷ 0.024 (0.0004 ÷ 0.0009)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
F3A mm (in)
Type
X1 X 2 Piston ring grooves X3 S1 S2 S3
X1 X2 X3
Piston rings: trapezoidal seal
3.620 ÷ 2.640 (0.1425 ÷ 0.1039) 1.550 ÷ 1.570 (0.0610 ÷ 0.0618) 4.020 ÷ 4.040 (0.1583 ÷ 0.1591)
S1
lune seal
S2
2.500 (0.0984) 1.490 ÷ 1.500 (0.0586 ÷ 0.0590)
milled scraper ring with slits and internal spring
S3
3.970 ÷ 3.990 (0.1563 ÷ 0.1571)
1 2 3
0.120 ÷ 0.140 (0.0047 ÷ 0.0055) 0.050 ÷ 0.100 (0.0020 ÷ 0.0039) 0.030 ÷ 0.070 (0.0012 ÷ 0.0028)
Piston rings --- grooves Piston rings X1 X2
---
Piston ring end gap in cylinder liners X1 X2 X3
X3
Small end bush housing ∅1
∅2
Big end bearing housing Selection classes
∅4 ∅3 S
ENGINE 45
Small end bush diameter outside inside Big end bearing shell Red Green Yellow D
Ø1
0.35 ÷ 0.50 (0.0138 ÷ 0.0197) 0.60 ÷ 0.75 (0.0236 ÷ 0.0295) 0.35 ÷ 0.65 (0.0138 ÷ 0.0256) 54.000 ÷ 54.030 (2.1260 ÷ 2.1272)
Ø2
87.000 ÷ 87.030 (3.4252 ÷ 3.4264)
1 2 3
87.000 ÷ 87.010 (3.4252 ÷ 3.4256) 87.011 ÷ 87.020 (3.4256 ÷ 3.4260) 87.021 ÷ 87.030 (3.4260 ÷ 3.4264)
∅4
54.085 ÷ 54.110 (2.1293 ÷ 2.1303)
∅3 S
50.019 ÷ 50.035 (1.9693 ÷ 1.9699)
{
1.970 ÷ 1.980 (0.0776 ÷ 0.0780) 1.981 ÷ 1.990 (0.0780 ÷ 0.0783) 1.991 ÷ 2.000 (0.0784 ÷ 0.0787)
Small end bush --- housing
0.055 ÷ 0.110 (0.0022 ÷ 0.00434)
Piston pin --- bush
0.019 ÷ 0.041 (0.0007 ÷ 0.0016) 0.127 --- 0.254 --- 0.508 (0.005 --- 0.01 --- 0.02)
Big end bearing Connecting rod weight Class
A B C
g. 3973 ÷ 4003 g. 4004 ÷ 4034 g. 4035 ÷ 4065
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
46
ENGINE
SECTION 4
F3A mm (in)
Type X
Measuring dimension
X
Max. connecting rod axis misalignment tolerance
∅1
∅2
S1
S 2
∅3
Main journals --- nominal --- class --- class --- class
∅1
Crankpins --- nominal --- class --- class --- class
∅2
Main bearing shells Red Green Yellow*
S1
Big end bearing shells Red Green Yellow*
S2
Main bearing housings --- nominal --- class --- class --- class
∅3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
2.965 ÷ 2.974 (0.1167 ÷0.1171) 2.975 ÷ 2.984 (0.1171 ÷0.1175) 2.985 ÷ 2.995 (0.1175 ÷0.1179) 1.970 ÷ 1.980 (0.0776 ÷0.0780) 1.981 ÷ 1.990 (0.0780 ÷0.0783) 1.991 ÷ 2.000 (0.0784 ÷0.0787) 99.000 ÷ 99.030 (3.8976 ÷3.8988) 99.000 ÷ 99.009 (3.8976 ÷3.8979) 99.010 ÷ 99.019 (3.8980 ÷3.8983) 99.020 ÷ 99.030 (3.8984 ÷3.8988)
Main journal, thrust bearing
X1
45.95 ÷ 46.00 (1.8091 ÷1.8110)
Main bearing housing, thrust bearing
X2
38.94 ÷ 38.99 (1.5331 ÷1.5350)
Thrust washer halves
X3
3.38 ÷ 3.43 (0.1331 ÷0.5350)
Crankshaft end float 2
82.970 ÷ 83.000 (3.2665 ÷3.2677) 82.970 ÷ 82.979 (3.2665 ÷3.2668) 82.980 ÷ 82.989 (3.2669 ÷3.2672) 82.990 ÷ 83.000 (3.2673 ÷3.2677)
0.127 --- 2.254 --- 0.508 (0.005 --- 0.01 --- 0.02)
X1
1
92.970 ÷ 93.000 (3.6602 ÷3.6614) 92.970 ÷ 92.979 (3.6602 ÷3.6605) 92.980 ÷ 92.989 (3.6606 ÷3.6609) 92.990 ÷ 93.000 (3.6610 ÷3.6614)
0.050 ÷ 0.090 (0.0020 ÷0.0035) 0.040 ÷ 0.080 (0.0015 ÷0.0031)
Big end bearing shells
X3
125 (4.9213)
0.08 (0.0031)
Bearing shells --- main journals Bearing shells --- big ends Main bearing shells
X2
327B-330B
0.10 ÷ 0.30 (0.0039 ÷0.0118)
Alignment
1 --- 2
≤ 0.025 (0.0010)
Ovalization
1 --- 2
--0.010 (0.0004)
Taper
1 --- 2
0.010 (0.0004)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 47
F3A mm (in)
Type CYLINDER HEAD --- VALVE TRAIN ∅ 1 Valve guide housings in cylinder head ∅1
14.980 ÷ 14.997 (0.5898 ÷ 0.5904)
∅2 ∅3
9.015 ÷ 9.030 (0.3549 ÷ 0.3555) 15.012 ÷ 15.025 (0.5910 ÷ 0.5915)
∅ 2 Valve guide ∅ 3 Valve guides --- housings in the cylinder heads
0.015 ÷ 0.045 (0.0006 ÷ 0.0018)
Valve guide ∅ 4
0.2 --- 0.4 (0.0078 ÷ 0.0157)
Valves:
α
∅4 α
8.960 ÷ 8.975 (0.3528 ÷ 0.3533) 60° 30′ ± 7′ 30″
∅4 α
8.960 ÷ 8.975 (0.3528 ÷ 0.3533) 45° 30’ ± 7′ 30″
Valve stem and its guide
0.040 ÷ 0.070 (0.0016 ÷ 0.0028)
Valve seat in head
∅ 1
∅1
44.185 ÷ 44.220 (1.7396 ÷ 1.7409)
∅1
42.985 ÷ 43.020 (1.6923 ÷ 1.6937)
Outside diameter of valve seat; angle of valve seat in cylinder head:
∅ 2
∅2 α α
∅2 α X Recessing of valve X X Between valve seat and head
44.260 ÷ 44.275 (1.7425 ÷ 1.7431) 60° --- 30’ 43.060 ÷ 43.075 (1.6952 ÷ 1.6958) 45° --- 30′ 0.65 ÷ 0.95 (0.0256 ÷ 0.0374) 1.8 ÷ 2.1 (0.0709 ÷ 0.0827)
0.040 ÷ 0.090 (0.0016 ÷ 0.0035)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
48
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Table 1
F3A mm (in)
Type
H
Valve spring height: free height under a load of: H 2 N 500 ±25 N 972 ±48
H1
Injector protrusion
H
75 (2.9528)
H1 H2
61 (2.4016) 47.8 (1.8819)
X
1.14 ÷ 1.4 (0.0449 ÷ 0.0551)
X
∅
∅
Camshaft bushing housing in the cylinder head: 1⇒7 Ø
88.000 ÷ 88.030 (3.4646 ÷ 3.4657)
Camshaft bearing journals: 1⇒7
Ø
82.950 ÷ 82.968 (3.2656 ÷ 3.2665)
∅
Outer diameter of camshaft bushings:
∅
88.153 ÷ 88.183 (3.4706 ÷ 3.4718)
∅
Inner diameter of camshaft bushings:
∅
83.018 ÷ 83.085 (3.2684 ÷ 3.2711)
∅
∅ 2
∅ 1
∅ 3
Bushings and housings in the cylinder head
0.123 ÷ 0.183 (0.0048 ÷ 0.0072)
Bushings and bearing journals
0.050 ÷ 0.135 (0.0020 ÷ 0.0053)
Cam lift: 9.30 (0.3661) H
9.45 (0.3720)
11.21 (0.4413) ∅ 1 Rocker shaft
∅1
41.984 ÷ 42.000 (1.6529---1.6535)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Type
ENGINE 49
F3A mm (in)
Bushing housing in rocker arms 45.000 ÷ 45.016 (1.7717 ÷ 1.7723) 59.000 ÷ 59.019 (2.3228 ÷ 2.3236)
∅
46.000 ÷ 46.016 (1.8110 ÷ 1.8117) Bushing outer diameter for rocker arms: 45.090 ÷ 45.130 (1.7752 ÷ 1.7768) 59.100 ÷ 59.140 (2.3268 ÷ 2.3283)
Ø
46.066 ÷ 46.091 (1.8136 ÷ 1.8146) Bushing inner diameter for rocker arms: 42.025 ÷ 42.041 (16545 ÷ 1.6552) 56.030 ÷ 56.049 (2.2059 ÷ 2.2067)
Ø
42.015 ÷ 42.071 (1.6541 ÷ 1.6563) Between bushings and housings 0.074 ÷ 0.130 (0.0029 ÷ 0.0051) 0.081 ÷ 0.140 (0.0032 ÷ 0.0055) 0.050 ÷ 0.091 (0.0020 ÷ 0.0036) Between rocker arms and shaft 0.025 ÷ 0.057 (0.0010 ÷ 0.0022) 0.025 ÷ 0.057 (0.0010 ÷ 0.0022) 0.015 ÷ 0.087 (0.006 ÷ 0.0034)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
50
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES DETAIL
TORQUE Nm
lb ft
Capscrews, undercrankcase to crankcase ♦ Outside screws M12x1.75
First phase: preliminary tightening
30
(22)
Inner screws M18x2
Second phase: preliminary tightening
120
(89)
Inner screws
Third phase: angle locking
60°
Inner screws
Fourth phase: angle locking
55°
Outer screws
Fifth phase: angle locking
60°
Piston cooling nozzle union ♦
35±2
(25.5±1.5)
Heat exchanger fixing screws to the block ♦
19±3
(14±2.2)
24.5±2.5
(18±1.8)
Fixing screws to oil sump ♦
38±45
(28)
Gearbox fixing screws to the block M 12x1.75 ♦
63±7
(6.3±0.7)
Spacer oil sump fixing screws to undercrankcase ♦
Cylinder head fixing screws ♦ First phase
preliminary tightening
60
(44)
Second phase
preliminary tightening
120
(89)
Third phase
angle locking
90°
Fourth phase
angle locking
65°
Rocker shaft fixing screws ♦ First phase
preliminary tightening
Second phase
angle locking
Lock nut for rocker adjustment screw ♦ Injector blocking brackets screws ♦ Plastic cover fastening screws Shoulder plate fixing bolts to head ♦
80
(59) 60°
39±5
(28.5±3.5)
26
(18)
8.5±1.5
(6.1±1)
19±3
(14±2)
120
(89)
Engine mounting bracket screws on head First phase
pre---torque
Second phase
tightening to angle
45°
♦ Lubricate with UTDM oil before mounting • Lubricate with graphite oil before mounting
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
DETAIL
ENGINE 51 TORQUE Nm
lb ft
100
(74)
Engine mounting bracket fasteners at flywheel casing First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
60°
Camshaft pinion fasteners♦ First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
Phonic wheel fstener on camshaft pinion
60
(44) 60°
8.5±1.5
(6.26±1.10)
pre---tightening
40±5
(29.5±4)
tightening
70±5
(52±4)
19±3
(14±2)
60
(44)
Exhaust manifold fasteners •
Engine braking actuator cylinder fasteners♦ Connecting rod bolts♦ First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
60°
Flywheel fasteners♦ First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
120
(89) 90°
Damper flywheel fasteners♦ First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
70
(52) 50°
Intermediate gear pin fasteners♦ First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
30
(22) 90°
Link rod fasteners for adjustment of drive gear
24.5±2.5
(18±1.8)
Oil pump fasteners
24.5±2.5
(18±1.8)
Front Crankshaft gasket cover fasteners
24.5±2.5
(18±1.8)
Fuel pump / filter support fasteners
19±3
(14±2)
Control unit fasteners
19±3
(14±2)
pre---tightening
35
(26)
tightening
46
(34)
30±2
(22±11)
Water pump fasteners
25
(18)
Fasteners for fan hub to spacer
30
(22)
Automatic belt tensioner to conditioner fasteners
26±3
(19±2)
Automatic belt tensioner to alternator support fasteners
50±5
(37±3.6)
Fixed auxiliaries drive pulley to engine block fasteners
105±5
(77±3.5)
Starter motor fasteners
74±4
(55±3)
Air heater fasteners
50±3
(37±2)
Air compressor fasteners
74±4
(55±3)
Turbocompressor nuts and bolts •
Thermostat group fasteners
♦ Lubricate with UTDM oil before mounting • Lubricate with graphite oil before mounting For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
52
ENGINE
SECTION 4
DETAIL
327B-330B TORQUE Nm
lb ft
170±10
(126±7)
M 8x1.25
25±3
(18±2)
M 10x1.5
44±4
(33±3)
Power steering pump fasteners
46.5±4.5
(34±3.5)
Air conditioner compressor to support fasteners
24.5±2.5
(18±2)
Cover fasteners
24.5±2.5
(18±2)
55±5
(41±4)
Water / fuel temperature sensor fastener
35
(26)
Thermometric switch / transmitter fastener
25
(18)
Air temperature transmitter fastener
35
(26)
Pulse transmitter fastener
8±2
(6±1.5)
Engine brake electrovalve fastener
32
(23)
278±28
(205±20.64)
120
(89)
Compressor drive cog nut♦ Alternator fasteners
Filter block sensor fastener
Engine M16X130 bolt for fastening front and rear elastic mountings to engine Flanged M18X62 hex head bolt for front engine mounting: First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
45°
TC M14X60 recessed hex head bolt for front engine mounting: First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
60
(44) 45°
Flanged M18X62 hex head bolt for rear engine mounting: First phase
pre---tightening
Second phase
closure to angle
100
(74) 60°
♦ Lubricate with UTDM oil before mounting •
Lubricate with graphite oil before mounting
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 53
TIGHTENING ORDER OF GEARBOX TO ENGINE BLOCK FASTENING SCREWS Figure 49
stage 1: pretightening, outer screws
FRONT SIDE
30 Nm (22 lb ft)
60592
stage 2: pretightenig, inner screws
FRONT SIDE
120 Nm (88 lb ft)
60593
stage 3: angle, inner screws
FRONT SIDE
60°
60593
stage 4: angle, inner screws
FRONT SIDE
55°
60593
FRONT SIDE
stage 5: angle, outer screws 60°
DIAGRAM SHOWING TIGHTENING ORDER OF UNDER---CRANKCASE SECURING SCREWS For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60594
54
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 50
60580
DIAGRAM OF CYLINDER HEAD FIXING SCREWS TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Figure 51
60581
DIAGRAM OF EXHAUST MANIFOLD FIXING SCREWS TIGHTENING SEQUENCE Figure 52
60582
DIAGRAM OF TURBOCHARGER FIXING SCREWS AND NUTS TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 55
Figure 53
60666
DIAGRAM OF TIGHTENING SEQUENCE FOR HEAT EXCHANGER SCREWS
Figure 54
60583
DIAGRAM OF TIGHTENING SEQUENCE FOR ENGINE OIL SUMP SCREWS
Figure 55
73554
DIAGRAM OF TURBOCHARGER FIXING SCREWS AND NUTS TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
56
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 56
60633
OUTLINE OF GEARBOX TO ENGINE BLOCK FASTENERS TIGHTENING ORDER Tightening order: no. 10 M12 x 1,75 x 100 Nm screw (73 lb ft) no. 2 M12 x 1,75 x 70 Nm screw (52 lb ft) no. 4 M12 x 1,75 x 35 Nm screw (88 lb ft) no. 1 M12 x 1,75 x 120 Nm screw (142.33 lb ft) :
no. 2 M12 x 1,75 x 193 Nm screw (141.61 lb ft)
Figure 57
70567A
ROCKER SHAFT FASTENERS TIGHTENING ORDER
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 57
Engine Support and Brackets Figure 58
S269GN001A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
58
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
TOOLS 380000113
380000120
380000121
380000123
380000126
380000127
380000137
380000138
380000146
380000148
380000150
380000151
380000157
380000158
380000159
380000160
380000162
380000163
380000164
380000169
380000367
380000369
380000671
380000824
380000144
380000117
.
The following equipment is included in a single kit 380140021 except for 380000144 and 380000117.
380000113 380000120 380000121 380000123 380000126 380000127 380000137
---------------
380000138
---
380000146 380000148 380000150 380000151 380000157 380000158
-------------
380000159
---
Valve Guide Installer Crankshaft Front Seal Puller Crankshaft Rear Seal Puller Injector Sleeve Puller Crankshaft Front Seal Puller Crankshaft Rear Seal Puller (Used with 380000138) --Flywheel Turning Tool (Used with 380000137) --Adapter Plate Cam Bushing Remover/Installer Rocker Shaft Remover/Installer TDC Setting Tool Cam Phonic Disc Setting Tool Injector Sleeve Heading Tools Innjector Valve Connector Nut Torque Wrench (Used with 380000160) --Injector Case Tap
380000160 380000162 380000163 380000164 380000169 380000367 380000369 380000671 380000824 380000144 380000117
--- (Used with 380000159) --Guide Bushing --- (Used with 380000163/380000164) --Guide Bushing --- (Used with 380000162) --Upper Injector Case Cutter --- (Used with 380000162) --Lower Injector Case Reamer --- Crankshaft Front Oil Seal and Cover Setup Tool --- Drift (for valve guide) --- Reamer (for valve guide) --- Injector Puller --- Engine Block Junction Bolt Wrench --- Flywheel Locking Tool --- Gauge for defining the distance between the centre of the camshaft and transmission gear
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 59
TROUBLESHOOTING BY SYMPTOMS Main engine operating anomalies: 1 2 3 4 5
1
-----------
6 7 8 9
The engine does not start; The engine is excessively heated; The engine lacks efficiency; The engine has grey smokes (tending to white); The engine has blue smokes;
---------
Poor engine braking efficiency; The engine stops; Excessive fuel consumption; Excessive or insufficient oil pressure.
ENGINE DOES NOT START
Battery efficient
NO
Pre---heating element always on Check alternator efficiency Check battery terminal connections
YES
Starter motor efficient
NO
Carry out checks / replace
YES
Air heater efficient
NO
Check power supply and earth connection Check heater relay by active diagnosis
NO
Check fuses Check relay by active diagnosis
YES
Main relay efficient
YES
Fuel pump efficient
NO
Check efficiency checking pressure at filter
YES
Fuel prefilter --- filter efficient
NO
Check for clogging / replace
(continued) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60
ENGINE
SECTION 4
0.8 bar valve on fuel return efficient
NO
327B-330B
Check efficiency, replace if blocked open
YES
Fuel circuit efficient
2
NO
Check circuit seal and bleed
ENGINE OVERHEATS
Coolant level correct
NO
Check for leaks and top---up
YES
Water pump and fan belts efficient
NO
Check, adjust tension and if necessary replace components
YES
Water pump efficient
NO
Overhaul or replace group
YES
Thermostat efficient
NO
Check whether remains closed or partially open. Replace
NO
Thoroughly clean, check for leaks, replace if necessary
NO
Check that hoses and pipes are clear Check filter clog indicator, replace filter
YES
Radiator efficient
YES
Air filter and circuit piping efficient (continued)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Cylinder head gasket efficient
NO
ENGINE 61
Check water pressure and replace head gasket
YES
Fan efficient
3
NO
Replace
ENGINE LACKS POWER
Fuel circuit efficient
NO
Check whether tank filter, prefilter and fuel filter are clogged. Replace. Check whether 0.8 bar valve on fuel return from head is blocked open (low pressure) or closed (high temperature). Replace Check for circuit leaks and fuel pump efficiency
YES
Injectors efficient
NO
Injector pump may seize or fuel leak from O---ring. Carry out engine test and proceed as per instructions given
NO
Remove obstruction on circuit and replace air filter if clogged. Check clogged cartridge indicator
YES
Engine air intake circuit efficient
YES
Exhaust gas circuit efficient
NO
Eliminate leaks on exhaust manifold
YES
Correct running temperature
NO
Check cooling system
(continued) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
62
ENGINE
SECTION 4
VGT actuator efficient
NO
327B-330B
Carry out Engine Test following instructions displayed by diagnosis tool
YES
Turbocompressor efficient NO
YES
Mechanical injection system efficient
NO
Carry out Engine Test on turbine and check integrity of following turbo components --- turbine blades --- bearings --- modulator valve --- Clogged VGT filter --- turbine actuator Replace faulty components Engine Test with Modus --- IWT --- IT2000
Check injector rocker wear, check rollers, rocker bushes and camshaft cams
YES
Valve play correct
NO
Adjust valve play
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
4
SECTION 4
ENGINE 63
ENGINE EMITS GREY/WHITE SMOKE
Head gasket efficient
NO
Grind head and replace gasket
YES
Injector sheathes efficient
NO
Replace sheathes
YES
Turbocompressor cooling circuit seal efficient
NO
Overhaul turbo
YES
Good quality fuel
5
NO
Check for water in tank and eliminate
ENGINE EMITS BLUE SMOKE
Overhaul pistons --- cylinder
Piston rings efficient
NO
YES
Turbo lubrication circuit efficient
NO
Overhaul turbo
YES
Valve oil seals efficient
NO
Replace valve guide gaskets
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
64
6
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
POOR ENGINE BRAKING EFFICIENCY
Engine braking components efficient
NO
Check correct function of engine brake actuator cylinders and command solenoid Check cylinder command oil piping seal Check exhaust valve play
YES
Turbocompressor efficient
NO
VGT blocked open Faulty VGT actuator (seepage from tie rod) Faulty modulator valve Incorrect air supply to modulator valve Replace faulty components
ENGINE STOPS
7
Fuel in tank
NO
Bleed group after filling tank
YES
Tank filter, pre---filter and engine fuel filter efficient
NO
Clean tank filter and replace filter and prefilter
YES
Tank fuel lines correctly connected NO
Inverting the pipes may cause vehicle to stop after 200 --- 300 km even if tank has fuel because piping that feeds engine has less scavenge. Invert pipes
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 65
ENGINE
8
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
Air filter efficient
NO
Replace
YES
Tank and fuel lines efficient
9
NO
Eliminate any leaks and replace worn parts
OIL PRESSURE INSUFFICIENT OR EXCESSIVE
Pressure regulator valve operates correctly
NO
Check and if necessary replace
YES
Oil pump and delivery piping efficient
NO
Check and if necessary replace.
YES
Main bearings and big ends efficient NO
Replace bearings and if necessary grind crankshaft
YES
Engine oil SAE viscosity correct
NO
Change engine oil with suitable viscosity oil
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
66
ENGINE
SECTION 4
MAINTENANCE
327B-330B
Figure 60
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Engine oil change Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force. Proceed as follows: D switch off the engine after warming up and wait for coolant temperature to reach 60°C; D Open the hood; D remove the lower covers; D remove the dipstick;
269NM122
D clean the filler cap zone, the fill with the specified quantity of oil through the filler; D replace the filler cap and dipstick; D start and warm up the engine, then switch off and wait a few minutes; Figure 61
Figure 59
156NM11
269NM123A
D position a container with sufficient capacity, clean the drain plug area, remove the plug (arrow) and allow time for the oil to drain completely; D clean the thread, replace the plug;
D remove the dipstick and check that the level is between the notches on the dipstick. Top---up if necessary. Do not use the vehicle if the level is not within the above limits. Too much or too little oil will result in engine damage.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Engine oil filter change Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force.
ENGINE 67
Figure 64
The oil filter must be replaced at the recommended intervals. If blocked the by---pass valve permits engine lubrication but the oil is no longer filtered. Proceed as follows: D switch off the engine after warming up and wait for coolant temperature to reach 60°C; D Open the hood; Figure 62
156NM42
D hand---tighten the cartridge until the washer comes into contact with the support, then tighten it by ¾ of a turn; Do not overtighten the cartridge to avoid damaging the washer. Always follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. D Run the engine for a few minutes to check for the absence of oil leaks; D check and if necessary top---up the oil level. 269NM131
D unscrew the filter cartridge (arrow) with the correct spanner, then thoroughly clean the support seat; Figure 63
156NM25
D fill the new cartridge with oil and grease the washer with the same oil;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
68
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Engine oil vapour filter change Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Accessory drive belts Figure 67
Figure 65
228NM221
D remove the lower cover screwsand remove it; Figure 66
238NM01
The engine has two accessory drive belts: 1. alternator/water pump drive belt; 2. air---conditioner compressor drive belt.
.
The belts have automatic tensioners and do not require adjustment.
276NM012T
D remove the filter (1); When refitting, position the filter with the support brackets (arrow) pointing toward the cover. D replace the cover; D check that the breather pipe (arrow) is not kinked or bent.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Check Proceed as follows: D Open the hood;
ENGINE 69
Replacement Proceed as follows: D Open the hood;
Figure 68
Figure 70
276C004008
D remove the engine belt covers by removing the screws; Figure 69
276C004008
D remove the engine belt covers by removing the screws; Figure 71
178NM05
D with the engine off and cold, check that the belts are not chaffed or cracked (small transverse cracks are admissible); D If damage is found, replace the belt as instructed below; D applying manual pressure to the longest section of belt, check that the tensioners work correctly.
238NM02
D using a hexagonal wrench turn the tensioner (arrow) in the direction indicated to slacken the air--conditioner compressor drive belt (2); D insert a metal pin to lock the tensioner and remove the belt; Do not turn the tensioner in the opposite direction to prevent damage to its loading spring. D using a hexagonal wrench turn the tensioner (arrow) in the direction indicated to slacken the alternator/water pump drive belt (1); Do not turn the tensioner in the opposite direction to prevent damage to its loading spring.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
70
ENGINE
SECTION 4
D remove the belt; D fit the new alternator/water pump belt and release the tensioner; Do not twist the belt on the pulley when fitting it in the groove, and do not use tools (for example screwdrivers) as levers to prevent premature damage. D fit the new air---conditioner compressor drive belt; Do not twist the belt on the pulley when fitting it in the groove, and do not use tools (for example screwdrivers) as levers to prevent premature damage. D hold the tensioner, remove the locking pin and release it; D start the engine for a few minutes, switch off, wait for it to cool then check the correct function of both belt tensioners applying manual pressure.
327B-330B
Fuel circuit bleeding Proceed as follows: D Open the hood; D fit suitable pipes to the bleed nipples and lead them to a container; D loosen the bleed nipples by a few turns. Prefilter D Pump the manual priming pump (1, ref. 1) until fuel flows out from the nipple (1 arrow) without air bubbles, then tighten the nipple. Filter D Repeat the operation for this nipple (2, arrow). Cylinder head bleed nipple D Repeat the operation for this nipple (3, arrow). Absolutely avoid smearing fuel on the accessory drive belts to prevent damage.
Figure 72
2
3
1
276NM037T For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Fuel filter change
ENGINE 71
Figure 75
Figure 73
276NM015T
The vehicle is fitted with two fuel filter groups: D fuel pre---filter on chassis;
156NM25
D fill the new cartridge with specified lubricant and agrease the washer with the engine lubricant; Figure 76
Figure 74
156NM42 269NM182
D fuel filter on engine. Proceed as follows: D Open the hood; D with the engine off unscrew the filter cartridge with the correct spanner if necessary, then thoroughly clean the support seat;
D hand---tighten the cartridge until the washer comes into contact with the support, then tighten it by ž of a turn; Do not overtighten the cartridge to avoid damaging the washer. Always follow the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s recommendations. D run the engine for a few minutes to check for the absence of fuel leaks.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
72
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Engine coolant fluid change and circuit check/ cleaning Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force. Drain This operation must be carried out with the engine cold. Proceed as follows: D Open the hood; D remove the lower covers; Figure 77
327B-330B
Cleaning Proceed as follows: D prepare am mixture of water and specific detergent, slowly pour the mixture through the filler until reaching level, then close the filler cap; Use the proportion of detergent recommended by the manufacturer Too much detergent may damage the engine. Detergents do not normally contain anti--freeze: Do not leave the vehicle exposed to low temperatures if the cooling circuit contains this mixture. D start the engine and run it for circa 1 hour; D stop and leave the engine to cool, then drain the mixture as previously described; D fill the circuit again with clean water, start the engine and run it until the thermostat is fully open; D stop and leave the engine to cool, then drain the water as previously described; if the drained water is still significantly soiled, repeat the cleaning operation with detergent;
2690312
D turn the heater valve to maximum then open the filler cap on the expansion tank; Figure 78
276NM046T
D position a suitable container, then disconnect the radiator hose (arrow) and discharge the engine coolant; D wait for the coolant to drain completely, then reconnect the hose.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Filling Proceed as follows: D prepare a mixture of water and specific anti---freeze in the required proportions. Alternatively use coolant fluid with suitable specifications; Figure 79
ENGINE 73
Anti---freeze percentage check The minimum percentage of anti---freeze required depends on the ambient temperature of the place the vehicle is used. Check the percentage of anti---freeze in engine coolant fluid using the refractometer. Do not use hydrometers as these are not sufficiently accurate. If special additives are used, always follow the Supplierâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s mixture recommendations. Radiator external cleaning Clean the radiator using compressed air to remove accumulated debris (leaves, insects). To remove hardened debris, brush the radiator with a water/detergent solution then use steam to remove any residue.
2690312
D VERY slowly pour the mixture through the filler (arrow) without closing the cap; D start the engine and leave it to idle while adding fluid until the circuit is completely free of air bubbles, continuing the operation for at least 15 minutes; D close the filler cap; D bring the motor to medium speed until the thermostat is fully open; D check for the absence of foam or air bubbles in the tank; D stop and leave the engine to cool, then check and if necessary top---up the level.
Seal check on water---transmission oil and water---hydraulic fluid heat exchangers Visually inspect the seal of each heat exchanger and corresponding piping.
Check that the pressure regulator valve built---in to the cap is functioning correctly, if not, replace the cap.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
74
ENGINE
SECTION 4
ENGINE REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT
327B-330B
Figure 81
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; Figure 80
2690702
1. High pressure circuit valve 2. Low pressure circuit valve D proceed to discharge the air conditioner system as instructed in SECTION 14; The system must be discharged by specialist personnel using specific equipment. For these operations, refer to the procedures provided by the equipment manufacturer. Do not discharge R134a fluid into the atmosphere. Although its potential for damaging the ozone layer is zero, it may nevertheless contribute to global warming. Always use approved refrigerant recovery and recharging apparatus. Never mix different refrigerants in the same apparatus.
276C004010
D proceed to remove the hood as instructed in SECTION 15; D remove the side covers and lower covers as instructed in SECTION 15;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 82
ENGINE 75
Figure 84
2690310
D proceed to open the hood as instructed in SECTION 15; Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force. Figure 83
2690312
D turn the heater valve to maximum then open the filler cap on the expansion tank; D position a suitable container then discharge the coolant as instructed in relative Chapter; Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force. Figure 85
276C0044025
D position a suitable container then discharge the main hydraulic system fluid as instructed in SECTION 10; Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force.
276C004012
D remove the coolant/intercooler/condenser fan/radiator unit by following the directions in the relative chapter. Removal of the fastening clamps is not described. Check correct fastening of the clamped components.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
76
ENGINE
SECTION 4
. D
D D D D D D
D D
The operations described below refer to the following figures. unscrew the screws fastening the crossbar: --- the automatic transmission oil filter group (22); --- the brake circuit oil filter (21); disconnect the pump---expansion tank piping (5); disconnect the engine---expansion breather pipe (8); disconnect the windscreen washer pump electrical connection (30); disconnect the windscreen washer fluid piping (2); disconnect the hood release command pipe (23) and the hood release cable (24); unscrew the fastening screws from both sides (arrow) and remove the hood support crossbar (20) complete with hood release cable, expansion tank and windscreen wiper fluid tank; disconnect the cab heater engine coolant delivery (3) and return (4) pipes; disconnect and remove the metal engine coolant delivery (7) and return (6) pipes from the heat exchangers situated to the lower part of the chassis;
Coolant may leak during these operations.
327B-330B
D disconnect the air pipes: --- fuel return (27); --- fuel delivery (28); D disconnect the following pipes from the air---conditioner compressor (29): --- delivery (a); --- intake (b); D disconnect the following pipes from brake pump (26): --- delivery (a); --- intake (b); D disconnect the electrical connections from the starter motor (31): a. power cable (+30) b. consent cable (+50); D disconnect the alternator electrical connections (32): a. power cable (B+) b. connector; D disconnect the electrical connection: --- from the air---conditioner compressor (36); --- from the cold start relay device (35); --- vehicle interface (33); D disconnect the ground braid between engine and chassis (34);
D disconnect the intake and air pipes: --- engine breather (12); --- compressor intake (13); D disconnect and remove the intake air pipes (from turbogroup filter) (10); D remove the flexible compressor delivery pipe (14); D disconnect the air pipes: --- connecting tanks---compressor cut ---out (energy saving) (15); --- waste---gate piloting (17); D remove the exhaust pipes (from turbogroup to flexible) (19);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 77
Figure 86
276C004015
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
78
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 87
276C004016
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 79
Figure 88
276C004017
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
80
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 89
276C004018
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 90
ENGINE 81
Figure 91
276C004019
D disconnect the lower connector (37) from the engine control unit (38); Do not disconnect the engine wiring connectors (arrow). For more informatin on the procedure, refer to SECTION 11 Electrical system.
26903099
D disconnect the transmission shaft (arrow) between engine and transmission. Figure 92
26903100
D using suitable lifting gear, apply the chains to the engine lifting brackets (arrow). Tension them and check that the load is evenly distributed;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
82
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 93
26903101
D remove the front and rear engine mounting bolts from both sides; Check that all connections and pipes are disconnected and all fastening clamps removed. D carefully lift the group, removing it from above. Replacement Replace the group following the instructions in reverse order, and in particular: D check the elastic engine mountings: if deteriorated, replace them; D check the integrity of exhaust and intake pipes and joints; D check the integrity of fuel intake and return pipes and joints; D check the integrity of engine cooling system and cab heater pipes and joints; D fill the engine oil sump as instructed in the chapter MAINTENANCE; D fill the engine cooling circuit as instructed in the chapter MAINTENANCE; D Bleed the fuel supply circuit as instructed in the chapter MAINTENANCE.
Checks and tests After starting and warming up the engine, check: D the absence of coolant leaks from the engine cooling and cab heater system hoses: if located, tighten joints or replace faulty parts; D the absence of hydraulic fluid leaks from pipes that have been disconnected: if located, tighten joints or replace faulty parts; D the absence of oil leaks between rocker cover and cylinder head, sump and engine block, filter and seat and between the various pipes: if located, tighten joints or replace faulty parts; D the absence of leaks from fuel supply system piping and joints: if located, tighten joints or replace faulty parts; D the absence of air leaks from intake pipes and exhaust gas from the exhaust pipes: if located, tighten joints or replace faulty parts; D that the reconnected temperature and pressure warning lights function correctly. Fill the vehicle hydraulic circuit as instructed in SECTION 10.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 83
REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT OF THE FLEXIBLE COUPLING JOINT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1;
Figure 94
276C004030
D remove the protections positioned on the left side of the vehicle by following the instructions in SECTION 15; D tilt the cab as indicated in the use and maintenance handbook; D disconnect the engine---side cardan joint (1); If difficult to access, remove the drive shaft.
Figure 95
276C004031
D unscrew the retaining screws and remove the protection (1); D unscrew the retaining screws and remove the flexible coupling joint (2). Replacement Reattachment the group following the instructions in reserve order.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
84
ENGINE
SECTION 4
RADIATOR GROUP REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT
327B-330B
Figure 97
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works Removal Wait until engine temperature is below 40° C before beginning this operation. Proceed as follows: D Park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; Figure 96
2690702
1. High pressure circuit valve 2. Low pressure circuit valve D proceed to discharge the air conditioner system as instructed SECTION 14; The system must be discharged by specialist personnel using specific equipment. For these operations, refer to the procedures provided by the equipment manufacturer. Do not discharge R134a fluid into the atmosphere. Although its potential for damaging the ozone layer is zero, it may nevertheless contribute to global warming. Always use approved refrigerant recovery and recharging apparatus. Never mix different refrigerants in the same apparatus. Figure 98
276C005010
D proceed to remove the hood as instructed SECTION 15;
2690312
D turn the heater valve to maximum then open the filler cap on the expansion tank;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
.
Figure 99
ENGINE 85 The operations described below refer to the following figures.
D disconnect the air---conditioner pressure switch electrical connector (1); D remove the air---conditioner condenser inlet and outlet pipes (2); D remove the air---compressed inlet (3) and outlet (4) pipes; D disconnect the breather piping (5) from the radiator; D disconnect the engine coolant delivery pipe (6) from the radiator;
. 276NM046T
D position a suitable container, then disconnect the radiator hose (arrow) and discharge the engine coolant; Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force.
Coolant may leak during these operations.
D remove the intercooler---engine inlet (8) and outlet (9) hoses; D remove the hydraulic circuit exchanger inlet (10) and outlet (11) pipes.
.
Hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations.
Figure 100
276C004008
D remove, if necessary, the engine belt guard grill and support brackets by removing the fastening screws;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
86
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 101
276C004035
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 102
ENGINE 87
Figure 103
26903102
D support the radiator---intercooler---condenser---exchanger group with a suitable dolly, then from both sides unscrew the buffer fastening screws and remove it. D proceed to dismantle the group as necessary. Handle the radiator with care, to prevent damage to the delicate radiator fins.
276C004037
D disconnect both fastening rods from the chassis (A);
Replacement Replace the group following the instructions in reverse order, and in particular: D check the elastic mountings: if deteriorated, replace them; D check the integrity of engine cooling system pipes and joints; D fill the engine cooling circuit as instructed in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
88
ENGINE
SECTION 4
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL---WATER HEAT EXCHANGER REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT
327B-330B
Figure 104
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works Removal Wait until engine temperature is below 40° C (104 ° F) before beginning this operation. Proceed as follows: D Park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1;
2690312
D turn the heater valve to maximum then open the filler cap on the expansion tank; Figure 105
276NM046T
D position a suitable container, then disconnect the radiator hose (arrow) and discharge the engine coolant; Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
D disconnect the automatic transmission fluid delivery (1) and return (2) lines.
.
Oil may leak during these operations.
D disconnect the engine coolant delivery (3) and return (4) pipes.
.
Coolant may leak during these operations.
ENGINE 89
Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Fill the engine cooling circuit as instructed in the relative chapter. Fill the vehicle automatic transmission circuit oil as instructed in SECTION 5.
D support the exchanger with a suitable dolly, unscrew the fastening screws (5) and remove it from below.
Figure 106
276C004036
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
90
ENGINE
SECTION 4
DISMANTLING THE ENGINE ON THE BENCH
327B-330B
On the engine left ---hand side
Before fixing the engine on the rotary stand 99322230 remove the following components:
Figure 109
On the engine right ---hand side D diesel cartridge filter; D electric connections; Figure 107
60485
D engine support (1); Figure 110
60482
D soundproofing shield (1); D all the pipes connecting the compressor; Figure 108
60486
D oil pressure controlling valve (1);
60483
D compressor (1) fitted with power steering pump (2);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 91
Figure 111
71700
Fix the engine to the rotary stand, by means of brackets (1), remove the fan.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
92
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Remove all electrical wiring from the sensors and electric activators.
327B-330B
Figure 115
Figure 112
209NM02 71701
Remove the fan (1) from the flange (2). Figure 113
Remove the auxiliary control belts noing a suitable tool and working in he direction of he arrow. A: Alternator belt ---water pump B: Climate control compressor belt Figure 116
71702
Lock the engine flywheel using tool 380000144 (1). Disconnect all the electrical connections and remove the wiring from the engine.
Remove the climate control compressor by loosening the four securing bolts. Remove also the the automatic belt tensioner. Figure 117
Figure 114
71703
Remove the flywheel pulley (1) by removing the six Allen screws.
73585
Remove the following parts: alternator (1), fan flange (2), automatic tensioner (3), crankshaft pulley (4), water pump (6), air conditioner drive belt tensioner (5), and pulley (7).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 118
ENGINE 93
Figure 121
98864
Disconnect the pipes (3 and 4) from the V.G.T. command solenoid valve. Remove the thermostat group (1) complete with V.G.T command solenoid (2).
60492
Unscrew the oil filter (1) using a filter wrench. Figure 122
Figure 119
72674
60490
Apply extractor 380000120 (2) and remove the crankshaft oil seal. Remove the flange (3). Figure 120
Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the heat exchanger (4). Unscrew the screws (2) and remove the water line (3). Figure 123
71707
Remove the following parts: Water delivery pipe (5), water return pipe (1), actuator command air piping (2), oil delivery pipe (3), oil return pipe (4), turbocompressor group (6), exhaust manifold (7).
70708
To remove the PTO (if applicable). Disconnect the oil piping. Unscrew the four screws 2 and 3.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
94
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Figure 124
327B-330B
Figure 126
60575
60494
Remove the following components: fuel filter support (1), fuel pump (2) and lines, starter (3), engine starting button support (4), PWN valve air filter (5), suction manifold (6) fitted with resistance for engine pre---heating, control unit (7).
Unscrew the screws (2) and remove the gear (1) fitted with phonic wheel. Figure 127
Figure 125
60497
85480
Remove the rocker arm cover (1), take off the screws (2) and extract the cover (3), the filter (5) and the gaskets (4 and 6). Remove the screws (8) and the blow ---by case (7).
Unscrew the screws (1); tighten one screw in a reaction hole and remove the shoulder plate (2), remove the sheet gasket. Figure 128
60498
Unscrew the screws (1) and disassemble the idle gear (2).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 95
Unscrew the screws (1) and take down the gearbox (2).
Figure 129
Figure 132
60499
Stop the engine flywheel (3) rotation by means of tool 380000144 (1), unscrew the fixing screws (2) and remove the engine flywheel. Figure 130
16219
If applicable, disassemble the PTO control gear (1). Remove the screws (3) and disasseble the double gear (2). Remove the retaining screw and disassemble the small connecting rod (5). Disassemble the oil pump (4). Figure 133
85480
Apply the extractor 380000121 (2) and pull out the seal gasket (1). Figure 131
60511
D Remove the engine brake lever retaining springs (3). D Unscrew screws (3) to remove injector electrical connections. D Unscrew screws (6) fastening injector wiring to the head. D Electrically disconnect the engine brake solenoid valve (8). D Remove the engine brake cylinder (4) feeder pipes (5 and 7). D Remove the rocker shaft fastening screws (2). D Unscrew screws (6) to remove injector wiring from the head. The wiring must be removed from the front.
60501 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
96
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Figure 134
327B-330B
Figure 137
73533
Using a suitable tool (3), constrain the blocks (4) to the rockers (2). Apply tool 380000148 (1) to the rocker holder shaft (5) and remove the shaft (5) from the cylinder head. Figure 135
102935
To extract the pump injector from the engine block, using an extractor tool as shown in illustration. Figure 136
60515
D By means of metal ropes, lift the cylinder head (1). D Remove the seal (2). Figure 138
104784
Loosen screws (3), then remove sump (1) complete with spacer (2) and seal gasket (4). Figure 139
86932
60514
D Fit the plugs (1) instead of injectors. D Remove the camshaft (2). D Unscrew the fixing screws on the cylinder head (3).
Unscrew the screws and remove suction rose (1).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 140
ENGINE 97
Figure 143
47574
Rotate the block (1) to the vertical position.
47570
Remove the crankshaft (2) using a suitable tool (1).
Figure 141
Figure 144
60518
Untighten screws (2) fixing the connecting rod cap (3) and remove it. Remove the connecting rod---piston assembly from the upper side. Repeat these operations for the other pistons. Figure 142
47571
Remove the crankshaft half---bearings (1), untighten the screws and remove oil spray nozzles (2). Take down cylinder liners as specified in the relative paragraph. After disassembling the engine, thoroughly clean disassembled parts and check their integrity. Instructions for main checks and measures are given in the following pages, in order to determine whether the parts can be re---used.
60519
By means of proper and splined wrenches, untighten the screws (1) and (2) and remove the under---block.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
98
ENGINE
SECTION 4
REPAIR OPERATIONS
327B-330B
Figure 147
Cylinder block Checks and measurements Figure 145
60595
34994
Internal diameter of the cylinder liners is checked for ovalization, taper and wear, using a bore dial (1) centesimal gauge (2) previously reset to ring gauge (3), diameter 125 mm.
A = Selection class Ø 125,000 to 125,013 mm B = Selection class Ø 125,011 to 125,024 mm In case of maximum wear >0.150 mm or maximum ovalization >0.100 mm compared to the values indicated in the figure, the liners must be replaced as they cannot be ground, lapped or trued. Cylinder liners are equipped with spare parts with “A“ selection class.
If a 125 mm ring gauge is not available use a micrometer caliper.
Figure 148
Figure 146
60597 60596
1 = 1st measuring 2 = 2nd measuring 3 = 3rd measuring Carry out measurings on each cylinder liner at three different levels and on two (A ---B) surfaces, to one another perpendicular, as shown in Figure 146.
A B C D
= = = =
Ø 142,000 to 142,025 mm Ø 140,000 to 140,025 mm Ø 141,961 to 141,986 mm Ø 139,890 to 139,915 mm
The figure shows the outer diameters of the cylinder liners and the relative seat inner diameters. The cylinder liners can be extracted and installed several times in different seats, if necessary.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 99
CYLINDER LINERS Figure 149
60598
BLOCK WITH CYLINDER LINERS Figure 150
Selection class
Figure 151
A 125.000 ÷ 125.013 mm B 125.011 ÷ 125.024 mm
60600
CYLINDER LINERS MAIN DATA
DETAIL “X” “Y“ --- Selection class marking area For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60601
100
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Replacing cylinder liners
327B-330B
Figure 154
Removal Figure 152
60520
47577
Using suitable tool (1, 2 and 4), remove the cylinder liner (3) from the block. Fitting and checking protrusion Figure 153
Check the protrusion of the cylinder liners, using suitable tool (2) and tightening screw (1) to 220 Nm torque. Using a suitable comparator provided with comparator base (3) that the cylinder lining protrusion from the cylinder head surface is 0.045 --- 0.075 mm. If not, replace the adjuster shim (1) (Figure 153) supplied in various thickness. Figure 155 0,045 รท 0,075
49017 16798
Always replace water sealing rings (3, 4 and 5). Install the adjustment ring (1) on the cylinder liner (2); lubricate lower part of liner and install it in the cylinder unit using the proper tool.
CYLINDER LINER PROTRUSION Figure 156
The adjustment ring (1) is supplied as spare parts in the following thicknesses: 0.08 mm --- 0.10 mm --- 0.12 mm.
60521
When the installation is completed, block the cylinder liners (1) to the block (2) with studs (3). For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 101
CRANKSHAFT Figure 157
36,75 37,00
2,965 2,995
Upper main journal half bearing
92,970 93,000
82,970 83,000
45,95 46,00
36,750 37,000 45,75 46,00 2,965 2,995
3,380 3,430
2,965 2,995
Lower main journal half bearings
71712
MAIN DATA FOR THE CRANK SHAFT PINS AND THE HALF BEARINGS Check the condition of the journals and the big end pins; there must no be signs of scoring, ovalization or excessive wear. The data given refer to the normal diameter of the pins Figure 159
PULISHED
108
108
Figure 158
3,7รท4 ADJUSTED
PULISHED 4,2รท4,5 ADJUSTED
ADJUSTED
X. Detail of main journals connections
60603
Y. Detail of crank pins connections
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
71713
102
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Measuring main journals and crank pins Before grinding the crank pins using a micrometer (1), measure the main journals and the crank pins (2) and decide, on the basis of the undersizing of the bearings, the final diameter to which the pins are to be ground.
327B-330B
Figure 161
Figure 160
47536
47535
It is advisable to enter the values found in a table.
During grinding, pay attention to journal and crank pins values specified in Figure 158 and Figure 159. All journals and crank pins must also be ground to the same undersizing class, in order to avoid any alteration to shaft balance.
Figure 162 Fill in this table with the measurements of the main journals and the crank pins. MAIN JOURNALS ∅ Min. ∅ Max.
∅ Min. ∅ Max. CRANK PINS
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36061
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 103
Preliminary data for selecting the main and big -- end journal half -- shells For each journal and crankpin, the following operations must be carried out: MAIN JOURNALS: D determine the diameter class of the block housing; D determine the diameter class of the main journal; D select half-shells class to be installed.
BIG END JOURNAL: D determine the diameter class of the connecting rod housing; D determine the diameter class of the big end pin; D select half-shells class to be installed.
Definition of diameter class of seat for half -- shells in block Two series of numbers are marked on the front side of the block, in the position specified (top). D a four---digit number, representing the coupling number of block to the relevant underblock; D each of the following seven digits represents the diameter class of the housing they refer to (bottom); D each digit can be 1, 2 or 3. Figure 163
99,000รท99,009 99,010รท99,019 99,020รท99,030
47535
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
104
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Choice of big end and main bearing half -- shells In order to obtain the clearance required, main half-bearings and big end half-bearings must be selected as specified below. This operation makes it possible to identify the most suitable half-bearings for each journal (half-bearings can belong to different classes for the individual journals). Depending on half-bearing thickness, tolerance classes are selected by colors (red---green---red/black ---green/ black). Figure 164 shows the characteristics of main half-bearings and big end half-bearings supplied as spare parts in standard measures (STD) and admissible oversizing (+0.127, +0.254, +0.508). Figure 164
STD
Big end half-bearings red
1.970÷1.980
red/black green
1.981÷1.990
yellow/black
+0.127
2.965÷2.974
2.108÷2.117
2.235÷2.244
+0.254
+0.508
3.092÷3.102
3.219÷3.229
3.028÷3.037 2.975÷2.984
green/black yellow
2.224÷2.234
2.054÷2.063
red/black green
2.097÷2.107
1.991÷2.000
STD
red
+0.508
2.044÷2.053
yellow/black
Main half-bearings
+0.254
2.033÷2.043
green/black yellow
+0.127
3.038÷3.047 2.985÷2.995 3.048÷3.058
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 105
Definition of main journal and big end diameter class (journals with nominal diameter) Three series of numbers are specified on the driving shaft, in the position specified (Figure 165 to left);. D a five---digit number, representing the shaft serial number; D under this number, on the left, a six---digit number refers to big end pins and is preceded by a single digit, which indicates pin status (I = STD =---0.127); each of the following six digits represents the diameter class of each big end pin it refers to (Figure 165 to left); D the seven---digit series, on the right, refers to the journals and is preceded by a single digit, which indicates journal status (I = STD =---0.127); each of the following seven digits represents the diameter class of the journal it refers to (Figure 165 to right).
Figure 165
JOURNALS
82,970÷82,979 82,980÷82,989 82,990÷83,000
92,970÷92,979 92,980÷92,989 92,990÷93,000 CRANKPINS BASEMENT
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
106
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Selection of main half-bearings After detecting, for each journal, the necessary data on block and crankshaft, select the type of half-bearings to be used, in compliance with the following table: Figure 166
STD.
1
2
3
green
green
green
green
green
green
red
green
green
red
green
green
red
red
red
red
red
red
1
2
3
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 107
Selection of main half-bearings (rectified) If the journals have been rectified, the procedure described cannot be applied. In this case, make sure that the new diameter of the journals is as specified on the table and install the only half-bearing type required for this undersizing. Figure 167 red/black = mm 3.028 รท 3.037 green/black = mm 3.038 รท 3.047
---0.127
1
2
3
92.843 92.852
1
green/black
green/black
green/black
92.853 92.862
2
red/black
green/black
green/black
92.863 92.873
3
red/black
red/black
green/black
2
3
red = mm 3.092 รท 3.102
---0.254 92.726 92.746
1 red
red
red
red = mm 3.219 รท 3.229
---0.508 92.472 92.492
1 red
2 red
3 red
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
108
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Choice of big---end half---shells (standard diameter) Three indications are marked on the connecting rod, in position “A”: Figure 168
1 Letter indicating the weight class A = 3973 to 4003 g. B = 4004 to 4034 g. C = 4035 to 4065 g.
VIEW FROM “A”
2 Number indicating the diameter selected for the housing of the big end bearing: 1 2 3
= 87.000 to 87.010 mm = 87.011 to 87.020 mm = 87.021 to 87.030 mm
3 Numbers identifying the cap---connecting road coupling.
47557
The number specifying the diameter class of the half-bearing housing can be: 1, 2 or 3. Determine the type of big end half-bearings to be installed on each pin by following the indications given in the table (Figure 169).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 109
Figure 169
STD.
1
2
3
green
green
green
green
green
green
red
green
green
red
green
green
red
red
red
red
red
red
1
2
3
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
110
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Choice of big---end half---shells (rectified) If pins have been rectified, the procedure described must be applied. In this case, (for each undersizing) determine the tolerance field the new big end pins belong to, and install the half-bearings identified according to the relative table. Figure 170 red/black = mm 2.033 ÷ 2.043 green/black = mm 2.044 ÷ 2.053
---0.127
1
2
3
82.843 82.852
1
green/black
green/black
green/black
82.853 82.862
2
red/black
green/black
green/black
92.863 82.873
3
red/black
red/black
green/black
red mm 2.097 ÷ 2.107 green = mm 2.108 ÷ 2.117
---0.254
1
2
3
82.726 82.735
red
green
green
82.736 82.746
red
red
green
red mm 2.224 ÷ 2.234 green = mm 2.235 ÷ 2.244
---0.508
1
2
3
82.472 82.481
red
green
green
82.482 82.492
red
red
green
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Replacing the timing control gear and the oil pump Check that the teeth of the gears are not damaged or worn, otherwise remove them using the appropriate extractor.
ENGINE 111
Figure 173
Figure 171
47578
Using pulley system and hook (1), mount the crankshaft (2). 49020
When fitting the new gears (1) on the crankshaft (2), heat them for about 15 minutes in an oven at 180 ° C. Let them cool down after the installation.
Figure 174
Checking main journal installation clearance Figure 172
49021
Install the half-bearings (1) on the main bearings in the underblock (2). Check the installation clearance between the main journals and the relative bearings as follows. 47579
Install the oil spray nozzles (2) and have the dowel coincide with the block hole (3). Install the half-bearings (1) on the main bearings.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
112
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Figure 175
327B-330B
Figure 176
47578
60559
Place a piece of calibrated wire on the journal of the crankshaft (2), parallel to the longitudinal axis; install the underblock (1), by hoist and appropriate hooks.
D Lubricate inside screws (1) con UTDM oil, and tighten them by dynamometric wrench to 140 Nm torque, thus with 60ยบ angle closing, following the diagram in Figure 177.
Figure 177
FRONT SIDE
60593
DIAGRAM SHOWING THE TIGHTENING ORDER OF THE SCREWS FIXING THE LOWER UNDER---BLOCK TO THE BLOCK Checking crankshaft end float Figure 178 Figure 179
47588
47579
D Remove the under --- block The clearance between the main bearings and the journals is obtained by comparing the calibrated wire length (2) at the maximum deflection point, with the calibrated scale on the coating (1) containing the calibrated wire (1). Numbers shown on the scale specify the clearance in coupling millimeters. If the clearance obtained is different from the clearance required, replace the half-bearings and repeat this check.
End float is checked by placing a magnetic dial gauge (1) on the crankshaft (2), as shown in the figure. If the value obtained is higher than specified, replace the rear thrust half-bearings and repeat this check.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 113
Piston-- connecting rod assembly Figure 180
60607
PISTON CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY 1. Connecting rod body --- 2. Half bearings --- 3. Connecting rod cap --- 4. Cap fastening screws --5. Split ring --- 6. Scraper ring with spiral spring --- 7. Bevel cut sealing ring --- 8. Trapezoidal sealing ring --9. Piston pin --- 10. Piston Make sure the piston does show any trace of seizing, scoring, cracking; replace as necessary. Removal
Pistons are equipped with three elastic rings: a sealing ring, a trapezoidal ring and a scraper ring. Pistons are grouped into classes A and B for diameter. Figure 182
Figure 181
60608
Removal of the piston split rings (2) using pliers (1).
49024
Remove the piston pin split rings (2) using the round tipped pliers (1).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
114
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Figure 183
327B-330B
Figure 185
49025
Remove the piston pin (1). If removal is difficult use the appropriate beater.
32618
Measuring the gudgeon pin diameter (1) with a micrometer (2). Conditions for correct gudgeon pin-- piston coupling
Measuring the diameter of the pistons Figure 184
Figure 186
71714
Using a micrometer (2), measure the diameter of the piston (1) to determine the assembly clearance; the diameter should be measured at the specified value.
49026
Lubricate the pin (1) and the relevant housing on the piston hubs with engine oil; piston must be inserted with a slight finger pressure and it should not come out by gravity.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 115
Figure 187
MAIN DATA ON PISTONS, AND PISTONS RINGS * Values are determined on ∅ of 120 mm.
104271
Piston rings Figure 190
Figure 188
16552
Check the thickness of the piston ring (2) using a micrometer (1). Figure 189
3513
The sealing ring (2) of the 1st cavity is trapezoidal. Clearance “X” between the sealing ring and its housing is measured by placing the piston (1) with its ring in the cylinder barrel (3), so that the sealing ring is half---projected out of the cylinder barrel. Figure 191
60610
Check the clearance between the sealing rings (2) and the relative piston housings (1) using a thikness gauge (3).
36134
Check the opening between the ends of the sealing rings (1), using a thickness gauge (2), entered in the cylinder barrel (3). If the distance between ends is lower or higher than the value required, replace split rings.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
116
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
CONNECTING ROD Figure 192 Data concerning the class section of connecting rod housing and weight are stamped on the big end.
VIEW FROM “A”
When installing connecting rods, make sure they all belong to the same weight class. DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTING ROD MARKS Letter indicating the weight class: 1 A = 3973 to 4003 g. B = 4004 to 4034 g. C = 4035 to 4065 g. 2 Number indicating the selection of diameter for the big end bearing housing: 1 = 87.000 to 87.010 mm 2 = 87.011 to 87.020 mm 3 = 87.021 to 87.030 mm Numbers identifying cap---connecting rod 3 coupling.
47957
Figure 193
54,000 54,030 54,085 54,110
50,019 50,035
49,994 50,000
1,970 2,000
87,000 87,030 71716
MAIN DATA --- BUSH, CONNECTING ROD, PIN AND HALF-BEARINGS * Values to be obtained after installing the bush
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Bushings
ENGINE 117
Checking torsion
Figure 194
Figure 196
73535
Check the bushing in the small end has not come loose and shows no sign of scoring or seizure; replace it if it does. The bushing (2) is removed and fitted with a suitable drift (1). When driving it in, make absolutely sure that the holes for the oil to pass through in the bushing and small end coincide. Using a boring machine, rebore the bushing so as to obtain a diameter prescribed. Checking connecting rods Figure 195
61694
Check the torsion of the connecting rod (5) by comparing two points (A and B) of the pin (3) on the horizontal plane of the axis of the connecting rod. Position the mount (1) of the dial gauge (2) so that this pre---loads by approx. 0.5 mm on the pin (3) at point A and zero the dial gauge (2). Shift the spindle (4) with the connecting rod (5) and compare any deviation on the opposite side B of the pin (3): the difference between A and B must be no greater than 0.08 mm. Checking bending Figure 197
61696
Checking axis alignment Check the alignment of the axes of the connecting rods (1) with suitable tool (5), proceeding as follows: D Fit the connecting rod (1) on the spindle of the suitable tool (5) and lock it with the screw (4). D Set the spindle (3) on the V ---prisms, resting the connecting rod (1) on the stop bar (2).
61695
Check the bending of the connecting rod (5) by comparing two points C and D of the pin (3) on the vertical plane of the axis of the connecting rod. Position the vertical mount (1) of the dial gauge (2) so that this rests on the pin (3) at point C.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
118
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Swing the connecting rod backwards and forwards seeking the highest position of the pin and in this condition zero the dial gauge (2). Shift the spindle (4) with the connecting rod (5) and repeat the check on the highest point on the opposite side D of the pin (3). The difference between point C and point D must be no greater than 0.08 mm.
327B-330B
Mounting the piston rings Figure 200
Mounting the connecting rod – piston assembly Figure 198
60614
To fit the piston rings (1) on the piston (2) use the pliers (3). The rings need to be mounted with the word “TOP” (4) facing upwards. Direct the ring openings so they are staggered 120° apart. Fitting the big end bearing shells 73536
Figure 201
The piston (1) has to be fitted on the connecting rod (2) so that the graphic symbol (4), showing the assembly position in the cylinder liner, and the punch marks (3) on the connecting rod are observed as shown in the figure. Figure 199
1
2 3 49030
Fit the bearing shells (1), selected as described under the heading “Selecting the main and big end bearing shells”, on both the connecting rod and the cap. If reusing bearing shells that have been removed, fit them back into their respective seats in the positions marked during removal. 74052
Fit the pin (2) and fasten it on the piston (1) with the split rings (3).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Fitting connecting rod -- piston assemblies in the cylinder liners With the aid of the clamp (1, Figure 202), fit the connecting rod – piston assembly (2) in the cylinder liners, according to the diagram of Figure 202, checking that: D The openings of the piston rings are staggered 120° apart. D The pistons are all of the same class, A or B. D The symbol punched on the top of the pistons faces the engine flywheel, or the recess in the skirt of the pistons tallies with the oil nozzles.
ENGINE 119
Figure 202
The pistons are supplied as spares in class A and can be fitted in class B cylinder liners. 60616
Checking piston protrusion On completing assembly, check the protrusion of the pistons from the cylinder liners; it must be at the specified value. Figure 203
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM OF CONNECTING ROD – PISTON ASSEMBLY IN CYLINDER LINER 1. Connecting rod – piston assembly – 2. Area of punch marking on the top of the piston, symbol showing assembly position and selection class – 3. Connecting rod punch mark area
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
120
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Checking crankpin assembly clearance To measure the clearance, carry out the following operations. Connect the connecting rods to the relevant journals of the crankshaft, placing a length of calibrated wire on the journals. Figure 204
327B-330B
Dismounting the valves Before dismounting cylinder head valves, number them in view of their remounting in the position observed on dismounting should they not have to be overhauled or replaced. Intake valves are different form exhaust valves in that they have a notch placed at valve head centre. Figure 205
47594
Mount the connecting rod caps (1) together with the bearing shells. Tighten the screws (2) fixing the connecting rod caps to a torque of 60 Nm (6 kgm). Using a proper tool (3), further tighten the screws with an angle of 60°. The thread of the screws (2), before assembly, has to be lubricated with engine oil. Remove the caps and determine the clearance by comparing the width of the calibrated wire with the graduated scale on the case containing the calibrated wire. Upon final assembly: check the diameter of the thread of the screws (2), it must be no less than 13.4 mm; if it is, change the screw. Lubricate the crankpins and connecting rod bearings. Tighten the screws (2) as described above.
47583
Mount and secure the proper tool (1, 2, and 4). Screw down with the device (1) to be able to remove the cotters (3). Take out the tool (2) and extract the top plate (5), spring (6) and bottom plate (7). Repeat this process on all the valves. Turn over the cylinder head and take out the valves (8). Checking head bearing surface on cylinder block Figure 206
CYLINDER HEAD Before dismounting cylinder head, check cylinder head for hydraulic seal by proper tooling; in case of leaks not caused by cup plugs or threaded plugs, replace cylinder head. In case of plugs dismounting/replacement, on mounting, apply sealant Loctite 270 on plugs.
36159
Check the supporting surface (1) of the head on the cylinder block with a rule (2) and a feeler gauge (3). If you find any deformation, level the head on a surface grinder; maximum amount of material that can be removed 0.2 mm. After this process, you need to check the valve recessing and injector protrusion.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Valves
ENGINE 121
Figure 208
Decarbonizing and checking valves 8,960 8,975
Figure 207
15,012 15,025 9,015 9,030
(*) 45° 30’±7’30” 60° 30’±7’30”
42,85÷43,15
41,85÷42,15 71718
48625
Remove the carbon deposits on the valves with a wire brush. Check that the valves show no signs of seizure or cracking and check with a micrometer that the valve stem diameter comes within the required values (see Figure 208), replace the valves if it does not.
MAIN DATA OF VALVES AND VALVE GUIDES * Measurement to be made after driving in the valve guides Check, by means of a micrometer, that valve stem diameters are as specified; if necessary, grind the valves seat with a grinder, removing the minimum quantity of material.
Figure 209
2
0,65÷0,86
39,00
39,20
1,8÷2,1
4,30±0,06
1
1. Intake valve seat --- 2. Exhaust valve seat
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
71719
122
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Valve guides Replacing valve guides
Figure 210
Figure 211 ø 9.015÷9.03
41032
Check the valve seats (2). If you find any slight scoring or burns, regrind them with proper tool (1) according to the angles shown in Figure 209. If it is necessary to replace them, using the same tool and taking care not to affect the cylinder head, remove as much material as possible from the valve seats so that, with a punch, it is possible to extract them from the cylinder head. Heat the cylinder head to 80 ÷ 100°C and, using a drift, fit in the new valve seats (2), chilled beforehand in liquid nitrogen. Using proper tooling (1), regrind the valve seats according to the angles shown in Figure 209. After regrinding the valve seats, check that the position of the valves in relation to the plane of the cylinder head is: D ---0.65 to ---0.95 (recessing) intake valves D ---1.8 to ---2.1 mm (recessing) exhaust valves.
71719
The valve guides are removed with the drift 380000367. They are fitted with the drift equipped with part 380000113. Part 380000113 determines the exact position of assembly of the valve guides in the cylinder head. If they are not available, you need to drive the valve guides into the cylinder head so they protrude by 30.8÷31.2 mm. After driving in the valve guides, rebore their holes with the smoother 380000369. Replacing injector cases Removal Figure 212
Checking clearance between valve-- stem and associated valve guide Using a dial gauge with a magnetic base, check the clearance between the valve stem and the associated guide. If the clearance is too great, change the valve and, if necessary, the valve guide.
60619
To replace the injector case (2), proceed as follows: D Thread the case (2) with tool 380000159 (1). The steps described in Figure 212 --- Figure 215 --Figure 216 --- Figure 217 need to be carried out by fixing the tools, with the bracket A, to the cylinder head. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 213
ENGINE 123
Figure 215
60622
60620
D Fasten extractor 380000123 (2) to case (3), by tightening the nut (1), and pull out the case from cylinder head.
D Lubricate sealing rings (3) and fit them to the case (4); fix tool 380000157 (2) to the cylinder head by means of bracket A, install the new case, tighten the screw (1), upsetting the case lower part.
Figure 214
60621
D Remove any residue (1), with a suitable tool (2), from the cylinder head groove.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
124
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
D Using grinder 380000164 (1---2), ream the injector seat in the case (3).
Figure 216
Checking protrusion of injectors Figure 218
47585
Using dial gauge (1), check the protrusion of the injector (2) which must be 0.52 to 1.34 mm. Figure 219
60623
D Ream the case hole (3) with reamer 380000163 (1). Figure 217
71720
INSTALLATION DIAGRAM FOR INJECTOR CASE
60624
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 125
DISTRIBUTION Checking cam lift and pin alignment Figure 220
47506
Place the camshaft (4) on the tailstock (1) and check cam lift (3) using a centesimal gauge (2). Figure 221
47507
When the camshaft (4) is on the tailstock (1), check alignment of supporting pin (3) using a centesimal gauge (2); it must not exceed 0.030 mm. If misalignment exceeds this value, replace the shaft. Figure 222 1
47505
In order to check installation clearance, measure bush inner diameter and camshaft pin (1) diameter; the real clearance is obtained by their difference. If clearance exceeds 0.135 mm, replace bushes and, if necessary, the camshaft.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
126
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Camshaft Figure 223
60626
MAIN DATA --- CAMSHAFT AND TOLERANCES The surfaces of shaft supporting pin and cams must be extremely smooth; if you see any sign of seizing or scoring, replace the shaft and the relative bushes TOLERANCES ORIENTATION
TOLERANCE CHARACTERISTIC Perpendicularity
POSITION
Concentricity or coaxial alignment
OSCILLATION Circular oscillation IMPORTANCE CLASS ASSIGNED TO PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS CRITICAL IMPORTANT SECONDARY
SYMBOL ⊥ ↗ SYMBOL © ⊕ ⊝
Bushes Figure 224
60627
MAIN DATA OF CAMSHAFT BUSHES AND RELEVANT HOUSINGS ON CYLINDER HEAD. * Bush inner diameter after installation D The bush surfaces must not show any sign of seizing or scoring; if they do replace them. D Measure the bush inner diameters with a baremeter and replace them, if the value measured exceeds the tolerance value.
D To take down and fit back the bushes, use the proper tool 380000146.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 127
Replacing the bushes camshaft using beater 380000146 Beater Figure 225
71721
A = Beater with seat for bushes for insertion/removal B = Bush positioning pin C = Mark for correct insertion of seventh bush D = Mark for correct insertion of bushes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 (yellow notches) E = Guide bush F = Guide line G = Guide bush to fasten to seventh bush support H = Cylinder head yellow bush fastening plate I = Grip L = Extension joint Replacement
Removal Figure 226
Figure 227
Front
Front
Rear
Rear 71725
The bush removal order is 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. The bushes are slipped out from the front side of their individual seats. Removal does not require the beater extension for bushes 5, 6 and 7 and use of the guide bush is not necessary. The extension is instead required for bushes 1, 2, 3 and 4, as well as the guide bush Position the beater precisely during the removal operation.
71722
Fit the beater complete with extension. To insert bushes 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, proceed as follows: 1. Place the bush for insertion on the beater (A) lining up the pin (B) (Figure 225) with the seat on the bush. 2. Position the guide bush (E) and fasten the guide bush (G) (Figure 225) in the seat of the 7th bush by means of plate H). 3. When inserting the bush, line up notches F and M. Doing so, when the bush is pushed in the lubrication hole on it is aligned with the oil hole in the seat. The bush is fully inserted when the 1st yellow reference notch (D) is flush with the guide bush (G).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
128
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 228 Front
Rear 71725
To insert bush 6, proceed as follows: D remove the grip (I) and the extension (N); D position the extension (N) and the guide bush (E) as shown in the figure; D repeat operations 1, 2 and 3. Figure 229 Front
Rear 71725
To insert bush 7, proceed as follows: D remove the grip (I) and the guide bush (G) fastened to the head; D replace the guide G from the inner side as shown in the figure; D position the bush on the beater (A) and bring it toward its seat making sure the hole in the bush aligns with the lubrication hole in the head. Proceed to fit. The 7th bush is fully inserted when the reference mark ( C ) is flush with the bush seat.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Valve springs
ENGINE 129
Fitting the valves and oil seal ring
Figure 230
Figure 232
70000
Before installation, check valve spring flexibility using proper tool and compare the loading and elastic deformation data with data referred to the new valves, shown in the following figure. Figure 231 Free spring height
Valve closed
500Âą25N
47,80
61
75
972Âą25N Valve open
49033
Lubricate the valve stem and place the valves in the relevant valve guides; install the lower plates (3) using proper tool, fit the oil seal ring (1) on valve guides (2), then install the valves as shown: Figure 233
71726
MAIN DATA TO CONTROL EXHAUST AND DISCHARGE VALVE SPRING
47583
D fit springs (6) and the upper plate (5); D apply tool (2) and block it with bracket (4); tighten the lever (1) until cotters are installed (3), remove tool (2).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
130
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
ROCKER SHAFT Figure 234
44925
The camshaft cams directly control rockers: 6 for injectors and 12 for valves. Rockers slide directly on the cam profiles via rollers. The other end acts on a bar directly supported by the two valves stems. A pad is placed between the rocker adjusting screw and the bar. Two lubrication holes are obtained inside the rockers. The rocker shaft practically covers the whole cylinder head; remove it to have access to all the underlying components. The length of the rocker shaft is practically the same as that of the cylinder head. It must be removed in order to remove all the components located beneath it. Shaft Figure 235
73557
MAIN DATA OF THE ROCKER ARM SHAFT Check that the surface of the shaft shows no scoring or signs of seizure; if it does, replace it. Rocker arms Figure 237
Figure 236 SECTION A--A SECTION B--B
47586
PUMP INJECTOR ROCKER ARMS Figure 238
47586
Check the surfaces of the bushings, which must show no signs of scoring or excessive wear; if they do, replace the rocker arm assembly. Figure 239 SECTION A---A
SECTION A--A
SECTION B---B SECTION B--B
INTAKE VALVE ROCKER ARMS
47586
EXHAUST VALVE ROCKER ARMS
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
47586
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Timing distribution control
ENGINE 131
Pin double drive cog
Figure 240
Double drive cog Figure 242
86925
TIMING DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS 1. Camshaft --- 2. Bush --- 3. Pin --- 4. Con---rod --5. Camshaft drive pinion --- 6. Drive cog --- 7. Double drive cog --- 8. Camshaft drive pinion Drive cog pin Drive cog
86934
Bushing replacement The bushes (2, Figure 241 and 2, Figure 242) can be replaced if worn. After fitting the bush, ream to obtain the diameter indicated in Figure 241 or Figure 242. The bush must be fitted into the gear in the direction of the arrow, positioning it at the level indicated in Figure 241 or Figure 242.
Figure 241
Nominal gear pin/bush play: Figure 241 --- 0.045 to 0.075 mm Figure 242 --- 0.045 to 0.085 mm.
86933
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
132
ENGINE
SECTION 4
ASSEMBLING THE ENGINE ON THE BENCH
327B-330B
Figure 245
Fix the engine block to the suitable stand. Install the cylinder liners as described in the relevant paragraph. Figure 243
49021
Place the half---bearings (1) on the main bearings in the underblock (2). Figure 246 48586
Fit the oil spray nozzles (2), so that the dowel coincides with the block hole (3). Place the half bearings (1) on the main bearings. Figure 244
47595
By means of suitable equipment (1) apply silicone LOCTITE 5699 to the block, as shown in Figure 247. 48570
Lubricate the half bearings, then install the crankshaft (2) using a proper tool (1).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 247
ENGINE 133
Figure 250
60632
Sealant application diagram. Fit the underblock within 10â&#x20AC;&#x2122; of the application of the sealant.
47579
Close the inner screws (1) torque by means of a dynamometric wrench (3, Figure 250), then with two further angular phases, using a proper tool (4). Tighten again the outer screws (1, Figure 249) with 60° angular closing, using a proper tool (3, Figure 249).
Figure 248
60559
Fit the underblock by means of a suitable hoist and hooks (1). Figure 249
47581
Fit the underblock and, using a dynamometric wrench (2), close the splined outer screws (1) to 30 Nm torque, according to the diagram shown in Figure 250.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
134
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Figure 251
stage 1: pretightening outer screws
FRONT SIDE
30 Nm (22 lb ft)
60592
stage 2: pretightenig inner screws
FRONT SIDE
120 Nm (89 lb ft)
60593
stage 3: angle inner screws
FRONT SIDE
60°
60593
stage 4: angle inner screws
FRONT SIDE
55°
60593
stage 5: angle outer screws
FRONT SIDE
60° 60594
DIAGRAM SHOWING TIGHTENING ORDER OF UNDER---CRANKCASE SECURING SCREWS For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 252
ENGINE 135
Figure 253
49030
Rotate the cylinder assembly placing it vertically. Fit the half---bearings (1) on both the connecting rod and the cap.
60616
Fit the connecting rod---piston assemblies (2) into the piston liners, using a proper tool (1). Check the following: D the openings of the split rings are offset by 120° ; D all pistons belong to the same class, A or B; D ideogram (2), stamped on the piston crown, is placed toward the engine flywheel, or the cavity, on the piston skirt, corresponds to the position of the oil spray nozzles.
Fitting the connecting rod-- piston assembly into the cylinder liners Figure 254
1
Connecting rod---piston assembly
2
Piston ceiling area where the assembly position and the selection class ideogram is printed
3
Connecting rod marking area
60615
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
136
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Fitting the cylinder head
327B-330B
Figure 258
Figure 255
60515
47594
Connect the connecting rods to the relative journals, fit the connection rod caps (1) with half bearings; tighten the fixing screws (2) of the connecting rod caps to 60 Nm torque (6 kgm). Using a proper tool (3), further tighten screws with 60° angle.
Make sure that pistons 1---6 are exactly at the TDC Place the sealing gasket (2) on the block. Fit the cylinder head (1) and tighten screws as shown in Figure 259, Figure 260 and Figure 261. Figure 259
Figure 256
61270
Diagram showing the cylinder head fixing screws tightening order Figure 260
60563
By means of centering ring 380000169 (2), check the exact cover position (1), otherwise act as necessary and tighten the screws (3). Figure 257
60565
--- Preliminary tightening by means of a dynamometric wrench (1): 1st phase: 60 Nm (6 kgm) 2nd phase: 120 Nm (12 kgm);
60564
Fit the sealing gasket (1), install the fitting tool 380000126 (2) and drive the sealing gasket (1) by screwing nut (3).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 261
ENGINE 137 Install the gear box within 10’ of the application of the sealant.
Figure 264
60566
D Angular tightening using a proper tool (1); --- 3rd phase: 90° angle --- 4th phase: 45° angle for screws 4, 5, 12, 13, 20, 21 --- 5th phase: 65° angle for screws 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26. Figure 262
60633
Tighten the screws shown in the figure by means of a dynamometric wrench, in compliance with the following order and tightening torque:
71773
Fit the oil pump (5), intermediate cogs (2) complete with P.T.O tie---rod (1) and drive cog (3) Tighten the screws (4) to the specified torque.
:
no. 10 M12 x 1,75 x 100
56 to 70 Nm
no. 2 M12 x 1,75 x 70
56 to 70 Nm
no. 4 M12 x 1,75 x 35
56 to 70 Nm
no. 1 M12 x 1,75 x 120
56 to 70 Nm
no. 2 M12 x 1,75 x 193
56 to 70 Nm
Figure 265
Replacing flywheel casing Figure 263
60568
47592
Fit the sealing gasket (1), install the fitting tool 380000127 (2) and drive the sealing gasket by screwing the nut (3).
Apply (as shown in the figure) sealant LOCTITE 5699 to the gear box using the proper equipment (1). For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
138
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Replacing engine flywheel Figure 266
HOLES VIEW: A --- B --- C
HOLE VIEW: D
DETAIL OF PISTON POSITION MARKS ON ENGINE FLYWHEEL 60668
A
= Hole on the flywheel with 1 notch, corresponding to TDC of pistons 3---4.
C = Hole on the flywheel with 1 corresponding to TDC of pistons 2---5
B
= Hole on the flywheel with 1 notch, corresponding to TDC of pistons 1---6.
D = Hole on the flywheel with 2 notches, corresponding to 54°.
Figure 267
notch,
Figure 268
49036
49037
Stop rotation using the tool 380000144 (3); tighten the screws (2) in three phases. First phase: pre---torque at a 120 Nm (12 kgm) torque using a torque wrench (4).
Second and third phase: tighten at a 60º + 30º angle using a proper tool (1).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 139
Figure 271 Figure 269
60570
D Fit a proper gauge (1) and check and adjust the transmission gear connecting rod (3), tighten the screw (2) at the prescribed torque. 72436
Figure 272
Position the crankshaft with the pistons 1 and 6 at the top dead centre (T.D.C.). This situation occurs when: 1. The hole with reference mark (5) of the engine flywheel (4) can be seen through the inspection window. 2. The tool 380000150 (1), through the seat (2) of the engine speed sensor, enters the hole (3) in the engine flywheel (4). If this condition does not occur, turn the engine flywheel (4) appropriately. Remove the tool 380000150 (1). Figure 270
60571
D Refit the motion transmission gear (1) and secure the screws (2) to tightening torque.
73843
Fit the camshaft (4), positioning it observing the reference marks (â&#x2020;&#x2019;) as shown in the figure. Lubricate the seal (3) and fit it on the shoulder plate (2). Mount the shoulder plate (2) with the sheet metal gasket (1) and tighten the screws (5) to the required torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
140
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Figure 273
327B-330B
Figure 275
104260 60572
Fit back the gear (2), without fully tightening screws (5) on the camshaft and place it so that the 4 oval holes are centered with respect to the camshaft fixing holes. Using a magnetic gauge (1), make sure that the gear (2 and 3) clearance is 0.073 to 0.195 mm, otherwise adjust the clearance as follows: D untighten screws (4) fixing transmission gear (3); D untighten screws (2, Figure 271) fixing the rod, move the rod (3, Figure 271) to obtain the required clearance; D Tighten the rod fixing screw (2, Figure 271) as well as the screws (4, Figure 273) fixing the gear to the prescribed torque.
Fit: D The injectors (1) and, using a torque wrench, lock the bracket fixing screws to a torque of 26 Nm. D The crosspieces (2) on the valve stem, all with the largest hole on the same side. Replacing rocker shaft assembly Before fitting back the rocker shaft assembly, make sure that all the adjusting screws have been completely unscrewed. Figure 276
Fitting pump -- injectors Figure 274
73533
Using a suitable tool (3), fasten the blocks (4) to the rocker arms (2). Apply tool 380000148 (1) and remove the rocker shaft assembly. Fit the sealing rings (1) (2) (3) on injectors.
104243
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 141
Timing of timing system shaft
Figure 277
Figure 280
70567A
SCHEME OF SCREW TIGHTENING SEQUENCE SECURING ROCKER ARMS Screw screws (1 --- 2 --- 3) until rocker arms are brought to contact relating seats on cylinder head, tighten the screws according to sequence indicated in figure operating in two steps as indicated in successive figure. Figure 278
71776
Apply tool 380000137 (7) and shim 380000138 (6) to the gearbox.
45261
Lock the screws (2) fixing the rocker---arm shaft as follows: D 1st phase: tightening to a torque of 40 Nm (10 kgm) with the torque wrench (1). D 2nd phase: closing with an angle of 60° using a proper tool (3).
The arrow shows the direction of rotation of the engine when running. Using the above---mentioned tool, turn the engine flywheel (1) in the direction of rotation of the engine so as to take the piston of cylinder no.1 to approximately the T.D.C. in the phase of combustion. This condition occurs when the hole with one reference mark (4), after the hole with two reference marks (5) on the engine flywheel (1), can be seen through the inspection window (2).
Figure 279
60574
D Mount the engine brake lever retaining springs (3). D Connect the pipe (2) to the engine brake cylinders (4) and to the cylinder with the engine brake solenoid valve (1). Mount the electric wiring on the electro---injectors. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
142
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Figure 281
327B-330B
Figure 283
71774
The exact position of piston 1 at TDC is achieved in the previously described position, when tool 380000150 (1) fits into the hole (3) on the flywheel (4) through the engine revs sensor seat (2). Figure 282
72436
The camshaft is timed if the following conditions are present when the cam lift values are 4.44 Âą 0.05 mm: 1) the hole marked with single notch (5) can be seen through the inspection window; 2) tool 380000150 (1) can be inserted into hole (3) on the engine flywheel (4) through the seat (2) of the engine rpm sensor. Figure 284
60573
Position the magnetic dial gauge (1) with the stem on the roller (2) of the rocker controlling the injector of cylinder 1, and pre---load it 6 mm. Using tool 380000137 (7) Figure 280, turn the crankshaft clockwise until the pointer on the gauge reaches the minimum value beyond which it cannot go. Reset the dial gauge. Turn the flywheel anti---clockwise until the gauge reads a lift value of 4.44 Âą 0.05 mm for the camshaft cam.
60575
If the conditions illustrated in Figure 283 and specified in points 1 and 2 above do not exist, proceed as follows: D Loosen the screws (2) securing gear (1) to the camshaft and use the slots (1) on the gear; D Move the engine flywheel to obtain the conditions described in points 1 and 2, Figure 283, while keeping the cam lift value the same; D Lock the screws (2) and repeat the check already described; D Tighten the screws (2) to the specified torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 143
Fit the gear (2) Figure 285, with the 4 slotted holes centred with respect to the threaded holes in the camshaft tightening the screws to the specified torque. Check the timing of the camshaft by first rotating the flywheel clockwise to fully drop the cam and then turning it anticlockwise until the comparator read 4.44 ± 0.05. Check the timing conditions described in Figure 283.
Figure 285
Phonic wheel timing Figure 287
71778
When adjustment in the slots (1) is not sufficient to recover timing offset and the camshaft rotates tight with the gear (2), to consequently vary the cam lift reference value, proceed as follows: D Check that the screws (2, Figure 284) are tight. D Rotate the flywheel by ca. ½ a turn clockwise. D Rotate the flywheel anticlockwise until a cam lift value of 4.44 ± 0.05 mm can be read on the comparator. D Remove the screws (2, Figure 284) and remove the gear (2) from the camshaft. Figure 286
77260
72436
Rotate the flywheel again to bring it into the following conditions: D Double notch (5) visible through lower inspection hole. D Tool 380000150 (1) fitted flush into the engine revs sensor seat (2) and (3).
Turn the crankshaft by taking the piston of cylinder no. 1 into the compression phase at T.D.C.; turn the flywheel in the opposite direction to the normal direction of rotation by approximately 1/4 of a turn. Again turn the flywheel in its normal direction of rotation until you see the hole marked with the double notch (4) through the inspection hole under the flywheel housing. Insert tool 380000150 (5) into the seat of the flywheel sensor (6). Insert the tool 380000151 (2), via the seat of the phase sensor, onto the tooth obtained on the phonic wheel. Should inserting the tool (2) prove difficult, loosen the screws (3) and adjust the phonic wheel (1) appropriately so that the tool (2) gets positioned on the tooth correctly. Go ahead and tighten the screws (3).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
144
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Adjusting the unload/intake rockers play and pump injector control rockers preload Figure 288
60577
ADJUSTMENT OF INTAKE, EXHAUST AND INJECTION ROCKERS The adjustment of clearance between the rockers and rods controlling the intake and exhaust valves, as well as the adjustment of pre---loading of the rockers controlling pump injectors, must be carried out carefully. Take the cylinder where clearance must be adjusted to the bursting phase; its valves are closed while balancing the symmetric cylinder valves. Symmetric cylinders are 1---6, 2---5 and 3---4. In order to properly operate, follow these instructions and data specified on the table. Adjustment of clearance between the rockers and rods controlling intake and exhaust valves: D Using a polygonal wrench, loosen nut (1) locking the adjustment screw; D Insert the thickness gauge blade (3); D Tighten or untighten the adjustment screw with the appropriate wrench; D Make sure that the gauge blade (3) can slide with a slight friction; D Lock the nut (1), by blocking the adjustment screw. Pre---loading of rockers controlling pump injectors: D Using a polygonal wrench, loosen the nut locking the rocker adjustment screw (5) controlling the pump injector (6);
FIRING ORDER 1 -- 4 -- 2 -- 6 -- 3 -- 5 Clockwise start---up and rotation
Adjusting cylinder valve no.
Adjusting clearance of cylinder valve no.
Adjusting pre---loading of cylinder injector no.
1 and 6 at TDC
6
1
5
120ยบ
3
4
1
120ยบ
5
2
4
120ยบ
1
6
2
120ยบ
4
3
6
120ยบ
2
5
3
In order to properly carry out the above--mentioned adjustments, follow the sequence specified in the table, checking the exact position in each rotation phase by means of pin 380000150, to be inserted in the 11th hole in each of the three sectors with 18 holes each.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 289
ENGINE 145
Figure 291
85480
Fit the distribution cover (1). Fit the blow ---by case (7) and its gasket and then tighten the screws (8) to the prescribed torque. Install the filter (5) and the gaskets (4 and 6). The filter (5) operation is unidirectional, therefore it must be assembled with the two sight supports as illustrated in the figure. Fit the cover (3) and tighten the fastening screws (2) to the prescribed torque. Apply silicone LOCTITE 5970 on the blow--by case (7) surface of engines fitted with P.T.O. according to the procedure described in the following figure.
47573
D Turn the engine and fit the oil scavenge pipe. Fit the gasket (4) to the oil sump (1) with the spacer (3) and fit the sump to the crankcase tightening the screws (2) to the specified torque.
Figure 290
85481
Apply silicone LOCTITE 5970 on the blow ---by case and 0,5 form a string (2) of â&#x2C6;&#x2026; 1,5 + 0,2 as shown in the figure. Fit the blow---by case (1) within 10â&#x20AC;&#x2122; from sealer application. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
146
ENGINE
SECTION 4
COMPLETING ENGINE ASSEMBLY Complete the engine assembly by assembling or connecting the following components: D thermostat unit; D automatic belt tightener, water pump, alternator; D control belt. Figure 292
327B-330B Turbocharger cooling water and lube oil piping unions must be tighten at a torque of: D 35 Âą 5 Nm, water pipe unions; D 55 Âą 5 Nm, oil pipe female union; D 20---25 Nm, oil pipe male union.
D D D D
Oil dipstick. Electrical connections and dipstick. Fill engine with specified quantity of oil. Remove engine from rotary bench and remove engine mounting brackets.
Fit: D Air conditioner automatic belt tensioner. D Drive belt.
In order to mount the belts, use appropriate equipment to act on the belt tensioners in the direction indicated by the arrow. a. loosen the belt tensioner b. put on the belt c. release the belt tensioner
60578
WATER PUMP --- ALTERNATOR CONTROL BELT ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM 1. Alternator --- 2. Free wheel --- 3. Water pump --4. Crankshaft D D D D D D D D D D D D
damping flywheel; starter; fuel pump; power steering system tank; fuel filter and line; pre---heating resistance; suction manifold; heat exchanger oil filter, lubricating gaskets; exhaust manifold; turbocharger and relevant water and oil lines; Power take off (P.T.O) and respective piping.
Do not invert the direction of action on the belt tensioner in order to avoid damage to the tensioning mechanism. The belt tensioners are automatic and thus do not require further adjustments after assembly.
Figure 293
209NM02
A: WATER PUMP --- ALTERNATOR BELT B: AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 147
TURBOCHARGER REPAIR On detecting an engine problem attributable to the supercharger system, it is a good idea to check the efficiency of the connector manifold gaskets and fasteners before checking the turbocompressor itself, as well as the absence of blockages in the intake manifolds and air filter. If the damage to the turbocompressor is due to lack of oil, check that the oil circulation pipes are not damaged, and if so replace them or eliminate the problem. After carrying out the above preliminary checks, check turbo function by means of an engine test. The test must be carried out in the following conditions: D engine coolant temperature >50 ° C; D battery charge (voltage 22V for compression test; D generator efficient. On finding values outside tolerance, check efficiency of: D shut ---off valve; D pressure sensor; D engine bay pressure sensor connection (if oxidise, clean with specific product); D absence of solenoid valve electrical faults WGT (connection continuity); D actuator movement via active diagnosis as described in the related chapter, in case of seizure, grease the bush with Kernite lubricant (high temperature). If the problem persists, replace the actuator; D sliding coupling, when moved manually should slide freely. If seized and if the above check on the bush proves negative, or if efficiency problems are not found at the above indicated points, after contacting the technical “Help Desk”, replace the turbocompressor, proceeding as follows:
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
148
ENGINE
SECTION 4
Variable geometry movement check
327B-330B
Actuator check
Figure 294
Figure 295
106227 106229
Remove the screws (2) and detach the actuator (1) from the turbocompressor (7). Remove the screw (6), the disk beneath (5), the ring (4) and disconnect the actuator (1) rod (3) from the variable geomtry control lever pin (8) Thoroughly clean the pin (→) of the lever (8) and the bush (→) of the rod (3) using a non---abrasive microfibre cloth.
Check the efficiency of the actuator (1), proceeding as follows. Apply the compressed air supply pipe with pressure regulator (4) to the connector (2) on the actuator (1). With the pressure regulator, introduce compressed air into the actuator, gradually modulating pressure between 0 3.5 bar, the rod (3) of the actuator (1) should move without snagging. If not, replace the actuator (1). Figure 296
Do not use abrasive paper of any kind. Visually inspect the condition of the bush (→) of the rod (3) and the pin (→) of the lever (8), if worn, replace the actuator (1) or the turbocompressor (7). Check the movement of the variable geometry internal mechanism, by means of the lever (8), there must be no snagging. Otherwise proceed to clean the turbine body, as instructed in the related chapter.
106228
Check for any leaks from the actuator at the indicated (→) by applying a solution of soap and water. Powering the actuator (1) with compressed air, no bubbles should appear at the indicated (→), otherwise replace the actuator (1).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
ENGINE 149
Turbine body cleaning
Figure 297
Figure 299
106229
Lubricate the bush (→) of the rod (3) and the of the lever (8) with lithium---based Castrol LM GREASE and refit the actuator (1) to the turbocompressor (7) proceeding as follows. Connect the rod (3) to the lever (8). Fit: a new ring (4), the disk (5) and tighten the screw (6). Tighten the actuator fasteners (2) to the turbocompressor (7). Tighten the screws (2 and 6) to torque of 25 Nm. Check actuator excursion
106231
Mark the fitting position of the clamps (2) on the central body (1). Apply anti---oxidant spray to the thread and nut (4) and loosen the clamp (2) by means of the nut. Slightly turn the clamp (2) using pliers (5). Mark the fitting position of the turbine body (3) on the central body (1). Figure 300
Figure 298
106232 106230
Check the X excursion of the actuator (1) rod (2) proceeding as follows. Measure the distance X1, between the actuator (1) and the centre distance of the grommet (4). Apply the compressed air supply pipe (3) with pressure regulator to the actuator connector (1). Throught the pressure regulator introduce compressed air into the actuator (1) gradually regulating pressure from 0 to 3.5 bar, until the lever (5) reaches full excursion. Measure the distance X2, between the actuator (1) and the centre distance of the grommet (4). The excursion X of the actuator (1) rod (2) is given by the following subtraction X = X2---X1 and should result as 11.5±0.5 mm.
Using a copper hammer, knock the turbine body (2) from two opposing sides (~ 180º) to separate it from the central body (1). During the operation take particular care not to damage the turbine propeller. After dismantling the turbine body, check the movement of the variable geometry as instructed in the related chapter. If the movement has not improved with respect to the previous check, replace the turbocompressor.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
150
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Remove the the clamp (1) from the central body (2) and check that it is not damaged. Otherwise replace it.
Figure 301
Figure 304
106233
Thoroughly clean the slotted ring (1) and the surrounding area of the turbine body of all carbon deposits and check that the ring rotates freely. Otherwise replace the turbocompressor. Any small cracks between the slots and the ring may be tolerated as they do not impair turbocompressor function.
106236
Remove the external O---ring (1) from the central body (2). Thoroughly clean the O---ring (1) and check that it is not damaged. Otherwise replace it. Figure 305
Figure 302
106237
106234
With a suitable craper and abrasive paper, thoroughly clean the surfaces (â&#x2020;&#x2019;) of the turbine body (1) of all carbon deposits, taking care not to damage it. Figure 303
Check the turbine propellor (1), there must be no: carbon deposits, deformation, breaks, scoring of the blades and it must rotate freely. Ceck the play on the propeller shaft (1). It must result as: --- axial play 0.025 to 0.127 mm --- radial play 0.381 to 0.533 mm If higher values are found or any other of the above problems, replace the turbocompressor. Before proceeding to clean the central body, turbine side, suitably cover the oil, water and air (â&#x2020;&#x2019;) intakes and outlets to prevent dirt or foreign matter entering the turbocompressor.
106235
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 4
Figure 306
ENGINE 151
Figure 308
106238
With a suitable craper and abrasive paper, thoroughly clean the surfaces of the central body (1) of all carbon deposits, taking care not to damage it and the variable geometry ring. Then clean the surfaces and the variable geomtry ring of all remaining deposits using compressed air. Check again, as instructed in the related chapters: --- movement of the variable geomtery; --- the actuator; --- actuator excursion. Figure 307
106240
Mount turbine body (1) on central body (2) taking care to avoid damaging turbine rotor and align turbine body variable geometry slot ring. Do not force mounting operation: in case of jamming, it might damage variable geometry with consequent regulation system faulty operation. Once mounting has been completed, make sure that turbine body results to be matched correctly on central body. Position turbine body on central body and clamp on central body in such a way that marks, made on dismounting, are matching. Tighten nut clamping the clamp at 11.3 Nm torque. Check again, as described in relating chapters: --- actuator; --- actuator travel.
106235
Position the clamp (1) on the central body (2). If the clamp (1) with incorporated heat shield has to be replaced, a new actuator with incorporated heat shield has to be fitted in place of the existing one. Position the thoroughly cleaned external O---ring on the central body. Apply a thin layer of anti---seize to the clean couping surfaces of: central body / turbine body.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
152
ENGINE
SECTION 4
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 5 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic transmission --- Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 TRANSMISSION SPEED SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Speed sensor location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Speed sensor setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FUNDAMENTAL COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Torque converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Lock ---up clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Hydrodynamic brake (retarder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Central differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1st forward gear: ratio 1:5.350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2nd forward gear: ratio 1:3.446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3rd forward gear: ratio 1:2.207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 4th forward gear: ratio 1:1.421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Key (figure on next page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Connectors key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Automatic transmission control system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 TIGHTENING TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Oil level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Cold check (15---45 ° C) (59---113 ° F) . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Hot check (80---100 ° C) (176---212 ° F) . . . . . . . . . . 35 Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Oil filter change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 AEB procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Display – meaning of AEB procedure messages . 39
5th forward gear: ratio 1:0.970 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE CHECK PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6th forward gear: ratio 1:0.625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Pipe connector for pressure test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1st reverse gear: ratio 1:5.350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Pressure test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2nd reverse gear: ratio 1: 2.207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Oil level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3rd reverse gear: ratio 1:0.970 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Pressure reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION GEARBOX . . . . . . 43
External pipe arrangement view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC CONTROL DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Position of the pressure and temperature measuring points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Electro---hydraulic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 OIL CIRCULATION SYSTEM -- VERSION WITH RETARDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 OIL CIRCULATION SYSTEM -- VERSION WITHOUT RETARDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Refit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 LOCK -- UP CLUTCH VALVE (WK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Removal and disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Assembly and refit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Page
Page
GEARBOX AND GEAR DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 54
Clutch shaft KR/K2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Converter and converter bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
AN input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Plate 4: clutch shaft KR/K2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Lubricating pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Reassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Central splitter lock device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Plate 5A: clutch KR --- Version A (24 surfaces) . . . 78
Intermediate shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Plate 5B: clutch KR --- Version B (20 surfaces) . . . 79
Rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Plate 6A: clutch K2 --- Version A (18 surfaces) . . . . 80
Central splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Plate 6B: clutch K2 --- Version B (14 surfaces) . . . . 81
Multiple---disk clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Clutch shaft KV/K1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Power takeoff shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transmitter disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Plate 7: clutch shaft KV/K1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CLEANING, INSPECTING AND CHECKING . . . . 59 Cleaning components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 INSPECTING AND CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Guards and machined surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Bearings and axial shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 O---rings and seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Gears, grooves and threaded parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Rings and springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Clutch plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 GENERAL ASSEMBLY STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . 60 Lubricants used for assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Clutches and pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Lip seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Roller bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Shrink ---fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 DISMANTLING AND REASSEMBLY OF MAIN UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Clutch shaft K4/K3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Plate 1: clutch shaft K4/K3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Reassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Plate 2A: clutch K4 --- Version A (12 surfaces) . . . . 67 Plate 2B: clutch K4 --- Version B (10 surfaces) . . . . 68 Plate 3A: clutch K3 --- Version A (18 surfaces) . . . . 69
Reassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Plate 8A: clutch KV --- Version A (24 surfaces) . . . 90 Plate 8B: clutch KV --- Version B (20 surfaces) . . . 91 Plate 9A: clutch K1 --- Version A (18 surfaces) . . . . 92 Plate 9B: clutch K1 --- Version B (14 surfaces) . . . . 93 Power takeoff shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Central splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 AN input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 GEARBOX AND GEAR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Power takeoff shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Intermediate shaft gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Clutch shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Gearbox cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Intermediate shaft pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Central splitter lock device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Power takeoff flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 AN input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Converter bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Plate 3B: clutch K3 --- Version B (14 surfaces) . . . . 70
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
DESCRIPTION The ZF 6WG260/310 automatic transmission consists of the following fundamental parts. Transmission ECU and wiring: The ECU receives the input signals and controls the outputs to ensure correct operation of the transmission. Hydraulic unit: The unit consists of a set of solenoid valves controlled by the transmission ECU and pipes for conveying pressurized oil to the points required. Torque converter: The torque converter transmits the drive torque from the engine to the transmission with--out employing stiff components. It consists of three parts: the impeller, the turbine and the stator. The impeller is the suction element. It is controlled by the engine. The turbine is the outlet element. It is hydraulically controlled by the impeller. The stator is the reaction element (torque multiplier). Lock-up clutch: It is fitted between the impeller and the turbine. The lock ---up clutch is engaged when the turbine speed approaches that of the impeller so that the engine drive torque is directly transferred to the transmission at a ratio of 1 : 1.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 3
Hydrodynamic brake (Retarder): It is fitted upstream to the torque converter. The purpose is to transmit the drag torque from the vehicle wheels during deceleration. Shaft and gears: The transmission is characterized by an input shaft, driven by the converter, by an output shaft, to which has a transmission differential lock, and by three main shafts, each equipped with two or three helical, permanently engaged gears. The forward and reverse gear ratios are obtained by engaging the different clutches fitted on the three main shafts. A supplementary driven PTO shaft is also included for steering emergency pump. Clutches: Each shaft is equipped with two hydraulically controlled, multiple plate clutches. Oil pressure pump: The pump is fitted on the input shaft. It is a gear pump and ensures the pressure required for lubricating and operating the hydraulic transmission functions. Power take-off (PTO): The main power take off, driven by the pump shaft (and so by the engine) is mounted on the upper rear side of the transmission casing. This power take off is used to drive the main pump. The auxiliary power take off, driven by the intermediate shaft (and so by the gear wheels) is mounted on the lower rear side of the transmission casing. This power take of is used to drive the emergency pump.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Automatic transmission -- Section 1. Drive torque input flange 2. R --- hydrodynamic brake (Retarder) 3. WK --- lock ---up clutch 4. W --- torque converter 5. Breather 6. Hydraulic control unit 7. PTO drive shaft --- main hydraulic pump drive 8. Transmission oil pressure pump 9. Drive torque input shaft 10. KV (forward gear) and K1 clutch shaft 11. KR (reverse gear) and K2 clutch shaft 12. K3 and K4 clutch shaft 13. Intermediate shaft 14. Drive torque output flange, rear side --- to rear axles 15. Transmission differential lock 16. Transmission differential lock actuator 17. Drive torque output flange, front side --- to front axle
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 5
Figure 1
T225051
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Identification plate 1. Automatic transmission type 2. Serial number 3. Automatic transmission ZF part code 4. Total transmission ratio
SECTION 5
5. 6. 7.
327B-330B
Control pressure value Converter ZF part code Converter type
Figure 2
292A005001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 7
TRANSMISSION SPEED SENSORS Speed sensor location 31. output shaft speed Hall---effect sensor 6. turbine speed inductive sensor 13. central speed gear shaft inductive sensor 14. engine speed inductive sensor
A) drive torque input flange B) front drive torque output flange C) rear drive torque output flange
Figure 3
rear view
left view T225055
T225036
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Speed sensor setting Inductive sensors For the inductive sensors, the following different gap between tooth and sensor area must to be adjusted. 6 turbine speed sensor 13 central speed gear shaft sensor 14 engine speed sensor
S=0.5+0.3 mm (0.20+0.08 in) S=0.3+0.1 mm (0.12+0.08 in) S=0.5+0.3 mm (0.20+0.08 in)
1. Sensor 2. Gear 3. Housing Figure 4
T225037
Hall sensor 31 output shaft speed Hall---effect sensor 1. 2. 3. 4.
S=1.0/1.5 mm (0.39/0.59 in)
Spur gear K3 Clutch axle K4/K3 Housing Sensor Figure 5
T225038
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 9
FUNDAMENTAL COMPONENTS Torque converter The torque converter hydraulically transmits the engine drive force from the engine to the transmission, according to a multiplying ratio in the range from a maximum
of approximately 2.5:1 to a minimum of 1:1 (direct engagement).
Figure 6
1730705Z
The torque converter W consists of three parts: the pump P, the turbine T and the stator S. The pump is the input element. It is controlled by the engine. The turbine is the outlet element. It is hydraulically controlled by the pump. The stator is the reaction element (torque multiplier). It is fitted on a one---way bearing allowing revolution in the direction of the pump only. The assembly is enclosed in a box full of specific oil. The unit also includes: D a hydrodynamic brake R (retarder) D a lock ---up clutch WK, which, when engaged, stiffly connects the pump and the turbine.
Operation The pump is connected to the engine and transmits energy to the oil by turning. The centrifuge force projects the oil towards the edge of the pump from where it flows to the turbine at high speed. Here, the kinetic energy of the oil impresses a rotary movement to the turbine in the same direction as the pump. At turbine output, the oil is deviated by the stator at a certain angle so to increase yield at pump return. Direction is consistent with the turbine vanes. In this way, the stator, which cannot turn due to the action of the one---way bearing, provides a reaction torque which is summed to that turbine torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
The resistance ratio between the torque on the turbine and the drive torque is the converter multiplication ratio. It is proportion to the difference in speed between the pump and the turbine. Figure 7
327B-330B
Lock-- up clutch The lock ---up clutch WK is a device which mechanically couples the pump and the converter turbine when it is engaged. When the lock ---up clutch is engaged, the slipping between the pump P and the turbine T is eliminated. The transmission is, consequently, transformed into a mechanical transmission unit, with respective loss of friction in the converter and fuel consumption reduction. Figure 8
1730714
Specifically: D When the vehicle wheels are stationary, the ratio is approximately 1:2.5 (condition A, maximum slipping). D During converter operating driving conditions (slipping â&#x2030; 0), this ratio is reduced to intermediate values (condition B). D When the pump speed is comparable to the turbine speed, the ratio approaches 1:1 (slipping â&#x2030;&#x2C6; 0).
.
Slipping = 0 condition is only fully reached when the lock---up clutch is engaged (condition C).
When the pump and turbine pump speeds are nearly the same, the stator is invested by the flow of oil which causes it to turn in the direction of the turbine. This is because the one---way bearing only permits turning in the direction of the turbine. In this way, the stator reaction torque is entirely absent. The converter becomes a simple hydraulic coupling.
1730707Z
Clutch disengaged (converter phase) The oil circulating in the converter impresses the same pressure on the rear a and front b side of the clutch (2) engagement piston (1): the turbine T is free to turn with respect to the pump P. Clutch engaged (lock ---up phase) The control unit operates a solenoid valve which increases the pressure in the rear area a. Consequently, the piston (1) slides and locks the clutch (2). In this way, the turbine T is solidly fastened to the pump P, whereby eliminating relative sliding.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 11
Clutches The multiple plate clutches prevent the relative rotation between the hub and the bell when engaged. Figure 9
1730708Z
Each clutch consists of a set of plates with grooves on the outside (1a) arranged alternatively with a set of plates with grooves on the inside (1b). The plates with grooves on the outside engage the bell (2), while the plates with grooves on the inside engage the hub (3). The clutch is hydraulically locked by sending pressurised oil to the back of the control piston (4) by means of solenoid valves. In this condition, the plates cannot slide. The bell and the hub are solidly fastened. Release is ensured by the mechanical action of a spring (5) on the piston in the opposite direction of the oil pressure, when this is no longer applied to the piston.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Hydrodynamic brake (retarder) Figure 10
1730710Z
It is fitted upstream to the torque converter. The purpose is to transmit the drag torque from the vehicle wheels during deceleration. If consists of a fixed stator (1), solidly fastened to the external transmission box, and a rotor, solidly fastened to the drive torque input shaft, and consequently to the crankshaft. Both parts present vanes on the inside. They are closed in a box containing the same oil as the transmission box. The retarder is engaged by sending pressurised oil into the box via a set of valves, so that the stator strongly opposes rotor rotation. By engaging the lock ---up clutch at the same time, the converter pump (and, consequently, the retarder rotor) is solidly fastened to the converter turbine (and, consequently, the AN input shaft and to the vehicle wheels). In this way, the drive torque from the vehicle is partially dissipated by the oil in the retarder box, whereby braking the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 13
Central differential lock This is a double satellite sun and planet gear differential lock (Ravigneaux model). This configuration shares the drive force while the two elements transmitting the output drive (sun gear and gear set holder) turn in the same direction. The central differential lock share the drive force between the front and rear axle in fixed proportions. Specifically, torque is shared are follows: D 1/3 to the front axle D 2/3 to the rear axle The driver can lock the differential by means of an electrical hydraulic control if either axles slip. This control works on a sliding sleeve which, when moved, fastens the two elements transmitting the output drive (sun gear and gear set holder). In this way, the output shaft turn together and make drive transmission stiff. Do not steer when vehicle when the central differential is locked to prevent severely damaging the transmission. Do not drive on terrain offering high grip with the rear differential locked to prevent severely damaging the transmission and the tyres. Operation In normal conditions (position A), the drive torque from the K4---K3 shaft gear is taken by the external crown gear and is shared by 2/3 via the gear set holder (4) to the rear output shaft and by 1/3 via the sun gear to the front output shaft (7). In differential lock conditions (position B), the sliding sleeve (11) fastens the gear set holder (4) --- which is solidly fastened to the rear output shaft --- to the front output shaft --- which is solidly fastened to the sun gear. The drive torque is consequently shared equally on both sides because the unit forms a single part with the crown gear (8).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Crown wheel external gear External planetary satellite gear Internal satellite gear (not shown) Gear set holder (carrier) Protective guard Sun gear Output shaft front end Crown gear Output shaft rear end Lubrication pipe fitting Differential lock sliding sleeve Hydraulic lock control fitting Sliding sleeve control lever Lever control piston
A. B.
disengaged position (differential released) engaged position (differential locked)
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Figure 11
1730709Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 15
OPERATION 1st forward gear: ratio 1:5.350 Clutches
free
KV KR
locked X
X
K1
X
K2
X
K3
X
K4
X
The driving torque passes from the input shaft AN through the input gear and clutch KV to shaft KV ---K1, then through clutch K1 to the output gear of shaft KV ---K1 and finally through the output gears of shaft KR---K2 and shaft K4---K3 to output shaft AB, which turns the same direction as shaft AN.
Figure 12
1730711Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
2nd forward gear: ratio 1:3.446 Clutches
free
KV
X
KR
X
K1
X
K2
X
K3
X
K4
locked
The driving torque passes from input shaft AN through the input gear of shaft KR---K2 and the intermediate gear and clutch K4 to shaft K4---K3, then through shaft KR---K2 and clutch K1 to shaft KV ---K1, and finally through the output gears of shaft KR---K2 and shaft K4---K3 to output shaft AB, which turns in the same direction as shaft AN.
X
Figure 13
1730712Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 17
3rd forward gear: ratio 1:2.207 Clutches
free
locked
KV
X
X
KR
X
K1
X
K2
X
K3
X
K4
X
The driving torque passes from the input shaft AN through the input gear and clutch KV to shaft KV ---K1, then through clutch K2 to the output gear of shaft KR---K2 and finally through the output gear of shaft K4---K3 to output shaft AB, which turns the same direction as shaft AN.
Figure 14
1730713Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
4th forward gear: ratio 1:1.421 Clutches
free
KV
X
KR
X
K1
X
K2 K3 K4
locked
X
The driving torque passes from input shaft AN through the input gear of shaft KR---K2 and the intermediate gear and clutch K4 to shaft K4---K3, then through clutch K2 to the output gear of the shaft KR---K2, and finally through the output gear of shaft K4---K3 to output shaft AB, which turns in the same direction as shaft AN.
X X
Figure 15
1730714Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 19
5th forward gear: ratio 1:0.970 Clutches
free
KV
X
KR
X
K1
X
K2
X
K3 K4
locked
The driving torque passes from the input shaft AN through the input gear and clutch KV to shaft KV ---K1, then to shaft KV ---K1, to shaft K4---K3, then through clutch K3 to the output gear of shaft K4---K3 and finally to output shaft AB, which turns in the same direction as shaft AN.
X X
Figure 16
1730715Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
6th forward gear: ratio 1:0.625 Clutches
free
KV
X
KR
X
K1
X
K2
X
locked
K3
X
K4
X
The driving torque passes from input shaft AN through the input gear of shaft KR---K2 and the intermediate gear and clutch K4 to shaft K4---K3, then through clutch K3 to the output gear of shaft K4---K3, and finally to output shaft AB, which turns in the same direction as shaft AN.
Figure 17
1730716Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 21
1st reverse gear: ratio 1:5.350 Clutches
free
KV
X
locked
KR
X
K1
X
K2
X
K3
X
K4
X
The driving torque passes from the input shaft AN through the input gear and clutch KR to shaft KR---K2, then to shaft KV ---K1, then through clutch K1 to the output gear of shaft KV ---K1 and finally through the output gears of shaft KR---K2 and shaft K4---K3 to output shaft AB, which turns the opposite direction to shaft AN.
Figure 18
1730717Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
2nd reverse gear: ratio 1: 2.207 Clutches
free
KV
X
KR K1
locked X
X
K2
X
K3
X
K4
X
The driving torque passes from the input shaft AN through the input gear and clutch KR to shaft KR---K2, then through clutch K2 to the output gear of shaft KR---K2 and finally through the output gear of shaft K4---K3 to output shaft AB, which turns the opposite direction to shaft AN.
Figure 19
1730718Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 23
3rd reverse gear: ratio 1:0.970 Clutches
free
KV
X
KR
X
K1
X
K2
X
K3 K4
locked
The driving torque passes from the input shaft AN through the input gear and clutch KR to shaft KR---K2, then to shaft K4---K3, then through clutch K3 to the output gear of shaft K4---K3 and finally to output shaft AB, which turns in the opposite direction to shaft AN.
X X
Figure 20
1730719Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT External pipe arrangement view 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
hydraulic control unit AN drive torque input shaft KR (reverse) and K2 clutch shaft intermediate shaft AB drive torque output shaft K3 and K4 clutch shaft KV (forward gear) and K1 clutch shaft PTO drive shaft
K1: K1 clutch control pipe K2: K2 clutch control pipe K3: K3 clutch control pipe K4: K24 clutch control pipe KV: KV clutch control pipe KR: KR clutch control pipe S1: KR---K2 shaft lubrication pipe S2: K3---K4 shaft lubrication pipe S4: AN output shaft lubrication pipe
Figure 21
1730703Z
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 25
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC CONTROL DIAGRAM Position of the pressure and temperature measuring points 15 = to the heat exchanger 16 = from the heat exchanger 28 = to the filter 29 = from the filter 38 = from converter 39 = to lubrication 51 = in front of the converter ---opening pressure 9 ÷ 11 bar (130 ÷ 160 PSI) 52 = behind the converter ---opening pressure 5 bar (73 PSI) 53 = KV clutch forward 16 ÷ 18 bar (232 ÷ 261 PSI) 55 = KR clutch reverse 16 ÷ 18 bar (232 ÷ 261 PSI) 56 = K1clutch 16 ÷ 18 bar (232 ÷ 261 PSI) 57 = K2clutch 16 ÷ 18 bar (232 ÷ 261 PSI) 58 = K3clutch 16 ÷ 18 bar (232 ÷ 261 PSI) 60 = K4clutch 16 ÷ 18 bar (232 ÷ 261 PSI) 63 = temperature behind the converter 100° C, short time 120° C (max. 5 minutes) 65 = system pressure 16 ÷ 18.5 bar (232 ÷ 268 PSI) 66 = temperature behind retarder 145° C, short time 150° C (max. 5 minutes) 67 = WK---control pressure 12 ÷ 14 bar (174 ÷ 203 PSI) Electro -- hydraulic unit • PRESSURE REGULATION UNDER VOLTAGE DRIVING DIRECTION
SPEED
Y1
Y2
1 •
•
4
• •
ENGADED CLUTCH
•
1
•
2
•
3
•
Y6
K1
KV
K4
K1
•
KV
K2
•
K4
K2
K3
KV
K4
K3
KR
K1
KR
K2
KR
K3
---
---
•
3
6
NEUTRAL
Y5
•
5
REVERSE
Y4
•
2 FORWARD
Y3
•
• • • •
--KR
K4
K1
K3
KV
K2
POSITIONS ON VALVE BLOCK (*)
F
E
D
C
B
A
REF. NO. MEASURING PRESSURE (*)
55
60
56
58
53
57
ENGAGED CLUTCHES
(*) See following page
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
The figure shows the position of the pressure and temperature measuring points and others elements that occur on the hydraulic diagram. Figure 22
T225045 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 27
OIL CIRCULATION SYSTEM --- VERSION WITH RETARDER The automatic transmission fluid is cooled by means of an oil --- water heat exchanger (A) located on the left front side of the vehicle. The fluid is filtered by a filter group (B) connected by two pipes to the automatic transmission box. A second return pipe (by---pass) allows to exclude the filters in case of obstruction. The fluid circulation is activated by the oil pressure pump inside the automatic transmission. Figure 23 1. Filter group by---pass 2. Oil delivery to the filter group 3. Oil return from the filter group 4. Oil delivery to the exchanger 5. Oil return from the exchanger
276C05001 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
OIL CIRCULATION SYSTEM --- VERSION WITHOUT RETARDER The automatic transmission fluid is cooled by means of an oil --- water heat exchanger (A) located on the left front side of the vehicle. The fluid is filtered by a filter group (B) connected by two pipes to the automatic transmission box. A second return pipe (by---pass) allows to exclude the filters in case of obstruction. The circulation of the fluid is activated by the oil pressure pump inside the automatic transmission. Figure 24
1. Filter group by---pass 2. Oil delivery to the filter group 3. Oil return from the filter group 4. Oil delivery to the exchanger 5. Oil return from the exchanger
276C05002 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 29
TECHNICAL DATA COMPONENT
PARAMETER Resistance Inductive sensor Temperature range --- turbine sensor Tightening torque --- engine sensor Gap: engine and turbine --- central gear shaft sensor Gap: central gear Working range Temperature range Hall sensor --- output shaft sensor Voltage supply Gap Resistance Electrohydraulic Current proportional valve Pressure range Sump temperature sensor Resistance Retarder temperature sensor Resistance Resistance Solenoid lock ---up clutch valve Current Voltage supply Main pressure Control pressure Pressure before converter Pressure behind converter Hydraulic circuit
Temperature behind converter Temperature behind retarder Lubrication pump flow Minimum lubrication pump flow
Forward Gear ratio Reverse
VALUE 1050 Ohm a 20°C (±10%) ---40 °C to 150 °C (---40 to 302 °F) 30 Nm (40.68 Ft. Lbs) 0.5 + 0.3 mm (0.020 + 0.011 in) 0.3 + 0.1 mm (0.011 + 0.003 in) 2 Hz ÷ 5 kHz ---40 °C ÷ 150 °C (---40 to 302 °F) 24 V 1.0 + 0.5 mm (0.04 + 0.02 in) 19 Ohm a 20 °C (±10%) 100 to 500 mA 0.8 to 8.3 bar (11.6 ÷ 120 PSI) 1 to 1.5 kOhm 0.8 to 1.5 kOhm 60 to 80 Ohm a 20°C (at 68 °F) 250 to 350 mA 24 V 16 to 18 bar (232 ÷ 261 PSI) 16 to 18 bar (232 ÷ 261 PSI) max 9 to 11 bar (130 ÷ 160 PSI) max 5.0 bar (73 PSI) max 100 °C (120 °C temporary) max 212 °F (248 °F temporary) max 145 °C (150 °C temporary) max 293 °F (302 °F temporary) 115 l/min (27.7 USgpm) @ n=2000 1/min 80 l/min (21.0 USgpm) @ n=2000 1/min 1st: 5.350 2nd: 3.446 3rd: 2.207 4th: 1.421 5th: 0.970 6th: 0.625 1st: 5.350 2nd: 2.207 3rd: 0.970
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS Key (figure on next page) 1. TCU --- transmission control unit 500 2. ZF diagnostic connector 3. Retarder control 328 4. Central distributor lock control 5. Unused 6. Ignition switch power supply fuse F35 7. Direct power---supply fuse F36 8. Unused 9. Neutral gear contactor E22 10. Gear reduction contactor E21 11. Starting Neutral contactor E17 12. Reverse contactor E18 13. Body at rest proximity sensor 347 14. Oil temperature sensor downstream from converter 511 15. Electrohydraulic assembly 16. Hall sensor speed output 514 17. Lock ---up clutch valve 518 18. Engine speed inductive sensor 508 19. Turbine speed inductive sensor 509 20. Central gear speed inductive sensor 510 21. Central distributor connection electromagnetic valve 515 22. Central splitter engaged sensor 335 23. Gear selection lever 502 24. Retarder electromagnetic valve 517 25. Filter obstruction switch 512 26. Accelerator pedal 407 27. EDC --- engine control unit 400 28. I/O MODE 301 29. CLUSTER 300 Connectors key (a) Engine cable --- Cab cable feedthrough connector (white) (b) Front main frame services cable --- Cab cable feedthrough connector (green) (c) Front main frame services cable --- Cab cable feedthrough connector (brown) (d) Main frame automatic transmission cable --- Cab automatic transmission cable feedthrough connector (yellow)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 31
Automatic transmission control system components Figure 25
276E005002
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUE Interface plate screw caps
6.0 Nm
(4.43 lbf ft)
Screws fastening interface plate to valve assembly
9.5 Nm
(7.01 lbf ft)
Screws fastening pipe plate to gearbox
23.0 Nm
(16.96 lbf ft)
Screws fastening valve assembly to gearbox
11.0 Nm
(8.11 lbf ft)
Screws fastening solenoid valve to WK valve
5.5 Nm
(4.0 lbf ft)
Screws fastening WK valve to plate
9.5 Nm
(7.01 lbf ft)
Screws fastening WK valve plate to bracket
23 Nm
(16.96 lbf ft)
K4/K3 shaft ring nut --- K4 clutch side
550 Nm
(405.66 lbf ft)
KR/K2 shaft ring nut --- KR clutch side
800 Nm
(590.05 lbf ft)
KR/K2 shaft ring nut --- K2 clutch side
800 Nm
(590.05 lbf ft)
KV/K1 shaft ring nut --- KV clutch side
550 Nm
(405.66 lbf ft)
KV/K1 shaft ring nut --- K1 clutch side
550 Nm
(405.66 lbf ft)
Screw fastening pressure pump drive bushing
32 Nm
(23.60 lbf ft)
M8 Screws fastening pressure pump cover
23 Nm
(16.96 lbf ft)
M6 Screws fastening pressure pump cover
9.5 Nm
(7.01 lbf ft)
Screws fastening rear cover to gearbox
46 Nm
(33.93 lbf ft)
Screws fastening K4/K3 clutch shaft cover
46 Nm
(33.93 lbf ft)
Screws fastening KR/K2 clutch shaft cover
46 Nm
(33.93 lbf ft)
Screws fastening KV/K1 clutch shaft cover
46 Nm
(33.93 lbf ft)
Screws fastening pressure pump
79 Nm
(58.27 lbf ft)
Screws fastening pressure pump flange
79 Nm
(58.27 lbf ft)
Screws fastening power takeoff flange
125 Nm
(92.19 lbf ft)
Screws fastening central splitter lock device
46 Nm
(33.93 lbf ft)
Screws fastening oil supply flange cover
46 Nm
(33.93 lbf ft)
Converter relief valve plug
130 Nm
(95.88 lbf ft)
Screws fastening converter bell to gearbox (M8)
34 Nm
(25.08 lbf ft)
Screws fastening converter bell to gearbox (M12)
115 Nm
(84.82 lbf ft)
Screws fastening input/output flanges
46 Nm
(33.93 lbf ft)
Screws fastening oil filter cover
23 Nm
(16.96 lbf ft)
Inductive sensors tightening
30 Nm
(22.13 lbf ft)
Screws fastening output shaft rpm sensor
23 Nm
(16.96 lbf ft)
Breather tightening
12 Nm
(8.85 lbf ft)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 33
Figure 26
292A005002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
TOOLS 380001278
380002272
380002399
3800002275
.
380002281
380002293
380002310
380002320
380002321
The following equipment is included in a single kit 380140022 except for 380002275.
380001278 380002272 380002281 380002293 380002310 380002320 380002321 380002399 380002275
-------------------
Block Handle Oil Feed Flange and Lube Pump Extractor Oil Feed Flange Cover Needle Cage Insertion Block Shaft Guide Pin Compression Spring Preload Tool K3/K4 Shaft Ring Nut Wrench Spanner Wrench Adapter KR/K2 Shaft --- KV/K1 Shaft Ring Nut Wrench Front/Rear Output Shaft Sealing Ring Assembly Block
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
MAINTENANCE Oil level check The correct oil level is essential for the transmission to function correctly. Too little oil can cause irregular converter function and damage; too much oil causes foam to form and transmission overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 35
Hot check (80-- 100 째 C) (176-- 212 째 F) Proceed as follows: D Travel the distance necessary to warm up the transmission; D leave the engine to idle with gearbox in Neutral; Figure 28
Cold check (15-- 45 째 C) (59-- 113 째 F) Proceed as follows: D start the engine and leave it to idle with gearbox in Neutral for circa one minute; Figure 27
269NM202
D clean the filler cap area, unscrew the grip two or three turns and remove the dipstick built ---in to the filler cap and check that the oil level is within the HOT notch; D top---up or drain off oil to reach the required level then replace the cap/dipstick;
269NM201
D clean the filler cap area, unscrew the grip two or three turns and remove the dipstick built ---in to the filler cap and check that the oil level is not below the COLD (minimum) notch; D top---up if necessary. Do not drain any oil above the notch. Replace the filler cap/dipswitch tightening the grip; D DO NOT drain excess oil: carry out a hot check as soon as possible.
Breather Proceed as follows: Figure 29
Z7307029
D check that the breather is perfectly clean and functioning.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Oil change
327B-330B
Oil filter change
Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force. Proceed as follows: D Position a suitable container, clean the filler cap zone. Unscrew the grip two or three turns and remove the dipstick;
Replace the filter at every oil change. Proceed as follows: Figure 31
Figure 30
269NM212
269NM211
D Remove the drain plug (arrow) and fully drain the oil; D clean the drain plug, check the thread is in good condition, spread sealant paste on the cap and retighten it to the specified torque; D Refill with the quantity of oil stated on the filler cap and replace the dipstick, tightening the grip; D Re---check oil level after one test cycle.
D Open the hood; D with the engine off unscrew the filter cartridge with the correct spanner if necessary, then thoroughly clean the support seat; Figure 32
After the operations described we recommend carrying out the AEB procedure to permit electrovalve control parameter allow self---adaptation by the Transmission Control Unit.
156NM25
D fill the new cartridge with oil and grease the washer with gear oil;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 37
Figure 33
156NM42
D hand---tighten the cartridge until the washer comes into contact with the support, then tighten it by ¾ of a turn; Do not overtighten the cartridge to avoid damaging the washer. Always follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. D Start the engine and check for the absence of oil leaks; D Check oil level and top---up if necessary.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
AEB procedure
327B-330B
Figure 36
The following conditions must be respected for correct execution of the AEB procedure: D selector in Neutral position D engine at idle speed D parking brake engaged D steady state automatic transmission temperature (80 --- 90° C) (176---194 ° F) If one of these conditions is not respected the system will not execute the procedure. To activate the AEB procedure proceed as follows: Figure 34 292ANU067L
D select CALIBRATE TRANSMISS and press ENTER to start the procedure. The AEB procedure takes 3 --- 4 minutes. During execution the display provides the user with information on procedure progress (3). The meaning of the messages is given in the following table. The parameters thus identified are memorised in the control unit memory. 292ANU061L
D pass from the Home page to the MAIN MENU page pressing ENTER; Figure 35
292ANU062L
D select VEHICLE MANAGEMENT;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 39
Display – meaning of AEB procedure messages Figure 37
Line 6 Line 7
MESSAGE
NOTES
ADJUSTING K1...K4, KV, KR
MEANING Line 6 Calibration of clutches
SHIFT LEVER NOT NEU
Shift lever not in Neutral
PARK BRAKE NOT INS
Parking brake not applied
OUTPUT SPEED NOT 0
Vehicle not stationary
Transmission in Neutral, switch off and restart the engine Parking brake engaged, switch off an restart the engine Transmission in Neutral, switch off and restart the engine
LOW TC OIL TEMPER HIGH TC OIL TEMPER LOW ENGINE RPM HIGH ENGINE RPM
Oil temperature too low, warm---up Oil temperature too high, let cool Engine speed too low, increase Engine speed too high, reduce
Wait while the procedure is being carried out ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE Calibration completed The procedure has terminated AEB REQUEST STOPPED Procedure stop Transmission in Neutral, switch off and restart the engine ABORTED ADJUSTING K1...K4, Procedure stop, clutch K1…K4, KV, Transmission in Neutral, switch off KV, KR KR not calibrated and restart the engine Line 7 FAULT PRESENT Type of fault present
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE CHECK PROCEDURE
327B-330B
Pressure test points Figure 40
Pipe connector for pressure test Proceed as follows: Figure 38
2690310
D Tip the cabin as shown in SECTION 15 of the REPAIR MANUAL. Figure 39
292A005004R
292A005003R
D Using a suitable M10x1 connector and a pipe, con--nector the pressure gauge to each pressure test point. Use a pressure gauge with end scale set to 20 bar. D Restore vehicle to normal function.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Oil level check Proceed as follows: D Drive the vehicle for sufficient time to bring the tranmission oil to working temperature (approx 80 --- 95 ° C (175 --- 200 ° F). D Check the oil level when hot as instructed in the MAINTENANCE section of the Use and Maintenance Manual.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 41
B Clutch operating pressure Proceed as follows: D Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and remove the ingition key from the switch, engage the handbrake and place the warning signs. Figure 41
Pressure reading A Pressure reading upstream of converter Proceed as follows: D Stop the vehicle with engine idling, engage the handbrake and set the earbox to neutral. Test point
Clutch
51
N/A
Pressure bar
psi
9 ÷ 11
130 ÷ 160
D Compare the pressure readings upstream of the converter with those given in the table in the following conditions: --- Engine idling --- 1000 rpm --- 1500 rpm --- 2000 rpm --- Engine at maximum speed
292A005005R
D Disconnect the parking brake pressure switch (arrow). The following operations must be carried out EXCLUSIVELY if the parking brake is PERFECTLY EFFICIENT. Check that there is sufficient free space in front and behind the vehicle in case of movement. Before carrying out the operation, check that there is nobody near to the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
D Start the engine and select automatic transmission manual mode. D Select 2nd FORWARD GEAR and bring engine revs to 1500 rpm. Test point
Clutch
60 56
Pressure bar
psi
K4
16 ÷ 18
232 ÷ 261
K1
16 ÷ 18
232 ÷ 261
D Compare the pressures with those given in the table. D Bring engine to idle speed. D Select 3rd FORWARD GEAR and bring engine revs to 1500 rpm. Test point
Clutch
53 57
Pressure bar
psi
KV
16 ÷ 18
232 ÷ 261
K2
16 ÷ 18
232 ÷ 261
D Compare the pressures with those given in the table. D Bring engine to idle speed. D Select 3rd REVERSE GEAR and bring the engine to 1500 rpm. Test point
Clutch
55 58
Pressure bar
psi
KR
16 ÷ 18
232 ÷ 261
K3
16 ÷ 18
232 ÷ 261
D Compare the pressures with those given in the table. D Bring engine to idle speed. D Switch off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch. D Reconnect the parking brake pressure switch connector. D Restore vehicle to normal function.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION GEARBOX
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 43
Figure 43
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D Park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; Figure 42
2690702
1. 2.
High pressure circuit valve Low pressure circuit valve
D proceed to discharge the air conditioner system; The system must be discharged by specialist personnel using specific equipment. For these operations, refer to the procedures provided by the equipment manufacturer. Do not discharge R134a fluid into the atmosphere. Although its potential for damaging the ozone layer is zero, it may nevertheless contribute to global warming. Always use approved refrigerant recovery and recharging apparatus. Never mix different refrigerants in the same apparatus. Figure 44
276C005010
D proceed to remove the hood; D procedere alla rimozione del cofano motore operando secondo quanto indicato nella SEZIONE 15; D procedere alla rimozione dei ripari laterali operando secondo quanto indicato nella SEZIONE 15;
2690703
D proceed to remove the cab;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
44
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Figure 45
276NM010TA
D arrange a suitably---sized container underneath, then drain the fluid of the main hydraulic system following the instructions provided in SECTION 10 --HYDRAULIC SYSTEM; Figure 46
327B-330B
D disconnect the electrical connections: --- distributor differential lock sensor (11); --- hydraulic system filter obstruction sensor (12); --- emergency steering pump manostat (13); --- emergency steering pump actuation electromagnetic valve (14); --- automatic transmission oil filters obstruction sensor (15); --- ground screw (16) from the chassis; --- retarder electromagnetic valve (17) (if applicable); --- retarder air pressure switch (18) (if applicable); D disconnect the pneumatic connections: --- retarder control actuator (6) (if applicable); --- central distributor lock actuator (7); D disconnect the transmission oil pipelines: --- oil delivery to the exchanger (1); --- oil return from the exchanger (2); Fluid leakage may occur during these operations. D disconnect the following hydraulic fluid piping from the hydraulic system filter group: --- delivery (C1) to the tipping valve (23); --- delivery (C) to the steering valve (24); --- arrival (P1) from the emergency steering pump (25); --- return (T) to the tank (26); Fluid leakage may occur during these operations.
276C005012
D open the retaining clamp and recover the transmission --- cab interface cable along the chassis, winding it up above the transmission control unit (arrow);
.
The operations described below refer to the figures that follow.
D disconnect the following hydraulic fluid piping from the emergency steering pump: --- intake (27) from the tank; --- delivery (22) to the steering---tipping valve; D remove the intake piping (21) from the tank to the main pump; Fluid leakage may occur during these operations. D unscrew the retaining screws and disconnect the hydraulic fluid piping support bracket (30);
The removal of the tear/snap ---off fixing bands is not shown. It is understood that these bands must be cut/disengaged and subsequently restored during reassembly to ensure the correct fastening of the elements to be retained.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 45
Figure 47
292A005006R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
46
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Figure 48
292A005007R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 47
Figure 49
FWD
292A005008R
D Disconnect the transmission shafts respectively: A. from engine to gearbox; B. from gearbox to front axle; C. from gearbox to intermediate journal; as instructed in SECTION 7; D using suitable lifting gear, apply the chains to the group brackets and bring them into tension, checking that the load is evenly distributed and that the group does not tend too much toward any one side;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
48
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Figure 50
292A005009R
D remove the ground cable (A) from the right ---side front support bracket; D remove the screws (arrow) fastening the elastic mountings. Check that all connections and pipes are disconnected and all fastening clamps removed. D carefully lift the group, removing it from above. D rest the group on a suitable support to prevent it from falling; D remove the filter support bracket and the emergency steering valve; D remove the front and side transmission support brackets.
Replacement Replace the group following the instructions in reverse order, and in particular: D check the gearbox elastic mountings: if deteriorated, replace them; D check the integrity of connector pipes and joints; D check the transmission oil level and, if necessary, top up the level or refill following the instructions provided in the relative Chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 49
INSPECTION Figure 52
Before starting any type of operation make sure all the necessary safety precautions have been taken and fully explained to those involved in the operations. Read the instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, consult an expert. Follow all the general recommendations for correctly performing maintenance operations. Preliminary operations Proceed as follows:
Z7307031
Figure 51
D Remove the input flange fastening screws. D Remove the input flange with an extractor.
.
If the retarder is not to be dismantled, this operation is unnecessary.
D Repeat the same operation for the rear output flange. Figure 53
Z7307030H
D D D D
Fasten the transmission to the supporting tools. Drain all lubricant oil. Detach all the hoses from the back of the gearbox. Remove the PTO engagement box.
Z7307032
D Loosen the fastening screws, disassemble the cover and remove the lubricant filter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
50
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
327B-330B
D Loosen the fastening screws and separate the interface plate, the seals and the intermediate plate from the valve assembly.
Removal Proceed as follows:
Refit
Figure 54
Figure 57
Z7307033
D Loosen the fastening screws and remove the hydraulic unit. Figure 55
Z7307036
D Install two M6 guide screws and fit the first seal on the valve assembly. Be careful to use the right seal. Figure 58
Z7307034
D Detach the hoses from the pipe plate. D Loosen the fastening screws, then separate the pipe plate, the seals and the intermediate plate from the gearbox. Figure 56
Z7307037
D Fit the filters (6) in the respective seats in the intermediate plate. Z7307035
The filters must face upwards towards the pipe plate.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
D Fit the intermediate plate with filters on the valve assembly.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 51
Figure 61
Figure 59
Z7307040
D Fit new O---rings to the union joints (1 to 6), install them on the pipe plate and tighten to the specified torque. D Fit a new O---ring on the screw cap (7), install it on the pipe plate and tighten to the specified torque. Figure 62
Z7307038
D Fit the second seal on the valve assembly. Figure 60
Z7307039
D Fit the interface plate on the valve assembly, then remove the guide screws and tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque. D Fit new O---rings on the screw caps (8) and tighten them to the specified torque.
Z7307041
D Install two M8 guide screws and fit the following items on the gearbox in the order given below: (1) first seal; (2) intermediate plate; (3) second seal. Be careful to use the right seal.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
52
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
LOCK---UP CLUTCH VALVE (WK)
Figure 63
Removal and disassembly Proceed as follows: Figure 66
Z7307042
D Fit the pipe plate, then remove the guide screws and tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque. Figure 64 Z7307045
D Remove the hoses. D Loosen the fastening screws and separate the complete fastening plate from the bracket. D Loosen the fastening screws and separate the complete WK valve from the fastening plate. D Loosen the fastening screws and separate the solenoid valve from the WK valve. D Remove the components of the valve and fastening plate.
Z7307043
Assembly and refit Proceed as follows: Figure 67
D Install 2 M6 guide screws. D Fit the seal. Figure 65
Z7307046
Z7307044
D Fit the valve assembly and tighten the fastening screws (M6 x 105: 2x; M6 x 80: 21x) to the specified torque, after removing the guide screws.
D Fit setscrew (1) on the fastening plate and apply LOCTITE 649. D Fit new O---rings and install the union joints (2) on the fastening plate.
Take careful note of the position of the 2 side fastening screws (M6 x 105).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 68
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 53
Figure 69
Z7307048
D Fit the seal and the complete WK valve on the plate and tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque. Figure 70
Z7307047
Install the components of the WK valve body in the order given. (1) Solenoid valve (2) Fastening screw + spring washer (2) (3) WK valve (4) Piston (5) Shim rings (6) Compression springĂš (7) Retainer (8) Union joint Fit a new O---ring on the joint (8). The lock---up clutch control pressure (12 + 2 bar) is determined by the shim rings (5, trial value, 6 elements 0.5 mm thick each) and the retainer (7, trial thickness 3.0 mm) Install the retainer (7) with the stepped surface side facing the compression spring.
Z7307049
D Fit the plate complete with WK valve on the gearbox bracket and tighten the screws to the specified torque.
D Fit the solenoid valve on the WK valve and tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
54
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
GEARBOX AND GEAR DISASSEMBLY Converter and converter bell Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
D Loosen the screws fastening the oil supply flange cover and remove it. Figure 74
Figure 71
Z7307050
D Loosen the screws fastening the retarder to the converter bell. Mark the relative positions of the retarder and the bell.
Z7307053H
D Remove the oil supply flange from the converter bell with tool 380002272. Figure 75
Figure 72
Z7307054
D Remove the converter relief valve. Z7307051
D Lift the retarder, complete with converter, from the converter bell with a suitable lifting device.
Figure 76
Figure 73
Z7307055
Z7307052
D Loosen the screws fastening the converter bell to the gearbox. D Separate the converter bell from the gearbox with a suitable lifting device.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AN input shaft
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 55
Figure 79
Figure 77
Z7307058 Z7307056
D Remove the shim ring (1) and both rectangular seals (2) from the bell. Figure 78
D Remove the components of the converter reserve pressure reduction valve. (1) Screw cap (2) Spring (3) Piston Figure 80
Z7307059
D Remove the complete input shaft from the gearbox, and then from the lubricating pump.
Z7307057
D Turn the bell upside down, then push the input shaft out of the straight ---tooth drive gear bearings, taking care not to drop the gear and the bearing inner ring on the gearbox side (B). D Remove the bearing inner ring from the input shaft on the converter side (A). Take care not to lose the two pins (detail) in the transversal hole in the input shaft.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
56
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Lubricating pump
327B-330B
Central splitter lock device
Figure 81
Figure 83
Z7307060
D Turn the gearbox upside down. D Loosen the fastening screws and remove both flanges securing the pump to the gearbox. Figure 82
Z7307062
D Loosen the fastening screws. D Remove the lock device using a pinch bar, tapping the device with a plastic hammer to make the detachment easier. Intermediate shaft Figure 84
Z7307061H
D Loosen the fastening screws, then remove the lubricating pump with tool 380002272.
.
Tap the surface of the gearbox with a plastic hammer to make the extraction procedure easier.
Z7307063
D Remove the sealing cover and loosen the fastening screw. Figure 85
Z7307064H
D Turn the gearbox upside down. D Remove the intermediate shaft. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5 Central splitter
Rear cover Figure 86
Figure 88
Z7307065H
D Position the gearbox with the rear cover facing upwards. D Loosen the fastening screws, then remove the KV/K1 shaft rear bearing cover. D In the same way, remove the cover covering the rear bearings of shafts KR/K2 and K4/K3.
.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 57
Z7307067
D Loosen the fastening screws and remove the central splitter metal guard. Figure 89
Mark the assembly position for the rear bearing covers. Figure 87
Z7307068
D Remove the splitter from its housing in the gearbox with a suitable lifting device. Figure 90
Z7307066H
D Apply two pressure screws. D Loosen the fastening screws then, acting on the pressure screws, remove the rear cover from the gearbox with a suitable lifting device.
.
Tap the output shaft with a plastic hammer to make the extraction procedure easier.
Z7307069
D Remove the plate and disassemble the bearing outer ring.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
58
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Power takeoff shaft
Multiple-- disk clutches Figure 91
Figure 93
Z7307072
D Remove the stop ring (1) and the adjustment shims (2). Figure 94
Z7307070H
D Remove the shafts K4/K3, KR/K2 and KV/K1 with a suitable lifting device.
.
Lift shaft KR/K2 slightly and move it to one side (arrow) when disassembling shaft K4/K3.
Z7307073
D Lift the shaft with a pinch bar until the bearing outer ring is free.
(1) Clutch shaft KV/K1 (2) Clutch shaft KR/K2 (3) Clutch shaft K4/K3
Figure 95
Figure 92
Z7307074 Z7307071
D Lower the shaft and extract it sideways.
D Remove the gear from the previously removed intermediate shaft.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 59
CLEANING, INSPECTING AND CHECKING
Figure 96
Cleaning components
.
Z7307075H
D Remove the outer ring of the bearing (converter side). Transmitter disassembly Figure 97
All components must be clean to allow an effective inspection. During assembly, do not let dust and foreign bodies inside the transmission. Even the smallest particles can damage accurately mated components. Use petroleum based solvents for cleaning only, with the exception of benzene and derivatives. Solvents such as trichlorethylene, benzol, acetone and all aromatic products may damage polyacrylic rubber seals.
Accurately clean all removed parts. Follow the precautions below: D Accurately clean the guards, inside and out, to allow checking and to prevent dirt from penetrating inside; D use only solvent to clean the clutch plates. Clean all other metal transmission components perfectly with solvent or steam. Do not use caustic soda based solutions for steam cleaning; D dry all components with compressed air, except for the bearings. Apply grease to steam cleaned components immediately after drying; D clean oil pipes by passing a piece of soft wire in both direction and washing with solvent. Dry the pipes with compressed air; Never dry the bearings by turning them with compressed air. A bearing, which turns very fast, without being adequately lubricated, may deteriorate very quickly. D used bearings must be perfectly washed with solvent; if the bearings are very dirty or full of hardened grease, submerge in solvent before cleaning; D clean bearings correctly during disassembly/assembly for maximum duration;
Z7307076
D Remove the sensors given below. (1) output shaft rpm sensor (2) turbine rpm sensor (3) central shaft rpm sensor (4) engine rpm sensor
.
The figure illustrates the position of the sensors
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
INSPECTING AND CHECKING Guards and machined surfaces Inspect borings and assembly surfaces for traces of wear, scratches and grooves; eliminate scratches and burring with sandpaper; replace deeply scratched or grooved parts; check all oil pipes; eliminate obstructions with either a jet of compressed air or by passing a smooth wire in both directions of the pipe. Rinse with cleaning solvent; check threading, rectify damaged threads with a used tap of the required size; replace boxes or other castings which are cracked or grooved due to excessive wear; check all oil circuits in the control distributor and main casing, looking for porosity, broken seats, cracks, deposits of dirt and surface defects; check seal resting surfaces for deformation or surface defects. Bearings and axial shims Check all bearings for notches, pricking, scratches or excessive wear. Replace the parts which are faulty or whose operation is irregular after cleaning and lubrication; inspect the bearings, which present notches, burring, ovalisation, sharp edges or traces of overheating; replace the damaged components; inspect the end of stroke shims that may be deformed, scratched, worn or burred. replace any faulty or worn parts. O-- rings and seals Check the piston rings and the lip seals for notches, cuts, tears, cracks or deformation. A deteriorated seal may indicate the presence of faults in piston grooves or corresponding surface. These faults will damage the new seal. Replace the seals and the O---rings. Gears, grooves and threaded parts Check gears for localised wear, pricking, burring or broken teeth: replace the gear if faults are found; check that the grooves are not deformed, chipped or burred. Replace the gear if faults are found; check for burring and damaged threads; replace the damaged parts.
327B-330B
Rings and springs Check for pricking, deformation or excessive wear on rings. Replace the snap ring if any fault is found; look for traces of overheating, permanent deformation or wear due to friction on parts next to the springs. Replace the spring if any fault is found. Clutch plates Check the plates looking for encrusted metallic particles, very pricked, excessively worn, excessively tapered, cracked, deformed or damaged grooves. Replace the damaged plates.
GENERAL ASSEMBLY STANDARDS Lubricants used for assembly Hold parts provisionally in place during assembly by means of low fusion point oil soluble grease (Vaseline). Never use fibrous, insoluble or vegetable based products in any point of the transmission. Clutches and pistons Soak each clutch plate in transmission fluid for at least two minutes. Before final assembly, apply plenty of transmission fluid in the piston cavity. Fit the clutch plates so that they are all directed the same way. Lip seals Make sure that the spring lip side is actually on the side of the oil to be contained (towards the inside of the box): apply high temperature resistant grease inside the seal to protect it during shaft assembly and ensure lubrication at the beginning of operation. Roller bearings Heat the bearing on an electrical radiating plate or in an wet brakes (maximum temperature of approximately 90°C) to fit it on the shaft. Fit the bearing at the press. Warm the bearings for the amount of time necessary to obtain adequate dilatation. Shrink-- fitting Shrink ---fitting can be carried out by respectively heating and cooling the two parts. The female part can be heated in an oven or wet brakes (maximum temperature of approximately 140°C, with the exception of bearings) and the male part can be cooled in dry ice.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 61
DISMANTLING AND REASSEMBLY OF MAIN UNITS Clutch shaft K4/K3
.
Figure 100
The references given in square brackets refer to plate 1 (see following pages), which illustrates all the components of the clutches under examination.
Dismantling Proceed as follows: Figure 98
Z7307079
D Remove the straight spur gear [30]. Figure 101
Z7307077H
D Secure the shaft in the vice using tool. Figure 99
Z7307080H
D Extract the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [31]. Figure 102 Z7307078H
D Starting from clutch K3, use extractor to remove the straight roller bearing [34].
Z7307081
D Remove the snap ring [10]. D Remove the end plate [11] and the set of K3 clutch plates. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
62
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Plate 1: clutch shaft K4/K3 Figure 103
Z7307082 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 104
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 63
Figure 107
Z7307083H
D Work from the opposite side and loosen ring nut [28] with tool 380002320. The ring nut is locked with thread locker. Heat the threading to about 120 °C before unscrewing to avoid damage.
Z7307086
D Remove the preload adjustment ring [26] of taper bearings [25]. Figure 108
Figure 105
Z7307087H
D Extract the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [25]. Figure 109 Z7307084H
D Extract the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [27]. Figure 106
Z7307088
Z7307085H
D Extract the straight spur gear [24] with an extractor.
D Remove the snap ring [10]. D Remove the terminal plate [11] and the set of K4 clutch plates. D Remove the shaft from the support tool.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
64
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Reassembling Proceed as follows:
Figure 110
Figure 112
Z7307091 Z7307089H
D Preload the compression spring [12] with tool 380002310. D Use a screwdriver to remove the snap ring [15], then release the spring load and remove the thrust ring [14], the spring and the resting ring [13].
D lubricate and fit the 0---rings [8] and [9] to the K3 clutch piston. Figure 113
Figure 111
Z7307092
D Secure the shaft in the vice. D Insert the piston of clutch K3 until it touches the bottom, making sure it is straight. Z7307090
D Use compressed air to remove the piston [7].
Pay attention to the installation position of the piston.
Make sure the piston is held securely to avoid injury. D Remove O---rings [8] and [9] from the piston and O---ring [2] from the shaft. D Proceed in the same way for the clutch K3 components. Check and inspect all components according to the instructions given in the relevant chapter. Replace the O---rings and seals.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 114
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 65
Figure 116
Z7307093
D Insert resting ring [13] and compression ring [12]. D Position the thrust ring [14] on the compression ring with the chamfer facing upwards. D Position the snap ring [15]. D Remove the shaft from the support tool.
Z7307095
D Install the set of K4 clutch plates in the order given in plate 2 (see following pages).
.
To ensure that the resulting measurements are correct, do not lubricate the plates.
D Insert the end shim [11] and secure it with snap ring [10].
Figure 115
Figure 117
Z7307096 Z7307094H
D Preload the compression spring with tool 380002310. D Push the snap ring in the circular groove, then release the spring load and remove the tool. D Proceed in the same way for the K4 clutch components. D Secure the shaft in the vice.
D Fit a centesimal dial gauge with its probe on the terminal plate. D Apply a force of 100 N and reset the gauge. D Use compressed air to move the piston the length of its stroke and check that the end play is within the specified range. K4 clutch end play: 2.2 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 2.4 mm D If this is not so, correct the value by changing the first internal plate and/or the snap ring. D After adjusting the play between plates, remove the plates, lubricate them with the specified lubricant and then refit.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
66
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
D Install the set of K3 clutch plates in the order given in plate 3 (see following pages).
.
327B-330B
Figure 119
To ensure that the resulting measurements are correct, do not lubricate the plates.
D Insert the end shim [11] and secure it with snap ring [10]. D Check that the end play is within the specified range as indicated for clutch K3. K3 clutch end play version A: 2.6 --- 2.8 mm K3 clutch end play version B: 2.2 --- 2.4 mm D If this is not so, correct the value by changing the first internal plate and/or the snap ring. D After adjusting the play between plates, remove the plates, lubricate them with the specified lubricant and then refit. Figure 118
Z7307098
D Fit a centesimal dial gauge with its probe on the edge of the gear. D Apply a force of 50,000 N and reset the gauge. D Check that the end play is within the specified range of values by levering with a bar. bearing end play: 0.025Âą0.025 mm D If this is not so, correct the value with a spacer of a different thickness. D Dismantle the unit. D Check that the shaft is positioned so that the K4 clutch is facing upwards. Wear protective gloves when handling hot components. Figure 120
Z7307097
D Temporarily assemble the bearings inside the straight spur gear in the order given. (1) bearing inner ring (2) bearing outer ring (3) spacer (trial value s = 5.4 mm) (4) straight spur gear
Z7307099
D Heat the inner ring of the first internal bearing [25] and fit it so that it touches the shoulder. D Fit the spacer [26] with the oil groove facing upwards.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 67
Plate 2A: clutch K4 -- Version A (12 surfaces) Figure 121
Z73A7100
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1 2
Drum Piston
1 1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4 5
Outer plate
5
2.5
coated on both sides
Inner plate
5
3.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 4.0
variable for play adjustment
7
Snap ring
1
from 2.55 to 3.10
variable for play adjustment
8
Terminal plate
1
Clutch end play: 2.2 --- 2.4 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K4 = X (short side of drum) K3 = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
68
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Plate 2B: clutch K4 -- Version B (10 surfaces) Figure 122
Z73B7100
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1
Drum
1
2
Piston
1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
4
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
6
3.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 4.0
variable for play adjustment
7 8
Snap ring Terminal plate
1 1
from 2.55 to 3.10
variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.2 --- 2.4 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K4 = X (short side of drum) K3 = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 69
Plate 3A: clutch K3 -- Version A (18 surfaces) Figure 123
Z73A7101
N.
Description
Quantity
1 2
Drum Piston
1 1
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
8
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
3
2.5
6
Inner plate
5
3.0
7 8
Inner plate Snap ring
1 1
from 2.5 to 4.0 from 2.55 to 3.10
9
Terminal plate
1
variable for play adjustment variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.6 --- 2.8 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K4 = X (short side of drum) K3 = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
70
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Plate 3B: clutch K3 -- Version B (14 surfaces) Figure 124
Z73B7101
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1 2
Drum Piston
1 1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
6
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
6
3.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 4.0
variable for play adjustment
7 8
Snap ring Terminal plate
1 1
from 2.55 to 3.10
variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.2 --- 2.4 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K4 = X (short side of drum) K3 = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 125
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 71
Figure 128
Z7307102
D Fit the straight spur gear so that the splined hub mates with all the K4 clutch plates. Figure 126
Z7307105
D Remove the shaft from the support tool. D Settle the unit with a load of about 100,000 N. Figure 129
Z7307103
D Heat the inner ring of the second internal bearing [25] and fit it so that it touches the spacer. D Heat the inner ring of the shaft taper roller bearing on K4 clutch side [27], then fit it to point of contact. Figure 127
Z7307106H
D Refit the shaft on the support tool. D Apply LOCTITE 262 thread locker, then fit the ring nut on the K4 clutch side. D Tighten the ring nut to the specified torque using tool 380002320. Figure 130
Z7307104
D Turn the shaft upside down, then heat the inner ring of the shaft taper roller bearing on K3 clutch side [31], then fit it to point of contact.
Z7307107
D Fit the outer ring of the taper roller bearing [32] in the K3 straight spur gear, and make sure it is fully in.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
72
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Clutch shaft KR/K2
Figure 131
.
The references given in square brackets refer to plate 4 (see following pages), which illustrates all the components of the clutches under examination.
Dismantling Proceed as follows: Figure 133
Z7307108
D Fit the straight spur gear so that the splined hub mates with all the K3 clutch plates. Figure 132
Z7307110H
D Secure the shaft in the vice. D Loosen the ring nut [42] using tool 380002399. The ring nut is locked with thread locker. Heat the threading to about 120 °C before unscrewing to avoid damage. Z7307109
D Heat the roller bearing, then fit it fully in. D Fit the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [32] in the K3 straight spur gear. D Check operation of the clutches K3 and K4 with compressed air. D If the components are fitted correctly, you should clearly hear the clutches opening and closing. D Insert the rectangular seals [2] at the end of the shaft on the K3 clutch side.
Figure 134
Z7307111H
D Extract the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [41].
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 73
Plate 4: clutch shaft KR/K2 Figure 135
Z7307112 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
74
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Figure 136
327B-330B
Figure 138
Z7307113
D Remove the shaft from the support tool. D Remove the shaft from the straight spur gear â&#x20AC;&#x201C; clutch K2 using a press.
Z7307115H
D Extract the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [40]. Figure 139
Support the shaft during dismantling as it is heavy. D Collect the bearing inner ring [38] from the gear. D Refit the shaft on the support tool. Figure 137
Z7307116
D Remove the snap ring [13]. D Remove the terminal plate [14] and the set of K2 clutch plates. Figure 140 Z7307114
D Remove the preload adjustment ring [39] of taper bearings [38] and [40].
Z7307117H
D Turn the shaft upside down. D Loosen the ring nut [33] using tool 380002399. The ring nut is locked with thread locker. Heat the threading to about 120 °C before unscrewing to avoid damage.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 141
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 75
Figure 143
Z7307118H
D Remove the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [32]. D Use an extractor to remove the bevel gear [28]. D Collect the bearing inner ring [31] from the gear. D Remove the preload adjustment rings [29] of taper bearings [30] and [31]. Figure 142
Z7307120H
D Remove the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [30]. D Remove the shaft from the support tool. D Follow the instructions given for the K4/K3 shaft and preload the compression spring [15] with tool 5870 345 072. D Use a screwdriver to remove the snap ring [18], then release the spring load and remove the thrust ring [17], the spring and the resting ring [16]. Figure 144
Z7307119
D Remove the snap ring [13]. D Remove the terminal plate [14] and the set of KR clutch plates.
Z7307121
D Use compressed air to remove the piston [8]. Make sure the piston is held securely to avoid injury. D Remove O---rings [11] and [9] from the piston and O---ring [2] from the shaft. D Proceed in the same way for the clutch KR components. Check and inspect all components according to the instructions given in the relevant chapter. Replace the O---rings and seals.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
76
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Reassembling Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Figure 147
Figure 145
Z7307122
D Lubricate and fit the 0---rings [11] and [9] to the K2 clutch piston. D Secure the shaft in the vice. D Insert the piston of clutch K2 until it touches the bottom, making sure it is straight. Pay attention to the installation position of the piston. Figure 146
Z7307094H
D Preload the compression spring with tool 380002310. D Push the snap ring in the circular groove, then release the spring load and remove the tool. D Proceed in the same way for the KR clutch components. D Secure the shaft in the vice using tool 5870 654 022. Figure 148
Z7307123
D Insert resting ring [13] and compression ring [12]. D Position the thrust ring [14] on the compression ring with the chamfer facing upwards. D Position the snap ring [15]. D Remove the shaft from the support tool.
Z7307125
D Install the set of KR clutch plates in the order given in plate 5 (see following pages).
.
To ensure that the resulting measurements are correct, do not lubricate the plates.
D Insert the end shim [14] and secure it with snap ring [13].
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 149
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 77
Figure 150
Z7307126
D Fit a centesimal dial gauge with its probe on the terminal plate. D Apply a force of 100 N and reset the gauge. D Use compressed air to move the piston the length of its stroke and check that the end play is within the specified range. KR clutch end play: 2.8 -- 3.0 mm D If this is not so, correct the value by changing the first internal plate and/or the snap ring. D After adjusting the play between plates, remove the plates, lubricate them with the specified lubricant and then refit. D Install the set of K2 clutch plates in the order given in plate 6 (see following pages).
.
Z7307127
D Position the KR clutch bevel gear on the bearing inner ring [30] using a suitable support (arrow). Figure 151
To ensure that the resulting measurements are correct, do not lubricate the plates.
D Insert the end shim [14] and secure it with snap ring [13]. D Check that the end play is within the specified range as indicated for clutch KR. K2 clutch end play version A: 2.6 -- 2.8 mm K2 clutch end play version B: 2.2 -- 2.4 mm D If this is not so, correct the value by changing the first internal plate and/or the snap ring. D After adjusting the play between plates, remove the plates, lubricate them with the specified lubricant and then refit.
Z7307128
D Insert the two spacers (trial value s1 = 3.0 mm and s2 = 3.10 mm). D Fit the bearing inner ring [31].
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
78
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Plate 5A: clutch KR -- Version A (24 surfaces) Figure 152
Z73A7129
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1
Drum
1
2
Piston
1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
11
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
11
2.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 4.0
variable for play adjustment
7 8
Snap ring Terminal plate
1 1
from 2.55 to 3.10
variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.8 ---3.0 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K2 = X (short side of drum) KR = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 79
Plate 5B: clutch KR -- Version B (20 surfaces) Figure 153
Z73A7129
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1
Drum
1
2
Piston
1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
11
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
11
2.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 4.0
variable for play adjustment
7 8
Snap ring Terminal plate
1 1
from 2.55 to 3.10
variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.8 ---3.0 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K2 = X (short side of drum) KR = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
80
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Plate 6A: clutch K2 -- Version A (18 surfaces) Figure 154
Z73A7130
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1
Drum
1
2
Piston
1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
8
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
3
2.5
6
Inner plate
5
3,0
7 8
Inner plate Snap ring
1 1
from 2.5 to 4.0 from 2.5 to 3.10
9
Terminal plate
1
variable for play adjustment variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.6 --- 2.8 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K2 = X (short side of drum) KR = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 81
Plate 6B: clutch K2 -- Version B (14 surfaces) Figure 155
Z73A7130
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1
Drum
1
2
Piston
1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
6
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
6
3.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 4.0
variable for play adjustment
8 9
Snap ring Terminal plate
1 1
from 2.55 to 3.10
variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.2 --- 2.4 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K2 = X (short side of drum) KR = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
82
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Figure 156
327B-330B
Figure 158
Z7307131
D Fit a centesimal dial gauge with its probe on the edge of the gear. D Apply a force of 50,000 N and reset the gauge. D Check that the end play is within the specified range of values by levering with a bar. bearing end play: 0 -- 0.05 mm D If this is not so, correct the value with a spacer of a different thickness. D Dismantle the unit. D Check that the shaft is positioned so that the KR clutch is facing upwards.
Z7307133
D Fit the straight spur gear so that the splined hub mates with all the KR clutch plates. Figure 159
Figure 157
Z7307134
D Fit the selected spacers [29]. D Heat the inner ring of the bearing [31] and fit it so that it touches the spacers. Figure 160
Z7307132
Wear protective gloves when handling hot components. D Heat the inner ring of the bearing [30] and fit it so that it touches the shoulder.
Z7307135
D Heat the inner ring of the shaft taper roller bearing on KR clutch side [32], then fit it so it touches the shoulder.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 83
D Calculate thickness s of the spacer [39] with the following equation. s = (A -- B) + (0.10 Âą 0.05) mm where: A = distance between bearings in gear B = distance between shoulders on shaft s = spacer thickness (0.10 Âą 0.05) = specified end play.
Figure 161
.
Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
D Dismantle the unit. D Check that the shaft is positioned so that the K2 clutch is facing upwards. Z7307136
D Position the K2 clutch dual straight gear on the inner ring of bearing [40].
Figure 164
Figure 162
Z7307139
Z7307137
D Fit the bearing inner ring [38].
Wear protective gloves when handling hot components. D Heat the inner ring of the bearing [38] and fit it so that it touches the shoulder.
Figure 163
Figure 165
Z7307138
D Measure value A. D Measure value B.
Z7307140
D Fit the K2 clutch dual spur gear so that the splined hub mates with all the K2 clutch plates.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
84
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Figure 166
327B-330B
Figure 169
Z7307141
D Fit the selected spacer [39]. D Heat the inner ring of the bearing [40] and fit it so that it touches the spacer. Figure 167
Z7307144H
D Refit the shaft on the support tool. D Apply LOCTITE 262 thread locker, then fit the ring nut on the K2 clutch side. D Tighten the ring nut to the specified torque using tool 380002399. Figure 170
Z7307142
D Heat the inner ring of the shaft taper roller bearing on K2 clutch side [41], then fit it so it touches the shoulder. Figure 168
Z7307145H
D Apply LOCTITE 262 thread locker, then fit the ring nut on the KR clutch side. D Tighten the ring nut to the specified torque using tool 380002399. D Check operation of the clutches KR and K2 with compressed air. D If the components are fitted correctly, you should clearly hear the clutches opening and closing. D Insert the rectangular seals [2] at the end of the shaft on the K2 clutch side.
Z7307143
D Remove the shaft from the support tool D Settle the unit with a load of about 100,000 N.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Clutch shaft KV/K1
.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 85
Figure 173
The references given in square brackets refer to plate 7 (see following pages), which illustrates all the components of the clutches under examination.
Dismantling Proceed as follows: Figure 171
Z7307148H
D Remove the K1 clutch straight spur gear complete with external ball bearing using an extractor. D Remove the bushing. D Remove the internal ball bearing from the shaft. Both ball bearings must be replaced if any damage occurs. Figure 174 Z7307146H
D Secure the shaft in the vice. D Loosen the ring nut [43] using tool 380002399. The ring nut is locked with thread locker. Heat the threading to about 120 °C before unscrewing to avoid damage. Figure 172
Z7307149
D Remove the snap ring [16]. D Remove the terminal plate [18] and the set of K1 clutch plates.
Z7307147H
D Extract the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [42]. D Remove the spacer [8].
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
86
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Plate 7: clutch shaft KV/K1 Figure 175
Z7307150 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 176
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 87
Figure 178
Z7307151H
D Turn the shaft upside down. D Loosen the ring nut [38] using tool 380002320. The ring nut is locked with thread locker. Heat the threading to about 120 °C before unscrewing to avoid damage. Figure 177
Z7307153H
D Remove the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [34]. D Remove the shaft from the support tool. D Follow the instructions given for the K4/K3 shaft and preload the compression spring [19] with tool 380002310. D Use a screwdriver to remove the snap ring [23], then release the spring load and remove the thrust ring [22], the spring and the resting ring [21]. Figure 179
Z7307152H
D Remove the inner ring of the taper roller bearing [37]. D Use an extractor to remove the bevel gear [33]. D Collect the bearing inner ring [34] from the gear. D Remove the preload adjustment ring [35] and spacer [36] of taper bearings [34].
Z7307154
D Use compressed air to remove the piston [10]. Make sure the piston is held securely to avoid injury. D Remove O---rings [14] and [50] from the piston. D Proceed in the same way for the K1 clutch components. D Remove the O---rings [2] from the shaft. Check and inspect all components according to the instructions given in the relevant chapter. Replace the O---rings and seals.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
88
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Reassembling Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Figure 182
Figure 180
Z7307155
D Lubricate and fit the 0---rings [12] and [13] to the K1clutch piston. D Secure the shaft in the vice. D Insert the piston of clutch K1 until it touches the bottom, making sure it is straight. Pay attention to the installation position of the piston. Figure 181
Z7307094H
D Preload the compression spring with tool 380002310. D Push the snap ring in the circular groove, then release the spring load and remove the tool. D Proceed in the same way for the KV clutch components. D Secure the shaft in the vice. Figure 183
Z7307156
D Insert resting ring [21] and compression ring [20]. D Position the thrust ring [22] on the compression ring with the chamfer facing upwards. D Position the snap ring [23]. D Remove the shaft from the support tool.
Z7307158
D Install the set of KV clutch plates in the order given in plate 8 (see following pages).
.
To ensure that the resulting measurements are correct, do not lubricate the plates.
D Insert the end shim [17] and secure it with snap ring [15].
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 184
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 89
Figure 185
Z7307159
D Fit a centesimal dial gauge with its probe on the terminal plate. D Apply a force of 100 N and reset the gauge. D Use compressed air to move the piston the length of its stroke and check that the end play is within the specified range. KV clutch end play: 2.8 -- 3.0 mm D If this is not so, correct the value by changing the first internal plate and/or the snap ring. D After adjusting the play between plates, remove the plates, lubricate them with the specified lubricant and then refit. D Install the set of K1 clutch plates in the order given in plate 9 (see following pages).
.
Z7307160
D Position the KV clutch bevel gear on the bearing inner ring [34] using a suitable support (arrow). Figure 186
To ensure that the resulting measurements are correct, do not lubricate the plates.
D Insert the end shim [18] and secure it with snap ring [16]. D Check that the end play is within the specified range as indicated for clutch KV. K1 clutch end play version A: 2.6 -- 2.8 mm K1 clutch end play version B: 2.2 -- 2.4 mm D If this is not so, correct the value by changing the first internal plate and/or the snap ring. D After adjusting the play between plates, remove the plates, lubricate them with the specified lubricant and then refit.
Z7307161
D Insert the ring and the spacer (trial value s = 1.7 mm). D Fit the bearing inner ring [34].
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
90
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Plate 8A: clutch KV -- Version A (24 surfaces) Figure 187
Z73A7162
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1 2
Drum Piston
1 1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
11
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
11
2.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 4.0
variable for play adjustment
7 8
Snap ring Terminal plate
1 1
from 2.55 to 3.10
variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.8 ---3.0 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K1 = X (short side of drum) KV = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 91
Plate 8B: clutch KV -- Version B (20 surfaces) Figure 188
Z73A7162
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1 2
Drum Piston
1 1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
9
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
7
3.5
6
Inner plate
2
4.0
7 8
Inner plate Snap ring
1 1
from 2.5 to 4.0 from 2.55 to 3.10
9
Terminal plate
1
variable for play adjustment variable for play adjustment
Clutch end play: 2.8 ---3.0 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K1 = X (short side of drum) KV = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
92
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Plate 9A: clutch K1 -- Version A (18 surfaces) Figure 189
Z73A7163
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1 2
Drum Piston
1 1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
8
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
8
2.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 3.5
variable for play adjustment
7
Snap ring
1
from 2.10 to 2.50
variable for play adjustment
8
Terminal plate
1
Clutch end play: 2.6 --- 2.8 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K1 = X (short side of drum) KV = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 93
Plate 9B: clutch K1 -- Version B (14 surfaces) Figure 190
Z73B7163
N.
Description
Quantity
Thickness (mm)
Remarks
1 2
Drum Piston
1 1
3
Outer plate
2
1.85
coated on one side
4
Outer plate
8
2.5
coated on both sides
5
Inner plate
8
3.5
6
Inner plate
1
from 2.5 to 3.5
variable for play adjustment
7
Snap ring
1
from 2.10 to 2.50
variable for play adjustment
8
Terminal plate
1
Clutch end play: 2.2 --- 2.4 mm. Install the outer plates (3) so that the uncoated surface is facing towards the piston and the terminal plate respectively. The side of the respective clutches can be recognised by the length of the drum. K1 = X (short side of drum) KV = Y (long side of drum)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
94
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Figure 191
327B-330B
Figure 193
Z7307164
D Fit a centesimal dial gauge with its probe on the edge of the gear. D Apply a force of 50,000 N and reset the gauge. D Check that the end play is within the specified range of values by levering with a bar. bearing end play: 0 -- 0.05 mm. D If this is not so, correct the value with a spacer of a different thickness. D Dismantle the unit. D Check that the shaft is positioned so that the KV clutch is facing upwards.
Z7307166
D Fit the KV clutch bevel gear so that the splined hub mates with all the KV clutch plates. Figure 194
Figure 192
Z7307167
D Heat the inner ring of the bearing [34] and fit it so that it touches the spacers. Figure 195
Z7307165
Wear protective gloves when handling hot components. D Heat the inner ring of the bearing [34] and fit it so that it touches the shoulder. D Fit the ring [35] and the spacer [36] selected.
Z7307168
D Heat the inner ring of the shaft taper roller bearing on KV clutch side [37], then fit it so it touches the shoulder.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
.
SECTION 5
Before fitting, align and centre the set of K1 clutch plates with the spur gear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 95
Figure 198
Figure 196
Z7307171
Z7307169
D Install the snap ring. D Insert the bushing with side collar on terminal surface (arrow) facing the snap ring. Figure 197
Wear protective gloves when handling hot components. D Heat the internal ball bearing and fit it in until it touches the shoulder. Install the ball bearing with the lubrication groove (arrow) facing upwards. Figure 199
Z7307170
D Fit the external ball bearing until it touches the bushing Install the ball bearing with the lubrication groove (arrow) facing downwards. Apply the pad only to the bearing outer ring.
Z7307172
D Insert the bushing. Figure 200
Z7307173
D Heat the complete spur gear [40] and fit it so that the splined hub mates with all the K1 clutch plates. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
96
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Power takeoff shaft
Figure 201
Removal Proceed as follows: Figure 203
Z7307174
D Install the spacer [8]. D Heat the inner ring of the shaft taper roller bearing on K1 clutch side [42], then fit it so it touches the shoulder. D Remove the shaft from the support tool. D Settle the unit with a load of about 100,000 N as described for the KV/K2 clutch shaft. Figure 202
Z7307176H
D Remove the inner ring of the taper roller bearing. D Remove the inner ring of the opposite bearing with a press. The shaft and the gear cannot be separated (hot---coupling). Assembly Proceed as follows: Figure 204
Z7307175H
D Refit the shaft on the support tool. D Apply LOCTITE 262 thread locker, then fit the ring nut on the K1 clutch side. D Tighten the ring nut to the specified torque using tool 380002399. D Apply LOCTITE 262 thread locker, then fit the ring nut on the KV clutch side. D Tighten the ring nut to the specified torque using tool 5870 401 099. D Check operation of the clutches KV and K1 with compressed air. D If the components are fitted correctly, you should clearly hear the clutches opening and closing. D Insert the rectangular seals [2] at the end of the shaft on the K1 clutch side.
Z7307177
D Fit the inner ring on the converter side with a press. D Fit the inner ring of the opposite bearing with a press.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Central splitter
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 97
Figure 208
Removal Proceed as follows: Figure 205
Z7307181
D Separate the train carrier from the external crown gear with a press. Figure 209 Z7307178
D Remove the bushing. D Remove the snap ring and extract the rear output shaft from the train carrier. Figure 206
Z7307182H
D Remove the inner ring of the taper roller bearing on rear side from the external crown gear. D If necessary, remove the outer ring of the taper roller bearing on front side from the external crown gear. Z7307179
Figure 210
D Remove the snap ring securing the sun gear. Figure 207
Z7307183
D Use a drift to push the lockpins of a pair of side pinions inwards. Z7307180
D Remove the snap ring securing the external crown flange. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
98
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Assembly Proceed as follows:
Figure 211
Figure 213
Z7307184
D Remove the pins from the side pinions then remove the side pinions. D If necessary, remove the other side pinions in the same way. D Collect up all the internal components of each side pinion. Figure 212
Z7307186
D Insert the front output shaft and fit the snap ring. D Position the sun gear with the stepped side facing the snap ring. Then insert the front output shaft until the snap ring clicks into position. D Fit the sun gear snap ring from the opposite side. Figure 214
Z7307185
D Push the front output shaft until the sun gear can be removed. D Remove the snap ring (1) and separate the output shaft from the train carrier.
Z7307187
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
thrust washer needles ( 30 ) spacer pin side pinion gear
D Grease the components for easy assembly, then fit them. D Position the crown wheel gear, align it and secure it with the pin. D Check that the centre oil hole for the side pinion pin is facing forwards.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 215
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 99
Figure 218
Z7307188
D Fix the pin with the lockpin by inserting it to the pinâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s half---way point. Figure 216
Z7307191
Wear protective gloves when handling hot components. D Heat the inner ring of the taper roller bearing on the rear side and fit it so that it touches the shoulder. Figure 219
Z7307189
D Fit the train carrier in the external crown gear. D If it has been removed, fit the outer ring of the bearing in the external crown gear until it touches.
Z7307192
D Fit the rear output shaft and secure it with the snap ring.
Figure 217
Figure 220
Z7307190
Wear protective gloves when handling very cold components. D Cool the external crown flange in dry ice, and fit it up to point of contact. D Fit the snap ring.
Z7307193
D Fit both rectangular seals. D Fit the bushing.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
100
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
AN input shaft
327B-330B
Figure 224
Removal Proceed as follows: Figure 221
Z7307197
D Use an extractor to remove the inner ring of the taper roller bearing and the pump drive bushing from the shaft. Z7307194
D Remove the upper snap ring. D Separate the straight spur gear from the shaft. D Remove the lower snap ring.
Figure 225
Figure 222
Z7307198
Z7307195H
D Collect up the play adjustment rings. D Separate the inner ring of the bearing from the bushing. D Remove the bushing inner rings.
D Extract the inner ring of the taper roller bearing from the spur gear. Figure 223
Z7307196
D Loosen the screw securing the drive bushing.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Assembly Proceed as follows:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 101
Figure 228
Figure 226
Z7307201
Z7307199
D Fit the internal seals. D Fit the drive key. D Fit the ring (1.90 mm thick) and the bearing inner ring to point of contact.
D Fit the selected spacer. D Fit the bearing inner ring and bushing to point of contact. D Fit the tightening disk on the inside and tighten the securing screw to the specified torque. Figure 229
Figure 227
Z7307202
D Fit the inner ring of the taper roller bearing on the gear to point of contact using a press. Figure 230 Z7307200
D Measure value A. D Measure value B. D Calculate thickness s of the spacer with the following equation: s = (A -- B) + (0.50) mm where: A = distance between bearing ring and drive bushing B = distance between bushing shoulders and bearing on shaft. s = spacer thickness (0.50) = specified end play.
.
Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
Z7307203
D Fit the lower snap ring on the shaft. D Insert the gear and fit the upper snap ring.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
102
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Pressure pump
327B-330B
Assembly Proceed as follows:
Removal Proceed as follows:
Figure 234
Figure 231
Z7307207H Z7307204
D Remove the needle bearing retainer. D Remove the external O---ring. Figure 232
D Insert the rotor unit with the tooth edge chamfer facing downwards, then install the housing cover. D Fit the needle bearing retainer to the point of contact, making sure the reinforced shell faces the tool. D Fit the external O---ring. Figure 235
Z7307205H
D Extract the inner ring of the taper roller bearing, then remove the spacer. Figure 233
Z7307208
D Fit the spacer. D Fit the taper roller bearing outer ring.
Z7307206
D Loosen the fastening screws and dismantle the pump. The whole pump must be replaced if there are signs of wear in the housing or cover.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
GEARBOX AND GEAR ASSEMBLY
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 103
Intermediate shaft gear Proceed as follows:
Power takeoff shaft Proceed as follows:
Figure 238
Figure 236
Z7307209
D Fit the bearing outer ring (A) on converter side to point of contact. D Insert the power takeoff shaft in its housing. Fit the outer ring (B) of the opposite bearing to point of contact. Figure 237
Z7307211
Z7307210
D Fit play adjustment spacers (1) and check that the end play is within the specified range of values. pwr takeoff shaft end play: 0.05-- 0.10 mm D If this is not so, correct the value by removing or adding spacers. D Once the play has been adjusted, lock the shaft with the retainer snap ring (2). D Turn the gearbox upside down. D Insert a seal in the housing hole with its concave side facing downwards. D Apply LOCTITE 262 sealant.
D Assemble the bearing rings inserting a spacer with thickness s = 7.95 mm, then measure distance A. D Fit the taper bearing rings on the gear without the spacer, position the pre---assembled gear on a flat surface and measure value B. D Check that the end play is within the specified values by applying the following equation: 0.00 mm < (A -- B) < 0.05 mm D If it is not, increase or decrease the thickness s of the spacer as necessary.
.
Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
D Position the gear complete with bearing inner rings in its seat.
.
The intermediate shaft pin can only be fitted if the clutches and relative covers have been installed (see following pages).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
104
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Clutch shafts Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Figure 242
Figure 239
Z7307215 Z7307212
D Fit the bearing outer rings of shafts KV/K1 (1), KR/K2 (2) and K3/K4 (3) in the housing holes to point of contact.
D Check the position of the intermediate shaft and correct if necessary. Figure 243
Figure 240
Z7307216H
Z7307213
D Position the KV/K1 clutch with an eyebolt and a suitable lifting device.
D Fit the K3 clutch straight spur gear in position and prevent the plates falling out. D Slightly lift the KR/K2 clutch shaft, move it to one side and position clutch shaft K3/K4. D Remove the tool.
Figure 241
Z7307214
D Position the KR/K2 clutch in the same way.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 105
Gearbox cover Proceed as follows: D Fit any covers, plugs and unions that have been removed.
Figure 244
Apply LOCTITE 262 sealant where necessary. Install a new seal where necessary Differential bearing preload Figure 247
Z7307217
D Heat the inner ring of the taper roller bearing on the front side and fit it so that it touches the gearbox shoulder. D Fit the metal guard. Figure 245
Z7307220
D Measure value A. Figure 248
Z7307218
D Insert the differential in its seat with a suitable lifting device. Figure 246
Z7307221
D Install the bearing outer ring. D Measure value B. Use rods and calibrated reference blocks. Exert an even pressure on the bearing outer ring. Measure at various points and calculate the average. Z7307219
D Fit the central splitter metal guard and tighten the fastening screws.
D Calculate thickness s of the spacer with the following equation: s = (A -- B) + (0.05 Âą 0.05) mm where: A = distance between bearing seat shoulder and gearbox cover mating surface. B = distance between bearing ring resting surface and the gearbox mating surface. s = spacer thickness (0.05 Âą 0.05) = specified end play.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
106
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
D Insert both cylindrical pins (1) and (2) to point of contact. D Insert the roller pin (3) so it is flush to the edge.
Figure 249
Figure 252
Z7307222
D Fit the selected spacer. D Fit the taper roller bearing outer ring. Figure 250
Z7307225
D Fit the splitter output shaft ball bearing on rear side to point of contact. D Fit a spacer with thickness s = 4.0 mm. D Fit another spacer so that the bearing has no play. D Fit the snap ring. Figure 253 Z7307223
D Apply LOCTITE 574 sealant on the assembly surface making sure it is applied inside the holes (detail). D Install two guide screws. D Position the cover on the gearbox to point of contact using a suitable lifting device and eyebolts. Figure 251
Z7307226
D Fit the sealing ring with tool 380002275.
Z7307224
D Tighten the cover fastening screws to the specified torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
K3/K4 clutch shaft bearings preload
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 107
Figure 256
Figure 254
Z7307227
D Install the bearing inner ring. D Measure value A.
Z7307229
Figure 255
D Fit the selected spacer. Wear protective gloves when handling hot components. D Heat the inner ring of the bearing and fit it so that it touches the shoulder. D Fit the O---ring. D Heat the internal diameter of the cover (straight roller bearing seat). Figure 257
Z7307228
D Measure value B. Use rods and calibrated reference blocks. Exert an even pressure on the bearing inner ring. Measure at various points and calculate the average. D Calculate thickness s of the spacer with the following equation: s = (A -- B) + (0.025 Âą 0.025) mm where: A = distance between bearing ring resting surface and the gearbox mating surface. B = distance between bearing seat shoulder and cover mating surface. s = spacer thickness (0.025 Âą 0.025) = specified end play.
.
Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
Z7307230
D Lubricate and centre the rectangular seals. D Fit the cover in accordance with the installation position indicated by the notches. D Tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
108
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
KR/K2 clutch shaft bearing preload
327B-330B
Figure 260
Figure 258
Z7307233 Z7307231
D Install the bearing outer ring. D Measure value A.
D Fit the selected spacer. D Fit the O---ring. Figure 261
Figure 259
Z7307232
D Measure value B. Exert an even pressure on the bearing outer ring. Measure at various points and calculate the average. D Calculate thickness s of the spacer with the following equation: s = (A -- B) + (0.025 Âą 0.025) mm where: A = distance between bearing ring resting surface and the gearbox mating surface. B = distance between bearing seat shoulder and cover mating surface. s = spacer thickness (0.025 Âą 0.025) = specified end preload.
.
Z7307234
D Lubricate and centre the rectangular seals. D Fit the cover in accordance with the installation position indicated by the notches. D Tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque.
Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
KV/K1 clutch shaft bearing preload
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 109
Figure 264
Figure 262
Z7307237 Z7307235
D Install the bearing outer ring. D Measure value A.
D Fit the selected spacer. D Fit the bearing outer ring. D Fit the O---ring. Figure 265
Figure 263
Z7307236
D Insert the ring in the cover, with the chamfer facing downwards. D Measure value B. Use rods and calibrated reference blocks. Exert an even pressure on the bearing outer ring. Measure at various points and calculate the average. D Calculate thickness s of the spacer with the following equation: s = (A -- B) + (0.025 Âą 0.025) mm where: A = distance between bearing ring resting surface and the gearbox mating surface. B = distance between bearing seat shoulder ring and cover mating surface. s = spacer thickness (0.025 Âą 0.025) = specified axial preload.
.
Z7307238
D Lubricate and centre the rectangular seals. D Fit the cover in accordance with the installation position indicated by the notches. D Tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque.
Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
110
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Intermediate shaft pin Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Figure 268
Figure 266
Z7307241 Z7307239H
D Turn the gearbox upside down. D Centre the secondary shaft gear. D Fit the tool 380002293.
D Remove the tool 380002293. Apply LOCTITE 243. Tighten the fastening screw to the specified torque. Central splitter lock device Proceed as follows:
Figure 267
Figure 269
Z7307240 Z7307242
Wear protective gloves when handling very cold components. D Cool the pin in dry ice. D Fit the pin to point of contact.
D Fit a flat seal. D Heat the internal ball bearing. D Carefully insert the lock device and position it flat against the seal.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 111
Pressure pump Proceed as follows:
Figure 270
Figure 273
Z7307243
D Fit both dowels (arrows). D Tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque.
Z7307246
Wear protective gloves when handling very cold components.
Figure 271
D Cool the pump in dry ice. D Fit the pump in accordance with the installation position indicated by the notches. Figure 274
Z7307244H
D Fit the sealing ring with a suitable tool. Figure 272
Z7307247
D Fit the O---ring. D Fit the pump flange.
Z7307245
D Insert the perforated disk (1) and the filter (2) in the housing hole. D Temporarily close the hole with plug (3) until the hydraulic pipes are fitted.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
112
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Covers Proceed as follows:
Figure 275
Figure 277
Z7307248
D Tighten the screws fastening the pump and the pump flange to the specified torque. Apply LOCTITE 243 sealant to the two screws indicated by the arrow. Power takeoff flange Proceed as follows:
Z7307250
D Insert the sealing covers with the concave side facing downwards so that they are flush with the housing surface. D Apply LOCTITE 262 sealant to the edges of the covers. AN input shaft Proceed as follows:
Figure 276
Figure 278
Z7307249
D Fit the O---ring. D Fit the power takeoff flange. D Tighten the flange fastening screws to the specified torque.
Z7307251
D Fit the input shaft to point of contact. Take care that the drive key is inserted correctly in the relevant seat in the pressure pump.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AN input shaft bearing end play
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 113
Figure 281
Figure 279
Z7307254 Z7307252
D Fit the flat seal. D Install the bearing inner ring. D Measure value A.
.
After measuring remove the input shaft.
D Fit the selected spacer. D Fit the bearing outer ring. Converter bell Proceed as follows: Figure 282
Figure 280
Z7307255 Z7307253
D Measure value B. Use rods and calibrated reference blocks. Exert an even pressure on the bearing outer ring. Measure at various points and calculate the average.
D Fit the bearing outer ring on drive gear shift side to point of contact, then fit the inner ring of the same bearing. Figure 283
D Calculate thickness s of the spacer with the following equation: s = (A -- B) + (0.025 Âą 0.025) mm where: A = distance between bearing ring resting surface and the gearbox mating surface. B = distance between bearing seat shoulder and converter bell mating surface. s = spacer thickness (0,025 Âą 0.025) = specified end play.
.
Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
Z7307256
D Insert the straight drive gear from the side with the long collar facing upwards, then centre it.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
114
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
327B-330B
Drive gear bearings end play
Figure 284
Figure 286
Z7307257
D Insert both roller pins (diameter 2.5 mm and 1.5 mm) in the input shaft hole (detail) and make sure they are flush with the edge. Wear protective gloves when handling very cold components.
Z7307259
D Measure value A. Figure 287
D Cool the input shaft with dry ice and insert it to point of contact. Figure 285
Z7307260
D Fit the flat seal. D Measure value B. Use rods and calibrated reference blocks. Exert an even pressure on the bearing inner ring. Measure at various points and calculate the average.
Z7307258
Wear protective gloves when handling hot components. D Heat the inner ring of the drive gear bearing on the converter side and fit it so that it touches the converter bell shoulder.
D Calculate thickness s of the spacer with the following equation: s = (A -- B) + (0.05 Âą 0.02) mm where: A = distance between bearing ring resting surface and the converter bell mating surface. B = distance between bearing seat shoulder and oil supply flange mating surface. s = spacer thickness (0.05 Âą 0.02) = specified end play.
.
Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
Figure 288
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 115
Figure 291
Z7307261H
D Fit the needle bearing retainer to the point of contact using tools 380001278 and 380002281, making sure the reinforced shell faces the tool.
Z7307264
Wear protective gloves when handling very cold components. D Fit the oil supply flange in accordance with the installation position indicated by the notches.
Figure 289
Figure 292
Z7307262
D Fit the seal (1). D Fit the converter relief valve (2). D Fit both rectangular seals in the input shaft splines (3). Figure 290
Z7307265
D Fit the oil supply flange cover in accordance with the installation position indicated by the notches. D Tighten the cover fastening screws (common to the flange) to the specified torque. Figure 293
Z7307263
D Cool the oil supply flange with dry ice. D Fit the selected spacer, making sure it sticks with grease.
Z7307266
D Insert the pin to point of contact.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
116
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
D Fit the components of the converter relief valve and tighten the screw cap to the specified torque. D Fit two guide screws. D Heat the converter bell housing hole on the gearbox.
327B-330B
Figure 296
The following three operations must be performed in quick succession to permit correct converter bell assembly. Prepare all the necessary elements. Figure 294
Z7307269
D Using a suitable lifting device, fit the converter bell in accordance with the installation position indicated by the notches. Turn the input shaft slightly to make insertion easier. Protect the splines. Figure 297
Z7307267
D Fit the input shaft to point of contact. Take care that the drive key is inserted correctly in the relevant seat in the pressure pump. Figure 295 Z7307270
D Tighten the converter bell fastening screws to the specified torque. D Insert the O---ring in the converter bell.
Z7307268
D Fit the flat seal (1). D Fit the O---ring (2) in the circular seat.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 117
Air gap adjustment
Figure 298
.
The following procedure is valid for all gearbox sensors.
Proceed as follows: Figure 300
Z7307271
D Using a suitable lifting device, fit the converter retarder unit in accordance with the installation position indicated by the notches. D Tighten the converter retarder unit fastening screws to the specified torque. Transmitters Proceed as follows: Figure 299
Z7307273
D Measure value A. D Measure value B. D Calculate thickness s of the spacer with the following equation: s = A -- (B + X) mm where: A = distance between sensor resting surface on gearbox and tip of phonic wheel tooth. B = distance between shoulder and end of sensor. s = spacer thickness. X = specified air gap: sensor (1) :1.0+0.5 mm sensor (2) :0.5+0.3 mm sensor (3) :0.3 Âą 0.1 mm sensor (4) :0.5+0.3 mm
. D Fit the sensors given below. (1) output shaft rpm sensor (2) turbine rpm sensor (3) central shaft rpm sensor (4) engine rpm sensor
.
Z7307272
Pay attention to the different air gap value. Choose the spacer with the most appropriate thickness.
D Fit each sensor and tighten it/the fastening screws to the specified torque.
The figure illustrates the position of the sensors
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
118
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION 5
Completion
Lubricant filter Proceed as follows:
Flanges
.
327B-330B
Figure 302 The following procedure is valid for all gearbox flanges.
Proceed as follows: Figure 301
Z7307275
D Insert the filter in its housing. D Lubricate the seal. Figure 303 Z7307274
D Fit the flange to the shaft splined tang. D Apply LOCTITE 574 sealant to the disk contact surface. D Fit the disk and secure it with the fastening screws. D Tighten the screws to the specified torque. D Secure the screws with the shakeproof plate.
Z7307276
D D D D D D D
Fit the cover and secure it with the fastening screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Fit the hydraulic control unit. all the oil pipes. Install all the hoses on the back of the gearbox. Fit the PTO engagement box. Remove the transmission from the supporting tools:
.
The transmission has no lubricating oil.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 6.1 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Transmission unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
First reduction: bevel gear pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train . . . . . . . 12
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Brake pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Replacement of the brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Breaking---in of the pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Brake disc and caliper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Axle oil level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Splitter unit and bevel gear pair (first reduction) . . 16
Check transmission oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) . . . . . . 17
Oil replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
REMOVAL-- REFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
BRAKE CALIPER DETACHMENT-REATTACHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Detachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Reattachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 3
DESCRIPTION
The axle is a dual reduction bearing type. It consists of a boxed structure containing the cylindrical wheel transmission, the bevel gear pair with the differential (first reduction), the drive shafts and hubs with the epicyclic reducer (second reduction). The structure is connected to the chassis by a floating fork hinged to the centre, and a transverse bar (Panhard bar) and has housings for the bearings. Two pneumo---hydraulic cylinders act as flexible element and shock absorber. Figure 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Fork Caliper brake Hub with epicyclic train Pneumo---hydraulic cylinder Cylindrical wheels transmission Axle Motion input flange Transverse bar
314A061D001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Transmission unit The transmission unit consists of three helical gears. The gears (with total ratio 1:1) receive motion from the input flange (coaxial to the first gear) and transmit it to the differential pinion (coaxial to the last gear). Figure 2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Input flange First gear Transmission input shaft Second gear (intermediate transmission gear) Third gear Bevel pinion shaft Front axle differential unit
314A061W002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
First reduction: bevel gear pair The first reduction is obtained by the pinion---ring bevel gear unit (bevel gear pair) inside the differential. The input shaft is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by spacer. The axial position of the pinion can also be adjusted by shims. The differential box with ring bevel gear is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in X arrangement with preload and axial position adjustable by two opposing ring nuts.
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 5
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
Flange input shaft Motion input gear Taper roller bearings Intermediate gear Straight roller bearings Transmission box Driving gear (pinion) External taper roller pinion bearing Taper pinion Internal taper roller pinion bearing Rear cover Axle Crown Differential half---box Adjustment bush Differential gear carrier shaft Differential box Side pinion Crown wheel Crown side taper roller bearing Adjustment ring nut Axle shaft Differential half---box
A: Section B: Functional layout
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Figure 3
A
314A061W003R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 7
Figure 4
B
314A061W004R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
The differential is a limited---skid differential, characterized by the positioning of a multiple---disc clutch between the differential case (upright) and the crown wheels (sun gears) for each side. The multiple---disc clutch includes external discs connected to the differential case and internal discs connected to the planetary gears. The thrust on the discs is ensured by the axial component of the force exchanged between the teeth of the planet ---wheels and crown wheels.
327B-330B
The axial thrust on the discs generates a resistant torque that acts on the crown wheel when the crown wheel tends to rotate with respect to the differential case due to the speed difference between the two wheels. This resistant torque depends, with equal axial thrust, on the dimensions and the coating material of the discs.
Figure 5
1. 2. 3.
Differential semicase Planetary gear Multiple---disc device for skid limitation
276C062005 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
Operation The torque coming from drive shaft is transmitted through a cardan joint to the bevel pinion. From this, the torque passes to the ring bevel gear, which is integral with the differential case. The differential is a gear train in which the case represents the upright, that holds the planet ---wheel holding shafts and receives the torque, while the two crown wheels represent the sun gears, both rotary, that receive the torque and transmit it to the axle shafts. When both the wheels are subject to the same resistant torque or have the same speed (vehicle traveling along a straight path), the ring bevel gear and the differential case rotate as a block, transmitting the torque in equal parts to the two crown wheels, and from these to the two axle shafts that rotate at the same speed: the wheels transmit the same driving torque. Figure 6
276C062006
The right wheel with the same adherence as the left.
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 9
Under these conditions, there is no relative motion between the two crown wheels, and thus the planet ---wheels do not rotate around their shaft which is integral with the differential case. When the resistance of one wheel exceeds that of the other or when the speed of the two wheels is no longer equal (vehicle traveling a curved path) the planetary gears assume a different rotation speed: their relative motion is allowed by the presence of the planet ---wheels, which now rotate around their own shaft in opposite directions. Naturally, a slower rotation speed of the crown wheel corresponds to a greater driving torque transmitted, and vice versa. Thus when the differential operates the wheel that has a smaller speed, it is able to transmit a greater driving torque, while the one with the greater speed transmits a smaller torque. Under certain conditions it may occur that the slower wheel completely loses adhesion, since the torque that can be transmitted to the ground is exceeded, and thus it encounters practically zero resistance: in this case, a normal differential causes the free rotation of the wheel that skids and the stopping of the wheel that still adheres to the ground: the traction capacity of the axle becomes zero. To remedy this inconvenience, a limited---skid differential is used that is characterized by the possibility to generate a resistant torque on each crown wheel, which is no longer free to rotate with respect to the differential case, but is braked in proportion to the torque that the differential must transmit. This resistant torque, which depends on the thrust applied to the multiple---disc clutch, is always in a fixed ratio with the input torque, known as the â&#x20AC;?locking ratioâ&#x20AC;?. The locking ratio is the percentage of maximum difference between the torque transmittable to the wheel with greater adherence and that on the wheel with less adherence. For example, with a locking ratio of 45%, 72,5% of the driving torque is transferred to one rear axle shaft (rather than the normal 50%), while the other axle shaft receives only 27.5%: the difference is precisely 45% (with respect to a total of 100%).
RH: right side: torque supplied is 50% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 50% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
If the two wheels do not have the same adherence, the resistant torque generated by the multiple---disc clutches partially locks the crown wheel on the side having less adherence and increases the torque supplied by the crown wheel on the side with more adherence. In other words, the braking torque replaces the reaction torque missing from the side of the wheel with less adherence. In this manner, considering the previous case in which one wheel loses adherence, this wheel is not able to turn freely and thus the other wheel will still be able to transmit part of the driving torque, ensuring at least some traction capacity of the axle.
327B-330B
In practice, the multiple---disc clutches automatically compensate the adherence variations of the wheels from the left side and right side of the vehicle, without requiring any driver operation. It is thus possible to apply a much larger driving force when using the vehicle, and prevent skidding when one of the wheels encounters a surface lacking adherence.
Figure 7
276C062007
Left wheel with less adherence than the right wheel (example) RH: right side: torque supplied is 72.5% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 27.5% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 11
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train The second reduction is obtained by an epicyclic reducer with cylindrical wheels in the wheel hub. The hub is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by a ring nut. The planetary gear gears turn on pivoting roller bearings. Operation The torque from the differential is transmitted by a floating axle shaft to the sun gear by the grooved shank. The four planetaries gears rotate in the opposite direction to the sun gear, where as the crown wheel is integral to the hub support, and therefore does not rotate. This forces the train carrier to turn in the opposite direction to the planetaries gear, therefore in the same direction as the drive shaft.
327B-330B
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
Epicyclic train upright (planet ---wheel holding plate) Thrust spacer Planet ---wheel Epicyclic train fixed gear Planet ---wheel pin Guide bushing Adjustment ring nut Epicyclic train crown wheel Hub Wheel fastening column Brake caliper Brake disc Hub support Spacer ring Sealing ring Internal conic roller bearing External conic roller bearing Axle shaft Central retaining screw
A: Cross section B: Functional diagram
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 13
Figure 8
A
B
276C062D008A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Brake pad Figure 9
276C062D009
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Brake Pads Caliper Pin Bleeder fitting Brake control fitting Cover Cap Cap gasket Piston Sealant ring Piston gasket Dust cover
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 15
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA Hub Code Type
KESSLER D 81 Rigid with double reduction
Central differential
Limited skid – Gleason crown wheel and pinion
Transmission input shaft bearing
2 X---mounted conic roller bearings
Pinion bearings
2 O---mounted conic roller bearings
Differential bearings
2 X---mounted conic roller bearings
Transmission intermediate shaft bearings Hub bearings
2 straight roller bearings 2 O---mounted conic roller bearings for each side
Hub planet ---wheel bearings Reduction ratio
3 x 4 needle cages for each side
bevel gear set
1 : 3.50
wheel reducer
1 : 6.00
total
1 : 21.00
Pinion bearings pre-load Differential bearings pre-load Crown wheel and pinion clearance
see value engraved on the crown wheel
Self---blocking discs axial clearance
0.48 mm (0.019 in) minimum
Transmission input shaft conic bearings pre---load Transmission intermediate shaft axial clearance Reduction gear upright–axle shaft axial clearance Hub bearing preload
0.30 – 0.70 mm (0.012 --- 0.028 in) determined by the ring nut tightening torque
Ring nut tightening torque
1st tightening: 700---900 Nm (516.29---663.80 lb ft) then loosen 2nd tightening: 450 Nm (331.90 lb ft)
Brake disc and caliper Caliper
CARLISLE M -- 4
Type
Fixed
N. calipers per wheel
327B: 1 --- 330B: 2
N. cylinders per caliper Brake pad thickness
2x2 New
17 mm (0.67 in)
Wear limit
3 ± 0.5 mm (0.118 ± 0.02 in)
Disc
Fixed
Outer diameter
476 mm (18.74 in)
Inner diameter
250 mm (9.84 in)
Thickness
New
19 mm (0.748 in)
Wear limit
17 mm (0.67 in)
Max roughness
1 mm (0.039 in)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Splitter unit and bevel gear pair (first reduction) Figure 10
314A061W010R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 17
Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) Figure 11
276C062D012B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 12
314A061D002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 19
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 13
276C062D014B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 14
276C063D015
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 21
TOOLS 380002787
380002788
380002789
380002790
380002791
380002792
380002794
380002795
380002796
380002797
380002798
380002799
.
380002793
The tools listed below belong to a single axle equipment kit 380140049.
380002787 380002788 380002789 380002790 380002791 380002792 380002793 380002794 380002795 380002796 380002797 380002798 380002799
---------------------------
Spanner, Wheel Safety Nut Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Face Seal Installation Tool Disc Centering Tool Disc Centering Tool Seal Ring Sleeve Driver
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
DIAGNOSTICS Axle 1. Continuous noise 2. Cornering noise 3. Alternating noise 4. Sharp bangs during acceleration or deceleration 5. Oil leak
1
CONTINUOUS NOISE
Worn bearings.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Gears damaged or worn.
Replace them. YES
NO
Lack of lubrication.
Restore oil level. YES
NO
Incorrect adjustment of the clearances.
Adjust again YES
2
CORNERING NOISE
Worn planet ---wheels or crown wheels.
YES
Replace.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
3
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 23
ALTERNATING NOISE
Wheel bearings with excessive clearance.
YES
Adjust the bearings.
NO
Wheels mounted incorrectly.
Disassemble and remount correctly. YES
NO
Too little clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
NO
Too much clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
4
SHARP BANGS DURING ACCELERATION OR DECELERATION
Incorrect gear train adjustment.
YES
Adjust again.
NO
Pivot of the anchoring structure has too much play.
Replace the parts of the articulated joint. YES
NO
Loose fastening of the anchoring structure to the chassis.
YES
Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
5
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
OIL LEAK
Worn oil seals.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Loose screws. YES
Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
Brakes 1. Weak braking action 2. Unequal action of the brakes 3. Brakes that remain blocked
1
WEAK BRAKING ACTION
Worn pads.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Brake discs dirty with lubricant.
Clean the discs and replace the pads. YES
NO
Worn brake discs.
Replace them. YES
NO
Defective hydraulic system
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
2
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 25
UNEQUAL ACTION OF THE BRAKES
Pads and/or discs dirty with lubricant.
YES
Clean the discs and replace the pads.
NO
Non---approved/different pads on the two sides.
Replace with approved pads. YES
NO
Worn brake discs.
Replace them YES
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
3
BRAKES THAT REMAIN BLOCKED
Foreign bodies between the discs.
YES
Overhaul the brakes.
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
MAINTENANCE The braking system components are fundamental for the safe use of the vehicle. All inspection and replacement operations must be performed following the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s maintenance schedule and procedures. All the maintenance operations must be performed by specialized personnel which has been suitably trained and equipped with the proper tools. Replacements must be made with original spare parts or parts satisfying the same specifications. The pads (friction material) that have burns, localized wear or cracks absolutely must be replaced. Do not use different brands of pads on the same axle. If topping up is necessary, the same fluid as that contained in the tank must be used.
Figure 16
Replacement of the brake pads Proceed as follows: D detach the caliper following the instructions in the relative chapter; Figure 15
276C061D060
D unscrew both the retaining screws (1) and partially slip off both the upper centering pins (2) so as to free the eyelets of the pads (3); D remove both the pads by slipping them off the upper part of the caliper (arrow);
274A061010
D connect a tube to the bleeding valve (arrow) and arrange a suitable container to collect the fluid that leaks out; D place two soft slats between the pistons, then forcefully spread the pads apart using a lever or large screwdriver and at the same time open the bleeding valve until the cylinders return as far as possible into their seats ; D close the bleeding valve and disconnect the tube;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
Remove the dirt using a NON ---metallic brush and a vacuum cleaner. Visually examine the dust covers, and check that there is no seeping of hydraulic fluid. If irregularities are found, proceed to the brake caliper overhaul. Figure 17
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 27
D proceed to the reattachment of the caliper following the directions in the relative chapter. Breaking -- in of the pads During this procedure there may be an emission of unpleasant vapors and odors originating from the friction material of the pads. After replacement of the brake pads, they must be broken---in by traveling about 500 km. During the breaking---in period the vehicle must be used with caution, avoiding intensive use of the brakes such as panic stopping. During the breaking---in period it is good practice to check the temperature of the brake discs: this temperature must not exceed 200 ° C. Determine the temperature of the disc by stopping the vehicle and placing a pyrometer in contact with the disc.
276C062D016
D mount the new pads by inserting them from the upper part of the caliper (arrow), sliding them on the disc surface and fitting them on the lower centering pins (arrow); Figure 18
276C061D061
D insert the centering pins (2) into the relative seats and block them with the relative retaining screws (1);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
MAINTENANCE
327B-330B
Check transmission oil level Proceed as follows:
Axle oil level check Proceed as follows:
Figure 21
The level check can be carried out on the hubs or on the differential . If the level has to be restored, this is to be carried out on the differential. Figure 19
314A061W009R
D clean the plug area, then open the level plug (1): lubricant should flow out from the hole; D if necessary top up the level until there is an outflow from the plug; D close the plug. 276NM020T
D take the reference on a hub to horizontal position (see arrow); D clean the cap area and open the level cap (1). Lubricant should drip out of the hole; D close the filler cap. or Figure 20
292ANM004L
D clean the area of the cap, then open the cap (1): the lubricant must leak from the hole; D if necessary, restore the level until it overflows from the same cap; D close the cap; D check that the breather is perfectly clean and operational.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
Oil replacement The collection and disposal of lubricant oils and waste fluids is to be carried out in compliance with the standards in force.
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 29
Figure 23
To drain, proceed as follows: Figure 22
292ANM006L
276NM019T
D hubs: bring the hub location point to horizontal position (see arrow); D prepare a container of appropriate capacity, clean the plug area then remove the level plug (1) and the drainage plug (2) draining off the lubricant completely. D clean the plugs, check that the thread is in good condition, replace the seal ring and close the drainage plug; D repeat the procedure for the other hub;
D axle: prepare a container of appropriate capacity, clean the plug area then remove the filler plug (1); D remove the drainage plug (2) draining off the lubricant completely; Figure 24
314A061W007R
D transmission: prepare a container of appropriate capacity, clean the areas of the plugs then remove the filler plug (1); D remove the drainage plug (2) and drain off the lubricant completely; D clean the plugs, check that the thread is in good condition, replace the seal ring and close the drainage plug;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
To fill, proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Figure 27
Figure 25
314A061W009R 276NM019T
D fill with the specified lubricant until it outflows from the hub level plug hole (1); D replace the seal ring and close the plug; D repeat the procedure for the other hub;
D fill with the specified lubricant until it outflows from the transmission filler plug hole (1); The filling is to take place slowly. The operation terminates when the level at the hole does not lower for several minutes. D replace the seal ring and close the plug; D make a test run, then check the level again; D if necessary top up with the specified lubricant until it outflows from the hole, make another test run and check the level again.
Figure 26
292ANM006L
D fill with specified lubricant until it outflows from the axle filler plug hole (1); The filling is to take place slowly. The operation terminates when the level at the hole does not lower for several minutes. D replace the seal ring and close the plug;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 31
REMOVAL---REFIT Before starting any operation, make sure that all the precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved on the job have been made quite clear . Read the relevant instructions contained in SECTION 1 of this handbook. If in doubt ask someone who is more expert. Comply to all the general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance work. Removal Proceed as follows: D Bring the vehicle on a suitable flat, solid surface, switch off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the warning notices; D deactivate the battery isolator or disconnect the battery terminals to prevent any risk of a short circuit; D block articulation by means of the steering lock bar, proceeding as indicated in SECTION 1;
D raise the vehicle to detach the wheels from the ground, placed the two supporting stands under the front chassis without acting on the axle; D place an appropriate supporting hydraulic device under the axle (1) that permits lowering at the moment of separation, so that at this stage the axle remains in roughly horizontal position; D place an appropriate supporting hydraulic device under the fork (2) for support ; D remove both wheels operating as indicated in SECTION 9, D disconnect the axle bleeder tubes (not shown); Before removing the hydraulic tubes, prepare appropriate plugs to close the free ends. D disconnect the hydraulic tubes : --- service braking system (20);
.
During these operations hydraulic fluid may flow out.
D remove the transmission shaft on input side (18) as indicated in SECTION 7; D remove the lower fastening bolts (3) from both sides and disconnect the limit switch cables; D remove the lower bolts(4) that fasten the cylinder lower rubber bush from both sides; D remove the bolts (5) that fasten the Panhard bar to the axle;
.
For the moment, fasten the bar to the chassis.
D remove the bolts (6) that fasten the fork to the axle; D cautiously lower the axle and withdraw from the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Figure 28
276C062D003R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
BRAKE CALIPER DETACHMENT --REATTACHMENT
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES 33
Figure 30
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experience person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Detachment Do as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D disconnect the battery---disconnect switch or disconnect the battery terminals in order to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, operating as indicated in SECTION 1; D block the rear wheels appropriately; D use a hydraulic lift to raise the chassis until the front wheels are off the ground; D disassemble the wheel concerned; Figure 29
276C062D029
D disconnect the braking system hydraulic connector (4) and plug it to prevent fluid leaks;
.
Hydraulic oil leakage may occur during these operations.
D support the caliper (2) appropriately, unscrew the retaining screws (3) of the support bracket and remove the caliper complete with the bake pads. Reattachment Proceed to the reattachment by following the detachment steps in the reverse order. After reassembled, perform a bleeding of the brake hydraulic circuit following the instructions in SECTION 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
276C062D004R
D insert appropriate support trestles under the axle, then lower the chassis, resting the axle on the indicated points (arrow) and remove the lift;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
FRONT AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 6.1 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmission unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
First reduction: bevel gear pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train . . . . . . . 12 Braking assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Brake system fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Operating brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Splitter unit and bevel gear pair (first reduction) . . 18 Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) . . . . . . 19 TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Axle oil level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Check transmission oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Oil replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 REMOVAL-- REFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 3
DESCRIPTION
The axle is a dual reduction bearing type. It consists of a boxed structure containing the cylindrical wheel transmission, the bevel gear pair with the differential (first reduction), the drive shafts and hubs with the epicyclic reducer (second reduction). The structure is connected to the chassis by a floating fork hinged to the centre, and a transverse bar (Panhard bar) and has housings for the bearings. Two pneumo---hydraulic cylinders act as flexible element and shock absorber. Figure 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Fork Wet oil braking unit Hub with epicyclic train Pneumo---hydraulic cylinder Cylindrical wheels transmission Axle Motion input flange Transverse bar
314A061W001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Transmission unit The transmission unit consists of three helical gears. The gears (with total ratio 1:1) receive motion from the input flange (coaxial to the first gear) and transmit it to the differential pinion (coaxial to the last gear). Figure 2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Input flange First gear Transmission input shaft Second gear (intermediate transmission gear) Third gear Bevel pinion shaft Front axle differential unit
314A061W002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
First reduction: bevel gear pair The first reduction is obtained by the pinion---ring bevel gear unit (bevel gear pair) inside the differential. The input shaft is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by spacer. The axial position of the pinion can also be adjusted by shims. The differential box with ring bevel gear is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in X arrangement with preload and axial position adjustable by two opposing ring nuts.
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 5
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
Flange input shaft Motion input gear Taper roller bearings Intermediate gear Straight roller bearings Transmission box Driving gear (pinion) External taper roller pinion bearing Taper pinion Internal taper roller pinion bearing Rear cover Axle Crown Differential half---box Adjustment bush Differential gear carrier shaft Differential box Side pinion Crown wheel Crown side taper roller bearing Adjustment ring nut Axle shaft Differential half---box
A: Section B: Functional layout
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Figure 3
A
314A061W003R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 7
Figure 4
B
314A061W004R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
The differential is a limited---skid differential, characterized by the positioning of a multiple---disc clutch between the differential case (upright) and the crown wheels (sun gears) for each side. The multiple---disc clutch includes external discs connected to the differential case and internal discs connected to the planetary gears. The thrust on the discs is ensured by the axial component of the force exchanged between the teeth of the planet ---wheels and crown wheels.
327B-330B
The axial thrust on the discs generates a resistant torque that acts on the crown wheel when the crown wheel tends to rotate with respect to the differential case due to the speed difference between the two wheels. This resistant torque depends, with equal axial thrust, on the dimensions and the coating material of the discs.
Figure 5
1. 2. 3.
Differential semicase Planetary gear Multiple---disc device for skid limitation
276C062005 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
Operation The torque coming from drive shaft is transmitted through a cardan joint to the bevel pinion. From this, the torque passes to the ring bevel gear, which is integral with the differential case. The differential is a gear train in which the case represents the upright, that holds the planet ---wheel holding shafts and receives the torque, while the two crown wheels represent the sun gears, both rotary, that receive the torque and transmit it to the axle shafts. When both the wheels are subject to the same resistant torque or have the same speed (vehicle traveling along a straight path), the ring bevel gear and the differential case rotate as a block, transmitting the torque in equal parts to the two crown wheels, and from these to the two axle shafts that rotate at the same speed: the wheels transmit the same driving torque. Figure 6
276C062006
The right wheel with the same adherence as the left.
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 9
Under these conditions, there is no relative motion between the two crown wheels, and thus the planet ---wheels do not rotate around their shaft which is integral with the differential case. When the resistance of one wheel exceeds that of the other or when the speed of the two wheels is no longer equal (vehicle traveling a curved path) the planetary gears assume a different rotation speed: their relative motion is allowed by the presence of the planet ---wheels, which now rotate around their own shaft in opposite directions. Naturally, a slower rotation speed of the crown wheel corresponds to a greater driving torque transmitted, and vice versa. Thus when the differential operates the wheel that has a smaller speed, it is able to transmit a greater driving torque, while the one with the greater speed transmits a smaller torque. Under certain conditions it may occur that the slower wheel completely loses adhesion, since the torque that can be transmitted to the ground is exceeded, and thus it encounters practically zero resistance: in this case, a normal differential causes the free rotation of the wheel that skids and the stopping of the wheel that still adheres to the ground: the traction capacity of the axle becomes zero. To remedy this inconvenience, a limited---skid differential is used that is characterized by the possibility to generate a resistant torque on each crown wheel, which is no longer free to rotate with respect to the differential case, but is braked in proportion to the torque that the differential must transmit. This resistant torque, which depends on the thrust applied to the multiple---disc clutch, is always in a fixed ratio with the input torque, known as the â&#x20AC;?locking ratioâ&#x20AC;?. The locking ratio is the percentage of maximum difference between the torque transmittable to the wheel with greater adherence and that on the wheel with less adherence. For example, with a locking ratio of 45%, 72,5% of the driving torque is transferred to one rear axle shaft (rather than the normal 50%), while the other axle shaft receives only 27.5%: the difference is precisely 45% (with respect to a total of 100%).
RH: right side: torque supplied is 50% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 50% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
If the two wheels do not have the same adherence, the resistant torque generated by the multiple---disc clutches partially locks the crown wheel on the side having less adherence and increases the torque supplied by the crown wheel on the side with more adherence. In other words, the braking torque replaces the reaction torque missing from the side of the wheel with less adherence. In this manner, considering the previous case in which one wheel loses adherence, this wheel is not able to turn freely and thus the other wheel will still be able to transmit part of the driving torque, ensuring at least some traction capacity of the axle.
327B-330B
In practice, the multiple---disc clutches automatically compensate the adherence variations of the wheels from the left side and right side of the vehicle, without requiring any driver operation. It is thus possible to apply a much larger driving force when using the vehicle, and prevent skidding when one of the wheels encounters a surface lacking adherence.
Figure 7
276C062007
Left wheel with less adherence than the right wheel (example) RH: right side: torque supplied is 72.5% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 27.5% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 11
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train The second reduction is obtained by an epicyclic reducer with cylindrical wheels in the wheel hub. The hub is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by a ring nut. The planetary gear gears turn on pivoting roller bearings. Operation The torque from the differential is transmitted by a floating axle shaft to the sun gear by the grooved shank. The four planetaries gears rotate in the opposite direction to the sun gear, where as the crown wheel is integral to the hub support, and therefore does not rotate. This forces the train carrier to turn in the opposite direction to the planetaries gear, therefore in the same direction as the drive shaft.
327B-330B
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
Epicyclic train upright (planet ---wheel holding plate) Thrust spacer Planet ---wheel Epicyclic train fixed gear Planet ---wheel pin Guide bushing Adjustment ring nut Epicyclic train crown wheel Hub Wheel fastening column Sealing rings Brake bell Brake discs Actuation piston Brake unit Brake actuation fitting Sealing rings Hub support Spacer Internal conic roller bearing External conic roller bearing Axle shaft Central retaining screw
A: Cross section B: Functional diagram
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 13
Figure 8
A
B
276C062W008A For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
Braking assembly Description The braking group consists of a series of externally toothed disks (2) interlocking with a series of internally toothed disks (3). The externally toothed disks engage with the part of the hub fastened to the axle, whereas the internally toothed disks engage the part of the hub fastened to the wheel (4). The brakes are hydraulically operated by delivering pressurized oil to the command cylinder (10) through the connector (11). The piston is guided by the bushing (8) and returned by the springs (9). The piston and all connectors are contained in the braking group (13) fastened to the axle part of the hub by screws (12). The disks are immersed in a bath of oil for cooling: cooling oil circulation is assured through two connectors, delivery (7) and return (6). A special frontal o---ring (5, coupled with another fixed ring) prevents cooling oil leakage and protects against foreign matter.
327B-330B
Operation The driving pressure depends on the driverâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s pressure on the brake pedal. As a function to major or minor hydraulic pressure, the plates slip more easily or with more difficulty: in this way the wheel braking is more or less effective. When oil pressure is no longer applied to the piston, disengagement is guaranteed by the mechanical action of a series spring that acting on the piston in the opposite direction to the pressure of the oil. This leads to play between the disks and allows them to slip freely. Brake system fittings Figure 9
Operating brake unit (see figure on next page) 1. Brake housing 2. Externally toothed disks 3. Internally toothed disks 4. Hub 5. Frontal o---ring 6. Cooling oil return outlet 7. Cooling oil delivery input 8. Guide bushing 9. Return spring 10. Command piston 11. Connector 12. Brake closing screw 13. Braking group 276C062W009
1 2 3 4 5 6
Coolant input Brake control input Brake control air bleeder Coolant output Inspection cap Coolant drain
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 15
Operating brake unit Figure 10
292A062W001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 17
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA Hub KESSLER D 81
Code Type
Rigid with double reduction
Central differential
Limited skid â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Gleason crown wheel and pinion
Transmission input shaft bearing
2 X---mounted conic roller bearings
Pinion bearings
2 O---mounted conic roller bearings
Differential bearings
2 X---mounted conic roller bearings
Transmission intermediate shaft bearings Hub bearings
2 straight roller bearings 2 O---mounted conic roller bearings for each side
Hub planet ---wheel bearings Reduction ratio
3 x 4 needle cages for each side
bevel gear set
1 : 3.50
wheel reducer
1 : 6.00
total
1 : 21.00
Pinion bearings pre-load Differential bearings pre-load Crown wheel and pinion clearance
see value engraved on the crown wheel
Self---blocking discs axial clearance
0.48 mm (0.019 in) minimum
Transmission input shaft conic bearings pre---load Transmission intermediate shaft axial clearance Reduction gear uprightâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;axle shaft axial clearance
0.30 --- 0.70 mm (0.012 --- 0.028 in)
Hub bearing preload
determined by the ring nut tightening torque 1st
Ring nut tightening torque Brake type
tightening: 700---900 Nm (516.29---663.80 lb ft) then loosen 2nd tightening: 450 Nm (331.90 lb ft) Multiple discs in oil wet
Control
Hydraulic
Discs per group Brake control piston axial travel
fixed
4
rotating
4 2.5 + 0.7 / --- 0.1 mm (0.1 + 0.027 / --- 0.003 in) under pressure
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Splitter unit and bevel gear pair (first reduction) Figure 11
314A061W010R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 19
Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) Figure 12
276C062W012
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 13
314A061W006R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 21
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 14
276C062D014B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
EQUIPMENT 380002787
380002788
380002789
380002790
380002791
380002792
380002794
380002795
380002796
380002797
380002798
380002799
.
380002793
The tools listed below belong to a single axle equipment kit 380140049.
380002787 380002788 380002789 380002790 380002791 380002792 380002793 380002794 380002795 380002796 380002797 380002798 380002799
---------------------------
Spanner, Wheel Safety Nut Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Face Seal Installation Tool Disc Centering Tool Disc Centering Tool Seal Ring Sleeve Driver
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 23
DIAGNOSTICS Axle 1. Continuous noise 2. Cornering noise 3. Alternating noise 4. Sharp bangs during acceleration or deceleration 5. Oil leak from the axle shafts 6. Oil leak from the hubs
1
CONTINUOUS NOISE
Worn bearings.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Gears damaged or worn.
Replace them. YES
NO
Lack of lubrication.
Restore oil level. YES
NO
Incorrect adjustment of the clearances.
Adjust again YES
2
CORNERING NOISE
Worn planet ---wheels or crown wheels.
YES
Replace.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
3
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
ALTERNATING NOISE
Wheel bearings with excessive clearance.
YES
Adjust the bearings.
NO
Wheels mounted incorrectly.
Disassemble and remount correctly. YES
NO
Too little clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
NO
Too much clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
4
SHARP BANGS DURING ACCELERATION OR DECELERATION
Incorrect gear train adjustment.
YES
Adjust again.
NO
Pivot of the anchoring structure has too much play.
Replace the parts of the articulated joint. YES
NO
Loose fastening of the anchoring structure to the chassis.
YES
Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
5
SECTION 6.1
OIL LEAK FROM THE AXLE BREATHER
Internal lip seals worn. The coolant passes onto the axle.
6
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 25
SI
Replace the seals. Perform the seal test to identify the defective hub.
OIL LEAK FROM THE HUBS
Front seals worn. The coolant leaks from the hub.
YES
Replace the seals.
Brakes 1. Weak braking action 2. Unequal action of the brakes 3. Brakes that remain blocked
1
WEAK BRAKING ACTION
Worn brake discs.
YES
Overhaul the brakes.
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
2
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
UNEQUAL ACTION OF THE BRAKES
Worn brake discs.
YES
Replace.
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
3
BRAKES THAT REMAIN BLOCKED
Broken or ineffective return springs.
YES
Overhaul the brakes.
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
MAINTENANCE
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 27
Check transmission oil level Proceed as follows:
Axle oil level check Proceed as follows:
Figure 17
The level check can be carried out on the hubs or on the differential . If the level has to be restored, this is to be carried out on the differential. Figure 15
314A061W009R
D clean the plug area, then open the level plug (1): lubricant should flow out from the hole; D if necessary top up the level until there is an outflow from the plug; D close the plug. 276NM020T
D take the reference on a hub to horizontal position (see arrow); D clean the cap area and open the level cap (1). Lubricant should drip out of the hole; D close the filler cap. or Figure 16
292ANM004L
D clean the area of the cap, then open the cap (1): the lubricant must leak from the hole; D if necessary, restore the level until it overflows from the same cap; D close the cap; D check that the breather is perfectly clean and operational.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
Oil replacement The collection and disposal of lubricant oils and waste fluids is to be carried out in compliance with the standards in force.
327B-330B
Figure 19
To drain, proceed as follows: Figure 18
292ANM006L
276NM019T
D hubs: bring the hub location point to horizontal position (see arrow); D prepare a container of appropriate capacity, clean the plug area then remove the level plug (1) and the drainage plug (2) draining off the lubricant completely. D clean the plugs, check that the thread is in good condition, replace the seal ring and close the drainage plug; D repeat the procedure for the other hub;
D axle: prepare a container of appropriate capacity, clean the plug area then remove the filler plug (1); D remove the drainage plug (2) draining off the lubricant completely; Figure 20
314A061W007R
D transmission: prepare a container of appropriate capacity, clean the areas of the plugs then remove the filler plug (1); D remove the drainage plug (2) and drain off the lubricant completely; D clean the plugs, check that the thread is in good condition, replace the seal ring and close the drainage plug;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
To fill, proceed as follows:
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 29
Figure 23
Figure 21
314A061W009R 276NM019T
D fill with the specified lubricant until it outflows from the hub level plug hole (1); D replace the seal ring and close the plug; D repeat the procedure for the other hub;
D fill with the specified lubricant until it outflows from the transmission filler plug hole (1); The filling is to take place slowly. The operation terminates when the level at the hole does not lower for several minutes. D replace the seal ring and close the plug; D make a test run, then check the level again; D if necessary top up with the specified lubricant until it outflows from the hole, make another test run and check the level again.
Figure 22
292ANM006L
D fill with specified lubricant until it outflows from the axle filler plug hole (1); The filling is to take place slowly. The operation terminates when the level at the hole does not lower for several minutes. D replace the seal ring and close the plug;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
REMOVAL---REFIT Before starting any operation, make sure that all the precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved on the job have been made quite clear . Read the relevant instructions contained in SECTION 1 of this handbook. If in doubt ask someone who is more expert. Comply to all the general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance work. Removal Proceed as follows: D Bring the vehicle on a suitable flat, solid surface, switch off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the warning notices; D deactivate the battery isolator or disconnect the battery terminals to prevent any risk of a short circuit; D block articulation by means of the steering lock bar, proceeding as indicated in SECTION 1;
D raise the vehicle to detach the wheels from the ground, placed the two supporting stands under the front chassis without acting on the axle; D place an appropriate supporting hydraulic device under the axle (1) that permits lowering at the moment of separation, so that at this stage the axle remains in roughly horizontal position; D place an appropriate supporting hydraulic device under the fork (2) for support ; D remove both wheels operating as indicated in SECTION 9, D disconnect the axle bleeder tubes (not shown); Before removing the hydraulic tubes, prepare appropriate plugs to close the free ends. D disconnect the hydraulic tubes : --- service braking system (20); --- brakes cooling input/output system (21);
.
During these operations hydraulic fluid may flow out.
D remove the transmission shaft on input side (18) as indicated in SECTION 7; D remove the lower fastening bolts (3) from both sides and disconnect the limit switch cables; D remove the lower bolts(4) that fasten the cylinder lower rubber bush from both sides; D remove the bolts (5) that fasten the Panhard bar to the axle;
.
For the moment, fasten the bar to the chassis.
D remove the bolts (6) that fasten the fork to the axle; D cautiously lower the axle and withdraw from the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.1
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES 31
Figure 24
314A061W008R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
FRONT AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.1
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 6.2 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Inspection of the dismantled parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Tandem transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
First reduction: bevel gear pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Epicyclic reduction gear seals and thread---stops application and bearings scheme . 38
Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train . . . . . . . 12 Brake pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TANDEM TRANSMISSION AND DIFFERENTIAL OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inspection of the disassembled parts . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Brake disc and caliper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Splitter unit and bevel gear pair (first reduction) . . 16 Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) . . . . . . 17
Differential seals and thread---stops application and bearings scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Complete limited---skid differential assembly . . . . . 52
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Crown wheel and bearings assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Determination of the pinion axial position spacer (S1) thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Check of the pinion---crown wheel clearance . . . . 57
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Verification of the pinion---crown wheel engagement impression area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Replacement of the brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Breaking---in of the pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Changing the oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 INTERMEDIATE AXLE REMOVAL-- REFIT . . . . . 31 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Idle gear bearing preload determination . . . . . . . . . 59 Pinion bearing preload determination . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Idle gear and pinion assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Differential bearing preload determination . . . . . . . 63 Coutershaft assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 BRAKE CALIPER OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
BRAKE CALIPER DETACHMENT-REATTACHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Inspection of the disassembled parts . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Detachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Reattachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
BRAKE DISC OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
EPICYCLIC REDUCER OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 3
DESCRIPTION
The axle is a dual reduction bearing type. It consists of a boxed structure containing the cylindrical wheel transmission, the bevel gear pair with the differential (first reduction), the drive shafts and hubs with the epicyclic reducer (second reduction). The structure has mountings for connection to the chassis and housings for the bearings. Figure 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Rear suspension Hub with epicyclic gears Differential case Motion input flange Axle Upper stabilizer bar Service brake caliper Service brake disc
276C062D001
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Tandem transfer case The transfer case is composed of a pair of spur gears and an output shaft. The pair of gears (having ratio 1:1) transmit the motion to the differential pinion while the output shaft transmits the motion to the rear axle. The torque is always divided into equal parts between the two tandem axles. Figure 2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Input flange Input countershaft Output shaft to rear axle Transmission conic roller bearings Gear for motion transmission to pinion Pinion conic roller bearings Ball bearing Intermediate axle differential unit
276C062002A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
First reduction: bevel gear pair The first reduction is obtained by the pinion---ring bevel gear unit (bevel gear pair) inside the differential. The input shaft is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by spacer. The pinion shaft receives motion from a cylindrical wheel transmission with ratio 1:1. The pinion is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by spacer. The axial position of the pinion can also be adjusted by shims. The differential box with ring bevel gear is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in X arrangement with preload and axial position adjustable by two opposing ring nuts.
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 5
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.
Adjustment ring nut Internal conic roller bearing External conic roller bearing Motion input flange Transmission spur gear Double sealing ring Pinion spur gear Pinion external conic roller bearing Bevel pinion Pinion internal conic roller bearing Axle Differential semicase Output flange Sealing ring Ball bearing Shaft Crown wheel---side conic roller bearing Axle shaft Adjustment ring nut Differential case Crown wheel Planet ---wheel Planet wheel---side conic roller bearing Adjustment ring nut Planet wheel holding shaft Differential semicase Crown wheel
A: Cross section B: Functional diagram
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 3
A
276C062003A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 7
Figure 4
B
276C062004
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
The differential is a limited---skid differential, characterized by the positioning of a multiple---disc clutch between the differential case (upright) and the crown wheels (sun gears) for each side. The multiple---disc clutch includes external discs connected to the differential case and internal discs connected to the planetary gears. The thrust on the discs is ensured by the axial component of the force exchanged between the teeth of the planet ---wheels and crown wheels.
327B-330B
The axial thrust on the discs generates a resistant torque that acts on the crown wheel when the crown wheel tends to rotate with respect to the differential case due to the speed difference between the two wheels. This resistant torque depends, with equal axial thrust, on the dimensions and the coating material of the discs.
Figure 5
1. 2. 3.
Differential semicase Planetary gear Multiple---disc device for skid limitation
276C062005 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Operation The torque coming from drive shaft is transmitted through a cardan joint to the bevel pinion. From this, the torque passes to the ring bevel gear, which is integral with the differential case. The differential is a gear train in which the case represents the upright, that holds the planet ---wheel holding shafts and receives the torque, while the two crown wheels represent the sun gears, both rotary, that receive the torque and transmit it to the axle shafts. When both the wheels are subject to the same resistant torque or have the same speed (vehicle traveling along a straight path), the ring bevel gear and the differential case rotate as a block, transmitting the torque in equal parts to the two crown wheels, and from these to the two axle shafts that rotate at the same speed: the wheels transmit the same driving torque. Figure 6
276C062006
The right wheel with the same adherence as the left.
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 9
Under these conditions, there is no relative motion between the two crown wheels, and thus the planet ---wheels do not rotate around their shaft which is integral with the differential case. When the resistance of one wheel exceeds that of the other or when the speed of the two wheels is no longer equal (vehicle traveling a curved path) the planetary gears assume a different rotation speed: their relative motion is allowed by the presence of the planet ---wheels, which now rotate around their own shaft in opposite directions. Naturally, a slower rotation speed of the crown wheel corresponds to a greater driving torque transmitted, and vice versa. Thus when the differential operates the wheel that has a smaller speed, it is able to transmit a greater driving torque, while the one with the greater speed transmits a smaller torque. Under certain conditions it may occur that the slower wheel completely loses adhesion, since the torque that can be transmitted to the ground is exceeded, and thus it encounters practically zero resistance: in this case, a normal differential causes the free rotation of the wheel that skids and the stopping of the wheel that still adheres to the ground: the traction capacity of the axle becomes zero. To remedy this inconvenience, a limited---skid differential is used that is characterized by the possibility to generate a resistant torque on each crown wheel, which is no longer free to rotate with respect to the differential case, but is braked in proportion to the torque that the differential must transmit. This resistant torque, which depends on the thrust applied to the multiple---disc clutch, is always in a fixed ratio with the input torque, known as the â&#x20AC;?locking ratioâ&#x20AC;?. The locking ratio is the percentage of maximum difference between the torque transmittable to the wheel with greater adherence and that on the wheel with less adherence. For example, with a locking ratio of 45%, 72,5% of the driving torque is transferred to one rear axle shaft (rather than the normal 50%), while the other axle shaft receives only 27.5%: the difference is precisely 45% (with respect to a total of 100%).
RH: right side: torque supplied is 50% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 50% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
If the two wheels do not have the same adherence, the resistant torque generated by the multiple---disc clutches partially locks the crown wheel on the side having less adherence and increases the torque supplied by the crown wheel on the side with more adherence. In other words, the braking torque replaces the reaction torque missing from the side of the wheel with less adherence. In this manner, considering the previous case in which one wheel loses adherence, this wheel is not able to turn freely and thus the other wheel will still be able to transmit part of the driving torque, ensuring at least some traction capacity of the axle.
327B-330B
In practice, the multiple---disc clutches automatically compensate the adherence variations of the wheels from the left side and right side of the vehicle, without requiring any driver operation. It is thus possible to apply a much larger driving force when using the vehicle, and prevent skidding when one of the wheels encounters a surface lacking adherence.
Figure 7
276C062007
Left wheel with less adherence than the right wheel (example) RH: right side: torque supplied is 72.5% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 27.5% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 11
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train The second reduction is obtained by an epicyclic reducer with cylindrical wheels in the wheel hub. The hub is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by a ring nut. The planetary gear gears turn on pivoting roller bearings. Operation The torque from the differential is transmitted by a floating axle shaft to the sun gear by the grooved shank. The four planetaries gears rotate in the opposite direction to the sun gear, where as the crown wheel is integral to the hub support, and therefore does not rotate. This forces the train carrier to turn in the opposite direction to the planetaries gear, therefore in the same direction as the drive shaft.
327B-330B
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
Epicyclic train upright (planet ---wheel holding plate) Thrust spacer Planet ---wheel Epicyclic train fixed gear Planet ---wheel pin Guide bushing Adjustment ring nut Epicyclic train crown wheel Hub Wheel fastening column Brake caliper Brake disc Hub support Spacer ring Sealing ring Internal conic roller bearing External conic roller bearing Axle shaft Central retaining screw
A: Cross section B: Functional diagram
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 13
Figure 8
A
B
276C062D008A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Brake pad Figure 9
276C062D009
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Brake Pads Caliper Pin Bleeder fitting Brake control fitting Cover Cap Cap gasket Piston Sealant ring Piston gasket Dust cover
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 15
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA Hub Code Type
KESSLER R 81 (Hub) and ZF LK (front differential) Independent, with double reduction
Central differential
With limited slip Integrated in automatic transmission box
Pinion bearings
2 taper rollers mounted in O arrangement
Differential bearings
2 taper rollers mounted in X arrangement
Hub bearings
2 taper rollers mounted in X arrangement
Hub planet bearings
3 x 4 Pivoting barrel rollers
Reduction ratio
bevel gear pair
1 : 3.50
wheel reducer
1 : 6.00
total
1 : 21.00
Autom. pinion transm. output shaft axial clearance Pinion bearings preload Differential bearings preload
0.30 --- 0.50 mm (0.012 --- 0.020 in) 3.5 --- 4.5 Nm (2.60 --- 3.30 ft lb (without seal rings) 3.0 --- 4.0 Nm (2.20 --- 2.90 ft lb)
Bevel gear pair clearance
0.20 --- 0.30 mm (0.008 --- 0.012 in)
Self---locking disks axial clearance
0.20 --- 0.80 mm (0.008 --- 0.032 in)
Drive axle---reduction carrier axial clearance
0.30 --- 0.70 mm (0.012 --- 0.028 in) 8.00 --- 14.00 Nm (5.9 --- 10.3 ft (without seal rings))
Hub bearings Hub bearing preload
determined by the ring nut tightening torque
Ring nut tightening torque
1st tightening: 700---900 Nm (516.29---663.80 lb ft) then loosen 2nd tightening: 450 Nm (331.90 lbft)
Brake disc and caliper CARLISLE M -- 4
Caliper Type
Fixed
N. calipers per wheel
2
N. cylinders per caliper Brake pad thickness
2x2 New
17 mm (0.67 in)
Wear limit
3 Âą 0.5 mm (0.118 Âą 0.02 in)
Disc
Fixed
Outer diameter
476 mm (18.74 in)
Inner diameter
250 mm (9.84 in)
Thickness
New
19 mm (0.748 in)
Wear limit
17 mm (0.67 in)
Max roughness
1 mm (0.039 in)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Splitter unit and bevel gear pair (first reduction) Figure 10
276C062011A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 17
Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) Figure 11
276C062D012B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 12
276C062D013
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 19
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 13
276C062D014A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 14
276C062D014B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 21
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 15
276C063D015
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
TOOLS 380002787
380002788
380002789
380002790
380002791
380002792
380002794
380002795
380002796
380002797
380002798
380002799
.
380002793
The tools listed below belong to a single axle equipment kit 380140049.
380002787 380002788 380002789 380002790 380002791 380002792 380002793 380002794 380002795 380002796 380002797 380002798 380002799
---------------------------
Spanner, Wheel Safety Nut Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Face Seal Installation Tool Disc Centering Tool Disc Centering Tool Seal Ring Sleeve Driver
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 23
DIAGNOSTICS Axle 1. Continuous noise 2. Cornering noise 3. Alternating noise 4. Sharp bangs during acceleration or deceleration 5. Oil leak from the axle shafts 6. Oil leak from the hubs
1
CONTINUOUS NOISE
Worn bearings.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Gears damaged or worn.
Replace them. YES
NO
Lack of lubrication.
Restore oil level. YES
NO
Incorrect adjustment of the clearances.
Adjust again YES
2
CORNERING NOISE
Worn planet ---wheels or crown wheels.
YES
Replace.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
3
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
ALTERNATING NOISE
Wheel bearings with excessive clearance.
YES
Adjust the bearings.
NO
Wheels mounted incorrectly.
Disassemble and remount correctly. YES
NO
Too little clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
NO
Too much clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
4
SHARP BANGS DURING ACCELERATION OR DECELERATION
Incorrect gear train adjustment.
YES
Adjust again.
NO
Pivot of the anchoring structure has too much play.
Replace the parts of the articulated joint. YES
NO
Loose fastening of the anchoring structure to the chassis.
YES
Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
5
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 25
OIL LEAK FROM THE AXLE SHAFTS
Worn oil seals.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Loose screws. YES
Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
Brakes 1. Weak braking action 2. Unequal action of the brakes 3. Brakes that remain blocked
1
WEAK BRAKING ACTION
Worn pads.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Brake discs dirty with lubricant.
Clean the discs and replace the pads. YES
NO
Worn brake discs.
Replace them. YES
NO
Defective hydraulic system
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
UNEQUAL ACTION OF THE BRAKES
Pads and/or discs dirty with lubricant.
YES
Clean the discs and replace the pads.
NO
Non---approved/different pads on the two sides.
Replace with approved pads. YES
NO
Worn brake discs.
Replace them YES
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
3
BRAKES THAT REMAIN BLOCKED
Foreign bodies between the discs.
YES
Overhaul the brakes.
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 27
MAINTENANCE The braking system components are fundamental for the safe use of the vehicle. All inspection and replacement operations must be performed following the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s maintenance schedule and procedures. All the maintenance operations must be performed by specialized personnel which has been suitably trained and equipped with the proper tools. Replacements must be made with original spare parts or parts satisfying the same specifications. The pads (friction material) that have burns, localized wear or cracks absolutely must be replaced. Do not use different brands of pads on the same axle. If topping up is necessary, the same fluid as that contained in the tank must be used.
Figure 17
Replacement of the brake pads Proceed as follows: D detach the caliper following the instructions in the relative chapter; Figure 16
276C061D060
D unscrew both the retaining screws (1) and partially slip off both the upper centering pins (2) so as to free the eyelets of the pads (3); D remove both the pads by slipping them off the upper part of the caliper (arrow);
274A061010
D connect a tube to the bleeding valve (arrow) and arrange a suitable container to collect the fluid that leaks out; D place two soft slats between the pistons, then forcefully spread the pads apart using a lever or large screwdriver and at the same time open the bleeding valve until the cylinders return as far as possible into their seats ; D close the bleeding valve and disconnect the tube;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2 Remove the dirt using a NON ---metallic brush and a vacuum cleaner. Visually examine the dust covers, and check that there is no seeping of hydraulic fluid. If irregularities are found, proceed to the brake caliper overhaul. Figure 18
327B-330B
D proceed to the reattachment of the caliper following the directions in the relative chapter. Breaking -- in of the pads During this procedure there may be an emission of unpleasant vapors and odors originating from the friction material of the pads. After replacement of the brake pads, they must be broken---in by traveling about 500 km (310,75 miles). During the breaking---in period the vehicle must be used with caution, avoiding intensive use of the brakes such as panic stopping. During the breaking---in period it is good practice to check the temperature of the brake discs: this temperature must not exceed 200 ° C (392 ° F). Determine the temperature of the disc by stopping the vehicle and placing a pyrometer in contact with the disc.
276C062D016
D mount the new pads by inserting them from the upper part of the caliper (arrow), sliding them on the disc surface and fitting them on the lower centering pins (arrow); Figure 19
276C061D061
D insert the centering pins (2) into the relative seats and block them with the relative retaining screws (1);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Checking oil level Proceed as follows:
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 29
Changing the oil
The level check can be carried out on the hubs or on the differential . If the level has to be restored, this is to be carried out on the differential.
Collect and dispose of used lubricants and fluids, according to the laws in force Proceed as follows to drain the system: Figure 22
Figure 20
276NM019T
276NM020T
D take the reference on a hub to horizontal position (see arrow); D clean the cap area and open the level cap (1). Lubricant should drip out of the hole; D close the filler cap. or Figure 21
D take the reference on the hub to horizontal position (see arrow); D arrange a suitably sized container, clean the cap area and remove the cap (1) and the drain cap (2); drain all the lubricant; D clean the cap, check that the threading is in good condition, replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the drain cap; D repeat the procedure for the other hub; D arrange a suitably sized container, clean the cap area and remove the cap (1) and the drain cap (2); drain all the lubricant.
276NM021T
D clean the area of the cap, then open the cap (1): the lubricant must leak from the hole; D if necessary, restore the level until it overflows from the same cap; D close the cap; D check that the breather is perfectly clean and operational.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
To fill the oil, proceed as follows:
Figure 23
Figure 25
276NM021T
D arrange a suitably---sized container under the drain cap, clean the cap areas and then remove the filling cap (1);
276NM020T
D pour in approx 3 litres of the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the cap hole (1); D replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the cap; D repeat the procedure for the other hub.
Figure 24
Figure 26
276NM021T
276NM023T
D remove the drain cap (1) and completely drain the lubricant; D clean the caps, check that the threading is in good condition, replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the drain cap.
D refill with the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the hole of the filling cap (1); Fill up slowly. The operation is finished when the level at the hole does not lower for a few minutes. D replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the cap; D perform a test drive and then recheck the level (1); D if necessary, top up with the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the hole, repeat the test drive and recheck the level.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 31
INTERMEDIATE AXLE REMOVAL---REFIT Before starting any operation, make sure that all the precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved on the job have been made quite clear . Read the relevant instructions contained in SECTION 1 of this handbook. If in doubt ask someone who is more expert. Comply to all the general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance work. Removal Proceed as follows: D Bring the vehicle on a suitable flat, solid surface, switch off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the warning notices; D deactivate the battery isolator or disconnect the battery terminals to prevent any risk of a short circuit; D block articulation by means of the steering lock bar, proceeding as indicated in SECTION 1;
D raise the vehicle until the wheels are off the ground, then position two support trestles under the rear chassis, without acting on the axles; D position a suitable hydraulic support device under the intermediate axle and under the rear axle in order that, when lowering the axles after detachment, the two axles remain in a horizontal position during this phase; D remove both the wheels following the directions in SECTION 9; D disconnect the axle breather pipe (4); Before detaching the hydraulic pipelines, prepare suitable plugs to close the free ends. D disconnect the hydraulic pipelines: --- service braking system (20);
.
Hydraulic oil leakage may occur during these operations.
D disconnect the drive shaft on the input side (18) and output side (19) following the instructions in SECTION 7; D working on both sides of each rocker arm, remove the split pin and unscrew the locking nut (8) of the rocker arm pin; D remove the bolts (10) that fasten the tie---rod to the bracket; D slip the pin (9) off the rocker arm, recovering the washers (6) and the guide bushings (7), disengaging the rocker arm from the axle; D carefully lower the axle and slip it off the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 27
276C062D027
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
BRAKE CALIPER DETACHMENT --REATTACHMENT
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 33
Figure 29
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experience person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Detachment Do as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D disconnect the battery---disconnect switch or disconnect the battery terminals in order to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, operating as indicated in SECTION 1; D block the rear wheels appropriately; D use a hydraulic lift to raise the chassis until the rear wheels are off the ground; D disassemble the wheel concerned; Figure 28
276C062D029
D disconnect the braking system hydraulic connector (4) and plug it to prevent fluid leaks;
.
Hydraulic oil leakage may occur during these operations.
D support the caliper (2) appropriately, unscrew the retaining screws (3) of the support bracket and remove the caliper complete with the bake pads. Reattachment Proceed to the reattachment by following the detachment steps in the reverse order. After reassembled, perform a bleeding of the brake hydraulic circuit following the instructions in SECTION 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
276C062D028
D insert appropriate support trestles under the axle, then lower the chassis, resting the axle on the indicated points (arrow) and remove the lift;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
EPICYCLIC REDUCER OVERHAUL
327B-330B
Figure 31
Before starting any operation, make sure that all the precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved on the job have been made quite clear. Read the relevant instructions contained in SECTION 1 of this handbook. If in doubt ask someone who is more expert. Comply to all the general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance work.
.
.
Before proceeding, it is necessary to: D drain the lubricant from the wheel hub D drain the lubricant from the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter. Before proceeding, the brake caliper must be removed following the instructions in the relative chapter.
276C062D031
D unscrew the central retaining screw (1) and remove the fixed gear (2) and guide bushing (3) complete with spacer ring (4); D slip off the axle shaft (5) if necessary; Figure 32
Disassembly Proceed as follows: Figure 30
276C062D030
D mark the mutual position of the planet ---wheel holding plate and the hub; D loosen and remove all the retaining screws (1); D remove the planet ---wheel holding plate assembly (2) and O---ring (3) and recover the thrust spacer ring (4);
276C062032
D unscrew the setscrew (1) of the ring nut; D remove the locking ring nut (2) of the internally toothed crown wheel. The ring nut is locked with thread ---stops. To prevent damage to the threading, heat to approximately 120° C (248 ° F) before unscrewing.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
D using a suitable lifting device, carefully remove the complete hub from the hub support; D place the hub vertically;
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 35
Figure 35
Figure 33
276C062D036
276C062D033
D Unscrew the retain screws (1) and remove the brake disc (2); D if necessary remove thewheel fastening screws from the hub; Figure 36
D use a suitable extractor to remove the internally toothed crown wheel (1); Figure 34
276C062035B
276C062D034
D remove the retaining screws (1) and relative stop plates (2); D separate the internally toothed crown wheel (3) from the relative flange (4); D using a suitable extractor, remove the inner race (5) of the wheel---side bearing (B) from the crown wheel flange;
D Remove the oil seal ring (1); D with an appropriate puller remove the outer ring (2) of the bearing on the axle side (A) and the outer ring (3) of the bearing on the wheel side (B);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2 Figure 37
327B-330B
Figure 39
276C062D038 276C062D037
D remove the screws (1) fastening the brake unit (2) to the hub;
D remove the planet wheel (1) and relative shim rings (2); Figure 40
The spacer ring is blocked with sealant. To avoid damaging it, before removing, heat to approx. 120 ° C (248 ° F). Figure 38
274A062039
D remove the needle cages (arrow) from the planet --wheel; D repeat the procedure for all the planet ---wheels.
274A062029
D place the planet ---wheel holding plate on a suitable work surface; D use a punch to push the retaining pin (1) down in the pivot, freeing the pivot (2); D extract the pivot (2) by pushing it towards the inside of the planet ---wheel holding plate (arrow); D remove the O---ring (3); D extract the pin from the pivot. Do not push the pivot towards the outside of the planet---wheel holding plate, otherwise its seat may be damaged due to the difference between the internal and external diameter of the pivot.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 37
Inspection of the dismantled parts Wheel hub D check the seats of the bearings: they must not have any deformations and/or ovalling; D check the condition of the bearings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Axle shafts D check the condition of the axle shafts: replace them if they have deformations on the end grooves and/or on the entire length. Final reductions D check the condition of the gear toothing: replace them if they have pitting, cracks and/or cavities; D verify the good operation of the planet ---wheels and the roller bushings; D check the threading for the bearing locking ring nut: it must not have any dents, deformations and/or jams. Reassembly During reassembly, consider the following general observations: D heat, to 100° C (212 ° F) in the oven, the bearings and rings to be mounted by pushing; D carefully center and mount the sealing rings and bearings with a suitable adjuster; D lubricate the ring nuts and bearings.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Epicyclic reduction gear seals and thread-- stops application and bearings scheme Figure 41
276C062D044B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Planet ---wheel holding plate assembly
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 39
Figure 43
Proceed as follows: D position the planet ---wheel holding plate horizontally; Figure 42
276C062D052
274A062032
D mount the needle cages inside the planet gear;
D mount the planet ---wheel (1) complete with shim rings in the seat on the planet ---wheel holding plate; Figure 44
274A062035
D insert the O---ring (1) in the seat of the planet ---wheel holding plate; D insert the pivot (2) of the planet ---wheel holding gear so that the pin holes match up; D or according to the versions; D insert the pivot (2) of the planet ---wheel holding gear up to the complete expulsion of the internal retention bush so that the pin holes match up; Mount the pivot from the internal part of the planet---wheel holding plate, otherwise its seat may be damaged due to the pivot diameter difference. D mount the catch pin (3); D repeat the procedure for all the planet ---wheels.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
Hub assembly
327B-330B
D Fit the metal ring (1) in the seat on the hub; D with an appropriate inserter, fit the seal ring (2) into the seat, flush with the external edge of the hub, paying attention to the orientation (detail);
Proceed as follows: Figure 45
Figure 47
276C061D053
D place the hub vertically; D using a suitable introducer, mount the outer race (1) of the wheel-side conic roller bearing (B) and the outer race (2) of the axle-side conic roller bearing (A); D mount the inner race (3) of the axle---side conic roller bearing (A);
276C062D055
D mount the brake disc (1) on the hub; D mount retain screw (2) and tighten.
Figure 46
276C062054B For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 41
Figure 48
276C062D066
D heat the spacer ring (1) and insert it completely on the axle axis; D using a suitable lifting device, support the hub assembly in order to ensure its correct centering; D introduce the hub assembly (2) on the end of the hub support (3), placing the inner race of the axle--side conic roller bearing (A) so that it rests against the spacer ring; During this operation, keep the hub parallel to the axle axis. Work with caution to avoid damaging the sealing rings and the brake disc teeth. Continue to support the hub assembly until it is completely mounted. D if removed, mount the stud bolts fastening the wheel to the hub.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Hub bearing preload determination
Figure 49
Proceed as follows: Figure 51
276C062W067
D heat the inner race (1) of the wheel---side conic roller bearing (B) and insert it until it rests against the gear wheel flange; D insert the gear wheel flange (2) onto the gear wheel with internal toothing (3); D mount the retention plates (4) and fix them with the setscrews; Figure 50
276C062069
D apply MOLYKOTE lubricant on the hub support threading and on the threading and contact area of the locking ring nut; D hand mount the ring nut (1) without tightening; D tighten the locking ring nut to the prescribed tightening torque: Locking ring nut tightening torque for bearings Phase 1: 700-- 900 Nm (516-- 664 lb ft) During the locking, rotate the hub back and forth by striking it with a plastic hammer to settle the bearings. D unscrew the locking ring nut half a turn; D tighten the locking ring nut to the prescribed tightening torque: Locking ring nut tightening torque for bearings Phase 2: 450 Nm (332 lb ft)
276C062W068
D mount the flange and internally toothed gear wheel assembly (1) onto the hub until the two parts meet the wheel---side conic roller bearing (B). The lubrication oil passage hole on the toothed wheel flange is to face downwards.
During the locking, rotate the hub back and forth by striking it with a plastic hammer to settle the bearings. D after having adjusted the bearing preload, block the locking ring nut with the relative setscrew (2); If this is not possible, unscrew the ring nut as much as needed in order to mount the clamp screw.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 43
Planet ---wheel holding plate --- fixed gear axial clearance determination
Figure 52
Proceed as follows: Figure 53
276C062D070
D insert the axle shafts (1) into the axle; D mount the spacer ring (2), guide bushing (3) and fixed gear (4); D mount the central retaining screw (5) and tighten it. 274A062043
D determine the dimension A; D determine the dimension B; D determine the thickness of the thrust spacer as follows: S = A -- B +(0.30 to 0.70 mm) (0.011 to 0.027 in) where: A = distance between the planet ---wheel holding plate mounting surface and the seat of the thrust spacer on the same plate B = distance between the hub mounting surface and the thrust spacer seat on the fixed gear S = thrust spacer thickness 0.30 รท 0.70 = prescribed clearance in mm D mount the chosen thrust spacer onto the planet --wheel holding plate.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
44
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Concluding operations Figure 54
276C062D073
D mount the O---ring (1) in the seat of the planet ---wheel holding plate; D mount the planet ---wheel holding plate assembly (2) in the hub. Respect the reference marks made during disassembly. D mount the retaining screws (3) and tighten to the prescribed torque.
.
If no intervention on the differential is planned, proceed to: D the filling of the wheel hub; D the filling of the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 45
TANDEM TRANSMISSION AND DIFFERENTIAL OVERHAUL Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Disassembly
.
Before proceeding, the axle shafts must be removed following the instructions in the relative chapter.
Proceed as follows: Figure 55
276C062D080
D straighten the dent and remove the motion input flange stop nut (1); D using a suitable extractor, remove the flange (2); D straighten the dent and remove the motion output flange stop nut (3); D using a suitable extractor, remove the flange (4); D mark the relative position between box and axle;
D loosen and remove the screws (3) fastening the external box to the axle; D using a suitable lifting device, remove the external box assembly from the axle; D position the assembly on the support trestle, adapting as necessary.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
46
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Differential disassembly Proceed as follows:
Figure 56
Figure 58
276C062081
D unscrew the retaining screws and remove the locking plate (1) of both the bearing preload adjustment ring nuts; D loosen both the bearing preload adjustment ring nuts (2); D mark each support cap and the corresponding external box location; D loosen the retaining screws (3) and remove both the support caps (4); D remove both the adjustment ring nuts; Figure 57
274A062048
D remove the outer race (1) of the crown wheel---side bearing (C) and the outer race (2) of the planet wheel---side bearing (D); D use appropriate extractors to extract the inner race (3) of the crown wheel---side bearing (C) and the inner race of the planet wheel---side bearing (D) from the differential semicases; D mark both the differential semicases; D loosen the retaining screws and remove the differential semicase; Figure 59
274A062047
D using a suitable lifting device, extract the differential assembly (1) from the relative case.
274A062049
D disassemble the planet ---wheel group into the different components; D remove the discs of the skid limitation device and the relative shoulder rings; D if necessary, separate the ring bevel gear from the differential semicase by unscrewing the retaining screws.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Idle gear and pinion disassembly Proceed as follows:
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 47
Figure 62
Figure 60
276C062084 276C062082
D position the assembly horizontally; D remove the cover (1); D straighten the dent and remove the pinion stop nut (2).
D remove the idle gear (1) from the pinion box; D remove the stop plate (2), adjustment ring nut (3) and the outer race (4) of bearing (E); Figure 63
Figure 61
276C062085
276C062083
D unscrew the retaining screws and separate the pinion box (1) from the external box (2); D recover the inner races of bearing (B) and bearing (F) from the external box.
D remove the bearing preload spacer S2 (1), spacer (2) and coaxial gear (3) from the pinion; D remove the pinion (4); D use a suitable extractor to remove the outer race of bearing (B) from the pinion box.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
48
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 64
274A062086
D remove the outer race (1) of bearing (A) and the pinion position spacer S1 (2) from the external box; D remove the sealing ring (3) from the external box; D remove the elastic ring (4) and outer race (5) of bearing (F). Figure 65
276C062087
D using a suitable extractor, remove the inner race (1) of bearing (E) from the gear Figure 66
274A062055
D using a suitable extractor (1), remove the inner race (2) of bearing (A).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 49
Coutershaft disassembly Proceed as follows: Figure 67
276C062D088
D loosen the retaining screws and remove the countershaft cover (1) complete with countershaft; D using a suitable extractor, remove the countershaft (2) complete with ball bearing; D remove the elastic ring (3) and spacer ring (4); D use a press and pad to separate the countershaft (2) from the bearing (5); D remove the sealing ring (6) from the cover.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
50
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
Inspection of the disassembled parts Bearings D check the condition of the bearings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Crown wheels D check the condition of the toothing: replace it if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities. Planet ---gears D check the condition of the toothing: replace it if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities; D check the coupling surfaces with the pins. Damage to a single element entails the replacement of the entire gear unit.
327B-330B
Reassembly During reassembly consider the following general observations: D heat, to 100° C (212 ° F) in the oven, the bearings and rings to be mounted by pushing; D carefully center and mount the sealing rings and bearings with a suitable adjuster; D lubricate the bushes, sealing rings and bearings. Perform all the indicated measurements with maximum precision. Imprecise measurements lead to bad contact of the bevel gear and thus make it necessary to repeat the procedure.
Cross pins D check the coupling surfaces with the planet ---gears. Shoulder rings D check the condition of the rings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Bevel gear D check that the toothing of the crown wheel and the pinion show uniform wear on the entire working zone of the teeth: replace the bevel gear if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities; An anomalous wear may indicate an incorrect adjustment of the bearings: check their integrity before proceeding to the reassembly. Damage to a single element entails the replacement of the entire gear unit. D check the bearing seats: they must not have deformations or ovalling. Bushes D check the threading for the bearing locking bush: it must not have dents, deformations and/or jams. External box D check the bearing seats: they must not have deformations or ovalling; D check that the sealing surfaces and the threadings are integral and free of dents or damage. Idle gears D check the condition of the toothing: replace them if they have pitting, cracks and/or cavities.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 51
Differential seals and thread-- stops application and bearings scheme Figure 68
276C062090A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
52
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Complete limited-- skid differential assembly Proceed as follows:
.
Refer to the following figure.
D check the following measurements: SP1 = 3.10 mm (0.1220 in) minimum; SP2 = 2.15 mm (0.0846 in) minimum. D otherwise, use shoulder discs with a greater thickness; D mount the shoulder ring (2) and elastic ring (3); D position the shoulder disc (SP1) (4); D alternately mount an externally grooved disc (driven plate) and an internally grooved disc (driving plate) until all discs (5) have been mounted; The last disc is a driving plate.
mount the shoulder disc (SP2) (6); mount the elastic ring (7); mount the planetary gear; repeat the assembly for the other semicase; when finished, check that dimension A falls within the prescribed values; 52.8 mm (2.0787 in) < A < 53.27 mm (2.0972 in) D when finished, check that dimension B falls within the prescribed values; B < 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) D otherwise, use shoulder discs with a greater thickness or reduce the thickness by grinding; D assemble the shafts and planet ---wheel gears and mount the assembly on the crown wheel; D join the two semicases and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed torque. D D D D D
The two semicases are symmetric except for the crown wheel assembly flange. The total height of the crown wheel---side disc pack must be identical to that on the opposite side.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 53
Differential semicase Shoulder ring Elastic ring Semicase shoulder disc SP1 Driven (N.4) and driving (N.4) discs Crown wheel shoulder disc SP2 Elastic ring Crown wheel --- planet ---wheel group
Dimension A: disc pack thickness Dimension B: Shoulder ring --- crown wheel clearance Figure 69
276C062091 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
54
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Crown wheel and bearings assembly Figure 70
274A062060
Proceed as follows: D check that the area of contact between the gear (1) and differential semicase (2) is clean and free of grease; D mount the crown wheel on the semicase and tighten the fastening bolts (3) to the prescribed torque; Figure 71
274A062062
D heat the inner race (1) of the planet wheel---side conic roller bearing (D) and mount it against the differential semicase; D heat the inner race (2) of the crown wheel---side conic roller bearing (C) and mount it against the differential semicase.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 55
Determination of the pinion axial position spacer (S1) thickness Figure 72
276C062092
Proceed as follows: D determine the thickness beff of the internal conic roller bearing (A); D calculate the difference d between the effective thickness and the theoretical thickness bteor = 40.0 mm of the internal conic roller bearing (A); d = beff -- bteor (mm) D measure the dimension a; D determine the effective thickness of the pinion position spacer (S1) as follows: S1eff = S1teor -- (d + a) (mm) where: S1teor = theoretical thickness of the pinion position spacer (S1) = 3 mm effective thickness of the pinion position S1eff = spacer (S1) d= difference between the effective and theoretical thickness of the internal conic roller bearing (A) calculated previously a= value stamped on the pinion head Example 1: beff = 39.95 mm difference d = 39.95 --- 40.00 = --- 0.05 mm a = + 0.10 thickness S1eff = 3 --- ( --- 0.05 + 0.10) = 2.95 mm Example 2: beff = 40.05 mm difference d = 40.05 --- 40.00 = --- 0.05 mm a = --- 0.10 thickness S1eff = 3 --- (0.05 --- 0.10) = 3.05 mm For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
56
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 73
276C062093
D heat the inner race of bearing (A) and mount it on the pinion; Figure 74
4
1 2
6
3
5
276C062094
D position the chosen pinion position spacer (S1) (1) in its seat; D mount the outer race (2) of bearing (A) until it rests against spacer S1; D insert the pinion (3) into the external box; D mount the pinion box on the external box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque;
D mount the outer race (4) of bearing (B) until it rests against the box; D mount the inner race (5) of bearing (B) on the pinion; D apply MOLYKOTE on the pinion threading and on the threading and contact area of the stop nut; D mount the stop nut (6) and tighten it until there is no play in the bearings.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Check of the pinion-- crown wheel clearance Proceed as follows: Figure 75
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 57
D apply MOLYKOTE on the threading of the adjustment ring nuts; D screw on both the ring nuts by hand until there is no play in the bearings; Figure 77
17312101
D position the conic roller bearing outer races on both ends of the differential; D using a suitable lifting device, mount the crown wheel assembly in the differential case; 17312104
Figure 76
D mount a dial gauge at a right angle with respect to the external diameter of the crown wheelâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s toothed side and turn the crown wheel back and forth, being careful not to move the pinion; D check that the clearance between the crown wheel and pinion falls within the prescribed values: pinion-- crown wheel clearance see value engraved on the crown wheel D otherwise, adjust the clearance using the adjustment ring nuts; D the clearance can be adjusted by unscrewing one adjustment ring nut by a certain number of notches and screwing on the opposite adjustment ring nut by the same number of notches; 17312102
D align the reference marks and mount the bearing support caps; D mount the cap retaining screws and tighten to the prescribed tightening torque;
Figure 78
17312105
D In particular: --- unscrew the ring nut (D) and screw on the ring nut (C) to reduce the clearance (white arrow); --- unscrew the ring nut (C) and screw on the ring nut (D) to increase the clearance (black arrow). For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
58
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Verification of the pinion-- crown wheel engagement impression area Proceed as follows: Figure 79
17312106
D cover a dozen teeth of the crown wheel with Prussian blue, lubricated with minium, or another paint or dye that can be easily removed; D make a complete rotation of the crown wheel by hand; D when the teeth engage, the paint is removed by the contact of the teeth, leaving zones exposed with the exact dimension, shape and location of contact; Figure 80
274A062063
Contact area position and shape 1. correct bevel gear position; 2. position with the pinion too far back: it is necessary to reduce the distance between the pinion and the crown wheel axis by using a spacer S1 of greater thickness; then adjust the clearance by moving the crown wheel further from the pinion; 3. position with the pinion too far forward: it is necessary to increase the distance between the pinion and the crown wheel axis by using a spacer S1 of smaller thickness; then adjust the clearance by moving the crown wheel closer to the pinion;
D to replace the spacer S1, remove the retaining screws (1) and slip off the complete pinion box; D position the new spacer S1, then reassemble the pinion box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque. When finished, remove the differential, pinion and pinion box.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Idle gear bearing preload determination Proceed as follows:
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 59
Figure 83
1
Figure 81
2 276C062097 276C062095
D heat the inner race (1) of bearing (E) and mount it on the idle gear; Figure 82
D mount the bearing (E) outer race (1); D apply MOLYKOTE on the threading of the adjustment ring nut; D mount the adjustment ring nut (2) without tightening.
276C062096
D mount the bearing (F) elastic stop ring (1); D mount the complete bearing (F) (2) until it rests against the elastic ring; D insert the idle gear (3) into the external box; D mount the pinion box on the external box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2 Figure 84
327B-330B
Figure 85
276C062099 276C062098A
D mount the flange (1), inserting it inside bearing (F); D apply MOLYKOTE on the gear threading and on the threading and contact area of the stop nut; Use a new stop nut. D mount the stop nut (2) and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
D tighten the adjustment ring nut (1) until obtaining the prescribed value for the bearing rolling torque. Rolling torque for gear bearings 1.0 Nm (0.737 lb ft) D unscrew the ring nut by two notches; D fix the locking plate (2) of the ring nut by screwing on the clamp screw. When finished, remove the external box, then remove the idle gear by unscrewing the stop nut.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 61
Pinion bearing preload determination Proceed as follows: Figure 86
5
2
6
1
4 3
276C062100
D insert the pinion (1), complete with inner race of the conic roller bearing (A), into the external box; D mount the coaxial gear (2), spacer (3) and spacer S2 (4), which were removed during disassembly, onto the pinion; D mount the pinion box on the external box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque; D mount the inner race (5) of conic roller bearing (B) on the pinion; D apply MOLYKOTE on the pinion threading and on the threading and contact area of the stop nut; Use a new stop nut.
D mount the stop nut (6) and tighten it to the prescribed torque; Block the coaxial gear during this operation. D use a suitable tool to check that the rolling torque falls within the prescribed values: Rolling torque for pinion bearings 1.5-- 1.8 Nm (1.106-- 1.327 lb ft) D otherwise correct the rolling resistance by using a spacer S2 with a different thickness; D In particular: --- increase the thickness to reduce the torque; --- reduce the thickness to increase the torque. When finished, unscrew the stop nut and remove the external box.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
62
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
Idle gear and pinion assembly Proceed as follows: D insert the idle gear into the external box; D mount the pinion box on the external box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque;
327B-330B
Figure 89
1 2
Figure 87
276C062102
D mount the inner race (1) of bearing (B); D mount the pinion stop nut (2) and tighten it to the prescribed torque; Figure 90
276C062101A
D use a suitable tool to insert the sealing ring (1) in the seat and fill it completely with lubricating grease for bearings; D mount the flange (2), inserting it inside bearing (F); D mount the idle gear stop nut (3) and tighten it to the prescribed torque; Figure 88
274A062066
D dent the nut as described in the figure; If this is not possible, unscrew the nut as much as necessary to dent it. D mount the cover and screw on the retaining screws.
274A062066
D dent the nut as described in the figure. If this is not possible, unscrew the nut as much as necessary to dent it.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Differential bearing preload determination Proceed as follows:
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 63
Figure 92
Figure 91
274A062064
17312102
D align the reference marks and mount the bearing support caps; D mount the cap retaining screws and tighten to the prescribed tightening torque; D screw on both the ring nuts by hand until there is no play in the bearings; D as described previously, check that the clearance between the crown wheel and pinion falls within the prescribed values: pinion-- crown wheel clearance see value engraved on the crown wheel D otherwise, adjust the clearance using the adjustment ring nuts; D use a suitable tool to check that the rolling torque falls within the prescribed values: Rolling torque for crown wheel and pinion bearings 5,0รท5,5 Nm (3.687-- 4.056 lb ft) (including pinion and transmission) D the rolling torque can be corrected by turning both the adjustment ring nuts by the same number of notches; D in particular: --- unscrew the ring nuts to decrease the torque; --- screw on the ring nuts to increase the torque.
D once all the adjustments and configurations are correct, fix the locking plate (1) of both the ring nuts using screws; D support the complete external box with suitable lifting equipment; D mount the complete external box assembly onto the axle respecting the reference marks made during disassembly; D screw on the retaining screws and tighten to the prescribed torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
64
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Coutershaft assembly Proceed as follows: Figure 93
276C062103
Proceed as follows: D determine the dimension b of the ball bearing; D determine the dimension A on the box; D determine the dimension B on the cover; D check that the clearance between the bearing side and the edge of the cover fall within the prescribed values: bearing -- cover clearance A -- (B + b) = 0.05 to 0.2 mm (0.002 to 0.007 in) where: A = the distance between the bearing assembly plane and the cover support plane B = the depth of the cover b = effective thickness of the bearing
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 65
Figure 94
276C062D104
Mount the sealing ring (1) on the cover. The sealing ring must be flush with the external surface of the cover. D mount the cover (2) complete with sealing ring onto the shaft; D mount the bearing (3) on the shaft (4); D mount the spacer ring (5) and elastic ring (6); D mount the countershaft complete with bearing and cover onto the axle housing until the groove inserts into the corresponding seat on the countershaft; D screw on the retaining screws fastening the cover to the axle.
.
Proceed to: D the reassembly of the axle shafts; D the filling of the wheel hubs; D the filling of the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
66
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
BRAKE CALIPER OVERHAUL
327B-330B
Figure 96
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Disassembly Proceed as follows: Figure 95 276C062D110
D unscrew the retaining screws (1) and remove the plate (2);
.
Hydraulic oil leakage may occur during these operations. Figure 97
276C061D060
D unscrew both the retaining screws (1) and partially slip off both the upper centering pins (2) so as to free the eyelets of the pads (3); D remove both the pads by slipping them off the upper part of the caliper (arrow);
276C062D111
D pressing from the inside of the piston, remove the cover (1) and the gasket (2); D push the piston (3) towards the inside of the caliper until it disengages from the dust cover;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES 67
Reassembly Proceed as follows:
Figure 98
Figure 99
276C062D112
D remove the shoulder ring (1), gasket (2) and dust cover (3); D repeat the operations for all the pistons in the caliper. Inspection of the disassembled parts Proceed as follows: D carefully clean the entire caliper, especially in the internal parts and around the piston seats; D remove the bleeding valves, then carefully clean all the internal canalizations by blowing with compressed air; D with a cloth soaked in isopropyl alcohol or equivalent, carefully clean the sliding surface of the pistons; D check the wear conditions of the pistons and relative seats: if wear or damage is found, proceed to their replacement; D manually insert the pistons into the seats and check for correct sliding: otherwise, proceed to replacement; D check the conditions of the guide pins of the pads: in case of damage, proceed to their replacement. Always replace the gaskets, sealing rings and dust covers even if apparently intact. During reassembly, lubricate all the internal components with the prescribed hydraulic fluid.
276C062D113
D mount the dust cover (1), gasket (2) and shoulder ring (3) in the appropriate seat on the caliper; Figure 100
274A061034
D mount the piston (1) in the appropriate seat, slipping the dust cover onto the groove (arrow) on the piston; To facilitate the operation, rotate the piston slightly during insertion.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
68
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - DISC BRAKES SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
BRAKE DISC OVERHAUL
Figure 101
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions.
276C062D114
D mount the sealing gasket (1) and cover (2); D repeat the operations for all the pistons in the caliper;
Disassembly Proceed to the detachment of the brake disc following the instructions in the relative Chapter. Inspection of the disassembled parts Proceed as follows: D perform a careful cleaning of the disc; Figure 103
Figure 102
276C062D115
D mount the plate (1) and tighten the retaining screws (2); D proceed to the assembly of the new brake pads by following the disassembly steps in the reverse order.
274A061037
D check the conditions of the disc, making reference to the figure: A. Superficial microcracks on the side of the disc: acceptable B. Radial cracks: NON---acceptable C. Cracks on the edge of the attachment to the flange: NON---acceptable. Reassembly Proceed to the reattachment of the brake disc following the instructions in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 6.2 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tandem transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Epicyclic reduction gear seals and thread---stops application and bearings scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
First reduction: bevel gear pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train . . . . . . . 12 Braking assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Brake system fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Operating brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Oil---wet brake assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Brake actuation circuit seal inspection . . . . . . . . . . 39 Piston actuation travel inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Planet ---wheel holding plate assembly . . . . . . . . . . 40 Brake unit and hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TANDEM TRANSMISSION AND DIFFERENTIAL OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Splitter unit and bevel gear pair (first reduction) . . 17
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) . . . . . . 18
Inspection of the disassembled parts . . . . . . . . . . . 54
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Differential seals and thread---stops application and bearings scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Complete limited---skid differential assembly . . . . . 56 Crown wheel and bearings assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 58
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Determination of the pinion axial position spacer (S1) thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Check of the pinion---crown wheel clearance . . . . 61
Changing the oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Verification of the pinion---crown wheel engagement impression area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
INTERMEDIATE AXLE REMOVAL-- REFIT . . . . . . 29 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 EPICYCLIC REDUCER OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Brake disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Inspection of the dismantled parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Idle gear bearing preload determination . . . . . . . . . 63 Pinion bearing preload determination . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Idle gear and pinion assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Differential bearing preload determination . . . . . . . 67 Coutershaft assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 3
DESCRIPTION
The axle is a dual reduction bearing type. It consists of a boxed structure containing the cylindrical wheel transmission, the bevel gear pair with the differential (first reduction), the drive shafts and hubs with the epicyclic reducer (second reduction). The structure has mountings for connection to the chassis and housings for the bearings. Figure 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Rear suspension Hub with epicyclic gears Differential case Motion input flange Axle Oil---wet brake unit Upper stabilizer bar
276C062W001
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Tandem transfer case The transfer case is composed of a pair of spur gears and an output shaft. The pair of gears (having ratio 1:1) transmit the motion to the differential pinion while the output shaft transmits the motion to the rear axle. The torque is always divided into equal parts between the two tandem axles. Figure 2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Input flange Input countershaft Output shaft to rear axle Transmission conic roller bearings Gear for motion transmission to pinion Pinion conic roller bearings Ball bearing Intermediate axle differential unit
276C062002A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
First reduction: bevel gear pair The first reduction is obtained by the pinion---ring bevel gear unit (bevel gear pair) inside the differential. The input shaft is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by spacer. The pinion shaft receives motion from a cylindrical wheel transmission with ratio 1:1. The pinion is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by spacer. The axial position of the pinion can also be adjusted by shims. The differential box with ring bevel gear is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in X arrangement with preload and axial position adjustable by two opposing ring nuts.
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 5
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.
Adjustment ring nut Internal conic roller bearing External conic roller bearing Motion input flange Transmission spur gear Double sealing ring Pinion spur gear Pinion external conic roller bearing Bevel pinion Pinion internal conic roller bearing Axle Differential semicase Output flange Sealing ring Ball bearing Shaft Crown wheel---side conic roller bearing Axle shaft Adjustment ring nut Differential case Crown wheel Planet ---wheel Planet wheel---side conic roller bearing Adjustment ring nut Planet wheel holding shaft Differential semicase Crown wheel
A: Cross section B: Functional diagram
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 3
A
276C062003A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 7
Figure 4
B
276C062004
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
The differential is a limited---skid differential, characterized by the positioning of a multiple---disc clutch between the differential case (upright) and the crown wheels (sun gears) for each side. The multiple---disc clutch includes external discs connected to the differential case and internal discs connected to the planetary gears. The thrust on the discs is ensured by the axial component of the force exchanged between the teeth of the planet ---wheels and crown wheels.
327B-330B
The axial thrust on the discs generates a resistant torque that acts on the crown wheel when the crown wheel tends to rotate with respect to the differential case due to the speed difference between the two wheels. This resistant torque depends, with equal axial thrust, on the dimensions and the coating material of the discs.
Figure 5
1. 2. 3.
Differential semicase Planetary gear Multiple---disc device for skid limitation
276C062005 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Operation The torque coming from drive shaft is transmitted through a cardan joint to the bevel pinion. From this, the torque passes to the ring bevel gear, which is integral with the differential case. The differential is a gear train in which the case represents the upright, that holds the planet ---wheel holding shafts and receives the torque, while the two crown wheels represent the sun gears, both rotary, that receive the torque and transmit it to the axle shafts. When both the wheels are subject to the same resistant torque or have the same speed (vehicle traveling along a straight path), the ring bevel gear and the differential case rotate as a block, transmitting the torque in equal parts to the two crown wheels, and from these to the two axle shafts that rotate at the same speed: the wheels transmit the same driving torque. Figure 6
276C062006
The right wheel with the same adherence as the left.
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 9
Under these conditions, there is no relative motion between the two crown wheels, and thus the planet ---wheels do not rotate around their shaft which is integral with the differential case. When the resistance of one wheel exceeds that of the other or when the speed of the two wheels is no longer equal (vehicle traveling a curved path) the planetary gears assume a different rotation speed: their relative motion is allowed by the presence of the planet ---wheels, which now rotate around their own shaft in opposite directions. Naturally, a slower rotation speed of the crown wheel corresponds to a greater driving torque transmitted, and vice versa. Thus when the differential operates the wheel that has a smaller speed, it is able to transmit a greater driving torque, while the one with the greater speed transmits a smaller torque. Under certain conditions it may occur that the slower wheel completely loses adhesion, since the torque that can be transmitted to the ground is exceeded, and thus it encounters practically zero resistance: in this case, a normal differential causes the free rotation of the wheel that skids and the stopping of the wheel that still adheres to the ground: the traction capacity of the axle becomes zero. To remedy this inconvenience, a limited---skid differential is used that is characterized by the possibility to generate a resistant torque on each crown wheel, which is no longer free to rotate with respect to the differential case, but is braked in proportion to the torque that the differential must transmit. This resistant torque, which depends on the thrust applied to the multiple---disc clutch, is always in a fixed ratio with the input torque, known as the â&#x20AC;?locking ratioâ&#x20AC;?. The locking ratio is the percentage of maximum difference between the torque transmittable to the wheel with greater adherence and that on the wheel with less adherence. For example, with a locking ratio of 45%, 72,5% of the driving torque is transferred to one rear axle shaft (rather than the normal 50%), while the other axle shaft receives only 27.5%: the difference is precisely 45% (with respect to a total of 100%).
RH: right side: torque supplied is 50% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 50% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
If the two wheels do not have the same adherence, the resistant torque generated by the multiple---disc clutches partially locks the crown wheel on the side having less adherence and increases the torque supplied by the crown wheel on the side with more adherence. In other words, the braking torque replaces the reaction torque missing from the side of the wheel with less adherence. In this manner, considering the previous case in which one wheel loses adherence, this wheel is not able to turn freely and thus the other wheel will still be able to transmit part of the driving torque, ensuring at least some traction capacity of the axle.
327B-330B
In practice, the multiple---disc clutches automatically compensate the adherence variations of the wheels from the left side and right side of the vehicle, without requiring any driver operation. It is thus possible to apply a much larger driving force when using the vehicle, and prevent skidding when one of the wheels encounters a surface lacking adherence.
Figure 7
276C062007
Left wheel with less adherence than the right wheel (example) RH: right side: torque supplied is 72.5% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 27.5% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 11
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train The second reduction is obtained by an epicyclic reducer with cylindrical wheels in the wheel hub. The hub is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by a ring nut. The planetary gear gears turn on pivoting roller bearings. Operation The torque from the differential is transmitted by a floating axle shaft to the sun gear by the grooved shank. The four planetaries gears rotate in the opposite direction to the sun gear, where as the crown wheel is integral to the hub support, and therefore does not rotate. This forces the train carrier to turn in the opposite direction to the planetaries gear, therefore in the same direction as the drive shaft.
327B-330B
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
Epicyclic train upright (planet ---wheel holding plate) Thrust spacer Planet ---wheel Epicyclic train fixed gear Planet ---wheel pin Guide bushing Adjustment ring nut Epicyclic train crown wheel Hub Wheel fastening column Sealing rings Brake bell Brake discs Actuation piston Brake unit Brake actuation fitting Sealing rings Hub support Spacer Internal conic roller bearing External conic roller bearing Axle shaft Central retaining screw
A: Cross section B: Functional diagram
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 13
Figure 8
A
B
276C062W008A For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Braking assembly Description The braking group consists of a series of externally toothed disks (2) interlocking with a series of internally toothed disks (3). The externally toothed disks engage with the part of the hub fastened to the axle, whereas the internally toothed disks engage the part of the hub fastened to the wheel (4). The brakes are hydraulically operated by delivering pressurized oil to the command cylinder (10) through the connector (11). The piston is guided by the bushing (8) and returned by the springs (9). The piston and all connectors are contained in the braking group (13) fastened to the axle part of the hub by screws (12). The disks are immersed in a bath of oil for cooling: cooling oil circulation is assured through two connectors, delivery (7) and return (6). A special frontal o---ring (5, coupled with another fixed ring) prevents cooling oil leakage and protects against foreign matter.
Operation The driving pressure depends on the driverâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s pressure on the brake pedal. As a function to major or minor hydraulic pressure, the plates slip more easily or with more difficulty: in this way the wheel braking is more or less effective. When oil pressure is no longer applied to the piston, disengagement is guaranteed by the mechanical action of a series spring that acting on the piston in the opposite direction to the pressure of the oil. This leads to play between the disks and allows them to slip freely. Brake system fittings Figure 9
Operating brake unit (see figure on next page) 1. Brake housing 2. Externally toothed disks 3. Internally toothed disks 4. Hub 5. Frontal o---ring 6. Cooling oil return outlet 7. Cooling oil delivery input 8. Guide bushing 9. Return spring 10. Command piston 11. Connector 12. Brake closing screw 13. Braking group
276C062W009
1 2 3 4 5 6
Coolant input Brake control input Brake control air bleeder Coolant output Inspection cap Coolant drain
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 15
Operating brake unit Figure 10
292A062W001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA Hub KESSLER D 81
Code Type
Rigid with double reduction
Central differential
Limited skid --- Gleason crown wheel and pinion
Rear axle transmission
Fixed distribution 50 --- 50
Pinion bearings
2 O---mounted conic roller bearings
Differential bearings
2 X---mounted conic roller bearings
Tandem transmission bearings
2 X---mounted conic roller bearings
Hub bearings
2 O---mounted conic roller bearings for each side
Hub planet ---wheel bearings Reduction ratio
3 x 4 needle cages for each side
bevel gear set
1 : 3.50
wheel reducer
1 : 6.00
total
1 : 21.00
Pinion bearing preload
1.5 --- 1.8 Nm (1.10 --- 1.32 lb ft)
Differential bearing preload
5.0 --- 5.5 Nm (3.69 --- 4.06 lb ft) (including pinion and transmission)
Crown wheel and pinion clearance
see value engraved on the crown wheel
Self---blocking discs axial clearance
0.48 mm (0.019 in) minimum
Tandem transmission conic bearing preload
1.0 Nm (0.74 lb ft)
Tandem countershaft axial clearance
0.05 --- 0.2 mm (0.002 --- 0.008 in)
Reduction gear upright ---axle shaft axial clearance
0.30 --- 0.70 mm (0.012 --- 0.028 in)
Hub bearing preload
determined by the ring nut tightening torque 1st tightening: 700---900 Nm (516.29 --- 664.80 lb ft) then loosen 2nd tightening: 450 Nm (332.90 lb ft)
Ring nut tightening torque
Brake type
Multiple discs in oil wet
Control
Hydraulic
Discs per group
Brake control piston axial travel
fixed
4
rotating
4 2.5 + 0.7 / --- 0.1 mm (0.1 + 0.027 / --- 0.003 in) under pressure
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 17
Splitter unit and bevel gear pair (first reduction) Figure 11
276C062011A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) Figure 12
276C062W012
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 19
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 13
276C062W013
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 14
276C062D014A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 21
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 15
276C062D014B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
TOOLS 380002787
380002788
380002789
380002790
380002791
380002792
380002794
380002795
380002796
380002797
380002798
380002799
.
380002793
The tools listed below belong to a single axle equipment kit 380140049.
380002787 380002788 380002789 380002790 380002791 380002792 380002793 380002794 380002795 380002796 380002797 380002798 380002799
---------------------------
Spanner, Wheel Safety Nut Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Face Seal Installation Tool Disc Centering Tool Disc Centering Tool Seal Ring Sleeve Driver
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 23
DIAGNOSTICS Axle 1. Continuous noise 2. Cornering noise 3. Alternating noise 4. Sharp bangs during acceleration or deceleration 5. Oil leak from the axle shafts 6. Oil leak from the hubs
1
CONTINUOUS NOISE
Worn bearings.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Gears damaged or worn.
Replace them. YES
NO
Lack of lubrication.
Restore oil level. YES
NO
Incorrect adjustment of the clearances.
Adjust again YES
2
CORNERING NOISE
Worn planet ---wheels or crown wheels.
YES
Replace.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
3
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
ALTERNATING NOISE
Wheel bearings with excessive clearance.
YES
Adjust the bearings.
NO
Wheels mounted incorrectly.
Disassemble and remount correctly. YES
NO
Too little clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
NO
Too much clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
4
SHARP BANGS DURING ACCELERATION OR DECELERATION
Incorrect gear train adjustment.
YES
Adjust again.
NO
Pivot of the anchoring structure has too much play.
Replace the parts of the articulated joint. YES
NO
Loose fastening of the anchoring structure to the chassis.
YES
Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
5
SECTION 6.2
OIL LEAK FROM THE AXLE BREATHER
Internal lip seals worn. The coolant passes onto the axle.
6
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 25
SI
Replace the seals. Perform the seal test to identify the defective hub.
OIL LEAK FROM THE HUBS
Front seals worn. The coolant leaks from the hub.
YES
Replace the seals.
Brakes 1. Weak braking action 2. Unequal action of the brakes 3. Brakes that remain blocked 4. Premature depletion of the accumulator pressure when braking with the engine off
1
WEAK BRAKING ACTION
Worn brake discs.
YES
Overhaul the brakes.
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
UNEQUAL ACTION OF THE BRAKES
Worn brake discs.
YES
Replace.
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
3
BRAKES THAT REMAIN BLOCKED
Broken or ineffective return springs.
YES
Overhaul the brakes.
NO
Defective hydraulic system.
See Section 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. YES
4
PREMATURE DEPLETION OF THE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE WHEN BRAKING WITH THE ENGINE OFF
Defective accumulators.
YES
Check the preload pressure and the seals of the fittings. Replace the accumulators.
NO
Inefficient piston gliding seals. The brake fluid seeps into the cooling chamber
Overhaul the brakes. YES
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
MAINTENANCE
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 27
Changing the oil Collect and dispose of used lubricants and fluids, according to the laws in force
Checking oil level Proceed as follows: The level check can be carried out on the hubs or on the differential . If the level has to be restored, this is to be carried out on the differential.
Proceed as follows to drain the system: Figure 18
Figure 16
276NM019T
276NM020T
D take the reference on a hub to horizontal position (see arrow); D clean the cap area and open the level cap (1). Lubricant should drip out of the hole; D close the filler cap. or
D take the reference on the hub to horizontal position (see arrow); D arrange a suitably sized container, clean the cap area and remove the cap (1) and the drain cap (2); drain all the lubricant; D clean the cap, check that the threading is in good condition, replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the drain cap; D repeat the procedure for the other hub; D arrange a suitably sized container, clean the cap area and remove the cap (1) and the drain cap (2); drain all the lubricant.
Figure 17
276NM021T
D clean the area of the cap, then open the cap (1): the lubricant must leak from the hole; D if necessary, restore the level until it overflows from the same cap; D close the cap; D check that the breather is perfectly clean and operational.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Final reductions
Figure 19
Figure 21
276NM021T
D arrange a suitably---sized container under the drain cap, clean the cap areas and then remove the filling cap (1);
276NM020T
D pour in approx 3 litres of the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the cap hole (1); D replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the cap; D repeat the procedure for the other hub.
Figure 20
Figure 22
276NM021T
276NM023T
D remove the drain cap (1) and completely drain the lubricant; D clean the caps, check that the threading is in good condition, replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the drain cap.
D refill with the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the hole of the filling cap (1); Fill up slowly. The operation is finished when the level at the hole does not lower for a few minutes. D replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the cap; D perform a test drive and then recheck the level (1); D if necessary, top up with the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the hole, repeat the test drive and recheck the level.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 29
INTERMEDIATE AXLE REMOVAL---REFIT Before starting any operation, make sure that all the precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved on the job have been made quite clear . Read the relevant instructions contained in SECTION 1 of this handbook. If in doubt ask someone who is more expert. Comply to all the general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance work. Removal Proceed as follows: D Bring the vehicle on a suitable flat, solid surface, switch off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the warning notices; D deactivate the battery isolator or disconnect the battery terminals to prevent any risk of a short circuit; D block articulation by means of the steering lock bar, proceeding as indicated in SECTION 1;
D raise the vehicle so that the wheels are off the ground, then place two supporting trestles under the front chassis, without touching the suspension; D place a suitable hydraulic supporting device under each of the intermediate and rear axles, that allows the lowering at the time of removal, so that at this stage the two axles are more or less horizontal; D remove both wheels following the instructions in SECTION 9; D disconnect the electrical (2) and pneumatic (3) connection to lock the inter---axles distribution; D disconnect the axle bleed pipe (4); Before the removal of the hydraulic pipes, prepare appropriate plugs to close the free ends. D disconnect the hydraulic pipes: --- service braking system (20); --- brakes cooling system inlet (21); --- brakes cooling system outlet (22);
.
During this operation the hydraulic fluid could spill out.
D remove the input (18) and the output (19) propeller shaft following the instructions in SECTION 7; D working on both sides of each rocker arm, remove the split pin and unscrew the locking nut (08) of the rocker arm pin; D remove both the bolts (10) that fasten the tie---rod to the bracket; D take out the rocker arm pin (9) keeping the washers (6) and guide bushings (7), releasing the rocker arm from the axle; D carefully lower the axle and remove it from the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 23
276C062W027 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
EPICYCLIC REDUCER OVERHAUL
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 31
Figure 25
Before starting any operation, make sure that all the precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved on the job have been made quite clear. Read the relevant instructions contained in SECTION 1 of this handbook. If in doubt ask someone who is more expert. Comply to all the general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance work.
.
.
Before proceeding, it is necessary to: D drain the lubricant from the wheel hub D drain the lubricant from the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter. Before proceeding, the brake caliper must be removed following the instructions in the relative chapter.
276C062W031
D unscrew the central retaining screw (1) and remove the fixed gear (2) and guide bushing (3) complete with spacer ring (4); D slip off the axle shaft (5) if necessary; Figure 26
Disassembly Proceed as follows: Figure 24
276C062032 276C062W030
D mark the mutual position of the planet ---wheel holding plate and the hub; D loosen and remove all the retaining screws (1); D remove the planet ---wheel holding plate assembly (2) and O---ring (3) and recover the thrust spacer ring (4);
D unscrew the setscrew (1) of the ring nut; D remove the locking ring nut (2) of the internally toothed crown wheel. The ring nut is locked with thread ---stops. To prevent damage to the threading, heat to approximately 120 ° C (248 ° F) before unscrewing.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
D using a suitable lifting device, carefully remove the complete hub from the hub support;
327B-330B
Figure 29
During this operation, keep the hub parallel to the axle axis to avoid damaging the brake discs. D remove the front sealing ring; D place the hub vertically; Figure 27
276C062D035
D remove the two oil seal rings (1); D use a suitable extractor to remove the outer race (2) of the axle---side bearing (A) and the outer race (3) of the wheel---side bearing (B); Figure 30
276C062D033
D use a suitable extractor to remove the internally toothed crown wheel (1); Figure 28
276C06W036
D remove the screws (1) fastening the brake unit (2) to the hub; D carefully remove the brake unit from the hub and place it on the workbench with the flange facing upwards; 276C062D034
D remove the retaining screws (1) and relative stop plates (2); D separate the internally toothed crown wheel (3) from the relative flange (4); D using a suitable extractor, remove the inner race (5) of the wheel---side bearing (B) from the crown wheel flange; D if necessary remove the wheel fastening screws from the hub;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Figure 31
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 33
Figure 33
276C062W037
D remove the inner race (1) of the axle---side bearing (A) and the spacer ring (2) from the hub; The spacer ring is blocked with sealant. To avoid damaging it, before removing, heat to approx. 120 ° C (248 ° F).
276C062D038
D remove the planet wheel (1) and relative shim rings (2); Figure 34
Figure 32
274A062039
274A062029
D remove the needle cages (arrow) from the planet --wheel; D repeat the procedure for all the planet ---wheels.
D place the planet ---wheel holding plate on a suitable work surface; D use a punch to push the retaining pin (1) down in the pivot, freeing the pivot (2); D extract the pivot (2) by pushing it towards the inside of the planet ---wheel holding plate (arrow); D remove the O---ring (3); D extract the pin from the pivot. Do not push the pivot towards the outside of the planet---wheel holding plate, otherwise its seat may be damaged due to the difference between the internal and external diameter of the pivot.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
Brake disassembly Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
D unscrew the screw (1) and remove the spring (2) and spacer (3) from the piston; Wear protective gloves and safety goggles. Hold the screw to avoid injuries caused by the load of the springs.
Figure 35
D unscrew the screw (4) and remove the bushing (5) from the piston; D turn the flange over, resting it on a suitable spacer to allow the partial exit of the piston; Figure 38
2 276C062W040
D unscrew the retaining screws (1) and remove the flange (2) complete with piston form the bell (3). D remove the peripheral sealing ring (4);
1
Figure 36
276C062W043
276C062W041
D remove the internal (1) and external discs (2) from the bell, keeping their order; D remove the front sealing ring (3);
D remove the piston (1) by blowing compressed air in from the control fitting (2); Wear protective gloves and safety goggles. Hold down the flange to avoid any hand injuries. D remove the sealing rings from the flange and the piston.
Figure 37
276C062W042 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Inspection of the dismantled parts Wheel hub D check the seats of the bearings: they must not have any deformations and/or ovalling; D check the condition of the bearings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Axle shafts D check the condition of the axle shafts: replace them if they have deformations on the end grooves and/or on the entire length. Final reductions D check the condition of the gear toothing: replace them if they have pitting, cracks and/or cavities; D verify the good operation of the planet ---wheels and the roller bushings; D check the threading for the bearing locking ring nut: it must not have any dents, deformations and/or jams.
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 35
Reassembly During reassembly, consider the following general observations: D heat, to 100 ° C (212 ° F) in the oven, the bearings and rings to be mounted by pushing; D carefully center and mount the sealing rings and bearings with a suitable adjuster; D lubricate the ring nuts and bearings; D lubricate the driving plates and driven plates of the brake with hydraulic fluid; D follow the front sealing ring assembly instructions carefully.
Oil---wet brake D check the bell and the piston: they must not have any deformations and/or ovalling; D carefully clean the bell, especially the canalizations; D use new gaskets and rings; D check the threading for the bearing locking ring nut: it must not have any dents, deformations and/or jams. Idle gears D check the condition of the toothing: replace them if they have pitting, cracks and/or cavities. Front sealing rings D check the seat of the ring: it must not have any deformations and/or ovalling; D carefully clean the seat, the metal ring and the gasket; D eliminate any residue of dust, lubricant or other foreign matter. Use isopropanol for the cleaning and subsequent assembly operations. Use cloths that do not fray, or paper towels.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Epicyclic reduction gear seals and thread-- stops application and bearings scheme Figure 39
276C062W044
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Oil -- wet brake assembly Proceed as follows:
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 37
Figure 42
Figure 40
276C062W047
D mount the internal (1) and external discs (2) in the bell, maintaining their order. 276C062W045
D Mount the sealing rings in the following order: Large O---ring Small O---ring Large rigid ring Small rigid ring The larger diameter of the rigid ring must be on the side opposite the pressure. D install two operating screws, then mount the piston in the flange; Do not tilt the piston in order to avoid contact and damage to the sliding surfaces. D remove the operating screws; Figure 41
276C062W046
D mount the spring (1) and spacer (2) and screw on the screws (3); D mount the bushing (4) and screw the screws (5) onto the piston;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 43
276C062W048
D determine the dimension A; D determine the dimension B; D determine the piston travel (without pressure) as follows: C = A -- B (mm) where A = distance between the brake bell mounting surface and the disc surface B = distance between the plate mounting surface and the piston thrust surface C = piston travel (without pressure) D check that the piston travel (without pressure) is within the prescribed values: 1.9 mm < C < 2.7 mm (0.0748 in < C < 0.1063 in)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 39
Brake actuation circuit seal inspection Proceed as follows:
Figure 44
Figure 45
276C062W049
D mount the peripheral sealing ring (1); D mount the bell (2) onto the flange (3) and screw on the retaining screws (4); D mount any previously removed hydraulic fittings.
276C062W050
D close the bleeding valve (1); D connect a manual high---pressure hydraulic pump to the brake control input fitting (2); D pump the prescribed hydraulic fluid into the actuation chamber until reaching a maximum pressure of 10 bar; D open the pressure release valve of the pump; D open the bleeding valve; D carefully operate the pump up to the spillage of fluid; D close the bleeding valve; D repeat the procedure up to the complete absence of air in the bleeding; D increase the pump pressure to a max of 120 bar (1740.25 psi); D check that the seal is within the prescribed values: Pressure reduction in 15 min max 2% (residual pressure of at least 117.5 bar (1704 psi)) D open the pressure release valve of the pump; D remove the pump and close the fitting.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
Piston actuation travel inspection Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Planet-- wheel holding plate assembly Proceed as follows: D position the planet ---wheel holding plate horizontally;
Figure 46
Figure 47
274A062032
D mount the needle cages inside the planet gear;
276C062W051
D open the cap of the inspection hole (1); D measure the distance (d) between the flange and piston without hydraulic pressure (d1); D connect a manual high---pressure hydraulic pump to the brake control input fitting; D increase the pump pressure to a max of 120 bar (1740.25 psi); D measure the distance (d) between the flange and piston with hydraulic pressure (d2); D determine the piston travel (with pressure) as follows: C = d2 -- d1 (mm) where: d1 = distance (d) between the flange and piston without pressure d2 = distance (d) between the flange and piston with pressure C = piston travel (with pressure) D check that the piston travel (with pressure) is within the prescribed values: 2.4 mm < C < 3.2 mm (0.945 in < C < 0.126 in)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 41
Brake unit and hub assembly Proceed as follows:
Figure 48
Figure 50
276C062D052
D mount the planet ---wheel (1) complete with shim rings in the seat on the planet ---wheel holding plate; The pegs must be mounted with the groove orientated as indicated in the figure (grooves staggered by 180° (356 ° F) and orientated along the circumference). Figure 49
276C061D053
D place the hub vertically; D using a suitable introducer, mount the outer race (1) of the wheel---side conic roller bearing (B) and the outer race (2) of the axle---side conic roller bearing (A); D mount the inner race (3) of the axle---side conic roller bearing (A); Figure 51
274A062035
D insert the O---ring (1) in the seat of the planet ---wheel holding plate; D insert the pivot (2) of the planet ---wheel holding gear so that the pin holes match up; D or according to the versions; D insert the pivot (2) of the planet ---wheel holding gear up to the complete expulsion of the internal retention bush so that the pin holes match up; Mount the pivot from the internal part of the planet---wheel holding plate, otherwise its seat may be damaged due to the pivot diameter difference.
276C062W054
D with an appropriate tool insert the seal rings (1) into the seat on the hub paying attention to the orientation (detail) and fill them completely with lubrication grease for bearings (arrow).
D mount the catch pin (3); D repeat the procedure for all the planet ---wheels.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
Front sealing ring assembly
.
327B-330B
Figure 54
The assembly instructions below are valid for both front sealing rings (brake---side and wheel---side). Use isopropanol for the cleaning and subsequent assembly operations.
Proceed as follows: Figure 52
276C062W062
D using a suitable tool, completely immerse the rubber part of the front sealing ring in a small basin containing isopropanol; The rubber ring must be completely immersed in the isopropanol in order to obtain efficient lubrication. This lubrication is indispensable to ensure the correct assembly of the front sealing ring. Figure 55 276C062W060
D mount the rubber ring (1) on the metal ring (2), settling it on the groove. Figure 53
276C062W063
276C062W061
The rubber ring must NOT be twisted. A twisted rubber ring does not guarantee the correct position of the metal ring, resulting in fluid leaks. If the ring twists during assembly, it must be straightened by rolling it until It is completely straight.
D extract the sealing ring from the basin and mount it immediately in its seat, pushing it firmly so that the rubber ring inserts into the seat and crosses the retention rim; D if necessary, adjust the position of the ring in the seat using a suitable tool;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 43
Figure 56
276C062W064
D check the correct assembly of the rubber ring: the figure illustrates some incorrect positions. 1. The rubber ring is not positioned correctly in the seat; 2. The rubber ring has not crossed the retention rim; 3. The rubber ring is not positioned correctly on the metal ring. D use a magnifying glass to inspect the sliding surfaces of the rings and remove any foreign matter; D apply a thin layer of lubricant on the external surfaces of each front ring before assembling the parts. Wait a few minutes before coupling the two rings in order to allow the isopropanol to evaporate completely. The rubber ring absolutely must not move in its seat during assembly of the parts. A shifted rubber ring does not guarantee the correct position of the metal ring, resulting in fluid leaks.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
44
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 57
276C062W065
position the axle horizontally; mount the sealing ring (1) on the hub support (2); mount the brake unit (3) on the hub support; tighten the retaining screws (4) to the prescribed tightening torque; D use a suitable tool to align the toothing of the brake unit discs (5); D block the position of the discs by blowing compressed air in the brake control input fitting (6) and remove the tool. D D D D
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 45
Figure 58
276C062W066
D heat the spacer ring (1) and insert it completely on the axle axis; D using a suitable lifting device, support the hub assembly in order to ensure its correct centering; D introduce the hub assembly (2) on the end of the hub support (3), placing the inner race of the axle--side conic roller bearing (A) so that it rests against the spacer ring; During this operation, keep the hub parallel to the axle axis. Work with caution to avoid damaging the sealing rings and the brake disc teeth. Continue to support the hub assembly until it is completely mounted. D release the brake discs by discharging the pressure from the piston; D if removed, mount the stud bolts fastening the wheel to the hub (4).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
46
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Hub bearing preload determination
Figure 59
Proceed as follows: Figure 61
276C062W067
D heat the inner race (1) of the wheel---side conic roller bearing (B) and insert it until it rests against the gear wheel flange; D insert the gear wheel flange (2) onto the gear wheel with internal toothing (3); D mount the retention plates (4) and fix them with the setscrews;
276C062069
D apply MOLYKOTE lubricant on the hub support threading and on the threading and contact area of the locking ring nut; D hand mount the ring nut (1) without tightening; D tighten the locking ring nut to the prescribed tightening torque: Locking ring nut tightening torque for bearings Phase 1: 700 -- 900 Nm (516 -- 664 lb ft)
Figure 60
During the locking, rotate the hub back and forth by striking it with a plastic hammer to settle the bearings. D unscrew the locking ring nut half a turn; D tighten the locking ring nut to the prescribed tightening torque: Locking ring nut tightening torque for bearings Phase 2: 450 Nm (332 lb ft) During the locking, rotate the hub back and forth by striking it with a plastic hammer to settle the bearings. 276C062W068
D mount the flange and internally toothed gear wheel assembly (1) onto the hub until the two parts meet the wheel---side conic roller bearing (B). The lubrication oil passage hole on the toothed wheel flange is to face downwards.
D after having adjusted the bearing preload, block the locking ring nut with the relative setscrew (2); If this is not possible, unscrew the ring nut as much as needed in order to mount the clamp screw.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 47
Planet ---wheel holding plate --- fixed gear axial clearance determination Proceed as follows:
Figure 62
Figure 63
276C062D070
D insert the axle shafts (1) into the axle; D mount the spacer ring (2), guide bushing (3) and fixed gear (4); D mount the central retaining screw (5) and tighten it. 274A062043
D determine the dimension A; D determine the dimension B; D determine the thickness of the thrust spacer as follows: S = A -- B +(0.30 to 0.70 mm) S = A -- B + (0.012 to 0.027) (in) where: A = distance between the planet ---wheel holding plate mounting surface and the seat of the thrust spacer on the same plate B = distance between the hub mounting surface and the thrust spacer seat on the fixed gear S = thrust spacer thickness 0.30 to 0.70 = prescribed clearance in mm D mount the chosen thrust spacer onto the planet --wheel holding plate.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
48
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
Brake cooling circuit seal inspection
327B-330B
Concluding operations
Proceed as follows:
Figure 65
Figure 64
276C062W072
D close one of the two brake cooling circuit pipe fittings (1); D blow compressed air at a maximum pressure of 1.5 bar (21.74 psi) into the second fitting (2); Do not exceed the pressure of 1.5 bar as this may damage the sealing rings. D turn the hub a few times; D check that the seal is within the prescribed values: Minimum pressure acceptable after 10 minutes 1.4 bar (20.3 psi) D close the fitting.
276C062W073
D mount the O---ring (1) in the seat of the planet --wheel holding plate; D mount the planet ---wheel holding plate assembly (2) in the hub. Respect the reference marks made during disassembly. D mount the retaining screws (3) and tighten to the prescribed torque.
.
If no intervention on the differential is planned, proceed to: D the filling of the wheel hub; D the filling of the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 49
TANDEM TRANSMISSION AND DIFFERENTIAL OVERHAUL Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Disassembly
.
Before proceeding, the axle shafts must be removed following the instructions in the relative chapter.
Proceed as follows: Figure 66
276C062W080
D straighten the dent and remove the motion input flange stop nut (1); D using a suitable extractor, remove the flange (2); D straighten the dent and remove the motion output flange stop nut (3); D using a suitable extractor, remove the flange (4);
D mark the relative position between box and axle; D loosen and remove the screws (3) fastening the external box to the axle; D using a suitable lifting device, remove the external box assembly from the axle; D position the assembly on the support trestle, adapting as necessary.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
50
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Differential disassembly Proceed as follows:
Figure 67
Figure 69
276C062081
D unscrew the retaining screws and remove the locking plate (1) of both the bearing preload adjustment ring nuts; D loosen both the bearing preload adjustment ring nuts (2); D mark each support cap and the corresponding external box location; D loosen the retaining screws (3) and remove both the support caps (4); D remove both the adjustment ring nuts; Figure 68
274A062048
D remove the outer race (1) of the crown wheel---side bearing (C) and the outer race (2) of the planet wheel---side bearing (D); D use appropriate extractors to extract the inner race (3) of the crown wheel---side bearing (C) and the inner race of the planet wheel---side bearing (D) from the differential semicases; D mark both the differential semicases; D loosen the retaining screws and remove the differential semicase; Figure 70
274A062047
D using a suitable lifting device, extract the differential assembly (1) from the relative case.
274A062049
D disassemble the planet ---wheel group into the different components; D remove the discs of the skid limitation device and the relative shoulder rings; D if necessary, separate the ring bevel gear from the differential semicase by unscrewing the retaining screws.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Idle gear and pinion disassembly Proceed as follows:
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 51
Figure 73
Figure 71
276C062084 276C062082
D position the assembly horizontally; D remove the cover (1); D straighten the dent and remove the pinion stop nut (2).
D remove the idle gear (1) from the pinion box; D remove the stop plate (2), adjustment ring nut (3) and the outer race (4) of bearing (E); Figure 74
Figure 72
276C062085
276C062083
D unscrew the retaining screws and separate the pinion box (1) from the external box (2); D recover the inner races of bearing (B) and bearing (F) from the external box.
D remove the bearing preload spacer S2 (1), spacer (2) and coaxial gear (3) from the pinion; D remove the pinion (4); D use a suitable extractor to remove the outer race of bearing (B) from the pinion box.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
52
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 75
274A062086
D remove the outer race (1) of bearing (A) and the pinion position spacer S1 (2) from the external box; D remove the sealing ring (3) from the external box; D remove the elastic ring (4) and outer race (5) of bearing (F). Figure 76
276C062087
D using a suitable extractor, remove the inner race (1) of bearing (E) from the gear Figure 77
274A062055
D using a suitable extractor (1), remove the inner race (2) of bearing (A).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 53
Coutershaft disassembly Proceed as follows: Figure 78
276C062W088
D loosen the retaining screws and remove the countershaft cover (1) complete with countershaft; D using a suitable extractor, remove the countershaft (2) complete with ball bearing; D remove the elastic ring (3) and spacer ring (4); D use a press and pad to separate the countershaft (2) from the bearing (5); D remove the sealing ring (6) from the cover.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
54
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
Inspection of the disassembled parts Bearings D check the condition of the bearings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Crown wheels D check the condition of the toothing: replace it if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities. Planet ---gears D check the condition of the toothing: replace it if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities; D check the coupling surfaces with the pins. Damage to a single element entails the replacement of the entire gear unit.
327B-330B
Reassembly During reassembly consider the following general observations: D heat, to 100° C (212 ° F) in the oven, the bearings and rings to be mounted by pushing; D carefully center and mount the sealing rings and bearings with a suitable adjuster; D lubricate the bushes, sealing rings and bearings. Perform all the indicated measurements with maximum precision. Imprecise measurements lead to bad contact of the bevel gear and thus make it necessary to repeat the procedure.
Cross pins D check the coupling surfaces with the planet ---gears. Shoulder rings D check the condition of the rings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Bevel gear D check that the toothing of the crown wheel and the pinion show uniform wear on the entire working zone of the teeth: replace the bevel gear if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities; An anomalous wear may indicate an incorrect adjustment of the bearings: check their integrity before proceeding to the reassembly. Damage to a single element entails the replacement of the entire gear unit. D check the bearing seats: they must not have deformations or ovalling. Bushes D check the threading for the bearing locking bush: it must not have dents, deformations and/or jams. External box D check the bearing seats: they must not have deformations or ovalling; D check that the sealing surfaces and the threadings are integral and free of dents or damage. Idle gears D check the condition of the toothing: replace them if they have pitting, cracks and/or cavities.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 55
Differential seals and thread-- stops application and bearings scheme Figure 79
276C062090A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
56
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Complete limited-- skid differential assembly Proceed as follows:
.
Refer to the following figure.
D check the following measurements: SP1 = 3.10 mm (0.1220 in) minimum; SP2 = 2.15 mm (0.0846 in) minimum. D otherwise, use shoulder discs with a greater thickness; D mount the shoulder ring (2) and elastic ring (3); D position the shoulder disc (SP1) (4); D alternately mount an externally grooved disc (driven plate) and an internally grooved disc (driving plate) until all discs (5) have been mounted; The last disc is a driving plate.
D D D D D
D
D D D
mount the shoulder disc (SP2) (6); mount the elastic ring (7); mount the planetary gear; repeat the assembly for the other semicase; when finished, check that dimension A falls within the prescribed values; 52.8 mm < A < 53.27 mm (2.0787 in < A < 2.0972 in) when finished, check that dimension B falls within the prescribed values; B < 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) otherwise, use shoulder discs with a greater thickness or reduce the thickness by grinding; assemble the shafts and planet ---wheel gears and mount the assembly on the crown wheel; join the two semicases and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed torque. The two semicases are symmetric except for the crown wheel assembly flange. The total height of the crown wheel---side disc pack must be identical to that on the opposite side.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 57
Differential semicase Shoulder ring Elastic ring Semicase shoulder disc SP1 Driven (N.4) and driving (N.4) discs Crown wheel shoulder disc SP2 Elastic ring Crown wheel --- planet ---wheel group
Dimension A: disc pack thickness Dimension B: Shoulder ring --- crown wheel clearance Figure 80
276C062091 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
58
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Crown wheel and bearings assembly Figure 81
274A062060
Proceed as follows: D check that the area of contact between the gear (1) and differential semicase (2) is clean and free of grease; D mount the crown wheel on the semicase and tighten the fastening bolts (3) to the prescribed torque; Figure 82
274A062062
D heat the inner race (1) of the planet wheel---side conic roller bearing (D) and mount it against the differential semicase; D heat the inner race (2) of the crown wheel---side conic roller bearing (C) and mount it against the differential semicase.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 59
Determination of the pinion axial position spacer (S1) thickness Figure 83
276C062092
Proceed as follows: D determine the thickness beff of the internal conic roller bearing (A); D calculate the difference d between the effective thickness and the theoretical thickness bteor = 40.0 mm of the internal conic roller bearing (A); d = beff -- bteor (mm) D measure the dimension a; D determine the effective thickness of the pinion position spacer (S1) as follows: S1eff = S1teor -- (d + a) (mm) where: S1teor = theoretical thickness of the pinion position spacer (S1) = 3 mm effective thickness of the pinion position S1eff = spacer (S1) d= difference between the effective and theoretical thickness of the internal conic roller bearing (A) calculated previously a= value stamped on the pinion head Example 1: beff = 39.95 mm difference d = 39.95 --- 40.00 = ---0.05 mm a = + 0.10 thickness S1eff = 3 --- (--- 0.05 + 0.10) = 2.95 mm Example 2: beff = 40.05 mm difference d = 40.05 --- 40.00 = ---0.05 mm a = ---0.10 thickness S1eff = 3 --- (0.05 --- 0.10) = 3.05 mm For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Figure 84
276C062093
D heat the inner race of bearing (A) and mount it on the pinion; Figure 85
4
1 2
6
3
5
276C062094
D position the chosen pinion position spacer (S1) (1) in its seat; D mount the outer race (2) of bearing (A) until it rests against spacer S1; D insert the pinion (3) into the external box; D mount the pinion box on the external box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque;
D mount the outer race (4) of bearing (B) until it rests against the box; D mount the inner race (5) of bearing (B) on the pinion; D apply MOLYKOTE on the pinion threading and on the threading and contact area of the stop nut; D mount the stop nut (6) and tighten it until there is no play in the bearings.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Check of the pinion-- crown wheel clearance Proceed as follows: Figure 86
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 61
D apply MOLYKOTE on the threading of the adjustment ring nuts; D screw on both the ring nuts by hand until there is no play in the bearings; Figure 88
17312101
D position the conic roller bearing outer races on both ends of the differential; D using a suitable lifting device, mount the crown wheel assembly in the differential case; 17312104
Figure 87
D mount a dial gauge at a right angle with respect to the external diameter of the crown wheelâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s toothed side and turn the crown wheel back and forth, being careful not to move the pinion; D check that the clearance between the crown wheel and pinion falls within the prescribed values: pinion-- crown wheel clearance see value engraved on the crown wheel D otherwise, adjust the clearance using the adjustment ring nuts; D the clearance can be adjusted by unscrewing one adjustment ring nut by a certain number of notches and screwing on the opposite adjustment ring nut by the same number of notches; 17312102
D align the reference marks and mount the bearing support caps; D mount the cap retaining screws and tighten to the prescribed tightening torque;
Figure 89
17312105
D In particular: --- unscrew the ring nut (D) and screw on the ring nut (C) to reduce the clearance (white arrow); --- unscrew the ring nut (C) and screw on the ring nut (D) to increase the clearance (black arrow). For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
62
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Verification of the pinion-- crown wheel engagement impression area Proceed as follows: Figure 90
17312106
D cover a dozen teeth of the crown wheel with Prussian blue, lubricated with minium, or another paint or dye that can be easily removed; D make a complete rotation of the crown wheel by hand; D when the teeth engage, the paint is removed by the contact of the teeth, leaving zones exposed with the exact dimension, shape and location of contact; Figure 91
274A062063
Contact area position and shape 1. correct bevel gear position; 2. position with the pinion too far back: it is necessary to reduce the distance between the pinion and the crown wheel axis by using a spacer S1 of greater thickness; then adjust the clearance by moving the crown wheel further from the pinion; 3. position with the pinion too far forward: it is necessary to increase the distance between the pinion and the crown wheel axis by using a spacer S1 of smaller thickness; then adjust the clearance by moving the crown wheel closer to the pinion;
D to replace the spacer S1, remove the retaining screws (1) and slip off the complete pinion box; D position the new spacer S1, then reassemble the pinion box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque. When finished, remove the differential, pinion and pinion box.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Idle gear bearing preload determination Proceed as follows:
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 63
Figure 94
1
Figure 92
2 276C062097 276C062095
D heat the inner race (1) of bearing (E) and mount it on the idle gear; Figure 93
D mount the bearing (E) outer race (1); D apply MOLYKOTE on the threading of the adjustment ring nut; D mount the adjustment ring nut (2) without tightening.
276C062096
D mount the bearing (F) elastic stop ring (1); D mount the complete bearing (F) (2) until it rests against the elastic ring; D insert the idle gear (3) into the external box; D mount the pinion box on the external box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
64
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
Figure 95
327B-330B
Figure 96
276C062099 276C062098A
D mount the flange (1), inserting it inside bearing (F); D apply MOLYKOTE on the gear threading and on the threading and contact area of the stop nut; Use a new stop nut. D mount the stop nut (2) and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
D tighten the adjustment ring nut (1) until obtaining the prescribed value for the bearing rolling torque. Rolling torque for gear bearings 1.0 Nm (0.74 lb ft) D unscrew the ring nut by two notches; D fix the locking plate (2) of the ring nut by screwing on the clamp screw. When finished, remove the external box, then remove the idle gear by unscrewing the stop nut.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 65
Pinion bearing preload determination Proceed as follows: Figure 97
5
2
6
1
4 3
276C062100
D insert the pinion (1), complete with inner race of the conic roller bearing (A), into the external box; D mount the coaxial gear (2), spacer (3) and spacer S2 (4), which were removed during disassembly, onto the pinion; D mount the pinion box on the external box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque; D mount the inner race (5) of conic roller bearing (B) on the pinion; D apply MOLYKOTE on the pinion threading and on the threading and contact area of the stop nut; Use a new stop nut.
D mount the stop nut (6) and tighten it to the prescribed torque; Block the coaxial gear during this operation. D use a suitable tool to check that the rolling torque falls within the prescribed values: Rolling torque for pinion bearings 1.5-- 1.8 Nm (1.11 -- 1.33 lb ft) D otherwise correct the rolling resistance by using a spacer S2 with a different thickness; D In particular: --- increase the thickness to reduce the torque; --- reduce the thickness to increase the torque. When finished, unscrew the stop nut and remove the external box.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
66
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
Idle gear and pinion assembly Proceed as follows: D insert the idle gear into the external box; D mount the pinion box on the external box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque;
327B-330B
Figure 100
1 2
Figure 98
276C062102
D mount the inner race (1) of bearing (B); D mount the pinion stop nut (2) and tighten it to the prescribed torque; Figure 101
276C062101A
D use a suitable tool to insert the sealing ring (1) in the seat and fill it completely with lubricating grease for bearings; D mount the flange (2), inserting it inside bearing (F); D mount the idle gear stop nut (3) and tighten it to the prescribed torque; Figure 99
274A062066
D dent the nut as described in the figure; If this is not possible, unscrew the nut as much as necessary to dent it. D mount the cover and screw on the retaining screws.
274A062066
D dent the nut as described in the figure. If this is not possible, unscrew the nut as much as necessary to dent it.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
Differential bearing preload determination Proceed as follows:
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 67
Figure 103
Figure 102
274A062064 17312102
D align the reference marks and mount the bearing support caps; D mount the cap retaining screws and tighten to the prescribed tightening torque; D screw on both the ring nuts by hand until there is no play in the bearings; D as described previously, check that the clearance between the crown wheel and pinion falls within the prescribed values: pinion-- crown wheel clearance see value engraved on the crown wheel D otherwise, adjust the clearance using the adjustment ring nuts; D use a suitable tool to check that the rolling torque falls within the prescribed values: Rolling torque for crown wheel and pinion bearings 5.0 to 5.5 Nm (3.7 to 4.07 lb ft) (including pinion and transmission) D the rolling torque can be corrected by turning both the adjustment ring nuts by the same number of notches; D in particular: --- unscrew the ring nuts to decrease the torque; --- screw on the ring nuts to increase the torque.
D once all the adjustments and configurations are correct, fix the locking plate (1) of both the ring nuts using screws; D support the complete external box with suitable lifting equipment; D mount the complete external box assembly onto the axle respecting the reference marks made during disassembly; D screw on the retaining screws and tighten to the prescribed torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
68
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Coutershaft assembly Proceed as follows: Figure 104
276C062103
Proceed as follows: D determine the dimension b of the ball bearing; D determine the dimension A on the box; D determine the dimension B on the cover; D check that the clearance between the bearing side and the edge of the cover fall within the prescribed values: bearing -- cover clearance A -- (B + b) = 0.05 to 0.2 mm (0.002 to 0.0078 in) where: A = the distance between the bearing assembly plane and the cover support plane B = the depth of the cover b = effective thickness of the bearing
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.2
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES 69
Figure 105
276C062W104
Mount the sealing ring (1) on the cover. The sealing ring must be flush with the external surface of the cover. D mount the cover (2) complete with sealing ring onto the shaft; D mount the bearing (3) on the shaft (4); D mount the spacer ring (5) and elastic ring (6); D mount the countershaft complete with bearing and cover onto the axle housing until the groove inserts into the corresponding seat on the countershaft; D screw on the retaining screws fastening the cover to the axle.
.
Proceed to: D the reassembly of the axle shafts; D the filling of the wheel hubs; D the filling of the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
70
INTERMEDIATE AXLE - WET BRAKES
SECTION 6.2
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 6.3 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
REAR AXLE
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TBP457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EPICYCLIC REDUCER OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
First reduction: bevel gear pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Inlet flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inspection of the dismantled parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train . . . . . . . . 9
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SPECIFICATION AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Epicyclic reduction gear seals and thread---stops application and bearings scheme . 28
Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Bevel gear (first reduction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) . . . . . . 13
TANDEM TRANSMISSION AND DIFFERENTIAL OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Inspection of the disassembled parts . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Differential seals and thread---stops application and bearings scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Complete limited---skid differential assembly . . . . . 42 Crown wheel and bearings assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Thickness determination for bearing preload spacer S2 and bearing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Changing the oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Differential bearing preload determination . . . . . . . 47
REAR AXLE REMOVAL-- REFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Pinion assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Check of the pinion---crown wheel clearance . . . . 48 Verification of the pinion---crown wheel engagement impression area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 3
DESCRIPTION
The axle is a dual reduction bearing type. It consists of a boxed structure containing the cylindrical wheel transmission, the bevel gear pair with the differential (first reduction), the drive shafts and hubs with the epicyclic reducer (second reduction). The structure has mountings for connection to the chassis and housings for the bearings. Figure 1
276C063W001
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Rear suspension Transmission box and differential Axle Hub with epicyclic gears Upper stabilizer bar Motion input flange
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
First reduction: bevel gear pair The first reduction is obtained by the pinion---ring bevel gear unit (bevel gear pair) inside the differential. The input shaft is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by spacer. The pinion shaft receives the motion from a cylindrical wheel transmission with ratio 1:1. The pinion is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by spacer. The pinion axial position can also be adjusted by shims. The differential box with ring bevel gear is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in X arrangement with preload and axial position that can be adjusted by two opposing ring nuts. Inlet flange Figure 2 330 B
327 B
276C063D001B
Legend (figure on following page) 1. Right adjustment ring nut 2. Planet wheel---side conic roller bearing (D) 3. Crown wheel 4. Planet wheel holding shaft 5. Planet ---wheel 6. Crown wheel---side conic roller bearing (C) 7. Differential box 8. Left adjustment ring nut 9. Differential box 10. Ring bevel gear 11. Bevel pinion 12. Pinion internal conic roller bearing (A) 13. Pinion external conic roller bearing (B) 14. Motion input flange 15. Sealing ring A: Cross section B: Functional diagram
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 5
Figure 3
276C063003
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
The differential is a limited---skid differential, characterized by the positioning of a multiple---disc clutch between the differential case (upright) and the crown wheels (sun gears) for each side. The multiple---disc clutch includes external discs connected to the differential case and internal discs connected to the planetary gears. The thrust on the discs is ensured by the axial component of the force exchanged between the teeth of the planet ---wheels and crown wheels.
327B-330B
The axial thrust on the discs generates a resistant torque that acts on the crown wheel when the crown wheel tends to rotate with respect to the differential case due to the speed difference between the two wheels. This resistant torque depends, with equal axial thrust, on the dimensions and the coating material of the discs.
Figure 4
1. 2. 3.
Differential semicase Planetary gear Multiple---disc device for skid limitation
276C062005 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
Operation The torque coming from drive shaft is transmitted through a cardan joint to the bevel pinion. From this, the torque passes to the ring bevel gear, which is integral with the differential case. The differential is a gear train in which the case represents the upright, that holds the planet ---wheel holding shafts and receives the torque, while the two crown wheels represent the sun gears, both rotary, that receive the torque and transmit it to the axle shafts. When both the wheels are subject to the same resistant torque or have the same speed (vehicle traveling along a straight path), the ring bevel gear and the differential case rotate as a block, transmitting the torque in equal parts to the two crown wheels, and from these to the two axle shafts that rotate at the same speed: the wheels transmit the same driving torque. Figure 5
276C062006
The right wheel with the same adherence as the left.
REAR AXLE 7
Under these conditions, there is no relative motion between the two crown wheels, and thus the planet ---wheels do not rotate around their shaft which is integral with the differential case. When the resistance of one wheel exceeds that of the other or when the speed of the two wheels is no longer equal (vehicle traveling a curved path) the planetary gears assume a different rotation speed: their relative motion is allowed by the presence of the planet ---wheels, which now rotate around their own shaft in opposite directions. Naturally, a slower rotation speed of the crown wheel corresponds to a greater driving torque transmitted, and vice versa. Thus when the differential operates the wheel that has a smaller speed, it is able to transmit a greater driving torque, while the one with the greater speed transmits a smaller torque. Under certain conditions it may occur that the slower wheel completely loses adhesion, since the torque that can be transmitted to the ground is exceeded, and thus it encounters practically zero resistance: in this case, a normal differential causes the free rotation of the wheel that skids and the stopping of the wheel that still adheres to the ground: the traction capacity of the axle becomes zero. To remedy this inconvenience, a limited---skid differential is used that is characterized by the possibility to generate a resistant torque on each crown wheel, which is no longer free to rotate with respect to the differential case, but is braked in proportion to the torque that the differential must transmit. This resistant torque, which depends on the thrust applied to the multiple---disc clutch, is always in a fixed ratio with the input torque, known as the â&#x20AC;?locking ratioâ&#x20AC;?. The locking ratio is the percentage of maximum difference between the torque transmittable to the wheel with greater adherence and that on the wheel with less adherence. For example, with a locking ratio of 45%, 72,5% of the driving torque is transferred to one rear axle shaft (rather than the normal 50%), while the other axle shaft receives only 27.5%: the difference is precisely 45% (with respect to a total of 100%).
RH: right side: torque supplied is 50% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 50% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
If the two wheels do not have the same adherence, the resistant torque generated by the multiple---disc clutches partially locks the crown wheel on the side having less adherence and increases the torque supplied by the crown wheel on the side with more adherence. In other words, the braking torque replaces the reaction torque missing from the side of the wheel with less adherence. In this manner, considering the previous case in which one wheel loses adherence, this wheel is not able to turn freely and thus the other wheel will still be able to transmit part of the driving torque, ensuring at least some traction capacity of the axle.
327B-330B
In practice, the multiple---disc clutches automatically compensate the adherence variations of the wheels from the left side and right side of the vehicle, without requiring any driver operation. It is thus possible to apply a much larger driving force when using the vehicle, and prevent skidding when one of the wheels encounters a surface lacking adherence.
Figure 6
276C062007
Left wheel with less adherence than the right wheel (example) RH: right side: torque supplied is 72.5% of the total LH: left side: torque supplied is 27.5% of the total
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
Second reduction: hub and epicyclic train The second reduction is obtained by an epicyclic reducer with cylindrical wheels in the wheel hub. The hub is supported by two taper roller bearings mounted in O arrangement with preload that can be adjusted by a ring nut. The planetaries gear rotate on pivoting roller bearings. Operation The torque from the differential is transmitted by a floating drive shaft to the sun gear by the grooved shank. The four planetaries gears rotate in the opposite direction to the sun gear, whereas the crown wheel is integral with the hub support and therefore does not turn. This forces the train carrier to turn in the opposite direction to the planetaries gear, therefore in the same direction as the drive shaft. Since the train carrier is integral with the wheel hub, the wheel turns in the same direction as the drive shaft.
REAR AXLE 9
Legend (figure on following page) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
Epicyclic train upright (planet ---wheel holding plate) Thrust spacer Planet ---wheel Epicyclic train fixed gear Planet ---wheel pin Guide bushing Adjustment ring nut Epicyclic train crown wheel Hub Wheel fastening column Sealing rings Hub support Spacer Internal conic roller bearing External conic roller bearing Axle shaft Central retaining screw
A: Cross section B: Functional diagram
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
Figure 7
A
276C063W007B
B
276C063W008B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 11
SPECIFICATION AND DATA Hub Code Type
KESSLER D 81 Rigid, dual reduction
Central differential
Limited skid --- Gleason crown wheel and pinion
Pinion bearings
2 O---mounted conic roller bearings
Differential bearings
2 X---mounted conic roller bearings
Hub bearings
2 O---mounted conic roller bearings for each side
Hub planet bearings
Reduction ratio
3 x 4 needle cages for each side bevel gear pair
1 : 3.50
wheel reducer
1 : 6.00
total
1 : 21.00
Pinion bearings preload Bevel gear pair clearance Self---locking disks axial clearance Tandem transmission conic bearing preload Reduction gear upright ---axle shaft axial clearance Hub bearing preload Ring nut tightening torque
0.8 --- 1.2 Nm (0.59 --- 0.89 lb ft) see value engraved on the crown wheel 0.48 mm (0.018 in) minimum 1.0 Nm (0.737 lb ft) 0.30 --- 0.70 mm (0.012 --- 0.028 in) determined by the ring nut tightening torque 1st tightening: 700 --- 900 Nm (516.29 --- 663.80 lb ft) then loosen 2nd tightening: 450 Nm (331.90 lb ft)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
Bevel gear (first reduction) Figure 8
276C063009A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 13
Hub and epicyclic gear (second reduction) Figure 9
276C063W010
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 10
276C063W011A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 15
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 11
276C063W014B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
TOOLS 380002787
380002788
380002789
380002790
380002791
380002792
380002794
380002795
380002796
380002797
380002798
380002799
.
380002793
The tools listed below belong to a single axle equipment kit 380140049.
380002787 380002788 380002789 380002790 380002791 380002792 380002793 380002794 380002795 380002796 380002797 380002798 380002799
---------------------------
Spanner, Wheel Safety Nut Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Seal Ring Sleeve Driver Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Thread Ring Spanner, Differential Bearing Face Seal Installation Tool Disc Centering Tool Disc Centering Tool Seal Ring Sleeve Driver
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 17
DIAGNOSTICS Axle 1. Continuous noise 2. Cornering noise 3. Alternating noise 4. Sharp bangs during acceleration or deceleration 5. Oil leak
1
CONTINUOUS NOISE
Worn bearings.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Gears damaged or worn.
Replace them. YES
NO
Lack of lubrication.
Restore oil level. YES
NO
Incorrect adjustment of the clearances.
Adjust again YES
2
CORNERING NOISE
Worn planet ---wheels or crown wheels.
YES
Replace.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
3
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
ALTERNATING NOISE
Wheel bearings with excessive clearance.
YES
Adjust the bearings.
NO
Wheels mounted incorrectly.
Disassemble and remount correctly. YES
NO
Too little clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
NO
Too much clearance in the bevel gear set.
Adjust again. YES
4
SHARP BANGS DURING ACCELERATION OR DECELERATION
Incorrect gear train adjustment.
YES
Adjust again.
NO
Pivot of the anchoring structure has too much play.
Replace the parts of the articulated joint. YES
NO
Loose fastening of the anchoring structure to the chassis.
YES
Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
5
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 19
OIL LEAK
Worn oil seals.
YES
Replace them.
NO
Loose screws. YES
Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
MAINTENANCE
327B-330B
Changing the oil Collect and dispose of used lubricants and fluids, according to the laws in force
Checking oil level Proceed as follows: The level check can be carried out on the hubs or on the differential. If the level has to be restored, this is to be carried out on the differential.
Per effettuare lo scarico operare come segue: Figure 14
Figure 12
276NM019T
276NM020T
D take the reference on a hub to horizontal position (see arrow); D clean the cap area and open the level cap (1). Lubricant should drip out of the hole; D close the filler cap. or
D take the reference on the hub to horizontal position (see arrow); D arrange a suitably sized container, clean the cap area and remove the cap (1) and the drain cap (2); drain all the lubricant. D clean the cap, check that the threading is in good condition, replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the drain cap. D repeat the procedure for the other hub. D arrange a suitably sized container, clean the cap area and remove the cap (1) and the drain cap (2); drain all the lubricant.
Figure 13
276NM022T
D clean the area of the cap, then open the cap (1): the lubricant must leak from the hole; D if necessary restore the level until it overflows from the same cap; D close the cap; D check that the breather is perfectly clean and operational.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 21
To fill the oil, proceed as follows:
Figure 15
Figure 17
276NM022T
D arrange a suitably---sized container under the drain cap, clean the cap areas and then remove the filling cap (1); Figure 16
276NM063T
D pour in approx 3 litres of the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the cap hole (1); D replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the cap; D repeat the procedure for the other hub. Figure 18
1
276C063023
D remove the drain cap (1) and completely drain the lubricant; D clean the caps, check that the threading is in good condition, replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the drain cap.
276NM022T
D refill with the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the hole of the filling cap (1); Fill up slowly. The operation is finished when the level at the hole does not lower for a few minutes. D replace the sealing ring with a new one and close the cap; D perform a test drive and then recheck the level (1); D if necessary, top up with the prescribed lubricant until it overflows from the hole, repeat the test drive and recheck the level.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
REAR AXLE REMOVAL---REFIT Before starting any operation, make sure that all the precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved on the job have been made quite clear. Read the relevant instructions contained in SECTION 1 of this handbook. If in doubt ask someone who is more expert. Comply to all the general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance work. Removal Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle on a suitable flat, solid surface, switch off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the warning notices; D deactivate the battery isolator or disconnect the battery terminals to prevent any risk of a short circuit; D Block articulation by means of the steering lock bar, proceeding as indicated in SECTION 1;
D raise the vehicle so the wheels are off the ground, then place two supporting trestles under the rear chassis without touching the axles; D position under each intermediate and rear axle an appropriate hydraulic supporting device that permits lowering for the removal, so that at this stage the two axles are more or less horizontal; D remove both wheels following the instructions in SECTION 9; D disconnect the electrical connection of the brake cooling circuits pressure switch (1); D disconnect the axle bleed pipe (4); D remove the propeller shaft (18) following the instructions in SECTION 7; D working on both sides of each rocker arm, remove the split pin and unscrew the locking nut (8) of the rocker arm pin; remove both the bolts (10) that fasten the tie---rod to the bracket; D take out the rocker arm pin (9), keeping the washers (6) and the guide bushings (7), releasing the rocker arm from the axle; D lower the axle with care and remove it from the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 23
Figure 19
276C063W027
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
EPICYCLIC REDUCER OVERHAUL
327B-330B
Figure 21
Before starting any operation, make sure that all the precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved on the job have been made quite clear. Read the relevant instructions contained in SECTION 1 of this handbook. If in doubt ask someone who is more expert. Comply to all the general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance work.
.
.
Before proceeding, it is necessary to: D drain the lubricant from the wheel hub; D drain the lubricant from the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter. Before proceeding, the brake caliper must be removed following the instructions in the relative chapter.
276C063W031
D unscrew the central retaining screw (1) and remove the fixed gear (2) and guide bushing (3) complete with spacer ring (4); D slip off the axle shaft (5) if necessary; Figure 22
Disassembly Proceed as follows: Figure 20
276C063W030
D mark the mutual position of the planet ---wheel holding plate and the hub; D loosen and remove all the retaining screws (1); D remove the planet ---wheel holding plate assembly (2) and O---ring (3) and recover the thrust spacer ring (4);
276C062032
D unscrew the setscrew (1) of the ring nut; D remove the locking ring nut (2) of the internally toothed crown wheel. The ring nut is locked with thread ---stops. To prevent damage to the threading, heat to approximately 120° C (248 ° F) before unscrewing.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
D using a suitable lifting device, carefully remove the complete hub from the hub support;
REAR AXLE 25
Figure 25
During this operation, keep the hub parallel to the axle axis to avoid damaging the brake discs. D remove the front sealing ring; D place the hub vertically; Figure 23
276C062035B
D Remove the oil seal ring (1); D with an appropriate puller remove the outer ring (2) of the bearing on the axle side (A) and the outer ring (3) of the bearing on the wheel side (B).
276C062D033
D use a suitable extractor to remove the internally toothed crown wheel (1); Figure 24
276C062D034
D remove the retaining screws (1) and relative stop plates (2); D separate the internally toothed crown wheel (3) from the relative flange (4); D using a suitable extractor, remove the inner race (5) of the wheel---side bearing (B) from the crown wheel flange; D If necessary remove the wheel fastening screws from the hub;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
Figure 26
327B-330B
Figure 28
276C062W037
D remove the inner race (1) of the axle---side bearing (A) and the spacer ring (2) from the hub; The spacer ring is blocked with sealant. To avoid damaging it, before removing, heat to approx. 120 ° C (248 ° F).
276C062D038
D remove the planet wheel (1) and relative shim rings (2); Figure 29
Figure 27
274A062039
D remove the needle cages (arrow) from the planet --wheel; D repeat the procedure for all the planet ---wheels. 274A062029
D place the planet ---wheel holding plate on a suitable work surface; D use a punch to push the retaining pin (1) down in the pivot, freeing the pivot (2); D extract the pivot (2) by pushing it towards the inside of the planet ---wheel holding plate (arrow); D remove the O---ring (3); D extract the pin from the pivot. Do not push the pivot towards the outside of the planet---wheel holding plate, otherwise its seat may be damaged due to the difference between the internal and external diameter of the pivot.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
Inspection of the dismantled parts Wheel hub D check the seats of the bearings: they must not have any deformations and/or ovalling; D check the condition of the bearings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Axle shafts D check the condition of the axle shafts: replace them if they have deformations on the end grooves and/or on the entire length.
REAR AXLE 27
Reassembly During reassembly, consider the following general observations: D heat, to 100° C (212 ° F) in the oven, the bearings and rings to be mounted by pushing; D carefully center and mount the sealing rings and bearings with a suitable adjuster; D lubricate the ring nuts and bearings.
Final reductions D check the condition of the gear toothing: replace them if they have pitting, cracks and/or cavities; D verify the good operation of the planet ---wheels and the roller bushings; D check the threading for the bearing locking ring nut: it must not have any dents, deformations and/or jams.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
Epicyclic reduction gear seals and thread-- stops application and bearings scheme Figure 30
276C063W044B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
Planet ---wheel holding plate assembly
REAR AXLE 29
Figure 33
Proceed as follows: D position the planet ---wheel holding plate horizontally; Figure 31
274A062035
274A062032
D mount the needle cages inside the planet gear; Figure 32
D insert the O---ring (1) in the seat of the planet ---wheel holding plate; D insert the pivot (2) of the planet ---wheel holding gear so that the pin holes match up; D or according to the versions; D insert the pivot (2) of the planet ---wheel holding gear up to the complete expulsion of the internal retention bush so that the pin holes match up; Mount the pivot from the internal part of the planet---wheel holding plate, otherwise its seat may be damaged due to the pivot diameter difference. D mount the catch pin (3); D repeat the procedure for all the planet ---wheels.
276C062D052
D mount the planet ---wheel (1) complete with shim rings in the seat on the planet ---wheel holding plate;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
Brake unit and hub assembly
327B-330B
Figure 35
Proceed as follows: Figure 34
276C061D053
D place the hub vertically; D using a suitable introducer, mount the outer race (1) of the wheel---side conic roller bearing (B) and the outer race (2) of the axle---side conic roller bearing (A); D mount the inner race (3) of the axle---side conic roller bearing (A);
276C062W054
D With an appropriate tool, insert the seal ring (2) into the seat, flush with the external edge of the hub, paying attention to the orientation (detail);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 31
Figure 36
276C063W066
D heat the spacer ring (1) and insert it completely on the axle axis; D using a suitable lifting device, support the hub assembly in order to ensure its correct centering; D introduce the hub assembly (2) on the end of the hub support (3), placing the inner race of the axle--side conic roller bearing (A) so that it rests against the spacer ring; During this operation, keep the hub parallel to the axle axis. Work with caution to avoid damaging the sealing rings and the brake disc teeth. Continue to support the hub assembly until it is completely mounted. D if removed, mount the stud bolts fastening the wheel to the hub (4);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
Hub bearing preload determination Proceed as follows:
Figure 37
Figure 39
276C062W067
D heat the inner race (1) of the wheel---side conic roller bearing (B) and insert it until it rests against the gear wheel flange; D insert the gear wheel flange (2) onto the gear wheel with internal toothing (3); D mount the retention plates (4) and fix them with the setscrews;
276C062069
D apply MOLYKOTE lubricant on the hub support threading and on the threading and contact area of the locking ring nut; D hand mount the ring nut (1) without tightening; D tighten the locking ring nut to the prescribed tightening torque: Locking ring nut tightening torque for bearings Phase 1: 700-- 900 Nm (516.29 -- 663.80 lb ft)
Figure 38
During the locking, rotate the hub back and forth by striking it with a plastic hammer to settle the bearings. D unscrew the locking ring nut half a turn; D tighten the locking ring nut to the prescribed tightening torque: Locking ring nut tightening torque for bearings Phase 2: 450 Nm (331.90 lb ft) During the locking, rotate the hub back and forth by striking it with a plastic hammer to settle the bearings. 276C062W068
D mount the flange and internally toothed gear wheel assembly (1) onto the hub until the two parts meet the wheel---side conic roller bearing (B). The lubrication oil passage hole on the toothed wheel flange is to face downwards.
D after having adjusted the bearing preload, block the locking ring nut with the relative setscrew (2); If this is not possible, unscrew the ring nut as much as needed in order to mount the clamp screw.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 33
Planet ---wheel holding plate --- fixed gear axial clearance determination Proceed as follows:
Figure 40
Figure 41
276C063W070
D insert the axle shafts (1) into the axle; D mount the spacer ring (2), guide bushing (3) and fixed gear (4); D mount the central retaining screw (5) and tighten it. 274A062043
D determine the dimension A; D determine the dimension B; D determine the thickness of the thrust spacer as follows: S = A --- B +(0.30 to 0.70 mm) (0.012 to 0.027 in) where: A = distance between the planet ---wheel holding plate mounting surface and the seat of the thrust spacer on the same plate B = distance between the hub mounting surface and the thrust spacer seat on the fixed gear S = thrust spacer thickness 0.30 to 0.70 = prescribed clearance in mm D mount the chosen thrust spacer onto the planet --wheel holding plate.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
Concluding operations Figure 42
276C063W073
D mount the O---ring (1) in the seat of the planet ---wheel holding plate; D mount the planet ---wheel holding plate assembly (2) in the hub. Respect the reference marks made during disassembly. D mount the retaining screws (3) and tighten to the prescribed torque.
.
If no intervention on the differential is planned, proceed to: D the filling of the wheel hub; D the filling of the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 35
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
TANDEM TRANSMISSION AND DIFFERENTIAL OVERHAUL Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Disassembly
.
Before proceeding, the axle shafts must be removed following the instructions in the relative chapter.
Proceed as follows: Figure 43
276C063W080
D straighten the dent and remove the motion input flange stop nut (1); D using a suitable extractor, remove the flange (2); D mark the relative position between box and axle; D loosen and remove the screws (3) fastening the external box to the axle;
D using a suitable lifting device, remove the external box assembly from the axle; D position the assembly on the support trestle, adapting as necessary.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 37
Differential disassembly Proceed as follows:
Figure 44
Figure 46
276C063081
D unscrew the retaining screws and remove the locking plate (1) of both the bearing preload adjustment ring nuts; D loosen both the bearing preload adjustment ring nuts (2); D mark each support cap and the corresponding external box location; D loosen the retaining screws (3) and remove both the support caps (4); D remove both the adjustment ring nuts; Figure 45
274A062048
D remove the outer race (1) of the crown wheel---side bearing (C) and the outer race (2) of the planet wheel---side bearing (D); D use appropriate extractors to extract the inner race (3) of the crown wheel---side bearing (C) and the inner race of the planet wheel---side bearing (D) from the differential semicases; D mark both the differential semicases; D loosen the retaining screws and remove the differential semicase; Figure 47
274A062047
D using a suitable lifting device, extract the differential assembly (1) from the relative case.
274A062049
D disassemble the planet ---wheel group into the different components; D remove the discs of the skid limitation device and the relative shoulder rings; D if necessary, separate the ring bevel gear from the differential semicase by unscrewing the retaining screws.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
Pinion disassembly Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Figure 50
Figure 48
276C0630D82A
D remove the cover (1) the seal ring (2) and the O--ring (3); Figure 49
276C063084
D use a press and pad to extract the pinion (1) from the pinion box; Figure 51
276C063083
D remove the complete pinion box (1); D recover the pinion position adjustment spacer S1 (2);
276C063D095
D remove the inner race (1) of bearing (B) and bearing preload spacer S2 (2) from the pinion box.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 39
Figure 52
276C063D096
D use a suitable extractor to remove the outer race (1) of bearing (B) and the outer race (2) of bearing (A) from the pinion box; Figure 53
274A062055
D using a suitable extractor (1), remove the inner race (2) of bearing (A).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
Inspection of the disassembled parts Bearings D check the condition of the bearings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Crown wheels D check the condition of the toothing: replace it if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities. Planet ---gears D check the condition of the toothing: replace it if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities; D check the coupling surfaces with the pins. Damage to a single element entails the replacement of the entire gear unit.
327B-330B
Reassembly During reassembly consider the following general observations: D heat, to 100° C (212 ° F) in the oven, the bearings and rings to be mounted by pushing; D carefully center and mount the sealing rings and bearings with a suitable adjuster; D lubricate the bushes, sealing rings and bearings. Perform all the indicated measurements with maximum precision. Imprecise measurements lead to bad contact of the bevel gear and thus make it necessary to repeat the procedure.
Cross pins D check the coupling surfaces with the planet ---gears. Shoulder rings D check the condition of the rings: replace them if they have bluish halos, cracks and/or signs of wear. Bevel gear D check that the toothing of the crown wheel and the pinion show uniform wear on the entire working zone of the teeth: replace the bevel gear if it has pits, cracks and/or cavities; An anomalous wear may indicate an incorrect adjustment of the bearings: check their integrity before proceeding to the reassembly. Damage to a single element entails the replacement of the entire gear unit. D check the bearing seats: they must not have deformations or ovalling. Bushes D check the threading for the bearing locking bush: it must not have dents, deformations and/or jams. External box D check the bearing seats: they must not have deformations or ovalling; D check that the sealing surfaces and the threadings are integral and free of dents or damage.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 41
Differential seals and thread-- stops application and bearings scheme Figure 54
276C063087A For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
Complete limited-- skid differential assembly Proceed as follows:
.
Refer to the following figure.
D check the following measurements: SP1 = 3.10 mm (0.1220 in) minimum; SP2 = 2.15 mm (0.0846 in) minimum. D otherwise, use shoulder discs with a greater thickness; D mount the shoulder ring (2) and elastic ring (3); D position the shoulder disc (SP1) (4); D alternately mount an externally grooved disc (driven plate) and an internally grooved disc (driving plate) until all discs (5) have been mounted; The last disc is a driving plate.
D D D D D
D
D D D
mount the shoulder disc (SP2) (6); mount the elastic ring (7); mount the planetary gear; repeat the assembly for the other semicase; when finished, check that dimension A falls within the prescribed values; 52.8 < A < 53.27 mm (2.0787 in < A < 2.0972 in) when finished, check that dimension B falls within the prescribed values; B < 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) otherwise, use shoulder discs with a greater thickness or reduce the thickness by grinding; assemble the shafts and planet ---wheel gears and mount the assembly on the crown wheel; join the two semicases and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed torque. The two semicases are symmetric except for the crown wheel assembly flange. The total height of the crown wheel---side disc pack must be identical to that on the opposite side.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 43
Differential semicase Shoulder ring Elastic ring Semicase shoulder disc SP1 Driven (N.4) and driving (N.4) discs Crown wheel shoulder disc SP2 Elastic ring Crown wheel --- planet ---wheel group
Dimension A: disc pack thickness Dimension B: Shoulder ring --- crown wheel clearance Figure 55
276C062091 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
44
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
327B-330B
Crown wheel and bearings assembly Figure 56
274A062060
Proceed as follows: D check that the area of contact between the gear (1) and differential semicase (2) is clean and free of grease; D mount the crown wheel on the semicase and tighten the fastening bolts (3) to the prescribed torque; Figure 57
274A062062
D heat the inner race (1) of the planet wheel---side conic roller bearing (D) and mount it against the differential semicase; D heat the inner race (2) of the crown wheel---side conic roller bearing (C) and mount it against the differential semicase.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 45
Thickness determination for bearing preload spacer S2 and bearing assembly Figure 58
276C063088
Proceed as follows: D position the pinion box vertically; D mount both the outer races of bearings (A) and (B) in the seat; D temporarily mount both the inner races of bearings (A) and (B); D determine the dimension d1; D determine the dimension d2 on the pinion; D determine the thickness of the bearing preload spacer S2 as follows: S2 = d1 -- d2 (mm) where: d1 = distance between the bearing (A) inner race shoulder and the internal edge of the bearing (B) inner race d2 = distance between the internal bearing inner race support and the bearing preload spacer S2 support S2 = thickness of the bearing preload spacer S2. D remove both the inner races of bearings (A) and (B.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
46
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
Figure 59
327B-330B
Figure 61
1
276C062093
D heat the inner race of bearing (A) and mount it on the pinion;
2
Figure 60
3 276C063091A
D tighten the fastening screws (1) to the specified torque; D couple the flange (2) onto the groove of the pinion; D apply MOLYKOTE on the pinion threading and on the threading and contact area of the stop nut; D mount the stop nut (3) and tighten it to the prescribed torque. Use a new stop nut. During the locking, rotate the pinion back and forth by striking it with a plastic hammer to settle the bearings.
276C063090
D insert the pinion (1) into the pinion box; D mount the chosen bearing preload spacer S2 (2); D heat the inner race (3) of bearing (B) and mount it on the pinion; D position the spacer S1 (4) and then mount the pinion box in the external box.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 47
Differential bearing preload determination Proceed as follows:
Figure 62
Figure 63
1731281
D use a suitable tool to check that the rolling torque falls within the prescribed values: Rolling torque for pinion bearings 0.8 -- 1.2 Nm (0.59 -- 0.88 lb ft) D otherwise, correct the rolling resistance by using a spacer S2 with a different thickness; D in particular: --- increase the thickness to reduce the torque --- reduce the thickness to increase the torque D remove the pinion stop nut and relative flange; D remove the retaining screws and slip off the complete pinion box.
17312101
D position the bearing outer races on both ends of the differential; D using a suitable lifting device, mount the crown wheel assembly in the differential box; D apply MOLYKOTE on the threading of the adjustment ring nuts; D screw on both the ring nuts by hand; Figure 64
17312102
D align the reference marks and mount the bearing support caps; D mount the cap retaining screws and tighten them; D use a suitable tool to check that the rolling torque falls within the prescribed values: Rolling torque for crown wheel and pinion bearings 2.0-- 3.0 Nm (1.47-- 2.21 lb ft) D the rolling torque can be corrected by turning both the adjustment ring nuts by the same number of notches; D In particular: --- unscrew the ring nuts to decrease the torque; --- screw on the ring nuts to increase the torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
48
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
Pinion assembly Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Check of the pinion-- crown wheel clearance Proceed as follows:
Figure 65
Figure 67
276C063092A
D insert the sealing ring (1) into the cover (2) following the assembly direction and fill it completely with lubricating grease for bearings; D fit the O---ring (3) in the cover;
17312104
D mount a dial gauge at a right angle with respect to the external diameter of the crown wheelâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s toothed side and turn the crown wheel back and forth, being careful not to move the pinion; D check that the clearance between the crown wheel and pinion falls within the prescribed values: pinion-- crown wheel clearance see value engraved on the crown wheel D otherwise, adjust the clearance using the adjustment ring nuts; D the clearance can be adjusted without modifying the bearing preload by unscrewing one adjustment ring nut by a certain number of notches and screwing on the opposite adjustment ring nut by the same number of notches.
Figure 66
Figure 68
1 2 3 276C063093A
mount the complete pinion box in the external box; tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque; mount the cover (1) complete with sealing ring; screw on the retaining screws and tighten to the prescribed tightening torque; D insert the flange (2) and tighten the stop nut (3) to the prescribed torque. D D D D
17312105
D In particular: --- unscrew the ring nut (D) and screw on the ring nut (C) to reduce the clearance (white arrow); --- unscrew the ring nut (C) and screw on the ring nut (D) to increase the clearance (black arrow).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 6.3
REAR AXLE 49
Verification of the pinion-- crown wheel engagement impression area Proceed as follows: Figure 69
17312106
D cover a dozen teeth of the crown wheel with Prussian blue, lubricated with minium, or another paint or dye that can be easily removed; D make a complete rotation of the crown wheel by hand; D when the teeth engage, the paint is removed by the contact of the teeth, leaving zones exposed with the exact dimension, shape and location of contact; Figure 70
274A062063
Contact area position and shape 1. correct bevel gear position; 2. position with the pinion too far back: it is necessary to reduce the distance between the pinion and the crown wheel axis by using a spacer S1 of less thickness; then adjust the clearance by moving the crown wheel further from the pinion; 3. position with the pinion too far forward: it is necessary to increase the distance between the pinion and the crown wheel axis by using a spacer S1 of greater thickness; then adjust the clearance by moving the crown wheel closer to the pinion; For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
50
REAR AXLE
SECTION 6.3
D to replace the spacer S1, remove the stop nut, flange, and retaining screws and slip off the complete pinion box; D position the new spacer, then reassemble the pinion box and tighten the retaining screws to the prescribed tightening torque; D insert the flange and tighten the stop nut to the prescribed torque;
327B-330B
Figure 72
Figure 71
274A062064
274A062066
D dent the nut as described in the figure; If this is not possible, unscrew the nut as much as necessary to dent it.
D once all the adjustments and configurations are correct, fix the locking plate (1) of both the ring nuts using screws; D support the complete external box with suitable lifting equipment; D mount the complete external box assembly onto the axle respecting the reference marks made during disassembly; D screw on the retaining screws and tighten to the prescribed torque.
.
Proceed to: D the reassembly of the axle shafts; D the filling of the wheel hubs; D the filling of the central differential; following the instructions provided in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 7 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
DRIVELINE
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 7
DRIVELINE
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 7
DRIVELINE 1
CONTESTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Parking brake efficiency verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Transmission shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Central splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Replacement of the parking brake pads . . . . . . . . . 13
Drive axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Driveline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DETACHMENT-- REATTACHMENT OF THE PARKING BRAKE DISC AND CALIPER . . . . . . . . 15
Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Detachment of disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Central section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Detachment of the central section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Parking brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Reattachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CENTRAL BEARING OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 INSPECTION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Parking brake caliper release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 7
DRIVELINE 3
DESCRIPTION The drive transmission line consists of the following parts: Transmission shafts The transmission shafts are: D Crankshaft --- automatic transmission D Front shaft D Rear section shaft I D Transmission shaft central support D Rear section shaft II D Shaft between axles Each shaft has universal joints at either end.
Central splitter The double satellite sun and planet gearbox central splitter can be locked through a control in the cab. It is built into the lower part of the automatic gearbox. Splitting ratio is 2/3 to the rear axle and 1/3 to the front axle in normal conditions. Locking is controlled by an electro---pneumatic actuator. Drive axles The drive axles are rigid type. They are fitted with limited slip central differential and central limited slip wheel hubs with final planetary gear reducer. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Front axle Intermediate axle Rear axle Central splitter
Figure 1
292A07001R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
327B-330B
Driveline 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Engine Crankshaft ---automatic transmission shaft Automatic transmission with central splitter Front transmission shaft Front axle Rear transmission shaft first section Transmission shaft central support Parking brake Rear transmission shaft second section ntermediate axles Shaft between axles Rear axle Figure 2
292A007002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
SECTION 7
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
292A007003R
Engine Crankshaft ---automatic transmission shaft Automatic transmission with central splitter Front transmission shaft Front axle Rear transmission shaft first section Transmission shaft central support Parking brake Rear transmission shaft central support Intermediate axle Shaft between axles Rear axle
327B-330B DRIVELINE 5
Driveline Figure 3
6
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
Drive shaft The drive shafts are all equipped with cardan joints at the ends. The self---adapting shaft is capable of absorbing, within certain limits, variations of length during operation caused by the relative movement of the respective end joints.
1. 2. 3. 4.
327B-330B
Axle shaft with external groove Axle shaft with internal groove Sealing ring Protective sleeve
Figure 4
276C007002
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 7
Central section The central section uncouples the two motion drive shafts from the axles and supports the parking brake disc. It is supported by two rigid spherical watertight supports.
1. 2. 3. 4.
DRIVELINE 7
Input flange Rigid support Parking brake disc Output flange
Figure 5
276C007003
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
327B-330B
Parking brake unit Description The parking brake acts on the transmission at the tandem axles of the vehicle. The brake unit is composed of a caliper with two pads on the two sides of a disc. The disc is mounted on the central section of the drive shaft. The pads are mounted on a floating caliper operated by a pneumatically controlled spring cylinder. The caliper is mounted on the chassis by means of an interface bracket.
For further information on the parking brake control, see Section 12 --- PNEUMATIC SYSTEM. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Brake disc Brake caliper Spring cylinder Central section of the drive shaft Parking brake caliper support bracket
Figure 6
276C007004
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 7
DRIVELINE 9
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA Parking brake Circuit
Independent
Type of brake
Disc on the transmission
Control
Pneumatic
Type of caliper
Floating
External diameter of disc
378.0 mm
14.88 in
Internal diameter of disc
---
---
rated
25.4 mm
1.0 in
minimum
22.0 mm
0.87 in
5.1 mm
0.20 in
Thickness of disc Minimum pad thickness
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES
292A007004R
Figure 7
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 7
DRIVELINE 11
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 8
276C007006
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
INSPECTION PROCEDURES
327B-330B
Figure 11
Parking brake caliper release In the event in which the compressed air does not arrive in the parking brake circuit, the vehicle is automatically braked by the force gradient cylinder. Figure 9
269NU4D3
269NU4D2
To allow for the towing of the vehicle, the brake must be disengaged through the mechanical release device operated through a maneuver screw. Do as follows: D place appropriate wedges in front of wheels; D open the rubber protection plug; Figure 10
269NU4D3
D insert the maneuver screw and rotate it by 90° in order to engage it in the slot;
D work on the nut until achieving the release of the brake pads. To restore the normal functional conditions it is sufficient to repeat the operations described above in the reverse order, recovering the maneuver screw and closing the protection plug and lower cover. After the intervention on the emergency release device, the vehicle must be towed exclusively and absolutely must not circulate in an independent manner. Before resuming normal use of the vehicle, it is IMPERATIVE to restore the working position of the force gradient cylinder. Parking brake efficiency verification Proceed as follows: D Bring the vehicle onto a surface which is flat and large enough to allow for small movements. D Shut off the engine, move the selector to the Neutral position and engage the parking brake; the parking brake indicator light must light up. D With the engine off, disengage the parking brake: the parking brake indicator light must turn off. D Engage and disengage the parking brake repeatedly until the indicator light remains on when it is disengaged. D Start the engine and wait until the parking brake light turns off. D Select manual mode, engage first gear, let the vehicle advance VERY SLOWLY, then operate the parking brake: the indicator light must light up and the vehicle must stop immediately (the gear automatically enters Neutral).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 7
MAINTENANCE
DRIVELINE 13
Figure 14
Replacement of the parking brake pads Removal Do as follows: Figure 12
269NU271
D disengage the parking brake (position 0);
269NU271
D engage the parking brake (position 1); Figure 13
276A007001
D disconnect the pneumatic piping (1) of the parking brake control; D release the pads by following the instructions in the relative chapter;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
327B-330B
Figure 15
276A007003
D remove the plastic dust cover (1); D remove the lock ring (2) and take off the pin (3); D turn over (arrow) the retaining bracket (4), then slip off both pads (5). Installation Do as follows: D thoroughly clean the caliper; Remove the dirt using a NON ---metallic brush and a vacuum cleaner. Figure 16
D unscrew the automatic clearance recovery mechanism completely; D mount the new pads by inserting them from the upper part and sliding them on the surface of the disc until making contact with the lower rest supports; D lower the retaining bracket, then mount the pin and secure it with the lock ring; D mount the dust ---cover; D screw on the automatic clearance recovery mechanism completely until zeroing the clearance, then unscrew it by seven clicks (2/3 of a turn) in order to obtain the of correct operational clearance; D mount the washer and screw cap; D connect the pneumatic pipe fitting; D proceed to the restoration of the rotocamera operation as indicated in the relative chapter; D restore the functional conditions of the vehicle. Activate the parking brake 10---12 times to obtain the correct arrangement of pads. During the first period of use the effectiveness of the parking brake may be slightly reduced.
276A007004
D remove the screw cap (arrow) and relative washer;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 7
DETACHMENT ---REATTACHMENT OF THE PARKING BRAKE DISC AND CALIPER
DRIVELINE 15
Figure 17
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects have been clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Detachment of disc Do as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D disconnect the battery---disconnect switch or disconnect the battery terminals in order to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, as indicated in SECTION 1;
269NU271
D engage the parking brake (position 1); Figure 18
276A007001
D disconnect the pneumatic piping (1) of the parking brake control; D release the pads following the instructions in the relative chapter; Figure 19
269NU271
D disengage the parking brake (position 0);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
Figure 20
327B-330B
Figure 23
276A007002
D remove the upper cover (arrow) from the rear chassis; Figure 21
276A007012
D unscrew the screws fastening the caliper (arrow) to the support bracket; Figure 24
276C07010
D disconnect all the hydraulic pipelines from the rear chassis plate; D unscrew the retaining screws and remove the plate (1) from the chassis; Figure 22
276C07011
D remove the drive shaft (1) between the central support and automatic transmission;
276A007013
D remove the caliper including the rotochamber, extracting it from the upper part of the chassis.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 7
Detachment of the central section Proceed as follows: D remove the parking brake caliper following the instructions provided previously;
DRIVELINE 17
Figure 27
Figure 25
276C07014
D remove the retaining screws between the rear shaft cardan joint flange (1) and the central section flange; Figure 26
276C07016
D remove the central section complete with supports, extracting it from the upper part of the chassis. Reattachment Proceed with the reattachment by performing the detachment operations in the reverse order.
276C07015
D remove the retaining screws (arrow) fastening both supports to the chassis; Support the central section appropriately during removal, making sure that it doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t fall.
Apply LOCTITE 242 thread ---stops to the retaining screws of the caliper and cardan joint flange. Tighten to the prescribed tightening torque. After having connected the pneumatic piping of the parking brake control, restore the rotochamber.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
DRIVELINE
SECTION 7
327B-330B
CENTRAL BEARING OVERHAUL Dismantling Proceed as follows: Figure 28
276C07020
D Remove the locking nuts (1) from both sides and recover the washer (2). D Remove the flange (3) from both sides. Figure 29
276C07021
D Slip off the rigid support (1) from both sides. D Remove the disc locking ring nut (2). D Slip the disc (3) off the shaft (4). Reassembly Proceed with the reattachment by performing the detachment operations in the reverse order. Tighten the ring nut to the prescribed tightening torque. Proceed with the dynamic balancing of the group before reassembling. Residual unbalance Grade G16 (ISO 1940). For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 8 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
SUSPENSIONS
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDER REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Hydro---pneumatic cylinder --- description . . . . . . . . 4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Hydro---pneumatic cylinder --- section . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Hydro---pneumatic cylinder --- view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FRONT BALL JOINT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Rear suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
REAR SUSPENSION REMOVAL-REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Rear suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DISASSEMBLY-- REASSEMBLY OF THE REAR SUSPENSION CENTRAL BUSHINGS . . . . 23
Front suspension cylinder inflating device . . . . . . . 10
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Equipment connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Checking suspension cylinder height . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DETACHMENT-- REATTACHMENT OF THE REAR SUSPENSION STABILIZER BARS . . . . . . 25
Checking suspension element pressure . . . . . . . . 11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Inflating the suspension elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Deflating the suspension element pressure . . . . . . 12
DETACHMENT-- REATTACHMENT OF THE REAR SUSPENSION BUSHINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Changing the suspension fluid element . . . . . . . . . 13
Detachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
FRONT SUSPENSION REMOVAL-REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Reattachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
REPLACEMENT OF THE FLEXIBLE COUPLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 SUSPENSION CYLINDER OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . 32 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS 3
DESCRIPTION Front suspension The axle is connected to a wishbone, in turn connected by a ball joint to the vehicle chassis. A Panhard type torque bar checks any transverse stress. Vertical loads are controlled by a pair of pneumo---hydraulic elements that serves as both suspension and shock ---absorber. Two steel cables connect the wishbone to the chassis and also serve as excursion limiters for the suspension. Figure 1
292A008001R
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Wishbone Central ball joint Panhard bar Right pneumo---hydraulic element Left pneumo---hydraulic element Front axle
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
Hydro -- pneumatic cylinder -- description The hydro---pneumatic element consists of a coaxial shock absorber filled with oil and nitrogen. The internal piston, integral with the large diameter hollow rod, separates the two internal and external chambers: it has one---way valves that act as shock absorbers. The external casing of the cylinder is connected to the front suspension floating plate, whereas the rod is fastened to the vehicle chassis: in both cases connection is by ball joint. A lining ensures the piston seal inside the cylinder, whereas a set of gaskets prevents the liquid flowing out between the rod and the cylinder base . The hydro---pneumatic element uses hydraulic fluid for hydraulic braking during the return stroke, while the nitrogen acts as the suspension elastic element during the compression stroke.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
327B-330B
Hydro -- pneumatic cylinder -- section
.
The cylinder is shown in the completely closed position.
Figure 2
Bottom attachment Top attachment Cylinder Rod and piston Base Drain plug Seals of the piston Seals of the rod Filling valve
276D008011
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS 5
Hydro -- pneumatic cylinder -- view Figure 3
276D00012
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Bottom attachment Top attachment Cylinder Rod and piston Base Drain plug Seals of the piston Seals of the rod Filling valve
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
Rear suspension The rear suspension consists of two rocker arms linked to the chassis in their central point. The ends of the rocker arm are connected respectively to the intermediate axle and the rear axle. Two upper reaction rods, inserted between each axle and the chassis control the lengthwise sway. The suspension has no flexible elements or shock absorbers. Figure 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Left rocker arm (right not shown) Central rocker arm articulation Rear axle Rear reaction rod Rear axle---balancer trunnion Intermediate axle Front reaction rod Rear axle---balancer trunnion
292A008007R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS 7
TECHNICAL DATA Stem diameter
100 mm (3.94 in)
External diameter
150 mm (5.91 in)
Internal diameter (bore)
125 mm (4.92 in)
Center---to---center with cylinder closed
506 mm (19.92 in)
Maximum travel
120 mm (4.72 in)
Internal volume with cylinder closed
1705 cc (104.05 cuin)
Maximum working pressure
200 bar (2900.75 psi)
Inflation pressure Quantity of fluid Nominal tare height
30 bar (435.11 psi) 1.55 liters (0.33 imp gal) 72 mm (2.83 in) 57 < X < 87 mm (2.24 < X < 3.43 in)
Tare height (° ) (measurement X) (° ° )
(° ) (° ° )
Vehicle in running order measure from the beginning of the stem up to the stop of the cylinder.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Front suspension Figure 5
292A008002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS 9
TIGHTENING TORQUES Rear suspension Figure 6
292A008008R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8 Equipment connection diagram
MAINTENANCE The following operations must be carried out by experienced personnel using suitably equipment. Only use the specific equipment expressly required to carry out suspension inflating operations.
.
327B-330B
Figure 8
Carry out the following operations on both suspension cylinders at the same time.
Front suspension cylinder inflating device Figure 7
269NM271
A: B: C. D: E: F: G: H: I: L:
checking tool inflating device copper seal copper seal pressure gauge (0 --- 50 bar) (0 --- 725 PSI) hose clear tube hose nitrogen cylinder fitting hose fitting
292ANM022L
a. suspension cylinder b. nitrogen supply cylinder A: checking tool B: inflating device E: pressure gauge (0 --- 50 bar) (0 --- 725 PSI) IN: nitrogen into suspension knob (control) OUT: nitrogen suspension breather knob (control)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
Checking suspension cylinder height Carry out the check after parking the empty vehicle on flat ground for at least one hour.
SUSPENSIONS 11
Figure 11
Figure 9
276D008013
D check that position X (control dimension) shown in the figure is within the specified range for both elements; D check inflation pressure as follows if the measurements are not correct. Checking suspension element pressure Carry out the check after parking the empty vehicle on flat ground for at least one hour. Proceed as follows: D remove the fastening bolt from both sides and disconnect the steel---wire stop ropes in order to allow the maximum extension of the cylinders; D raise the vehicle wheels off the ground with suitable devices to fully extend the suspension; Proceed with caution in order to avoid damaging the cylinders when themaximumextension is reached. Figure 10
292ANM022L
D check that the inlet knob IN and the breather tap OUT on the inflation tool (B) are closed; D connect the inflation fixture (B) to the checking tool (A); D SLOWLY screw the checking tool wheel (A) to open the valve; D check that the pressure on the gauge (E) is in the specified range; D otherwise inflate or deflate as shown below; D unscrew the checking tool wheel (A), disconnect the inflation fixture from the socket and remove all the equipment, then close the protection cap.
292ANM008L
D unscrew the protection cap and assemble the checking tool (A) in the seat;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
Inflating the suspension elements D arrange the vehicle and equipment as described previously; Figure 12
327B-330B
Deflating the suspension element pressure D release gas by means of the OUT breather valve knob to reach the required pressure; D close the OUT vent cock; D unscrew the checking tool wheel (A), disconnect the inflation fixture from the socket and remove all the equipment, then close the protection cap. D restore the functionality of the vehicle.
292ANM022L
D open the nitrogen supply cylinder knob (b) and the inlet knob IN to let nitrogen into the suspension element (a); D let in nitrogen at a pressure of approximately 38 bar (551 PSI), then close the inlet knob IN and the supply cylinder knob; D adjust the suspension element pressure to the specific value by means of the breather knob OUT; D close the OUT vent cock; D unscrew the checking tool wheel (A), disconnect the inflation fixture from the socket and remove all the equipment, then close the protection cap. D restore the functionality of the vehicle.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
Changing the suspension fluid element Collect and dispose of used lubricants and fluids, according to the local laws and regulations in force. Proceed as follows: D remove the fastening bolt from both sides and disconnect the steel---wire stop ropes in order to allow the maximum extension of the cylinders; D raise the vehiclewith suitable lifting equipment until the wheels no longer touch the ground in order to completely extend the suspension;
SUSPENSIONS 13
D prepare a container of adequate capacity, then remove the valve (1) and drainage valve (2) and drain off all the fluid. D clean the drain cap. Check that the threads are in good condition. Replace the O-ring and close it; D introduce the foreseen quantity of the prescribed fluid through the valve hole (1) ; D close the filler cap and inflate the suspension as shown previously; D restore the functionality of the vehicle; Figure 15
Proceed with caution in order to avoid damaging the cylinders when themaximumextension is reached. D release ALL pressure from the suspension cylinder as shown above; Figure 13
276D008013
D check that position X is within the specific check range valve after travelling a short distance.
292ANM008L
D remove checking tool (A) from seat; Figure 14
276D008018
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
FRONT SUSPENSION REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT
.
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works.
Removal Proceed as follows: D Park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake and place the warning signs; D Open the battery isolation switch or disconenct the battery terminals to eliminate the risk of short ---circuit;
327B-330B
D Lock articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D Raise the vehicle to remove the wheels from the ground, then place two jacks under the front frame, without touching the axle; D Position a hydraulic device under the axle (1) to support the axle in a horizontal position during this phase of the operation; D Position a hydraulic device under the wishbone (2), which can be lowered once it is detached; D Remove the guard plate (3); D Remove the bolts fastening the wishbone to the axle (4); D Remove the bolts (5) fastening the central articulation to the frame; D Carefully lower the wishbone and remove it from the vehicle. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order.
Figure 16
292A008003R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDER REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT
.
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works.
Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D lift the vehicle to raise the wheels from the floor, then position two supports under the front chassis without touching the axle; D position a suitable hydraulic support under the axle that allows the axle to be lowered, such that in this
SUSPENSIONS 15
phase the axle remains in a more or less horizontal position; D remove the wheel concerned as instructed in SECTION 9; D proceed to discharge the gas from the cylinder concerned as instructed in the relative chapter; Before proceeding make absolutely certain that all remaining pressure has been discharged from the cylinder. D remove the fastening bolts (2) of the lower elastic bush on both sides;
.
The fixing plate (4) of the rope remains connected to the rope itself.
D support the cylinder (1) with suitable lifting equipment; D remove the locking nuts (3) of the upper elastic bush; D remove the cylinder (1). Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. On completing the replacement procedure recharge the cylinder and carry out the check foreseen in the relative Chapter.
Figure 17
276D008030
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
FRONT BALL JOINT REMOVAL
.
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works.
Removal Proceed as follows: D Park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake and place the warning signs; D Open the battery isolation switch or disconenct the battery terminals to eliminate the risk of short ---circuit;
327B-330B
D Lock articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D Raise the vehicle to remove the wheels from the ground, then place two jacks under the front frame, without touching the axle; D Position a hydraulic device under the axle (1) to support the axle in a horizontal position during this phase of the operation; D Remove the guard plate (1); D Remove the bolts (2) fastening the central articulation to the frame; D lower the fork slightly to allow to remove the ball joint from its seat; D loosen the fastening screws and remove the stop flange (3); D remove the snap ring (4) and the spacer (5); D remove the pin (6) with ball joint (7); D remove the spacers (8) from the seat on the eyebolt; D if required, remove the ball joint from the pin.
Figure 18
292A008004R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
Refitting Proceed as follows:
SUSPENSIONS 17
Figure 21
Figure 19
314A008003R
314A008001R
D cool the pin in a refrigerator; D using an appropriate press, fit the pin (1) in the ball joint (2) until it abuts against the shoulder;
D measure the depth of the seat; D measure the thickness of the external joint ring; D determine the thickness of the shims as follows: D = P -- S [mm] where: P = depth of the seat [mm] S = thickness of the external joint ring [mm] D = difference [mm]
Shims with a thickness of 0.10 [mm] [0.004 in] and 0.20 [mm] [0.009 in] are available. Select the shims so that their thickness is equal to the difference D rounded up to the next tenth of a millimetre.
Figure 20
Example 1: D = 0,38 [mm] 2 shims 0.20 [mm] each: 2 x 0.20 [mm] = 0.40 [mm] > 0.38 [mm] Example 2: D = 0,38 [mm] 1 shim 0.10 [mm] and + 1 shim 0.20 [mm]: 0.10 + 0.20 [mm] = 0.30 [mm] > 0.28 [mm] 314A008002R
D fit the thrust ring (1) and the snap ring (2);
No shims need to be added if the difference D is negative (joint protruding from the seat).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
Figure 22
327B-330B
Figure 23
314A008004R
D install the shims (1) and/or (2) in the seat; D carefully clean the seat and the external joint ring. Do not use detergents with water for cleaning. Use a specific LOCTITE 7063 cleaner or equivalent. D Heat the eyebolt to a max. temperature of 70 ° C (158 ° F). Never exceed the specified temperature to prevent overheating the joint seals after assembly. D Cool the pin in a refrigerator;
314A008005R
D insert the pin (1) with joint in the seat on the fork to mid stroke. Orient the pin so that the shoulder is fitted on the opposite side with respect to the stop plate.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS 19
Figure 24
314A008006R
D Apply the specified sealant on the protruding part of the joint external ring (see arrow); D complete assembly of the joint until it abuts; Figure 25
314A008007R
D fit the stop plate (1); D apply the specified thread lock to the screw thread (2); D fasten the screws (2) in a criss---cross pattern and tighten to the specified torque; D complete by reversing the removal sequence.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
REAR SUSPENSION REMOVAL--REPLACEMENT
.
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works.
Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1;
327B-330B
D lift the vehicle to raise the wheels from the floor, then position two supports under the rear chassis without touching the axle; D position two supports under the intermediate and rear axles such that the two axles remain more or less horizontal during this phase; D position a suitable hydraulic jack under the rocker arm to permit lowering once detached; D remove both wheels from the side concerned as instructed in SECTION 9; D disconnect the drive shaft from one side of the axles following the instructions in SECTION 7; D remove both wheels from the side concerned; D disconnect the central greasing system pipes (arrow); --- rocker arm pin B3 right and B4 left; D working from both sides of the rocker are remove the split pin and unscrew the rocker arm pin nut (8); D working from both sides of the rocker arm, remove the rocker arm pin (9), collecting the washers (6) and guide bushes (7), removing the rocker arm from the axles; D unscrew the screws (10) and remove the pin (11); D carefully lower the rocker arm and extract it from the chassis, collecting the washers (12). Removal and replacement of the central pin bushes and terminal bearing articulations must be carried out as described in relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS 21
Figure 26
292A008005R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
Replacement Proceed as follows: Figure 27
276D008032
D check that the internal sides of the rocker---arm supports are not worn or damaged;
.
Direct the shims so that the milling (arrow) corresponds to the corresponding seat on the chassis; Direct the shims so that the opaque side (with marking) is oriented towards the chassis (the marking must be in contact with the bushing).
Proceed with the reassembly by performing the disassembly operations in the reverse order.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
DISASSEMBLY---REASSEMBLY OF THE REAR SUSPENSION CENTRAL BUSHINGS
.
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions.
SUSPENSIONS 23
Disassembly Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D disconnect the battery---disconnect switch or disconnect the battery terminals in order to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, as indicated in SECTION 1; D remove the rocker arm by following the instructions provided in the relative chapter; D extract both the bushings from the rocker arm using a suitable punch; D check that the housing of the bushing is not worn or damaged (arrow); D remove the dust and dirt from the area concerned;
Figure 28
276D008033
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
Figure 29
276D008034
D orientate the bushings so that the two millings (arrow) line up with the relative seats made on the rocker arm; Figure 30
276D008035
D insert each steel bushing (arrow) into its seat by tapping lightly with a hammer; Figure 31
276D008036
D thoroughly lubricate the internal part of the bushings before reassembling the rocker arm; D reassemble the rocker arm by following the instructions provided in the relative Chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
DETACHMENT ---REATTACHMENT OF THE REAR SUSPENSION STABILIZER BARS
.
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works.
Removal Proceed as follows: D lift the body following the instructions in the Use and Maintenance Manual; D block the body using the appropriate rod as indicated in SECTION 1; D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1;
SUSPENSIONS 25
D support the stabilizer bar concerned with appropriate lifting equipment; Figure 32
276C08016
D Position a suitable lift under each balancer (arrow) and raise the vehicle so that the wheels barely touch the ground; Figure 33
276C08017
Place a trestle under the front part of the intermediate axle (arrow) to avoid possible uncontrolled movements of the axle itself.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
D Remove the fastening bolts (1); D Remove the locking nuts (2) and disengage the bar (3) from the stud bolts; D Remove the complete bar. Figure 34
292A008006R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
DETACHMENT ---REATTACHMENT OF THE REAR SUSPENSION BUSHINGS
.
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions.
SUSPENSIONS 27
Detachment Proceed as follows: D Remove the balancer from the suspension by following the instructions provided in the relative Chapter; D Remove the synthetic bushing using a suitable punch. Remove the metal bushing as well by cutting it with the flexible and extracting it from the balancer seat. It is good practice to replace both the bushings. D Make a tool for the bushing assembly by following the indications in the figure.
Figure 35
1 2
welded brackets M14 bolts
276C08021
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
Reattachment Proceed as follows:
327B-330B
Figure 38
Figure 36
276C08024 276C08022
D Check that the lateral parts of the seat are not damaged or show irregular wear (arrow);
D Lubricate the internal part of the balancer seat; Figure 39
Figure 37
276C08028
D Prepare a support for the balancer, as indicated in the figure, in order to avoid contact between the bushing and the press surface during assembly.
276C08023
D Mount the two halves of the special tool (1) on the bushing (2) as indicated in the figure, and tighten the jointing bolts until the two flanges fit together; The protruding edge inside the tool must rest against the metal edge of the bushing (arrow).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
SUSPENSIONS 29
Figure 40
276C08026
D Position the balancer on the support; D Position the special tool---bushing group on the balancer; Use a press with a load capacity of at least 200 kN. D Push the bushing with the press until the edge of the special tool meets the balancer; Check that the lower protruding part of the bushing does not interfere with the support placed on the press surface. D Reattach the balancer by following the instructions provided in the relative Chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
REPLACEMENT OF THE FLEXIBLE COUPLING
.
The flexible couplings are used in the following parts of the vehicle: A. rear and intermediate axle stabilizer bars B. front suspension cylinders C. front axle central joint Figure 41
276C08027
The replacement of the flexible coupling must be performed using appropriate equipment only.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
Disassembly Proceed as follows: D Remove the part concerned by following the instructions provided in the relative Chapter;
SUSPENSIONS 31
Figure 43
Figure 42
276C08037
D Insert the flexible coupling (1) into its seat; 276C08036
D D D D
Remove the elastic ring (1); Remove the spacer (2); Remove the elastic bush (3); Thoroughly clean the seat and eliminate any trace of dirt or foreign bodies.
Figure 44
NO ANGLE
Assembly Proceed as follows: Do not mix the removed elements with the new ones. Discard all the removed parts immediately. Always replace all the coupling elements. No partial replacements are allowed. 276C08038
D Check that the metal brackets of the coupling are correctly positioned with respect to the bar axis; D Rest the bar complete with coupling on the assembly tool (c) and overlay the assembly tool (b); D Insert the spacer (2) and the elastic ring (3) in the assembly tool (b); Check that: D The holes of the elastic ring are oriented at 45° with respect to the bar axis. D The ends of the spacer are oriented at 180° with respect to the holes of the elastic ring. D Insert the assembly tool (a) on the elastic ring and push axially until the elastic ring inserts completely into its seat.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
SUSPENSION CYLINDER OVERHAUL Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Ensure that the gas has already been discharged from the cylinder. In case of doubt, empty the cylinder using the appropriate equipment provided for this purpose. Disassembly Do as follows: D Clean the outside of the cylinder with water and a non---inflammable detergent in order to eliminate any excess of dust and dirt, then dry it; D Proceed to the draining of the oil from the cylinder as described in the relative Chapter; D Remove the flexible couplings from the upper and lower end by following the instructions in the relative chapter; D Remove the inflation valve; D Position the lower end in a. vice with the interposition of soft material. Figure 45
276A008004
D Using a hook wrench, thoroughly tighten the drive head onto the body of the cylinder.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
Figure 46
SUSPENSIONS 33
Figure 48
276A008005
D Slip the stem (1) complete with the drive head off the cylinder; D Slip the drive head (2) off the stem. Figure 47
276A008007
D Remove the gaskets from the drive head: a. above the brim b. inside the drive head c. outside the drive head
276A008006
D Remove the gasket (1) from the stem (1);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
Assembly
327B-330B
Figure 50
All gaskets must be replaced during reassembly. Thoroughly lubricate all the gaskets with hydraulic oil. Do as follows: Figure 49
18916208B
D Mount the sealing ring outside the drive head. Figure 51
18916208A
Each gasket inside the drive head is composed of a spring and a ring that should be mounted separately. Begin the assembly from the one furthest from the output edge of the drive head.
18916209
D Mount the O---ring outside the drive head, resting it on the sealing ring.
D Mount the spring inside the seat (a) and then mount the Teflon ring (b).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 8
Figure 52
SUSPENSIONS 35
Figure 54
276A008010
276A008008
D Introduce the drive head (1) onto the stem (2) paying attention not to damage the previously mounted gaskets.
D Slowly Introduce the stem complete with drive head into the cylinder, paying attention not to damage the previously mounted gaskets. Figure 55
Figure 53
276A008011
D Using a hook wrench, thoroughly tighten the drive head onto the body of the cylinder. D Mount the inflation valve. D Remove the cylinder from the vice. D Mount the upper and lower flexible coupling as described in the relative chapter At the end of the operations, fill with hydraulic fluid as described in the relative Chapter.
276A008009
D Mount the gasket (1) on the stem. D Position the cylinder vertically, tightening the lower end in a vice with the interposition of soft material. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 9 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
WHEELS AND TIRES
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 9
WHEELS AND TIRES
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 9
WHEELS AND TIRES 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REPLACING A COMPLETE WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TIRE PRESSURE TABLE - 327B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TIRE PRESSURE TABLE - 330B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TIGHTENING TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 TIRE-- RIM DISASSEMBLY-- ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 8 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Cleaning of the wheel parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
WHEELS AND TIRES
SECTION 9
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 9
WHEELS AND TIRES 3
WHEELS DESCRIPTION The vehicle is fitted with tubeless tyres (no inner tube) mounted on modular rims. The tyre is the flexible part of the wheel and has the following tasks: D to absorb impacts caused by roughness of the terrain; D to transmit the engine torque to the ground; D transmit the braking force applied to the brakes to the ground; D ensure side gripping round bends. The rim is the rigid structure of the wheel and consists of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Side flanges Rim (channel) Bull ring Inflation valve O---ring seal Figure 1
276C009001
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
WHEELS AND TIRES
SECTION 9
327B-330B
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA
174NM39
.
If the vehicle has tires from suppliers not included in the preceding tables, refer to the tire supplierâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Technical Assistance Service.
TIRE PRESSURE TABLE - 327B Pressure Tires 23.50 R 25 MICHELIN TRIANGLE GOODYEAR YOKOHAMA TECHKING Tires 650/65 R 25 MICHELIN Tires 750/65 R 25 MICHELIN
Front (F)
Rear (R)
Bar
Psi
Bar
Psi
3.00 4.25 3.50 4.00 4.25
44.0 62.0 51.0 58.0 62.0
3.00 4.25 3.50 4.00 5.00
44.0 62.0 51.0 58.0 73.0
Pressure Front (F) Bar 3.50
Rear (R) Psi 40.0
Bar 3.25
Psi 47.0
Pressure Front (F) Bar 2.75
Rear (R) Psi 40.0
Bar 2.75
Psi 40.0
TIRE PRESSURE TABLE - 330B Pressure Tires 23.50 R 25 MICHELIN TRIANGLE GOODYEAR YOKOHAMA TECHKING Tires 650/65 R 25 MICHELIN Tires 750/65 R 25 MICHELIN
Front (F)
Rear (R)
Bar
Psi
Bar
Psi
3.25 4.50 3.75 4.50 5.00
47.0 65.0 54.0 65.0 73.0
3.50 5.00 4.00 5.00 5.25
51.0 73.0 58.0 73.0 76.0
Pressure Front (F) Bar 4.00
Rear (R) Psi 58.0
Bar 4.00
Psi 58.0
Pressure Front (F) Bar 3.00
Rear (R) Psi 44.0
Bar 3.25
Psi 47.0
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 9
WHEELS AND TIRES 5
TIGHTENING TORQUE Figure 2
276C009002
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
WHEELS AND TIRES
SECTION 9
REPLACING A COMPLETE WHEEL The wheel replacement operation requires the utmost care. The operation must be carried out by at least two people using a hoist to lift the vehicle and a forklift to handle the wheel.
327B-330B ALWAYS lock the articulation safety joint before lifting the vehicle.
Figure 4
ALWAYS MAKE SURE that the wheel being replaced is completely flat before proceeding. Proceed as follows: Figure 3
269NS111
276A009018
D approach the wheel requiring repair with safety caution D remove the protective cap and operate the valve (1). Disassembly Proceed as follows: D align the vehicle; D stop the engine and apply the parking brake;
D remove the pin (1); D swing the tie---rod forward to make the holes in the tie---rod and chassis coincide (2); D insert the pin through the holes and fasten it with the retaining pin (3). Figure 5
269NU492+
D loosen the wheel nuts (arrow) on the wheel to be removed without removing them
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 9
D raise the vehicle to lift the wheel from the ground, then support the vehicle with suitable supports;
WHEELS AND TIRES 7
Figure 8
The vehicle can be lifted by means of a gantry crane or other suitable means using suitable steel cables fastened to the eyebolts provided for this purpose. Figure 6
221nu62
D position the specific lift truck under the wheel so as to support it; D completely unscrew the lock nuts and remove them; then operate the lift truck to remove the wheel from the hub, being careful not to damage the bolt threading.
276NU025T
D
front jacking/hitching points (arrow)
Figure 7
Fitting Proceed as follows: D clean the threads of the bolts and nuts and the mating surfaces between rim and hub; D position the wheel on the forklift truck;; D move the wheel into place and fit it on the hub; be careful not to damage the bolt threads; D tighten the nuts lightly until the wheel is pressed to the hub; D inflate the tire at a pressure of approximately 1.5 bars (22 psi); Figure 9
292ANU038L
D
rear jacking/hitching points (arrow)
2761009019
D lower the vehicle to the ground and tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the order shown D inflate to the specific pressure (see tire pressure chart).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
WHEELS AND TIRES
SECTION 9
TIRE ---RIM DISASSEMBLY---ASSEMBLY
327B-330B
Figure 11
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects have been clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions.
.
Before proceeding it is necessary to remove the wheel from the vehicle following the instructions provided in the relative chapter.
Disassembly Do as follows:
276A009002
D Use a suitable lever (1) to lower the retention ring (2) and free the safety peg (3); Figure 12
Figure 10
2761009003
D Slip off the elastic ring (1); 2761009001
D Completely deflate the tire using the valve (1);
Figure 13
Before proceeding, it is ABSOLUTELY necessary to check that the tire is completely deflated.
2761009004
D Use a suitable lever to slip the retention ring (1) off;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 9
WHEELS AND TIRES 9
Cleaning of the wheel parts D Visually check that the rim parts have no cracks, deformations or corroded parts; D Carefully clean and remove the grease from the rim, lateral flanges, retention ring and elastic ring; D Remove any rust and repaint the parts; D Remove the O---ring seal and dispose of it according to the current regulations; D Carefully check the condition of the inflation valve and replace it if necessary; D Carefully check the condition of the elastic ring and replace it if necessary.
Figure 14
Reassembly Do as follows: Figure 16 2761009005
D Slip off the lateral flange (1); D Use an appropriate lifting device to separate the tire (2) from the rim (3); Figure 15
2761009007
D Insert the first lateral flange (1) onto the rim (2) with the concavity turned downwards;
.
The lateral flanges are interchangeable.
2761009006
D Slip the second lateral flange (1) off the rim (2);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
WHEELS AND TIRES
SECTION 9
Figure 17
327B-330B
Figure 20
276A009008
D Lubricate the lower part of the rim (1) abundantly with the specific lubricant for tires; Figure 18
276A009011
D Insert the second lateral flange (1) onto the rim (2) with the concavity turned upwards; Figure 21
276A009009
D Lubricate abundantly the zones of the tire in contact with the rim (1) with the specific lubricant for tires; Figure 19
276A009012
D Lubricate the internal part (1) and the external part (2) of the retention ring abundantly with the specific lubricant for tires; D Insert the retention ring between the rim and the lateral flange;
.
In order to insert the retention ring, strike the entire circumference uniformly with a rubber hammer.
.
Be careful that the slot (3) coincides with the groove (4) of the retention ring during the assembly.
2761009010
D Use a suitable lifting device to move the tire (1) and put it on the rim (2);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 9
Figure 22
WHEELS AND TIRES 11
Figure 24
276A009015
276A009013
D Use suitable levers (1) to force the retention ring down so as to be able to insert the O---ring seal correctly; Figure 23
D Insert the elastic ring (1) between the rim (2) and the retention ring (3); Figure 25
276A009016
D Use suitable levers (1) to arrange the retention ring (2) in order to insert the safety peg (3) in the slot of the rim (4); Figure 26
276A009014
D Insert the O---ring seal (1) in the appropriate seat obtained in the rim;
. .
Always use new O---ring seals during assembly. Pay particular attention to make sure that the sealing ring is positioned correctly.
2761009001
D Introduce through the valve (1), with an appropriate inflation gun, compressed air at a pressure of 3.5 bar (50.76 psi) in order to allow the various parts of the wheel to settle correctly.
.
When the parts are settled, adjust the tire pressure to the prescribed values.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
WHEELS AND TIRES
SECTION 9
327B-330B
Left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 10 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
1
CONTENTS Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Steeing system fluid flow (normal conditions, to left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
General diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 General diagram --- Vehicles with wet brakes . . . . . 7
Steering system fluid flow (emergency conditions, to left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
TOPOGRAPHICAL DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Vehicles with disc brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Hydraulic system pressures table --- Vehicles with disk brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Topographic diagram of the front main frame . . . . 28 Rear chassis diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 A. OIL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 B. STEERING/DUMPING DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . 32
Vehicles with wet brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
B. STEERING/DUMPING DISTRIBUTOR (CHECK VALVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table of hydraulic system pressures --- Vehicles with wet brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
C. MAIN FILTER -- DUMPING AND EMERGENCY STEERING GROUP . . . . . . . . . . 34
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
D. COUNTERBALANCE VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Main pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Pump (for brake cooling group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Emergency steering pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Dumping distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Steering valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Back ---pressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Cartridge filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SECTION 10.1 STEERING AND DUMPING SYSTEM . . 13 STEERING AND DUMPING SYSTEM -DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E. MAIN PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 F. EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . 37 G. POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 H. HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 L. DUMPING CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 M. STEERING CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N. REAR CHASSIS CONNECTOR PLATE . . . . . . 42 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Checking fitting and pipe tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Changing the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Replacing pressurised filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Cleaning the (suction) filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Steering --- dumping hydraulic system --- key . . . . 14
STEERING -- DUMPING SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Main components of the steering---dumping system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Steering---dumping system layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Steering---dumping hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Dumping valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Calibration pressure for valves in the dumping valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Steering---dumping system hydraulic diagram . . . 20 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Dumping system fluid flow --- ascent . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Dumping system fluid flow --- descent . . . . . . . . . . 25
1. Hydraulic system air bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 2. Hydraulic system pressure discharge with engine off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3. Steering---dumping hydraulic system pressures check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Prescribed pressure values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Dumping and steering valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Prescribed pressure values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 1. The steering valve does not work (the vehicle does not turn when operating the steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Page
Page
2. The body does not tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
SECTION 10.2 EMERGENCY STEERING SYSTEM . . . . 79
3. The body raises slowly even with the engine at maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4. The body does not lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 DETACHMENT-- REATTACHMENT OF THE EMERGENCY STEERING VALVE -- MAIN FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
EMERGENCY STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Main component emergency steering system . . . . 80
Detachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Emergency steering hydraulic diagram . . . . . . . . . 81
Reattachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DUMPING VALVE REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . 58
Steering hydraulic layout (normal situation) . . . . . . 82
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
INSPECTION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Check the efficiency of the emergency steering pump control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Dumping valve removal---replacement . . . . . . . . . . 59 DUMPING CYLINDER REMOVAL-REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 STEERING VALVE REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT 61 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 MAIN PUMP REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . . . 63 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 STEERING CYLINDER REMOVAL-REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 DUMPING CYLINDER OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Checking components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Functional testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
SECTION 10.3 BRAKING SYSTEM --DISC BRAKES VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 BRAKING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Braking system key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Braking system main components --- hydraulic part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Braking system layout --- disk brakes . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Service and parking brakes --- location . . . . . . . . . . 89 Service braking group --- hydraulic calipers . . . . . . 90
SECTION 10.3 BRAKING SYSTEM --WET BRAKES VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 BRAKING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
STEERING CYLINDER OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Braking system key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
STEERING -- DUMPING VALVE BLOCK OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Braking system main components --- hydraulic part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Braking system layout --- wet brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Component position identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Service and parking brakes --- location . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Braking assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Checks and inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Operating brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
3
Page
Page
Front chassis layout diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rear chassis layout diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
A. FRONT HYDRO-- PNEUMATIC CONVERTER AND PRESSURE TEST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Brake cooling hydraulic system --- key . . . . . . . . . 112
B. FRONT MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Brake cooling system layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
C. FRONT RIGHT BRAKE ACTUATOR . . . . . . . 102
Brake cooling system fluid flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
D. FRONT LEFT BRAKE ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . 103
Brake cooling system hydraulic diagram . . . . . . . 117
E. REAR HYDRO-- PNEUMATIC CONVERTER 104
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
F. REAR MANIFOLD AND PRESSURE TEST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Main components of brake cooling system . . . . . 113
Brake cooling system hydraulic diagram . . . . . . . 118
G. REAR RIGHT BRAKE ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . 106
Topographic diagram of the front chassis . . . . . . 120
H. REAR LEFT BRAKE ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . 107
Topographic diagram of the rear chassis . . . . . . . 121
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
A. OIL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Checking fitting and pipe tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Changing the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
B. BRAKE COOLING MOTOR/PUMP ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cleaning the (suction) filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
C. BRAKE COOLING MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
BRAKE PUMP REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . 109
D. BRAKE COOLING UNIT ON FRONT AXLE . 124
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
E. REAR CHASSIS CONNECTION PLATE . . . . 125
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
F. BRAKE COOLING UNIT ON INTERMEDIATE AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
SECTION 10.4 BRAKE COOLING SYSTEM (WET BRAKES VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . 111 BRAKE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
BRAKE COOLING CIRCUIT PUMP-- MOTOR REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
5
DESCRIPTION The total hydraulic system of the vehicle is made up of a series of hydraulic systems, which are: 10.1. steering---dumping system 10.2. emergency steering system 10.3. Braking system (built ---in to pneumatic braking system) 10.4. service brake cooling system (vehicles with oil wet brakes only) The main hydraulic pump (fixed capacity) provides the rate of flow required by the steering and dumping functions. The system distributes the fluid flow between the two functions giving priority to the steering. In the event of failure, an emergency pump (driven by the automatic transmission) ensures adequate steering capacity. The braking system is pneumatic, equipped with pneumo---hydraulic converters to operate the braking elements. The brake fluid is contained in the reservoirs on the converters. A dedicated pump driven by a hydraulic motor operates the service brake cooling circuit pumps (vehicles with oil wet brakes only).
.
For more information on the individual systems see the relative chapters.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
General diagram 1. Main tank 2. Main pump 3. Emergency steering pump 4. Priority valve 5. Steering system 6. Dumping system Figure 1
292A101001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
7
General diagram -- Vehicles with wet brakes 1. Tank 2. Main pump 3. Emergency steering pump 4. Priority valve 5. Steering system 6. Dumping system 7. Pump 8. Not used 9. Brake cooling system motor 10. Brake cooling system 11. Brake cooling system pump
Figure 2
292A101002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST POINTS Vehicles with disc brakes
Figure 3
314A010001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
9
Hydraulic system pressures table -- Vehicles with disk brakes
Pressure
Point
(*)
Values bar
psi
18 + 7 --- 6
261 + 102 --- 87
50 ± 3
725 ± 24
A
Driving pressure
B
Reduced pressure
C
Dumping---steering pressure (main) (*)
183 + 7 --- 6
2654 + 102 --- 87
D
LS pressure (load signal)
165 + 7 --- 6
2393 + 102 --- 87
F
Dumping back ---pressure (fourth stage section discharge)
120 ± 5
1740 ± 73
H
Rear brake actuation circuit pressure
155 ± 10
2248 ± 145
I
Front brake actuation circuit pressure
155 ± 10
2248 ± 145
The value of the main pressure depends on the test conditions. For more information, see Section 10.1 --STEERING AND DUMPING SYSTEM. The pressure intakes are “minimess” unions located in the positions indicated above. The pressure specifications are given in the respective table. Use a pressure gauge with a suitable full---scale for testing. For more information on the inspection procedures see the respective sections.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST POINTS Vehicles with wet brakes
Figure 4
314A010002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
11
Table of hydraulic system pressures -- Vehicles with wet brakes Fitting
Values bar
psi
18 + 7 --- 6
261 + 102 --- 87
50 ± 3
725 ± 44
A
Pilot pressure
B
Reduced pressure
C
Steering---dumping pressure (main) (*)
183 + 7 --- 6
2654 + 102 – 87
D
LS pressure (load signal)
165 + 7 --- 6
2393 + 102 – 87
E
Dumping pressure (moving struts outlet) Dumping back pressure (fourth moving strut discharge)
183 + 7 --- 6
2654 + 102 – 87
120 ± 5
1740 ± 73
F
(*)
Pressure
H
Rear brake actuation circuit pressure
110 ± 5
1595 ± 73
I
Front brakes actuation circuit pressure
110 ± 5
1595 ± 73
K
Pedal valve discharge circuit pressure (brake cooling motor intake)
< 60
< 870.23
The value of the main pressure depends on the test conditions. For more information, see Section 10.1 --STEERING AND DUMPING SYSTEM. The pressure fittings are composed of “minimess” fittings located in the positions indicated previously. The prescribed pressure values are provided in the relative table. The test must be performed using a pressure gauge with a suitable end ---of---scale value. For more information on the test procedures, see the respective Sections.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
TECHNICAL DATA Main pump Engine ratio Maximum rpm Maximum displacement Maximum pressure (2100 rpm)
1:1 262 rad/sec 122.86 cm3/rev 245 I/min
(2500 rpm) (7.5 in3/rev) (53.9 Imp gal/min)
Pump (for brake cooling group) Engine ratio Displacement Rate of flow at maximum operating speed (2100 rpm)
1 : 1.36 19.0 cm3/rev 16.0 I/min
(1.16 in3/rev) (3.52 Imp gal/min)
Emergency steering pump Engine ratio Displacement Maximum pressure (2100 rpm)
1:1 32 cm3/rev 64.0 I/min
(0.35 in3/rev) (14 Imp gal/min)
Dumping distributor Maximum valve nominal calibration Steering --- dump pressure (main) Driving pressure Dumping pressure (removable strut outlet) Dump back ---pressure (fourth rod telescopic section outlet)
250 bar 185 bar 18 bar 185 bar 120 bar
(3.626 psi) (2.683 psi) (261 psi) (2.683 psi) (1.740 psi)
Steering valve Displacement Internal amplification ratio
985 cm3/rev 1 : 1.6
(58.46in3/rev)
Back-- pressure valve Nominal calibration
120 bar
(1.740 psi)
Cartridge filters Nominal filtering capacity (steering---dumping) Nominal filtering capacity (brake cooling) Nominal filtering capacity (net to filter)
10 μm 20 μm 90 μm
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10.1 STEERING AND DUMPING SYSTEM
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
13
14
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
STEERING AND DUMPING SYSTEM --- DESCRIPTION Main components (see figures on next page) Pump: Actuator: Exchanger: Filter:
Tank:
with variable displacement pistons (1), fitted to the upper power take---off of the automatic transmission: the pump rotates at the same speed as the engine. steering cylinders (6), controlled by the steering valve (5); dumping cylinders (8), controlled by the dumping distributor (7). oil---air model. net on the intake (10) with by---pass valve, fitted inside the tank; on the delivery side (3) (pressurized) cartridge with by---pass valve and electric clogging indicator, fitted on the side of the automatic transmission. single (16).
Function To ensure the rate of flow needed for the steering and/or dumping operations, in relation to the request, with priority given to steering. The circuit features two main groups: steering system and dumping system. The main pump adjusts its rate of flow according to the load signal from both systems. An priority valve valve defines the priority in favour of the steering system if both systems make a request at the same time.
.
The references with which the components are identified are the same used in the hydraulic diagram shown on the following pages.
Steering -- dumping hydraulic system -- key 1. Main pump 2. Emergency steering pump 3. Pressurized filter 4. Steering emergency operating valve 5. Steering valve 6. Steering cylinders 7. Dumping valve 8. Dumping cylinders 9. Pressure vent 10. Dumping---steering system intake filter 11. Steering emergency pressure switch 12. Brake actuation system intake filter 13. Dumping back ---pressure valve 14. Display 15. Oil temperature sensor 16. Tank 17. Brake system intake (wet brakes version) 18. Heat exchanger 19. Not used 20. Check valve
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
15
Main components of the steering -- dumping system Figure 5
276C010006 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Steering -- dumping system layout Figure 6
292A101005R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
17
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM Steering -- dumping hydraulic system (see next page) 1. Main pump with variable displacement 2. Emergency steering pump 3. Pressurised filter 4. Steering emergency operating valve 5. Steering valve 6. Steering cylinders 7. Dumping valve 8. Dumping cylinders 9. Pressure vent 10. Dumping---steering system intake filter 11. Steering emergency pressure switch 12. Emergency steering system intake filter 13. Dumping back ---pressure valve 14. Level indicator 15. Oil temperature sensor 16. Tank 17. Pump intake (wet brakes version) 18. Head exchanger 19. Not used 20. Check valve
. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (m) (n) (p) (q) (s) (t) (u)
The references (code 1.xx) identify the valves present on the dumping valve (see the following figure). Pressure relief control valve (code 1.02) LS steering pressure relief valve (code 1.03) Dumping LS pressure limiting valve (180 bar (2611 PSI)) (code 1.04) LS pressure cumulative valve for priority (shuttle) (code 1.05) Reduced pressure relief valve (dumping actuation) (code 1.11) Dumping slide control valve (code 1.13) Dumping box Priority valve (code 1.16) Pressure limiting valve driving dumping box valve (22 bar (319 PSI)) (code 1.15) Driven dumping discharge valve (anti---shock) Dumping anti---shock driving valve Steering valve box Steering valve rotor Steering anti---shock valve Steering anti---cavitation valve Controlled pressure relief valve (code 1.12)
List of pressure intakes (n° 9 on the diagram) A. Driving pressure B. Reduced pressure C. Dumping---steering pressure (main) D. LS pressure (load signal) E. Dumping pressure (1---3 stages section outlet) F. Dumping back ---pressure (fourth stage section discharge)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Dumping valve The dumping valve (ref. 7 on the diagram) is composed of three coupled modules: 1. pressure control valves module 2. dumping actuation valves module 3. priority---control anti---saturation valve module Figure 7
276E010001 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
19
Calibration pressure for valves in the dumping valve block Figure 8
292A101008R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Steering -- dumping system hydraulic diagram Figure 9
292A101006R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
21
Figure 10
314A010026R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
OPERATION
. .
Refer to the previous figure. Concerning the steering, the condition of stand ---by continues until the steering wheel is rotated, regardless of the position of the vehicle (straight or turned): thus this situation is not typical of a straight steering wheel, but of an IMMOBILE steering wheel.
Stand---by conditions Under these conditions the flow of pump [1] arrives through opening P and is discharged through opening T by means of the restrictor valve [u] that regulates the internal pressure on the basis of the control received from the valve [a]. This valve, controlling valve [u], limits the internal pressure of the system under stand---by conditions to its calibration value. When the system requires additional flow (due to a steering and/or dumping operation) the relative LS signal outgoing from the shuttle valve (d) is summed with the calibration pressure of valve [a], driving valve [u] to increasing pressures. As a consequence, the difference between the main line pressure and the LS signal is always equal to the calibration value of valve (a). Furthermore, the delivery of pump [1] arrives to valve [e] which regulates the pressure at the priority valve [h] and discharges any excess flow from opening 5. This occurs only if the pressure regulated by valve [u] exceeds the calibration value of valve [e]. The control via CAN OPEN shows the hydraulic fluid temperature value read by sensor 332 (main menu, VEHICLE TEST, page 1) on the display. Steering without dumping The steering slide valve (p) is moved by the action of the steering wheel. This movement connects the gate P with the steering cylinder chambers as a function of the direction of rotation. At the same time, the opposite chambers are discharged through the gate T. The LS signal coming from the steering valve [5] blocks the check valve [19], preventing the discharge of the LS signal coming from the main line. In this manner the LS steering signal coming from the main line, through the shuttle valve (d) arrives to the restrictor valve (a). This signal, summing with the calibration pressure of the valve, produces an increase in the regulation pressure of the restrictor valve (u) which reduces the discharge flow and increases the working flow, thus also increasing the flow available to the steering. The pressure of the LS signal is limited by valve (b), which discharges any excess flow through opening 5.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
23
Dumping without steering The slide (g) of the dumping valve is interlocked to two valves (f1) and (f2) that determine the signal to the sides of the slide itself and thus its position. From the hydraulic point of view, the supply of the valves is intercepted by the anti---saturation valve (h). As a function of the pressures on its ends, this valve moves, allowing the reduced flow to supply the valves (f1) and (f2) and thus the slide (g) (upward displacement, dumping) or discharging the reduced flow (downward displacement, steering). From the system point of view, the valves (f1) and (f2) are controlled directly by the relative contactors, in turn controlled by the manipulator lever through microswitches. The control also determines the status of the body not at rest warning light on the instrument panel according to the presence or not of the signal from proximity switch 346. Steering and body dumping If simultaneous actions occur, the system is not sized to supply both functions beyond a certain degree. The LS signal coming from the steering valve [5] blocks the check valve [19], preventing the discharge of the LS signal coming from the main line. This signal arrives through opening LS1 to the priority valve (h) and produces its downward displacement. This displacement discharges the reduced pressure: as a consequence, the slide (g) of the dumping valve [7] tends to return to center and reduce the flow to the cylinders, in favor of that destined to the steering.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Dumping system fluid flow -- ascent Figure 11
292A101009R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
25
Dumping system fluid flow -- descent Figure 12
292A101010R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Steeing system fluid flow (normal conditions, to left) Figure 13
292A101011R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
27
Steering system fluid flow (emergency conditions, to left) Figure 14
292A101012R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
TOPOGRAPHICAL DIAGRAMS Topographic diagram of the front main frame Figure 15
A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.
Oil tank Dumping distributor Main filter --- emergency steering/dumping group Counterbalance valve Main pump Emergency steering pump Power steering Heat exchanger
314A010004R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
29
Rear chassis diagram Figure 16
314A010005R
L M N
Dumping cylinder Steering cylinder Connector plate on rear chassis
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
A.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
OIL TANK Figure 17
292A010013R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
A.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
OIL TANK --- legend
Oil bath brake version 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Brake cooling circuit discharge/return valve Brake cooling motor---pump intake Pump intake (brake cooling system) / Steering emergency pump intake Main pump intake Return from brake cooling motor---pump Return from tipper distributor mouth (Y) Return from outlet (T) to emergency steering valve Return from heat exchanger Return from tipper distributor mouth (5) Delivery to heat exchanger Return from tipper distributor mouth (T) Return from tipper distributor mouth (T2)
Disc brake version 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Not used Not used Emergency steering pump intake Main pump intake Not used Return from tipper distributor mouth (Y) Return from outlet (T) to emergency steering valve Return from heat exchanger Return from tipper distributor mouth (5) Delivery to heat exchanger Return from tipper distributor mouth (T) Return from tipper distributor mouth (T2)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
31
32
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
B.
SECTION 10
327B-330B
STEERING/DUMPING DISTRIBUTOR Figure 18
292A010014R
A1. B1. P. T1. Y. XP. 2B. RP. RP1. LS1. T. 2a. 2. 4. 5. 6. T2
Connection to forward right chassis plate for box dumping (raise) Connection to forward right chassis plate for box dumping (lower) Connection to emergency steering/dumping group (C1) (feed) Connection to power steering (t) for tank discharge Oil tank connection (6) Connection to pilot pressure test point (test point pilot pressure) A Connection to (LS1) Connection to reduced pressure test point plate B Connection to (6) Connection to (2b) Oil tank connection (11) Connection to power steering (LS) (pilot signal) Connection to load sensing test point plate (test point load sensing) D Connection to main pressure test point plate C Oil tank connection (9) Connection to (RP1) Oil tank connection (12)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
B.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
33
STEERING/DUMPING DISTRIBUTOR (check valve) Figure 19
276C01009B
1 2 3
Check valve (from dumping distributor port 2a to power steering port LS) Dumping distributor Power steering
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
C.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
MAIN FILTER --- DUMPING AND EMERGENCY STEERING GROUP Figure 20
276C01009C
P C1 C T P1
Delivery pipe from main pump Dumping distributor opening ”P” connection pipe Hydraulically assisted steering opening ”P” connection pipe Tank drain pipe, port (7) Delivery pipe from emergency steering pump
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
D.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
35
COUNTERBALANCE VALVE Figure 21
276C01009D
1 2
Return to the dumping distributor opening (B1) Pipe from rear frame connector plate port (11) (return from dumping cylinders)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
E.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
MAIN PUMP Figure 22
292A010015R
1 2
Intake from oil tank port (4) Delivery to emergency steering/dumping group through main filter opening (P)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
F.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
37
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP Figure 23
292A010016R
1 2
Intake from oil tank port (3) Delivery to emergency steering/dumping group opening (P1)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
G.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
POWER STEERING Figure 24
276C01009G
P. T. LS. R. L.
Connector pipe from emergency steering/dumping group to power steering Connector pipe to steering and dumping distributor (T1) Connector pipe to steering and dumping distributor (2a) (load sensing) Connector pipe to plate on forward right chassis Connector pipe to plate on forward left chassis plate
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
H.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
39
HEAT EXCHANGER Figure 25
276C01009H
1 2
Connection pipe from dumping distributor opening (T) Connector pipe to tank port (8)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
L.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
DUMPING CYLINDER Figure 26
276C01009L
1. 2. 3.
Box dumping cylinder Extension delivery Retraction delivery
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
M.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
41
STEERING CYLINDER Figure 27
276C01009M
1 2 3 4 5 6
Left steering hose from rear chassis connection plate Right steering hose from rear chassis connection plate Right steering hose connection to right cylinder Left steering hose connection to right cylinder Left steering hose connection to left cylinder Right steering hose connection to left cylinder
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
N.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
REAR CHASSIS CONNECTOR PLATE Figure 28
292A010017R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Body dumping cylinders delivery Parking brake pneumatic control Not used Rear air tanks feed Right steering pipes Lubrication pipes Rear relay valve air feed Electrical connections Not used Camera wiring Body dumping return Left steering pipes Rear brake cooling delivery (wet brakes version) Rear brake cooling return (wet brakes version) Pressure fitting
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
MAINTENANCE Checking fitting and pipe tightness Visually check for system leaks and tightness of line connections. In the event of faults or leakage from any of the circuits, repairs MUST be carried out before using the vehicle.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
43
Changing the fluid Proceed as follows: D wait for the fluid temperature to reach 40 ° C (104 ° F); D tip the engine hood; Figure 29
Check by implementing all the specific safety precautions. Collect and dispose of used lubricants and fluids, according to the local laws and regulations in force.
276NM047T
D take a suitably sized container, clean the fill cap and drain cap areas and remove the filler cap (1); D remove the drain cap (see arrow) and drain the fluid; D clean the drain cap and remove any metallic residues. Check that the threads are in good condition, replace the seal and close at the specific torque; D pour in the specified amount of fluid through the filler and install the cap; D close the engine hood.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
44
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
Replacing pressurised filter Replace the filter when you change the hydraulic fluid. Proceed as follows: D tip the engine hood up;
327B-330B
Cleaning the (suction) filter Proceed as follows: Clean the filter when you change the hidraulic fluid, when the reservoir is empty. Figure 32
Figure 30
276NM027T
D loosen the filter cartridge housing (see arrow) using the hexagonal wrench and carefully clean the housing; Figure 31
2
276C010048
1
269NM312
D check condition of the seals on the cartridge (1): replace as required; D replace the filtering element by inserting it in the cartridge housing. Check that the seals, are correctly positioned (2); D fill the new cartridge housing with the specified fluid and apply the same fluid to the seals; D install the cartridge housing then loosen;
D open the engine hood; D remove the batteries as indicated in the Use and Maintenance Manual; D remove the brake actuation circuit damping valve from the battery case and fasten it temporarily to the chassis; D remove the battery case; D open the cover (1) of the tank; D unscrew the cartridge (2) from the housing; D clean the cartridge using a suitable detergent or replace it, then screw it back into the housing; D close the cover of the tank, replacing the seal (3); D reassemble the battery case and relative components connected to it; D install the batteries as indicated in the Use and Maintenance Manual; D fill the reservoir as shown in the specific paragraph.
Do not tighten the cartridge excessively. This could damage the support. In any case respect the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s specifications. D run the engine for a few minutes and check for oil leakage; D close the engine hood.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
45
STEERING ---DUMPING SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. 1.
Hydraulic system air bleeding
Steering system Proceed as follows: D start the engine, then steer slowly and completely to the right and then to the left; D repeat the operation several times so as to eliminate the air bubbles present in the circuit. Dumping system Proceed as follows: D start the engine, then proceed to the dumping of the body so as to completely fill the entire circuit; D return the body to the rest position; D repeat the operation several time so as to eliminate the air bubbles present in the cylinders. When the operations are completed, check the fluid level in the tank and top up if necessary, following the directions in the relative paragraph.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
46
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
2. Hydraulic system pressure discharge with engine off Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, operating as indicated in SECTION 1. There may be pressure in the following tubes when the engine is off: D tubing (double) between cylinders (8) and outlet D of the supercharging pressure (13). Maximum value: 100 bar (1450 PSI) approx Proceed as follows: D Carefully open the union cap (F) and wrap the union in absorbent material. D Use a suitable tool on the valve to release the pressure. D Close the cap. 1 5 6 7 8 9 13 16
Main pump Steering valve Steering cylinders Dumping valve Dumping cylinders Test point Control pressure dumping valve Main tank Figure 33
292A10018R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 3.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
47
Steering -- dumping hydraulic system pressures check The procedures described below allow to check the pressures for the dumping group which has already been calibrated. To perform the calibration of the group, refer to the relative chapter. The procedures described below must be performed with the body empty.
Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D discharge the hydraulic pressure of all the circuits; D connect respectively and as needed: --- a pressure gauge with max range value of 100 bar (1450 psi) to the pressure point (A); --- a pressure gauge with max range value of 100 bar (1450 psi) to the pressure point (B); --- a pressure gauge with max range value of 300 bar (4351.13 psi) to the pressure point (C); --- a pressure gauge with max range value of 200 bar (2900 psi) to the pressure point (F). Figure 34
292A10019R
Prescribed pressure values Test procedure
Point
3.1
C
3.2
Pressure
Values bar
psi
Steering pressure
183 + 7 --- 6
2654 + 102 --- 87
B
Reduced pressure
50 ± 3
725 ± 44
3.3
C
Dumping pressure (moving struts output)
183 + 7 --- 6
2654 + 102 --- 87
3.4
F
Dumping back ---pressure (fourth moving strut discharge)
120 ± 5
1740 ± 73
3.5
A
Piloting pressure
18 + 7 --- 6
261 + 102 --- 87
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
48
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Test Procedure n. 3.1 --- Steering pressure Clear the work area of all personnel since the stationary steering causes movement of the front part of the vehicle. Proceed as follows: D start the engine; D take the vehicle to the following conditions: --- engine speed: low idle --- hydraulic fluid temperature: 95 ° C ≤ Toil ≤ 113 ° C (203 ° F ≤ Toil ≤ 235.4 ° F) D turn the vehicle completely in both directions; D check that in both cases the pressure falls within the prescribed values. Test Procedure n. 3.2 --- Reduced pressure Clear the work area of all personnel since the stationary steering causes movement of the front part of the vehicle. Proceed as follows: D repeat procedure 3.1; D check that in both cases the pressure falls within the prescribed values. Test Procedure n. 3.3 --- Dumping pressure --- moving struts output Proceed as follows: D start the engine D disconnect body up proximity 346 D take the vehicle to the following conditions: --- engine speed: low idle; --- hydraulic fluid temperature: 95 ° C ≤ Toil ≤ 113 ° C (203 ° F ≤ Toil ≤ 235.4 ° F) D activate the raise body control until the full extension of the cylinders; D keep the lever engaged and check that at full---travel the pressure falls within the prescribed values. Test Procedure n° 3.4 --- Dumping back ---pressure --- fourth telescopic element extension Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle into the following conditions: --- engine speed: low idle; --- hydraulic fluid temperature: 95 ° C ≤ Toil ≤ 113 ° C (203 ° F ≤ Toil ≤ 235.4 ° F) D operate the body ascent control; D check that the pressure as the fourth element extends is within the specified values. The pressure must only be read as the fourth element is extending. Test Procedure n. 3.5 --- Piloting pressure Proceed as follows: D take the vehicle to the following conditions: --- engine speed: low idle; --- hydraulic fluid temperature: 95 ° C ≤ Toil ≤ 113 ° C (203 ° F ≤ Toil ≤ 235.4 ° F) D check that the pressure falls within the prescribed values. Test Procedure n. 3.6 --- Anti---saturation (priority) Clear the work area of all personnel since the stationary steering causes movement of the front part of the vehicle. Proceed as follows: D take the vehicle to the following conditions: --- engine speed: about: 1000 RPM --- hydraulic fluid temperature: 95 ° C ≤ Toil ≤ 113 ° C (203 ° F ≤ Toil ≤ 235.4 ° F) D activate the dumping control as described in Test procedure n. 3.3 and at the same time turn the vehicle very quickly; D check that during this operation the dumping cylinders tend to almost stop due to lack of piloting pressure. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
49
Dumping and steering valves 1.02 Maximum pressure limitation valve 1.03 Working pressure limitation valve 1.04 Dumping LS pressure limitation valve 1.05 LS pressures summation valve for anti---saturation 1.11 Dumping actuation pressure limitation valve 1.12 Steering pressure limitation valve 1.13 Dumping piloting proportional slide valve 1.15 Dumping piloting pressure limitation slide valve 1.16 Anti---saturation valve Figure 35
292A010014R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
50
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
51
DIAGNOSTICS
.
This section covers operating anomalies resulting from problems with the steering ---dumping distributor. For a complete system diagnosis, the relative tests must be carried out on the other elements of the same system.
Prescribed pressure values Test
Fitting
1
C
2.1
Pressure
Values bar
psi
Steering pressure
183 + 7 --- 6
2654 + 102 --- 87
C
Dumping pressure (moving struts outlet)
183 + 7 --- 6
2654 + 102 --- 87
2.2
B
Reduced pressure
50 Âą 3
725 Âą 44
2.3
A
Pilot pressure with steering stationary
17 --- 19
247 --- 276
3
A
Pilot pressure with steering at full travel
21 --- 23
305 --- 334
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
52
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
1.
The steering valve does not work (the vehicle does not turn when operating the steering wheel) Problem
SECTION 10
Tests
Safety valve --- Connect a pressure gauge out of adjustwith 300 bar (4351.13 psi) ment end---of---scale value to the pressure fitting C; --- start the engine; --- turn the steering wheel completely.
Results
327B-330B
Repairs
The maximum pres- Operate the steering and at the same sure is lower than time adjust the valve in pos. 1.03 to the prescribed val- the prescribed pressure value. ue. Remove the valve in pos. 1.03; make sure that it is not dirty and that the seal is not deteriorated. Replace it if necessary. Repeat the adjustment of the valve as described in the previous point.
Figure 36
292A010020R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 2.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
53
The body does not tip Problem
Tests
Results
Safety valve out --- Connect a pressure gauge The pressure does of adjustment with 300 bar (4351.13 psi) not reach the preend---of---scale value to the scribed value. pressure fitting C; --- start the engine; --- raise the body completely with arrival at low speed.
Repairs Start the engine. Raise the body completely. Keeping the control in the raised position, adjust the valve 1.04 to the prescribed pressure value.
Defective op- --- Start the engine; The coil is not ex- Check the wiring. eration electro- --- raise the body and use a volt- cited. magnetic valve meter to check that the coil is excited. --- Start the engine; The body raises. --- check the valve operation by manually operating the plunger of the tube.
Replace the coil.
Figure 37
292A010021R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
54
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
3.
The body raises slowly even with the engine at maximum speed Problem
Insufficient control
SECTION 10
Tests --- Connect a pressure gauge with 100 bar (1450.37 psi) end---of---scale value to the pressure fitting A; --- start the engine.
Results
327B-330B
Repairs
With steering at full Adjust the valve in pos. 1.15 to the travel, the pressure prescribed pressure value and opdoes not reach the erate the dumping. prescribed value. If it is not possible to reach the prescribed pressure with the steering operated at full travel, remove the steering---dumping distributor and replace the priority control anti--saturation valve module (arrow).
Figure 38
292A010022R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 4.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
55
The body does not lower Problem
Tests
Insufficient con- --- Connect a pressure gauge trol with 100 bar (1450.37 psi) end---of---scale value to the pressure fitting A; --- start the engine.
Results
Repairs
With steering at full trav- Adjust the valve in pos. 1.15 to el, the pressure does the prescribed pressure value not reach the pre- and operate the dumping. scribed value. If it is not possible to reach the prescribed pressure with the steering operated at full travel, remove the steering---dumping distributor and replace the priority control anti---saturation valve module (arrow).
Defective op- --- Start the engine; The coil is not excited. eration electro- --- raise the body and use a volmagnetic valve tmeter to check that the coil is excited. --- Start the engine; The body raises. --- check the valve operation by manually operating the plunger of the tube.
Check the wiring.
Replace the coil.
Figure 39
292A010022R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
56
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
DETACHMENT ---REATTACHMENT OF THE EMERGENCY STEERING VALVE --- MAIN FILTER Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Detachment Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D disconnect the battery---disconnect switch or disconnect the battery terminals in order to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, as indicated in SECTION 1; D discharge the hydraulic pressure from all the circuits; D remove the right side guard following the instruction in SECTION 15; D disconnect the following hydraulic fluid piping from the filter group: --- delivery (C1) to the dumping valve (2); --- delivery (C) to the steering valve (3); --- arrival (P1) from the emergency steering pump (4); --- return (T) to the tank (5).
327B-330B Additional hydraulic fluid leakage may occur during these operations.
.
It is recommended to suitably mark the fittings in order to facilitate reassembly.
D disconnect the following hydraulic fluid piping from the automatic transmission filter group: --- oil delivery to the filter group (6); --- oil return from the filter group (7); --- filter group by---pass (8). Additional hydraulic fluid leakage may occur during these operations. D disconnect the electrical connections: --- hydraulic system filter obstruction sensor (12); --- emergency steering pump manostat (13); --- emergency steering pump actuation electromagnetic valve (14); --- automatic transmission oil filters obstruction sensor (15); D using a suitable lifting device, sling the entire group; D unscrew the retaining screws fastening the group support bracket (1) to the automatic transmission and remove the group; D disassemble the group on the workbench. Reattachment Proceed with the reattachment by following the detachment instructions in the reverse order.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
57
Figure 40
292A010024R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
58
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
DUMPING VALVE REMOVAL--REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs. D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D discharge the hydraulic pressure from all circuits; D remove the right side cover; D remove the right side guard following the instruction in SECTION 15;
327B-330B
D disconnect the following pipes: (2) dumping lower command (A1) (3) dumping raise command (B1) (4) delivery from pump (P) (5) return to tank (T) (6) return from steering valve (T1) (7) steering LS load signal (2a) (8) return to tank capacity (T2) (9) return to tank signal (5) (10) return to tank signal (Y) (11) pressure signal (point A) (12) pressure signal (point B) (13) pressure signal (point C) D remove the following rigid pipes: (14) anti---saturation valve piloting (15) tipper box pressure limiter valve piloting; Additional hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations.
.
We recommend marking the pipes to facilitate reconnection.
D disconnect the following electrical connections: (16) box raise electrovalve piloting (17) box lower electrovalve piloting. D with suitable lifting gear, unscrew and remove the valve (1). Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
59
Dumping valve removal -- replacement Figure 41
292A010025R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
DUMPING CYLINDER REMOVAL--REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs. D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1;
327B-330B
D discharge the hydraulic pressure from all circuits; D using a bridge crane lift the box enough to access the box articulation pins, then lock it in place with suitable spacers between box and chassis; D unscrew and disconnect the following connectors from the cylinder: (2) extension delivery (3) retraction delivery Hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations. D remove the screws (4) fastening the cylinder (1) to the box, along with all bushes and washers; D using the bridge crane fully lift the box and secure as instructed in SECTION 1; D support the cylinder (1) with suitable lifting gear; D remove the screws (5) fastening the cylinder (1) to chassis, along with all bushes and washers, and remove the cylinder. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Steer in both directions a few times to free the circuit of air bubbles.
Figure 42
276C010046
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
STEERING VALVE REMOVAL--REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs. D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit;
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
61
D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D discharge the hydraulic pressure from all circuits; D lift the cab as instructed in the USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL; D disconnect the steering column from the steering valve; D disconnect all connections to the steering valve (1): (2) LS load signal (3) return (T) (4) Left steering command (L) (5) delivery (P) (6) Right steering command (R) Hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations.
.
We recommend marking the pipes to facilitate reconnection.
Figure 43
2691627
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
62
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
D unscrew the retaining screws (3) and remove the valve (4) and the top flange (2) from the cross---piece (1). Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Figure 44
276C010047
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
MAIN PUMP REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs. D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit;
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
63
D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D discharge the air pressure from the main tank and hydraulic pressure from all circuits; D lift the cab as instructed in the USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL; D disconnect the intake pipe (2) removing the pump side screws and removing the chassis mounting bracket (4); D remove the delivery pipe (3) removing the screws from both sides (see arrow); Hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations. D supporting the pump (1) with suitable means, unscrew the screws and remove the pump. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order.
Figure 45
276C010016
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
64
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
STEERING CYLINDER REMOVAL--REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs. D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D discharge the hydraulic pressure from all circuits;
.
327B-330B Use clamps to fasten the pipes in a raised position to prevent fluid spillage.
D disconnect all connections from the cylinder (1): (2) extension delivery (3) retraction delivery Hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations.
.
We recommend marking the pipes to facilitate reconnection.
D disconnect the central greasing system connectors: (4) steering cylinder front joint B12 rh / B11 lh (5) steering cylinder rear joint B9 rh / B10 lh. D support the cylinder (1) with suitable lifting gear; D Remove the bold (see arrow) and remove the cylinder, with all bushes and washers. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Steer in both directions a few times to free the circuit of air bubbles.
Figure 46
276C010019
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
DUMPING CYLINDER OVERHAUL Dismantling Proceed as follows: D Wash the outside of the telescopic cylinder with water and a non---inflammable detergent to remove excess dust and grime, then dry it.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
65
D Using a flat head screwdriver as a lever, delicately extract the special polyurethane seal from the seat in the base. Check integrity of the base itself:
.
If still intact after removal, the seal may be re---used. Figure 49
Figure 47
18916102 18916100
D Position the cylinder horizontally in a V vice with the lower end (base side) towards the operator and slightly protruding from the working plane. Take care when tightening in the vice not to ovalise the liner, making dismantling of the components difficult.
D Remove the elastic stop rings one at a time starting with the smallest diameter one. Move the element covering the ring forward using a hammer and a plastic spacer. Using a screwdriver and a mallet, lift the ring itself and extract it from its seat taking care that it does not spring out; Figure 50
D Place a recipient with adequate capacity under the base. Figure 48
18916103
18916101
D Loosen the base grub screw (detail), then using a long lever loosen the base by a few turns. Proceed with final removal manually allowing the hydraulic fluid to drain.
.
Take care not to drop the base. Pay attention to leakage of the hydraulic fluid left inside the cylinder itself.
D Unscrew the plunger using a long lever and the two holes on the bottom of the plunger to prevent it rotating. D Two operatives are required to extract the plunger: one to move the plunger with a hammer and a long spacer and the other ready to catch it as soon as it is pushed out. It is advisable to extract the plunger from the opposite end to the base to prevent damage to the seal.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
66
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
Figure 51
18916104
D Once the terminal and plunger are removed, the most internal slider can be removed from the base side. Lightly tap the element with a mallet and plastic spacer to move it and then slide it by hand to prevent damage to the precision ground surfaces. D Proceed in the same way with the other sliders.
327B-330B
Checking components D If the cylinders leak oil or are a few years old, it is advisable to replace all the seals, guides and scrapers with new and original parts. For cylinders less than one year old without leaks, the removed components may be re---used after carefully checking their integrity. D Thoroughly wash the elements, the liner, terminal, locking ring and plunger. Thoroughly dry them. D Thoroughly clean the interiors and the channels for the guides, the seals and scrapers. D Using an exterior micrometer, check the diameter of the elements, which must not be greater than the given value. D Check the integrity of the external (precision ground) and internal (rolled) surfaces, and for the absence of scratches, distortion or dents. If even the smallest defect is found, proceed by replacing the element.
Figure 52
18916105
D Proceed to unscrew the locking ring fitted to the second slider: prevent the element from rotating by adequately locking it and proceed to unscrew the locking ring with a special fork spanner inserted in the two holes provided. D Using a flat head screwdriver as a lever, delicately raise the seals from their seats and remove them by hand.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
67
Rings and seals present on the sliders A. Starting from the terminal side, fitted inside the liner there is a polyurethane scraper (a), a Delrin guide (b) and a polyurethane seal (c); B. From the terminal side fitted inside the first telescopic element there is a polyurethane scraper, a Delrin guide (upper guide) and a polyurethane seal, and externally, from the base side a Delrin guide (a) (lower guide); C. The second element only has the lower guide. From the terminal side, fitted inside the locking ring there is a polyurethane scraper (a), two Delrin guides (b) (upper guides), and a polyurethane seal (c), while outside there is an Ertalon pad (d) and an O---ring (e) with stopper (f); D. Inside the plunger there is an O---ring (a) with stopper (b), while outside (from the terminal side) there is a DAS type seal (c) and a Delrin guide (d) (lower guide).
Figure 53
Assembly While the guides can be fitted either way, the seals and scrapers are asymmetric: they both have a groove that for the seals has to be facing downward (toward the inside of the cylinder) and for the scrapers has to be facing toward the outside. Attention therefore has to be paid to fitting the seals and scrapers in the right direction, because inverting them will cause serious cylinder malfunction. Proceed as follows: D Fit the seals and guide on the plunger and locking ring. Tighten the locking ring on the second element using the same tool used for unscrewing it. D Position the liner horizontally and lock it in a V vice by the lower end (base side) so that it protrudes slightly from the bench Take care not to distort (ovalise) the liner when tightening it in the vice, which would make fitting the elements difficult. 18916106
D Fit the seals and guide inside the liner and grease them. D Fit the first element (with the largest diameter), inserting it into the liner from the base side. Leaving the element protruding from the liner from the base side, fit the lower guide the push the element forward sing a hammer an plastic spacer. Fit the seals and guide inside the element and grease them.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
68
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
D Insert the second telescopic element inside the first from the base side and fit the lower guide the same way as for the first element. D Push the element forward using a hammer and plastic spacer and grease the seals and guide fitted inside the locking ring.
327B-330B
Figure 56
Figure 54
18916109
18916107
D Proceed by inserting the terminal inside the second element from the opposite side to the base. D Grease the seals and guide fitted to the outside of the plunger and apply locktite to the internal thread. Figure 55
D Move the entire block of elements forward using a hammer and plastic spacer until revealing the seat for the base on the liner. D Manually fit the seal on the base in the seat provided. Initially tighten the base on the liner by hand, then finish tightening using a long lever. Tighten the grub screw in its seat. Functional testing D With the oil feed open, tap the top of the terminal with a plastic mallet to fully close the assembly, minimising the quantity of air present inside it. D Before refitting the cylinder to the vehicle, perform a brief functional test on a test bench. D Connect the cylinder to the bench hydraulic system, and raise and lower it a few times, checking the regularity of operation (the first cycles will be irregular due to the air present in the cylinder itself). D Hold the cylinder under pressure for several minutes to check for any oil seepage. D If a suitable test bench is not available, test the cylinder directly on the vehicle, carrying out the same operations as described above.
18916108
D Insert the plunger inside the second element from the base side with the seat of the O---ring turned to face the base side itself, then push the plunger until it rests against the terminal. At this point screw the plunger to the terminal proceeding as already explained for removal. D Move the second element and terminal forward to reveal the seats for the stop rings. Fit the stop rings, starting from the largest diameter one, using a screwdriver.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
STEERING CYLINDER OVERHAUL
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
69
Figure 59
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Dismantling Proceed as follows: D Wash the cylinder exterior with water and a non---inflammable detergent to remove excess dirt and grime, then dry it. Figure 57
18916201
D Place the rod in a vice with soft material between it and the jaws. D Remove both the hydraulic pipe fittings. D Using a plumberâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s wrench, unscrew the guide head from the cylinder body. D Pull out the rod complete with piston and guide head from the cylinder. Figure 60
276A010034
D Remove the retaining rings (1) from the front terminal; D Remove the ball joint (2); Figure 58
18916202
D Using a drill bit, remove the caulking (a), and allow the centring pin (b) to drop out of its housing.
276A010035
D Remove the retaining rings (1) from the rear terminal; D Remove the ball joint (2);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
70
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
Figure 61
327B-330B
Figure 63
18916203
D Place the rod in a vice with soft material between it and the jaws. D Using a pin wrench, remove the piston from the rod. Figure 62
276A010036
18916204
D Slip the guide head off the rod.
D Remove the seals a. external, from the piston b. external, from the guide head c. internal, from the guide head d. from the rod
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
Assembly
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
71
Figure 66
All seals must be replaced when assembling. Carefully lubricate all seals with hydraulic fluid. Proceed as follows: Figure 64
18916208B
D Fit the sealing ring to the outside of the guide head. Figure 67 18916207
Apply LOCKTITE 243 (arrow) to threads.
D Using a lever, fully tighten the lower joint on the rod. Figure 65
18916209
D Fit the O---ring to the outside of the guide head, resting it on the sealing ring. D Fit the O---ring onto the rod. Figure 68
18916208A
Each seal inside the guide head is made up of a spring and a ring, which must be fitted separately. Begin assembly with the seal furthest from the trailing edge of the guide head.
18916210
D Insert the guide head (a) onto the rod, taking great care not to damage the previously fitted seals. D Using a pin wrench, fully tighten the piston (b) onto the rod.
D Fit the spring into the seat (a) then fit the Teflon ring (b). For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
72
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
Figure 69
327B-330B
Figure 72
18916211
D Insert the centring pin (a) into its seat, then apply caulking (b) to block it. Figure 70
18916215
D Using a plumberâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s wrench fully tighten the guide head onto the cylinder body. Figure 73
18916212
D Fit the seals onto the piston starting with the most internal one. D Mount both the hydraulic pipe fittings. Figure 71
276A010035
D Mount the rear spherical joint (1) with the elastic stop rings (2). D Remove the cylinder from the vice. Figure 74
18916214
D Delicately insert the rod complete with piston and guide head into the cylinder taking great care not to damage the previously fitted seals.
276A010034
D Mount the front spherical joint (1) with the elastic stop rings (2).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
STEERING ---DUMPING OVERHAUL
SECTION 10
VALVE
BLOCK
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
73
Figure 76
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Disassembly Proceed as follows: D Externally clean the block with water and a non---inflammable detergent in order to eliminate excess dust and dirt, then dry it. For the identification of the valves and calibrating setscrews refer to the figure on the following page.
276A010039
D Use a wrench to remove the valve 1.03; Figure 77
Additional hydraulic fluid leakage may occur during these operations. Figure 75
276A010040
D Use a wrench to remove the valve 1.04; Figure 78
276A010038
D Use a wrench to remove the valve 1.02;
276A010041
D Use a wrench to remove the valve 1.11;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
74
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Component position identification Figure 79
276D010031
code 1.02 code 1.03 code 1.04 code 1.06 code 1.07 code 1.08 code 1.10 code 1.11 code 1.12 code 1.13 code 1.15 code 1.16
Maximum pressure limitation valve Working pressure limitation valve Dumping LS pressure limitation valve Blind setscrew (protected by cap) Calibrated setscrew Calibrated setscrew (accessible after disassembly of the group) Calibrated setscrew (protected by cap) Dumping actuation pressure limitation valve Hydrostatic valve Dumping piloting proportional slide valve Dumping piloting pressure limitation slide valve (priority) Anti---saturation valve
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
Figure 80
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
75
Figure 83
276A010043
D Use a wrench to remove the valve 1.12; Figure 81
2
276A010046
D Remove the three hexagonal socket head cap screws (arrows) that keep the block modules packed; Figure 84
1
276A010044
D Use a wrench to remove the valve 1.15 (1) and valve 1.16 (2); Figure 82
276A010047
D Remove the block 1.14 (sensor valve); Figure 85
2
1
276A010045
D Unscrew the retaining bush (1) of the proportional valve 1.13; D Slip off the body (2) of the proportional valve; The two proportional valves 1.13 are identical.
276A010048
D Remove the proportional valve block (directional control valve);
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
76
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
Figure 86
327B-330B
Figure 89
276A010049
D Unscrew the calibrated setscrew 1.08;
276A010052
D Remove the threaded connector (if present); D Unscrew the calibrated setscrew 1.07;
Figure 87
Figure 90
276A010053
D Remove the threaded cap;
276A010050
Figure 91
Figure 88
276A010051
D Unscrew the calibrated setscrew 1.10;
D Remove the threaded cap;
276A010054
D Unscrew the calibrated setscrew 1.06. The caps not shown in this procedure must be removed only if necessary (severe pollution of the hydraulic fluid).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Cleaning Thoroughly clean all the disassembled components, taking the following recommendations into consideration: D thoroughly clean the blocks externally as well in order to allow their inspection and to prevent dirt from penetrating inside; D all the components must be perfectly cleaned with suitable detergent; D clean the oil channels by passing a piece of soft wire in both directions and then washing with solvent. Dry the channels with compressed air. Checks and inspections The components subject to the procedure described above can not be dismounted further. In case of damage or proven malfunction of a component, it must be replaced. D check all the oil channels: any obstructions should be eliminated with a jet of compressed air or by passing a smooth wire in both directions of the channel and then washing with solvent; D check the threadings of the blocks, correct any damaged threads with a threading tap of the required size; D check for the absence of deformations and damaged threads on the disassembled valves; replace any damaged pieces. D replace all the gaskets. Assembly All gaskets must be replaced during reassembly. Thoroughly lubricate all the gaskets and all the inner details with hydraulic oil. Proceed with the assembly by following the disassembly steps in the reverse order.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
77
78
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10.2 EMERGENCY STEERING SYSTEM
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
79
80
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
EMERGENCY STEERING SYSTEM Main components Pump: Actuator: Filter: Tank:
fixed displacement with radial pistons (2), fitted to the lower power take---off of the automatic transmission: the pump only rotates if the vehicle is moving. steering cylinders, controlled by the steering valve. in induction (12) to system, common to the brakes actuation system (12). common to the steering and dumping system (16).
Function To ensure the rate of flow needed by the steering operations in the event of a failure in the main pump/main pump control system. The pump capacity is directed to discharge to to the steering valve by an actuator valve (4) commanded by an electrovalve 318.
.
The references with which the components are identified are the same used in the hydraulic diagram shown on the following pages.
.
For more information on the topographic diagram, see Section 10.1 --- Steering and dumping system.
Main component emergency steering system Figure 92
292A010026R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
81
Emergency steering hydraulic diagram
. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 11. 12. 16.
Refer to the following figure. Main pump with variable displacement (fixed) Emergency steering pump Pressurized filter Emergency steering actuator valve with actuation solenoid valve 318 Steering valve Steering cylinders Dumping valve Emergency steering pressure switch 336 Brake actuation system intake filter Tank
Operation The emergency steering pump [2] is always in operation when the vehicle is moving, since the power take off is connected to the automatic transmission output. Delivery from the emergency pump is controlled by an ON/OFF type solenoid valve 318. The solenoid valve 318 receives power from a contactor [E19] which is in turn piloted by I/O MODE according to the signal from pressure switch 336 which sense the output pressure from the main pump. The electrical current to the contactor [E19] is provided by contactor [E23] through fuse F53. Both the switches are powered by contactor [E40] which is in turn piloted from pin 01K2 of the CLUSTER. When the system is operating, CLUSTER pin 01K2 is grounded. Contactor E40 powers switch [E23] that in turn powers switch [E19]. If the pressure switch is closed (pressure higher than cut ---in threshold, situation normal) CLUSTER pin 24K1 is grounded. The system grounds I/O MODE pin 07J2 via CAN OPEN and contactor [E19] supplies current to solenoid valve 318 : the pump capacity is discharged. If the pressure switch is open (pressure lower than cut ---in threshold, emergency situation) CLUSTER pin 24K1 is open. The system opens I/O MODE pin 07J2 via CAN OPEN and contactor [E19] cuts off power to the solenoid valve 318, which closes. In this way the emergency steering pump capacity is delivered to the steering valve. In these conditions the contactor [E19] powers CLUSTER pin 22K1, which indicates the emergency on the display. The same situation presents itself when the emergency electrical power cut ---off switch is operated: in this case contactor [E23] ground is removed, which cuts---off current to contactor [E19]. Contactor 318 closes as a result
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
82
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Steering hydraulic layout (normal situation) Figure 93
7
+
+
CLUSTER
CAN OPEN
292A010027R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURES Check the efficiency of the emergency steering pump control Do as follows: D Shut off the engine, move the selector lever to the Neutral position and engage the parking brake. D Move the starting switch to the position 1. D Move the selector to the position Forward. In this condition the display will show the symbol and the relevant message. Figure 94
292ANU021L
Both the generic and serious anomaly warning lights will come on. In addition, the warning buzzer (continual buzz) will start on vehicles that are fitted with this device. Figure 95
269NU154
.
The buzzer will activate even if it has been disabled from the display.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
83
84
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs.
327B-330B
D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D discharge the hydraulic pressure from all circuits; D to allow access to the pump, disconnect the output shaft joint from the automatic transmission side as described in SECTION 7; D disconnect the following pipes from the pump: (2) intake (3) delivery Hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations. D Unscrew and remove the pump (1) and the O---rings. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order.
Figure 96
2691625--- 6
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10.3 BRAKING SYSTEM --- DISC BRAKES VERSION
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
85
86
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
BRAKING SYSTEM Composition
.
The service braking system is pneumo---hydraulic: the command is actuated by a pneumatic distributor while the braking elements are commanded by a hydraulic system. Command pressure is transformed by a series of pneumo---hydraulic converters
Pump: Motor: Actuator:
.
pneumatic command via duplex distributor (6). --- --hydraulic calipers on front axle (17) and intermediate axle (18).
The rear axle has no braking system.
Exchanger: Filter: Tank:
--- ----- --single, for each pump.
Purpose To provide the pressure necessary for operating the brakes. Braking system key
.
The references for identifying the components are used in the diagrams on the following pages. Numbers highlighted with xxx correspond to the component coding indicated in the electrical circuit diagrams (see SECTION 11 --- ELECTRICAL PLANT --- Electrical Circuits Chapter).
.
For more information on the pneumo---hydraulic system, see SEECTION 12 --- PNEUMATIC SYSTEM.
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Compressor Dryer with heater and filter cartridge Services pneumatic system 30 liter tank A. Parking B. Front C. Rear Not used Duplex distributor Front brakes relay valve Rear brakes relay valve Stop pressure switch 337 Parking brake actuator Parking brake command Parking brake presure switch 349 Front pneumo---hydraulic converter / level sensor 304 Rear pneumo---hydraulic converter / level sensor 303 Front brakes pressure transducer 334 Rear brakes pressure transducer 340 Front brake actuators Rear brake actuators
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
87
Braking system main components -- hydraulic part Figure 97
292A010028R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
88
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Braking system layout -- disk brakes Figure 98
292A010029R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
89
Service and parking brakes -- location 1. 2. 3.
.
Front axle brakes Intermediate axle brakes Parking brake The rear axle has no braking system. Figure 99 ADT327B
ADT330B
292A010030R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
90
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Service braking group -- hydraulic calipers Description Figure 100
1731317
With pedal released pressure does not reach the caliper pistons. The disks are therefore free to rotate, without pressure from the pads. Figure 101
1731318
With pedal pressed, pressure is delivered from the distributor to the pistons that compress the pads against the disk. Braking force is determined by the amount of pressure applied to the brake pedal. Since the pistons are on both sides of the caliper, both disk and caliper are fixed type.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10.3 BRAKING SYSTEM --- WET BRAKES VERSION
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
91
92
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
BRAKING SYSTEM Composition
.
The service braking system is pneumo---hydraulic: the command is actuated by a pneumatic distributor while the braking elements are commanded by a hydraulic system. Command pressure is transformed by a series of pneumo---hydraulic converters
Pump: Motor: Actuator:
.
pneumatic command via duplex distributor (6). --- --wet brakes group on front (17) and intermediate axle (18).
The rear axle has no braking system.
Exchanger: Filter: Tank:
--- ----- --single, for each pump.
Purpose To provide the pressure necessary for operating the brakes. Braking system key
.
The references for identifying the components are used in the diagrams on the following pages. Numbers highlighted with xxx correspond to the component coding indicated in the electrical circuit diagrams (see SECTION 11 --- ELECTRICAL PLANT --- Electrical Circuits Chapter).
.
For more information on the pneumo---hydraulic system, see SEECTION 12 --- PNEUMATIC SYSTEM.
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Compressor Dryer with heater and filter cartridge Services pneumatic system 30 liter tank A. Parking B. Front C. Rear Not used Duplex distributor Front brakes relay valve Rear brakes relay valve Stop pressure switch 337 Parking brake actuator Parking brake command Parking brake presure switch 349 Front pneumo---hydraulic converter / level sensor 304 Rear pneumo---hydraulic converter / level sensor 303 Front brakes pressure transducer 334 Rear brakes pressure transducer 340 Front brake actuators Rear brake actuators
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
93
Braking system main components -- hydraulic part Figure 102
292A010031R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
94
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Braking system layout -- wet brakes Figure 103
292A010032R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
95
Service and parking brakes -- location 1. 2. 3.
Front axle brakes Intermediate axle brakes Parking brake
.
The rear axle has no braking system.
Figure 104
292A010033R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
96
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Braking assembly Description The braking group consists of a series of externally toothed disks (2) interlocking with a series of internally toothed disks (3). The externally toothed disks engage with the part of the hub fastened to the axle, whereas the internally toothed disks engage the part of the hub fastened to the wheel (4). The brakes are hydraulically operated by delivering pressurized oil to the command cylinder (10) through the connector (11). The piston is guided by the bushing (8) and returned by the springs (9). The piston and all connectors are contained in the braking group (13) fastened to the axle part of the hub by screws (12). The disks are immersed in a bath of oil for cooling: cooling oil circulation is assured through two connectors, delivery (7) and return (6). A special frontal o---ring (5, coupled with another fixed ring) prevents cooling oil leakage and protects against foreign matter. Operating brake unit (see figure on next page) 1. Brake housing 2. Externally toothed disks 3. Internally toothed disks 4. Hub 5. Frontal o---ring 6. Cooling oil return outlet 7. Cooling oil delivery input 8. Guide bushing 9. Return spring 10. Command piston 11. Connector 12. Brake closing screw 13. Braking group
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
97
Operating brake unit Figure 105
292A062W001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
98
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
DIAGRAMS Front chassis layout diagram Figure 106
A. B. C. D.
Front hydro---pneumatic converter and pressure test point Front manifold Right front brake actuator Left front brake actuator
314A010006R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
99
Rear chassis layout diagram Figure 107
314A010007R
E. F. G H.
Rear hydro---pneumatic converter Rear manifold and pressure test point Right rear brake actuator Left rear brake actuator For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
100
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
A.
FRONT HYDRO---PNEUMATIC CONVERTER AND PRESSURE TEST POINT Figure 108
1. 2. 3.
Front hydro---pneumatic converter Pressure test point Front brake oil delivery pipe
314A010008R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
B.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
101
FRONT MANIFOLD Figure 109
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Front manifold Oil pipe from front hydro---pneumatic converter Front right brake actuator oil delivery pipe Front left brake actuator oil delivery pipe Oil delivery pipe to pressure test point
314A010009R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
102
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
C.
FRONT RIGHT BRAKE ACTUATOR
327B-330B
Figure 110
1. 2.
Front right brake actuator oil delivery pipe Front right brake unit
314A010010R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
D.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
103
FRONT LEFT BRAKE ACTUATOR Figure 111
1. 2.
Front left brake actuator oil delivery pipe Front left brake unit
314A010011R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
104
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
E.
REAR HYDRO---PNEUMATIC CONVERTER
327B-330B
Figure 112
1. 2.
Rear hydro---pneumatic converter Rear brake oil delivery pipe
314A010012R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
F.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
105
REAR MANIFOLD AND PRESSURE TEST POINT Figure 113
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Rear manifold Oil pipe from rear hydro---pneumatic converter Pressure test point Rear right brake actuator oil delivery pipe Rear left brake actuator oil delivery pipe
314A010013R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
106
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G.
REAR RIGHT BRAKE ACTUATOR
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Figure 114
1. 2.
Rear right brake actuator oil delivery pipe Rear right brake unit
314A010014R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
H.
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
107
REAR LEFT BRAKE ACTUATOR Figure 115
1. 2.
Rear left brake actuator oil delivery pipe Rear left brake unit
314A010015R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
108
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
MAINTENANCE Checking fitting and pipe tightness Visually check for system leaks and tightness of line connections. In the event of faults or leakage from any of the circuits, repairs MUST be carried out before using the vehicle.
327B-330B
Cleaning the (suction) filter Proceed as follows: Clean the filter when you change the hidraulic fluid, when the reservoir is empty. Figure 116
Check by implementing all the specific safety precautions. Changing the fluid
.
For more information see section 10.1.
276C010048
D open the engine hood; D remove the batteries as indicated in the Use and Maintenance Manual; D remove the brake actuation circuit damping valve from the battery case and fasten it temporarily to the chassis; D remove the battery case; D open the cover (1) of the tank; D unscrew the cartridge (2) from the housing; D clean the cartridge using a suitable detergent or replace it, then screw it back into the housing; D close the cover of the tank, replacing the seal (3); D reassemble the battery case and relative components connected to it; D install the batteries as indicated in the Use and Maintenance Manual; D fill the reservoir as shown in the specific paragraph.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
BRAKE PUMP REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs. D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit;
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
109
D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D discharge the hydraulic pressure from all circuits; D lift the hood as instructed in the USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL; D position a suitable container and drain the hydraulic fluid tank as instructed in the Chapter; D disconnect the following pipes from the pump: (2) intake (3) delivery Hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations. D Unscrew and remove the pump (1). Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Fill the main hydraulic tank as instructed in the Chapter.
Figure 117
2691624
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
110
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10.4 BRAKE COOLING SYSTEM (wet brakes version)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
111
112
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
BRAKE COOLING SYSTEM Main components Pump: double (front and intermediate), gear type driven by engine (1) Engine: Enbloc with pump, driven by fluid from a specific pump (12) Actuator: --- --Filter: --- --Tank: common (9) for steering and tipping. Function Ensures circulation of the hydraulic fluid in the brakes as a function of the pressure and the temperature conditions of the fluid itself.
.
The references with which the components are identified are the same used in the hydraulic diagram shown on the following pages.
Brake cooling hydraulic system -- key 1. Motor/pump group 2. Not used 3. Hydraulic fluid temperature sensor 4. Intake filter 5. Pressure switch 6. Front axle braking group 7. Intermediate axle braking group 8. Pressure transducer 9. Tank 10. Pressure socket 11. Pump
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
113
Main components of brake cooling system Figure 118
292A010034R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
114
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Brake cooling system layout Figure 119
292A010035R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
115
Brake cooling system fluid flow Figure 120
292A010036R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
116
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
117
Brake cooling system hydraulic diagram 1. Motor/pump assembly 2. Not used 3. Hydraulic fluid temperature sensor 332 4. Intake filter 5. Pressure switch 351 6. Front axle braking assembly 7. Intermediate axle braking assembly 8. Pressure transducer 326 9. Tank 10. Pressure fitting 11. Pump List of pressure fittings (n. 10 on the diagram) K Brake cooling motor pressure circuit Operation The circuit is always operating when the Diesel engine is running, since the hydraulic motor is operated by a specific pump, in turn driven by the Diesel engine. An integrated proportional electromagnetic valve 331 regulates the by---pass of the brake pump return flow, determining the speed of the hydraulic motor and thus the flow of the cooling fluid. Solenoid valve 331 is piloted in duty---cycle via CAN OPEN through MIDAC according to the working pressure (read by MIDAC through pressure switch 351 mounted on the front axle and the pressure transducer 326 mounted on the mid axle) and hydraulic fluid temperature, read by I/O MODE through the sensor 352 mounted on the front axle. The control via CAN OPEN displays the hydraulic fluid temperature read by sensor 332.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
118
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Brake cooling system hydraulic diagram Figure 121
314A010016R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
119
Figure 122
314A010027R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
120
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAMS Topographic diagram of the front chassis Figure 123
A. B. C. D.
Oil tank. Brake cooling motor/pump assembly. Brake cooling manifold Front axle brake cooling assembly
314A010018R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
121
Topographic diagram of the rear chassis Figure 124
E. Rear chassis connection plate. F. Intermediate axle brake cooling assembly.
314A010019R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
122
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
A. OIL TANK
.
See SECTION 10.1 --- Topographic diagrams.
B. BRAKE COOLING MOTOR/PUMP ASSEMBLY Figure 125
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Brake cooling pipe connection plate Brake cooling motor/pump bypass pipe Brake cooling motor---pump unit Connection pipe to pump Connection pipe to oil reservoir mouth (5) (brake cooling pump return) Intermediate axle brake cooling assembly connection pipe (delivery) Connection pipe to oil reservoir mouth (2) (intermediate axle brake cooling) Connection pipe to oil reservoir mouth (2) (front axle brake cooling) Brake cooling manifold Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (front axle brake cooling) Pump Connection pipe to oil reservoir mouth (3) (pump intake)
314A010020R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
123
C. BRAKE COOLING MANIFOLD Figure 126
314A010021R
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Brake cooling pipe connection plate Front right brake unit Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (right front braking delivery) Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (right front braking return) Intermediate axle brake cooling assembly connection pipe (return) Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (left front braking delivery) Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (left front braking return) Front left brake unit Pressure switch Connection pipe to oil reservoir mouth (1) (brake cooling manifold return) Brake cooling manifold Connection tube to pressure switch Brake cooling motor---pump unit Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (brake cooling motor---pump delivery)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
124
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
D. BRAKE COOLING UNIT ON FRONT AXLE Figure 127
314A010022R
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Front right brake unit Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (right front braking delivery) Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (right front braking return) Brake cooling manifold Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (left front braking delivery) Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (left front braking return) Front left brake unit
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
125
E. REAR CHASSIS CONNECTION PLATE Figure 128
314A010023R
1. 2. 3. 4.
Brake cooling pipe connection plate Intermediate axle brake cooling assembly connection pipe (delivery) Intermediate axle brake cooling assembly connection pipe (return) Connection plate on rear chassis
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
126
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
F. BRAKE COOLING UNIT ON INTERMEDIATE AXLE Figure 129
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Connection plate on rear chassis Intermediate axle brake cooling assembly connection pipe (delivery) Intermediate axle brake cooling assembly connection pipe (return) Front right brake unit Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (right front braking return) Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (right front braking delivery) Intermediate axle Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (left front braking delivery) Connection pipe to brake cooling manifold (left front braking return) Front left brake unit Brake cooling oil temperature sensor Brake cooling oil pressure sensor
314A010024R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 10
BRAKE COOLING CIRCUIT PUMP---MOTOR REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle on a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs. D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D discharge the air pressure from the main tank and hydraulic pressure from all circuits; D position a suitable container and drain the hydraulic fluid tank as instructed in the relative chapter;
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
127
D position a suitable container and drain the brake cooling circuit tank as instructed in the relative chapter; D disconnect all connections from the motor---pump group (1): (2) front brake intake (3) tandem brakes intake (4) front brake delivery (5) tandem brakes delivery (6) brake actuation return to tank (7) brake actuation intake from accumulator recharge valve (8) brake actuation return to tank (by---pass) D disconnect the following electrical connections: (9) piloting by---pass electrovalve Hydraulic fluid may leak during these operations.
.
We recommend marking the pipes to facilitate reconnection. D supporting the pump (1) with suitable means, unscrew the screws and remove the pump. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Fill the main hydraulic tank as instructed in the relative chapter. Fill the brake cooling oil tank as instructed in the relative chapter.
Figure 130
276C010058 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
128
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION 10
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 11 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
MULTIPLEX SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
I/O MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Conventional control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
I/O MODE connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
MULTIPLEX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
I/O MODE control unit PIN---OUT --- connector J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
CAN LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Static efficiency tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MIDAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Measurement values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MIDAC control unit PIN---OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
MULTIPLEX SYSTEM GENERAL DIAGRAM . . . . . 6
LOCATION OF SENSORS AND ACTUATORS . . 28
BULKHEAD CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CAN J1939 LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CAN J1939 line circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
WHITE feedthrough connector cabling---side PIN---OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
EDC ENGINE CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
BROWN feedthrough connector cabling---side PIN---OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
“A” Electro---injectors connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
YELLOW feedthrough connector cabling---side PIN---OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
“B” chassis connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
EDC engine control unit PIN---OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Color legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
GREEN feedthrough connector cabling---side PIN---OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
“C” sensors connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
FRONT-- REAR FRAME SERVICES CABLE INTERFACE CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT (TCU) . . . . . . . 42
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Transmission control unit pin---out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
PIN OUT front ---rear frame services cable interface connector PIN OUT, cable side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR PIN-- OUT . . . . . . . . 14 CAN OPEN LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 CAN OPEN line block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 CAN OPEN LINE -- DISC BRAKES VERSION . . 16 Wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Component location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Color legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
TCU identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 GROUND POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 RELAYS AND FUSES INTERCONNECTION CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 RELAYS AND FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
CAN OPEN LINE -- WET BRAKES VERSION . . . 18
Relays, resistors and diodes supplementary . . . . . 50
Wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Optional equipment fuses (breakdown) . . . . . . . . . 50
Component location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fuse overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Component location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Supplementary fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
BODY COMPUTER SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . 21
Fusebox component wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CLUSTER connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CLUSTER control unit PIN OUT --- connector K1 . 22 CLUSTER control unit PIN OUT --- connector K2 . 23
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF FRONT MAIN FRAME SERVICES CABLE WIRING -(WET BRAKES VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Page
Page
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF REAR MAIN FRAME SERVICES CABLE WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . 81
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF CAB -AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WIRING . . . . . . . 130
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF CAB CABLE WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
WORK ON THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF ENGINE -MAIN FRAME WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF MAIN FRAME -AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WIRING . . . . . . . 128
FEEDTHROUGH CONNECTORS AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 DIGIT CABLE COLOUR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
3
MULTIPLEX SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Rapid data transfer is very important in vehicle management, and reliability must be ensured for applications associated with command safety for transmission, brakes, engine and control units and there must be no communication problems, especially in the presence of electromagnetic fields. Many problems regarding the electrical circuits present on the vehicle concern connection technology and usually involve corrosion or oxidation of the connector contacts themselves, cable sheathing wear or defective assembly. Conventional control Figure 1
At present the vehicle electrical system foresees that each utility is commanded directly by its switch. This necessarily means that the harness has many different wires with the above---mentioned risks. The overall length of the wiring may even reach several kilometres, and the greater number of connections increases the risk of possible faults.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
In MULTIPLEX systems the connection between the various control units is achieved by means of a communications network, capable of effectuating the necessary data transfer both rapidly and reliably. MULTIPLEX system Figure 2
DATA BUS
Multiplexer
De ---Multiplexer
MULTPLEX systems permit improved communication between the various electronic systems present on a vehicle and allow for easier diagnosis of the electronic system. As opposed to traditional systems, in this case each switch is connected to a Multiplexed unit, to which it transmits its state (open or closed). A coded value, different for each switch, is transmitted to the CANBUS (CAN communication line). The signal is decoded by a Demultiplexer unit that provides the voltage required by the utility involved. The MULTIPLX structure is very flexible: control units can be added or removed without interrupting the function of the others. The advantages of the MULTIPLEX system can be summarised as follows: D greater functionality thanks to sharing of sensor signals by the various systems; D improved on---board diagnostics function. On the other hand, its disadvantages include: D higher design costs than conventional systems; D greater technical training requirements. All the control units are connected by CAN line. CAN stands for Controller Area Network This consists of dedicated wiring that permits instantaneous exchange of large amounts of data between the various electronic systems on the vehicle. Information travels according to a protocol that defines the dialogue mode: D Information synchronisation; D Call and response modes between the various systems; D Identification and correction of any transmission errors.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
5
CAN LINE Figure 3
A. Sheath B. Braided wires In physical terms, the CAN line consists of a two---pole twisted cable, enclosed in a sheath. Each CAN line has two 120 Ohm closing resistors. Static efficiency tests Static efficiency tests on the CAN line are carried out using a Multimeter. Figure 4
CAN DRIVER
CAN DRIVER
CAN_H 120 Ohm
120 Ohm CAN_L
Measurement values 0Ω
~ 60 Ω
~ 120 Ω
INFINITE
CAN LINE SHORT---CIRCUIT
CAN line OK
ONE RESISTOR OFF--LINE
CAN line INTERRUPTED
Disconnect the batteries before carrying out any check on the CAN line.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
MULTIPLEX SYSTEM GENERAL DIAGRAM
.
The MIDAC control unit is present on the version with wet brakes only. Figure 5
276E011001
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7
BULKHEAD CONNECTORS Location Figure 6
292A011001R
1. 2. 3. 4.
WHITE connector interfaces Cab cable/Main frame engine cable BROWN connector interfaces Cab cable/Front main frame services cable YELLOW connector interfaces Cab automatic transmission cable/Main frame automatic transmission cable GREEN connector interfaces Cab cable/Front main frame services cable
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
WHITE feedthrough connector cabling -- side PIN-- OUT PIN
Wire code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
8876 --- ----- ----- --22 K2 23 K2 --- ----- --01 K1 0157 --- --0159 5157 5158 --- --0008 8908 2298 --- ----- ----- --8015 --- --0158 8971 --- --9993 --- ----- --J1939H J1939L J1939S --- ----- --0650 8056 --- ----- --8888 7155
UTILITY + 15 Alternator
Engine diesel filter obstruction switch Engine oil filter obstruction switch
Input D + alternator Load sensor on accelerator for EDC (terminal C) Load sensor on accelerator for EDC (terminal E) Load sensor on accelerator for EDC (terminal A) Load sensor on accelerator for EDC (terminal B) Start contactor Pin 86 Start contactor Pin 85 Connection with diagnostics (terminal E)
Key positive (15/54) for EDC connection Load sensor on accelerator for EDC (terminal D) Start connector Pin 87 + 50 key Air conditioning compressor electromagnet connection
CAN line â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Diagnostics connector (H) CAN line â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Diagnostics connector (J) Can line --- Screen
Diesel---fuel heating contactor Pin 86 Diesel---fuel heating contactor Pin 85
Chassis start contactor Positive
T269IE11 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9
BROWN feedthrough connector cabling -- side PIN-- OUT PIN
Wire code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
0185 0186 0182 433 --- --0178 0078 0176 7742 8886 8886* 0550 3304 3314 --- --944 2219 2221 2226 --- --0549 0220 0180 0181 8360 8840 2226 --- ----- --CAN---0---H CAN---0---L CAN---0---S --- ----- --1116 1172 2231 2223 7753 8281
UTILITY Battery (logic ground) Battery (logic ground) Battery (logic ground) Retarder control output --- --Battery---disconnect / connect switch Battery---disconnect / connect switch Contactor E25 --- E27 Cab / fleet link interface (setup) Windshield washer motor Side windshield washer motor Air conditioner contactor E38 Left parking lights (front, rear and side) Right parking lights (front, rear and side) --- --External actuators power supply (automatic transmission control unit) Left high---beam light Right high---beam light Relay E37 (camera) --- --Air conditioner pressure switch Hood---raising switch power supply Battery ground Battery ground Electromagnetic valve shut ---off Air drier resistance Relay E37 (camera) --- ----- --CAN OPEN line --- Diagnostics connector (terminal C) CAN OPEN line --- Diagnostics connector (terminal D) CAN OPEN line --- Screen (versions with wet brakes) --- ----- --Horn Stop lights Left low ---beam light Right low ---beam light Contactor E28 --- Fuel heater power supply Hood raising motor
T269IE11 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
YELLOW feedthrough connector cabling -- side PIN-- OUT PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Wire code 419 903 441 903 442 903 456 410 432 455 409 451 906 439 904 449 904 --- --417 404 462 900 940 944 434 944
UTILITY Engine speed sensor input Engine/intermediate cog/turbine speed sensor ground Turbine speed sensor input Engine/intermediate cog/turbine speed sensor ground Intermediate cog speed sensor input Engine/intermediate cog/turbine speed sensor ground Hydraulic group electrovalve Y2 input Hydraulic group electrovalve Y1 input Hydraulic group electrovalve Y3 input Hydraulic group electrovalve Y4 input Hydraulic group electrovalve Y5 input Hydraulic group electrovalve Y6 input Hydraulic group power supply Converter oil temperature sensor Ground Retarder oil temperature sensor Ground --- --Oil filter block input Output shaft sensor ground Output shaft sensor output Electrical power under key Hydraulic lock electrovalve output External actuators power supply Lock ---up clutch electrovalve output External actuators power supply
T269IE11
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11
GREEN feedthrough connector cabling -- side PIN-- OUT PIN
Wire code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
7138 7139 --- --7819 08 J2 09 J2 21 K2 03 K1 18 K1 17 K1 13 J2 1120 1125 1124 1126 24 K1 --- ----- ----- --9954 --- --05 J2 04 J2 24 K2 05 K1 12 K2 16 K2 06 K1 --- --14 J2 9137 9138 --- --03 M1 --- ----- --26 K2 06 J2 --- ----- ---
UTILITY I/O MODE sensors + 24V power supply --- Fuse 54 MIDAC + 24V power supply --- Fuse 55 (wet brakes version) --- --MIDAC + 24V power supply --- Contactor E24 (wet brakes version) Front brake converters pressure switch signal Front brakes switch signal (wet brakes version) Front converters oil level sensor signal Fuel filter water---presence switch signal Body ascent limit switch signal Body descent limit switch signal Central distributor lock switch signal Left front and rear turn signal power supply Right front and rear turn signal power supply Right turn indicator lights power (fitting) Left turn indicator lights power (fitting) Emergency steering switch signal --- ----- ----- --Emergency steering electromagnetic valve power supply --- Contactor E19 --- --Hydraulic oil temperature sensor signal Air tank pressure sensor signal Rear converters oil level sensor Air filter obstruction switch signal Hydraulic oil filter obstruction switch signal Parking brake switch signal Fuel level sensor signal --- --Rear brake converters pressure switch signal Body ascent electromagnetic valve --- Contactor E30 Body descent electromagnetic valve --- Contactor E31 --- --MIDAC + 24V power supply --- Contactor E24 (wet brakes version) --- ----- --Start ---stop / warm---up button power Axle brakes oil temperature signal (wet brakes version) --- ----- ---
T269IE11
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
FRONT ---REAR FRAME SERVICES CABLE INTERFACE CONNECTOR Location Figure 7
292A011002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
13
PIN OUT front-- rear frame services cable interface connector PIN OUT, cable side PIN
Cable code
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
7138 --- --02 M1 0000 0000 --- --0182 0000 --- --0000 --- --24 K2 17 K1 18 K1 --- ----- --16 K2 3304 3314 2226 --- --1120 1125 --- --1172 2226 --- --06 J2 14 J2 --- --11 M1 0000
USER + 24V I/O MODE sensor power supply --- Fuse 54 Sensors ground Ground Ground Battery (logic ground) Ground Ground Rear converters oil level sensor signal Body descent limit switch signal Body ascent limit switch signal
Parking brake switch signal Left position lights (front, rear and side) Right position lights (front, rear and side) Relay E37 (video camera) Front and rear left turn indicator lights power Front and rear right turn indicator lights power Stop lights Relay E37 (video camera) Brake axle oil temperature signal (wet brakes version) Rear brake converters pressure switch signal Rear brakes pressure signal Ground
292A011003R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR PIN---OUT Pin A B C D E F G H J
Cable code 0000 7797 BROWN WHITE 2298 --- ----- --BROWN WHITE
Function Battery (---) Battery (+) fuse 33 CAN OPEN (H) CAN OPEN (L) EDC central unit --- pin 89 --- ----- --CAN J 1939 (H) CAN J 1939 (L)
Figure 8
276A011005 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
15
CAN OPEN LINE
.
The MIDAC control unit is present on the version with wet brakes only.
The CAN OPEN line represents the BUS connecting the elements of the body computer system. It allows communication between the main control unit (CLUSTER) and the peripheral control units (I/O MODE and MIDAC). The I/O MODE and MIDAC control units gather information and send it to the CLUSTER, and they also receive commands and control the actuators. The CLUSTER control unit also manages operation of the instrument panel, particularly the display. The body computer system exchanges information through the CLUSTER control unit with the CAN J1939 line, which connects the two control units for engine control (ECU) and automatic transmission (TCU). Finally, the body computer system manages all diagnostics with the exclusion of the parts concerning engine control and transmission control. CAN OPEN line block diagram Figure 9
276E011002
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
CAN OPEN LINE --- DISC BRAKES VERSION The CAN OPEN line provides the connection of the various sections of the control units (CLUSTER, I/O MODE or MIDAC), with the exception of the diagnostic outlet. As a result, the detachment of the connector of a control unit entails the exclusion of all the components downstream from the same. Wiring diagram 1. CLUSTER 2. I/O MODE 3. Diagnostic connector 4. Batteries A. B.
120 Ohm closing resistor 120 Ohm closing resistor Figure 10
292A011004R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
17
Component location 1. CLUSTER 2. I/O MODE 3. Diagnostic connector 4. Batteries A. B.
120 Ohm closing resistor 120 Ohm closing resistor Figure 11
292A011005R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
CAN OPEN LINE --- WET BRAKES VERSION
.
The CAN OPEN line provides the connection of the various sections of the control units (CLUSTER, I/O MODE or MIDAC), with the exception of the diagnostic outlet. As a result, the detachment of the connector of a control unit entails the exclusion of all the components downstream from the same.
Wiring diagram 1. CLUSTER 2. I/O MODE 3. Diagnostic connector 4. Batteries 5. Feedthrough connector (brown) 6. MIDAC A. B.
120 Ohm closing resistor 120 Ohm closing resistor Figure 12
292A011006R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
19
Component location 1. CLUSTER 2. I/O MODE 3. Diagnostic connector 4. Batteries 5. Feedthrough connector (brown) A.
120 Ohm closing resistor Figure 13
292A011007R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Component location 6. MIDAC B
120 Ohm closing resistor Figure 14
276E011007
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
21
BODY COMPUTER SYSTEM COMPONENTS CLUSTER The CLUSTER is the CAN OPEN system Master control unit. It works in connection with the other system peripherals capable of accepting CAN OPEN protocol. The CLUSTER receives information on the operating conditions of the vehicle and displays it via the instruments and warning lights. The cluster also has a 3.8â&#x20AC;? display for displaying parameters and messages, as well as for making a number of settings. The CLUSTER has a RAM type permanent memory for data and software and for controlling the display, as well as and EEPROM and Flash EPROM memory for the calibration parameter values. The IN/OUT circuits are protected against short circuit and overload. The power circuits operate at low voltage and are all sufficiently protected to withstand adverse environmental conditions. CLUSTER connectors Figure 15
292A011008R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
CLUSTER control unit PIN OUT -- connector K1 PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Cable code 01K1 02K1 03K1 04K1 05K1 06K1 07K1 08K1 09K1 10K1 11K1 12K1 13K1 8920 15K1 16K1 17K1 18K1 19K1 20K1 21K1 22K1 23K1 24K1 25K1 26K1
USER Alternator input D+ --- --Water in fuel prefilter input Emergency stop input Air filter obstructed sensor input Fuel level sensor External temperature sensor --- --Stop lights pressure switch input Combi (enter) Combi (esc) Combi (+) Combi (---) Key on + 15 input Body ascent command input Body descent command input Body raised oinput Body limit switch input I/O mode logic power supply input Watchdog output check (I/O mode) Watchdog output check (CLS) Emergency steering pump activation input Turn indicators input Emergency steering input Position lights input (w/light) High beams input (w/light)
SIGNAL High Active Input --- --High Active Input High Active Input Low Active Input Input analogico 0 – 312 Ω Input analogico 0 – 200 KΩ --- --Low Active Input Low Active Input Low Active Input Low Active Input Low Active Input High Active Input High Active Input High Active Input High Active Input High Active Input High Active Input High Active Input High Active Input High Active Input High Active Input Low Active Input High Active Input High Active Input
292A011009R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
23
CLUSTER control unit PIN OUT -- connector K2 PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Codice cavo 01K2 7972 0181 CAN L CAN L CAN H CAN H 08K2 09K2 10K2 11K2 12K2 13K2 14K2 15K2 16K2 17K2 18K2 19K2 20K2 21K2 22K2 23K2 24K2 25K2 26K2
UTENZA Watchdog output (CLS) Battery +30 input Battery negative CAN J1939 L CAN OPEN L CAN OPEN H CAN J1939 H Lubrication device output Lubrication low level input + 15A key on input Hazard lights input General oil filter obstruction input Retarder demand input Low gear output Engine braking demand input Parking brake input Video camera 1 input Video camera 2 input Video camera 2 ground Gearbox in neutral output Front brake converters oil low level input. Fuel filter obstructed input Engine oil filter obstructed input Rear brake converters oil low level input Video camera 1 ground External starter input
SEGNALE Lowside Output
Lowside Output Low Active Input High Active Input High Active Input Low Active Input High Active Input Lowside Output High Active Input Low Active Input
Lowside Output Low Active Input Low Active Input Low Active Input Low Active Input High Active Input
292A011009R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
I/O MODE
The I/O MODE is a microcontroller expansion module with CAN BUS interface and pass---through connection. Due to its characteristics, it must be used in a protected environment (cab). Mechanical features Plastic box Dimensions:width x depth x height = 112 x 63.5 x 28.5 (mm) Connectors: J2 18 pin Molex Minifit J3 20 pin Molex Minifit Protection: IP20 Integral internal resining Electrical features Power supply voltage: +9 ÷ +30 Volt DC (direct power supply on the vehicle) Operating temperature: ---25 ° C ÷ +70 ° C Storage temperature: ---35 ° C ÷ +85 ° C Electrical absorption in stand---by: 50 mA Maximum electrical absorption for each pin: 0.5 A Maximum electrical absorption: 8 A I/O MODE connectors
Figure 16
292A011010R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
25
I/O MODE control unit PIN-- OUT -- connector J2
. PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Connector J3 is not used. Wire code 7136 CAN L CAN H 04 J2 05 J2 06 J2 07 J2 08 J2 09 J2 0180 CAN L CAN H 13 J2 14 J2 15 J2 16 J2 17 J2 18 J2
UTILITY Power supply 24V CAN OPEN (L) CAN OPEN (H) Main tank air pressure sensor Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Brake axle oil temperature sensor Emergency steering valve activation output Front brake converters pressure sensor Front axle brakes switch Battery ground CAN OPEN (L) CAN OPEN (H) Splitter locking switch Rear brake converters pressure sensor Timed battery isolation output Stop signal output Body ascent output (for gear reduction) Body descent output (for automatism)
SIGNAL FUSE 52 CAN BUS 1 – line L CAN BUS 1 – line H Analog input Analog input Analog input On/Off output to ground Analog input On/Off input (active grounded) Power ground CAN BUS 1 – line L CAN BUS 1 – line H On/Off input to ground Analog input On/Off output to ground On/Off output to ground On/Off output to ground On/Off output to ground
276E011009
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
MIDAC
.
The MIDAC control unit is present on the version with wet brakes only.
The MIDAC is the CAN OPEN system Slave control unit. It works in connection with the other system peripherals able to accept CAN OPEN protocol. The system has two MIDACs. The MIDAC has a non---erasable RAM type memory for storing data and software and an erasable EEPROM memory for storing parameter calibration values. The IN/OUT circuits have short ---circuit and overload protection. The power circuits operate at low voltage and are all protected against harsh environmental conditions. The system envisages two MIDACs connected via CAN OPEN. Mechanical features Stainless steel box 24---pin connector Protection rating: IP67 Fully resin filled Electrical specifications Power supply voltage: +9 ÷ +32 Volt DC (direct power supply on the vehicle) Separate power supply for internal logic and outputs Operating temperature: ---25 ° C ÷ +70 ° C Storage temperature: ---35 ° C ÷ +85 ° C Power absorption on stand---by: 100 mA Maximum power absorption: 10 A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
27
MIDAC control unit PIN-- OUT PIN
Wire code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
0183 02M1 03M1 04M1 05M1 7139 7818 CAN L --- ----- --11M1 12M1 CAN H --- --CAN L 16M1 --- ----- --CAN H --- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---
UTILITY Battery ground Sensor ground MIDAC power supply check --- ----- --Power supply +24 Volt Power supply +24 Volt CAN OPEN L --- ----- --Rear brake cooling pressure sensor Brake cooling flow electromagnetic valve CAN OPEN H --- --CAN OPEN L MIDAC configuration --- ----- --CAN OPEN H --- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---
SIGNAL Power ground Analog ground On/Off input (+24V active) --- ----- --FUSE 55 FUSE 56 CAN BUS 1 – line L --- ----- --Analog input PWM output (duty---cycle supply) CAN BUS 1 – line H --- --CAN BUS 1 – line L Logic ground --- ----- --CAN BUS 1 – line H --- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---
(*) versions with wet brakes only
276C11010
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
LOCATION OF SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
. 1. 2. 3. 4.
The numbers xxx correspond to the componentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s code indicated on the wiring diagrams (see the Chapter WIRING DIAGRAMS) Front brake converters pressure sensor 325 Front brakes low oil level 304 Rear brake converters pressure sensor 339 Rear brake low oil level 303
Figure 17
292A011011R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 1. 2. 3. 4.
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
29
Pneumatic system air pressure sensor 334 Stop on command pressure switch 337 External starter command switch 323 Air filter obstructed pressure switch 342
Figure 18
292A011012R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Main hydraulic tank oil temperature sensor 332 Emergency steering pressure switch 336 Body lowered position sensor 347 Body raised position sensor 346 Fuel level sensor 333 Water in fuel prefilter sensor 330
Figure 19
292A011013R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
31
Body ascent electromagnetic valve 314 Body descent electromagnetic valve 315 Central splitter locking switch 335 Emergency steering electrovalve 318 Parking brake pressure switch 349
Figure 20
292A011014R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
General oil filter obstruction pressure switch 343 Automatic lubricating tank level low sensor 216 Engine oil filter obstruction pressure switch 429 Fuel filter obstruction pressure switch 430 Engine brake/retarder control 318 Combiswitch 307 body control stick
Figure 21
276E011015
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
. 1. 2. 3. 4.
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
33
The following components are only present on wet brakes version Front brake cooling pressure switch 351 Rear brake cooling pressure sensor 326 Axle brakes cooling oil temperature 352 Brake cooling fluid flow rate electrovalve 331
Figure 22
292A011015R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
35
CAN J1939 LINE
The CAN J1939 line allows communication between the CLUSTER and the engine control unit (ECU) and automatic transmission control unit (TCU). The control units, concerning vehicle interface functions, gather information and send it to the CLUSTER; they also receive commands and control the actuators. The CLUSTER also exchanges information with the CAN OPEN line that connects the MIDAC and I/O MODE control units. The diagnostic part of the system that concerns control of the engine and automatic transmission is managed directly by the respective control units. Figure 23
276C11020
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
CAN J1939 line circuit diagram 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
CLUSTER (body computer) Diagnostics connector Automatic transmission control unit (TCU) Bulkhead through connector (white) Engine control unit (ECU)
A. B.
120 Ohm closing resistor (incorporated in TCU) 120 Ohm closing resistor (incorporated in ECU)
Figure 24
292A011017R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
37
EDC ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
The EDC engine control unit is located on the right side of the engine block.
Figure 25
276C11025
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
EDC engine control unit PIN-- OUT The engine control unit is equipped with three connectors: A. Electro---injectors connector B. Chassis connector C. Sensors connector Figure 26
276C11026
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
39
â&#x20AC;&#x153;Aâ&#x20AC;? Electro -- injectors connector Color legend B black R red U blue W white P purple G green N brown Y yellow O orange
12
16
11
6
1
5
276C11027
ECU Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Cable Color ----B ----Y O N ----R G W U E P
Function Free Free Electromagnetic valve for cylinder (4---5---6) electronic injection Free Free Electromagnetic valve for cylinder 2 electronic injection Engine brake control electromagnetic valve Engine brake control electromagnetic valve Free Free Electromagnetic valve for cylinder (1---2---3) electronic injection Electromagnetic valve for cylinder 3 electronic injection Electromagnetic valve for cylinder 1 electronic injection Electromagnetic valve for cylinder 4 electronic injection Electromagnetic valve for cylinder 6 electronic injection Electromagnetic valve for cylinder 5 electronic injection
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
“B” chassis connector
71 89
72
54
6
11
1 7 12
53 35
18
36
17
276C11028
ECU Pin 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 17 29 32 34 35 36 37 40 48 75 77 78 79 89
Cable Color 7151 7151 0150 0150 7151 7151 0150 0150 0096 8056 8908 0158 8971 W N 0650 8908 8015 0159 9164 5158 0157 5157 2298
Function Positive +30 Positive +30 Ground Ground Positive +30 Positive +30 Ground Ground Preheating connection consent relay ground Preheating fuel connection relay Start relay Power supply +30 Power supply + 30 CAN L line CAN H line Preheating fuel connection relay Start relay +15 Accelerator control Preheating contactor excitation signal for EDC Accelerator control Accelerator control Accelerator control EDC control unit diagnostics line K
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
41
“C” sensors connector Color legend B black R red U blue W white P purple G green N brown Y yellow O orange E grey K pink
6
8 16 9
15
22
1
3 23 30
36
29
4 5
276C11029
ECU Pin 1 2 3 4÷8 9 10 11 ÷ 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ÷ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Cable Color N --B --W R --K --O/B B N --W N W Y O/B U --W --O R G W/R O
Function Electromagnetic valve for variable---geometry turbine control Free Electromagnetic valve for variable---geometry turbine control Free Distribution sensor Distribution sensor Free Coolant temperature sensor Free Free Fuel temperature sensor Flywheel sensor Turbocharger speed sensor Free Flywheel sensor Ground for engine oil pressure / temperature sensor Power supply for air pressure / temperature sensor Coolant temperature sensor Oil temperature signal from engine oil pressure / temperature sensor Oil pressure signal from engine oil pressure / temperature sensor Free Turbocharger speed sensor Free Power supply for engine oil pressure / temperature sensor Power supply for air pressure / temperature sensor Air pressure signal from air pressure / temperature sensor Fuel temperature sensor Air temperature signal from air pressure / temperature sensor
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT (TCU) Figure 27
T225039
TCU identification plate 1. TCU type 2. Transmission type 3. Supply voltage 4. Progressive identification No 5. TCU part list No. 6. Software release The automatic transmission control unit TCU (1) is located inside the cab, in a door---closed space on the right side. To access the control unit it is necessary to: D remove the wall---board; D unscrew the retaining screws and remove the door. Figure 28
276A011001 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
43
Transmission control unit pin-- out 35 36
-----
37
---
04 05 06 07 08 09
Ground Ground Engine/turbine/internal speed pick ---up ground Output speed pick ---up ground ----Relay (E18) for reversing drive output External actuators supply Hydraulic control unit Y5 valve input
38 39 40 41 42 43
10
Hydraulic control unit Y1 valve input
44
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Transmission difflock valve output Hydraulic control unit supply Hydraulic control unit supply --Output to diagnostic connector --Switch filter restriction input Input from diagnostic connector Engine speed pick ---up input ----Controller lever input Battery supply --CAN J1939 --- H line CAN J1939 --- L line CAN J1939 --- L line (doubled) CAN J1939 line --- Shielding --Transmission difflock preselect switch input Retarder preselect switch input Hydraulic control unit Y3 valve input Retarder valve output Lock ---up clutch valve output
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
--Converter oil temperature input --Turbine speed pick ---up input Internal speed pick ---up input Controller lever input Parking brake engaged signal input from HEAD Key supply Ground ----Retarder oil temperature input --Hydraulic control unit Y6 valve input --External actuators supply --Hydraulic control unit Y4 valve input Hydraulic control unit Y2 valve input ----------Output speed pick ---up input Controller lever input Controller lever input Controller lever input Body raised signal input from HEAD Controller lever input Battery supply
01 02 03
T225087
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
44
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY Batteries Do not disconnect the batteries from the system while the engine is running. Do not switch off the battery emergency cutout switch with thel motor running, if not in an emergency. To disconnect the batteries, carry out the following steps: D disconnect the cable from the positive pole; D disconnect the cable from the negative pole. Make sure the system is correctly isolated before connecting the batteries. Disconnect the batteries from the system while recharging them. The electrical system generates, regulates, accumulates and distributes electricity needed for vehicle component operation. The electrical system is powered by a generator (28V --- 90A alternator) and two batteries connected in series for this purpose. The nominal voltage of each battery is 12V; capacity is 170 Ah. The nominal voltage of the system is consequently 24V; the total capacity of the batteries is 170 Ah. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Battery Battery cable (bridge) Positive pole Negative pole
Figure 29
T276C011050
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
45
GROUND POINTS
The ground points of the system are shown in the diagram. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Front chassis --- cab ground Engine --- chassis ground (on engine) Right front chassis --- engine ground / battery negative Multiplex system logic ground (on the battery negative terminal)
Figure 30
276C011041
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
46 5. 6.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Right chassis --- automatic transmission ground Right chassis --- services ground
Figure 31
276C11042
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
47
RELAYS AND FUSES INTERCONNECTION CONTROL UNIT
The main interconnection control unit contains the relays and fuses for the entire vehicle. It is situated in the cab, to the lower right. Figure 32
276E011022
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
48
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
RELAYS AND FUSES Relays
269DT0F2A
Code Type
Description
E1
-- --
E2
N
Headlight circuit relay
E3
F
50A key services (15A off during ignition)
E4
N
Flasher relay
E5
N
Stop lights relay
E6
-- --
--- ---
E7
-- --
--- ---
E8
-- --
--- ---
E9
X
Windscreen wiper flick
E10
S
Main---beam headlight relay
E11
N
Work light relay
E12
N
Horn relay
E13
-- --
--- ---
E14A
-- --
--- ---
E14B
-- --
--- ---
E15
-- --
--- ---
--- ---
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
49
Relays
269DT0F2A
Code Type
Description
E17
H
Transmission in neutral for cranking relay
E18
H
Reverse relay
E19
H
Emergency steering pump relay
E20
H
Request starting relay
E21
H
Gear reduction relay
E22
H
Neutral gear relay
E23
H
Watchdog “I/O MODE” relay
E24
H
Watchdog “MIDAC” relay
E25
H
Battery---disconnect self---retained relay
E26
H
Timed battery---disconnect relay
E27
H
Timed battery---disconnect relay
E28
H
Fuel heater
E29
H
Body raise relay (control)
E30
H
Body raise relay (exclusion)
E31
H
Body lower relay (control)
E32
H
Body lower relay (automatic)
E33
H
Left side window wiper relay
E34
H
Right side window wiper relay
E35
H
Side windows washer pump relay
E36
H
--- ---
E37
H
Camera relay
E38
H
Climate control relay
E39
H
Grease dispenser relay
E40
H
Watchdog ”CLUSTER” relay
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
50
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Relays, resistors and diodes supplementary
293DT005L
Code
Type
Description
D1
G
Battery---disconnect self---retained diodes
D2
G
Hazard lights diodes
D3
G
Body dumping
D4
G
Turn indicator lights diodes
GA
L
Ignition switch powered utilities
GC
L
Hood tipping
GE
L
Start ---up
Optional equipment fuses (breakdown) Code
Capacity
Description
FA
10A
Rear---view mirrors heating power supply
FB
5A
Left ---side mirrors adjustment power supply
FC
5A
Right ---side mirrors adjustment power supply
FD
10A
Parking brake
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
51
Fuse overview
269DT0F3
Nr.
Capacity
Function
1
7.5A
Clearance light --- dashboard light
2
7.5A
Clearance lights --- warning light
3
3A
Main beam switch --- dipped beam switch---off with main beam switch---on
4
5A
LH dipped---beam headlights
5
5A
RH dipped---beam headlight
6
7.5A
RH main---beam headlight
7
7.5A
LH main---beam headlight ---warning light
8
20A
Front work lights
9
10A
Heated electro---pneumatic seat
10
7.5A
--- ---
11
10A
Horn
12
5A
High---beam lights circuit
13
3A
Shut ---off solenoid valve
14
10A
Lubricating device
15
7.5A
Windscreen wiper---washer
16
10A
Key +30 --- power supply (+15 CLUSTER input)
17
7.5A
Reverse gear (lights and siren) --- stand---by camera
18
7.5A
Brake lights
19
7.5A
Air dryer
20
3A
Ceiling lights
21
10A
Climate control compressor
22
5A
Blinker
23
20A
Fuel heater
24
15A
Climate control fan
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
52
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Supplementary fuses
WHITE
BLACK
RED
269DT0F4
Color code
WHITE
BLACK
RED
Nr.
Capacity
Function
31
5A
Power supply +15 - (Engine ECU)
32
20A
Engine ECU power from main relay
33
5A
Power +30 - 30 pin diagnostic socket
34
5A
Power supply +15 - (alternator)
35
15A
ZF Transmission TCU power (+15) - relay E17/E21
36
10A
ZF Transmission TCU power (+30 memory)
41
10A
LH side windscreen wiper
42
10A
RH side windscreen wiper - washer pump
43
15A
12V power socket - 12V cigar lighter
44
20A
24-12 V voltage reducer
45
25A
Hood tipping
46
7.5A
Turn signals/hazard lights power supply
51
5A
Body Computer “CLUSTER” power supply
52
3A
“I/O MODE” slave power supply (logic)
53
10A
“I/O MODE” utilities power supply (Emergency steering pump, body raise / body down)
54
5A
“I/O MODE” sensors power supply
55
3A
“MIDAC” slave (logic) power supply (only for wet brakes version)
56
15A
“MIDAC” slave (outputs) power supply (only for wet brakes version)
FB1 - Battery direct power supply fuse - 20 A Figure 33
292A011023R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Fusebox component wiring Code
Diagram
Description
F
50 A relay
G
Diode block
H
10/20 A exchange micro relay
L
40 A N.O. relay
N
20 A N.O. relay
S S
Supply contactor 10/20 A
X
Windscreen wiper relay
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
53
54
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAMS GENERAL The vehicle electrical system consists of the following cables: D Cabin cable (feedthrough brown green and white) D Front frame services cable --- disk brakes (feedthrough brown and green) Or, alternatively Front frame services cable --- wet brakes (feedthrough brown and green) This assesmbly includes the following cables: --- Retarder cable (connected to a specific junction of the front frame services cable). --- Start ---stop and battery isolation switch cable (connected to a specific junction of the front frame services cable) --- Splitter locking switch cable (connected to a specific junction of the front frame services cable) D Rear frame services cable --- disk brakes Or, in alternative Rear frame services cable --- wet brakes --- Engine cable (white feedthrough) --- Frame automatic transmission cable (yellow feedthrough) --- Cabin automatic transmission cable (yellow feedthrough) Figure 34
292A011017R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
55
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF FRONT MAIN FRAME SERVICES CABLE WIRING --- (WET BRAKES VERSION) Overall view Figure 35
314A011001R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
56
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part A -- Description 1 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (BROWN) 2 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (GREEN) 3 Start ---stop and battery---disconnect switches cable connection connector 4 Brake oil filter obstruction pressure switch connector 5 Windshield washer electropump connectors 6 Fuel level sensor connector 7 Air filter obstruction pressure switch connector 8 Fuel prefilter heating connector 9 Fuel prefilter water---presence sensor connector 10 Fuel level sensor connector 11 Front axle brakes cooling pressure switch connector 12 Brakes cooling flow rate electrovalve connector Figure 36
292A011027R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
57
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part A -- Wiring layout 1 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (BROWN) 2 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (GREEN) 3 Start ---stop and battery---disconnect switches cable connection connector 4 Brake oil filter obstruction pressure switch connector 5 Windshield washer electropump connectors 6 Fuel level sensor connector 7 Air filter obstruction pressure switch connector 8 Fuel prefilter heating connector 9 Fuel prefilter water---presence sensor connector 10 Fuel level sensor connector 11 Front axle brakes cooling pressure switch connector 12 Brakes cooling flow rate electrovalve connector Figure 37
292A011028R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
58
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 1 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (BROWN) 2 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (GREEN) 3 Start ---stop and battery---disconnect switches cable connection connector Figure 38
292A011029R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
59
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 4 Brake oil filter obstruction pressure switch connector 5 Windshield washer electropump connectors 6 Fuel level sensor connector 7 Air filter obstruction pressure switch connector Figure 39
292A011030R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 8 Air filter obstruction pressure switch connector 9 Windshield washer electropump connectors 10 Fuel level sensor connector Figure 40
292A011031R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
61
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 11 Front axle brakes cooling pressure switch connector 12 Brakes cooling flow rate electrovalve connector Figure 41
292A011032R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
62
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part B -- Description 1 General current contactor (T.G.C.) connector 2 Direct battery power connector (+) 3 Logic ground connector (battery negative) 4 Front main frame ground connector 5 Dryer compartment feedthrough connection connector 6 Air pressure sensor connector 7 Dryer connector 8 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor connector 9 Right turn signal connector 10 Right front lights connector Figure 42
314A011002R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
63
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part B -- Wiring layout 1 General current contactor (T.G.C.) connector 2 Direct battery power connector (+) 3 Logic ground connector (battery negative) 4 Front main frame ground connector 5 Dryer compartment feedthrough connection connector 6 Air pressure sensor connector 7 Dryer connector 8 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor connector 9 Right turn signal connector 10 Right front lights connector Figure 43
314A011003R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
64
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 1 General current contactor (T.G.C.) connector 2 Direct battery power connector (+) 3 Logic ground connector (battery negative) 4 Front main frame ground connector Figure 44
314A011004R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
65
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 5 Dryer compartment feedthrough connection connector 6 Air pressure sensor connector 7 Dryer connector 8 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor connector Figure 45
314A011005R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
66
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 9 Right turn signal connector 10 Right front lights connector Figure 46
314A011006R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
67
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part C -- Description 1 Air conditioning pressure switch connector 2 Horn connector 3 Left front lights connector 4 Left turn signal connector Figure 47
314A011007R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
68
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part C -- Wiring layout 1 Air conditioning pressure switch connector 2 Horn connector 3 Left front lights connector 4 Left turn signal connector Figure 48
276E011BD014 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
69
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 1 Air conditioning pressure switch connector 2 Horn connector 3 Left front lights connector 4 Left turn signal connector Figure 49
314A011008R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
70
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part D -- Description 1 Body ascent electromagnetic valve connector 2 Body descent electromagnetic valve connector 3 Electromagnetic shut ---off valve connector 4 Retarder wiring junction connector Figure 50
292A011033R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
71
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part D -- Wiring layout 1 Body ascent electromagnetic valve connector 2 Body descent electromagnetic valve connector 3 Electromagnetic shut ---off valve connector 4 Retarder wiring junction connector Figure 51
292A011034R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
72
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 1 Body ascent electromagnetic valve connector 2 Body descent electromagnetic valve connector 3 Electromagnetic shut ---off valve connector 4 Retarder wiring junction connector Figure 52
292A011035R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
73
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part E -- Description (without dump valve) 1 Emergency steering electromagnetic valve connector 2 Emergency steering pressure switch connector 3 Hydraulic oil filter obstruction pressure switch connector 4 Emergency steering pressure switch connector 5 Hydraulic oil filter obstruction pressure switch connector 6 Emergency stop button connector (setup) Figure 53
314A011009R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
74
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part E -- Wiring layout (without dump valve) 1 Emergency steering electromagnetic valve connector 2 Emergency steering pressure switch connector 3 Hydraulic oil filter obstruction pressure switch connector 4 Emergency steering pressure switch connector 5 Hydraulic oil filter obstruction pressure switch connector Figure 54
292A011037R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
75
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 1 Emergency steering electromagnetic valve connector 2 Emergency steering pressure switch connector 3 MIDAC output setup connector Figure 55
314A011010R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
76
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 4 Emergency steering pressure switch connector 5 Hydraulic oil filter obstruction pressure switch connector Figure 56
314A011011R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
77
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part F -- Description 1 Rear main frame services cable connection connector 2 Ground connector 3 Distributor lock switch connector 4 Retarder cable connection connector 5 Hood---raising switch cable connection connector 6 Hood---raising electropump connector 7 CAN---OPEN line 120 ohms resistance connector 8 MIDAC control unit connector Figure 57
314A011012R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
78
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version Part F -- Wiring layout 1 Rear main frame services cable connection connector 2 Ground connector 3 Distributor lock switch connector 4 Retarder cable connection connector 5 Hood---raising switch cable connection connector 6 Hood---raising electropump connector 7 CAN---OPEN line 120 ohms resistance connector 8 MIDAC control unit connector Figure 58
292A011041R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
79
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 1 Rear main frame services cable connection connector 2 Ground connector 3 Distributor lock switch connector 4 Ground connector Figure 59
314A011013R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
80
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Front main frame services cable -- wet brakes version 5 Distributor lock switch connector 6 Side lights setup connector 7 Hood---raising switch cable connection connector 8 Hood---raising electropump connector Figure 60
314A011014R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
81
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF REAR MAIN FRAME SERVICES CABLE WIRING Overall view Figure 61
314A011015
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
82
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Rear main frame services cable Topographic diagram Figure 62
292A011045R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
83
Rear main frame services cable Part A -- Description 1 Front main frame services cable connection connector 2 Parking brake pressure switch connector Figure 63
292A011046R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
84
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Rear main frame services cable Topographic diagram 1 Front main frame services cable connection connector 2 Parking brake pressure switch connector Figure 64
292A011047R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
85
Rear main frame services cable 1 Front main frame services cable connection connector 2 Parking brake pressure switch connector Figure 65
292A011048R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
86
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Rear main frame services cable Part B -- Description 1 Rear brakes converter air pressure sensor connector 2 Rear brakes converter oil level sensor connector 3 Rear brakes cooling oil pressure sensor connector 4 Rear brakes cooling oil temperature sensor connector Figure 66
292A011049R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
87
Rear main frame services cable Topographic diagram 1 Rear brakes converter air pressure sensor connector 2 Rear brakes converter oil level sensor connector 3 Rear brakes cooling oil pressure sensor connector 4 Rear brakes cooling oil temperature sensor connector Figure 67
292A011050R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
88
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Rear main frame services cable 1 Rear brakes converter air pressure sensor connector 2 Rear brakes converter oil level sensor connector 3 Rear brakes cooling oil pressure sensor connector 4 Rear brakes cooling oil temperature sensor connector Figure 68
292A011051R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
89
Rear main frame services cable Part C -- Description 1 Body at rest proximity sensor connector 2 Body raised limit switch connector 3 Outside temperature sensor connector Figure 69
314A011016R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
90
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Rear main frame services cable Topographic diagram 1 Body at rest proximity sensor connector 2 Body raised limit switch connector 3 Outside temperature sensor connector Figure 70
314A011017R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
91
Rear main frame services cable 1 Body at rest proximity sensor connector 2 Body raised limit switch connector 3 Outside temperature sensor connector Figure 71
314A011018R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
92
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Rear main frame services cable Part D -- Description 1 Right headlights group connector 2 Right reversing lights connector 3 Reverse engaged siren connector 4 Left reversing light connector 5 Left headlights group connector Figure 72
292A011055R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
93
Rear main frame services cable Part D -- Wiring layout 1 Right headlights group connector 2 Right reversing lights connector 3 Reverse engaged siren connector 4 Left reversing light connector 5 Left headlights group connector Figure 73
292A011056R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
94
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Rear main frame services cable 1 Right headlights group connector 2 Right reversing lights connector Figure 74
292A011057R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
95
Rear main frame services cable 3 Reverse engaged siren connector 4 Left reversing light connector 5 Left headlights group connector Figure 75
292A011058R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
96
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF CAB CABLE WIRING Overall view Figure 76
314A011019R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
97
Cab cable Topographic diagram Figure 77
314A011020R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
98
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable Part A -- Description 1 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (GREEN) 2 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (BROWN) 3 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (WHITE) 4 Cabin power cable feedthrough connector 5 Air---conditioner control connector 6 Air---conditioner control connector 7 Cabin ground connector 8 Heated and motorised mirror wiring joint connector Figure 78
314A011021R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
99
Cab cable Part A -- Wiring layout 1 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (GREEN) 2 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (BROWN) 3 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (WHITE) 4 Cabin power cable feedthrough connector 5 Air---conditioner control connector 6 Air---conditioner control connector 7 Cabin ground connector 8 Heated and motorised mirror wiring joint connector Figure 79
314A011022R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
100
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable Part A -- Wiring layout 1 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (GREEN) 2 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (BROWN) 3 Front main frame services cable feedthrough connector (WHITE) 4 Cabin power cable feedthrough connector Figure 80
314A011023R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
101
Cab cable 5 Air---conditioner control connector 6 Air---conditioner control connector 7 Cabin ground connector 8 Heated and motorised mirror wiring joint connector Figure 81
314A011024R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
102
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable Part B -- Description 1 Turn indicator lights flasher unit connector 2 Cluster connector K1 3 Cluster connector K2 4 Video camera cabling connector 5 I/O MODE control unit connector J2 6 I/O MODE control unit connector J3 fitting 7 Voltage regulator connector 8 Windscreen wiper wiring connector Figure 82
314A011025R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
103
Cab cable Part B -- Wiring layout 1 Turn indicator lights flasher unit connector 2 Cluster connector K1 3 Cluster connector K2 4 Video camera cabling connector 5 I/O MODE control unit connector J2 6 I/O MODE control unit connector J3 fitting 7 Voltage regulator connector 8 Windscreen wiper wiring connector Figure 83
292A011062R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
104
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable 1 Turn indicator lights flasher unit connector 2 Cluster K1 connector 3 Cluster K2 connector 4 Camera wiring connector Figure 84
314A011026R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
105
Cab cable 5 I/O MODE control unit J3 connector 6 I/O MODE ECU connector J3 setup 7 Voltage reducer connector 8 Windscreen wiper wiring connector Figure 85
314A011027R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
106
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable Part C -- Description 1 Combiswitch connector 2 Left instrument panel switch connector 3 Right instrument panel switch connector 4 Emergency button connector 5 Ignition switch connector 6 Ignition switch connector Figure 86
276E011A011 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
107
Cab cable Part C -- Wiring layout 1 Combiswitch connector 2 Left instrument panel switch connector 3 Right instrument panel switch connector 4 Emergency button connector 5 Ignition switch connector 6 Ignition switch connector Figure 87
276E11A012 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
108
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable 1 Steering column switch unit connector 2 Left instrument panel switch connector 3 Right instrument panel switch connector Figure 88
314A011028R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
109
Cab cable 4 Emergency push button connector 5 Starting switch connector 6 Starting switch connector Figure 89
314A011029R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
110
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable Part D -- Description 1. Not used 2 Stop switch connector 3 Cabin front feedthrough junction connector 4 Accelerator pedal connector 5 Ceiling light junction connector 6 Ceiling light junction connector Figure 90
276E11A015 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
111
Cab cable Part D -- Wiring layout 1. Not used 2 Stop switch connector 3 Cabin front feedthrough junction connector 4 Accelerator pedal connector 5 Ceiling light junction connector 6 Ceiling light junction connector Figure 91
276E11A016 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
112
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable 1. Not used 2 Stop lights switch connector 3 Front cab feedthrough junction connector 4 Accelerator pedal connector 5 Interior light wiring junction connector 6 Interior light wiring junction connector Figure 92
314A011030R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
113
Cab cable Part E -- Description 1 Automatic transmission wiring junction connector 2 Motorized mirror control connector (setup) 3 Engine brake/retarder control connector 4 12V socket connector 5 Central distributor switch connector 6 Body ascent control connector 7 Body descent control connector 8 Tipping brake switch connector 9 12V receptacle connector (cigarette lighter) 10 Not used 11 Parking brake control input connector Figure 93
314A011031R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
114
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable Part E -- Wiring layout 1 Automatic transmission wiring junction connector 2 Motorized mirror control connector (setup) 3 Engine brake/retarder control connector 4 12V socket connector 5 Central distributor switch connector 6 Body ascent control connector 7 Body descent control connector 8 Tipping brake switch connector 9 12V receptacle connector (cigarette lighter) 10 Not used 11 Parking brake control input connector Figure 94
314A011032R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
115
Cab cable 1 Automatic transmission cabling junction connector 2 Motorized mirror control connector (setup) 3 Engine braking/retarder control connector 4 12V socket connector Figure 95
314A011033R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
116
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable 5 Central distributor locking control connector 6 Body ascent control connector 7 Body descent control connector 8 Tipping brake switch connector (fitting) 9 12V socket connector (cigar lighter) Figure 96
314A011034R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
117
Cab cable 9 12V receptacle connector (cigarette lighter) 10 Not used 11 Parking brake control input connector Figure 97
314A011035R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
118
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable Part F -- Description 1 Fuses and contactor unit 2 12V socket connector (fitting) 3 Fleet link connector 4 Supplementary fuses 5 Diagnostic connector Figure 98
314A011036R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
119
Cab cable Part F -- Wiring layout 1 Fuses and contactor unit 2 12V socket connector (fitting) 3 Fleet link connector 4 Supplementary fuses 5 Diagnostic connector Figure 99
314A011037R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
120
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable 1 Fuses and contactors control unit 2 12V socket connector (fitting) 3 Fleet link connector (setup unused) Figure 100
314A011038R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
121
Cab cable 4 Supplementary fuses 5 Diagnostic connector Figure 101
314A011039R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
122
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable Part G -- Description 1 Automatic lubrication control unit feedthrough connector 2 Fuses and contactors unit (rear connections) 3 Electropneumatic seat connector 4 Fuses and contactors unit power connector cable 5 Cab ground connector 6 Direct battery power setup connector Figure 102
314A011040R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
123
Cab cable Part G -- Wiring layout 1 Automatic lubrication control unit feedthrough connector 2 Fuses and contactors unit (rear connections) 3 Electropneumatic seat connector 4 Fuses and contactors unit power connector cable 5 Cab ground connector 6 Direct battery power setup connector Figure 103
314A011041R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
124
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Cab cable 1 Automatic lubrication control unit feedthrough connector 2 Fuses and contactors control unit (rear connections) 3 Electropneumatic seat connector (setup unused) Figure 104
314A011042 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
125
Cab cable 4 Fuses and contactors control unit power supply cable connector 5 Cab ground connector 6 Direct battery power setup connector Figure 105
314A011043R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
126
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF ENGINE --- MAIN FRAME WIRING 1 2 3 4 5
EDC control unit EDC junction connector Ground connector Starter motor connector Engine wiring feedthrough connector (WHITE)
Figure 106
276E011F001 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
127
Topographic diagram of engine -- main frame wiring 1 Alternator positive connector 2 Air conditioning connector 3 Alternator connector 4 Utilities connector 5 SEB connector (setup) 6 Low temperature starting connector Figure 107
276E011F002 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
128
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF MAIN FRAME --- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WIRING 1 2 3 4
Automatic transmission wiring feedthrough connector (YELLOW) Central distributor lock output Retarder temperature sensor output Oil filter obstruction sensor connector
Figure 108
276E11G001 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
129
Topographic diagram of main frame -- transmission wiring 1 Speed sensor 2 Lockup clutch electromagnetic valve connector 3 Speed sensor 4 Speed sensor 5 Speed sensor 6 Hydraulic control unit connector Figure 109
276E11G002 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
130
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
TOPOGRAPHIC DIAGRAM OF CAB --- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WIRING Component identification 1. Automatic transmission wiring feedthrough connector (YELLOW) 2. Cab wiring junction connector 3. Automatic transmission gear selection lever connector 4. Diagnostic connector 5. Automatic transmission control unit Figura 110
276E11E001 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
131
Topographic diagram of cab -- automatic transmission wiring Wiring layout Figura 111
276E11E002 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
132
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Connection locations 1 Automatic transmission wiring feedthrough connector (YELLOW) 2 Cab wiring junction connector 3 Automatic transmission gear selection lever connector 4 Diagnostic connector 5 Automatic transmission control unit connector 6 Automatic transmission control unit Figura 112
276E11E003 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
WORK ON THE BATTERIES Precautions In order to avoid incorrect interventions which may irreversibly damage the electronic control units installed on board the vehicle the following recommendations should be followed: D After a service operation requiring battery disconnection, make sure that the terminals are well connected. D Do not disconnect or connect the connectors to the electronic control unit when the engine is running or control units are powered. D Do not disconnect the batteries when the engine is running. The vehicle electrical system will work even if the battery is flat. D when electrical arc welding on the chassis is required, disconnect the positive and negative battery wires, short ---circuit them and disconnect all ground wires; D remove the control unit to weld near the device; Contact your Dealer for more information on arc welding procedures. D remove the electronic control units for operations at temperatures exceeding 80° C (oven painting, etc.).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
133
Battery replacement Follow the safety instructions when handling the batteries. Proceed as follows: D open the engine hood; D operate the battery---disconnect control; D remove the cover of the accumulators compartment (Fig. 1); D disconnect the batteries as follows: --- disconnect the positive pole --- disconnect the negative pole. D remove the run---down battery; D thoroughly clean the cables and case, removing any oxide or dirt; D assemble the new batteries; D connect the cables as follows: --- connect the negative pole --- connect the positive pole. D apply an abundant amount of pure petroleum jelly on the terminals; D close the cover and the engine hood. Follow the battery manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s instructions. Carefully observe the sequence of operations. Do not invert polarities when connecting the battery.
Figure 113
T276C011050
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
134
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
Recharging with external devices Batteries should normally be removed from the vehicle to be recharged. If this is not possible, the batteries can also be recharged using an external source (battery charger) connected directly to the battery terminals.
.
327B-330B
Emergency electrical power When the batteries are discharged, connect the vehicle to external batteries to restart it. The vehicle is equipped with a 24 volt electrical system with negative and ground. Only use 24 volt batteries to jump start the engine.
The vehicle is equipped with a 24 volt electrical system with negative ( ---) ground.
Figure 115
Proceed as follows: a. lay the cables on the ground ensuring that the terminals do not touch metal parts or each other. Connect the red cable (A) to the POSITIVE (+) terminal of the flat battery; b. connect the black cable (B) to the NEGATIVE (---) terminal of the flat battery; c. set the recharge time. Start recharging. Figure 114
174NM43
a.
b. c. d. 174NM44
.
Respect the instructions provided by the battery charger supplier. Respect the sequence of the operation. Do not reverse the polarity when making the connection.
lay the cables on the ground ensuring that the terminals do not touch metal parts or each other; connect one end of the red cable (A) to the POSITIVE terminal of the flat battery; connect the other end of the red cable (A) to the POSITIVE terminal of the external battery; connect one end of the black cable (B) to the NEGATIVE terminal of the external battery; connect the other end of the black terminal (B) to any point of the chassis of the vehicle to be started which is certainly connected to ground. Make this connection at a point as far as possible from the vehicle batteries. Make certain that two vehicles are not touching each other. Observe the sequence of operations. When connecting, never invert polarity. Using cables with adequate section The vehicle electrical system should work with the battery , even if flat.
In any case verify the causes of the batteries discharge.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
FEEDTHROUGH CONNECTORS ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT
AND
Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
135
General information Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D disconnect the battery---disconnect switch or disconnect the battery terminals in order to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, as indicated in SECTION 1.
The disassembly of an electronic control unit must be carried out by specialized personnel. Do so only if absolutely necessary and after having disconnected the electric power supply of the batteries. Work in a dry and protected area. Do not force the connectors during disassembly and especially during reassembly, in order to avoid damaging the connection pins. Figure 116
276D011020
During reassembly, apply the specific silicone sealant before (see figure) coupling the connector. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
136
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
Feedthrough connector Proceed as follows:
Front-- rear frame services cable interface connector Proceed as follows:
Figure 117
D Open the hood. D Remove the left side panel.
327B-330B
Figure 120
292A011018R 292A011021R
D Lift the safety latch of the connector to disconnect turning it fully toward the cabling entry side (arrow).
Figure 118
Figure 121
292A011019R
D Lift the safety latch of the connector to disconnect turning it fully toward the cabling entry side (arrow). 292A011022R
Figure 119
D Remove the connector (arrow). D For replacement, proceed in reverse order.
292A011020R
D Remove the connector (arrow). D For replacement, proceed in reverse order.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
Engine control unit The engine control unit is equipped with three connectors: A. Electro---injectors connector B. Chassis connector C. Sensors connector
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
137
Disassembly---reassembly of connector B Proceed as follows: D Open the engine hood. Figure 123
Figure 122
276C011051
D Lift the stop lever (1) by rotating it completely towards the wiring input side (arrow). Figure 124
276D011021
276C011052
D Extract the connector perpendicularly to the control unit (arrow) without rotating it until it disengages completely. D For reassembly, follow the disassembly steps in the reverse order.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
138
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
Disassembly---reassembly of connector C and connector A Proceed as follows: D Open the engine hood.
327B-330B
Disassembly---reassembly of the control unit Figure 126
Figure 125
276C011053
D Lift the stop lever (1) by rotating it completely towards the side opposite the wiring (arrow). D Extract the connector perpendicularly to the control unit without rotating it until it disengages completely. D For reassembly, follow the disassembly steps in the reverse order.
276D011025
Proceed as follows: D Disconnect the three connectors (A), (B) and (C). D Unscrew the retaining screws (arrow) and remove the control unit. D For reassembly, follow the disassembly steps in the reverse order.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
Automatic transmission control unit
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
139
Figure 129
Disassembly---reassembly Proceed as follows: Figure 127
276D011028 276D011026
D Remove the closure door in the cab. Figure 128
D Pull the locking slide (1) towards the side opposite the wiring and at the same time pull the connector away from the control unit until it disengages completely. D For reassembly, follow the disassembly steps in the reverse order. If the control unit is being replaced with a new one, the following procedure must be STRICTLY followed in order to restore the vehicleâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s functionality: D Connect the electric power supply of the vehicle. D Wait at least 10 seconds. D Move the switch to position MAR. D Start the engine, then turn it off. This allows the new control unit to be correctly recognized by the Body Computer system.
276D011027
D Unscrew the top retaining screws (1). D Loosen, without removing, the bottom retaining screws (2) and remove the control unit.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
140
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
Cluster ECU (Body Computer)
327B-330B
Figure 132
Removal---refitting Proceed as follows: Figure 130
311A011015R
314A011044R
Release the teeth fastening the ECU to the plastic part of the dashboard. D Refit by reversing the removal sequence.
D remove the instrument panel fastening screws (arrow); D tip the instrument panel to access the rear part; Figure 131
311A011014R
D press the stop clip (arrow) and at the same time move the connector (1) and (2) outward;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
I/O MODE ECU Removal---refitting Proceed as follows: Figure 133
314A011044R
D remove the instrument panel fastening screws (arrow); D tip the instrument panel to access the rear part; Figure 134
314A011045R
D press the retainer tabs (1) and at the same time move the control unit connector away until it is fully released; D loosen the fastening screws and remove the ECU; D tefit by reversing the removal sequence.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
141
142
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
MIDAC connector
327B-330B
For reassembly, follow the detachment steps in the reverse order.
Disassembly---reassembly Proceed as follows: D unscrew the external screw (1) and loosen the internal retaining screw (2) of the MIDAC connector;
Figure 137
Figure 135
276C11011
276C11009
Make sure that the protective sheathing is engaged on the small hooks (arrow) on the connector.
D if necessary, unscrew the wiring clamp screw; D remove the MIDAC connector from its seat; Figure 136
276C11010
D take off the protective sheathing to access the rear part of the electrical connector; D unscrew the central screw (1) and disconnect the connector.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
DIGIT CABLE COLOUR CODES 0300 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0027 0028 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0040 0041 0043 0044 0045 0048 0049 0050 0051 0052 0055 0058 0059 0060 0061 0066 0067 0068 0069 0070 0071
6---diode self---rectifying alternator General earth Radio set insulated earth Hazard lights earth Earth of ceiling lamp switch on device (door post switch) UNIC project: parking lights insulated earth (dangerous cargo vehicles) Earth of trailer brake/exhaust brake interlock relay Earth of rheostat connected optical indicators Earth of stop rerequest optical indicator switch off relay Earth of starter motor relay Earth of windshield wiper unit fixed stop Earth of ceiling lamp switch on device (switch/lamp) Earth of rear door open optical indicator Earth of main current relay Earth of exhaust brake enablement relay Earth of ventilation motors operation relay Earth of auxiliary heater water recirculating pump motor Earth of relay for windshield heater/defroster operation (water auxiliary heater) Earth of front door open optical indicator Hydraulic braking system signal Earth of MS6 control unit terminal 8 Earth of heater mirror relay excitation device (relay control unit) Insulated earth of MS6 control unit terminal 25 Auxiliary heater insulated earth Earth of flasher light optical indicators Earth of optical indicators connected to lamp test pushbutton Earth of emergency optical indicator (central safety unit) Terminal 85 of Retarder/ABS operation relay KICKDOWN signal Earth supply for engine rpm diagnosis sensor no. 1 (n=1/1) and engine rpm electronic sensor Earth supply for engine rpm diagnosis sensor no. 2 (n=1/1) Earth supply for engine rpm diagnosis sensor (n=1/2 injection pump) Hydraulic brake solenoid valve control Hydraulic brake reducing solenoid valve control Thermometric switch controlling relais for gas oil heating Earth of centre door open relay Earth of belt warning lamp excitation relay Earth of key rotation inhibiting solenoid valve Cross differential lock switch off control Cross differential lock switch on control Insulated earth on exhaust brake control circuit Earth of belt control warning lamp Insulated earth for exhaust brake “R2” resistor ASR cut off ABS cut off General earth, analogue signal ABS n° 1 control relay ABS n° 2 control relay Insulated earth of rear axle switch Insulated negative for electronic tachograph sender unit Speed limiter solenoid valve turn off signal (transmission in neutral) Earth cable after Z diode for dashboard warning lights dimmer (Military Vehicles) Earth cable for warning lamp supply (Military Vehicles) (warning lamp dimming via 7 diode) Earth of tachograph clock Earth of engine operation relay (automatic clutch) Earth of starting enablement relay from automatic clutch control unit Earth of reversing lights relay from automatic clutch control unit Earth of automatic clutch warning lamp supply relay Earth of automatic clutch control unit buzzer For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
143
144 0072 0073 0074 0076 0078 0081 0082 0084 0085 0090 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0110 0111 0112 0114 0115 0116 0119 0121 0131 0132 0133 0135 0140 0143 0150 0151 0155 0156 0157 0159 0160 0165 0170 0175 0309 0310 0315 0350 0351 0400 0446 0450 0503 0504
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Earth of automatic clutch position sensor Earth of accelerator pedal sensor (automatic clutch) Earth of transmission lever position sensor (automatic clutch) Electrical battery disconnector relay self---excitation coil return Alternator D+ after power diode Negative to terminal 30 of exhaust brake control relay (service brake) Negative to terminal 30 of exhaust brake control relay (accelerator pedal) Automatic clutch actuator solenoid valve (earth) Earth of automatic clutch control unit from door pushbuttons Earth from sensor to “EGR “ control unit Earth of starting safety unit (cab tilted up or engine compartment door open) (BUS) Earth of starting safety relay Earth of preheating operation enablement relay Earth of remote rev---up enablement relay (cab tilted) Earth of cab lock optical indicator after the diode Earth of electronic horn Automatic chassis lubrication system control after the pushbutton Earth of semiautomatic transmission display Earth of speed sensor (input) (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of speed sensor braided wire (input) (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of speed sensor braided wire (output) (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of speed sensor (output) (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of display braided wire (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of accelerator pedal position sensor (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of semiautomatic transmission diagnosis equipment Earth of transmission solenoid valve unit (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of splitter gears solenoid valve unit (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of transmission brake solenoid valve (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of solenoid valve for keeping clutch released (semiautomatic transmission) Earth of engaged gear speed unit sensor (semiautomatic transmission) Earth engaged gear sensor (semiautomatic transmission) Exhaust brake on signal to semiautomatic transmission gear selector Earth of injection pump actuator power increasing (semiautomatic transmission) Rear power take---off control signal (semiautomatic transmission) Side power take---off control signal (semiautomatic transmission) Brake pedal depressed signal to semiautomatic transmission gear selector Insulated earth for exhaust brake on warning lamp EDC needle lift sensor return Driver’s door open signal to semiatomatic transmission gear selector EDC control unit component return connection Engine stop supply (EDC) Earth of EDC MS6 main relay Fault diagnosis request pushbutton (EDC) Earth from accelerator pedal to MS6 control unit Accelerator pedal idling switch (EDC) Signal from clutch switch (EDC) Earth of supercharging pressure sensor (EDC) Earth of valve gear cam rpm sensor (EDC) Earth of fuel temperature sensor (EDC) Hydraulic retarder temperature sensor earth signal Hydraulic retarder solenoid valve return signal Hydraulic retarder cutoff with ABS on Insulated earth from relay to Martin horn compressor (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Insulated earth from switch to urban/suburban centre electronic alarm signal (Fire Fighting vehicles) Earth of ECAS chassis level control sensors Enablement of hydraulic pump turn on relay with pressure below 30 bar during axle lower stage Supply from hydraulic pump thermal switch (axle raising) Thermal switch earth supply for cab interior temperature thermostat with water temperature over 50 °C (auxiliary heater) Fan relay earth control (1st speed) via adjustable thermal switch for cab interior temperature thermostat (auxiliary heater) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 0550 0555 0562 0564 0566 0568 0610 0611 1100 1101 1103 1104 1105 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1123 1124 1125 1126 1129 1133 1139 1144 1146 1147 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1163 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1183 1184 1185 1186 1188
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Earth of potentiomenter and sensor servomotors (AGND) (air---conditioning system) Fan earth (air---conditioning system) Earth of floor area air delivery servomotor (---FOOT) (air---conditioning system) Earth of windshield defrosting air delivery servomotor (---DEF) (air---conditioning system) Earth of air intake/recirculation servomotor (---RYC) (air---conditioning system) Earth of air mixing servomotor (---MIX) (air---conditioning system) Earth (n° 1) of ceiling lamp operation from switch Earth (n° 2) of ceiling lamp operation from switch Connection between IVECO CONTROL control units (2nd/3rd level) Supply of semiautomatic transmission failure bell From turn signal switch to Rh control unit Supply of Hostess bell Supply of stop request From turn signal switch to Lh control unit Supply of flasher lights reversing switch Supply of turn signal flasher lights (common circuits) Optical indicator, tractor turn signal flasher lights Supply of hazard lights relay (terminal 30) Optical indicator, hazard flasher lights Supply of rotary beacon Horn supply Connection between cab control unit and stop signal switch Optical indicator, trailer turn signal flasher lights Supply of electrical/air horns Tail lh turn signal light Front rh turn signal light Rh turn signal side repeater --- Not controlled Tail rh turn signal light Lh turn signal side repeater --- Not controlled Front lh turn signal light Horn, road, electropneumatic: from switch to horn Supply of stop request/Hostess bell enablement switch Layshaft max rpm buzzer (ES) Excitation of hazard/turn signal lights switching relay Hazard lights relay IVECO CONTROL: Tail parking light/STOP/rear fog lights (tractor lh---side) IVECO CONTROL: Front lh parking light/front rh maker light (tractor) IVECO CONTROL: Tail parking light/ STOP/rear fog lights (tractor rh---side) IVECO CONTROL: Number plate light IVECO CONTROL: Front rh parking light/front lh maker light (tractor) IVECO CONTROL: Tractor alarm IVECO CONTROL: Trailer alarm Safety horn Supply from ABS infomodul AK position (12V trailer socket ABS infomodul) Supply of trailer 12V stop light before the diode (ABS infomodul) Supply of trailer stop light before the diode (12V trailer socket ABS infomodul) From flasher light to control unit (front/rear lh circuits) Stop lights cable after BO light switch (lh terminal 54) (Military vehicles) Tail rh stop signal ABS/INFO/Module stop lights / IVECO CONTROL stop lights Supply of stop lights signal Stop lights relay control Tail lh stop signal From flasher light to control unit (Front/rear rh circuits) Trailer stop lights Trailer rear lh turn signal light Loudspeaker rh channel (---) Loudspeaker rh channel (+) Trailer rear rh turn signal light Loudspeaker lh channel (---) Loudspeaker lh channel (+) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
145
146 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1351 1352 1355 1356 1358 1359 1361 1362 2200 2201 2203 2204 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2226 2227 2228 2229 2231 2235 2237 2239 2246 2268 2269 2280 2281 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2351 3300 3301 3302 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Diagnosis L line (retarder control unit) Diagnosis L line (air suspension control unit) Diagnosis L line (auxiliary heater control unit) Diagnosis L line (air---conditioning system control unit) Diagnosis L line (automatic transmission control unit) Diagnosis L line (MS6 control unit) Diagnosis L line (ABS/speed limiter control unit) Front lh rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Front rh rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Low ---tone horn (Fire---Fighting vehicles) High---tone horn (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Auxiliary turn signal light on superstructure rear lh---side (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Auxiliary turn signal light on superstructure rear rh---side (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Rear lh rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Rear rh rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of lh/rh high beam headlights (from switch to fuses) Supply of lh/rh low beam headlights (from switch to fuses) Supply of flasher light (from switch to fuses) Flasher light control Supply of lh high beam headlight Dual reversing switch Supply of rh high beam headlight — Supply of rh low beam headlight Supply of loading lamp Supply of reversing light Supply of reversing light (control unit --- headlight) Supply of fog lamps Supply of auxiliary driving headlights Supply of rh low beam headlight Supply of exterior lighting switch Supply of high/low beam headlights: from exterior lighting switch to control unit Supply of high/low beam headlights: from control unit to headlight switch Supply of BO lights Supply of reversing light switch Supply of auxiliary driving light switch Rear fog light relay control Supply of rear fog lamp before the fuse Supply of rear fog lamp (after the fuse or general) Supply of rear fog lamp with fog lights on Optical indicator, high beam lights Supply of tractor rear fog light (after IVECO Control) Optical indicator, rear fog lights Optical indicator, rear fog lights (only as a connection after the diode, if fitted) Fog lmp realy control Diagnosis “K” line (retarder control unit) Diagnosis “K” line (air suspension control unit) Diagnosis “K” line (auxiliary heater control unit) Diagnosis “K” line (air---conditioning system control unit) Diagnosis “K” line (automatic transmission control unit) Diagnosis “K” line (”MS6” control unit) Diagnosis “K” line (ABS/speed limiter control unit) Work lamp after the fuse (Fire---Fighting vehicles) General lh supply for IVECO Control control unit after the fuse General rh supply for IVECO Control control unit after the fuse Excitation of rear parking fog light relays / Fog lights switch on device Supply of front lh parking/marker light after IVECO Control control unit Supply of rear lh parking light after IVECO Control control unit Supply of rear lh trailer parking light after IVECO Control control unit Supply of number plate light after IVECO Control control unit Supply of rear lh/rh marker lights after IVECO Control control unit For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 3314 3315 3316 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3337 3338 3339 3347 3348 3349 3350 3354 3377 3380 3390 3391 3397 4101 4400 4401 4402 4403 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4411 4413 4418 4420 4421 4422 4423 4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4447 4448 4449 5102 5103 5104 5106 5107 5109 5110
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
147
Supply of front rh parking/marker light after IVECO Control control unit Supply of rear rh parking light after IVECO Control control unit Supply of rear rh trailer parking light after IVECO Control control unit Front rh parking, rear lh, trailer rh lights. Front lh marker light (Germany and Italy). Rh marker light (France and Sweden). Rh number plate light UNIC project: Rh marker light, Side lh gabarit light (France). Rear lh gabarit light (tractor France). Rear rh marker and parking light. Number plate light (trailer) UNIC project: Lh marker light, Side rh gabarit light (France). Rear lh gabarit light (tractor France). Rear lh marker and parking light. Number plate light (trailer) Parking lights (common circuits) Front rh and rear lh parking lights. Rh number plate light. Rh marker light (*) Front lh and rear rh parking lights. Lh number plate light. Lh marker light. Trailer insulated lights (socket 4 on trailer auxiliary coupling joint) (*) Number plate box light Front lh parking , rh rear, lh trailer light. Front rh marker light (Germany and Italy). Lh marker light (France and Sweden). Lh number plate lights Front lh parking , rh rear, lh trailer light. Front rh marker light (Germany and Italy). Lh marker light (France and Sweden). Lh number plate lights Tail BO parking light BO stop lights Auxiliary tail BO headlight (NATO vehicles) Supply to terminals 58 of fuse box from relay (Fire---fighting vehicles) Excitation of terminal 58 relays (Fire---fighting vehicles) Trunk or luggage compartment light (exceptional use) General supply for parking lights (control unit --- switch) General supply for parkign and marker lights UNIC project: Common supply for parking lights (*) EOL data entering line (automatic transmission control unit) Supply of display lighting (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of interior lighting switch no. 1 (bus) Supply of interior lighting switch no. 2 (bus) Switch no. 1: 1st lamp series (bus) Switch no. 1: 2nd lamp series (bus) Switch no. 2: 1st lamp series (bus) Switch no. 2: 2nd lamp series (bus) Engine compartment lighting Front door steps lighting Rear door steps lighting Optical indicator, general lighting on Centre door steps lighting Trucks: ceiling lamp illumination via separate switch no. Supply of ashtray light Supply of blue lights and driverâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s light switches Supply of blue lights (passengers) Supply of driverâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s light Supply of reading lamp (passengers) Trucks: ceiling lamp illumination via separate switch no. 1 Supply of dashboard symbol lighting Supply of cigar lighter light Instrument panel lighting after the rheostat (or switch) Supply of door steps lighting Under hood compartment lighting Tool compartment lighting Trunk or luggage compartment lighting Speed sensor signal (input) (semiautomatic transmission) Speed sensor signal (output) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of speed sensor signal (output) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of accelerator pedal position sensor (semiautomatic transmission) Signal for accelerator pedal position sensor (semiautomatic transmission) Signal for accelerator pedal idling switch (semiautomatic transmission) Supply for accelerator pedal idling switch (semiautomatic transmission) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
148 5111 5112 5113 5115 5116 5118 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5157 5158 5160 5161 5309 5410 5421 5422 5441 5442 5443 5444 5500 5501 5503 5504 5505 5506 5507 5508 5510 5511 5512 5513 5514 5516 5517 5518 5519 5520 5521 5523 5525 5527 5528 5530 5532 5535 5540 5541 5542 5550 5551 5552 5553 5555 5556 5557
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Supply of “KickDown” switch (semiautomatic transmission) Signal for “KickDown” switch (semiautomatic transmission) Signal from speed sensor amplifier (semiautomatic transmission) Signal for engaged gear speed group (semiautomatic transmission) Signal for engaged gear sensor (semiautomatic transmission) TRISTATE signal (automatic transmission) Alternator “W” contact (EDC) Air temperature sensor (EDC) Supercharging pressure sensor signal (EDC) Supply of supercharging pressure sensor signal (EDC) Water temperature sensor (EDC) EDC speed pulse (tachograph B7) Accelerator pedal sensor signal (EDC) Supply of accelerator pedal sensor (EDC) Enablement to EDC control unit programming Accelerator pedal position control (EDC) Supply of hydraulic retarder temperature sensor Signal for chassis levelling control (ECAS front axle system) Signal for Rh chassis levelling control (ECAS rear axle system) Signal for Lh chassis levelling control (ECAS rear axle system) Signal for Rh pressure sensor (ECAS lift axle system) Signal for Lh pressure sensor (ECAS lift axle system) Signal for Rh pressure sensor (ECAS axle system) Signal for Lh pressure sensor (ECAS axle system) Injection pump potentiometer (EGR) Optical indicator, crankcase high temperature Optical indicator, oil min pressure Optical indicator, oil max temperature Engine oil level sensor Engine oil level sensor Oil pressure sender unit Supply positive for engine oil pressure sender unit Adaptor to repeater tachometer signal Electronic tachometer sender unit --- supply Electronic rev counter sender unit --- supply Electronic tachometer sender unit --- signal or supply of tachometer signal Electronic tachograph sender unit --- supply Electronic tachograph sender unit (reversed signal) Electronic tachograph sender unit --- speed signal Electronic tachograph sender unit --- distance covered signal Electronic rev counter sender unit (signal) and signal from speedometer switch (mechanical rev counter) Optical indicator, min coolant level Warning lamp, windshield tank fluid level Crankcase temperature thermometer sender unit Warning lamp, power steering fluid Min coolant level sender unit Optical indicator, max water temperature Warning lamp, water in prefilter External temperature sensor Warning lamp, EDC system failure Speed pulse from tachograph Speed pulse from signal repeater Speed pulse from signal repeater to diagnostic socket Oil temperature sender unit Engine overspeed indicator (optical and sound signal) Water temperature sender unit Optical indicator, preheating on Optical indicator, min fuel level Warning lamp, engine oil level Fuel level indicator (single---pole device) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 5558 5559 5561 5562 5568 5570 5571 5572 5573 5577 5580 5581 5584 5585 5586 5588 5590 5591 5592 5595 5598 5600 5601 5602 5603 5604 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 6000 6001 6002 6003 6005 6007 6008 6011 6012 6013 6014 6022 6023 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6118
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Signal from control unit to engine oil level indicator Transmission oil temperature sender unit Air pressure sender unit (rear brakes) Air pressure sender unit (front brakes) Air pressure sender unit (emergency brake) Front lh wheel sensor (ABS system) Front rh wheel sensor (ABS system) Rear lh wheel sensor (ABS system) Rear rh wheel sensor (ABS system) Pre/after---heating control sensor EGR absolute barometric pressure sensor Supply from EGR control unit Signal cable for engine rpm diagnosis no. 1 sensor (n=1/1) and engine rpm electronic sensor Signal cable for engine rpm diagnosis no. 2 sensor (n=1/1) Signal cable for engine rpm diagnosis sensor (n=1/2 on injection pump) Voltage adjusted according to engine oil level indicator Supply of fuel pressure sensor (EDC) Signal for fuel pressure sensor (EDC) Fuel temperature signal (EDC) EGR control unit diagnosis Automatic chassis lubrication system sensor Signal, automatic clutch accumulator fluid low pressure sensor Signal, automatic clutch accumulator fluid high pressure sensor Signal from automatic clutch position sensor Signal from automatic clutch transmission position sensor (forward position) Signal from automatic clutch transmission position sensor (backward position) Signal from automatic clutch transmission position sensor (common) Signal from accelerator pedal sensor (automatic clutch) Signal from gearshift lever position sensor (automatic clutch) (position X) Signal from gearshift lever position sensor (automatic clutch) (position Y) Signal from gearshift lever position sensor (automatic clutch) (position NA) Signal from hood position sensor (automatic clutch) (common) Signal from hood position sensor (automatic clutch) (position NC) Cruise Control signal from automatic clutch control unit Signal from EDC accelerator pedal (automatic clutch control unit) Engine rpm signal from EDC (automatic clutch control unit) Signal from engine rpm sensor (automatic clutch control unit) Warning lamp, electronic accelerator Warning lamp, chassis lowering system Lamp test Warning lamp, door II (centre) open before diode ABS on warning lamp Warning lamp, electronic suspension levelling unit Warning lamp, air suspension failure Warning lamp, rear axle air suspension pressure Warning lamp, front brake shoe wear before diode Warning lamp, rear brake shoe wear before diode Intermittent warning lamp, stop request Warning lamp, front brake wear (control unit warning device) Warning lamp, rear brake wear (control unit warning device) Supply of display (semiautomatic transmission) Display “Data” line (semiautomatic transmission) Display “Clock” line (semiautomatic transmission) Warning lamp, air pressure signal (semiautomatic transmission) “TX” diagnosis line (semiautomatic transmission) “RX” diagnosis line (semiautomatic transmission) Data diagnosis line (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of diagnostic equipment (semiautomatic transmission) ISO---CAN H connection (semiautomatic transmission control unit) ISO---CAN L connection (semiautomatic transmission control unit) LIMP---HOME signal (semiautomatic transmission) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
149
150 6131 6132 6301 6350 6351 6352 6353 6354 6355 6356 6357 6358 6359 6361 6362 6401 6402 6403 6440 6460 6490 6499 6500 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6607 6608 6609 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 6616 6617 6618 6619 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 6627 6628 6629 6633 6634 6635 6637 6640 6644 6645 6647 6651 6652 6655
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Return signal, rear power take---off (semiautomatic transmission) Return signal, side power take---off (semiautomatic transmission) Warning lamp, hydraulic retarder on Warning lamp, tool compartment door open (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, front lh rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, front rh rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp prearrangement (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp prearrangement (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, power take---off on (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, extended work projector telescopic support or protruding stabilizer struts (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, water pump on (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, 220V alternator on (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, winch on (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, rear lh rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, rear lh rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Warning lamp, low air pressure (air suspension system) CLOCK line, ECAS suspension system button strip DATA line, ECAS suspension system button strip Warning lamp, axle up Warning lamp, assistance to starting on Warning lamp, 3rd steering axle in operation Warning lamp, 3rd steering axle system locked Warning lamp supply, auxiliary heater failure Optical indicator, front door open Optical indicator, transmission drive on Warning lamp, all---wheel drive on Optical indicator, transfer case differential lock Optical indicator, TELMA retarder Optical indicator supply, auxiliary heater on Optical indicator, tilted body Optical indicator, rotary beacon Warning lamp, door 1 (front) open before diode Optical indicator, clutch wear Connection between relays, stop request optical indicator on/off Optical indicator, brake system failure (general) Optical indicator, air/water/oil repeater Optical indicator, refrigerator on Warning lamp, heated windshield Optical indicator, heating on (KHD motor) Optical indicator, oil filter restriction (engine compartment ventilation hydraulic circuit) Optical indicator, thermal glass, front headlight cluster Control unit, cross differential lock (terminal 4) Control unit, cross differential lock (terminal 2) Optical indicator, forced ventilation Optical indicator, brake linig pre---wear condition Optical indicator, rear door open Optical indicator, exhaust brake on Warning lamp, automatic snow chains on Optical indicator, stop request Optical indicator, interior heating Optical indicator, interior heating motors Optical indicator, engine compartment ventilation failure Optical indicator, alternator charge (before diode) Warning lamp, automatic clutch system failure Optical indicator, auxiliary alternator charge Warning lamp, reading lights Warning lamp supply, centre door open signal Warning lamp, rear axle brake fluid level Optical indicator, heated rearview mirror Optical indicator, auxiliary heater For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 6657 6658 6659 6660 6661 6662 6663 6664 6665 6666 6667 6668 6669 6670 6671 6672 6675 6677 6679 6680 6681 6682 6683 6684 6685 6687 6688 6689 6693 6694 6695 6698 6699 7000 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7009 7010 7011 7017 7050 7073 7076 7150 7152 7155 7350 7351 7352 7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 7361 7362
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
151
Warning lamp, FREON compressor on Optical indicator, stop brake Warning lamp, cross differential lock (front) Optical indicator, cross differential lock Optical indicator, brake fluid min level Optical indicator, hand brake Optical indicator, air cleaner restriction Optical indicator, front axle brake lining wear Warning lamp, front axle air suspension pressure Optical indicator, cab unlatched Optical indicator, general/rear axle brake lining wear Optical indicator, coupling joint hitched up Buzzer, engine sound alarm signal Warning lamp, tractor ABS/CEF failure Warning lamp, trailer ABS failure Warning lamp, ASR/speed limiter failure Warning lamp, trailer ABS disconnected Optical indicator, ICP (hydraulic brake system malfunction) Warning lamp, FREON compressor off Optical indicator, rear brake system min air pressure Warning lamp, stop request before diode Optical indicator, parking brake system min air pressure Optical indicator, air suspension min air pressure Optical indicator, front brake system min air pressure Warning lamp, transfer case, neutral position Warning lamp, chassis raising system Warning lamp supply, splitter gear engaged Optical indicator, trailer brake system min air pressure Optical indicator, converter oil pressure Optical indicator, vehicle front raising system Optical indicator, vehicle rear raising system Warning lamp, automtic chassis lubrication system failure Warning lamp supply, high transmission oil temperature Relay excitation, front/rear interior heating motors (1st/2nd speed) Relay excitation, front/rear interior heating motors (internal speed) Supply of front/rear interior heating motors (1st/2nd speed after relay) Supply of front/rear interior heating motors (internal speed after relay) Supply of auxiliary heating system (partially open) Supply of auxiliary heating system (fully open) Supply of relay for battery charging warning lamp Supply of hatch opening control Supply of hatch closing control Supply of EDC through end---of---line programming control switch Signal switch, transmission in neutral Supply of relay for electrical battery disconnector after diode Self---excitation supply, electrical battery disconnector relay coil Supply of EDC/MS6 system from main relay Supply of preheating switch on relay Supply of MS6 system from main relay Supply of rotary beacon relay/alarm switch (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of amperometric relay from control relay for switching on front rotary beacon (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of front rotary beacon relay/supply of rear rotary beacon switch from alarm switch (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of Fiamm/Martin horn relay (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of Fiamm/Martin horn relay (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of radioreceiver set switch from fuse (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of radioreceiver set from switch (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of outlet from fuse (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of rear rotary beacon amperometric relay from control relay (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of rear rotary beacon amperometric relay from alarm relay (Fire---Fighting vehicles) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
152 7440 7502 7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7515 7516 7519 7520 7550 7551 7552 7553 7554 7555 7556 7560 7561 7562 7563 7564 7565 7566 7567 7568 7571 7572 7573 7574 7590 7591 7600 7601 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7715 7720 7721 7722 7724 7725 7726
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Supply of lift axle system after the fuse Supply of cab and/or engine heating switches (auxiliary heater) Cab heating control after diode Supply of fan relay (1st speed) Supply of fan relay (2nd speed) Auxiliary heater control with microswitch connection on heating cock control lever Cab heating control Auxiliary heating control after engine heating switch Auxiliary heating control after cab heating switch Supply of auxiliary heater control signal Supply of electronic pulse generator for auxiliary heater incandescence plug Supply of auxiliary heater thermal sensor Supply of auxiliary heater flame sensor Supply of auxilairy heater failure warning lamp after diodes Supply of cab interior temperature sensor Supply of air---conditioning switching system Supply of air---conditioning system fan Supply of TOP FLAP door opening relay Supply of TOP FLAP door closing relay Supply of fan governor control unit (TGMV) (air---conditioning system) Supply of fan governor control unit (GMV) (air---conditioning system) Battery isolating switch relay control (air---conditioning system) Supply of servomotor potentiometer (VPOT) (air---conditioning system) Servomotor potentiometer signal for air delivery to floor area (PFOOT) (air---conditioning system) Supply of servomotor for air delivery to floor area (+FOOT) (air---conditioning system) Servomotor potentiometer signal for air delivery to windshield deforsting unit (PDEF) (air---conditioning system) Supply of servomotor for air delivery to windshield defrosting unit (+DEF) (air---conditioning system) Servomotor potentiometer signal for air recirculation/external air intake (PRYC) (air---conditioning system) Supply of servomotor for air recirculation/external air intake (+RYC) (air---conditioning system) ”Air mixing” servomotor potentiometer signal (air---conditioning system) Supply of ”air mixing” (+ MIX) servomotor (air---conditioning system) Water temperature sensor signal (TAS) (air---conditioning system) Water temperature sensor signal (TEVAP) (air---conditioning system) External temperature sensor signal (TEXT) (air---conditioning system) Sun radiation sensor signal (SUNLOAD) (air---conditioning system) Supply of ventilation system (air---conditioning system) Supply fan ON position with air---conditioning system turned on Supply of automatic clutch system Supply of automatic clutch motor Connection for C1 auxiliary heater control unit and air---conditioning system switch (supply of water temperature adjusting device) Supply for rotary beacon amperometric relay Relay excitation for auxiliary heater compensation tank filling motor 12V positive after diod (radio supply) Radio amplifier supply Supply of auxiliary heater ignition plug Supply of interior heating motors (front) Supply before ABS fuse Auxiliary heater supply Supply of interior heating motors (rear) Supply of ABS control unit after relay no. 1 Suuply of windshield defrosting and heating motor Stop request signal resetting control Supply of ABS control unit after relay no. 2 Cigar lighter supply Supply of cab heating air blower motor (auxiliary heater) Supply of ignition key (positive after fuse) Positive cable for connection of timer clock terminal to control relay Connection cable for air---conditioning system switch off relay (auxiliary heater on) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 7728 7729 7730 7731 7733 7734 7735 7736 7741 7744 7745 7746 7750 7751 7752 7753 7755 7756 7759 7766 7768 7770 7771 7772 7773 7774 7775 7776 7777 7778 7779 7780 7781 7783 7784 7785 7786 7788 7789 7790 7791 7792 7793 7794 7798 7799 8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8007 8008 8009 8010 8011 8012 8013
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Flasher light supply Assisted cab tilting relay control Cab tilting hydraulic pump supply (assited cab tilting system) Excitation positive before the ignition key Supply of fuel heater Supply of fuel heating before the fuse Suply of refrigerator motor Supply of air temperature thermostat (auxiliary heater) Supply of steering column antitheft coil Supply of engine compartment ventilation switch on control Supply of engine ventilation motor Supply of retarder relay through switch Supply from V4 branch point to EDC control switch relay Supply of remote engine rev up device after relay NO contact Supply of EDC control after relay NC contact Supply of heated fuel settler prefilter Supply of retarder relay terminal r (after the diode) Charge signal relay excitation (separate regulator alternator) Positive cable after air---conditioning system switch to timer clock Supply of comburent air pump and ignition coil motor (auxiliary heater) Tachograph continuous supply Positive after drop---out resistance or 12V positive before the diode (radio supply) Positive before amperometer Positive after fuse Generator/alternator excitation Horn supply (from switches to fuse) Auxiliary heater supply via switch Battery switch separate supply (dangerous cargo vehicles) Battery direct positive (unprotected) Optical indicator, generator/alternator charge Indicator, auxiliary heater switch off relay via control units Alternator D+ after diode Optical indicator supply, timer, electronic control unit, preheating/water temperature thermostats (auxiliary heater) (BUS temperature 65/70 °C) Supply of auxiliary fuel pump and fuel control solenoid valve (auxiliary heater) Supply of 80/85 °C water temperature thermostat (auxiliary heater) Supply of water circulation pump motor (auxiliary heater) Independent heating water pump enablement device Supply of preheating thermostat (auxiliary heater) Optical indicator, alternator charge (separate regulator alternator) Trailer socket supply after fuse (TMP USERS) GCR control electronic supply combined with emergency cutoff after fuse Fuel delivery booster solenoid before the fuse General supply, interior heating motors (front/rear) before relay Fuel delivery booster solenoid before the fuse Supply of automatic chassis lubrication system after fuse Supply of 1st/2nd speed/full speed relay excitation before control switch Supply of optical indicator test circuit Supply of interior aeration motor (centre) --- Air expulsion No. 1 connection between side rh power window switches No. 1 connection between side lh power window switches Supply of electric heater switch (switch relay) Supply of engine preheating resistor signal Supply of front headlight cluster glass heating Supply of interior heating motors and forced ventilation switches Electrofan supply (4th speed) Supply of air---conditioning system relay Supply of speed limiting device without the fuse Supply of switch for internal aeration motors Supply of stop request optical indicator switch off relay Supply of fuel boost electromagnet For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
153
154 8014 8015 8016 8019 8020 8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 8027 8028 8029 8030 8031 8032 8033 8034 8035 8037 8044 8045 8046 8047 8048 8050 8051 8059 8060 8061 8062 8087 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 8108 8109 8110 8111 8112 8113 8114 8115 8116 8118 8119 8120 8123 8124 8125 8131 8132 8141 8142 8149 8150 8151
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Supply of chassis raising system Supply of chassis lowering system Brake wear cable (rear sensors) Supply of evaporator motors switch on relays Supply of windshield heating Supply of evaporator motors Supply of forced ventilation system relays Flasher light relay control Terminal 15 dilayed switch off relay, battery disconnector cutoff (GCR) Reversing light relay excitation cable Automatic light relay excitation cable Jumper on speed limiter control unit for unlimited engine rpm function Relay excitation cable (starting with transmission in neutral) Gear uncoupling relay excitation (speed limiting device) Supply for driver’s seat heating Supply for co---driver’s seat heating Supply of relay for TELMA retarder relay (stage 3) Reverse gear enablement cable (automatic transmission) Relay excitation for holding GCR alive Supply from ignition switch terminal 50 for inhibiting vehicle starting with engine running Supply of TELMA retarder relay, stage 4 GCR relay excitation via ignition switch Time relay excitation (heated windshield) Control of vehicle running signal relay (hydraulic braking system) Cruise Control switch off relay with retarder on Transmission in neutral signal switch Supply of “MS6” control unit +15 after the relay Supply of speed limiter solenoid valve switch off relay (during gear shifting) Positive cable after Z diode for instrument light/pilot light dimmer (Military vehicles) Positive cable for warning lamp supply (dimmed light switching enabled via Z diode) (Military vehicles) Supply of instrument lights (dimmed light switching enabled via Z diode) (Military vehicles) Supply of miscellaneous components after relay Supply of semiautomatic transmission after fuse Neutral switch supply after fuse (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of semiautomatic transmission after fuse Neutral switch signal (starting inhibting device semiautomatic transmission) Neutral switch supply (starting inhibting device semiautomatic transmission) Neutral switch signal (starting inhibting device after diode unit) Supply of air low pressure switch (semiautomatic transmission) Gear increase signal from semiautomatic transmission gearshift lever Gear decrease signal from semiautomatic transmission gearshift lever Supply of gear selector switch (semiautomatic transmission) Reverse gear engagement signal from gear selector device (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of clutch position switch (semiautomatic transmission) Clutch position switch signal (semiautomatic transmission) Retarder signal (semiautomatic transmission) Connection from speed group switch to engaged gear switch (semiautomatic transmission) Engaged gear signal (semiautomatic transmission) Engaged speed group signal (semiautomatic transmission) LIMP HOME supply (semiautomatic transmission) Signal from exhaust brake switch (semiautomatic transmission) Neutral position signal from direction preselector (semiautomatic transmission) Neutral position signal from direction preselector to semiautomatic transmission gear selector Forward gear signal from automatic transmission direction preselector Supply of rear power take---off relay (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of side power take---off relay (semiautomatic transmission) Signal to ABS system (PBM/PWM) (semiautomatic transmission) Signal to ABS system (MPS/MUX) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of reverse gear relay (semiautomatic transmission) EDC supply EDC control unit interface signal to other electronic systems (PBM) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 8152 8153 8154 8155 8156 8157 8158 8159 8161 8162 8163 8164 8170 8300 8350 8351 8352 8353 8354 8355 8356 8357 8358 8360 8361 8362 8402 8410 8411 8420 8421 8422 8423 8439 8440 8441 8442 8443 8444 8445 8446 8447 8448 8449 8450 8451 8452 8453 8454 8455 8456 8457 8460 8461 8462 8463 8464 8465 8466 8468 8469
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
EDC control unit interface signal to other electronic systems (MPS) Signal from primary stop light switch (EDC) Signal from Cruise Control cutoff switch (EDC) Signal from Cruise Control operation switch (EDC) Signal from Cruise Control speed reducing switch (EDC) Signal from Cruise Control speed increasing switch (EDC) Signal from secondary stop light switch (EDC) Signal from exhaust brake switch (EDC) EDC supply after Cruise Control cutoff relay Engine rpm increase switch with air---conditioning on (EDC) Connection to 3---lever pressure switch (air---conditioning system) EDC supply after engine stopping relay Supply of MS6 control unit +15 from interconnection unit to relay Supply of hydraulic retarder system Supply from control relay to terminal 15 of fuse box (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Sound alarm instrument after fuse (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Control of sound alarm instrument (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Dual tone horn control (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Excitation of Martin horn relay (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of terminal 15 of users after fuses (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Excitation of relay, terminal 15 (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of power take---off switch hour counter (Fire---Fighting vehicles) Supply of MS6 control unit, terminal 20, before clutch switch Solenoid valve (+15) supply (VGT turbine air pipe lock) Frequency converter (+15) supply (VGT turbine) Supply of “MS6” control unit (terminal 31) before brake pedal switch Supply of electronic suspension levelling system (non---travelling condition) Control of front axle electronic suspension levelling system (travelling condition) Excitation of front axle self---levelling electronic suspension system (travelling condition) Control of rear axle electronic suspension levelling system (travelling condition) Excitation of rear axle self---levelling electronic suspension system (travelling condition) Supply of chassis rear lowering system Control of rear axle stroke stop relay Supply of axle lifting relay (speed < 2 km/h) Supply of axle lifting systen after fuse Supply of axle lifting system after pushbutton Supply of axle lowering system after pushbutton Supply of 11 ton axle lifting system pressure switch Supply of axle lifting system after tachometer switch Supply of axle lifting/lowering switch Supply of axle lowering relay Supply of axle lifting relay Supply of axle lifting/lowering relay Axle lifting supply after relay Supply of hydraulic pump relay (lift axle sytem) Hydraulic pump cutoff signal from pressure switch (lift axle sytem) Supply of hydraulic pump system (lift axle sytem) Signal after 11 ton pressure switch (lift axle sytem) Signal after 11 ton pressure switch after diode (lift axle sytem) Supply after time relay with less than 11 tons Supply of axle lowering relay from chassis levelling system during lowering stroke Supply of air solenoid valve reversal relay during axle lowering stroke Supply of starting assistance device after pushbutton Supply of starting assistance function after time relay Starting assistance relay enablement with less than 13 tons Supply of starting assistance relay Starting assistance cutoff device Starting assistance relay cutoff device Supply of starting assistance deviceat a speed of ≥ 25 km/h Starting assistance cutoff at a speed of ≥ 25 km/h Starting assistance relay self---excitation For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
155
156 8490 8491 8492 8493 8494 8495 8496 8497 8501 8591 8600 8601 8602 8603 8604 8700 8710 8800 8801 8802 8803 8804 8805 8806 8807 8808 8809 8810 8811 8812 8813 8814 8815 8816 8817 8818 8819 8820 8821 8822 8823 8824 8825 8826 8827 8828 8829 8830 8831 8832 8833 8834 8835 8836 8837 8838 8839 8841 8842
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Supply of 3rd steering axle system Signal from front axle straight driving position switch Signal from rear axle straight driving position switch 3rd steering axle signal relay automatic supply Supply of 3rd steering axle relay after tachometer switch 3rd steering axle hydraulic control (axle down) Supply of hydraulically---controlled 3rd steering axle relay in straight ---ahead driving position (straight wheels) Hydraulically---controlled 3rd steering axle control (steered front axle condition) Ignition key---controlled supply after relay (independent heating) Supply from mean pressure switch for fan number of revolutions control (air conditioning) Supply of automatic clutch system Relay/buzzer supply from automatic clutch control unit Supply of automatic clutch position sensor Supply of accelerator pedal position sensor (automatic clutch) Supply of gear shift lever position sensor (automatic clutch) Instrument operation enablement (alternator output) +15 supply prearrangement (external bodybuilders (max = 10 A) Exhaust brake solenoid valve enablement switch Supply of de---aeration door opening relay (windshield defrosting external air inlet door open) Excitation of ignition key---assisted services relay Supply cable for miscellaneous services after BO light switch (terminal 49) Supply of draft tube ventilation motors Supply of permanent tube ventilation motors Supply of main lh rearview mirror aiming motor Supply before the fuse (ABS) Supply of main lh rearview mirror aiming motor (vertical direction) Supply of main lh rearview mirror aiming motor (endwise direction) Levelling system supply after fuse Supply of draft tube ventilation motor switch on relay Electronic suspension levelling control (travelling condition) Windshield wiper unit (8---function switch) Brake wear (return from interconnecting box to cab control unit and sensor connection) Supply of GCR relay Supply of trailer ABS from infomodule Supply of infomodule RK line (ABS) Supply of infomodule RK line (ABS) Heated mirror relay excitation Supply of headlamp wiping unit from relay Supply of headlamp wiping unit from electric pump Windshield wiper unit intermittent supply Supply of headlamp wiping unit Supply of permanent tube ventilation motor turn on relay Supply of forced ventilation switch off relay (high speed) Headlamp wiping unit: connection between motors Supply of brake oil pump relay Supply of brake oil pump Control of heated mirror and/or mirror aiming after fuse Supply of heated rearview mirrors Supply (15) of water in prefilter signal Excitation of fuel heating relay Supply of relays for front interior heating motors or relais for supply of water circulation pump motor and water/oil exchanger solenoid valve Relay supply for rear interior heating motors Supply of front interior aeration/air intake motor Supply of parking rearview mirror aiming motor (driver’s opposite side) Fuel heating relay temperature switch Supply of parking rearview mirror aiming motor (vertical direction driver’s opposite side) Supply of parking rearview mirror aiming motor (endwise direction driver’s opposite side) Supply of wide---angle rearview mirror aiming motor (driver’s side) Supply of wide---angle rearview mirror aiming motor (vertical direction driver’s side) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 8843 8844 8845 8847 8848 8849 8850 8851 8852 8853 8855 8856 8857 8858 8859 8860 8861 8862 8863 8864 8865 8866 8867 8869 8870 8871 8872 8873 8874 8875 8876 8877 8878 8879 8880 8881 8882 8883 8884 8885 8886 8887 8888 8889 8890 8891 8892 8893 8894 8895 8898 8899 9000 9002 9003 9004 9005 9006 9007 9008 9010
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
157
Supply of wide---angle rearview mirror aiming motor (endwise direction driver’s side) Supply of front interior aeration/air ejection motor Supply of centre interior aeration/air intake motor Supply of ABS/speed limiting device after fuse Supply of injection pump ignition timer (KB) Supply of contact key---assisted services and cutoff of various components during starting stage Relay excitation for cutoff of various components during starting stage Supply of wide---angle rearview mirror aiming motor (driver’s opposite side) Supply of wide---angle rearview mirror aiming motor (vertical direction driver’s opposite side) Supply of wide---angle rearview mirror aiming motor (endwise direction driver’s opposite side) Supply of rear interior aeration/air intake motor Supply of rear interior aeration/air ejection motor Supply of main rh rearview mirror aiming motor Supply of main rh rearview mirror aiming motor (vertical direction) Supply of main rh rearview mirror aiming motor (endwise direction) Supply of KHD motor motor preheating Supply of side power window control Connection no. 2 between side rh power window switches Supply of side power window motor Supply of trim adjuster motor Return cable from side power window motor Positive from TELMA retarder Connection no. 2 between side lh power window switches Supply of key antirotation electromagnet Start preheating supply after fuse Supply of vehicle operation testing instruments after fuse Flasher light centre supply after fuse Windshield wipers fixed stop Supply of hydraulic prebrake solenoid valves after fuse Start preheating supply before fuse Supply of engine operation testing instruments after fuse Connection for windshield wipers intermittent operation and switch Supply of ERG control unit Supply of servoassisted components after fuse Supply of windshield wiper unit motor --- separate fuse Supply of windshield wiper unit motor --- high speed Supply of windshield wiper unit motor --- low speed Supply of air---conditioning system motor --- high speed Supply of air---conditioning system motor --- low speed Supply of heating relay Supply of windshield washer pump Supply of general services before fuse Starter motor electromagnet or relay Supply of trailer brake control relay Supply of trailer prebrake solenoid valve Supply of windshield defroster and heater switch (fuse + switch or fuse + relay) Under cab engine starting Relay excitation for water recirculating pump during auxiliary heter starting stage Supply of TELMA retarder foot/hand control selecting switch Travelling signal relay control (hydraulic braking system) Supply of automatic chassis lubrication system after fuse Supply of 12V/24V radio set Supply of center door opening solenoid valve Supply of spring cylinder emergency release solenoid valve Gear selector relay excitation Gear selector relay supply Connection line between non---series connected exhaust switch and brake pedal switch Connection line between safety switch and rear door reopening pressure pushbutton Automatic transmission control Automatic transmission supply Door no. 2 (centre) relay control For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
158 9011 9012 9014 9015 9016 9017 9018 9022 9023 9027 9028 9031 9040 9050 9058 9060 9061 9062 9101 9102 9103 9104 9105 9106 9108 9109 9110 9112 9113 9114 9115 9116 9117 9118 9119 9120 9121 9122 9131 9132 9150 9151 9152 9153 9154 9155 9156 9157 9158 9165 9301 9302 9303 9304 9305 9306
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
Connection from terminal 30 of electronic accelerator control unit to terminal 3 of accelerator pedal sender unit and actuator terminal 1 Connection from terminal 21 of electronic accelerator control unit to terminal 6 of accelerator pedal sender unit Connection from terminal 15 of electronic accelerator control unit to terminal 2 of accelerator pedal sender unit Connection from terminal 17 of electronic accelerator control unit to terminal 4 of accelerator pedal sender unit and actuator terminal 4 Connection from terminal 16 of electronic accelerator control unit to actuator terminal 3 Connection from terminal 11 of electronic accelerator control unit to terminal 5 of accelerator pedal sender unit and actuator terminal 5 Connection from terminal 22 of electronic accelerator control unit to actuator terminal 2 Connection from terminal 1 of electronic accelerator control unit to actuator terminal 2 (engine) Connection from terminal 10 of electronic accelerator control unit to actuator terminal 1 (engine) Transfer case valve supply line after door 1 pushbutton Transfer case valve supply line after door 2 pushbutton Service brake solenoid valve supply Front axle levelling solenoid valve 1 control Rear axle levelling solenoid valve 1 control Pre---resistor supply for speed limiter proportional solenoid valves Dump solenoid valve supply for speed limiter gear uncoupling Modulating solenoid valve supply (MV1) (speed limiting device) Modulating solenoid valve supply (MV2) (speed limiting device) Supply of transmission solenoid valve unit (no. 1) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of transmission solenoid valve unit (no. 2) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of transmission solenoid valve unit (no. 3) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of transmission solenoid valve unit (no. 4) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of transmission solenoid valve unit (no. 5) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of transmission solenoid valve unit (no. 6) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of transmission solenoid valve unit (no. 8) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of ”A” splitter gear solenoid valve unit (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of ”B” splitter gear solenoid valve unit (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of transmission brake solenoid valve (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of transmission solenoid valve unit (no. 13) (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of clutch release holding solenoid valve (semiautomatic transmission) Exhaust brake disengagement signal (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of clutch signal solenoid valve (semiautomatic transmission) Engine negative on injection pump actuator (semiautomatic transmission) Engine positive on injection pump actuator (semiautomatic transmission) Limit switch signal on injection pump actuator (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of limit switch signal on injection pump actuator (semiautomatic transmission) Boost supply on injection pump actuator (semiautomatic transmission) Boost signal on injection pump actuator (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of power take---off solenoid valve (semiautomatic transmission) Supply of side power take---off solenoid valve (semiautomatic transmission) EDC pump rod position sensor (terminal 1) EDC injection pump rod stroke signal Engine rpm sender unit (EDC) EDC pump rod position sensor (terminal 5) Common EDC pump rod position sensor Emergency engine stopping solenoid valve (EDC) Injection pump fuel delivery actuator (EDC) Injection pump advance check electromagnet (EDC) Injector internal needle lift sensor (EDC) MS4/MS6 brake signal (engine rev up from ground enablement) Position 1 control (hydraulic retarder) Position 2 control (hydraulic retarder) Position 3 control (hydraulic retarder) Position 4 control (hydraulic retarder) Position 5 control (hydraulic retarder) Position 6 control (hydraulic retarder) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B 9307 9308 9310 9311 9402 9410 9413 9420 9422 9423 9424 9425 9440 9441 9442 9443 9444 9445 9446 9447 9460 9490 9498 9499 9506 9507 9551 9552 9570 9571 9590 9591 9601 9602 9900 9902 9903 9905 9906 9907 9910 9911 9912 9913 9914 9915 9916 9917 9918 9920 9921 9922 9923 9924 9925 9926 9928 9929 9930 9931 9932
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Supply from lever switch pushbutton (hydraulic retarder) Supply of lever switch pushbutton (hydraulic retarder) Supply of hydraulic retarder operation solenoid valve Supply of oil accumulator solenoid valve (hydraulic retarder) Supply of chassis levelling solenoid valves II (travelling condition) Supply of chassis front lowering I/II solenoid valves Supply of front axle ECAS solenoid valve Supply of chassis rear lowering I/II solenoid valves Solenoid valve II control (rear axle chassis levelling control --- travelling condition) Supply of rear axle ECAS solenoid valve unit Supply of rear axle ECAS solenoid valve unit (rh valve) Supply of rear axle ECAS solenoid valve unit (lh valve) Supply of lift axle lowering solenoid valve Supply of cantilever lifting solenoid valve Supply of cantilever lowering solenoid valve Supply of axle lifting solenoid valve (air discharge from springs) Supply from solenoid valve relay for operation of air pressure---controlled valves Supply of solenoid valve for operation of air pressure---controlled valves Supply of ECAS rear axle solenoid valve unit (air discharge from rh rear air spring) Supply of ECAS rear axle solenoid valve unit (air discharge from lh rear air spring) Supply of solenoid valve for starting assistance cutoff over 13 tons Supply of 3rd steering axle solenoid valve unit Hydraulic steering axle operation control (front axle steered and speed > 45 km/h) Supply pf 3rd steering axle lock solenoid valve Solenoid valve supply for stopping engine circuit water circulation with auxiliry heater on Solenoid valve supply for switching from engine circuit water circulation to auxiliary cab heating Time valve (1) supply (air---conditioning system) Time valve (2) supply (air---conditioning system) TOP---FLAP motor supply from relay (air---conditioning system) TOP---FLAP motor supply from microswitch (manually---controlled air---conditioning system) Electrofan supply (air---conditioning system) Fan motor low speed control (air---conditioning system) Supply of automatic clutch motor after relay Automatic clutch actuator solenoid valve (supply) Front doors opening solenoid valve supply Rear doors opening solenoid valve supply Engine stopping control “MS6” control unit supply (+15) on/off relay coil control Engine stopping control from Main Current Switch Starting enablement switch TELMA retarder supply: 2nd position Supply of TELMA control switch TELMA retarder supply: 4th position TELMA retarder supply: 1st position Supply of permanent ventilation duct door solenoid valve Supply of auxiliary retarder cutoff with ABS on TELMA retarder supply: 3rd position EDC supply cutoff Supply of front rh wheel “AV” solenoid valve (ABS system) Supply of front rh wheel “EV” solenoid valve (ABS system) Supply of front lh wheel “EV” solenoid valve (ABS system) Supply of water/oil heat exchanger solenoid valve 3rd axle lifting control Injector supply (EDC) Pressure regulator (EDC) Supply of permanent aeration duct 1/3 door opening solenoid valve Supply of rear rh wheel “AV” solenoid valve (ABS system) Supply of rear lh wheel “AV” solenoid valve (ABS system) Supply of rear rh wheel “EV” solenoid valve (ABS system) Supply of rear lh wheel “EV” solenoid valve (ABS system) Valve gear cam rpm sensor (EDC) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
159
160
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
9933 Supply of electromagnetic clutch control relay 9934 Headlight aiming control device 9935 Headlight aiming control device (position C) 9936 Headlight aiming control device (position B) 9937 Headlight aiming control device (position A) 9938 1st supply, outside air intake door actuator and relevant warning lamp 9940 TELMA retarder relay box control: 2nd position 9942 TELMA retarder relay box control: 4th position 9943 TELMA retarder relay box control: 1st position 9944 Connection, electronic accelerator control unit terminal 18 to retarder control unit terminal 3 9946 TELMA retarder relay box control: 3rd position 9948 2nd supply, outside air intake door actuator and relevant warning lamp 9950 Trailer brake control solenoid valve (Germany) (trailer 7th current outlet pole) 9951 Differential lock solenoid valve supply 9952 Solenoid valve 1 supply, front axle levelling control 9953 Solenoid valve 2 supply, front axle levelling control 9954 Drive control solenoid valve supply 9955 Connection, electronic accelerator control unit terminal 26 to ABS/ASR control unit terminal 14 9956 Connection, electronic accelerator control unit terminal 27 to ABS/ASR control unit terminal 12 9957 Connection, electronic accelerator control unit terminal 28 to ABS/ASR control unit terminal 30 9958 Two---speed AR rear axle relay control 9959 Gas recirculation solenoid valve control (EGR) 9960 Engine rpm reducing solenoid valve (ASR or speed limiting device) 9961 ASR rh side solenoid valve 9962 ASR lh side solenoid valve 9963 Hydraulic converter on 9966 Supply of engine stopping and/or exhaust brake solenoid valve 9967 Supply of exhaust brake cutoff solenoid valve (ABS) 9968 Speed limiting device 9970 Speed limiting device (supply +15) 9971 Supply of solenoid valve for preventing jumps between speeds 9972 Supply of fuel delivery solenoid valve 9973 Supply of splitter control solenoid valve (normal gears) 9974 Supply of solenoid valve for preventing line jumps on the same level (ZF transmission) 9976 Pressure switch to be operated while shifting from normal to splitter gears 9977 Supply of hydraulic prebrake solenoid valve 9978 Supply of solenoid valve for adjusting fuel delivery according to altitude 9980 Vehicle air suspension system control (front) 9981 Vehicle air suspension system control (rear) 9982 Supply of rear axle levelling control solenoid valve no. 1 9983 Supply of front axle levelling control solenoid valve no. 2 9985 Tachograph --- speed limiter realy 9988 Supply of accelerator lock solenoid valve 9990 Solenoid valve control, de---aeration duct door 9991 Vehicle speed induction sensor 9992 Supply of transmission splitter unit control 9993 Electromagnetic clutch supply (air---conditioning system) 9994 Solenoid valve control, draft tube door 9996 Pulse control (2---speed rear axle) 9997 Supply of splitter unit solenoid valve (splitter gears) 9999 â&#x20AC;&#x201D; (*) Dangerous cargo vehicles
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
161
162
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 11
327B-330B
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Some of the components listed in the following key may not be present on the vehicle.
Layout electrical system (1/5) PGR 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114a 114b 114c 115a 115b 115c 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133
DESCRIPTION Interconnection control unit Batteries Starter motor Alternator Starter contactor (frame) Shut ---off electrovalve Air drier element Current master contactor Battery isolation switch Ignition switch Cabin emergency switch 3 stable position lights switch High beam flasher button (combi) High beam switch (combi) Front left position light Left side position light (fitting) Rear left position light Front right position light Right side position light (fitting) Rear right position light Left dipped headlight Right dipped headlight Left high beam Right high beam Fuel level probe --- --- --- --- --- --Reversing lights Reversing siren Fuel heater switch Stop lights Left ceiling light Right ceiling light Rotary light switch (1 stable position) Rotary light Battery isolation switch (external) Cabin/fleet link interface (fitting) Fleet link power supply (fitting)) Direct battery power (fitting)
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Layout electrical system (1/5)
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
163
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PGR 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
DESCRIPTION 12V socket 12V cigar lighter 24/12V voltage reducer 12V radio Left loudspeaker Right loudspeaker CB (fitting) Air---conditioner pressure switch N.O. Air---conditioner junction Hood raise switch (327B-330B --- 335B/340B) (opt.) Fuse bock (opt) Rearview mirror heater switch (opt) Hood raise motor Hood raise switch (335B opt.) Air---conditioner fan control Air---conditioner fan Lubrication device Air---conditioner switch Air recirculation switch Electropneumatic seats junction Working lights switch Working lights Windscreen wiper/washer control (combi) Windscreen wiper motor Windscreen washer motor Side wiper switch (1 stable position) Left side wiper motor Right side wiper motor Side wiper switch (1 temporary position) Side washer motor Horn button (combi) Horn 12V reversing monitor Air recirculation motor Left rearview mirror probe (opt) Right rearview mirror probe (opt) Left wideangle mirror probe (opt) Right wideangle mirror probe (opt) Left rearview mirror adjuster (opt) Right rearview mirror adjuster (opt) Left wideangle mirror adjuster (opt) Right wideangle mirror adjuster (opt) Water open valve control Left mirrors adjuster joystick (opt) Right mirrors adjuster joystick (opt) Water open valve Thermostatic valve
Component key (2/5)
164
SECTION 11
327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Layout electrical system (2/5)
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
165
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PGR 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310a 310b 311a 311b 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350a 350b 351 352 353 354
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
DESCRIPTION Body computer Giga (CLUSTER) Slave (I/O MODE) Slave (MIDAC) Rear converters oil level 327B-330B Front converters oil level 327B-330B Turn indicator lights + dashboard controls (combi) Hazard lights control Tipping control switch Start/stop/warm---up button Flasher unit Left run indicator light Rear left turn indicator light Front right turn indicator light Rear right turn indicator light 120 ohm resistor (CAN BUS) Cabina/frame CAN junction Body ascent electrovalve Body descent electrovalve Body ascent electrovalve 335B/340B Body descent electrovalve 335B/340B Emergency steering electrovalve Tipping brake electrovalve (1) (335B/340B) Tipping brake electrovalve (2) (335B/340B) Rear differential locking switch (335B/340B) Fan drive electrovalve (335B/340B) External temperature sensor Radiator output water temperature sensor (335B/340B) Front brake converters pressure switch 327B-330B Rear axle brakes pressure switch Tipping brake switch Engine braking --- retarder control Rapid discharge electrovalve Water in fuel prefilter sensor Brakes capacity electrovalve 30t Main oil tank temperature sensor Fuel level sensor Main tank air pressure transducer Splitter locking switch Emergency steering pump pressure switch (NO) Stop pressure switch (NC) Body raise switch Rear brake converters pressure switch 27---30t Brake oil temperature sensor 40t Accumulator fault switch Air filter vacuum switch (NO) General oil filter switch (NO) Pump vacuum switch (335B/340B) Brake oil filter switch (NO) (335B/340B) Body raised switch Body limit stop switch Body centerline switch (fitting) Parking brake switch (NO) Right side turn indicator light (fitting) Left side turn indicator light (predisposizione) Front axle brakes switch (330B opt) (Wet brakes version 40t) Brake axle oil temperature Converters fault switch (327B-330B disk brakes) Parking brake control input
Component key (3/5)
166
SECTION 11
327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Layout electrical system (3/5)
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
167
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PGR 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
DESCRIPTION EDC7 engine E.C.U: engine EDC (cabin interface) E.C.U: engine EDC (injectors interface) E.C.U: engine EDC (engine services interface) Junction ST82 (engine) Diagnostic socket (9V Deutsch J1939) Air---conditioner (compressor) Accelerator --- ----- --Engine prewarming relay (engine) CAN BUS/EDC line junction Injector power cable feedthrough Cylinder 1 injector solenoid power supply Cylinder 2 injector solenoid power supply Cylinder 3 injector solenoid power supply Cylinder 4 injector solenoid power supply Cylinder 5 injector solenoid power supply Cylinder 6 injector solenoid power supply Engine decompression electrovalve Variable pitch turbine electrovalve Engine turbo speed sensor Camshaft acceleration sensor Camshaft speed sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Fuel temperature sensor Exhaust gas pressure sensor Engine oil temperature/pressure sensor Engine intake air temperature/pressure sensor Oil filter switch Fuel filter switch Engine oil level sensor Engine air probe
Component key (4/5)
168
SECTION 11
327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Layout electrical system (4/5)
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
169
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PGR 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
DESCRIPTION E.C.U. ZF EST 37 transmission Diagnostic socket Gear selector --- ----- --Cabin/ZF frame junction --- --ASTRA ZF services junction (X8) Engine speed sensor (transmission) Turbo speed sensor (transmission) Chain speed sensor (transmission) Retarder temperature sensor (transmission) Gearbox oil filter switch 16 VPE connector (transmission) Speed sensor (transmission) Splitter electrovalve Differential electrovalve (only 335B/340B) Retarder electrovalve Lock up electrovalve Splitter locking switch (2 stable positions) Differential locking switch, 2 stable positions (only 335B/340B)
Component key (5/5)
170
SECTION 11
327B-330B
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
Layout electrical system (5/5)
327B-330B
SECTION 11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
171
172
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Page left intentionally blank
SECTION 11
327B-330B
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 12 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
A. APU + LIMITING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B. CONNECTION PLATE ON OIL RESERVOIR . 24
Services system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 LOCATION OF COMPRESSED AIR GENERATION COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Disk brake version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Wet oil brakes version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Pneumatic system pressures table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 PNEUMO-- HYDRAULIC BRAKING SYSTEM . . . . 7
C. FRONT BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . 25 D. FRONT BRAKE HYDRO-- PNEUMATIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 E. CAB CONNECTION PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 F. PARKING BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR AND SHUT-- OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 G. BRAKE PEDAL DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 H PARKING BRAKE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Pneumo---hydraulic braking system diagram --disk brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
I. JOINT BETWEEN FRONT CHASSIS AND REAR CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Pneumo---hydraulic braking system diagram --wet oil brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
L. PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Component location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
M. REAR BRAKE HYDRO-- PNEUMATIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
DIAGRAMS -- DISC BRAKE VERSION . . . . . . . . 11
N. REAR BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Pneumatic braking system layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SERVICES PNEUMATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
A. APU + LIMITING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pneumatic services diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
B. CONNECTION PLATE ON OIL RESERVOIR . 13
Component location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
C. FRONT BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
D. FRONT BRAKE HYDRO-- PNEUMATIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pneumatic service system layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
E. CAB CONNECTION PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
APU (Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
F. PARKING BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR AND SHUT-- OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
B. CONNECTION PLATE ON OIL RESERVOIR . 41
G. BRAKE PEDAL DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 H PARKING BRAKE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 I. JOINT BETWEEN FRONT CHASSIS AND REAR CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 L. PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M. REAR BRAKE HYDRO-- PNEUMATIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
A. APU + LIMITING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
C. RETARDER SOLENOID VALVE + PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 D. CENTRAL SPLITTER LOCK SOLENOID VALVE + SHUT-- OFF SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 E. CAB CONNECTION PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 F. PARKING BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . 45 G. RETARDER ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
N. REAR BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
H. CENTRAL SPLITTER LOCK ACTUATOR . . . . 47
DIAGRAMS -- OIL BATH BRAKE VERSION . . . . 22
DESCRIPTION OF MAIN COMPONENTS . . . . . . 48
Pneumatic braking system layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Page
Page
COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
PNEUMO-- HYDRAULIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . 53
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
PARKING BRAKE DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
A.P.U. AIR PROCESSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Pneumatic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
DIAGNOSTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
DUPLEX DISRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Pneumatic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Parking brake distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
RELAY VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
3
DESCRIPTION The vehicle is equipped with a pneumatic system divided into two subsystems: D braking system D services system Braking system The service braking system is pneumo---hydraulic: the command is actuated by a pneumatic distributor, while the braking elements are actuated by hydraulic pressure. There are two pneumo---hydraulic converters: one for the front brakes and one for the rear brakes. The pneumatic braking system controls the following vehicle commands: D service and emergency brake command D parking brake command The vehicle is equipped with the following braking systems. Service brake Disk brakes on front wheels and oil---cooled multidisk on the rear wheels, with pneumo---hydraulic command. It is made up of two independent sections, the first for actuating the front axle brakes, the second for activating the rear axle brakes. In case of failure of one section, this type of sectioning assures the efficiency of the other. Emergency brake Incorporated in the service brakes. The dual circuit system allows braking on one axle even with a failure on the other, using the service brake pedal. Parking brake This is mechanically operated by a spring loaded cylinder with pneumatic release, and acts on the parking brake disk. It is commanded by manual pneumatic distributor and locks the transmission.
.
The vehicle is also equipped with auxiliary braking systems according to the version. Engine brake Engine braking is achieved through a device managed by the engine control unit and commanded by a lever. Hydraulic retarder brake This consists of a retarder built---in to the automatic transmission and commanded by a lever.
Services system The services system controls the following vehicle commands: D comando retarder; D comando turbina a geometria variabile; D comando bloccaggio ripartitore centrale; D comando sedile di guida.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
LOCATION OF COMPRESSED AIR GENERATION COMPONENTS Disk brake version 1. 2. 3.
Compressor Drier with heater and filter cartridge 30 liter tank: A. Parking B. Front C. Rear Figure 1
292A012001R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
5
Wet oil brakes version 1. Compressor 2. Drier with heater and filter cartridge 3. 30 liter tank: A. Parking B. Front C. Rear Figure 2
292A012002R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST POINTS Pneumatic system pressures table
Pressure
Values bar
psi
A
Parking brake tank pressure
8.5 / 10.5
123.29 / 152.29
B
Front tank pressure
8.5 / 10.5
123.29 / 152.29
C
Rear tank pressure
8.5 / 10.5
123.29 / 152.29
D
Front service brake pressure
8.5 / 10.5
123.29 / 152.29
E
Rear service brake pressure
8.5 / 10.5
123.29 / 152.29
F
Retarder command pressure
8.5 / 10.5
123.29 / 152.29
Figure 3
292A012003R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
7
PNEUMO---HYDRAULIC BRAKING SYSTEM
.
The numbers highlighted with xxx correspond to the coding of the component indiated in the electrical circuit diagrams (see SECTION 11 --- ELECTRICAL PLANT --- CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS)
.
For more information on the electrical components of the pneumatic system, see SECTION 11 --ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
.
For more information on the hydraulic part of the braking system, see SECTION 10 --- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Compressor Drier with heater and filter cartridge Services pneumatic system 30 liter tank A. Parking B. Front (x2 on wet brakes version) C. Rear (x2 on wet brakes version) Not used Duplex distributor Front brakes relay valve Rear brakes relay valve Stop pressure switch 337 Parking brake actuator Parking brake command Parking brake pressure switch 349 Front pneumo---hydraulic converter / level sensor 304 Rear pneumo---hydraulic converter / level sensor 303 Front brake pressure transducer 334 Rear brake pressure transducer 340 Front brake actuators Rear brake actuator
List of pressure sockets A Parking brake tank pressure B Front tank pressure C Rear tank pressure D Front service brake pressure E Rear service brake pressure
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Pneumo -- hydraulic braking system diagram -- disk brakes Figure 4
292A01204R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
9
Pneumo -- hydraulic braking system diagram -- wet oil brakes Figure 5
292A01205R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Component location 1. Duplex distributor 2. Parking brake pressure switch 349 3. Parking brake actuator 4. Front pneumo---hydraulic converter / level sensor 304 5. Front brake air pressure transducer 334 6. Front brake relay valve 7. Rear pneumo---hydraulic converter / level sensor 303 8. Rear brake air pressure transducer 340 9. Rear brake relay valve Figure 6
292A012006R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
11
DIAGRAMS --- DISC BRAKE VERSION Pneumatic braking system layout Figure 7
314A012001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Pneumatic braking system layout Figure 8
314A012002R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
Pneumatic braking system layout (key) A. APU B. Connection plate on oil reservoir C. Front brake air reservoir D. Front brake hydro---pneumatic converter E. Cab connection plate F. Parking brake air reservoir and shut ---off G. Brake pedal distributor H Parking brake control I. Joint between front chassis and rear chassis L. Parking brake actuator M. Rear brake hydro---pneumatic converter N. Rear brake air reservoir
A. APU + LIMITING VALVE
.
See Pneumatic service system diagrams
B. CONNECTION PLATE ON OIL RESERVOIR
.
See Pneumatic service system diagrams
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
13
14
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
C. FRONT BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR Figure 9
1. Front brake air reservoir
314A012003R
A. Pipe from APU to front reservoir B Air delivery pipe to front brake hydro---pneumatic converter For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
15
D. FRONT BRAKE HYDRO---PNEUMATIC CONVERTER Figure 10
1. Front brake hydro---pneumatic converter 2. Front brake relay valve
314A012004R
A Air delivery pipe to front brake hydro---pneumatic converter B. Connection pipe between front brake relay valve and front brake hydro---pneumatic converter C. Connection pipe between brake pedal distributor and front brake relay valve
E. CAB CONNECTION PLATE
. F.
.
See Pneumatic service system diagrams
PARKING BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR AND SHUT ---OFF See Pneumatic service system diagrams
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
G. BRAKE PEDAL DISTRIBUTOR Figure 11
1. Brake pedal distributor A B C. D E
314A012005R
Air delivery pipe to rear brake relay valve Air inlet pipe from APU (rear brake circuit) Air delivery pipe to stop pressure switch Air delivery pipe to front brake relay valve Air inlet pipe from APU (front brake circuit) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
H
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
17
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Figure 12
1. Parking brake control
314A012006R
A Air inlet pipe from reservoir B Parking brake actuation air delivery pipe C. Parking brake control air discharge pipe
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
I.
JOINT BETWEEN FRONT CHASSIS AND REAR CHASSIS
327B-330B
Figure 13
1. Joint plate on front chassis 2. Joint plate on rear chassis
314A012007R
A Parking brake actuator air delivery pipe B Air delivery pipe to rear brake relay valve C Air delivery pipe to rear brake air reservoirs For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
19
L. PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR Figure 14
1. Parking brake pressure switch 2. Parking brake actuator
314A012008R
A Parking brake actuator air delivery pipe
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
M. REAR BRAKE HYDRO---PNEUMATIC CONVERTER Figure 15
1. Rear brake hydro---pneumatic converter 2. Rear brake relay valve A. B. C. D.
314A012009R
Connection pipe to rear reservoir Connection pipe between brake pedal distributor and rear brake relay valve Connection pipe between rear brake relay valve and rear brake hydro---pneumatic converter Air inlet pipe from APU
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
21
N. REAR BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR Figure 16
1. Rear brake air reservoir
314A012010R
A. Connection pipe to three---way fitting on rear brake hydro---pneumatic converter relay valve.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
DIAGRAMS --- OIL BATH BRAKE VERSION Pneumatic braking system layout Figure 17
314A012011R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
23
Pneumatic braking system layout Figure 18
314A012012R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Pneumatic braking system layout (key) A. APU B. Connection plate on oil reservoir C. Front brake air reservoir D. Front brake hydro---pneumatic converter E. Cab connection plate F. Parking brake air reservoir and shut ---off G. Brake pedal distributor H Parking brake control I. Joint between front chassis and rear chassis L. Parking brake actuator M. Rear brake hydro---pneumatic converter N. Rear brake air reservoirs
A. APU + LIMITING VALVE
.
See Pneumatic service system diagrams
B. CONNECTION PLATE ON OIL RESERVOIR
.
See Pneumatic service system diagrams
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
25
C. FRONT BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR Figure 19
1. Front brake air reservoir B1 2. Front brake air reservoir B2 (oil bath brake versions only)
314A012013R
A. Pipe from APU to reservoir B2 B. Connection pipe between reservoir B2 and reservoir B1 C. Air delivery pipe to front brake hydro---pneumatic converter For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
D. FRONT BRAKE HYDRO---PNEUMATIC CONVERTER Figure 20
1. Front brake hydro---pneumatic converter 2. Front brake relay valve
314A012014R
A Air delivery pipe to front brake hydro---pneumatic converter from front reservoirs. B. Connection pipe between front brake relay valve and front brake hydro---pneumatic converter C. Connection pipe between brake pedal distributor and front brake relay valve
E. CAB CONNECTION PLATE
. F.
.
See Pneumatic service system diagrams
PARKING BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR AND SHUT ---OFF See Pneumatic service system diagrams
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
27
G. BRAKE PEDAL DISTRIBUTOR Figure 21
1. Brake pedal distributor A B C. D E
314A012005R
Air delivery pipe to rear brake relay valve Air inlet pipe from APU (rear brake circuit) Air delivery pipe to stop pressure switch Air delivery pipe to front brake relay valve Air inlet pipe from APU (front brake circuit) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
28
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
H
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Figure 22
1. Parking brake control
314A012006R
A Air inlet pipe from reservoir B Parking brake actuation air delivery pipe C. Parking brake control air discharge pipe
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
I.
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
29
JOINT BETWEEN FRONT CHASSIS AND REAR CHASSIS Figure 23
1. Joint plate on front chassis 2. Joint plate on rear chassis
314A012007R
A. Parking brake actuator air delivery pipe B. Air delivery pipe to rear brake relay valve C. Air delivery pipe to rear brake air reservoirs For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
30
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
L. PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR Figure 24
1. Parking brake pressure switch 2. Parking brake actuator
314A012008R
A. Parking brake actuator air delivery pipe
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
31
M. REAR BRAKE HYDRO---PNEUMATIC CONVERTER Figure 25
1. Rear brake hydro---pneumatic converter 2. Rear brake relay valve A. B. C. D.
314A012015R
Connection pipe to rear reservoirs Connection pipe between brake pedal distributor and rear brake relay valve Connection pipe between rear brake relay valve and rear brake hydro---pneumatic converter Air inlet pipe from APU
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
32
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
N. REAR BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR Figure 26
1. Rear brake air reservoir C1 2. Rear brake air reservoir C2 (oil bath brake versions only)
314A012016R
A. Connection pipe to three---way fitting on rear brake hydro---pneumatic converter relay valve. B. Connection pipe between reservoir C1 and reservoir C2
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
33
SERVICES PNEUMATIC SYSTEM Diagram (on previous page)
.
The numbers highlighted with xxx correspond to the coding of the component indiated in the electrical circuit diagrams (see SECTION 11 --- ELECTRICAL PLANT --- CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS)
.
For more information on the electrical components of the pneumatic system, see SECTION 11 --ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Compressor Drier with heater and filter cartridge Braking pneumatic system Retarder electrovalve 517 Retarder air pressure limiter valve Reatrder command actuator Shut ---off electrovalve 105 VGT turbine command actuator Central distributor locking electrovalve 515 Central distributor locking command actuator Electro---pneumatic seat
List of pressure sockets F Retarder command pressure
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
34
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Pneumatic services diagram Figure 27
292A01207R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
35
Component location 1. Retarder electrovalve 517 2. Retarder air pressure limiter valve Figure 28
292A01208R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
36
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Central distributor locking command actuator Central distributor locking electrovalve 515 Shut ---off electrovalve 105 Retarder command actuator VGT turbine command actuator
327B-330B
Figure 29
292A012909R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
37
DIAGRAMS Pneumatic service system layout Figure 30
314A012017R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
38
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Pneumatic service system layout (key) A. APU B. Connection plate on oil reservoir C. Retarder solenoid valve + pressure limiting valve D. Central splitter lock solenoid valve + shut ---off solenoid valve E. Cab connection plate F. Parking brake air reservoir G. Retarder actuator H. Central splitter lock actuator
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
39
A. APU + LIMITING VALVE Figure 31
314A012018R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
40
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
APU (Key) 1. Drier cartridge 2. Limiting valve 3. Muffled exhaust A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.
Pipe from energy---saving outletto APU Air inlet pipe from compressor unit Connection pipe to muffled exhaust Air inlet pipe from APU to limiting valve Air delivery pipe from limiting valve to air reservoir Air inlet pipe from APU to air reservoirs Air inlet pipe from APU to air reservoirs Air delivery pipe from APU to central splitter lock solenoid valve + adjustment pneumatic driving seat
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
41
B. CONNECTION PLATE ON OIL RESERVOIR Figure 32
1. Connection plate on oil reservoir A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.
314A012019R
Pipe from energy---saving outlet on engine to APU Air inlet pipe from compressor unit Air delivery pipe from central splitter lock solenoid valve Driving seat pneumatic adjustment air delivery pipe Air delivery pipe to service system air reservoir Air delivery pipe to front brake system reservoir Air delivery pipe to brake pedal distributor (front brake power) Air delivery pipe to brake pedal distributor (rear brake power) Air delivery pipe to front brake system reservoir For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
42
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
C. RETARDER SOLENOID VALVE + PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE Figure 33
1. Retarder pressure limiting valve 2. Retarder solenoid valve
314A012020R
A. Pipe from retarder solenoid valve to pressure limiting valve B Air delivery pipe to retarder actuator C. Air inlet pipe from APU For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
43
D. CENTRAL SPLITTER LOCK SOLENOID VALVE + SHUT ---OFF SOLENOID VALVE Figure 34
1. Shut ---off solenoid valve 2. Central differential lock solenoid valve A B. C. D. E.
314A012021R
Air inlet pipe from reservoirs Air delivery pipe to shut ---off solenoid valve Air delivery pipe to central splitter lock actuator Air inlet pipe from APU Air delivery pipe to retarder solenoid valve
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
44
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
E. CAB CONNECTION PLATE Figure 35
1. Cab connection plate A. B. C. D. E. F. G H. I.
314A012022R
Parking brake control air discharge pipe Electro---pneumatic seat air discharge pipe Parking brake actuation air delivery pipe Air delivery pipe to parking brake Air delivery pipe to rear brake relay valve from brake pedal distributor Air delivery pipe to front brake relay valve from brake pedal distributor Air delivery pipe to electro---pneumatic seat Air delivery pipe to brake pedal distributor (rear braking) Air delivery pipe to brake pedal distributor (front braking) For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
F.
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
45
PARKING BRAKE AIR RESERVOIR Figure 36
1. Parking brake air reservoir
314A012023R
A. Air delivery pipe to shut ---off solenoid valve B. Air delivery pipe to parking brake valve C. Air inlet pipe from APU
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
46
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
G. RETARDER ACTUATOR Figure 37
1. Retarder actuator 2. Retarder control solenoid valve
314A012024R
A. Air delivery pipe to retarder actuator
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
47
H. CENTRAL SPLITTER LOCK ACTUATOR Figure 38
1. Central differential lock solenoid valve 2. Central differential lock actuator
314A012025R
A. Air delivery pipe to central splitter lock actuator
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
48
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
DESCRIPTION OF MAIN COMPONENTS COMPRESSOR Description Figure 39
000858T
The compressor generates the compressed air needed to recharge the pnueumatic system. It is a twin cylinder type with Energy Saving device to reduce energy consumption when all systems are adequately served.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
49
A.P.U. AIR PROCESSING UNIT This consists of a filter regenerating dryer and timer and four---way protection valve with built ---in pressure reducer. The dryer purifies the compressed air and adjusts pressure in the system to the calibrated value. The four---way protection valve distributes air to the various circuits ensuring operating pressure also in the case of a failure. Figure 40
000858T
000832T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
50
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Figure 41
000848T
Pneumatic connections 1 --23 --3 ---
Compressor power To compressor for energy saving control Exhaust into atmosphere
21 22 23 24
To drive axle air tank 10.3 + 0.2 bars To axle air tank 10.3 + 0.2 bars To parking air, trailer recharge and parking brake manual distributor tank 8.5 bars To utility reservoir 8.5 bars
---------
Electrical connections 6.1 --- Thermostat resistor negative 6.2 --- Thermostat resistor positive
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
51
DUPLEX DISRIBUTOR This is coaxial type and serves to distribute braking command pressure to the front and rear axles. Figure 42
292A012010R
Pneumatic connections 11 12 21 22 3
-----------
Feed from front tanks Feed from rear tanks Front relay valve output Rear relay valve output Discharge to atmosphere
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
52
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
RELAY VALVE Figure 43
001010T
The component serves to reduce the cut ---in time of the system to which it is connected. The component is used to activate service braking. The component receives power from the system tanks at connector ”1” and the cut ---in pressure from the duplex distributor at connector ”4”. This determines an activation pressure at outputs ”2” proportional to the command received. Figure 44
000784T For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
53
PNEUMO---HYDRAULIC CONVERTER Figure 45
292A012011R
This component, coupled with a hydraulic pump, transforms the pneumatic pressure it receives into the hydraulic pressure necessary for braking the vehicle. The initial pneumatic force is hydraulically transmitted by the pump to the braking elements.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
54
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
PARKING BRAKE DISTRIBUTOR Figure 46
1 2 3
= Feed (from tank) = Delivery (to parking brake cyclinder) = Discharge
The device inserted in the parking brake circuit actuates the vehicle parking brake, discharging the compressed air in the spring cylinders.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
TIGHTENING TORQUES Compressor head screws
30Nm
Figure 47
06022
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
55
56
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
DIAGNOSTIC Compressor
1
OIL LEAKAGE FROM FLANGE EXTERNAL SIDE
Oil leak from flange external side
YES
Tighten screws to specified torque
NO
Flange body seal faces not perfectly flat
YES
Check seal faces. Replace defective parts or grind faces flat
NO
Broken gasket
YES
Replace gasket
NO
Shaft seal broken
YES
Replace gasket
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
2
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
57
OIL SEEPAGE FROM HEAD
Oil scraper worn (indicated by shiny passage surface
YES
Replace complete piston
NO
Incorrect oil scraper installation
YES
Fit with ”TOP” indication facing compressor head
NO
Oil scraper and piston rings all aligned vertically
YES
Fit each ring 120° offset to the others
NO
Cylinder scored or ovalised
YES
Reface cylinder a and fit oversize piston
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
58
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
3
SECTION 12
327B-330B
NO COMPRESSION
Worn compression or intake valve
YES
Replace worn parts
NO
Piston rings all aligned vertically
YES
Fit each ring 120° offset to the others
NO
Hole in piston or failure of parts connected to piston
YES
Replace complete piston
NO
Damaged gasket
YES
Replace gasket
NO
Energy saving device open during charge phase
YES
Replace cylinder head
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
4
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
59
POOR PERFORMANCE
Worn piston rings
YES
Replace piston (complete with rings)
NO
Air loss between cylinder and head
YES
Replace gasket and tighten screws to specified torque
NO
Worn energy saving compression valve
device,
intake
or
YES
Replace worn parts
NO
Excessive play between piston and cylinder
YES
Reface cylinder and fit oversize piston
NO
Particles of burnt oil between intake and compression valves
YES
Clean valves
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
60
5
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
MECHANICAL NOISE
Excessive play between big end and gudgeon pin, between gudgeon pin and piston, between crankshaft and big end, between crankshaft and bearings and between shaft and flange
YES
Check tolerance of all suspect couplings
NO
Excessive play between piston and cylinder
YES
Reface cylinder and fit oversize piston
NO
Excessive build---up of burnt oil between piston and cylinder head
6
YES
Remove encrusted materials and replace valves
WATER SEEPAGE
Head gasket or coupling faces scored or irregular
YES
Replace damaged parts
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
Drier
1
EXCESSIVE AMOUNT OF CONDENSATION IN CIRCUIT
Filter cartridge clogged
2
YES
Replace cartridge
SET PRESSURE NOT REACHED IN TANK
Air leak from safety valve
YES
Overhaul drier replacing worn parts
NO
Worn head gasket
3
YES
Overhaul drier replacing worn parts
AIR LEAK FROM EXHAUST
Filter cartridge clogged
YES
Replace cartridge
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
61
62
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Parking brake distributor
1
AIR ESCAPE FROM EXHAUST WITH CONTROL LEVER IN RELEASE POSITION
Defective exhaust valve, valve seat or O---ring
2
YES
Check and overhaul the component, replacing defective parts. Carefully clean all components
YES
Check and overhaul the component, replacing defective parts. Carefully clean all components
YES
Check and overhaul the component, and lubricate all sliding parts
YES
Check and overhaul the component, and lubricate all sliding parts
AIR ESCAPE FROM EXHAUST WITH CONTROL LEVER IN BRAKING POSITION
Worn component control valve, O---ring and valve
NO
Obstruction inside distributor
3
CONTROL LEVER STIFF
Obstruction inside distributor
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 12
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
63
Checks Since the vehicle braking system is approved to European standards, it is essential that periodic checks are made on all components. These checks must be carried out with the vehicle at a standstill, using the compressed air in the tanks, recharged, with the engine running, by the compressor. Always secure the vehicle before any check. Periodically check pressure gauge readings with a certified manometer. COMPONENT
CHECK
Compressor
Check tightness of head, connectors and fasteners Check absence of coolant leaks Check absence of oil leaks
Drier
Open bleed valve: condensation---free air should bleed off Otherwise check efficiency of electric elements (power supply)
Tanks (all)
Check pipe tightness Discharge any accumulated condensation In this case check efficiency of air drier (APU)
Parking brake distributor
Pull lever until click: the control pressure gauge must indicate pressure discharge (0 bar) within 1 second
Air intake valve
Check union seal
Membrane brake cylinder
Check pipe and fastener tightness The drain hole must face downwards and be free of any obstruction
Pipes and connectors
Check that metallic pipes are in perfect condition, without dents or kinks. Nylon pipes must not have any cuts, incisions or chaffing Also check that pipes run a safe distance from any sharp edges on bodywork or chassis, which could cause damage Check that all anchor brackets are well fastened. If loose these may vibrate, and are therefore more liable to damage. Check that nylon pipes have not come into contact with any grease, mineral oil or rubber solvents Press hard on brake pedal and check that no pipe tends to swell Check the absence of leaks from the various connectors. If leaks are present, fully tighten the connector taking care not to twist the pipe while tightening Replace the part in all the above cases even if there is a minimal doubt as to its efficiency. Apart from the apparent physical condition, pipes should be replaced after significant mileage or after a long period of vehicle use, to avoid sudden failure due to ageing or fatigue
Pneumatic system seal This check is carried out on all threaded connectors, by charging the system with with engine off under ope- air pressure no less than 5 bar, smearing dense soapy water on the connectors rating pressure with a soft brush and watching for leaks
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
64
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
SECTION 12
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 13 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
GREASING SYSTEM
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 13
GREASING SYSTEM
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 13
GREASING SYSTEM
1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
MANUAL GREASING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Restore operation of the automatic greasing control unit after disassembly/draining . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lubrication system checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Lay-out system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Checks of the lubrication control unit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
AUTOMATIC GREASE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Repair of the lubrication system piping . . . . . . . . . . 15
CALIBRATE GREASING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
DISTRIBUTION DIVIDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CALIB. TIME GREASING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lay-out system --- front chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lay-out system --- rear chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Quantity of lubricant supplied (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Restoring grease dispenser functionality . . . . . . . . 13
Indicators (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 13
MANUAL GREASING
GREASING SYSTEM
3
Lubrication system checks The opening pressure of a lubricator is 70---80 bar (1015---1160 psi).
Figure 1
Proceed as follows: D Check the hardness of the piping between the delivery fitting and grease nipples. Normally the pipes should be squeezeable when grease is not injected. D If necessary, connect a manual pump with a pressure gauge to the delivery fitting. D Operate the manual pump and verify that the working pressure falls within the prescribed values. D Otherwise: A. check that the piping is not crushed and/or deformed; B. check that the corresponding grease nipple is not blocked.
292ANU040L
The vehicle is equipped with a greasing system, the fittings of which are grouped in the rear plate (Fig. 1, see arrow). Use only a hand pump for greasing; never use a high--pressure lubricator. Proceed as follows: D clean the fitting concerned; D inject the prescribed grease into the fitting. To guarantee an efficient lubrication, the lubricant must be injected until it leaks out from the lubricated points.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
327B-330B
Location of the greasing points
B1
Top articulation of right tipping cylinder
B12
B2 B3 B4
Top articulation of left tipping cylinder Rear suspension right rocker arm Rear suspension left rocker arm Bottom articulation of right tipping cylinder Bottom articulation of left tipping cylinder Front axle articulation Front/rear fixed drive bearing Rear articulation of right steering cylinder Rear articulation of left steering cylinder Front articulation of right steering cylinder
B13 B14 B15
Greasing point Front articulation of left steering cylinder Bottom fifth wheel hinge Top fifth wheel hinge Fifth wheel
B16
Fifth wheel
B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
Fifth wheel Fifth wheel Fifth wheel Fifth wheel Right body tipping pivot pin Left body tipping pivot pin
Circuit
B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
Greasing point
Circuit
Figure 2
276C013005
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 13
GREASING SYSTEM
Lay-out system
276C013007
Figure 3
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
5
6
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
327B-330B
AUTOMATIC GREASE SYSTEM Figure 4
269NM3F7
The vehicle is equipped with a centralised grease dispensing system. The system does not required specific maintenance. Filling the reservoir Proceed as follows to fill the grease reservoir: D clean the filler grease fitting (ref. 1); D connect the dispenser to the fitting and fill the tank to the MAX line; D disconnect the dispenser and clean the fitting. Full functionality will be restore after approximately 10 minutes of operation following removal or emptying procedures. The leakage of lubricant from the maximum---pressure valve (ref. 2) indicates the presence of a blockage or obstruction in the system.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 13
GREASING SYSTEM
Automatic greasing system calibration adjustment Greasing and pause times are adjusted via the display.
.
For more information, refer to SECTION USE of the Use and Maintenance Handbook.
Proceed as follows: Figure 5
292ANU061L
D select MAIN MENU, then select VEHICLE MANAGEMENT; Figure 6
292ANU062L
D select the CALIBRATE GREASING function.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
7
8
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
327B-330B
CALIBRATE GREASING
Sequence of available options.
Meaning of options. CALIBRATE GREASING Figure 7
292ANU069L
SET TIME GREASING This adjusts the centralised greasing system stand---by and function time.
.
For more information on the greasing system, see the following page.
FORCE GREASING ON Starts the greasing pump unconditionally. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 13
GREASING SYSTEM
CALIB. TIME GREASING
Sequence of available operations.
Meaning of options. CALIB. TIME GREASING Figure 8
292ANU070L
The ON time (duration of greasing phase) is fixed (10 minutes). The OFF time (duration of pause between two successive greasing phases) is adjustable from a minimum value to a maximum value, in 5 minute steps. Therefore: D to increase the quantity of grease delivered, reduce the OFF time; D to reduce the quantity of grease delivered, increase the OFF time. After the first hours of operation, we recommend checking the condition of the greasing points and if necessary adjusting the time according to environmental and vehicle use conditions.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
9
10
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
327B-330B
Location of the greasing points
B1
Top articulation of right tipping cylinder
B12
B2 B3 B4
Top articulation of left tipping cylinder Rear suspension right rocker arm Rear suspension left rocker arm Bottom articulation of right tipping cylinder Bottom articulation of left tipping cylinder Front axle articulation Front/rear fixed drive bearing Rear articulation of right steering cylinder Rear articulation of left steering cylinder Front articulation of right steering cylinder
B13 B14 B15
Greasing point Front articulation of left steering cylinder Bottom fifth wheel hinge Top fifth wheel hinge Fifth wheel
B16
Fifth wheel
B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
Fifth wheel Fifth wheel Fifth wheel Fifth wheel Right body tipping pivot pin Left body tipping pivot pin
Circuit
B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
Greasing point
Circuito
Figure 9
276C013010
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 13
GREASING SYSTEM
11
Lay-out system -- front chassis
276C013011
Figure 10
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
327B-330B
Lay-out system -- rear chassis
276C013012
Figure 11
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 13
Restoring grease dispenser functionality Grease application will not work if the on of the grease lines or greased point (joint) is obstructed. Restore operation of the dispenser is very important in this case. Proceed as follows: D locate the obstructed grease point from which no grease is being let out; D check that the grease point or tube are not damaged; replace if required; D disconnect pipe from grease gun in question; D inject pressurised lubricant in the fitting until it pours out of the grease point; D reconnect pipe; D start the pump from the display as previously instructed, checking that lubricant is delivered to all greasing points.
GREASING SYSTEM
13
Restore operation of the automatic greasing control unit after disassembly/draining In case of: D disassembly of the control unit; D complete draining of the tank. It is necessary restore operation. Proceed as follows: D start the pump from the display as previously instructed, checking that lubricant is delivered to all greasing points; D if these conditions occur, stop the pump; D otherwise, check the components (pump, piping, distributor, grease nipples) as described in the relative chapter.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
Checks of the lubrication control unit components The working pressure of the system is approximately 150---200 bar (2175---2900 psi), depending on the temperature and type of lubricant used; The maximum---pressure valve is set at 350 bar (5075 psi). The opening pressure of a lubricator is 70---80 bar (1015---1160 psi).
327B-330B
D check the hardness of the pipes between the pump and distributor and the distributor and lubricating points; D normally the pipes should be squeezable when the system is off; The distributor blocks completely even with a single element or single pipe blocked. Figure 14
Figure 12
276C013003
276C013001
Proceed as follows: D connect a manual pump equipped with a pressure gauge to the maximum---pressure valve; D operate the manual pump and verify that the working pressure falls within the prescribed values;
D If necessary, connect a manual pump with a pressure gauge to the lubricator; D operate the manual pump and verify that the working pressure falls within the prescribed values; D otherwise: A. Check that the distributor is operating correctly; B. Check that the distributor is fastened correctly (the loosening of one of the retaining screws can block an internal element); C. Replace the distributor.
Figure 13
276C013002
D check that the maximum---pressure valve does not have any leaks; D the presence of a leak (arrow) indicates a possible obstruction or block downstream from the pump;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 13
Repair of the lubrication system piping If any piping of the lubrication system breaks, repair the piping using the appropriate kit. Description Repair kit for the lubrication system piping
GREASING SYSTEM
15
Figure 17
P/N 0000098340353
The kit is composed of the following: Description Plastic fitting Bushing Metal fitting
Q.tĂ 2 2 1 276E013003
Proceed as follows: A. B.
Figure 15
Fitting Bushing
D screw the fitting (A) completely on the bushing (B); Figure 18
276E013001
A. B.
Piping Bushing
D using a suitable tool, cut the damaged piping (A) at right angles; D insert the bushing (B) completely on the piping; Figure 16
276E013004
A. B.
Fitting Bushing
D carry out the same operation on the other end of the piping; Figure 19
276E013002
A. B.
Piping Bushing
D carry out the same operation on the other end of the piping;
276E013005
A.
Fitting
D insert the end of the plastic fitting into the metal fitting until hearing a click. For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
DISTRIBUTION DIVIDER
327B-330B
Figure 21
Description The lubricant distribution divider is a multiple plunger device that automatically distributes lubricant to the various lubrication points. The quantity of lubricant supplied to each plunger is approximately 0.2 cc/stroke. Suitably blocking one or more outlets it is possible to obtain a multiple supply from a single one. The various plungers move in a predefined sequence that is continually repeated. Each plunger has to have completed its stroke before the next one can move. Operation The illustrations refer to an eight plunger divider. The descriptions that follow also apply to dividers with more plungers. Stage 1 Lubricant enters the divider from above and fills the lower left chamber of plunger A. Under the pressure, plunger A shifts to the left forcing the lubricant in the upper left chamber to flow from outlet 2 through the lower right chamber of plunger D.
Stage 3 When plunger B has reached the left end of its stroke, the channel connecting the arriving lubricant with the upper right chamber of plunger C opens. Under pressure plunger C shifts to the left forcing the lubricant present in the upper left chamber to flow through outlet 5 through the lower left chamber of plunger B. Figure 22
Figure 20
Stage 2 When plunger A has reached the left end of its stroke, the channel connecting the arriving lubricant with the upper right chamber of plunger B opens. Under pressure plunger B shifts to the left forcing the lubricant in the upper left chamber to flow through outlet 7 through the lower left chamber of plunger A.
Stage 4 When plunger C has reached the left end of its stroke, the channel connecting the arriving lubricant with the upper right chamber of plunger D opens. Under the pressure, plunger D shifts to the left forcing the lubricant present in the upper left chamber to flow through outlet 3 through the lower left chamber of plunger C. Figure 23
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 13
Stage 5 When plunger D has reached the left end of its stroke the channel connecting the arriving lubricant with the upper left chamber of plunger A opens. Under the pressure, plunger A shifts to the right forcing the lubricant present in the upper right chamber to flow through outlet 1 through the lower left chamber of plunger D. The sequence is completed as plungers B then C and D shift to the right in succession. At this point a new cycle then starts from stage 1.
GREASING SYSTEM
17
Indicators (B) Each block of the divider has an indicator arrow fastened to the plunger rod. Movement of the rod indicates that the plunger is functioning correctly: If the system seizes, the indicator rod no longer moves. Figure 26
Figure 24
Quantity of lubricant supplied (A) The standard quantity of lubricant supplied --- corresponding to one stroke of a plunger --- is approximately 0.2 cc. If one or more lubrication points require more oil, the standard quantity can be doubled or tripled by suitably blocking one or more outlets. For example, with outlet 10 closed. The related quantity of lubricant flows out through outlet 8. The total quantity supplied by outlet 8 is therefore the sum of that from outlet 10 and 8, meaning double the standard quantity. If three times the quantity is required, as if for outlet 1, it suffices to close the two preceding outlets, these being outlets 3 and 5. Figure 25
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
GREASING SYSTEM
SECTION 13
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 14 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
AIR-- CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GENERAL SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Functional principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Usable fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Functional outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Draining R134a fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Component layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Works on system piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Climate control system air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SYSTEM DRAINING AND RECHARGING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fan not working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fan works but with poor air---flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Normal function but poor air cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Compressor not functioning or functioning poorly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
R134a REFRIGERANT RECHARGING AND RECOVERY STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 CHARGE CYLINDER AND OIL TANK . . . . . . . . . . 16 SAFETY STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 OPERATIONS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Diagnosis by pressure measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 10
RECOVERING REFRIGERANT FROM SYSTEM ON VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Low pressure circuit --- insufficient pressure . . . . . 10
CREATING VACUUM IN SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Low pressure circuit --- excessive pressure . . . . . . 10 High pressure circuit --- insufficient pressure . . . . . 10
RESTORING SYSTEM OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
High pressure circuit --- excessive pressure . . . . . . 10
CHARGING THE SYSTEM WITH REFRIGERANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CHECKING SYSTEM PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
System charge check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Cleaning/replacing passenger air cleaner . . . . . . . 11 Cleaning condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
OPERATIONS PRIOR TO REMOVING STATION FROM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 LEAK DETECTOR FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS WITH HFC R134a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
3
AIR---CONDITIONING SYSTEM Functional principle Fluid in a gaseous state and at pressure 1.3 bar (19 psi) is drawn in by the compressor (driven by the motor by a pulley with an electromagnetic coupling) and brought to a pressure of 15---20 bar (220---290 psi) according to temperature. The increase in pressure also determines a significant increase in temperature (80---100° C) (170---212 ° F); to cool, the fluid passes through the condenser, positioned in front of the engine cooling radiator in the air flow from the fan. On cooling the gaseous fluid reaches condensation point (around 60° C (140° F)) and passes to liquid state. It then flows through the dehydrator filter where it is cleaned and dehumidified by chemicals with moisture absorbing properties. The fluid then in a liquid state reaches the expansion valve at the intake of the evaporator, which serves to ensure expansion of the pressurised fluid. Expanding, the fluid absorbs heat from the surrounding ambient causing rapid cooling. The evaporator, cooled by the fluid expanding inside it, draws heat from the hot humid air from the outside and/or vehicle interior (recirculation), which passes between the coils of the evaporator itself and is then delivered to the cab.
The air delivered to the cab is thus: D cold, because it yields part of its heat to the evaporator, assisting evaporation of the fluid; D dehumidified, since lowering the temperature causes condensation of the water vapour present in the warm air. The cooled and dehumidified air is conveyed by an electric fan and distributed through the outlets located in the cab. In normal conditions the degree of cooling caused by expansion of the fluid causes the condensation to freeze on the fins of the evaporator: the system is therefore fitted with a suitable control device that limits the heat extraction of the evaporator to prevent this effect (anti---frost function). The condensation water is discharged outside the vehicle. Lastly, from the evaporator the fluid, in gaseous state and cooled (on average 6---12° C (42---53 ° F)) and at low pressure, is drawn in by the compressor to start the cycle again.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
Functional outline 1. Compressor 2. Condenser 3. Engine radiator fan 4. Electric fan 5. Expansion valve 6. Evaporator 7. Dehydrator filter Figure 1
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
5
Component layout 1. compressor 2. condenser 3. pressure switch 4. heater radiator 5. evaporator 6. cabin air filter 7. electric fans 8. controls 9. thermostat Figure 2
276C014001
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
Climate control system Controls Knob 1: regulates heater temperature: D Turn clockwise to increase heating D Turn counter---clockwise to decrease heating Button 2: controls entry of outside air into the cab: D Pressed: flap closed, internal air recirculation D Not pressed: flap open, air enters from outside Knob 3: air conditioner adjustment thermostat: D Turn clockwise to increase cooling D Turn counter---clockwise to decrease cooling Knob 4: regulates fan speed: D Turn clockwise to increase speed D Turn counter---clockwise to decrease speed (position: off). Warning light illuminated when air conditioning is turned on. Figure 3
327B-330B
Operation 6. Only heater D start engine D regulate fan speed with knob 4 D regulate temperature as desired with knob 1 7. Only air conditioner D start engine D regulate fan speed with knob 4
.
The air conditioner will not come on if knob 4 is in the off position.
D regulate the temperature as desired with knob 3 8. Heater and air conditioner D start engine D regulate fan speed with knob 4
.
The air conditioner will not come on if knob 4 is in the off position.
D regulate the temperature as desired with knob 1 (warm air) and knob 3 (cold air). Recommendations D Do not leave knob 3 (air conditioner) at maximum and knob 4 (fan) at minimum speed for long periods to prevent ice forming on the evaporator. D If the cab overheats (vehicle parked under sun) turn knobs 3 and 4 to maximum and air the cab with the windows open for a few minutes. D The condensation produced by dehumidification of the interior air is discharged through a pipe under the vehicle. D To ensure full system efficiency, switch on the air--conditioner for a few minutes at least once a week, regardless of temperature.
269NU2D2
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
7
Climate control system air vents A. Central vents directing air to windscreen B. Adjustable front vent directing air to driver C. Lower vents directing air to feet D. Side vents directing air to driver Figure 4 Cool air Warm air
269NU2E1
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
TECHNICAL DATA Fluid quantity (kg) Max air flow ---rate
1.200 (2.2 lb) (m3/h)
1020 (1334 yard3/hr)
Fans (n° )
1
Two level pressure switch (*)
Open (bar)
2 (29 psi)
Close (bar)
25 (365 psi)
(*) in the following conditions: D motor at circa 1500 RPM D ambient temperature 30 --- 35 ° C (86 --- 95 ° F)
TOOLS Use generic tools Use generic tools
HFC R134a refrigerant fluid recharging and recovery station Leak detector for air---conditioning systems with HFC R134a
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTICS Fan not working Cause
Checks
Remedies
Fuse blown
Check fuse
Replace if damaged
Damaged electrical connection or wiring
Check electrical connection and wiring
Replace or repair damaged parts
Faulty electric motor
Check motor winding continuity with tester
Replace if damaged
Faulty electric motor resistor
Check resistor continuity with tester
Replace if damaged
Faulty electric motor command relay
Switch on fan and check relay function
Replace if damaged
Fan works but with poor air-- flow Cause
Checks
Remedies
Evaporator output air duct obstructed
Check duct
Remove obstruction
Air leak
Faulty air duct seal
Repair damaged parts
Faulty thermostat
Check thermostat continuity with tester (when closed)
Replace if damaged
Normal function but poor air cooling Cause Circuit charge insufficient
Circuit charge excessive
Checks
Remedies
Measured pressure in the two circuits similar Vapour bubbles present in the dehumidifier indicator
Eliminate any leaks
Excessive pressure in high pressure circuit. No vapour bubbles visible in dehumidifier indicator even after cooling condenser with water
Recharge circuit with specified quantity of fluid
Recharge system
Compressor not functioning or functioning poorly Cause
Checks
Remedies
Poly---V belt slack
Belts visibly yields under finger pressure
Adjust tension
Damage to compressor with increased internal resistance
Belt slips even with correct tension Replace if damaged
Coupling does not drive compressor
Check power supply voltage
Recharge or replace batteries
Check electrical connection and wiring
Replace or repair damaged parts
Check winding continuity with tester
Replace if damaged
Check play between contact surfaces
Adjust or replace
Check for oil on surfaces
Replace soiled parts Find source of oil
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
9
10
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
Diagnosis by pressure measurement The system can be diagnosed in part by measuring the pressure in the two circuits. The typical pressure values are as follows: D low pressure circuit (blue connector): 2.0 --- 2.2 bar (29 --- 32 psi) D high pressure circuit (red connector): 19 ---25 bar (280 --- 360 psi) in the following conditions: D Engine at circa 1500 rpm D ambient temperature 30 --- 35 ° C (86 --- 95 ° F) Low pressure circuit -- insufficient pressure Checks
Cause
Remedies
Faulty thermostat
Thermostat cuts off Replace if damaged electromagnetic coupling when air temperature is not low enough
Faulty compressor valve and seal
Pressure in the two circuits becomes similar when compressor stops
Replace or repair damaged parts
Compressor internal filter obstructed
Compressor connection is cold while low pressure pipe is not
Clean filter
Low pressure circuit -- excessive pressure Checks
Cause
Remedies
Circuit charge insufficient
Measured pressure in the two circuits similar Vapour bubbles present in the dehumidifier indicator
Eliminate any leaks. Recharge system.
Dehumidifier obstructed
Valve input connector iced up
Replace
Expansion valve obstructed
Pressure in the two circuits becomes similar when compressor stops
Replace
Piping obstructed
Pressure tends toward zero or negative values
Replace
Expansion valve obstructed
Pressure tends toward zero or negative values
Replace
Faulty thermostat
Evaporator iced up
Replace
High pressure circuit -- insufficient pressure Cause Circuit charge insufficient
Checks Measured pressure in the two circuits similar Vapour bubbles present in the dehumidifier indicator
Remedies Eliminate any leaks Recharge system
High pressure circuit -- excessive pressure Cause Condenser cooling insufficient Faulty compressor valve and seal Air present in circuit
Checks
Remedies
Condenser soiled or blocked
Clean or replace if damaged
Faulty fan function
Replace or repair damaged parts
Pressure in the two circuits becomes similar when compressor stops
Replace or repair damaged parts Eliminate infiltration Recharge system
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
MAINTENANCE Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
11
Cleaning/replacing passenger air cleaner Proceed as follows: Figure 5
System charge check Check the system charge once per year or in case of reduced cooling efficiency as instructed in the relative Chapter. The checking and recharging operations must be carried out by suitably equipped expert personnel. R134a (tetrafluoroethane) coolant is used. This coolant is classified as an environmentally---friendly product by law. Do not use this fluid in systems working with the previous fluid R12 (Freon 12). For reasons of incompatibility between compressor oil and fluid, do not use R12 in systems designed to use R134a. Do not discharge R134a into the atmosphere. Although the product has a zero ozone depletion potential it has a global warming potential. Recovery and recycling procedures are governed by law. Always use type---approved coolant recovery and recharging devices. Do not mix different coolants in the same device.
276NM060T
D remove the left side panel (see arrow); Figure 6
276NM061T
D extract the filter; D replace the filter or clean it using compressed air (max 5 bar), then replace it; D replace the panel. Fit the cleaner with the arrows facing the cab. Draw a reference line if missing to refit it in the original position.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
GENERAL SERVICING
Cleaning condenser Proceed as follows:
.
Figure 7
The following instructions must be respected whenever working on circuit components or handling refrigerant fluid. Checking and charging must be carried out by specialist personnel using specific equipment. Direct contact with refrigerant fluid is dangerous. Always wear protective gloves and goggles.
Usable fluids Figure 8 2690313
D open the hood; D inspect and clean the condenser with compressed air (max 5 bar), then close the hood.
2692006
R134a (tetrafluoroethane) coolant is used, which is rated eco---friendly by current standards: it must absolutely not be used in systems operating with the previous R 12 (Freon 12) fluid. Due to incompatibility between compressor oil and fluid, R 12 fluid may not be used in systems designed to use R134a fluid. Before recharging, check the type of fluid used. Never mix different refrigerants in the same apparatus.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
Draining R134a fluid
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
13
Compressor lubricant Use specific PAG lubricant for R134a fluid. The PAG lubricant used is extremely sensitive to moisture.
Figure 9
Figure 11
2692007
Do not discharge R134a fluid into the atmosphere. Although its potential for damaging the ozone layer is zero, it may nevertheless contribute to global warming. Always use approved fluid recovery and recharging equipment. Works on system piping
2692008
Always plug all circuit openings and containers after maintenance operations to prevent water infiltration. Lubricant must be changed or topped---up in the following cases: D in case of leakage; D in case of sudden circuit discharge (burst pipe); D if compressor is replaced.
Figure 10
Lubricant and fluid do not mix together above a certain temperature: a visual inspection in these conditions through the indicator may mistakenly lead to changing the fluid, which appears ”soiled”’.
2692009
Fit the O---ring (1) in the seat on the nut (2) at a connector (3). Lubricate the connector and o---ring with specific PAG lubricant. Hand---tighten the nut then tighten to the specified torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
SYSTEM DRAINING AND RECHARGING PROCEDURES
327B-330B
Figure 12
The system draining and recharging procedure requires a generic tool illustrated in Figure 12 and involves the following operations: D recovering refrigerant from the vehicle system; D creating vacuum in system; D restoring system oil; D charging system with refrigerant; D checking system pressure; D operations prior to removing station from system; D checking for leaks in system with 99305147 leak detector.
R134a REFRIGERANT RECHARGING AND RECOVERY STATION
The station is designed for use on all vehicle air---conditioning systems that use R134A. By connecting the station to a cooling system the gas contained in it can be recovered, cleaned and prepared for recharging into the system, or transferred to an external container. It is also possible to assess the quantity of oil removed from the system, restore it and â&#x20AC;?emptyâ&#x20AC;? the system. To function the station has to absorb circa 3 kg of refrigerant. For rapid use it is recommended to have at least 2 kg of refrigerant in the cylinders and to keep the station as level as possible.
.
This procedure does not describe refrigerant charging/discharging from external/internal containers or maintenance phases. Refer to the equipment use and maintenance handbook.
50631
The station consists of: 1. Control panel 2. Container for restoring any oil recovered during draining 3. Flexible pipes 4. Container for accumulating oil recovered from system 5. Charging cylinder with rotary graduated scale
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
15
CONTROL PANEL Figure 13
50633
CONTROL PANEL KEY M1 Low pressure gauge M2 High pressure gauge M3 Charge cylinder pressure gauge LOW Low pressure valve HIGH High pressure valve REF Refrigerant charge/discharge valve V1 Valve on low pressure pipe V2 Valve on high pressure pipe V3 Oil injection valve for A/C system V5 Oil drain valve V9 Service valve for A/C system coolant cleaning 10 Humidity indicator VS Safety and discharge valve L3 Alarm warning light
L4 L5 A LA1 LA2 B LB1 LB2 C LC1 LC2 D LD1 LD2
Maximum level indicator Minimum level indicator Tank resistance/unit process switch Unit process indicator Tank resistance indicator Refrigerant process/vacuum process switch Refrigerant process indicator Vacuum process indicator Recycle/recharge recovery cycle switch Recovery recycle cycle indicator Charge indicator Vacuum/vacuum test switch Vacuum indicator Vacuum test indicator
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
CHARGE CYLINDER AND OIL TANK Figure 14
50632
CHARGE CYLINDER AND OIL TANK KEY 1. Pressure values in bar (vertical lines, upper rotatable cylinder). 2. Charge weight value in grams (oblique lines, upper rotatable cylinder), subdivision 50 g between lines. 3. Tank level display (internal cylinder).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SAFETY STANDARDS This station is destined for use exclusively by professionally trained operators who must be familiar with cooling systems, refrigerant gases and the potential hazards of pressurised equipment, therefore: D always use protective gloves and goggles when working with refrigerant gases. direct contact between eyes and refrigerant fluid may cause blindness; D avoid contact with skin (low boiling temperature ---30 ° C ( ---22 ° F) may cause frostbite); D avoid inhaling refrigerant gas vapours; D before making connections between station and system or external container check that all valves are closed; D before disconnecting the station check that the cycle is finished and that all valves are closed, to prevent refrigerant gas escaping into the atmosphere; D do not expose or work with the unit in acidic or damp environment or in the vicinity of open containers with inflammable substances; D the unit must be used in areas with good ventilation and air change; D do not change the settings of safety valves and control systems; D do not use gas bottles or other storage containers that are not approved and that are not fitted with safety valves; D never fill any container to over 80% of its maximum capacity; D do not leave the unit powered up if it is not to be used immediately. Switch off the mains power supply if the unit is not being used. The station is fitted with special connectors to prevent contamination with systems that use R12. Do not attempt to adapt this unit for use with R12.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
17
18
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
OPERATIONS FLOW DIAGRAM Figure 15
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
RECOVERING REFRIGERANT FROM SYSTEM ON VEHICLE Figure 16
2690702
Before disconnecting any pipes from the conditioner check whether it is possible to make repairs without discharging the gas. If this is not possible, the following operations are mandatory: D connect the pipe marked HIGH under the pressure gauge to the socket (1) on the pipe coming from the evaporators. D Connect the pipe marked LOW under the pressure gauge to the output socket from the filter on pipe (2).
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
19
D Connect the station to the mains power supply (220V 50 Hz). D Turn switch A (Process Unit) to position 1. D The corresponding indicator LA1 comes on. D Turn switch B (Refrigerant Process) to position 1. D The corresponding indicator LB1 comes on. D Turn switch C (Recovery Recycle) to position 1. D The recovery and recycling operation will start automatically, indicator LC1 on indicates operation in progress. D On completing the operation the unit will stop automatically and indicator LC1 will go out. Wait for a few minutes for any remaining low pressure refrigerant in the system to increase pressure, absorb heat and be recovered. The station will automatically repeat the recovery cycle, if the above conditions are present. D Return switches A, B and C to position 0. D Close valves V1, V2, LOW and HIGH.
.
If the refrigerant reaches maximum level (maximum level indicator L4 on), the recovery cycle must be stopped immediately by turning switch C to position 0 and decanting the refrigerant from the charge cylinder to a suitable external tank.
Figure 17
74126
D Open valves V1 and V2. D Open the LOW and HIGH valves.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
Figure 18
50636
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
CREATING VACUUM IN SYSTEM
.
Do not carry out the vacuum cycle if there is even minimal pressure present in the station or the system.
This operation should be carried out once all repairs have been completed and the system components have been correctly reassembled. This operation precedes recharging, and is carried out as follows: D Connect the pipes to the correct sockets on the system and open valves V1---V2/LOW and HIGH. D Turn switch A (Process Unit) to position 1. D The corresponding indicator LA1 comes on. D Turn switch B (Vacuum Process) to position 2. D The corresponding indicator LB2 comes on. D Turn switch D (Vacuum) to position 1. The system evacuation process will start automatically and the corresponding indicator LD1 will come on, indicating operation in progress.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
21
D After a few minutes operation (maximum 10) if the system is free of any leaks, indicator LD2 VACUUM TEST also comes on. From this moment on evacuation must continue for at least two hours to achieve adequate vacuum.
.
If vacuum test indicator LD2 does not light, a leak is present. Interrupt evacuation, rectify the leak and repeat the evacuation procedure.
D At the end of the programmed evacuation time turn switch D (vacuum test) to position 2 and leave the system for 3---5 minutes in these conditions. D VACUUM TEST indicator LD2 on indicates that the system seal is good. VACUUM TEST indicator LD2 off indicates a leak. Rectify the leak and repeat the vacuum cycle. D Return switches D and B to position 0 and proceed to the next phase.
Figure 19
50637
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
It is possible that at the end of each recovery cycle the station has also recovered lubricant from the compressor, which must be discharged into the graduated container provided (1). D Slowly open valve V5 (Oil Discharge). D When all the oil has been discharged into the container, re---close valve V5.
327B-330B
D Quantify and note the quantity of oil discharged. D Dispose of the recovered oil correctly.
.
This oil cannot be used again.
The same quantity of oil as removed must be replaced in the system.
Figure 20
50638
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
RESTORING SYSTEM OIL
SECTION 14
If oil has been discharged from the system during the recovery and recycling phase, this must be replaced. D Take the meter provided filled with the correct or previously measured amount of oil for the system in question. D Connect the meter (1) to the lubricant input valve V3. D Open valve V3 and run system vacuum for a few seconds. D Open the valve on the meter container (1). The oil will be sucked into the system. D Close valve V3 and the valve on the recipient once the required quantity of oil has been taken in to the system.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
23
D Disconnect the meter (1) from injection valve V3 and replace the protective cap.
.
Keep oil containers sealed to prevent contamination. Remember that the oil is extremely sensitive to moisture: Never open oil injection valve V3 if the system is under positive pressure. Oil must only be injected with the system under negative pressure. The oil level should not drop below the suction pipe level (to prevent air entering the system).
Figure 21
50639
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
CHARGING THE SYSTEM WITH REFRIGERANT
Before recharging it is good practise to be familiar with a number of important rule: D Know how much refrigerant to use, (normally written on an adhesive label applied to the vehicle). D The charging cylinder has a minimum level check that prevents non---condensable gas entering the system. D For this reason the last 600 g of refrigerant it contains cannot be used. D Therefore, before charging, check that the cylinder contains a sufficient quantity for the charge (maximum usable quantity 3800g). D If the pressure in the charge cylinder displayed on the gauge (2) is greater than the required value visible on the charge cylinder glass ---10 bar max, discharge the excess pressure through valve (1) on the pressure gauge group until bringing it to the correct level, reading the value on the gauge.
.
For transferring refrigerant from an external tank to the charge cylinder and vice---versa, refer to the equipment manual.
327B-330B
.
Considering that the quantity of refrigerant is related to its pressure, to find the effective weight turn the outer part of the charge cylinder until the line of the diagram coincides with that of the level indicator. This gives the exact quantity of refrigerant contained in the cylinder (starting weight).
.
When calculating the weight of refrigerant, in addition to the 600 g not usable remember to increase the charge by circa 100 g (this is the weight of refrigerant contained in the two station---system connector pipes). The correct quantity of refrigerant to charge into the plant is therefore given by: 600 gr. + 100 gr. + (system capacity quantity). Before charging always check that the indicator on the â&#x20AC;&#x2122;consoleâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; indicates that the refrigerant is free of moisture. if this is the case, the indicator indicates an intense green colour, otherwise replace the station internal filters as instructed in the equipment manual.
Figure 22
50640
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
When the cylinder contains the required quantity for charging, (the two pipes must already be connected to the sockets on the system, since the vacuum operation has already been performed), proceed as follows: D Close the LOW valve keeping the HIGH and V1---V2valves open. D Turn switch B (Refrigerant Process) to position 1, indicator LB1 comes on. D Turn switch C (Charge) to position 2, the corresponding indicator LC2 will come on and refrigerant will flow from the station to the system.
.
If during charging the refrigerant level in the cylinder drops below the foreseen quantity, the system will stop and the minimum Level warning light will come on (L5).
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
25
D After charging 200 + 500 g of refrigerant, according to system dimensions, stop charging by turning switch C (charge) to position 0. D Using the electronic leak detector, search for any leaks in the system. D Complete charging the system until the pre---calculated residual weight in the cylinder has been reached. D (Residual weight = Total weight --- system capacity weight). D Complete the charge, turn switches C --- B and A to position 0 (A having been turned to create vacuum). D Re---check for any leaks. D Close the HIGH valve.
Figure 23
50641
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
26
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CHECKING SYSTEM PRESSURES
SECTION 14
After completing the charge, leave the pipes connected and perform the following check: D Close the LOW and HIGH valves, V1 and V2 open. D Switch on the engine, switch on the air conditioner and check on gauges M1 and M2 that pressures correspond, normally: low pressure no lower than 1 bar, high pressure 15 --- 18 bar, according to system characteristics.
327B-330B
OPERATIONS PRIOR TO REMOVING STATION FROM SYSTEM
Carry out the following operations, observing the previously described safety standards: D Check that all the valves (LOW --- HIGH --- V1 --- V2) are closed. D Disconnect the pipes from valves V1 and V2 and replace the caps on the system valves. D Re---check the system with the leak detector.
.
Normally, with the air ---conditioner operating, air should come out from the outlets at a temperature below 5° C after the time necessary for temperature to stabilise in the ducts.
Figure 24
50642
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 14
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
LEAK DETECTOR FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS WITH HFC R134a Figure 25
50643
The L---780A apparatus permits extremely precise detection of HFC R134a gas leaks from the system in the order of 3.3 g per year when set to maximum sensitivity. The instrument does not require calibration. The operator only has to set the required sensitivity. Any gas leak is indicated by an acoustic signal and an LED that blinks in proportion to the concentration of gas. The LED also serves as battery charge indicator (off = battery flat). Operating temperature is between 0 and 50° C. The instrument has a flexible probe to reach particularly inaccessible connections and parts. The two sensitivity levels are: D Low sensitivity = 16.5 g/year. D High sensitivity = 3.3 g/year.
.
Before making checks on the vehicle, wait for the engine to cool. Hot engine components may cause reading errors.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
27
28
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 14
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 15 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
CAB
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB
1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Reattachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ENGINE HOOD TIPPING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . 4
CAB TILTING CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Component layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Component layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CAB TIPPING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cab tipping hydraulic system components location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Bonnet position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Cab tipping hydraulic system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LOWER COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SIDE COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CAB REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SIDE PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
BODY ELEMENT REMOVAL-- REFITTING . . . . . . 18
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
ENGINE HOOD TIPPING CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . 18
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Detachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
DESCRIPTION The cab consists of a steel structure in compliance with ROPS/FOPS specifications, lined with glass fibre panels anchored to the frame through elastic buffers. The cab can be tilted by means of a dedicated hydraulic system.
CAB
3
The cab has an access door: the outer door handle (see arrow) has a lock and key. D to lock, turn the key clockwise; D to unlock, turn the key anticlockwise. Figure 3
Figure 1
269NS073
The following escape routes can be used to exit the vehicle in an emergency (see arrow): D door (to open); D front right window (break). Figure 4
276NS006T
When getting in and out of the vehicle always use the handles provided and the steps (see arrow) specifically designed to permit easy accessibility. 174NS08
Figure 2
To break the glass, use the tool (see arrow) under the window itself.
276NU023T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
ENGINE HOOD TIPPING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM This system has the purpose of ensuring the raising of the engine hood by means of a hydraulic cylinder. A second cylinder opens the closure hook. The system can be provided with electrical operation as well. Figure 5
292ANU024L
D position 1 = up D position 2 = down In either case, the operation occurs by manually selecting the up/down position on the tank. If there is a manual tipping pump, this is operated using the lever provided. Figure 6
314A015007R
If there is an electrical pump, the tipping occurs by pressing the button (see arrow).
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB
5
Component layout 1. Manual pump 2. Electric pump 212 3. Hood ylinder 4. Button 213 5. Hood latch Figure 7
314A015001R For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
Component layout 1. Manual pump 2. Electric pump 212 3. Hood ylinder 4. Button 213 5. Hood latch (a) Up/down switch (b) Overpressure valve (c) Controlled check valve Operation The operation occurs by manually selecting the position of the up/down switch (a) on the pump unit. In the case of electric pump 212 pressing button 213 causes closure of contactor GC consequently powering the pump, which remains in operation while the button is pressed.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB
7
Diagram Figure 8
292A015001R
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
CAB TIPPING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM The system has the purpose of ensuring the raising of the cab by means of a hydraulic cylinder. This occurs by manually selecting the position of the up/down switch on the tank and operating the lever provided. Figure 9
276NM006T
D position 1 = up D position 2 = down Cab tipping hydraulic system components location Figure 10
276C015003
1. 2.
Manual pump Cylinder For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB
9
Cab tipping hydraulic system diagram 1. Manual pump 2. Cylinder (a) Up/down switch (b) Overpressure valve (c) Controlled check valve Figure 11
276C015004
Operation The tipping occurs by manually selecting the position of the up/down switch (a) on the pump unit. The overpressure valve protects the circuit, opening in case of excessive pressure. The by---pass between the cylinder chambers has the purpose of discharging residual pressure in rest position.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 12
S269GN11
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT
CAB
11
Figure 14
Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D open the hood; D remove the side panels as instructed in the chapter on SIDE COVERS;
276NM046T
D position a suitable container, then disconnect the radiator hose (arrow) and discharge the engine coolant; Exhausted oil and fluids must be collected and disposed of according to standards in force. Figure 15
Figure 13
2691952
1. 2. 276NM009T
D turn the heater valve to maximum then open the filler cap on the expansion tank;
High pressure circuit valve Low pressure circuit valve
D Proceed to discharge the air conditioner system as instructed in the chapter on the AIR---CONDITIONING SYSTEM; The system must be discharged by specialist personnel using specific equipment. For these operations, refer to the procedures provided by the equipment manufacturer. Do not discharge R134a fluid into the atmosphere. Although its potential for damaging the ozone layer is zero, it may nevertheless contribute to global warming. Always use approved refrigerant recovery and recharging apparatus. Never mix different refrigerants in the same apparatus.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
CAB
SECTION 15
Figure 16
327B-330B
Figure 18
2691953
D remove the cab electrical connections cover and the duct interface support guard (arrow); Figure 17
276NM042T
D working from the inside of the cab, disconnect the protective cap (1) from the steering column cover; D unscrew the retaining screws (see arrow) fastening the steering column front cover; D remove the steering column front cover; Carefully disengage the plastic locking pawls when disassembling the cover. Figure 19
276NM043T
2691954
D open the retainer clamp and disconnect the electrical connections: --- white connector: cab/engine wiring interface (1); --- brown connector: cab/services wiring interface (2); --- yellow connector: cab/automatic transmission wiring interface (3); --- green connector: cab/heated rear view mirror wiring interface (if fitted) (4); To disconnect the connector, proceed as follows: A. lift the safety catch. B. pull away the connector.
D unscrew the locking bolt of the steering shaft and disconnect the joint (1) of the steering shaft from the column; D exit from the cab and close the door;
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
.
SECTION 15
CAB
13
The operations described below refer to the following figures.
Before detaching the hydraulic pipes prepare plugs suitable for closing the free ends.
Removal of the fastening clamps/clips is not described. These must be cut/removed and subsequently replaced to ensure correct fastening of the clamped components.
D arrange a suitable container then disconnect the brake pedal valve hydraulic lines: --- delivery P from pump (21); --- return B to tank (22); --- output T1 rear brakes (23); --- output T2 front brakes (24); --- output R2 to auxiliary brake valve (25); --- output R1 to relay valve (26); --- discharge N to tank (27).
D disconnect the following electrical connections: --- cab power supply (7); --- video camera power line (8); --- ground braid (9); D disconnect the following air connections: --- pneumatic seat (10); --- parking brake delivery (11) and return (12); D disconnect the following pipes: --- windscreen washer delivery (13); --- air---conditioner fluid delivery (14) and return (15); --- engine coolant delivery (16) and return (17); Coolant may leak during these operations. D remove the clamps from the air---conditioner condensation discharge pipes (18); D disconnect the automatic lubrication system delivery (19);
Coolant may leak during these operations. D disconnect the hydraulic pipelines: --- front brakes actuation pressure (28); --- rear brakes actuation pressure (29); D open the left mudguard; D remove the flexible pipe (30), the connector (31) and the exhaust silencer (32); D remove the left side cover; D remove the split pin and remove the articulation pin (25) from the cab lifting cylinder, collecting the shims; D unscrew the universal joint screws at the groove (33) and disconnect the steering column from the steering valve.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
Figure 20
2691955
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB
15
Figure 21
276C015005
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
Replacement
Figure 22
Figure 24
2691957
D apply the lifting ring bolts (arrow) to the cab using the threaded holes provided; D using suitable lifting gear apply the belts to the lifting ring bolts; Figure 23
274A15007
If the support bushings have been removed, position the new bushings during assembly with the axis shifted downward (see arrow). Proceed as follows to replace: Figure 25
276NM045T
2691958
D bring the belts into tension to discharge cab weight from the silent ---blocks, then remove the split pin and extract all four cab silent block pins (arrow), collecting the shims.
D use a suitable tool to support the steering shaft so as to introduce it into the floor passage (Fig. 3, see arrow) while lowering the cab; The operator must be positioned in order to move the tool while remaining outside the path of the cab.
Check that all connections and pipes are disconnected and all fastening clamps removed. D carefully lift the cab depositing it on a flat surface and propping it to ensure stability.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB
Figure 26
2691959
D vertically present the cab (suitably suspended) lowering it to a distance of circa 25 cm from the silent block pins; D remove the support tool from the steering column; D lower the cab until the holes of the silent ---block pins coincide with the relative holes in the cab brackets; Conclude as follows: D position the fixing pins of the cab supports and secure them with the relative elastic rings; D working from inside the cab, connect the steering shaft to the steering column; D tighten the locking bolt of the steering column to the prescribed tightening torque; steering column bolt 45 Nm (33 lb ft) D remount the steering column front cover and replace the protective cap; D connect the discharging terminal by tightening the retaining band; Bleed off the air in the hydraulic circuit as instructed in SECTION 10. Check engine coolant level as instructed in SECTION 4. Recharge the air ---conditioning system as instructed in SECTION 14.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
17
18
CAB
SECTION 15
BODY ELEMENT REMOVAL---REFITTING Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works.
ENGINE HOOD TIPPING CYLINDER Detachment Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D disconnect the battery---disconnect switch or disconnect the battery terminals in order to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit;
327B-330B
D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, as indicated in SECTION 1; D open the hood; D sling the hood to make sure it stays open; D empty the circuit tank of the hood tipping system using a suitable suction syringe; D arrange a suitably---sized container underneath, then disconnect the hydraulic connections (2) from the cylinder (1); Hydraulic fluid leakage may occur during these operations. D support the cylinder appropriately, remove the locking seeger (3), slip off both the pins (4) and remove the cylinder. Reattachment Proceed with the reattachment by following the detachment steps in the reverse order. Fill the tank with the fixed quantity of prescribed fluid. Perform some opening and closing cycles until the air is completely bled from the circuit: top up the tank if necessary.
Figure 27
2691965
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
CAB TILTING CYLINDER Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; Since the engine exhaust system is so near, this operation must be carried out after the end has been stopped for at least four hours. D open the left mudguard fender; D remove the left side guard; D empty the tipping circuit tank using a suitable suction syringe;
CAB
19
D arrange a suitably---sized container underneath, then disconnect the hydraulic connections (2) from the cab lifting cylinder (1); Hydraulic fluid leakage may occur during these operations. D remove the seeger (3) and slip off the upper trunnion (4) of the cylinder, recovering the shim washers; D support the cylinder appropriately, remove the seeger (5), recovering the shim washers, and slip the cylinder off the lower trunnion (6). Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Fill the tank with the specified quantity of fluid. Open and close several times to fully bleed the circuit: Top---up the level if necessary.
Figure 28
2691966
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
CAB
SECTION 15
HOOD Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D open the hood (1);
327B-330B
D harness the hood using hooks and cables suitable for the load and suitable lifting gear; D remove the snap ring (2), extract the pin (3) and disconnect the tilting cylinder (4) from the hood; D from both sides unscrew the screws (5) fastening the hinge (6) to the chassis and remove the hood. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Open and close several times and adjust the hinge until achieving correct closure.
Figure 29
276C015006
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
Bonnet position adjustment Proceed as follows:
CAB
21
Figure 32
Figure 30
314A015004R
314A015002R
D tip the engine bonnet; D loosen the stopper pad support fastening screws and lower the pads to prevent contact when the bonnet is closed;
D In case of need, add or remove a shim from between support and bonnet; D lift the bonnet and fasten the hook support fastening screws without moving it from its position; Figure 33
Figure 31
314A015005R 314A015003R
D loosen the closing hook support plate fastening screws; D close the bonnet and check that the lock clicks correctly.
D lift the stopper pads and fasten the support fastening screws so that the support can slide only with difficulty; D close the bonnet carefully.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
Figure 34
314A015006R
D Check on both sides that the gap between the floor and the edge of the bonnet is acceptable 1---2 cm, see arrow); D lift the bonnet; D if required, move the pad up as far as needed to correct the gap then tighten the stopper pad support fastening screws; D apply grease to the tip of the pads and then close the bonnet checking that the lock closes correctly and that the gap between floor and edge of the bonnet is acceptable; D open the bonnet and check that the grease mark is approximately the same on both sides. Correct the position of the pads; D close the bonnet.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 15
LOWER COVERS Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1;
CAB
23
D suitably support the cover: 1. front cover 2. central cover 3. rear cover D remove the bolts fastening the cover to the chassis and remove the cover. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Check that the cover closes correctly.
Figure 35
276NM055T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
CAB
SECTION 15
327B-330B
SIDE COVERS
SIDE PANELS
Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1; D open the mudguard from the side of the cover to replace; D suitably support the cover; D unscrew the screws and remove the cover.
Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D lock the articulation using the steering lock bar as instructed in SECTION 1;
Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Figure 36
.
The procedure is easier if the hood is open.
D unscrew the side panel securing screws (arrow); D raise the side panel to free the lower pins. Replacement For replacement, follow the removal instructions in reverse order. Figure 37
276NM057T
276NM054T
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
SERVICE MANUAL - SECTION 16 ARTICULATED DUMP TRUCKS 327B-330B
CHASSIS
Issued 09-2009 Print Number 84187913 Copyright 2008. CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS
CNH America L.L.C. reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer.
Revision History Issue
Issue Date
Applicable Machines
Print Namber
Remarks
First Edition
09-2009
327B-330B
84187913
ADT 327B - 330B FROM CHASSIS N. ZCNAD30TP8P457003
Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America L.L.C.
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 1
CONTENTS
Page
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chassis lateral bending admitted: a=3 mm (0.12 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Front chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Rear chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Articulation joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Finding chassis bending up and down . . . . . . . . . . 19 Vertical bending admitted: b=1 mm (0.04 in) . . . . 19 Finding chassis twist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Bending up and down admitted on chassis: c=1 mm (0.04 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
REPAIR OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ARTICULATION JOINT REMOVAL-- REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Articulation ball joint pre---load adjustment . . . . . . 12 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 TESTS AND CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Straightening the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 BODY DETACHMENT-- REATTACHMENT . . . . . . 21 Detachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Reattachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Adjustment of the body position proximity sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chassis lateral bending check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
2
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
DESCRIPTION
SECTION 16
The chassis is in two distinct parts (front chassis and rear chassis) joined by a central joint that consists of a large size fifth wheel for movements around the horizontal axis and two rotating pins on axial ball joints for movements around the vertical axis. This central articulation allows the front part of the vehicle to move in relation to the rear part around the horizontal axis (A) and around the vertical axis (B).
CHASSIS 3
Maximum relative angle : A. Movement around the horizontal axis: 15 (° ) without body heating 12 (° ) with body heating B. Movement around vertical axis: 45 (° )
Figure 1
A
276C016001
B
276C016002
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
4
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
Front chassis The front chassis consists of a complex structure that sustains the propulsion units (engine with its systems and automatic transmission), and upon which there are the mounting points for most of the hydraulic system units, the front suspension (1) and the cab (2). The central articulation joint is connected to the chassis by a flange (3). The fuel tank (4) and the hydraulic system tank (5) are bolted in the front part of the structure. Figure 2
276C016003
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 5
Rear chassis The rear chassis consists of two side members joined by a cross member that has the mounting points for the central articulation joint pins (1), the rear suspension rocker arm (2), dumping cylinders (3), steering cylinders (4) and the body (5). Figure 3
276D016004
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
6
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
Articulation joint The joint around the horizontal axis is obtained using a large diameter bearing (articulation joint with two rows of balls) with the outer ring flanged to the front of the chassis. On the inner ring of the thrust ball bearing a supporting ring is flanged that has two hubs --- lower and upper --- into which, by means of two axial ball joints , two pins are inserted --- lower and upper --- integral with the fork ---like ends of the rear part of the chassis. The lower pin ball joints are mounted in O arrangement: both outer rings fit against a fixed shoulder inside the hub. In this way the position between the support ring hub and the fork ---like end of the rear chassis are vertically restrained . The ball joints of the upper pin, which is also mounted in O arrangement, are axially free in relation to the support ring hub, to avoid that the heat expansion causes overload. Both pairs of ball joints are pre---loaded to ensure the chassis deflection stiffness required. Legend 1. articulation joint with two rows of balls 2. support ring with hubs 3. spacer 4. upper pin 5. upper axial ball joints pair 6. reaction washer 7. upper pin fastening screw 8. rear chassis 9. lower axial ball joints pair 10. lower pin 11. front chassis
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 7
Figure 4
2691905
2691906 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
8
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
TIGHTENING TORQUES Figure 5 Joint
Body
276C016005
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 9
ARTICULATION JOINT REMOVAL---REPLACEMENT Before carrying out any operation, check that all precautions have been taken and all aspects regarding safety of the personnel involved have been clarified. Read the related instructions given in SECTION 1 of this manual. If in doubt, speak to a more experienced person. Respect all general recommendations for correct execution of maintenance works. Removal Proceed as follows: D park the vehicle to a suitable flat and solid surface, remove the ignition key, engage the handbrake and place maintenance warning signs; D disengage the battery cut ---off switch or disconnect the battery leads to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit;
During the following operations the front part of the vehicle is disconnected from the rear part. Provide appropriate fixed support for the rear part of the chassis. Set up a forklift with suitable capacity under the front part of the chassis that is able to move forward at least 1 meter (30 ft). D disconnect all the centralized lubrication system fittings from the fifth wheel coupling; For more information on the lubrication points, see SECTION 13. D disconnect both steering control cylinders (2) from the articulation hinge (1) following the instructions in SECTION 10; D disconnect the drive shaft (3) between the automatic transmission and the fixed support by following the instructions in SECTION 7; Figure 6
276D016006
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
10
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
D suitably support the articulation hinge (1) then working from below unscrew the fastening screw (11) and remove the washer (12) the adjuster shim (13) and the pin (14); D remove the o---rings (18) and (19); D working from above unscrew the fastening screws (21) and remove the washer (22), the adjuster shim (23) and the pin (24); D remove the articulation hinge from the rear chassis (4); D remove the o---rings (28) and (29). Figure 7
T2691910
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 11
D carefully pull the front of the vehicle away to disengage the fifth wheel bearing; Do not pull away by more than 0.5 m (15 ft) to prevent damage to electrical and hydraulic connections. Keep the front part of the vehicle as horizontal as possible during this operation. Prepare a suitable support for moving the fifth wheel bearing. D unscrew the retaining screws (3) and disconnect the fifth wheel bearing (2) complete with articulation hinge (1) from the front chassis; D carefully put the fifth wheel bearing complete with articulation hinge down on a suitable work surface; D unscrew the fastening screw (4) and remove the fifth articulation joint (2) from articulation hinge (1); Figure 8
276D016008
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
12
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
Dismantling Proceed as follows: Figure 9
327B-330B
Articulation ball joint pre-- load adjustment Proceed as follows: D position the articulation hinge at the rear chassis attachments; Figure 11
2691911
D remove the O---rings (15) and the ball joints (16) and (17) from the lower seat of the articulation joint; Figure 10
2691913
D fit the O---rings (25) and the ball joints (26) and (27) and the shim (20) in the upper seat of the articulation joint; Shim (20) is placed between the two ball joints.
2691912
D remove the O---rings (25) and the ball joints (26) and (27) and the shim (20) from the upper seat of the articulation joint; For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 13
Figure 12
15 16
17 15 2691914
D fit the O---rings (15) and the ball joints (16) and (17) in the lower seat of the articulation joint; D working on the BOTTOM pin, assemble the pin (14), then measure the distance X between the edge of the pin (14) and the bearing surface of the washer (12) on the main frame. Figure 13
2691915A For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
14
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
D select, from the available replacements, the adjuster shim (13) with thickness S suitable for ensuring the specified bearing pre---load. S = X -- (0.02 ± 0.02) mm [(0.0008 ± 0.0008) in] where: S = shim thickness (13) X = distance between the edge of the pin (14) and the bearing surface of the washer (12) on the main frame 0.02 ± 0.02 mm (0.0008 ± 0.0008 in) = joints preload; D fit the adjuster shim (13), the O---rings (18) and (19), the washer (12) and tighten the screw (11) to the specified torque; Figure 14
T2691916
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 15
D working on the TOP pin, assemble the pin (24), then measure the distance X between the edge of the pin (24) and the bearing surface of the washer (22) on the main frame; Figure 15
2691917A
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
16
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
D select, from the available replacements, the adjuster shim (23) with thickness S suitable for ensuring the specified bearing pre---load: S = X -- (0.02 ± 0.02) mm (0.0008 ± 0.0008) in where: S = shim thickness (13) X = distance between the edge of the pin (24) and the bearing surface of the washer (22) on the main frame 0.02 ± 0.02 mm (0.0008 ± 0.0008 in) = joints preload; D fit the adjuster shim (23), the O---rings (28) and (29), the washer (22) and tighten the screw (21) to the specified torque; Figure 16
2691918
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 17
Replacement Proceed to the assembly of the hinge onto the chassis by performing the detachment steps in the reverse order. During the assembly of the articulation joint coupling it is necessary to position the external ring with the holes for the balls so that it matches the zone indicated with the letter â&#x20AC;?Sâ&#x20AC;? on the internal ring, as shown in the figure. Figure 17
276A016001
Tighten the retaining screws fastening the articulation joint coupling to the front chassis and articulation hinge to the prescribed tightening torque.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
18
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
TESTS AND CHECKS
The chassis transmits load weight and component weight to springs and axles. It absorbs the stresses produced during running, e.g. flexure, thrust and torsional force, tensile stress and vibrations. Chassis conditions are therefore essential for vehicle operation. Inspect the chassis at regular intervals to check that chassis and members thereof are free from cracks or damages, that bolts and rivets are well tightened especially in the areas submitted to stress, i.e. on leaf spring supports, on drive support, on cross members and tow hook. Every crack or distortion of the chassis seriously impairs chassis resistance to operating stress. The negative consequences often result in an axial displacement which has negative effects on the driving performances and causes earlier tyre wear. Any additional hole drilled inadequately in the connection points with other components can be the starting cause of serious damages to the chassis. This also applies to any interference with other parts or to pits due to rust, since these can increase notch sensitivity and favour crack formation. Proceed as follows: D Visually check the chassis controlling the alignment. If deformations can be seen, free the relevant part of the chassis for easier measurement.
.
327B-330B
Chassis lateral bending check Figure 18
1731830
Chassis lateral bending admitted: a=3 mm (0.12 in) Chassis side bending measurement procedure. Proceed as follows: Figure 19
Before checking, ascertain that all members that could, with their imperfections, influence the exact measurement readings (for example, tyre inflation pressure, weak or broken leaf springs and so forth) are efficient.
D Carefully check the entire chassis for cracks paying special attention to highly stressed coupling points between chassis cross members, brackets, leaf spring supports and chassis side members.
1731931
D To find the chassis lateral bending plumb the bearing surfaces starting from the two side members at intervals of approx. 1 m (3 ft). D The points obtained must be carefully marked on the floor.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
CHASSIS 19
D Use two shims (1) of the same thickness and of a size that permits a cord to be stretched throught the straight length of the lower or upper edge plate of the side member. D Measure the distance of the side member from the cord at 1 metre intervals. D Different cord distance shows position and entity of actual side member bending.
Figure 20
Finding chassis twist Figure 23 1731932
D In order to use the plumbed points, stretch a cord through the aligned points marked. D the points that are not aligned indicate the beginning and the entity of the actual strain. Finding chassis bending up and down Figure 21 1731835
Bending up and down admitted on chassis: c=1 mm (0.04 in) Slight torsion may only be detected with the cab and mechanical units removed Proceed as follows: Figure 24 1731833
Vertical bending admitted: b=1 mm (0.04 in) Method for measuring chassis bending downwards or upwards. Proceed as follows: Figure 22
1731836
1731934
D place the chassis on two stands; D fasten one side of the chassis to the stand with two clamps; D set the other side of the chassis on the knee of an â&#x20AC;?Lâ&#x20AC;? iron (1) in central position under the rear cross member; D place a ruler in cross position and a spirit level (2) on the ruler and check the readings. The same value should result at each check point, otherwise the chassis is deformed.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
20
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
REPAIR OPERATIONS
327B-330B
Figure 27
Precautions Figure 25
1731839
1731837
When welding, drilling, grinding or cutting near the pipes of the braking system, especially near plastic parts or electrical wiring, take adequate precautions to protect them, and if necessary, remove them. All parts of the chassis that are reconditioned are to be protected from oxidation and corrosion. Protection and painting operations are to be carried out accurately on all the parts involved, following any instructions, methods, and preventive precautions indicated by the paint manufacturers.
Straighten chassis lateral bending by wedge heating the upper and lower edge of the chassis length concerned. The wedge point must in the desired bending direction. If the base (a) of the two wedges is on the upper edge plate of the side member, the plate must also be heated, but last. Figure 28
Straightening the chassis Figure 26
1731840
Straighten the chassis up or down bending by wedge heating the upper edge plate of the side member. When bending down, the base of the wedge (a) is down, for up bending the base is up. The relevant lower or upper edge plate of the side member is to be heated last in the area where the wedge base lays. 1731838
The chassis reconditioning is obtained by wedge heating the part concerned with a torch. During this operation the metal must become cherry red coinciding with a temperature ranging between 600---680 ° C (1112---1256 ° F). The points already heated must not be re---heated. Let the heated points cool slowly without using water, compressed air or other cooling agents.
.
For greater information on chassis welding, see SECTION 1.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
BODY DETACHMENT ---REATTACHMENT Before performing any intervention, ensure that all precautions have been taken and all aspects clarified regarding the safety of personnel involved in the intervention. Read the relative instructions provided in SECTION 1 of this manual. In case of doubt, consult a more experienced person. Furthermore, respect all the general recommendations for a correct execution of the maintenance interventions. Detachment Proceed as follows: D bring the vehicle onto an appropriately solid flat surface, shut off the engine, remove the key from the ignition switch, engage the parking brake and affix the indication signs; D disconnect the battery---disconnect switch or disconnect the battery terminals in order to eliminate any risk of short ---circuit; D block the articulation by means of the steering lock bar, as indicated in SECTION 1; D sling the body using hooks and cables appropriate for the size of the load and a suitable lifting device; D attach the cylinders to the chassis with suitable belts to prevent them from falling forward; D unscrew the retaining screws (1) fastening the cylinder to the body, recovering the bushings and washers; D unscrew the fixing nuts (2) from both sides and remove the shells (3) complete with felt seals (5) and brasses (6); D carefully lift the body; D recover the disks (4), felt seals (5) and lower brasses (6) from both sides.
CHASSIS 21
Reattachment Thoroughly clean the spherical ends of the body articulation. Proceed as follows: D move the tipping cylinders to a nearly vertical position and extend them by lifting their upper part by about 30 cm (12 in) in order to facilitate coupling to the body; Use suitable spacers and/or belts to perform this operation. These devices must be removed after the cylinders have been coupled to the body. D sling the body using hooks and cables appropriate for the size of the load and a suitable lifting device; D lower the body to a horizontal position and connect the tipping cylinders; D remove the tipping cylinder stop devices; D assemble the felt seals (5) and lower brasses (6) from both sides; D lower the body and move it forward until the spherical ends rest in the lower brasses; D assemble the disks (4) and upper shells (3) complete with felt seals (5) and brasses (6) from both sides; D screw on the fixing nuts (2); D calibrate the proximity sensors following the instructions below. The calibration of the proximity sensors must be carried out even in the case of simple disconnection of the electric connector.
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
22
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
Figure 29
276C016006 For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
327B-330B
SECTION 16
Adjustment of the body position proximity sensors Proceed as follows: D check that both the metal limit stop cams (1 body at rest and 2 body raised) are intact and not distorted; D start the engine and check that the body is in rest position; D check that the sensor gap (3) is within the specified value; gap 4 ± 1 mm (0.16 ± 0.04 in) D in these conditions the sensor LED (see arrow) must be on; D otherwise, loosen the nut and locknut, adjust the axial position of the sensor and tighten the locknut;
CHASSIS 23
D loosen the nut and locknut and move the sensor (4) toward the inside to the bottom of the slot; D raise the body and bring it to the maximum required raised position; D move the sensor (4) toward the outside until the LED comes on (see arrow); D check that the gap is within the specified value; gap 4 ± 1 mm (0.16 ± 0.04 in) D otherwise adjust the axial position of the sensor, then tighten the locknut; D recheck the adjustment repeating the tipping cycle.
Figure 30
276E016001
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
24
CHASSIS
SECTION 16
327B-330B
Page left intentionally blank
For the personnel and vehicle safety, read carefully the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS contained in this handbook
©2009 CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved. Case is a registered trademark of CNH America LLC.